• Control Panel • All-night Power Supply, Non-all-night Power Supply

●● Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool • Main Controller PCB 1 side

• Main Controller PCB 2 side

F-6-135

Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the red frame (solid line) in the figure. Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the blue frame (dotted line).

• Rizer PCB / HDD

●● Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool

* SDRAM (M0) is an option.

Supply, and Non-all-night Power Supply, and notifies the result by the number of light-out and

This tool automatically checks the Control Panel, Main Controller PCB 1, All-night Power blinking interval of the lamp on the Control Panel. This tool is installed in the ROM of Main Controller PCB 1. Therefore, regardless the version of MN-CNT, this tool can be used even when an error occurs in child PCBs or when the Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool cannot be booted.

●● Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool This tool automatically checks the Main Controller PCB 1/2, child PCBs mounted on the Main Controller PCB 1/2, and HDD, and display the result on the Control Panel. This tool is installed in HDD. Therefore, this tool cannot be used when an error occurred in HDD or HDD cannot be accessed.

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview

6-99

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Layout Drawing

■■Layout Drawing

6-100

Main Controller PCB 1 SDRAM

Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis

BAT

Main controller PCB 1

Main controller PCB 2 F-6-137

Main Controller PCB 2 F-6-136

DDR2-SDRAM(M0)

J13

DDR2-SDRAM(M1)

DDR2-SDRAM(P)

BAT F-6-138

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Layout Drawing

6-100

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Basic Flowchart

■■Basic Flowchart

6-101

●● Basic Check Items 1. Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF.

Basic Check Items

2. Check if the Power Supply Plug is disconnected.

Check all of the items shown below.

3. Check if the Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB 1 and Control Panel is disconnected. 4. Check if the Connection Main Controller PCB 1 and Main Controller PCB 2 definitely?

Turn O N the m ain power s witc h.

5. Check if the Connection An All-night Power Supply. Change Non-all-night Power Supply if not recovered.

Does the Pow er Supply LED on the Control Panel light up?

No

Ex ec ute bas ic c hec k.

Yes

No

Is the Control Panel dis play ed?

Ex ec ute Boot Sy s tem Error Diagnos is Tool.

Yes

No

Does the main body boot c orrec tly ?

Ex ec ute Controller Sy s tem Error Diagnos is Tool.

Yes Take an ac tion appropriate f or the error. F-6-139

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Basic Flowchart

6-101

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Boot System Error Diagnosis

6-102

■■Operation Operations of the two diagnosis tools are explained below. Use each tool according to the following purposes. • When the main body does not boot (the Control Panel is not displayed): Execute Boot System Error Diagnosis. • When an error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB 1/2 or child PCBs mounted on the Main Controller PCB 1/2: Execute Controller System Error Diagnosis.

■■Boot System Error Diagnosis ●● Boot Method

Main Power Supply Switch

1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the Control Panel Energy Saver Switch. Note: At the time of high-speed start ON, you cannot use it.

F-6-141

2) Right after the Main Power Supply Lamp lights up once, it lights out instantly, and diagnosis

Perform OFF/ON of the breaker once.

starts. (When the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out, you can release your finger from the Control Panel Switch.)

Upright Control Panel

Control Panel (Flat) F-6-142

●● Diagnosis Time Diagnosis is completed in approx. 1 minuites. After the Main Power Supply Lamp repeatedly lights out 4 times, it lights up and the diagnosis is completed. After completion of the diagnosis, this machine executes normal boot sequence. F-6-140

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Boot System Error Diagnosis

6-102

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Boot System Error Diagnosis

6-103

●● Error Diagnosis The error locations are identified according to the following table.

F-6-143

The Main Power Supply Lamp repeats high-speed blinking after completion of a check in which an error is detected. (See *1.) For example, when an error is detected in Check 2, the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out twice and repeats high-speed blinking (ON/OFF in 0.3 seconds interval). When an error is detected, be sure to count the number of times the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out. For detailed results, see “Error Diagnosis

Y

”.

F-6-144

Board

*1: When an error is detected, there is a possibility that the Main Power Supply Lamp may not perform high-speed blinking but perform other operation (continuous light-up, light-out). In this case, remove and then install the Main Controller PCB 1. If the error is not resolved, execute the remedy of the Check No. which is not completed normally. (For details, see “Error Diagnosis”.) *2: Although diagnosis time for Check 3, and Check 4 is longer than that of other Checks, it is

Board

correct operation. F-6-145

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Boot System Error Diagnosis

6-103

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis

6-104

■■Controller System Error Diagnosis ●● Boot Method 1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys ‘2’ and ‘4’ simultaneously.

F-6-148

F-6-146

NOTE: When this tool is not installed correctly, the following regular screen is displayed. In this case, perform the following remedy. Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch again, and execute step 1 and 2 shown above. If this tool still does not boot, it means that BCT is deleted. So, install BCT. If BCT is not installed correctly, “--.--” is displayed in Service Mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>BCT) in the main body.

Main Power Supply Switch F-6-147

2) Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen appears on the Control Panel.

F-6-149

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis

6-104

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis

●● Diagnosis Time

6-105



Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes.

The error locations are identified according to the following table.

The result is displayed on the Control Panel.

Test Name



F-6-150

Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the name of the test where an error was detected is indicated.

Description

SN-1 IA-DDR2 Check an error SDRAM between the Main Controller PCB 1 and SDRAM on the Main Controller PCB 1 SN-2 SM BUS Check an IA DIMM1 SM bus error in SDRAM (outside) on the Main Controller PCB 1 SN-4 SM BUS Check an SM IA Clock Gen bus error in Clock Generator on the Main Controller PCB 1 SN-5 SM BUS Check an SM SOC DIMM1 bus error in the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2

Assumed Error Location Main Controller PCB 1 SDRAM on Main Controller PCB 1

-

Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 PCB 1. SDRAM (outside) on Main Controller PCB 1

-

Main Controller PCB 1

1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.

-

Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 SDRAM on Main Controller PCB 2

1. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB 1, and the Main Controller PCB 2. 2. Check the installation of SDRAM (M1) on the Main Controller PCB 2. 3. Replace SDRAM (M1) on the Main Controller PCB 2. 4. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. 5. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. 1. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB 1, and the Main Controller PCB 2. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.

F-6-151

The following screen is an enlarged view of the detailed information indicated above.

[no] means that optional PCBs are not mounted.

SN-6 PCI Config Maestro

Check a PCI bus error in the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2

SN-7 PCI Config LANC

Check a LAN Main Controller chip error on the PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 1

When [no] is displayed although an optional PCB is mounted, it means that an error has been occurring. [NG] means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard. NOTE: Once the tool is activated, this machine reboots after approx. 2 minutes. After completion of the diagnosis, be sure to turn OFF and then ON the main power. By turning the power OFF, the operation of this tool completes.

6

Error Code

1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.

Explanation of the detailed error information is described.

Remedy

Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 SDRAM on Main Controller PCB 2

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis

6-105

6 Test Name SN-8 PCI Config PCIBridge

SN-9 CPLD

SN-10 LANC SPI

SN-11 RTC CHECK

SN-12 TPM

SN-13 DDR2 SDRAM

Description Check a PCI bus error between the Main Controller PCB 1 Check failure of CPLD chip on the Main Controller PCB 1 Check failure of LANC SPI on the Main Controller PCB 1 Check failure of RTC on the Main Controller PCB 1 Check failure of the TPM PCB on the Main Controller PCB 1 * TPM PCB is not installed in products for China. So, the diagnosis results NG. Check an error between SDRAMs on the Main Controller PCB 2

Assumed Error Location

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis

Remedy

Error Code

Main Controller PCB 1

1. Check the installation between the Main Controller PCB 1. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.

-

Main Controller PCB 1

1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.

-

Main Controller PCB 1

1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.

-

Test Name SN-15 P-DDR2 SDRAM

SN-16 GOR(R)DDR2 SDRAM SN-17 S-SDRAM

Main Controller PCB 1

1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.

-

Main Controller PCB 1 TPM PCB

1. Check the installation of the TPM PCB. 2. Replace the TPM PCB. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.

E746

SN-18 GORDDR2 SDRAM

SN-19 GU BUS Main Controller PCB 2 SDRAM (M0) on Main Controller PCB 2

SN-14 FLASH Check failure Main Controller ROM of CPU ROM PCB 2 (IC60) on the Main Controller PCB 2

6

1. Check the installation of SDRAM (M0) on the Main Controller PCB 2. 2. Replace SDRAM (M0) on the Main Controller PCB 2. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.

Description Check an error between the Main Controller PCB 2 and SDRAM (P) on the Main Controller PCB 2 Check failure of Rchip SDRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2 Check failure of Schip SDRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2 Check failure of Ochip SDRAM on the Open I/F PCB

Check a GUBUS error on the Main Controller PCB 2

Assumed Error Location

6-106 Remedy

Error Code

Main Controller PCB 2 SDRAM (P) Open I/F PCB Bypass board

1. Check the connection of the bypass board /Open I/F board. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.

E747 E748

Main Controller PCB 2 Open I/F PCB Bypass board

1. Check the connection of the bypass board /Open I/F board. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.

E747 E748

Main Controller PCB 2

1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.

E747 E748 E732

Main Controller PCB 2 Open I/F PCB

1. Check the installation of the Open I/F PCB. 2. Replace the Open I/F PCB. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.

E747 E748

Main Controller PCB 2 Open I/F PCB Bypass PCB

SN-20 FRAM Check failure Main Controller between the PCB 2 Main Controller Memory PCB PCB 2 and the Memory PCB

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis

Supplementary Information: If the Open I/F PCB is not installed, [no] is displayed for the diagnosis result. 1. Check the installation of the E747 Open I/F PCB or the Bypass I/F E748 PCB on the Main Controller PCB 2. 2. Replace the Open I/F PCB or the Bypass I/F PCB on the Main Controller PCB 2. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. 1. Check the installation of E355 the Memory PCB on the Main Controller PCB 2. 2. Replace the Memory PCB on the Main Controller PCB 2. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.

6-106

6 Test Name

Description

SN-21 SRAM Check failure of SDRAM and battery exhaustion on the Main Controller PCB 2 SN-22 JUST Check ROM ROM READ READ on the Main Controller PCB 2 SN-23 HDD Check an HDD I/F error

SN-24 S-SRI

Check an SRI bus

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Restrictions

Assumed Error Location

Remedy

Error Code

Main Controller PCB 2

1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.

E246 E350 E355

Main Controller PCB 2

1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.

-

Main Controller PCB 2 HDD Cable HDD

1. Check the cable connection of the HDD. 2. Check the connection between the Main Controller PCB 2 and the Main Controller PCB 1. 3. Replace the HDD. 1. Check the Z-FIFO board connection 2. Replace the Z-FIFO board 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.

Main Controller PCB 2 Z-FIFO board

6-107

T-6-16

■■Restrictions ●● • If an error cannot be resolved by executing remedy according to the error diagnosis table described above, consider boot failure of the main power supply and take appropriate actions.

●● • Regarding the diagnosis for the test names (SN-1, 2, 7, 15, 21, 24), if an error occurs in the diagnosis under the test names, this diagnosis tool will not boot. • When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB 1/2, the following judgment results are displayed. Standard PCB: [NG] Optional PCB: [OK] However, [no] is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs.

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Restrictions

6-107

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2

6-108

Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs

■■ Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2

You may be able to determine the remedies against Main Controller-related troubles by checking the lighting status of LEDs on the PCB.

Check the lighting of the LED on the Main Controller PCB 2

■■Location of LEDs

LED4 is lit.

No Yes

LED1 Green

LED 4 Red

Normal operation

LED9 Green LED16 Green

Main Controller PCB 1

- Check for any blown-out fuse of the Relay Board - Check whether the connector (on the Main Controller PCB 2 side) is securely connected

F-6-153

Riser PCB

Main Controller PCB 2 F-6-152

■■ Preconditions Check whether the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2 are properly inserted. Check whether the connectors are securely connected. LEDs are not lit when the contaction is poor. (Power-on is not possible) When the LED of the Control Panel main power is not lit, check the connection of cables (such as UI Cable).

6

6-108

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1

6-109

■■Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1 • Main Controller PCB 1 - LED9, LED16 • Flash PCB - LED1

Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1

LED16 is lit.

Yes

No

LED9 is lit.

Yes LED1 of the Flash PCB is lit.

Yes

No

No

Normal startup

Yes

No

- Check for any blown-out fuse of the Relay Board - Check whether the connector (on the Main Controller PCB 1 side) is securely connected - Replace the Main Controller PCB

Determine the faulty PCB by the error code (E602-0001) after removing the Main Controller PCB 2 and turning ON the power. - No error code is displayed => Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 - Error code (E602-0001) is displayed => Replace the Main Controller PCB 2

- Check for poor connection of the FLASH PCB connector - Replace the FLASH PCB / Main Controller PCB 1 - In the case of startup failure (error code cannot be displayed) although the LED is lit, replace the FLASH PCB

Replace the FLASH PCB

Normal operation F-6-154

6

6-109

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Overview > Function Overview

Debug log

6-110

●● Types of Logs There are continuous logs, event logs, and manual logs.

Scope of Application

Type

■■Purpose • When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to determine the cause. • This is intended to improve efficiency in log collection when a trouble occurs.

Overview ■■Function Overview Debug log is an integrated log for failure analysis that gathers logs prepared by the software modules in the device for debug purpose.

Collecting method

Number/size of logs collected Continuous The behaviors of the Main Controller, 800 KB x 200 log Reader Controller, and DC Controller files are recorded on the HDD. (160 MB) Event log Automatically recorded in accordance 800 KB x 10 files with the conditions specified in (80 MB) DEBUG-1.

Manual log Perform the following procedure. 1. Hold down the [Counter] button (10 seconds or longer). 2. Press 1 on the numeric keypad. 3. Press 2 on the numeric keypad. 4. Press 3 on the numeric keypad.

Setting n/a Service mode Lev2: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DEBUG-1 > 3 (default) 3: Exception + E code + Reboot Make movement same as 3 even if you change setting of it. n/a

In the case of a field failure that is hard to be reproduced, this measure is intended to improve efficiency in failure analysis and reduce the time for failure support by collecting debug log at the user site (which was created immediately after the failure) and sending it to the R&D. When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of firmware debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to determine the cause.

T-6-17

●● Conditions of Log Collection • Logs can be collected on a PCB-by-PCB basis. (SUBLOG, SUBLOG_RCON, SUBLOG_ DCON) • As for continuous logs, only SUBLOG is collected. • When restriction has occurred, SUBLOG_RCON and SUBLOG_DCON are collected.

●● Effective Instances of Collecting Debug Log • The error occurs only at the customer site and cannot be reproduced by the sales company or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up.

Location

File name

Automatic collection Continuous log

Event log

Yes

Yes

When restriction has occurred No Yes

SUBLOG_RCON No

Yes

Yes

Yes

SUBLOG_DCON No

Yes

Yes

Yes

• When the error frequency is low. • When the error is suspected of links with firmware rather than a mechanical/electrical failure. * Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and

Main Controller SUBLOG

the error can be reproduced by the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge

Reader Controller DC Controller

of quality follow-up.

SUBLOG04_0014_0515204388.Z

Manual collection Manual log

When an event has occurred

T-6-18

●● Collection of Logs Connect SST or a USB memory device,

Layer number mmddhhmm Sequence number

and select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK to collect logs. F-6-155

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Overview > Function Overview

6-110

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)

■■Description of Log to be Collected

6-111

■■Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)

As for SUBLOG, up to 200 logs can be stored on the HDD. As for SUBLOG_RCON and SUBLOG_DCON, up to 10 logs can be stored on the HDD. Logs are stored from the latest one, and the latest file is always stored. Logs earlier than those logs are overwritten and deleted from the oldest log.

NOTE: When the data is sent to the USB memory device: USB memory where the system software for this machine has been registered using the SST.

When collecting logs from the machine, the log file in the machine is deleted. Previous time Delete

1

Delete Delete

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

This time 10 F-6-156

Collecting System Information ■■Collection Destination To retrieve debug log to an external location from the device, use a USB memory device, FTP server or SST (Ver. 4.63 or later).

●● Collection Method Retrieve debug log from the machine by any of the following methods. • Make the machine recognize the USB memory device. Select the following in service mode Lev1: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; and click OK. • Use SST on a PC with the network cable connected to transfer the debug log.

1) Lev1 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK Connect the USB memory device to the machine. 2) [5] Execute [BACKUP].

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] ------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) [4]: Format HDD [5]: Backup [7]: Clear downloaded files [8]: download Menu 2 [9]: Other Menu /[5] has been selected. Execute?/ - (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys -

• Transfer the debug log to a USB memory device that stores the system of the machine.

F-6-157

3) [1] Execute [Sublog].

●● File Name of Sublog Whether the file is new or old can be judged by the year, month, day, hour, and minute.

[[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]

ーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーー

[1]: Sublog [4]: ServicePrint [5]: Netcap [6]: SRAM(HDD) [7]: SRAM(USB) [C]: Return to Main Menu F-6-158

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)

6-111

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:

●● When the data is sent to the USB memory device A folder of the year, month, day, hour, and minute is created in the USB memory device. The log file is saved in the folder.

6-112

■■Uploading Data by SST The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST (Ver. 4.63 or later) running to the machine.

Example: Folder 201205241821

■■Preconditions: In addition to continuous logs, obtained manual logs (holding down the counter + 1, 2, and 3 keys) and event logs (DEBUG-1) are stored in the machine. A PC where SST is running is connected to the machine, and the machine is in download mode. Note: Executing a log collection by SST deletes logs in the machine.

1. Start SST (Ver. 4.63 or later) and select iRC5051 from Model List. Press the Start button.

F-6-160

F-6-159

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:

6-112

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:

2. Press the Upload Data button.

6-113

4. Press the "Save" button.

F-6-161

3. Select the data to be uploaded, then click [Start] button.

F-6-163

5. Check that the data storage is completed and click the "OK" button.

When there is no log in the machine, it results in blank option items for "data to upload". When the file name is longer than the frame, it displays that it is a log in the comment column just below. It is displayed as "log" in the figure below. Note: The log is not stored when You cancel it before pushing the Start button. It is deleted from the main body.

F-6-164

6. Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC. In the initial setting: Windows(C:) > ServData > iAxxxx(Model) > JWH00003(Serial number) > 20120524192934-Log(yymmddhhmm)

F-6-162

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:

6-113

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:

6-114

F-6-165

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:

6-114

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection

Network Packet Capture

6-115

●● Overall flow 1) Enable network capture

■■Overview

2) Start the network capture function

The network capture function is an embedded function of the machine.The network data sent to and received from the machine can be collected (captured) without using any special equipment. Until now, in the case of network failures that could not be solved at the first visit, the service technician collected packet at the second visit to solve it. By providing this function, investigation to determine the cause is available before the second visit to take some measures. Also, service technicians can reproduce the symptoms of network failure and collect network packet to bring it back to the office. The network capture data can be collected using SST/USB memory. There is no need to prepare dedicated equipments (PC, HUB, cable, packet capture software, etc.) that have been needed before.

3) Overwrite function 4) Encryption function 5) Start/stop network capture 6) Stop the network capture function 7) Disable network capture

■■Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection ●● Enable network capture To enable this function, the following 2 steps need to be executed. • Enabling the license of network capture • Enabling user mode > Network > Store Network Packet Log Because this function is able to acquire the customer information such as print data, it is not

The following effects can be expected thanks to the embedded feature. • The packet in customer environment can be collected by remote operation. • Packet collection can be continued when the symptom is not reproduced during the visit.

standard function.You make it valid as free license option after obtaining permission from the customer.Then it displays "OFF/ON" in the user mode, you obtain permission from the customer again and let the customer change it to ON.

• For network failures on iR-ADV collaboration (a function to communicate between machines across a network), packet collection for both sides becomes easy.

Caution: The network capture function may fail to collect a part of packet in a high-loaded network environment. The network capture function of the machine is more prone to failures in collecting packet than when using a PC to do so. When collecting packet due to trouble of print data, etc., a case is assumed in which it is impossible to judge whether it is a failure in the print data or a failure in collecting packet. To check whether packet is failed to be collected by the network capture function of the machine, there may be a case where user is requested to collect packet using a PC.

F-6-166

Changing it to "ON" in user mode, it is displayed in Service Mode.

●●

●●

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection

6-115

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection

●● Start the network capture function

6-116

The following shows the machine behavior when the HDD space reaches full.

Select the following: Service Mode(level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON > "1".

When the overwriting setting is ON • The oldest packet file is deleted. The oldest file is determined by the last update time of the file (not by the date and time attached to the file). • When the HDD space reaches full during packet collection, the oldest file is deleted to continue collecting packet data to the currently-stored file. • CAPSTATE of capturing continues to be "RUNNING". When the overwriting setting is OFF • Capturing is stopped. • CAPSTATE of capturing becomes "HDDFULL". Note that STT-STP remains as start state (1). Capturing is started again by changing the value from STT-STP (0) to STT-STP (1). • If the HDDFULL state is cleared when starting capturing again, capturing is started. • CAPSTATE of capturing becomes "RUNNING".

F-6-167

*1: ON (enabled) The capture function is available.

• If the HDDFULL state is not cleared, starting data capturing results in an error. • CAPSTATE of capturing remains as "HDDFULL".

●● Overwrite function

• When a command of stopping data capturing is given during the "HDDFULL" state,

Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > OVERWRIT > 1

CAPSTATE of capturing remains as "STOP".

●● Encryption function Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > ENCDATA >2. 0: Data is encrypted at data extraction (factory setting value). 1: Data is not encrypted at data extraction. 2: Two types of files (one in encrypted format and another in clear text format) are extracted at data extraction.

F-6-168

Note: When the HDD space becomes full after starting the capture, the oldest file is deleted and the captured data continues to be saved; therefore, it is necessary to set "1: Overwrite" in advance.

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection

6-116

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection

6-117

●● Start/stop network capture 1) Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > STT-STP > 1. 2) To stop capturing, set "0".

F-6-169

Note: When collecting data using SST, the above service mode setting is not reflected and both files in encrypted format and clear text format are always collected.

F-6-170

"RUNNING" is displayed for the item CAPSTATE during packet collection. “STOP” is displayed at the time of shipment or at completion of packet collection, and When the encryption setting is enabled, the extension of the extracted packet data is XXX.

“HDDFULL” is displayed when 1GB of data (the upper limit for packet collection) is collected.

can. When the encryption setting is disabled, the extension of the extracted packet data is XXX. cap. This setting applies only when using USB memory for data extraction.

●● Stop the network capture function Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON > 0.

This setting is ignored when using SST for data collection because both files in encrypted format and clear text format are extracted.

F-6-171

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection

6-117

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Other functions

6-118

■■Other functions

Caution: Be sure to stop the network capture function after collecting network packet capture data.

●● Payload discard function Payload is customer data. Data is collected including payload by default. To prevent leak of customers' information or large volume of network packet, the network packet can be collected while payload is discarded.

0: OFF (disabled) The capture function is not available. At the time of shipment. 1: ON (enabled) The capture function is available.

Service Mode(Level 2) Copier>Test>NET-CAP>PAYLOAD 0: Payload is not discarded (factory setting value)

●● Disable network capture

1: Payload is discarded

1) Select the following: Service Mode(Lv2) Copier > Option > LCNS-TR > ST-NCAPT > 0, and click OK. 2) Select the following in user mode: Network > Store Network Packet Log > OFF.

F-6-173

F-6-172

●● Filter function

Caution: Be sure to disable the network capture function once analysis of network failure is complete. It is required to disable and transfer the license; however, the further step, LMS license transfer, is not required.

Filtering setting is available. Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > SIMPFILT 0: Filtering is performed. All the data is collected (factory default setting). 1: Only the packet data where the machine's MAC address is included in the destination address or sender's address of Ether header is captured.

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Other functions

6-118

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > SST Network Packet File Collection

6-119

●● Delete files Delete all the network capture data stored on the HDD. Select Service Mode(level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > FILE-CLR, and then click the OK button.

F-6-174

●● Collection function at startup Setting this service mode automatically starts collecting packet data if the condition of network capture operation is satisfied when the main power of the host machine is turned ON. Completion of packet data collection needs to be executed manually. Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > PONSTART

F-6-176

■■SST Network Packet File Collection ●● Overview

0: Data is not automatically collected at startup (factory setting value).

• Collect the network capture data that has been stored in the machine using SST.

1: Data is automatically collected at startup.

• It is possible to use files in clear text format for in-house analysis by using free software, such as Wireshark. Note that only Canon Inc. can analyze encrypted files. In the case of failure in solving problems, send encrypted files to Canon Inc. • When using SST for collecting data, the setting of encryption function in Service Mode(level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > ENCDATA is disabled and files in clear text format/encrypted format can be always collected.

●● Preparation PC with SST (V4.62 or later) registered (The system software of the corresponding model must have been registered with SST.)

●● Overflow F-6-175

1) Connect the machine to SST 2) Upload data 3) Collect the network capture data

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > SST Network Packet File Collection

6-119

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > SST Network Packet File Collection

●● Starting the Machine and SST 1) Start the machine using the 2 and 8 keys, and connect SST in Single mode. 2) Click the "Start" button.

6-120

Note: When using SST to collect data, you can select both files in encrypted format and clear text format.

3) Select a model to connect and "Single", check the network settings, and then click the "Start" button.

●● Collect the network capture data 1) In the case of the default installation destination for SST, click the folder with the name of the serial number of the machine stored in C drive > ServData > target model (e.g.: iAC5255) on the PC. 2) Three types of files are collected; a file in clear text format (xxx.cap), a file in encrypted format (xxx.can), and a list of collected network capture files (ufset.txt).

F-6-179

F-6-177

●● Upload data 1) Click the [Upload Data] button on SST. 2) When a list of packet files stored in the device appears, select target data files to upload.

F-6-180

3) Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format (xxx.cap).

Note: When the analysis work fails, send the file in encrypted format (xxx.can) to Canon Inc.

F-6-178

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > SST Network Packet File Collection

6-120

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > USB Network Packet File Collection

■■USB Network Packet File Collection

6-121

●● Select Backup 1) When Download Menu (USB) appears, select [5]: Backup.

●● Overview • Collect the network capture data that has been stored in the machine using a USB memory. • It is possible to use files in clear text format for in-house analysis by using free software, such as Wireshark. Note that only Canon Inc. can analyze encrypted files. In the case of failure in solving problems, send encrypted files to Canon Inc.

●● Preparation USB memory Store in advance the system software of the machine to connect to. For the system software, it is fine to store just one of the system software of the machine (LANG, etc). There is no need to store the full set.

●● Overall flow 1) Enter download mode

F-6-182

2) Select Backup

2) Select - (OK): 0.

3) Transfer the network capture data

3) When Backup Menu (USB) appears, select [5]: Netcap.

4) Collect the network capture data

●● Enter Download Mode 1) Connect the USB memory to the USB port. 2) Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD, and then press [OK]. 3) When the machine recognizes the USB memory, download Menu (USB) appears on the Control Panel.

F-6-183

4) Select - (OK): 0.

F-6-181

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > USB Network Packet File Collection

6-121

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > USB Network Packet File Collection

6-122

●● Transfer the network capture data 1) Store all the network capture data stored in the machine on the USB memory.

F-6-184

2) When “---Please hit any key---” appears, press any key. 3) Press the [C] key to return to the download Menu (HDD). 4) Press the [Reset] key to shut down the machine.

●● Collect the network capture data 1) Check that the network capture files are stored on the USB memory. 2) Two types of files are collected; a file in clear text format (xxx.cap) and a file in encrypted format (xxx.can).

F-6-185

3) Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format (xxx.cap). Note: When the analysis work fails, send the file in encrypted format (xxx.can) to Canon Inc.

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > USB Network Packet File Collection

6-122

7

Error Code ■ View ■Over ■ Code ■Error Code ■ ■Jam ■ Code ■Alarm

7

Error Code

7

Error Code > Over View > Outline > Measures for E747

Over View

7-2

■■Location Code When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code.

Outline

In the jam display screen, the “P” row corresponds to the pickup position code.

■■Outline This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the product. These are classified into 3 codes as follows. Code type Error code Jam code Alarm code

Explanation

Reference

This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine. This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine. This code is displayed when a function of the machine is malfunctioned.

p. 7-3 p. 7-127 p. 7-143

• Error code notation

T-7-1

An error code is shown in 7-digit [E000XXX] on the display on the operation panel. However, [000] in 2 to 4 digit is not used. Thus, an error code is described as [EXXX] using 5 to 7 digit in the service manual. (e.g.: E012 = E000012)

■■Location Code

Pickup position

Pickup position code

At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup operation (at SEND, Inbox, etc.) Right deck Left deck Cassette 3 Cassette4 Multi-purpose Tray Side Paper Deck Duplex (At duplex printing, jam occurs after paper passes through the Duplex Paper Sensor (PS24).) Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1 Upper deck Middle deck Lower deck Document Insertion Unit Upper tray Lower tray Document Insertion / Folding Unit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 F0 11 12 13 2A 2B 28 T-7-3

Error code and jam code include the location information.

■■Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON

Location information is displayed as 2-digit numbers as follows.

• Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Address Book, Forwarding Settings,

In the jam display screen, the “L” row corresponds to the location code. DISPLAY>JAM

DISPLAY>ERR

Settings/Registration (Preferences), Adjustment/Maintenance, Function Settings, Set

imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075 PRO/9065 PRO

00

Color Image Reader Unit - A1(Reader+DADF) Multi Color Image Reader - A1(Reader+DADF) POD Deck Light - A1 Paper Deck Unit - A1 Multi Deck - A1 Buffer Path Unit - F1 Insertion Unit -H1 Insertion Unit -J1 Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1 Professional Puncher - C1 / Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1 Paper Folding Unit - G1 External 2(2/3,2/4,4)-hole Puncher - A1 Saddle Finisher - A1/Staple Finisher - A1 Saddle Finisher - B1/Staple Finisher - B1 Inner Trimmer - A1

01

Main Controller = 00 Printer engine = 05 04

• When clearing MN-CON while any login application other than Default Authentication is,

00 00 00 00 02 02 02 02

05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05

02 02 02 02 02

05 05 05 05 05

Device

ask user to back up the data and get approval for this operation. error such as not displayed login screen occurred. In this case, access SMS once and switch login application to Default Authentication to recover to the normal status.

■■Points to Note When Clearing HDD As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX, E611-0000), HDD partition is selected and the target partition may be cleared. When clearing partition, be sure to check which data will be deleted by referring Detail of HDD partition and explain to the user before starting work.

■■Measures for E747 There are many detail codes in E747. Since these detail codes are for R&D use, remedy to be performed in the field is the same, except for E747-1201 and E747-FF01. Because of that, errors other than the 2 errors mentioned above are described as E747-XXXX, and common T-7-2

7

Destination, Management Settings, TPM Settings, etc. Before execution of this operation,

remedy is described.

Error Code > Over View > Outline > Measures for E747

7-2

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Error Code Error Code Details

7-3

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E001

-0001

-05

E001

-0002

-05

■■E000 to E015 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E000

-0001

-05

Items

Description

Title Fixing film temperature rise is insufficient at power ON. Description Fixing main thermistor (THM1-1) temperature does not of detection reach 50 degrees Celsius within 20 seconds after startup of fixing belt temperature control. Measures Check if the detection temperature of the thermistor is risen in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-xx). A. In case that either one of the thermistor detection temperature is risen A-1. Replace the fixing film unit A-2. Faulty drawer connector -> Clean the drawer connector or replace the fixing drawer cable B. In case that neither of them are not risen B-1. Check the connection of the fixing thermistor (to see if the connection of the drawer is faulty, the connector is physically removed or disconnected) -> replace the fixing belt unit B-2. Check the connection of the IH power connector (to see if the connector is physically removed or disconnected, or the cable is caught) B-3. Replace the IH power unit B-4. Replace the DC controller PCB NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Abnormal temperature rise of fixing main thermistor Fixing main thermistor (THM1) sensed an abnormal high temperature. (ASIC detection) Check the detection temperature of the fixing main thermistor (THM1) in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UC). A. In case that the detection temperature is 250 degC A-1. The cable of the fixing main thermistor is caught -> replace the fixing belt unit B. In case that the detection temperature is other than 250 degC B-1. Replace the DC controller PCB NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR Title Abnormal temperature rise of fixing subthermistor 1 (THM3) Description Fixing subthermistor 1 (THM3) sensed an abnormal high of detection temperature. (ASIC detection) Measures Check the detection temperature of the fixing sub thermistor 1 (THM3) in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UE). A. In case that the detection temperature is 250 degC A-1. The cable of the fixing sub thermistor 1 is caught -> replace the fixing film unit B. In case that the detection temperature is other than 250 degC B-1. Location of the fixing main thermistor is inappropriate -> replace the fixing film unit B-2. Replace the DC controller PCB NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR

7-3

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E001

-0003

-05

Items Title Description of detection Measures

E001

-0011

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Description Abnormal temperature rise of fixing subthermistor 2 (THM4) Fixing subthermistor 2 (THM4) sensed an abnormal high temperature. (ASIC detection) Check the detection temperature of the fixing sub thermistor 2 (THM4) in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UE2). A. In case that the detection temperature is 250 degC A-1. The cable of the fixing sub thermistor 2 is caught ->replace the fixing film unit B. In case that the detection temperature is other than 250 degC B-1. Location of the fixing main thermistor is inappropriate -> replace the fixing film unit B-2. Replace the DC controller PCB NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR Fixing main thermistor abnormal temperature rise Fixing main thermistor (THM1) detected abnormal high temperature. (software detection) Check the detection temperature of the fixing main thermistor (THM1) in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UC). A. In case that the detection temperature is 250 degC A-1. The cable of the fixing main thermistor is caught -> replace the fixing film unit B. In case that the detection temperature is other than 250 degC B-1. Replace the DC controller PCB NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR

7

7-4

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E001

-0012

-05

Items Title Description of detection Measures

E001

-0013

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Description Fixing sub thermistor 1 (THM3) abnormal temperature rise Fixing sub thermistor 1 (THM3) detected abnormal high temperature. (software detection) Check the detection temperature of the fixing sub thermistor 1 (THM3) in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UE). A. In case that the detection temperature is 250 degC A-1. The cable of the fixing sub thermistor 1 is caught -> replace the fixing film unit B. In case that the detection temperature is other than 250 degC B-1. Location of the fixing main thermistor is inappropriate -> replace the fixing film unit B-2. Replace the DC controller PCB NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR Fixing sub thermistor 2 (THM4) abnormal temperature rise Fixing sub thermistor 2 (THM4) detected abnormal high temperature. (software detection) Check the detection temperature of the fixing sub thermistor 2 (THM4) in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UE2). A. In case that the detection temperature is 250 degC A-1. The cable of the fixing sub thermistor 2 is caught -> replace the fixing film unit B. In case that the detection temperature is other than 250 degC B-1. Location of the fixing main thermistor is inappropriate -> replace the fixing film unit B-2. Replace the DC controller PCB NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR

7-4

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E001

-0014

-05

Items Title Description of detection Remedy

E001

-0015

-05

Title Description of detection Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Description Abnormal temperature rise of Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor (THM5) The Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor (THM5) detected abnormal high temperature (software detection). Check the detected temperature of the Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor (THM5) in service mode (COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-UE). A. When the detected temperature was 260 deg C or higher A-1. Cable of the Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor is caught. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit. B. When the detected temperature was lower than 260 deg C B-1. The Fixing Main Thermistor is not securely attached. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit. B-2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. NOTE: After performing the remedy work above, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR. Abnormal Temperature Rise of Fixing Edge Front Thermistor (THM2) The Fixing Edge Front Thermistor (THM2) detected abnormal high temperature (software detection). Check the detected temperature of the Fixing Edge Front Thermistor (THM2) in service mode (COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-UE2) A. When the detected temperature was 260 deg C or higher A-1. Cable of the Fixing Edge Front Thermistor is caught. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit. B. When the detected temperature was lower than 260 deg C B-1. The Fixing Main Thermistor is not securely attached. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit. B-2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. NOTE: After performing the remedy work above, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR.

7

7-5

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E003

-0001

-05

E004

-0201

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Items

Description

Title Fixing belt abnormally low temperature Description After standby, fixing main thermistor (THM1) detected of detection less or equal to 110 degrees Celsius in succession for 1 second. Measures 1. Check the rear louver. (If the rear of the machine is close to the wall, temperature of the power supply area may rise) 2. Check the detection temperature of the thermistor in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIXxx). A. In case that either one of the thermistor detection temperature is risen A-1. Check the fixing belt unit (to see if the location of the thermistor is inappropriate or the thermistor failure) -> replace the fixing film unit A-2. Faulty drawer connector -> clean the drawer connector or replace the fixing drawer cable B. In case that neither of them are not risen B-1. Check the connection of the fixing thermistor (to see if the connection of the drawer is faulty, the connector is physically removed or disconnected) -> replace the fixing film unit B-2. Check the connection of the IH power connector (to see if the connector is physically removed or disconnected, or the cable is caught) B-3. Replace the IH power unit B-4. Replace the DC controller PCB NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR Title Fixing belt temperature difference error 1 Description Difference of detected temperature between the fixing of detection subthermistor 2 (THM4) and the fixing subthermistor 1 (THM3) is bigger than the rated value. Measures 1. Fixing main /sub thermistor (THM1-1/2/3) connector disconnetion (pinching wire, broken wire) -> replace the fixing film unit 2. Check the rotation of the fixing motor (to see if the connector is physically removed or disconnected) -> replace the fixing motor or the harness 3. Faulty drawer connector -> clean the drawer connector or replace the fixing drawer cable 4. Replace the DC controller PCB

7-5

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E004

-0202

E004

E004

E004

-0203

-0214

-0215

-05

-05

-05

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Description

Title Fixing belt temperature difference error 2 Description Difference of detected temperature between the fixing of detection main thermistor (THM1) and the fixing subthermistor 1 (THM3) are bigger than the rated value. Measures 1. Fixing main /sub thermistor (THM1-1/2/3) connector disconnetion (pinching wire, broken wire) -> replace the fixing belt unit 2. Check the rotation of the fixing motor (to see if the connector is physically removed or disconnected) -> replace the fixing motor or the harness 3. Faulty drawer connector -> clean the drawer connector or replace the fixing drawer cable 4. Replace the DC controller PCB Title Fixing belt temperature difference error 3 Description Difference of detected temperature between the fixing of detection main thermistor (THM1) and the fixing subthermistor 2 (THM1) are bigger than the rated value. Measures 1. Fixing main /sub thermistor (THM1-1/2/3) connector disconnetion (pinching wire, broken wire) -> replace the fixing film unit 2. Check the rotation of the fixing motor (to see if the connector is physically removed or disconnected) -> replace the fixing motor or the harness 3. Faulty drawer connector -> clean the drawer connector or replace the fixing drawer cable 4. Replace the DC controller PCB Title Fixing Film temperature difference error 4 Description Temperature difference between the Fixing Edge Front of detection Thermistor (THM2) and the Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor (THM5) is 50 deg C or greater. Remedy 1. Replace the Fixing Film Unit. 2. Replace the Fixing Motor/Harness. 3. Clean the Drawer Connector/Replace the Fixing Drawer Harness. 4. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Title Fixing Film displacement error Description Temperature difference between the Fixing Edge Front of detection Thermistor (THM2) and the Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor (THM5) was 20 deg C or greater when checking operation of the Fixing Film. Remedy Replace the Fixing Film Unit.

7

7-6

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E004

-0301

-05

E004

-0401

-05

E004

-0501

-05

E004

-0502

-05

E004

-0702

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Items

Description

Title IH overcurrent detection error Description Detected an overcurrent on IH power supply board. of detection Measures 1. Faulty fixing film unit -> replace the fixing belt unit 2. Faulty fixing IH unit -> replace the fixing IH unit 3. Faulty IH power PCB -> replace the IH power PCB Title 12V failure error Description Detected abnormality on the 12V power supply line. of detection Measures 1. Check the Fixing Film -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit when it is damaged. 2. Check connection of the Fixing Thermoswitch (TP2) (to see if Thermoswitch is being turned OFF/open circuit). -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit. 3. Replace the Relay PCB. 4. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 5. Replace the IH power supply. NOTE: After performing the remedy work above, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR. Title Connection error of Fixing Main Thermistor or Fixing Edge Front Thermistor Description Connection detection signal for the Fixing Main of detection Thermistor or Fixing Edge Front Thermistor could not be detected. Measures 1. Check connection of the Fixing Film Unit. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit when it is damaged. 2. Failure in Drawer Connector. -> Clean the Drawer Connector/Replace the Fixing Drawer Harness. Title Connection error of Fixing Sub Thermistor 1/2 or Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor Description Connection detection signal for Fixing Sub Thermistor 1/2 of detection or Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor could not be detected. Measures 1. Check connection of the Fixing Film Unit. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit when it is damaged. 2. Failure in Drawer Connector. -> Clean the Drawer Connector/Replace the Fixing Drawer Harness. Title IH power supply relay abnormality Description Voltage shows abnormal value even with the relay-off of detection Measures IH power supply replacement

7-6

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E005

-0000

-05

E006

-0001

-05

E006

-0002

-05

E008

-0002

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Description

Title Fixing Web level absence error Description The count exceeded 60,000 (using A4/Letter size of detection or smaller paper) after the Fixing Web Level Sensor detected absence of the web. Remedy 1. Check the Fixing Web. 2. When the Fixing Web is replaced, execute the following to clear the counter value: COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-WEB1 to 4, or COPIER> COUNTER>MISC>FX-WEB. Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Check the Sensor Harness. 4. Replace the Web Level Sensor (PS102). 5. Replace the Torsion Spring. 6. Replace the Level Detection Arm. 7. Replace the Web Sensor Support Plate. Title Fixing Feed drawer connection error Description Fixing Feed drawer connector is abnormal (Sensor of detection cannot detect) Measures 1. Fixing Feed drawer connector has connection failure 2. Wire harness failure 3. Sensor failure Title Fixing Feed drawer connection error Description Fixing feed knob of fixing drawer is abnormal (Sensor of detection cannot detect) Measures 1. Fixing feed knob of fixing drawer has connection failure 2. Wire harness failure 3. Sensor failure Title Fixing Film Unit life detection error Description Total rotation time of the Fixing Film reached 5206 hours. of detection Measures 1. Life of the Fixing Film Unit -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit. 2. When the Fixing Film Unit is replaced, turn OFF and then ON the main power after executing the following: COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-BLT-U.

7

7-7

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E008

-0003

-05

E009

-0500

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Fixing Film Unit life detection error Count of the number of fed sheets through the Fixing Film reached approx. 360,000 sheets (A4/LTR). 1. Life of the Fixing Film Unit -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit. 2. When the Fixing Film Unit is replaced, turn OFF and then ON the main power after executing the following: COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-BLT-U. NOTE: Only applicable under the following condition: OPTION > IMG-FIX > FX-ERRSW = 1. The print counter setting value can be changed by selecting the following: OPTION > IMG-FIX > FX-U-ERR. Title Pressure unit pressure release HP search error Description Home position for engagement/disengagement of the of detection Fixing Assembly could not be detected. Measures 1. Check connectors of the Fixing Motor (M48), Pressure Roller HP Sensor (PS73) and Semi-pressure Sensor (PS102). 2. Check harness of the corresponding parts. -> Replace the harness when it is disconnected. 3. Check the Fixing Pressure Release Drive System Gear. -> Replace the gear when it is damaged. 4. Replace the Pressure Roller HP Sensor (PS73) and Semi-pressure Sensor (PS102). 5. Replace the Fixing Motor (M48). 6. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. 7. Replace the DC Controller PCB.

7-7

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0101

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Description

Title

A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 signal error (Controller Version 2x.xx or later) B. Drum motor (Y) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx) Description A. This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection of detection PCB (Y) 1/2 signal error is detected. B. The lock signal for the drum motor (Y) (M21) cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) • Drum (unit) not inserted • Drum unit failure • Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.) Measures A: A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 (UN20/21). (Sensor side) Sensor side: J7316, J7317, J8019 A-2. Check that the Encoder Wheel of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 is properly installed. A-3. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). PCB side: J1902 A-4. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 and Encoder Wheel. A-5. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2. A-6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB. B: B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (Y) (M21) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7300/J8019, PCB side: J1902 B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed detection PCB (Y) (UN20/21) and the drum ITB driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7316/J7317/J8019, PCB side: J1902 B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (Y). B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB. NOTE: In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed detection PCB.

7

7-8

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0102

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

-05

Items

Description

Title

A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1 signal error (Controller Version 2x.xx or later) B. Drum motor (Y) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx) Description A. The signal is not detected for 80msec or more. of detection B. Lock signal of Drum motor (Y) (M21) cannot be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) • Drum (unit) not inserted • Drum unit failure • Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.) Measures A: A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1 (UN20). Sensor side: J7316, J8016PCB side:J1910 A-2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1 to clean. A-3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1. A-4. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s disconnected.) A-5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). B: B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (Y) (M21) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7300/J8019, PCB side: J1920 B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed detection PCB (Y) (UN20/21) and the drum ITB driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7316/J7317/J8016, PCB side: J1910 B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (Y). B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB. NOTE: In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed detection PCB.

7-8

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0103

-05

E012

-0104

-05

E012

-0105

-05

E012

-0106

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Description

Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2 signal error Description The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more. of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2 (UN21). Sensor side: J7317, J8019PCB side:J1902 2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2 to clean. 3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2. 4. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s disconnected.) 5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) Encoder Wheel error Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection PCB of detection (Y) Encoder Wheel error is detected. Measures 1. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 (UN20/21) and Encoder Wheel. 2. Replace the Encoder Wheel. 3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2. 4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Title Drum Motor (Y) control error Description Unstable rotation of the Drum Motor (Y) of detection Measures 1. Check if the Drum Unit (Y) is installed. 2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 (UN20/21) and Encoder Wheel. 3. Remove and then reinstall the Process Unit (Bk). 4. Replace the Drum Unit (Y). 5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Title Drum Motor (Y) rotation error Description The Drum Motor (Y) is not rotating at the specified speed, of detection or it is stopped. Measures 1. Check the connection between the Drum Motor and Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Sensor side: J7300, J8019PCB side: J1902 2. Check the ITB. Check to see if the ITB is displaced or ripped. Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced. 3. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade. 4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).

7

7-9

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0201

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

-05

Items

Description

Title

A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 signal error (Controller Version 2x.xx or later) B. Drum motor (M) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx) Description A. This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection of detection PCB (M) 1/2 signal error is detected. B. The lock signal for the drum motor (M) (M23) cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) • Drum (unit) not inserted • Drum unit failure • Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.) Measures A: A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 (UN22/23). (Sensor side) Sensor side: J7314, J7315, J8020 A-2. Check that the Encoder Wheel of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 is properly installed. A-3. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). PCB side: J1910 A-4. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 and Encoder Wheel. A-5. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2. A-6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB. B: B-1. Check the connection of the drum motor (M) (M23). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7302/J8020, PCB side: J1902 B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed detection PCB (M) (UN22/23) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7314/J7315/J8020, PCB side: J1902 B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (M). B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB. NOTE: In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed detection PCB.

7-9

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0202

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Description

Title

A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1 signal error (Controller Version 2x.xx or later) B. Drum motor (M) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx) Description A. The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more. of detection B. Lock signal of Drum motor (M) (M23) cannot be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) • Drum (unit) not inserted • Drum unit failure • Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.) Measures A: A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1 (UN22). Sensor side: J7314, J8020PCB side:J1902 A-2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1 to clean. A-4. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1. A-5. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s disconnected.) A-6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). B: B-1. Check the connection of the drum motor (M) (M23). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7302/J8020, PCB side: J1902 B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed detection PCB (M) (UN22/23) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7314/J7315/J8020, PCB side: J1902 B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (M). B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB. NOTE: In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed detection PCB.

7

7-10

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0203

-05

E012

-0204

-05

E012

-0205

-05

E012

-0206

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Items

Description

Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 2 signal error Description The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more. of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 2 (UN23). Sensor side: J7315, J8020PCB side:J1902 2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 2 to clean. 4. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 2. 5. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s disconnected.) 6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) Encoder Wheel error Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection PCB of detection (M) Encoder Wheel error is detected. Measures 1. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 (UN22/23) and Encoder Wheel. 2. Replace the Encoder Wheel. 3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2. 4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Title Drum Motor (M) control error Description Unstable rotation of the Drum Motor (M) of detection Measures 1. Check if the Drum Unit (M) is installed. 2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 (UN22/23) and Encoder Wheel. 3. Remove and then reinstall the Process Unit (Bk). 4. Replace the Drum Unit (M). 5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Title Drum Motor (M) rotation error Description The Drum Motor (M) is not rotating at the specified of detection speed, or it is stopped. Measures 1. Check the connection between the Drum Motor and Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Sensor side: J7302, J8020PCB side: J1902 2. Check the ITB. Check to see if the ITB is displaced or ripped. Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced. 3. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade. 4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB.

7-10

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0301

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Description

Title

A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2 signal error (Controller Version 2x.xx or later) B. Drum motor (C) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx) Description A. This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection of detection PCB (C) 1/2 signal error is detected. B. The lock signal for the drum motor (C) (M25) cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) • Drum (unit) not inserted • Drum unit failure • Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.) Measures A: A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2 (UN24/25). (Sensor side) Sensor side: J7312, J7313, J8021 A-2. Check that the Encoder Wheel of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2 is properly installed. A-3. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). PCB side: J1910 A-4. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2 to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/ and Encoder Wheel. A-5. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2. A-6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB. B: B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (C) (M25) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7304/J8021, PCB side: J1904 B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed detection PCB (C) (UN24/23) and the drum ITB driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7312/J7313/J8021, PCB side: J1904 B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (C). B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB. NOTE: In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed detection PCB.

7

7-11

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0302

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

-05

Items

Description

Title

A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1 signal error (Controller Version 2x.xx or later) B. Drum motor (C) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx) Description A. The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more. of detection B. Lock signal of Drum motor (C) (M25) cannot be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) • Drum (unit) not inserted • Drum unit failure • Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.) Measures A: A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1 (UN24). Sensor side: J7312, J7313, J8021PCB side:J1904 A-2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1 to clean. A-3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1. A-4. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s disconnected.) A-5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). B: B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (C) (M25) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7304/J8021, PCB side: J1904 B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed detection PCB (C) (UN24/23) and the drum ITB driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7312/J7313/J8021, PCB side: J1904 B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (C). B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB. NOTE: In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed detection PCB.

7-11

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0303

-05

E012

-0304

-05

E012

-0305

-05

E012

-0306

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Description

Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2 signal error Description The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more. of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2 (UN25). Sensor side: J7313, J8021PCB side:J1904 2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2 to clean. 3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2. 4. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s disconnected.) 5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) Encoder Wheel error Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection PCB of detection (C) Encoder Wheel error is detected. Measures 1. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2 to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2 (UN24/25) and Encoder Wheel. 2. Replace the Encoder Wheel. 3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2. 4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Title Drum Motor (C) control error Description Unstable rotation of the Drum Motor (C) of detection Measures 1. Check if the Drum Unit (C) is installed. 2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2 to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2 (UN24/25) and Encoder Wheel. 3. Remove and then reinstall the Process Unit (Bk). 4. Replace the Drum Unit (C). 5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Title Drum Motor (C) rotation error Description The Drum Motor (C) is not rotating at the specified speed, of detection or it is stopped. Measures 1. Check the connection between the Drum Motor and Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Sensor side: J7304, J8021PCB side: J1904 2. Check the ITB. Check to see if the ITB is displaced or ripped. Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced. 3. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade. 4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB.

7

7-12

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0401

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

-05

Items

Description

Title

A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 signal error (Controller Version 2x.xx or later) B. Drum motor (Bk) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx) Description A. This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection of detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 signal error is detected. B. The lock signal for the drum motor (Bk) (M19) cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) • Drum (unit) not inserted • Drum unit failure • Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.) Measures A: A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 (UN18/19). (Sensor side) Sensor side: J7310, J7311 A-2. Check that the Encoder Wheel of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 is properly installed. A-3. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). PCB side: J1905 A-4. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 and Encoder Wheel. A-5. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2. A-6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB. B: B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (Bk) (M19) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7306, PCB side: J1903 B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed detection PCB (Bk) (UN18/19) and the drum ITB driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7310/J7311, PCB side: J1905 B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (Bk). B-4. Replace the drum cleaning unit and the drum unit. (Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB. NOTE: In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed detection PCB.

7-12

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0402

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Description

Title

A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1 signal error (Controller Version 2x.xx or later) B. Drum motor (Bk) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx) Description A. The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more. of detection B. Lock signal of Drum motor (Bk) (M19) cannot be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) • Drum (unit) not inserted • Drum unit failure • Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.) Measures A: A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1 (UN18). Sensor side: J7310PCB side: J1905 A-2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1 to clean. A-3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1. A-4. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1 (UN18) is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s disconnected.) A-5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). B: B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (Bk) (M19) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7306, PCB side: J1903 B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed detection PCB (Bk) (UN18/19) and the drum ITB driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7310/J7311, PCB side: J1905 B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (Bk). B-4. Replace the drum cleaning unit and the drum unit. (Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB. NOTE: In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed detection PCB.

7

7-13

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0403

-05

E012

-0404

-05

E012

-0405

-05

E012

-0406

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Items

Description

Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2 signal error Description The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more. of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2 (UN19). Sensor side: J7311PCB side: J1905 2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2 to clean. 4. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2. 5. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s disconnected.) 6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) Encoder Wheel error Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection PCB of detection (Bk) Encoder Wheel error is detected. Measures 1. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 (UN18/19) and Encoder Wheel. 2. Replace the Encoder Wheel. 3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2. 4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Title Drum Motor (Bk) control error Description Unstable rotation of the Drum Motor (Bk) of detection Measures 1. Check if the Drum Unit (Bk) is installed. 2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 (UN18/19) and Encoder Wheel. 3. Remove and then reinstall the Process Unit (Bk). 4. Replace the Drum Unit (Bk). 5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Title Drum Motor (Bk) rotation error Description The Drum Motor (Bk) is not rotating at the specified of detection speed, or it is stopped. Measures 1. Check the connection between the Drum Motor and Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Sensor side: J7306PCB side: J1903 2. Check the ITB. Check to see if the ITB is displaced or ripped. Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced. 3. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade. 4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB.

7-13

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0501

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Description

Title

A. ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17) signal error B. ITB drive motor error Description A. This error occurs when the ITB Drive Roller Speed of detection Detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17)signal error is detected. B. The lock signal for the ITB drive motor (M3) cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) • Drum (unit) Y/M/C/K not inserted • Peeling of the ITB cleaning blade • Encoder Y/M/C/K failure (This occurs in rare cases.)

7

7-14

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0501

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

-05

Items Measures

Description A: A-1. Check the connection of the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17). (Sensor side) Sensor side: J7318, J7319, J8047 A-2. Check that the Encoder Wheel of the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2 is properly installed. A-3. Check the connection of the DC controller PCB. PCB side: J1912 A-4. Manually turn the Rotor of the ITB Drive Motor (M3) clockwise and check that the ITB Rotation Sensor Encoder Wheel rotates. If the Encoder Wheel does not rotate, replace the Drum Drive Unit. A-5. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2 to clean the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2 and Encoder Wheel. A-6. Replace the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2. A-7. Replace the DC controller PCB. B: B-1. Check the connection between the ITB driver motor (M3) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7518, J8011,J8050, PCB side: J1242 B-2. Check the connection of the ITB drive roller speed detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7318, J7319, J8047, J8050 PCB side: J1242 B-3. Reinstall the 4 color drum units. (If the drum unit is not installed properly, more load is applied to ITB drive.) B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) There may be cause in each color. B-5. Replace the DC controller PCB. NOTE: In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed detection PCB.

7-14

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0502

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Description

Title

A. ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1 signal error B. ITB drive motor error Description A. The signal is not detected for 80msec or more. of detection B. Lock signal of ITB drive motor (M3) cannot be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) • Drum (unit) Y/M/C/K not inserted • Peeling of the ITB cleaning blade • Encoder Y/M/C/K failure (This occurs in rare cases.) Measures A: A-1. Check the connection of the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1 (UN16). Sensor side: J7318, J8047PCB side: J1242 A-2. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1 to clean. A-3. Replace the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1. A-4. Check if the Harness of the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s disconnected.) A-5. Replace the DC controller PCB. B: B-1. Check the connection between the ITB driver motor (M3) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7518, J8050 PCB side: J1242 B-2. Check the connection of the ITB drive roller speed detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7318, J7319, J8047, J8050 PCB side: J1242 B-3. Reinstall the 4 color drum units. (If the drum unit is not installed properly, more load is applied to ITB drive.) B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) There may be cause in each color. B-5. Replace the DC controller PCB. NOTE: In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed detection PCB.

7

7-15

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-0503

-05

E012

-0504

-05

E012

-0505

-05

E012

-0506

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Items

Description

Title ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2 signal error Description The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more. of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2 (UN17). Sensor side:J7319, J8047PCB side: J1242 2. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2 to clean. 3. Replace the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2. 4. Check if the Harness of the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s disconnected.) 5. Replace the DC controller PCB. Title ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB Encoder Wheel error Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection PCB of detection (Bk) Encoder Wheel error is detected. Measures 1. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB to clean the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17) and Encoder Wheel. 2. Replace the Encoder Wheel. 3. Replace the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2. 4. Replace the DC controller PCB. Title ITB Drive Motor control error Description Unstable rotation of the ITB Drive Motor of detection Measures 1. Check if the ITB (Unit) is installed. 2. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB to clean the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17) and Encoder Wheel. 3. Remove and then reinstall the Process Unit (Bk). 4. Replace the ITB Unit. 5. Replace the DC controller PCB. Title ITB Drive Motor rotation error Description ITB Drive Motor is not rotating at the specified speed, or of detection it is stopped. Measures 1. Check the connection between the ITB Drive Motor and DC controller PCB. Sensor side: J7518, J8047, J8050PCB side: J1912, J8011 2. Check the ITB. Check to see if the ITB is displaced or ripped. Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced. 3. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade. 4. Replace the DC controller PCB.

7-15

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E012

-2000

-05

E012

-3000

-05

E012

-3001

-05

E012

-3002

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Description

Title

Rotation error of Drum Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) (M21/23/25/19) and ITB Drive Motor Description Simultaneous rotation error in all Motors of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB. PCB side: J1902 to J1904 2. Check the connection of the Relay PCB. PCB side: J1805 3. Check the Interlock Switch. 4. Check if the Harness of the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6) is faulty. Title Error in Drum Speed Detection PCB (UN18 to 25) of all colors Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection of detection PCB (UN18 to 25) error is detected for all colors simultaneously. Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB. PCB side: J1902, J1904, J1905 2. Check if the Harness of the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6) is faulty. 3. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB. Title Control error of Drum Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) (M21/23/25/19) Description This error occurs when the Drum Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) of detection (M21/23/25/19) control error is detected for all colors simultaneously. Measures 1. Check the Process Unit (to see if the Connector is physically removed). 2. Check the Drum Unit (to see if the Connector is physically removed). Title Rotation error of Drum Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) (M21/23/25/19) Description All of the Drum Motors (Y/M/C/Bk) (M21/23/25/19) are of detection not rotating at the specified speed, or they are stopped. Measures Check the connector of the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). PCB side: J1902 to J1904

7

7-16

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E013

-0001

-05

E013

-0003

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

Items

Description

Title Waste toner feed screw lock detection error Description When the waste toner pipe screw lock SW (SW10) of detection detected the lock status for 500 msec (100 msec x 5 times) consecutively Measures • Pull out the Waste Toner Container. If it is full of toner, go to Step 1, 2, and 5. • If the Waste Toner Container is not full of toner, go to Step 1, 2, and 4. • If the Waste Toner Container is not full and the Waste Toner Pipe is not clogged with toner, go to Step 3 and 4. 1. Remove the toner in the Waste Toner Pipe. 2. Replace the Waste Toner Full Sensor and the Waste Toner Container. 3. Replace the Waste Toner Screw Lock Detection Switch (SW10). 4. Replace the Waste Toner Drive Unit. 5. Reduce the value of timing setting for waste toner full alert display (COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> WT-FL-LM) by 1. Title Waste toner full sensor error Description Output of the waste toner full sensor cannot be detected. of detection Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart and check the power output before the machine detects the error to determine whether the cause of the error is power supply. If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. If there is power output, factor other than power supply can be the cause of the error. 1. Check the connection between the Waste Toner Full Sensor (TS9) and thePickup feed drive PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)), Wire caught by parts) Sensor side: J8981, PCB side: J898, J1470 2. Check the connection of the 24 V Power Supply connector. 3. Replace the Waste Toner Full Sensor. 4. Replace the 24 V Power Supply.

7-16

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E014

-0001

E014

E015

Items

Description

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

-0002

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

-0001

-05

Title Description of detection

Fixing motor error (At start-up) Locking was not released within 3 seconds after the fixing motor was turned on. Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 38 V Power Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart and check the power output before the machine detects the error to determine whether the cause of the error is power supply. If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. If there is power output, factor other than power supply can be the cause of the error. 1. Check the fixing unit drive gear -> replace the gear 2. Replace the fixing motor (M48) 3. Replace the pckup feed drive PCB. 4. Check the connection of the 38 V Power Supply connector. 5. Replace the 38 V Power Supply. 6. Replace the DC controller PCB Fixing motor error (At regular rotation) Locking was released for 1 second consecutively after the fixing motor (M48) was locked. 1. Check the fixing unit drive gear -> replace the gear 2. Replace the fixing motor (M48) 3. Replace the pickup feed drive PCB. 4. Replace the DC controller PCB Decurler incoming amount control error 1 Change of the decurler HP sensor 1 (PS88) cannot be detected even when a specified period of time elapsed after driving of the decurler incoming amount adjustment motor 1 (M50) started. 1. Failure of the decurler HP sensor 1 (PS88) 2. Failure of the decurler incoming amount adjustment motor 1 (M50) 3. Failure of the buffer driver PCB (UN150) Decurler incoming amount control error 2 Change of the decurler HP sensor 2 (PS89) cannot be detected even when a specified period of time elapsed after driving of the decurler incoming amount adjustment motor 2 (M53) started. 1. Failure of the decurler HP sensor 2 (PS89) 2. Failure of the decurler incoming amount adjustment motor 2 (M53) 3. Failure of the buffer driver PCB (UN150)

Measures

E015

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

-0002

-05

Title Description of detection

Measures

7-17

T-7-4

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015

7-17

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

■■E020 Detailed Occurance E code code area E020

E020

-0080

-0081

-05

-05

Items

Description

Title ITB base light intensity upper limit error Description When executing ITB base correction, the average value of detection of P wave light intensity detected/calculated is more than 900. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 2. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB(UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 3. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 4. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB cleaning blade at the same time. 5. Replace the patch sensor unit. Title ITB base light intensity lower limit error Description When executing ITB base correction, the average value of detection of P wave light intensity detected/calculated is less than 300. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 2. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB. (UN6. (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 3. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 4. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB cleaning blade at the same time. 5. Replace the patch sensor unit.

7

7-18

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0082

-05

E020

-0120

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Items

Description

Title Patch sensor light intensity correction error Description When executing correction of patch sensor light intensity, of detection the P wave output is not more than 500 and less than 900. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 2. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB. (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 3. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 4. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB cleaning blade at the same time. 5. Replace the patch sensor unit. Initial installation toner density sensor (Y) output lower Title limit error Description When executing the developing assembly initial of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y), the output level does not reach 128 even when control voltage of the toner density sensor reached 255 or more. Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether the toner density sensor is not disconnected or Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) occurs. 3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-18

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0124

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Initial installation patch (Y) density lower limit error Description When executing the developing assembly initial of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y), the ATR patch detection value (SigD) is less than 79. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 7. Replace the developing assembly.

7

7-19

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0130

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

-05

Items

Description

Title

Initial installation toner density sensor (Y) output upper limit error Description When executing developing assembly initial installation of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y), the output level does not reach 128 even when control voltage of the toner density sensor became less than 55. Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Shorting) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner density sensor occurs or not. 3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-19

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0134

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Initial installation patch (Y) density upper limit error Description When executing developing assembly initial installation of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y), the ATR patch output (SigD) is more than 970. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 7. Replace the developing assembly.

7

7-20

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0136

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

-05

Items

Description

Title Initial installation patch (Y) sampling error Description When executing developing assembly initial installation of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y), the variation before average patch P wave light intensity is more than 100. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 7. Replace the developing assembly.

7-20

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0190

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Patch (Y) density lower limit error Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is less than 79. of detection Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB cleaning blade at the same time. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. NOTE: This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in the developing assembly. In this case, check the supplyrelated parts in the developing assembly.

7

7-21

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0191

-05

E020

-01A0

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Items

Description

Title Patch (Y) density upper limit error Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is more than 970. of detection Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of COPIER> DISPLAY > DENS >P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB cleaning blade at the same time. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. NOTE: This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in the developing assembly. In this case, check the supplyrelated parts in the developing assembly. Title Toner density sensor (Y) output lower limit error Description The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than of detection 43. Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner density sensor occurs or not. 3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-21

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-01A2

-05

E020

-01C2

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Toner density sensor (Y) output upper limit error The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than 247. 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner density sensor occurs or not. 3. Replace the developing assembly. Title Patch (Y) sampling error Description The variation before average patch P wave light intensity of detection is more than 100. Measures 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-CLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 5. Replace the patch sensor unit. 6. Replace the developing assembly. (Check whether there is not uneven coating on the developing sleeve.)

7

7-22

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0220

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

-05

Items

Description

Title

Initial installation toner density sensor (M) output lower limit error Description When executing the developing assembly initial of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M), the output level does not reach 128 even when control voltage of the toner density sensor reached 255 or more. Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether the toner density sensor is not disconnected or Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) occurs. 3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-22

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0224

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Initial installation patch (M) density lower limit error Description When executing the developing assembly initial of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M), the ATR patch detection value (SigD) is less than 79. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 7. Replace the developing assembly.

7

7-23

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0230

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

-05

Items

Description

Title

Initial installation toner density sensor (M) output upper limit error Description When executing developing assembly initial installation of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M), the output level does not reach 128 even when control voltage of the toner density sensor became less than 55. Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Shorting) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner density sensor occurs or not. 3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-23

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0234

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Initial installation patch (M) density upper limit error Description When executing developing assembly initial installation of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M), the ATR patch output (SigD) is more than 970. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>PLED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 7. Replace the developing assembly.

7

7-24

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0236

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

-05

Items

Description

Title Initial installation patch (M) sampling error Description When executing developing assembly initial installation of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M), the variation before average patch P wave light intensity is more than 100. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 7. Replace the developing assembly.

7-24

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0290

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Patch (M) density lower limit error Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is less than 79. of detection Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB cleaning blade at the same time. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. NOTE: This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in the developing assembly. In this case, check the supplyrelated parts in the developing assembly.

7

7-25

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0291

-05

E020

-02A0

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Items

Description

Title Patch (M) density upper limit error Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is more than 970. of detection Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB cleaning blade at the same time. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. NOTE: This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in the developing assembly. In this case, check the supplyrelated parts in the developing assembly. Title Toner density sensor (M) output lower limit error Description The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than of detection 43. Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner density sensor occurs or not. 3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-25

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-02A2

-05

E020

-02C2

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Toner density sensor (M) output upper limit error The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than 247. 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner density sensor occurs or not. 3. Replace the developing assembly. Title Patch (M) sampling error Description The variation before average patch P wave light intensity of detection is more than 100. Measures 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 5. Replace the patch sensor unit. 6. Replace the developing assembly. (Check whether there is not uneven coating on the developing sleeve.)

7

7-26

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0320

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

-05

Items

Description

Title

Initial installation toner density sensor (C) output lower limit error Description When executing the developing assembly initial of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C), the output level does not reach 128 even when control voltage of the toner density sensor reached 255 or more. Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether the toner density sensor is not disconnected or Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) occurs. 3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-26

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0324

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Initial installation patch (C) density lower limit error Description When executing the developing assembly initial of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C), the ATR patch detection value (SigD) is less than 79. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 7. Replace the developing assembly.

7

7-27

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0330

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

-05

Items

Description

Title

Initial installation toner density sensor (C) output upper limit error Description When executing developing assembly initial installation of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C), the output level does not reach 128 even when control voltage of the toner density sensor became less than 55. Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Shorting) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner density sensor occurs or not. 3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-27

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0334

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Initial installation patch (C) density upper limit error Description When executing developing assembly initial installation of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C), the ATR patch output (SigD) is more than 970. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 7. Replace the developing assembly.

7

7-28

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0336

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

-05

Items

Description

Title Initial installation patch (C) sampling error Description When executing developing assembly initial installation of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C), the variation before average patch P wave light intensity is more than 100. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>PLED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Replace the patch sensor unit. 6. Replace the developing assembly.

7-28

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0390

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Patch (C) density lower limit error Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is less than 79. of detection Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21) . 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB cleaning blade at the same time. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. NOTE: This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in the developing assembly. In this case, check the supplyrelated parts in the developing assembly.

7

7-29

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0391

-05

E020

-03A0

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Items

Description

Title Patch (C) density upper limit error Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is more than 970. of detection Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21) . 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB cleaning blade at the same time. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. NOTE: This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in the developing assembly. In this case, check the supplyrelated parts in the developing assembly. Title Toner density sensor (C) output lower limit error Description The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than of detection 43. Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner density sensor occurs or not. 3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-29

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-03A2

-05

E020

-03C2

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Toner density sensor (C) output upper limit error The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than 247. 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner density sensor occurs or not. 3. Replace the developing assembly. Title Patch (C) sampling error Description The variation before average patch P wave light intensity of detection is more than 100. Measures 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 5. Replace the patch sensor unit. 6. Replace the developing assembly. (Check whether there is not uneven coating on the developing sleeve.)

7

7-30

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0420

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

-05

Items

Description

Title

Initial installation toner density sensor (Bk) output lower limit error Description When executing the developing assembly initial of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K), the output level does not reach 128 even when control voltage of the toner density sensor reached 255 or more. Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether disconnection or Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) of the toner density sensor occurs or not. 3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-30

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0424

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Initial installation patch (Bk) density lower limit error Description When executing the developing assembly initial of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K), the ATR patch detection value (SigD) is less than 79. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 7. Replace the developing assembly.

7

7-31

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0340

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

-05

Items

Description

Title

Upper limit error for output of Toner Density Sensor (Bk) at initial installation Description When executing the initial installation mode of the of detection Developing Assembly (COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-K), output failed to reach 128 although the control voltage value of the Toner Density Sensor reached 55 or smaller. Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether disconnection or Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) of the toner density sensor occurs or not. 3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-31

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0434

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Initial installation patch (Bk) density upper limit error Description When executing developing assembly initial installation of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K), the ATR patch output (SigD) is more than 970. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 7. Replace the developing assembly.

7

7-32

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0436

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

-05

Items

Description

Title Initial installation patch (K) sampling error Description When executing developing assembly initial installation of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K), the variation before average patch P wave light intensity is more than 100. Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 7. Replace the developing assembly.

7-32

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0490

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Description

Title Patch (Bk) density lower limit error Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is less than 79. of detection Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB cleaning blade at the same time. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. NOTE: This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in the developing assembly. In this case, check the supplyrelated parts in the developing assembly.

7

7-33

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-0491

-05

E020

-04A0

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020

Items

Description

Title Patch (Bk) density upper limit error Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is more than 970. of detection Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the patch sensor. • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking occurred. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB cleaning blade at the same time. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit. NOTE: This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in the developing assembly. In this case, check the supplyrelated parts in the developing assembly. Title Toner density sensor (Bk) output lower limit error Description The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than of detection 43. Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner density sensor occurs or not. 3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-33

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E020

-04A2

E020

-04C2

-05

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

7-34

■■E021 to E077

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Toner density sensor (Bk) output upper limit error The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than 247. 1. Check the connection between the toner density sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) sensor side: J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 sensor side: J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 sensor side: J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner density sensor occurs or not. 3. Replace the developing assembly. Title Patch (Bk) sampling error Description The variation before average patch P wave light intensity of detection is more than 100. Measures 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum unit are properly installed. 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Clean or replace the ITB. • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN). • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 5. Replace the patch sensor unit. 6. Replace the developing assembly. (Check whether there is not uneven coating on the developing sleeve.)

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E021

-0101

-05

E021

-0102

-05

Items

Description

Title Developing sleeve drive motor (Y) error Description The lock signal of the developing sleeve drive motor (Y) of detection (M20) cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) • Failure of the developing sleeve motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve drive motor (Y) (UN20) and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7535, J8034 PCB side: J1220 2. Replace the developing assembly (Y). 3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). 4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (Y). Title Developing sleeve drive motor (Y) error Description Lock signal of Developing sleeve drive motor (Y) (M20) of detection cannot be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) • Failure of the developing sleeve motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve drive motor (Y) (M20) and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7535, J8034 PCB side: J1220 2. Replace the developing assembly (Y). 3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). 4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (Y).

T-7-5

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

7-34

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E021

-0201

-05

E021

-0202

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description

Title Developing sleeve drive motor (M) error Description The lock signal of the developing sleeve drive motor (M) of detection (M22) cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) • Failure of the developing sleeve motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve drive motor (M) (M22) and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7536, J8034 PCB side: J1220 2. Replace the developing assembly (M). 3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). 4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (M). Title Developing sleeve drive motor (M) error Description Lock signal of Developing sleeve drive motor (M) (M22) of detection cannot be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) • Failure of the developing sleeve motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve drive motor (M) (M22) and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7536, J8034 PCB side: J1220 2. Replace the developing assembly (M). 3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). 4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (M).

7

7-35

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E021

-0301

-05

E021

-0302

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Items

Description

Title Developing sleeve drive motor (C) error Description The lock signal of the developing sleeve drive motor (C) of detection (M24) cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) • Failure of the developing sleeve motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve drive motor (C) (M24) and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7537, J8034 PCB side: J1906 2. Replace the developing assembly (C). 3. Replace the DC controller interface PCB. 4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (C). Title Developing sleeve drive motor (C) error Description Lock signal of Developing sleeve drive motor (C) (M24) of detection cannot be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) • Failure of the developing sleeve motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve drive motor (C) (M24) and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7537, J8034 PCB side: J1906 2. Replace the developing assembly (C). 3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). 4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (C).

7-35

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E021

-0401

-05

E021

-0402

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description

Title Developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) error Description The lock signal of the developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) of detection (M18) cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) • Failure of the developing sleeve motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) (M18) and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7538, PCB side: J1914 2. Replace the developing assembly (Bk). 3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). 4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (Bk). Title Developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) error Description Lock signal of Developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) (M18) of detection cannot be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). • Failure of the developing sleeve motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) (M18) and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7538, PCB side: J1914 2. Replace the developing assembly (Bk). 3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). 4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (Bk).

7

7-36

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E022

-0001

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

-05

Items

Description

Title Drum cleaning / waste toner feed drive motor error Description The lock signal of the drum cleaning/waste toner feed of detection drive motor (M30) cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the drum cleaning unit (Overload) • Failure of the waste toner feed screw (Overload) • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). • Failure of the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the drum cleaning/ waste toner feed drive motor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7539, PCB side: J1914 2. Clean the screw in the drum cleaning unit (Bk), or replace the unit. Remove toner clog with the feed screw. 3. Clean the waste toner feed pipe unit, or replace the unit. Remove toner clog with the feed screw. 4. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). 5. Replace the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive motor.

7-36

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E022

-0002

E023

-0101

-05

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description

Title Drum cleaning / waste toner feed drive motor error Description Lock signal of Drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive of detection motor (M30) cannot be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the drum cleaning unit (Overload) • Failure of the waste toner feed screw (Overload) • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) • Failure of the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the drum cleaning/ waste toner feed drive motor and the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7539, PCB side: J1914 2. Clean the screw in the drum cleaning unit (Bk), or replace the unit. Remove toner clog with the feed screw. 3. Clean the waste toner feed pipe unit, or replace the unit. Remove toner clog with the feed screw. 4. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). 5. Replace the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive motor. Title Developing stirring motor (Y) error Description The lock signal of the developing stirring motor (Y) (M26) of detection cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the DC controller PCB • Contact failure of the drawer connector • Failure of the developing stirring motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring motor (Y) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7158, J8031 PCB side: J1243 2. Replace the developing assembly (Y). 3. Replace the DC controller PCB. 4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031). 5. Replace the developing stirring motor (Y).

7

7-37

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E023

-0102

-05

E023

-0201

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Items

Description

Title Developing stirring motor (Y) error Description Lock signal of Developing stirring motor (Y) (M26)cannot of detection be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the DC controller PCB • Contact failure of the drawer connector • Failure of the developing stirring motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring motor (Y) and the DC controller interface PCB (UN2). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7158, J8031 PCB side: J1243 2. Replace the developing assembly (Y). 3. Replace the DC controller PCB. 4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031). 5. Replace the developing stirring motor (Y). Title Developing stirring motor (M) error Description The lock signal of the developing stirring motor (M) (M28) of detection cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the DC controller PCB • Contact failure of the drawer connector • Failure of the developing stirring motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring motor (M) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J8031 PCB side: J1243 2. Replace the developing assembly (Y). 3. Replace the DC controller PCB. 4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031). 5. Replace the developing stirring motor (M).

7-37

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E023

-0202

-05

E023

-0301

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description

Title Developing stirring motor (M) error Description Lock signal of Developing stirring motor (M) (M28) cannot of detection be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the DC controller PCB • Contact failure of the drawer connector • Failure of the developing stirring motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring motor (M) and the DC controller interface PCB (UN2). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7156, J8031 PCB side: J1243 2. Replace the developing assembly (Y). 3. Replace the DC controller PCB. 4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031). 5. Replace the developing stirring motor (M). Title Developing stirring motor (C) error Description The lock signal of the developing stirring motor (C) (M27) of detection cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the DC controller PCB • Contact failure of the drawer connector • Failure of the developing stirring motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring motor (C) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7157, J8038 PCB side: J1243 2. Replace the developing assembly (C). 3. Replace the DC controller PCB. 4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031). 5. Replace the developing stirring motor (C).

7

7-38

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E023

-0302

-05

E023

-0401

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Items

Description

Title Developing stirring motor (C) error Description Lock signal of Developing stirring motor (C) (M27) cannot of detection be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the DC controller PCB • Contact failure of the drawer connector • Failure of the developing stirring motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring motor (C) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7157, J8038 PCB side: J1243 2. Replace the developing assembly (C). 3. Replace the DC controller PCB. 4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031). 5. Replace the developing stirring motor (C). Title Developing stirring motor (Bk) error Description The lock signal of the developing stirring motor (Bk) (M29) of detection cannot be detected within a specified period. • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the DC controller PCB • Contact failure of the drawer connector • Failure of the developing stirring motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring motor (Bk) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7152, J8038 PCB side: J1243 2. Replace the developing assembly (Bk). 3. Replace the DC controller PCB. 4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031). 5. Replace the developing stirring motor (Bk).

7-38

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E023

-0402

E025

-0102

-05

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description

Title Developing stirring motor (Bk) error Description Lock signal of Developing stirring motor (Bk) (M29) of detection cannot be detected for the specified period of time after first detection • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve overloaded) • Failure of the DC controller PCB • Contact failure of the drawer connector • Failure of the developing stirring motor Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring motor (Bk) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7152, J8038 PCB side: J1243 2. Replace the developing assembly (Bk). 3. Replace the DC controller interface PCB. 4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031). 5. Replace the developing stirring motor (Bk). Title Block supply timeout (Y) error Description The toner supply screw rotation sensor cannot detect of detection rotation of the screw. Measures 1. Check the connection between the hopper/stirring supply motor (M9) and the DC controller PCB. Motor side: J7104, J8106 PCB side: J1247 2. Check the connection between the toner feed screw rotation sensor (PS12) and the DC controller PCB. Sensor side: J7418, J8106 PCB side: J1247 3. Replace the hopper/stirring supply motor. 4. Clean and replace the toner feed screw rotation sensor. 5. Replace the toner supply pipe unit. 6. Replace the hopper unit. CAUTION: Remedies 5 and 6 are taken when the motor is overloaded due to toner adhesion in the unit or gear interlocking failure, etc. Since it is difficult to identify the cause, it is recommended to replace the unit.

7

7-39

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-0110

-05

Items Title Description of detection Measures

E025

-0120

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

-05

Title Description of detection

Measures

Description Toner container sealing/release holder shift cam HP sensor timeout (Y) error HP sensor of release holder shift cam cannot detect within specified period of time. 1. Check the connection of the toner container drive motor (M10) harness. (Check whether the wire is not caught by parts.) Check the connection with the DC controller PCB. Motor side: J7100 PCB side: J1247 2. Check the connection between the release holder shift cam HP sensor (PS8) and the DC controller PCB. Sensor side: J7135, J8040 PCB side: J1248 3. Replace the toner container drive motor. 4. Clean and replace the release holder shift cam HP sensor. 5. Replace the hopper unit. CAUTION: As for Remedy 5, since it is difficult to identify the cause, it is recommended to replace the unit. NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase (Y) error When the power was turned on, it was detected that the toner container cap was opened (the release holder shift cam phase sensor was protected against light) AND the toner container inserting inlet cover was opened (the toner container inserting inlet cover open/close sensor was transmissive). 1. Close the toner container inserting inlet cover and turn OFF/ON the power. 2. Check the connection between the toner container inserting inlet cover open/close sensor (PS10) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking, Wire caught by parts) Sensor side: J7122, PCB side: J2146 3. Check the connection between the release holder shift cam phase sensor (PS81) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking, Wire caught by parts) Sensor side: J7123,J8106, PCB side: J1247 4. Replace the toner container inserting inlet cover open/ close sensor.

7-39

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-01A0

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description

Title

Error in Y Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS11) Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift of detection Cam HP Sensor status (ON -> OFF) when opening the cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be judged. Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side. 1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is soiled and the installation of the sensor. 2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P052 bit15) to see that the output value of the sensor is changed. Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it, repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the screen until the value is changed. If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be sure to perform step 4 and later steps. 2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, check the drive system such as gears. If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit and then perform step 4 and later steps. 2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not changed although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically removed). If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After checking the output value in step 2, perform step 4 and later steps. 3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform step 4 and later steps. 4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7

7-40

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-01B0

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

-05

Items

Description

Title

Error in Y Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS11) Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift of detection Cam HP Sensor status (OFF -> ON) when closing the cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be judged. Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side. 1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is soiled and the installation of the sensor. 2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P052 bit15) to see that the output value of the sensor is changed. Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it, repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the screen until the value is changed. If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be sure to perform step 4 and later steps. 2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, check the drive system such as gears. If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit and then perform step 4 and later steps. 2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not changed although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically removed). If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After checking the output value in step 2, perform step 4 and later steps. 3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform step 4 and later steps. 4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-40

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-01C0

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Error in Y Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (PS10) Unable to detect opening of the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover when removing the Toner Container. Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to link mechanism to open the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover or problem at the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor side. 1. Perform the user mode (Adjustment/Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner) to check if the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover opens normally (damage, slide of shaft area, etc.). 2. Check if the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is soiled and the installation of the sensor. 3. Check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P051 bit0) to see that the output value of the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is changed normally when opening/closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. If it is normal, the value becomes 0 by driving the Hopper Unit with the Toner Container Removing Tool and opening the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. When closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover by hand, it becomes 1. 3-1. When the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover is not opened although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the drive system from upstream (Hopper Unit -> link mechanism of Hopper Tray -> Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Unit). If it is damaged, replace the damaged part and then perform step 5 and later steps. 3-2. When the output value is not changed normally although the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover can be opened/closed, check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically removed, *including the Relay Connector). If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After checking the output value in step 3, perform step 5 and later steps. 4. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform step 5 and later steps. 5. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 6. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7

7-41

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-0202

-05

E025

-0210

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Block supply timeout (M) error The toner supply screw rotation sensor cannot detect rotation of the screw. 1. Check the connection between the hopper/stirring supply motor (M12) and the DC controller PCB. Motor side: J7105, J8107 PCB side: J1247 2. Check the connection between the toner feed screw rotation sensor (PS15) and the hopper driver PCB. Sensor side: J7419, J8107 PCB side: J1247 3. Replace the hopper/stirring supply motor. 4. Clean and replace the toner feed screw rotation sensor. 5. Replace the toner supply pipe unit. 6. Replace the hopper unit. CAUTION: Remedies 5 and 6 are taken when the motor is overloaded due to toner adhesion in the unit or gear interlocking failure, etc. Since it is difficult to identify the cause, it is recommended to replace the unit. Title Toner container sealing/release holder shift cam HP sensor timeout (M) error Description HP sensor of release holder shift cam cannot detect of detection within specified period of time. Measures 1. Check the connection of the toner container drive motor (M13) harness. (Check whether the wire is not caught by parts.) Check the connection with the DC controller PCB. Motor side: J7101,J8107, PCB side: J1247 2. Check the connection between the release holder shift cam HP sensor (PS14) and the DC controller PCB. Sensor side: J7198 PCB side: J1249 3. Replace the toner container drive motor. 4. Clean and replace the release holder shift cam HP sensor. 5. Replace the hopper unit. CAUTION: As for Remedy 5, since it is difficult to identify the cause, it is recommended to replace the unit. NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR

7-41

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-0220

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description

Title

Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase (M) error Description When the power was turned on, it was detected that the of detection toner container cap was opened (the release holder shift cam phase sensor was protected against light) AND the toner container inserting inlet cover was opened (the toner container inserting inlet cover open/close sensor was transmissive). Measures 1. Close the toner container inserting inlet cover and turn OFF/ON the power. 2. Check the connection between the toner container inserting inlet cover open/close sensor (PS13) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking, Wire caught by parts) Sensor side: J7125 PCB side: J1246 3. Check the connection between the release holder shift cam phase sensor (PS82) and the hopper driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking, Wire caught by parts) Sensor side: J7126 PCB side: J1247 4. Replace the toner container inserting inlet cover open/ close sensor.

7

7-42

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-02A0

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

-05

Items

Description

Title

Error in M Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS14) Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift of detection Cam HP Sensor status (ON -> OFF) when opening the cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be judged. Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side. 1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is soiled and the installation of the sensor. 2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P052 bit14) to see that the output value of the sensor is changed. Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it, repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the screen until the value is changed. If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be sure to perform step 4 and later steps. 2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, check the drive system such as gears. If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit and then perform step 4 and later steps. 2-2 When the output value of the sensor is not changed although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically removed). If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After checking the output value in step 2, perform step 4 and later steps. 3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform step 4 and later steps. 4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-42

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-02B0

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description

Title

Error in M Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS14) Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift of detection Cam HP Sensor status (OFF -> ON) when closing the cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be judged. Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side. 1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is soiled and the installation of the sensor. 2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P052 bit14) to see that the output value of the sensor is changed. Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it, repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the screen until the value is changed. If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be sure to perform step 4 and later steps. 2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, check the drive system such as gears. If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit and then perform step 4 and later steps. 2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not changed although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically removed). If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After checking the output value in step 2, perform step 4 and later steps. 3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform step 4 and later steps. 4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7

7-43

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-02C0

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

-05

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Error in M Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (PS13) Unable to detect opening of the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover when removing the Toner Container. Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to link mechanism to open the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover or problem at the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor side. 1. Perform the user mode (Adjustment/Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner) to check if the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover opens normally (damage, slide of shaft area, etc.). 2. Check if the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is soiled and the installation of the sensor. 3. Check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P051 bit1) to see that the output value of the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is changed normally when opening/closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. If it is normal, the value becomes 0 by driving the Hopper Unit with the Toner Container Removing Tool and opening the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. When closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover by hand, it becomes 1. 3-1. When the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover is not opened although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the drive system from upstream (Hopper Unit -> link mechanism of Hopper Tray -> Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Unit). If it is damaged, replace the damaged part and then perform step 5 and later steps. 3-2. When the output value is not changed normally although the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover can be opened/closed, check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically removed, *including the Relay Connector). If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After checking the output value in step 3, perform step 5 and later steps. 4. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform step 5 and later steps. 5. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 6. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-43

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-0302

-05

E025

-0310

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Block supply timeout (C) error The toner supply screw rotation sensor cannot detect rotation of the screw. 1. Check the connection between the hopper/stirring supply motor (M15) and the DC controller PCB. Motor side: J7102, J8108 PCB side: J1248 2. Check the connection between the toner feed screw rotation sensor (PS18) and the DC controller PCB. Sensor side: J7420, J8108 PCB side: J1248 3. Replace the hopper/stirring supply motor. 4. Clean and replace the toner feed screw rotation sensor. 5. Replace the toner supply pipe unit. 6. Replace the hopper unit. CAUTION: Remedies 5 and 6 are taken when the motor is overloaded due to toner adhesion in the unit or gear interlocking failure, etc. Since it is difficult to identify the cause, it is recommended to replace the unit. Title Toner container sealing/release holder shift cam HP sensor timeout (C) error Description HP sensor of release holder shift cam cannot detect of detection within specified period of time. Measures 1. Check the connection of the toner container drive motor (M16) harness. (Check whether the wire is not caught by parts.) Check the connection with the DC controller PCB. SinceMotor side: J7102,J8108 PCB side: J1248 2. Check the connection between the release holder shift cam HP sensor (PS17) and the DC controller PCB. SinceSensor side: J7197, PCB side: J1249 3. Replace the toner container drive motor. 4. Clean and replace the release holder shift cam HP sensor. 5. Replace the hopper unit. CAUTION: As for Remedy 5, since it is difficult to identify the cause, it is recommended to replace the unit. NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR

7

7-44

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-0320

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

-05

Items

Description

Title

Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase (C) error Description When the power was turned on, it was detected that the of detection toner container cap was opened (the release holder shift cam phase sensor was protected against light) AND the toner container inserting inlet cover was opened (the toner container inserting inlet cover open/close sensor was transmissive). Measures 1. Close the toner container inserting inlet cover and turn OFF/ON the power. 2. Check the connection between the toner container inserting inlet cover open/close sensor (PS16) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by parts) Sensor side: J7128, PCB side: J1246 3. Check the connection between the release holder shift cam phase sensor (PS82) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by parts) Sensor side: J7129, PCB side: J1248 4. Replace the toner container inserting inlet cover open/ close sensor.

7-44

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-03A0

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description

Title

Error in C Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS17) Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift of detection Cam HP Sensor status (ON -> OFF) when opening the cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be judged. Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side. 1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is soiled and the installation of the sensor. 2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P052 bit13) to see that the output value of the sensor is changed. Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it, repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the screen until the value is changed. If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be sure to perform step 4 and later steps. 2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, check the drive system such as gears. If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit and then perform step 4 and later steps. 2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not changed although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically removed). If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After checking the output value in step 2, perform step 4 and later steps. 3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform step 4 and later steps. 4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7

7-45

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-03B0

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

-05

Items

Description

Title

Error in C Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS17) Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift of detection Cam HP Sensor status (OFF -> ON) when closing the cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be judged. Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side. 1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is soiled and the installation of the sensor. 2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P052 bit13) to see that the output value of the sensor is changed. Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it, repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the screen until the value is changed. If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be sure to perform step 4 and later steps. 2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, check the drive system such as gears. If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit and then perform step 4 and later steps. 2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not changed although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically removed). If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After checking the output value in step 2, perform step 4 and later steps. 3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform step 4 and later steps. 4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-45

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-03C0

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Error in C Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (PS16) Unable to detect opening of the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover when removing the Toner Container. Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to link mechanism to open the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover or problem at the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor side. 1. Perform the user mode (Adjustment/Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner) to check if the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover opens normally (damage, slide of shaft area, etc.). 2. Check if the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is soiled and the installation of the sensor. 3. Check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P051 bit2) to see that the output value of the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is changed normally when opening/closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. If it is normal, the value becomes 0 by driving the Hopper Unit with the Toner Container Removing Tool and opening the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. When closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover by hand, it becomes 1. 3-1. When the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover is not opened although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the drive system from upstream (Hopper Unit -> link mechanism of Hopper Tray -> Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Unit). If it is damaged, replace the damaged part and then perform step 5 and later steps. 3-2. When the output value is not changed normally although the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover can be opened/closed, check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically removed, *including the Relay Connector). If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After checking the output value in step 3, perform step 5 and later steps. 4. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform step 5 and later steps. 5. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 6. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7

7-46

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-0402

-05

E025

-0410

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Block supply timeout (Bk) error The toner supply screw rotation sensor cannot detect rotation of the screw. 1. Check the connection between the hopper/stirring supply motor (M6) and the DC controller PCB. Motor side: J7107, J8040 PCB side: J1248 2. Check the connection between the toner feed screw rotation sensor (PS9) and the DC controller PCB. Sensor side: J7417, J8040 PCB side: J1248 3. Replace the hopper/stirring supply motor. 4. Clean and replace the toner feed screw rotation sensor. 5. Replace the toner supply pipe unit. 6. Replace the hopper unit. CAUTION: Remedies 5 and 6 are taken when the motor is overloaded due to toner adhesion in the unit or gear interlocking failure, etc. Since it is difficult to identify the cause, it is recommended to replace the unit. Title Toner container sealing/release holder shift cam HP sensor timeout (Bk) error Description HP sensor of release holder shift cam cannot detect of detection within specified period of time. Measures 1. Check the connection of the toner container drive motor (M7) harness. (Check whether the wire is not caught by parts.) Check the connection with the DC controller PCB. Motor side: J7103, J8040 PCB side: J1248 2. Check the connection between the release holder shift cam HP sensor (PS8) and the DC controller PCB. Sensor side: J7135, J8040 PCB side: J1248 3. Clean and replace the toner feed screw rotation sensor. 4. Replace the hopper/stirring supply motor. 5. Replace the hopper unit. CAUTION: As for Remedy 5, since it is difficult to identify the cause, it is recommended to replace the unit. NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR

7-46

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-0420

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description

Title

Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase (Bk) error Description When the power was turned on, it was detected that the of detection toner container cap was opened (the release holder shift cam phase sensor was protected against light) AND the toner container inserting inlet cover was opened (the toner container inserting inlet cover open/close sensor was transmissive). Measures 1. Close the toner container inserting inlet cover and turn OFF/ON the power. 2. Check the connection between the toner container inserting inlet cover open/close sensor (PS7) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by parts) Sensor side: J7138, PCB side: J1246 3. Check the connection between the release holder shift cam phase sensor (PS84) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by parts) Sensor side: J7139, J8040 PCB side: J1248 4. Replace the toner container inserting inlet cover open/ close sensor.

7

7-47

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-04A0

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

-05

Items

Description

Title

Error in Bk Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS8) Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift of detection Cam HP Sensor status (ON -> OFF) when opening the cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be judged. Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side. 1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is soiled and the installation of the sensor. 2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P052 bit12) to see that the output value of the sensor is changed. Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it, repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the screen until the value is changed. If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be sure to perform step 4 and later steps. 2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, check the drive system such as gears. If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit and then perform step 4 and later steps. 2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not changed although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically removed). If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After checking the output value in step 2, perform step 4 and later steps. 3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform step 4 and later steps. 4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-47

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-04B0

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description

Title

Error in Bk Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS8) Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift of detection Cam HP Sensor status (OFF -> ON) when closing the cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be judged. Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side. 1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is soiled and the installation of the sensor. 2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P052 bit12) to see that the output value of the sensor is changed. Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it, repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the screen until the value is changed. If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be sure to perform step 4 and later steps. 2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, check the drive system such as gears. If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit and then perform step 4 and later steps. 2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not changed although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically removed). If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After checking the output value in step 2, perform step 4 and later steps. 3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform step 4 and later steps. 4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7

7-48

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E025

-04C0

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

-05

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Error in Bk Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (PS7) Unable to detect opening of the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover when removing the Toner Container. Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to link mechanism to open the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover or problem at the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor side. 1. Perform the user mode (Adjustment/Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner) to check if the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover opens normally (damage, slide of shaft area, etc.). 2. Check if the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is soiled and the installation of the sensor. 3. Check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P051 bit3) to see that the output value of the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is changed normally when opening/closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. If it is normal, the value becomes 0 by driving the Hopper Unit with the Toner Container Removing Tool and opening the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. When closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover by hand, it becomes 1. 3-1. When the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover is not opened although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the drive system from upstream (Hopper Unit -> link mechanism of Hopper Tray -> Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Unit). If it is damaged, replace the damaged part and then perform step 5 and later steps. 3-2. When the output value is not changed normally although the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover can be opened/closed, check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically removed, *including the Relay Connector). If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After checking the output value in step 3, perform step 5 and later steps. 4. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform step 5 and later steps. 5. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 6. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-48

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E056

-0001

-05

E056

-0002

-05

E060

-0001

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description

Title Reverse Roller disengagement home position error Description At initial operation, the Reverse Roller Disengagement of detection HP Sensor (PS101) failed to detect home position despite an operation of the Reverse Disengagement Motor (M54). Remedy 1. Replace the Reverse Disengagement Motor. 2. Check the mechanism to detect home position for disengagement of the Reverse Roller. 3. Replace the Reverse Roller Disengagement HP Sensor. Title Reverse Roller operation error Description During printing, the Reverse Roller Disengagement HP of detection Sensor (PS101) failed to detect change in the detection flag despite an operation of the Reverse Disengagement Motor (M54). Remedy 1. Replace the Reverse Disengagement Motor. 2. Check the mechanism to detect home position for disengagement of the Reverse Roller. 3. Replace the Reverse Roller Disengagement HP Sensor. Title Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP open error Description The Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92) of detection detected that the shutter was open although it was moved to the close position. Remedy 1. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M1). 2. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M1). 3. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92). 4. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92). 5. Check shutter mechanism of the Primary Charging Assembly. 6. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly. 7. Replace the DC Controller PCB.

7

7-49

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E060

-0002

-05

E060

-0011

-05

E060

-0012

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Items

Description

Title Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP close error Description The Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92) of detection detected that the shutter was closed although it was moved to the open position. Remedy 1. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M1). 2. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M1). 3. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92). 4. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92). 5. Check shutter mechanism of the Primary Charging Assembly. 6. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly. 7. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Title Primary Charging Wire Shutter error 1 when cleaning the Primary Charging Wire Description The Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92) of detection failed to be detected although 10 seconds have passed since the Primary Charging Wire Shutter started its operation. Remedy 1. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92). 2. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92). 3. Check shutter mechanism of the Primary Charging Assembly. 4. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly. 5. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Title Primary Charging Wire Shutter error 2 when cleaning the Primary Charging Wire Description The Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92) of detection remained to be detected although 10 seconds have passed since the Primary Charging Wire Shutter started its operation. Remedy 1. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92). 2. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92). 3. Check shutter mechanism of the Primary Charging Assembly. 4. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly. 5. Replace the DC Controller PCB.

7-49

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E060

-0023

-05

Items Title Description of detection Remedy

E061

-0001

-05

Title Description of detection

Measures

E061

-0002

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description Error in the Primary Charging Wire Shutter position during rotation of the Bk Drum Faulty position of the Primary Charging Wire Shutter was detected while the Bk Drum was rotating. 1. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M1). 2. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M1). 3. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92). 4. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92). 5. Check shutter mechanism of the Primary Charging Assembly. 6. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly. 7. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Primary charging bias (Bk) lower limit error At initial rotation, the drum surface potential Vd at potential control is less than 30 V. • Primary charging bias (Bk) is not properly applied. • The drum does not rotate correctly. 1. Check whether the primary charging assembly is properly installed or connected. (Connection of the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by parts) 2. Check whether the primary charging high-voltage PCB (Bk) is properly installed or connected. (Connection of the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by parts) 3. Check whether the drum motor (Bk) is properly installed or connected. (Connection of the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by parts) 4. Replace the parts. • Primary charging assembly • Primary charging high-voltage PCB (Bk) • Drum/ITB drive motor • DC controller interface PCB • DC controller PCB Potential sensor offset adjustment error When the result of potential sensor offset adjustment is more than +/-30 V. 1. Check whether the potential sensor offset adjustment tool is properly installed. 2. Replace the potential sensor.

7

7-50

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E061

-0003

-05

E061

-0004

-05

E064

-1101

-05

E064

-1103

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Items

Description

Title Potential control Vd failure Description At the time of measurement of Vd at potential control, of detection the value is more than +50 V or less than -200 V against Vgrid. • Drum cleaning pre-exposure is not performed correctly. • Primary charging is not performed correctly. • The drum is reaching the end of life. Measures 1. Check the connection of the drum cleaning preexposure LED. 2. Check the connection of the primary charging assembly. • Check whether the grid plate is properly installed. • Check whether the shield plate is not soiled by toner. -> Clean the shield plate. • Check whether disconnection of the connector or shorting does not occur or the wire is not caught by parts. 3. Replace the parts. • Drum cleaning pre-exposure LED • Primary charging assembly • Drum (Checking can be performed by COPIER> DISPLAY>DPOT>D-CONT-K. Estimated life is 150,000 or less.) Title Laser power shortage error Description At the time of measurement of 8 bright section potential of detection VI at potential control, the grid bias Vgrid is more than 100 V at least at one point. • Dirt is applied to the dust prevention glass. • Laser is not applied correctly. Measures 1. Clean the dust prevention glass. 2. Check the connection of the laser scanner unit. (Connection of the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by parts) 3. Replace the parts. • Laser scanner unit (Bk) • Laser interface PCB Title Primary charging DC bias (Y) output error Description The primary charging DC bias (Y) output showed an of detection abnormal value. Remedy Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C). Title Developing DC bias (Y) output error Description The developing DC bias (Y) output showed an abnormal of detection value. Remedy Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C).

7-50

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E064

-2201

-05

E064

-2203

-05

E064

-3301

-05

E064

-3303

-05

E064

-4403

-05

E064

-1000

E064

E066

-1001

-0001

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Items

Description

-05

Title Description of detection Remedy Title Description of detection Remedy Title Description of detection Remedy Title Description of detection Remedy Title Description of detection Remedy Title

-05

Description of detection Remedy Title

Primary charging DC bias (M) output error The primary charging DC bias (M) output showed an abnormal value. Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C). Developing DC bias (M) output error The developing DC bias (M) output showed an abnormal value. Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C). Primary charging DC bias (C) output error The primary charging DC bias (C) output showed an abnormal value. Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C). Developing DC bias (C) output error The developing DC bias (C) output showed an abnormal value. Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C). Developing DC bias (Bk) output error The developing DC bias (Bk) output showed an abnormal value. Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk). No output of reference signal for primary charging DC bias (Y/M/C) No output of reference signal for primary charging DC bias (Y/M/C). Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C). No output of reference signal for developing DC bias (Y/ M/C/Bk) No output of reference signal for developing DC bias (Y/ M/C/Bk). Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C, Bk). Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP open error The Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS93) detected that the shutter was open although it was moved to the close position. 1. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M2). 2. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M2). 3. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS93). 4. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS93). 5. Check shutter mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. 6. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. 7. Replace the DC Controller PCB.

-05

Description of detection Remedy Title Description of detection Remedy

7

7-51

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E066

-0002

-05

E066

-0011

-05

E066

-0012

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Items

Description

Title Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP close error Description The Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor of detection (PS93) detected that the shutter was closed although it was moved to the open position. Remedy 1. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M2). 2. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M2). 3. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS93). 4. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS93). 5. Check shutter mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. 6. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. 7. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Title Primary Charging Wire Shutter error 1 when cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Description The Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor of detection (PS93) failed to be detected although 10 seconds have passed since the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter started its operation. Remedy 1. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS93). 2. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS93). 3. Check shutter mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. 4. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. 5. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Title Primary Charging Wire Shutter error 2 when cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Description The Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor of detection (PS93) remained to be detected although 10 seconds have passed since the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter started its operation. Remedy 1. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS93). 2. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS93). 3. Check shutter mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. 4. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. 5. Replace the DC Controller PCB.

7-51

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E066

-0023

-05

Items Title Description of detection Remedy

E073

-0001

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Description Error in the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter position during rotation of the Bk Drum Faulty position of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter was detected while the Bk Drum was rotating. 1. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M2). 2. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M2). 3. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS93). 4. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS93). 5. Check shutter mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. 6. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. 7. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Host machine interlock failure Interlock at 24 V cannot be detected in the condition where all of the front cover, left lower cover, and manual feed cover are closed. 1. Check whether shorting does not occur to the harness of the interlock group. If it occurs, replace the harness. 2. Replace the relay board. (Blowout at the relay PCB (UN7)) 3. Replace the interlock switch. • Front door open/close switch 1 (SW1) • Front door open/close switch 2 (SW2) • Manual feeding unit open/close switch (SW3) • Paper delivery door open/close switch (SW4)

7

7-52

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E074

-0001

-05

E075

-0000

-05

E075

-0001

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Items

Description

Title Primary transfer roller detachment/attachment error Description The primary transfer roller attachment/detachment HP of detection sensor (PS4) cannot detect the home position within a specified period. Measures 1. Check the connection between the primary transfer roller detachment HP sensor (PS4) and the ITB relay PCB (UN28). (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) Sensor side: J7113 PCB side: J2701 2. Check the connection between the ITB relay PCB and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) ITB relay PCB: J2700, J8050 DC controller PCB: J1241, J8010 3. Replace the primary transfer roller detachment HP sensor. 4. Check the link parts of the primary transfer roller (pressure release lever, link, cam). If foreign matters are found, remove them. If they are soiled with toner, etc., perform cleaning (when the parts do not move smoothly due to dirt). 5. Check whether the gear is not damaged. If it is damaged, replace the attachment/detachment drive unit (FM3-4905). Title Steering HP error Description The home position of the steering roller cannot be of detection detected. It cannot move from the home position. Measures 1. Check the connection between the steering drive HP sensor (PS3) and the ITB relay PCB (UN28). (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) Sensor side: J7416, J8045 PCB side: J2701 2. Check the connection between the steering drive motor (M4) and the ITB relay PCB. (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) Sensor side: J7414, J8044 PCB side: J2701 3. Replace the parts. • Steering drive HP sensor • Steering drive motor Title ITB displacement sensor lower limit error Description The output value of the ITB displacement sensor (PS2) of detection continues to be the lower limit value. Measures 1. Check the connection between the ITB displacement sensor (PS2) and the ITB relay PCB (UN28). (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) Sensor side: J7415 PCB side: J2702 2. Clean the ITB displacement sensor. 3. Replace the parts.

7-52

7 E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E075

-0002

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

ITB displacement sensor upper limit error The output value of the ITB displacement sensor (PS2) continues to be the upper limit value. 1. Check whether the ITB displacement sensor (PS2) and the ITB displacement sensor flag are installed properly. • Isn’t the ITB displacement sensor flag inserted under the ITB? • Is the ITB displacement sensor installed correctly? 2. Replace the parts. • Replace the ITB displacement sensor flag (if the flag is damaged). • Replace the ITB displacement sensor. • Replace the ITB. (Replace the ITB of which edge is damaged.) • Replace the steering control mechanism parts. (Pressure spring removed from the steering arm, etc.)

7-53

E code

Detailed Occurance code area

E077

-0001

-05

Items

Description

Title

Secondary transfer external roller detachment/attachment error Description The secondary transfer roller attachment/detachment HP of detection sensor (PS22) cannot detect the home position within a specified period. Measures 1. Check the connection between the secondary transfer roller attachment/detachment HP sensor (PS22) and the fixing feed driver (UN5). (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) Sensor side: J7214, J8102 PCB side: 1509 2. Check the connection between the fixing feed driver and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Shorting) Fixing feed driver: J1510 DC controller PCB: J1215 3. Check the connection between the secondary transfer roller detachment motor (M31) and the pickup feed driver PCB (UN4). (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) Motor side: J7003 DC controller interface side: 1409 4. Check the connection between the pickup feed driver PCB and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (shorting)) Pickup feed driver PCB: J1401 DC controller PCB: J1215 5. Check the installation condition of the detachment mechanism assemblies (cam, arm, secondary transfer external roller holder). Check the condition of the attachment/detachment cam mechanism assembly. 6. Replace the secondary transfer roller attachment/ detachment HP sensor. 7. Check the drive gear. -> Replace the gear. 8. Replace the secondary transfer roller detachment motor. 9. Replace the drive unit. T-7-6

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077

7-53

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197

■■E100 to E197 E Detailed Occurance code code area E100 -0101

E100 -0201

-05

-05

Items

Description

Laser scanner motor BD (Y) error The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal and PLOCK signal during BD rotation. 1. Check that the cover is closed. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Interface PCB: J5500 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable). Laser Scanner Unit: J8070, J5509, Laser Interface PCB: J5101Y 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB. Title Laser scanner motor BD (M) error Description The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal of detection and PLOCK signal during BD rotation. Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Interface PCB: J5500 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable). Laser Scanner Unit: J8076, J5510, Laser Interface PCB: J5101M 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.

7-54

E Detailed Occurance code code area E100 -0301

-05

E100 -0401

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Laser scanner motor BD (C) error The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal and PLOCK signal during BD rotation. 1. Check that the cover is closed. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Interface PCB: J5500 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable). Laser Scanner Unit: J8064, J5511, Laser Interface PCB: J5101C 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB. Laser scanner motor BD (Bk) error Title Description The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal of detection and PLOCK signal during BD rotation. Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Interface PCB: J5500 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable). Laser Scanner Unit: J8066, J5512, Laser Interface PCB: J5101K 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.

7-54

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E102 -0101

-05

E102 -0201

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Laser scanner unit (Y) EEPROM error Laser scanner unit EEPROM failure / Failure of the data written in the laser scanner unit EEPROM was detected. 1. Check that the cover is closed. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Interface PCB: J5500 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable). Laser Scanner Unit: J8070, J5509, Laser Interface PCB: J5101Y 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB. Laser scanner unit (M) EEPROM error Title Description Laser scanner unit EEPROM failure / Failure of the data of detection written in the laser scanner unit EEPROM was detected. Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Interface PCB: J5500 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable). Laser Scanner Unit: J8076, J5510, Laser Interface PCB: J5101M 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.

7

7-55

E Detailed Occurance code code area E102 -0301

-05

E102 -0401

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Laser scanner unit (C) EEPROM error Laser scanner unit EEPROM failure / Failure of the data written in the laser scanner unit EEPROM was detected. 1. Check that the cover is closed. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Interface PCB: J5500 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable). Laser Scanner Unit: J8064, J5511, Laser Interface PCB: J5101C 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB. Laser scanner unit (Bk) EEPROM error Title Description Laser scanner unit EEPROM failure / Failure of the data of detection written in the laser scanner unit EEPROM was detected. Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Interface PCB: J5500 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable). Laser Scanner Unit: J8066, J5512, Laser Interface PCB: J5101K 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.

7-55

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E110 -0101

-05

E110 -0201

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Laser scanner motor (Y) error The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal during FG rotation. 1. Check that the cover is closed. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Interface PCB: J5500 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable). Laser Scanner Unit: J8070, J5509, Laser Interface PCB: J5101Y 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB. Title Laser scanner motor (M) error Description The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal of detection during FG rotation. Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Interface PCB: J5500 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable). Laser Scanner Unit: J8076, J5510, Laser Interface PCB: J5101M 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.

7

7-56

E Detailed Occurance code code area

Items

Description Laser scanner motor (C) error The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal during FG rotation. 1. Check that the cover is closed. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Interface PCB: J5500 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable). Laser Scanner Unit: J8064, J5511, Laser Interface PCB: J5101C 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB. Laser scanner motor (Bk) error The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal during FG rotation. 1. Check that the cover is closed. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Interface PCB: J5500 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable). Laser Scanner Unit: J8066, J5512, Laser Interface PCB: J5101K 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB. Serial communication error Ex serial communication error with the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. 1. Check the connection between the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (J1511) and the DC Controller PCB (J1222). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB.

E110 -0301

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E110 -0401

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E197 -0000

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197

7-56

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197

Items

Description Serial communication error Ex serial communication error with the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. 1. Check the connection between the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (J1511) and the DC Controller PCB (J1222). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. Serial communication error Ex serial communication error with the Pickup Feed Driver PCB. 1. Check connection between the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (J1401) and the DC Controller PCB (J1221). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB. Serial communication error Ex serial communication error with the Pickup Feed Driver PCB. 1. Check connection between the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (J1401) and the DC Controller PCB (J1221). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB. Serial communication error Ex serial communication error with the DC Controller PCB. 1. Check connection of the DC Controller PCB (J1210). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Serial communication error Ex serial communication error with the DC Controller PCB. 1. Check connection of the DC Controller PCB (J1210). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Serial communication error Ex serial communication error with the Buffer Path Unit.

E197 -0001

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E197 -0002

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E197 -0003

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E197 -0004

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E197 -0006

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E197 -0007

-05

Title Description of detection Measures 1. Check the connection between the Buffer Driver PCB and the DC Controller PCB (J1226). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB. Title Serial communication error Description Ex serial communication error with the Multi Deck. of detection Measures 1. Check the connection between the Buffer Driver PCB and the DC Controller PCB (J1226). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB.

E197 -0008

-05

7

7-57

E Detailed Occurance code code area E197 -0009

-05

E197 -000a

-05

E197 -0020

-05

E197 -0021

-05

E197 -0022

-05

E197 -0023

-05

E197 -0030

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197

Items

Description

Title Serial communication error Description Ex serial communication error with the Multi Deck. of detection Measures 1. Check the connection between the Buffer Driver PCB and the DC Controller PCB (J1226). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB. Title Serial communication error Description Ex serial communication error with the Multi Deck. of detection Measures 1. Check the connection between the Buffer Driver PCB and the DC Controller PCB (J1226). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB. Title Serial communication error Description HOB serial communication (= register serial of detection communication) error with the DC Controller PCB. Measures 1. Check connection of the DC Controller PCB (J1210). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Title Serial communication error Description HOB serial communication error in the Drum ITB Driver of detection PCB. Measures 1. Check the connection between the Drum ITB Driver PCB (J1901) and the DC Controller PCB (J1226). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB. Title Serial communication error Description HOB serial communication error with the Laser Interface of detection PCB. Measures 1. Check the connection between the Laser Interface PCB (J5501) and the DC Controller PCB (J1220). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. Title Serial communication error Description HOB serial communication error with the Laser Interface of detection PCB. Measures 1. Check the connection between the Laser Interface PCB (J5501) and the DC Controller PCB (J1220). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. Title Serial communication error Description HOB serial communication (= register serial of detection communication) timeout error with the DC Controller PCB. Measures 1. Check connection of the DC Controller PCB (J1210). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.

7-57

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area

Items

Description Serial communication error HOB serial communication error in the Drum ITB Driver PCB. 1. Check the connection between the Drum ITB Driver PCB (J1901) and the DC Controller PCB (J1226). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB. Serial communication error HOB serial communication error with the Laser Interface PCB. 1. Check the connection between the Laser Interface PCB (J5501) and the DC Controller PCB (J1220). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. Serial communication error HOB serial communication error with the Laser Interface PCB. 1. Check the connection between the Laser Interface PCB (J5501) and the DC Controller PCB (J1220). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. Serial communication error Communication error due to poor contact of Drawer Connector with the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. Replace the PCB and the harness. Serial communication error Ex serial communication error with the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. 1. Check the connection between the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (J1551) and the DC Controller PCB (J1222). 2. Replace the DC ControllerPCB. 3. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. Serial communication error Ex serial communication error with the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. 1. Check the connection between the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (J1551) and the DC Controller PCB (J1222). 2. Replace the DC ControllerPCB. 3. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. Serial communication error Ex serial communication error with the Pickup Feed Driver PCB. 1. Check connection between the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (J1401) and the DC Controller PCB (J1221). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB.

E197 -0031

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E197 -0032

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E197 -0033

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E197 -0040

E197 -0050

-05

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197

Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures

E197 -0051

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E197 -0052

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

7

7-58

E Detailed Occurance code code area E197 -0053

-05

E197 -0057

-05

E197 -0100

-05

E197 -0101

-05

E197 -0102

-05

E197 -0103

-05

E197 -1000

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Serial communication error Ex serial communication error with the Pickup Feed Driver PCB. 1. Check connection between the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (J1401) and the DC Controller PCB (J1221). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB. Title Serial communication error Description Ex serial communication error with the Buffer Path Unit. of detection Measures 1. Check the connection between the Buffer Driver PCB (J1401) and the DC Controller PCB (J1226). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB. Title Serial communication error Description Serial communication error in ASIC of detection Measures Laser Interface PCB Title Serial communication error Description Serial communication error in ASIC of detection Measures Laser Interface PCB Title Serial communication error Description Serial communication error in ASIC of detection Measures Laser Interface PCB Title Serial communication error Description Serial communication error in ASIC of detection Measures Laser Interface PCB Title Serial communication error Detection Communication error between the DC Controller PCB description (UN2) and the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (UN37, 38) Remedy 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (UN37, 38). 2. Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (UN37, 38). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).

7-58

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197

Items

Description Serial communication error Communication error between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Developing High Voltage PCB 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Developing High Voltage PCB. 2. Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB. 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Serial communication error Communication error between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the High Voltage PCBs 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (UN37, 38). 2. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Developing High Voltage PCB. 3. Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB. 4. Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB. 5. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Serial communication error Communication error between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5) 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5). 2. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Serial communication error Communication error between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Pickup Driver PCB (UN4) 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Pickup Driver PCB (UN4). 2. Replace the Pickup Driver PCB (UN4). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Serial communication error Communication error between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Drum Driver PCB (UN6) 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Drum Driver PCB (UN6). 2. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN6). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Serial communication error Communication error between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Relay PCB (UN7) 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Relay PCB (UN7). 2. Replace the Relay PCB (UN7). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).

E197 -1001

-05

Title Detection description Remedy

E197 -1002

-05

Title Detection description Remedy

E197 -2000

-05

Title Detection description Remedy

E197 -2001

-05

Title Detection description Remedy

E197 -2002

-05

Title Detection description Remedy

E197 -2003

-05

Title Detection description Remedy

7

7-59

E Detailed Occurance code code area E197 -2004

-05

E197 -2005

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197

Items

Description

Title Detection description Remedy

Serial communication error Communication error between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Buffer Driver PCB (UN150) 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Buffer Driver PCB (UN150). 2. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB (UN150). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Title Serial communication error Detection Communication error between the DC Controller PCB description (UN2) and the other Driver PCB Remedy 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and other Driver PCB. 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). T-7-7

7-59

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280

■■E202 to E280 E Detailed Occurance code code area E202 -0001

-04

E202 -0002

-04

E202 -0101

-04

E202 -0102

-04

Items

Description

Scanner home position error Failure of detection of the home position of the optical unit for front side (outward) 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the optical home position sensor (SR2) 2. Damage to the optical home position sensor 3. Damage to the optical motor (M1) 4. Damage to the reader controller PCB (PCB1) Title Scanner home position error Description Failure of detection of the home position of the optical of detection unit for front side (homeward) Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the optical home position sensor (SR2) 2. Damage to the optical home position sensor 3. Damage to the optical motor (M1) 4. Damage to the reader controller PCB (PCB1) Title Glass home position error Description Failure of detection of the glass home position (outward) of detection Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the glass movement home position sensor (SR11) 2. Damage to the glass movement home position sensor 3. Damage to the glass movement motor (M9) 4. Damage to the DADF driver PCB (PCB1) Title Glass home position error Description Failure of detection of the glass home position of detection (homeward) Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the glass movement home position sensor (SR11) 2. Damage to the glass movement home position sensor 3. Damage to the glass movement motor (M9) 4. Damage to the DADF driver PCB (PCB1)

7-60

E Detailed Occurance code code area E227 -0001

-04

E227 -0002

-04

Title Description of detection Measures

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280

Items

Description

Title Power supply (24 V) error Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of power-on. of detection Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart and check the power output before the machine detects the error to determine whether the cause of the error is power supply. If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. If there is power output, factor other than power supply can be the cause of the error. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and check that the Cable is not open-circuit. 3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB. 4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer side. 5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB. Title Power supply (24 V) error Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of job start. of detection Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart and check the power output before the machine detects the error to determine whether the cause of the error is power supply. If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. If there is power output, factor other than power supply can be the cause of the error. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and check that the Cable is not open-circuit. 3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB. 4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer side. 5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB.

7-60

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E227 -0003

-04

E227 -0004

-04

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280

Description

Title Power supply (24 V) error Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of job completion. of detection Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart and check the power output before the machine detects the error to determine whether the cause of the error is power supply. If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. If there is power output, factor other than power supply can be the cause of the error. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and check that the Cable is not open-circuit. 3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB. 4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer side. 5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB. Title Power supply (24 V) error Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of load drive. of detection Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart and check the power output before the machine detects the error to determine whether the cause of the error is power supply. If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. If there is power output, factor other than power supply can be the cause of the error. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and check that the Cable is not open-circuit. 3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB. 4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer side. 5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB.

7

7-61

E Detailed Occurance code code area E227 -0101

-04

E227 -0102

-04

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Power supply (24 V) error The 24 V port is turned off at the time of power-on at DADF. Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart and check the power output before the machine detects the error to determine whether the cause of the error is power supply. If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. If there is power output, factor other than power supply can be the cause of the error. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and check that the Cable is not open-circuit. 3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB. 4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer side. 5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB. Title Power supply (24 V) error Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of job start at of detection DADF. Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart and check the power output before the machine detects the error to determine whether the cause of the error is power supply. If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. If there is power output, factor other than power supply can be the cause of the error. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and check that the Cable is not open-circuit. 3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB. 4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer side. 5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB.

7-61

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E227 -0103

-04

E246 -0001

-00

E246 -0002

-00

E246 -0003

-00

E246 -0005

-00

E247 -0001

-00

E247 -0002

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Power supply (24 V) error The 24 V port is turned off at the time of job completion at DADF. Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart and check the power output before the machine detects the error to determine whether the cause of the error is power supply. If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. If there is power output, factor other than power supply can be the cause of the error. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and check that the Cable is not open-circuit. 3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB. 4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer side. 5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver PCB. Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases

7

7-62

E Detailed Occurance code code area E247 -0003

-00

E247 -0004

-00

E248 -0001

-04

E248 -0002

-04

E248 -0003

-04

E260 -0000

-05

E260 -0001

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280

-05

Items Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Remedy

Description System error --Contact each sale company bases System error --Contact each sale company bases EEPROM error Failure of power-on at EEPROM for the reader controller PCB (PCB1) Replace the reader controller PCB (PCB1) EEPROM error Failure of writing at EEPROM for the reader controller PCB (PCB1) Replace the reader controller PCB (PCB1) EEPROM error Failure of reading after writing at EEPROM for the reader controller PCB (PCB1) Replace the reader controller PCB (PCB1) Power supply (24VA/24VB) error 24V power (+24VA, +24VB) was not supplied.

1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of harness with the corresponding PCB. Check connectors and harnesses between the following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC Power Supply PCB (24VA), DC Power Supply PCB (24VB). 2. Failure of PCB. Replace the following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC Power Supply PCB (24VA), DC Power Supply PCB (24VB). Title Power supply (24VA) error Description 24V power (+24VA) was not supplied. of detection Remedy 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of harness with the corresponding PCB. Check connectors and harnesses between the following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC Power Supply PCB (24VA). 2. Failure of PCB. Replace the following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC Power Supply PCB (24VA).

7-62

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E260 -0002

-05

E260 -0003

-05

E270 -0001

-04

E270 -0002

-04

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280

Description

Title Power supply (24VB) error Description 24V power (+24VB) was not supplied. of detection Remedy 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of harness with the corresponding PCB. Check connectors and harnesses between the following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC Power Supply PCB (24VB). 2. Failure of PCB. Replace the following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC Power Supply PCB (24VB). Title DC Controller PCB 5V error Description An error in the 5V output from the DC Controller PCB of detection was detected. Measures Replace the DC Controller PCB. Title Failure of the front side vertical direction synchronization signal Description The vertical direction synchronization signal (VSYNC) of detection was not sent from the CMOS PCB (front side optical unit) correctly, and an image failure occurred or the operation stopped in failure. Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the optical unit (reader) 2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the reader controller PCB (PCB1) 3. Failure of the optical unit (reader) 4. Failure of the reader controller PCB Title Failure of the horizontal/vertical direction synchronization signal Description The vertical direction synchronization signal (VSYNC) of detection was not sent due to a failure of the horizontal direction synchronization signal (HSYNC), and an image failure occurred or the operation stopped in failure. Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the optical unit (reader/DADF) 2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the reader controller PCB (PCB1) 3. Failure of the optical unit (reader/DADF) 4. Failure of the reader controller PCB

7

7-63

E Detailed Occurance code code area E270 -0101

-04

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E280 -0001

-04

Title Description of detection Measures

E280 -0002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280

-04

Title Description of detection Measures

Description Failure of the backside vertical scanning direction synchronization signal The vertical direction synchronization signal (VSYNC) was not sent from the CMOS PCB (backside optical unit) correctly, and an image failure occurred or the operation stopped in failure. 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the optical unit (DADF) 2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the reader controller PCB (PCB1) 3. Failure of the optical unit (DADF) 4. Failure of the reader controller PCB Communication error between Reader Controller PCB (PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader) Within the specified period of time, communication between the Reader Controller PCB and Scanner Unit (Paper Front) was not started. 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader). → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Reader). 4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB. Harness disconnection between Reader Controller PCB (PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader) Harness disconnection between Reader Controller PCB (PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader). 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader). → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness.

7-63

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E280 -0101

-04

Items Title Description of detection Measures

E280 -0102

-04

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490

7-64

■■E301 to E490

Description Communication error between Reader Controller PCB (PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader) Within the specified period of time, communication between the Reader Controller PCB and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) was not started. 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader) → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Reader). 4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB. Harness disconnection between Reader Controller PCB (PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader) Harness disconnection between Reader Controller PCB (PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader). 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader) → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness.

E Detailed Occurance code code area

Description

Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures

Front side light intensity failure The light intensity amount at front side shading is less than the standard level. Replace the optical unit (reader) Backside light intensity failure The light intensity amount at backside shading is less than the standard level. Replace the optical unit (DADF) Front side white shading failure Shading RAM access failure occurred, or the shading value is less than or more than the specified level. 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader). → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader). 4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB. Error in paper front black shading Shading RAM access error, or the shading value was either below or higher than the specified level. 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader). → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader). 4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB. Backside white shading failure Shading RAM access failure occurred, or the shading value is less than or more than the specified level. 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader) → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader). 4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.

E301 -0001

-04

E301 -0101

-04

E302 -0001

-04

E302 -0002

-04

Title Description of detection Measures

E302 -0101

-04

Title Description of detection Measures

T-7-8

7

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490

7-64

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E302 -0102

E315 -000e

E350 -0000

E350 -0001

-04

-00

-00

-00

E350 -0002

-00

E350 -0003

-00

E350 -3000

-00

E351 -0000

-00

E354 -0001

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Error in paper back black shading Shading RAM access error, or the shading value was either below or higher than the specified level. 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader) → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness. 3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader). 4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB. Title Error in the soft decode Description JBIG decode error of detection Measures Replace the main controller PCB Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases

7

7-65

E Detailed Occurance code code area E354 -0002

-00

E355 -0001

-00

E355 -0002

-00

E355 -0003

-00

E355 -0004

-00

E400 -0001

-04

Items Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures

E400 -0002

-04

Title Description of detection Measures

E400 -0003

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490

-04

Title Description of detection Remedy

Description System error --Contact each sale company bases System error --Contact each sale company bases System error --Contact each sale company bases System error --Contact each sale company bases System error --Contact each sale company bases Communication error between Reader Controller PCB and DADF A check error occurred at the time of communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF. 1. Failure of the connection between the DADF driver PCB (PCB1) and the reader controller PCB (PCB1) 2. Failure of the DADF driver PCB 3. Failure of the reader controller PCB Failure of communication between the reader controller PCB (PCB1) and the DADF A reception error occurred in communication between the reader controller PCB and the DADF. 1. Failure of the connection between the DADF driver PCB (PCB1) and the reader controller PCB (PCB1) 2. Failure of the DADF driver PCB 3. Failure of the reader controller PCB Harness disconnection between Reader Controller PCB and DADF Harness disconnection between Reader Controller PCB and DADF. 1. Check connection between the DADF Driver PCB and the Reader Controller PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable). 2. Replace the DADF Driver PCB. 3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.

7-65

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E401 -0001

E401 -0002

E407 -0001

E407 -0002

-04

-04

-04

-04

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490

Description

Title Pickup roller unit up/down failure Description Even when the pickup roller unit up/down motor (M10) of detection is driven, the level of the pickup roller unit up/down home position sensor (SR12) does not change within a specified period. Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the pickup roller unit up/down home position sensor (SR12) 2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the pickup roller unit up/down motor (M10) 3. Failure of the pickup roller unit up/down home position sensor 4. Failure of the pickup roller unit up/down motor Title Pickup roller unit up/down failure Description Even when the pickup roller unit up/down motor (M10) of detection is driven, the level of the pickup roller unit up/down home position sensor (SR12) does not change within a specified period. Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the pickup roller unit up/down home position sensor (SR12) 2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the pickup roller unit up/down motor (M10) 3. Failure of the pickup roller unit up/down home position sensor 4. Failure of the pickup roller unit up/down motor Title Failure of the tray up/down motor (M8) Description Even when the tray up/down motor (M8) is driven, the of detection tray home position sensor (SR13) is not turned ON or OFF within a specified period. Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the tray home position sensor (SR13) 2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the tray up/down motor (M8) 3. Failure of the tray home position sensor 4. Failure of the tray up/down motor Title Failure of the tray up/down motor (M8) Description Even when the tray up/down motor (M8) is driven, the of detection paper surface sensor (SR6) is not turned ON within a specified period. Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the paper surface sensor (SR6) 2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the tray up/down motor (M8) 3. Failure of the paper surface sensor 4. Failure of the tray up/down motor

7

7-66

E Detailed Occurance code code area E412 -0001

-04

E412 -0002

-04

E412 -0003

-04

E412 -0004

-04

E412 -0005

-04

E412 -0006

-04

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490

Items

Description

Title

Failure in drive of the Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (Reader Assembly) Description The Scanner Unit Cooling Fan was not driven. of detection Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the connector. 2. Check if there is open circuit. 3. Replace the corresponding fan. 4. Replace the DADF Driver PCB. Title Failure to stop Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (Reader Assembly) Description The Scanner Unit Cooling Fan was not stopped. of detection Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the connector. 2. Check if there is open circuit. 3. Replace the corresponding fan. 4. Replace the DADF Driver PCB. Title Failure in drive of the DADF Cooling Fan 3 Description DADF Cooling Fan 3 was not driven. of detection Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the connector. 2. Check if there is open circuit. 3. Replace the corresponding fan. 4. Replace the DADF Driver PCB. Title Failure to stop DADF Cooling Fan 3 Description DADF Cooling Fan 3 was not stopped. of detection Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the connector. 2. Check if there is open circuit. 3. Replace the corresponding fan. 4. Replace the DADF Driver PCB. Title Failure in drive of the DADF Cooling Fan 1 or 2 Description DADF Cooling Fan 1 or 2 was not driven. of detection Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the connector. 2. Check if there is open circuit. 3. Replace the corresponding fan. 4. Replace the DADF Driver PCB. Title Failure to stop DADF Cooling Fan 1 or 2 Description DADF Cooling Fan 1 or 2 was not stopped. of detection Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the connector. 2. Check if there is open circuit. 3. Replace the corresponding fan. 4. Replace the DADF Driver PCB.

7-66

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E413 -0001

E413 -0002

-04

-04

E413 -0011

-04

E413 -0012

-04

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490

Description

Title Failure of the DADF detachment motor 1 (M6) Description Even when the DADF detachment motor 1 (M6) is driven, of detection the DADF detachment home position sensor 1 (SR15) is not turned ON within a specified period. Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the detachment home position sensor 1 (SR15) 2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the detachment motor 1 (M6) 3. Failure of the detachment home position sensor 1 4. Failure of the detachment motor 1 5. Failure of the DADF driver PCB (PCB1) Title Failure of the DADF detachment motor 1 (M6) Description Even when the DADF detachment motor 1 (M6) is driven, of detection the DADF detachment home position sensor 1 (SR15) is not turned OFF within a specified period. Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the detachment home position sensor 1 (SR15) 2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the detachment motor 1 (M6) 3. Failure of the detachment home position sensor 1 4. Failure of the detachment motor 1 5. Failure of the DADF driver PCB (PCB1) Title Failure of the DADF detachment motor 2 (M7) Description Even when the DADF detachment motor 2 (M7) is driven, of detection the DADF detachment home position sensor 2 (SR16) is not turned ON within a specified period. Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the detachment home position sensor 2 (SR16) 2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the detachment motor 2 (M7) 3. Failure of the detachment home position sensor 2 4. Failure of the detachment motor 2 5. Failure of the DADF driver PCB (PCB1) Title Failure of the DADF detachment motor 2 (M7) Description Even when the DADF detachment motor 2 (M7) is driven, of detection the DADF detachment home position sensor 2 (SR16) is not turned OFF within a specified period. Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the detachment home position sensor 2 (SR16) 2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the detachment motor 2 (M7) 3. Failure of the detachment home position sensor 2 4. Failure of the detachment motor 2 5. Failure of the DADF driver PCB (PCB1)

7

7-67

E Detailed Occurance code code area E423 -0001

-04

E423 -0002

-04

E490 -0001

-04

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490

Items

Description

Title DADF SDRAM error Description SDRAM access error of detection Measures Failure of the SDRAM (video image memory) located on the reader controller PCB (PCB1) Title DADF SDRAM error Description SDRAM Verify error of detection Measures Failure of the SDRAM (video image memory) located on the reader controller PCB (PCB1) Title DADF model mismatch error Description DADF that is not supported is installed. of detection Measures 1. DADF of a different model is installed. 2. Failure of the reader controller PCB (PCB1) 3. Failure of the DC controller PCB 4. Failure of the main controller PCB T-7-9

7-67

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

■■E500 to E551 E Detailed Occurance code code area E500 -0000

-05

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E503 -0001

-05

Title

Description of detection

Measures

Description A. Error in IPC communication(Finisher-K1) B. Communication error(Finisher-L1) A. Communication failed between the host machine and the finisher B. The communication with the connected device is interrupted. A: A-1. IPC cable is disconnected. A-2. IPC cable is faulty. A-3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A-4. The host machine controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B-2. The connected device DC controller PCB is faulty. A. Communication error with insertion unit (Document Insertion Unitr-J1,Paper Folding Unit-G1) B. Error in communication between the finisher - saddle stitcher (Finisher-K1) A. Communication failed, or the communication line has been interrupted for a specified period of time. B. Communication failed between the finisher and the saddle stitcher A: A-1. DC controller PCB is faulty A-2. Disconnection of communication cable A-3. Connector on the DC controller PCB is disconnected B: B-1. The connector on the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the saddle stitcher controller PCB is disconnected. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. B-3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-68

E Detailed Occurance code code area E503 -0002

-05

Items Title

Description of detection

Measures

E503 -0003

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

-05

Title

Description of detection Measures

Description A. Error in communication between the finisher - saddle stitcher (Finisher-K1) B. Error in communication between the finisher - saddle stitcher (Finisher-L1) A. Communication failed between the finisher and the saddle stitcher B. The communication with the saddle stitcher is interrupted. A: A-1. The connector on the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the saddle stitcher controller PCB is disconnected. A-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and saddle controller PCB is faulty. B-2. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B-3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A. Communication error between the integration unit professional puncher B. Communication error (Finisher-L1) A. Communication failed between the integration unit professional puncher B. The communication with the puncher unit is interrupted. A: A-1. Connector on the integration unit controller PCB is disconnected. A-2. Connector on the professional puncher controller PCB is disconnected. A-3. The integration unit controller PCB is faulty. A-4. The professional puncher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and host machine DC controller PCB is faulty. B-2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. B-3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B-4. The connected device DC controller PCB is faulty.

7-68

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E503 -0004

E503 -0021

E503 -0022

E503 -0061

-05

-05

-05

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Description

Title

A. Inserter communication error (Finisher-L1) B. Paper Folding Inserter Unit / Inserter Unit Communication error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The communication with the inserter or the folder is of detection interrupted. B. Communication failed for 3 consecutive times, or the communication line has been interrupted for a specified period of time. Measures A: A-1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the connected device controller PCB is faulty. A-2. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A-3. The connected device controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. Controller PCB is faulty. B-2. Disconnection of communication cable B-3. DC controller PCB is faulty. Title Error in communication between the finisher - inserter (Finisher-K1) Description Communication failed between finisher - insertion unit of detection Measures 1. The connector on the cable between the finisher and the insertion unit is disconnected. 2. The cable between the finisher and the insertion unit is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. 4. The insertion unit controller PCB is faulty. Title Error in communication between the finisher - inserter (Finisher-K1) Description Communication failed between finisher - insertion unit of detection Measures 1. The connector on the cable between the finisher and the insertion unit is disconnected. 2. The cable between the finisher and the insertion unit is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. 4. The insertion unit controller PCB is faulty. Title Error in communication between the finisher - paper folding unit (Finisher-K1) Description Communication failed between the finisher - paper folding of detection unit Measures 1. The connector on the cable between the finisher and the paper folding unit is disconnected. 2. The cable between the finisher and the paper folding unit is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. 4. The paper folding unit controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-69

E Detailed Occurance code code area E503 -0062

-05

Items Title Description of detection Measures

E503 -0081

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E503 -0082

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E505 -0001

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

-05

Title

Description of detection

Measures

Description Error in communication between the finisher - paper folding unit (Finisher-K1) Communication failed between the finisher - paper folding unit 1. The connector on the cable between the finisher and the paper folding unit is disconnected. 2. The cable between the finisher and the paper folding unit is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. 4. The paper folding unit controller PCB is faulty. Error in communication between the saddle stitcher trimmer (Finisher-K1) Communication failed between the saddle stitcher trimmer 1. The connector on the wiring between the saddle stitcher and the trimmer is disconnected. 2. The wiring between the saddle stitcher and the trimmer is faulty. 3. The trimmer controller PCB is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in communication between the saddle stitcher trimmer (Finisher-K1) Communication failed between the saddle stitcher trimmer 1. The connector on the wiring between the saddle stitcher and the trimmer is disconnected. 2. The wiring between the saddle stitcher and the trimmer is faulty. 3. The trimmer controller PCB is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A. Backup data error (failed data reading) (Document Insertion Unit-J1/Paper Folding Unit-G1) B. EEPRAM error (Finisher-K1/L1) A. Data failed to be read properly B. Reading/writing error of EEPROM on the finisher controller PCB (The checksum for the EEPROM data has an error.) A. DC controller PCB is faulty. B. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-69

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E505 -0002

-05

Items Title

Description of detection Measures E505 -0003

-05

Title

Description of detection Measures E505 -0005

-05

E509 -0001

-05

Title Description of detection Measures Title

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Description A. Backup data error (failed data writing) (Document Insertion Unit-J1/Paper Folding Unit-G1) B. EEPROM error (External 2 Hole Puncher-A1) A. Data failed to be written properly B. The checksum for the EEPROM data has an error. A. DC controller PCB is faulty B. Punch controller PCB is faulty A. Insertion unit back-up RAM error (Finisher-K1) B. Reading/writing error of EEPROM (Document Folding Insertion Unit / Insertion Unit -H1) A. Reading/writing error of EEPROM on the insertion unit controller PCB. B. Reading/writing error of EEPROM A. The insertion unit controller PCB is faulty. B. DC controller PCB is faulty Paper folding unit backup RAM error Reading/writing error of EEPROM on the paper folding unit controller PCB The paper folding unit controller PCB is faulty. Mismatched connection code between the host machine and Finisher (Finisher-K1/L1) A wrong host machine has been connected.

E Detailed Occurance code code area E514 -8001

Description of detection Remedy 1. Connection with a wrong host machine. 2. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB.

7

7-70

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

-05

Items

Description

Title

A. Error in the gripper base motor (Finisher-K1) B. Rear end assist home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The gripper does not come off the gripper base rear of detection sensor when the gripper base motor has been driven for 3 seconds. B. The stapler does not leave the rear end assist home position when the rear end assist motor has been driven for 3 seconds. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the gripper base rear sensor (S117) or the gripper base motor (M116) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the gripper base rear sensor or the gripper base motor are faulty. A-3. The gripper base rear sensor is faulty. A-4. The gripper base motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The rear end assist home position sensor (PI109) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and rear end assist motor is faulty. B-3. The end assist mechanism is faulty. B-4. The rear end assist motor (M109) is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-70

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E514 -8002

-05

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E514 -8003

E514 -8004

-05

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Description A. Error in the gripper base motor (Finisher-K1) B. Rear end assist home position error (Finisher-L1) A. The gripper base rear sensor dose not detect the gripper when the gripper base motor has been driven for 3 seconds. B. The stapler does not return to the rear end assist home position when the rear end assist motor has been driven for 3 seconds. A: A-1. The connector of the gripper base rear sensor (S117) or the gripper base motor (M116) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the gripper base rear sensor or the gripper base motor are faulty. A-3. The gripper base rear sensor is faulty. A-4. The gripper base motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The rear end assist home position sensor (PI109) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and rear end assist motor is faulty. B-3. The end assist mechanism is faulty. B-4. The rear end assist motor (M109) is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the gripper motor (Finisher-A1) The gripper does not come off the gripper HP sensor when the gripper motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the gripper HP sensor (S140) or the gripper motor (M117) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the gripper HP sensor) or the gripper motor are faulty. 3. The gripper HP sensor is faulty. 4. The gripper motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the gripper motor (Finisher-K1) The gripper HP sensor does not detect the gripper when the gripper motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the gripper HP sensor (S140) or the gripper motor (M117) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the gripper HP sensor or the gripper motor are faulty. 3. The gripper HP sensor is faulty. 4. The gripper motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-71

E Detailed Occurance code code area

Items

Description Error in the gripper motor (Finisher-K1) The gripper does not come off the position sensor when the gripper motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the gripper position sensor (S115) or the gripper motor (M117) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the gripper position sensor or the gripper motor are faulty. 3. The gripper position sensor is faulty. 4. The gripper motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the gripper motor (Finisher-K1) The gripper position sensor does not detect the gripper when the gripper motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the gripper position sensor (S115) or the gripper motor (M117) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the gripper position sensor or the gripper motor are faulty. 3. The gripper position sensor is faulty. 4. The gripper motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in folding feed motor lock (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) The fold transport motor (M5/M11) lock signal has been detected for more than the specified period of time. 1. Connector of Folding feed motor (M5/M11) is disconnected. 2. Folding feed motor is faulty. Gear change home position error (Finisher-L1) The gear change home position sensor does not turn ON when the gear change motor has been driven for 387 pulses. 1. The gear change home position sensor (PI117) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and gear change motor is faulty. 3. The gear change mechanism is faulty. 4. The gear change motor (M110) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

E514 -8005

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E514 -8006

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E518 -8001

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E519 -0002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

7-71

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E519 -8001

-05

E530 -8000

-05

E530 -8001

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Description

Title Gear change home position error (Finisher-L1) Description The gear change home position sensor does not turn of detection OFF when the gear change motor has been driven for 387 pulses. Measures 1. The gear change home position sensor (PI117) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and gear change motor is faulty. 3. The gear change mechanism is faulty. 4. The gear change motor (M110) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Title Error in the front or rear alignment motor Description The front or rear alignment motor operate abnormally of detection during initialization. Measures 1. The connector of the front/rear alignment HP sensor (S108/S109) or the front/rear alignment motor (M108/ M109) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the front/rear alignment HP sensor or the front/rear alignment motor are faulty. 3. The front/rear alignment HP sensor is faulty. 4. The front/rear alignment motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Title A. Error in the front alignment motor (Finisher-K1) B. Front aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The front alignment plate does not come off the front of detection alignment HP sensor when the front alignment motor has been driven for 4 seconds. B. The aligning plate does not leave the aligning plate front home position sensor when the alignment plate front motor has been driven for 4 seconds. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the front alignment HP sensor (S108) or the front alignment motor (M108) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the front alignment HP sensor or the front alignment motor are faulty. A-3. The front alignment HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The front alignment motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The front aligning plate home position sensor (PI106) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and front aligning plate motor is faulty. B-3. The front aligning plate is faulty. B-4. The front aligning plate motor (M103) is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-72

E Detailed Occurance code code area E530 -8002

-05

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E531 -8001

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

-05

Title Description of detection

Measures

Description A. Error in the front alignment motor (Finisher-K1) B. Front aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1) A. The front alignment HP sensor does not detect the front alignment plate when the front alignment motor has been driven for 4 seconds. B. The aligning plate does not return to aligning plate front home position sensor when the alignment plate front motor has been driven for 4 seconds. A: A-1. The connector of the front alignment HP sensor (S108) or the front alignment motor (M108) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the front alignment HP sensor or the front alignment motor are faulty. A-3. The front alignment HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The front alignment motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The front aligning plate home position sensor (PI106) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and front aligning plate motor is faulty. B-3. The front aligning plate is faulty. B-4. The front aligning plate motor (M103) is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A. Error in the staple motor (Finisher-K1) B. Staple home position error (Finisher-L1) A. The staple unit does not come off the staple HP sensor when the staple motor has been driven for 0.4 second. B. The stapler does not leave the staple home position when the staple motor has been driven for 0.4 second. A: A-1. The connector of the staple unit is disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the staple unit is faulty. A-3. The staple unit is faulty. A-4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stapler is faulty. B-2. The stapler is faulty. B-3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-72

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E531 -8002

-05

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E532 -8000

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Description A. Error in the staple motor (Finisher-K1) B. Staple home position error (Finisher-L1) A. The staple HP sensor does nor detect the staple unit when the staple motor has been driven for 0.4 second. B. The stapler does not return to the staple home position when the staple motor has been driven for 0.4 second. A: A-1. The connector of the staple unit is disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the staple unit is faulty. A-3. The staple unit is faulty. A-4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stapler is faulty. B-2. The stapler is faulty. B-3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the staple shift motor The staple shift motor operate abnormally during initialization. 1. The connector of the stapler shift HP sensor (S107) or the staple shift motor (M107) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the stapler shift HP sensor or the staple shift motor are faulty. 3. The stapler shift HP sensor is faulty. 4. The staple shift motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-73

E Detailed Occurance code code area E532 -8001

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

-05

Items

Description

Title

A. Error in the staple motor (Finisher-K1) B. Stapler shift home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The staple unit does not come off the stapler shift HP of detection sensor when the staple shift motor has been driven for 5 seconds. B. The stapler does not leave the stapler shift home position when the stapler shift motor has been driven for 5 seconds. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the stapler shift HP sensor (S107) or the staple shift motor (M107) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the stapler shift HP sensor or the staple shift motor are faulty. A-3. The stapler shift HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The staple shift motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The stapler drive home position sensor (PI110) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stapler shift motor is faulty. B-3. The stapler shift base is faulty. B-4. The stapler shift motor (M105) is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller

7-73

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E532 -8002

-05

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E535 -0001

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E535 -0002

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Description A. Error in the stapler shift motor (Finisher-K1) B. Stapler shift home position error (Finisher-L1) A. The stapler shift HP sensor does not detect the staple unit when the staple shift motor has been driven for 5 seconds. B. The stapler does not leave the stapler shift home position when the stapler shift motor has been driven for 5 seconds. A: A-1. The connector of the stapler shift HP sensor (S107) or the staple shift motor (M107) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the stapler shift HP sensor or the staple shift motor are faulty. A-3. The stapler shift HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The staple shift motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The stapler drive home position sensor (PI110) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stapler shift motor is faulty. B-3. The stapler shift base is faulty. B-4. The stapler shift motor (M105) is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller Error in the swing guide motor (Finisher-K1) The swing guide does not come off the swing guide HP sensor when the swing guide motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the swing guide HP sensor (S110) or the swing guide motor (M110) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the swing guide HP sensor or the swing guide motor are faulty. 3. The swing guide HP sensor is faulty. 4. The swing guide motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the swing guide motor (Finisher-K1) The swing guide HP sensor does not detect the swing guide when the swing guide motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the swing guide HP sensor (S110) or the swing guide motor (M110) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the swing guide HP sensor or the swing guide motor are faulty. 3. The swing guide HP sensor is faulty. 4. The swing guide motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-74

E Detailed Occurance code code area E535 -0003

-05

E535 -0004

-05

E535 -8001

-05

E535 -8002

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Items

Description

Title Error in the swing guide motor (Finisher-K1) Description The swing guide height detection sensor failed to be ON of detection even though specified period of time has passed when lowering the swing guide. Measures 1. The connector of the swing guide height detection sensor (S118) or the swing guide motor (M110) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the swing guide height detection sensor or the swing guide motor are faulty. 3. The swing guide height detection sensor is faulty. 4. The swing guide motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Title Error in the swing guide motor (Finisher-K1) Description The swing guide height detection sensor failed to be OFF of detection even though specified period of time has passed when raising the swing unit. Measures 1. The connector of the swing guide height detection sensor (S118) or the swing guide motor (M110) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the swing guide height detection sensor or the swing guide motor are faulty. 3. The swing guide height detection sensor is faulty. 4. The swing guide motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Title Swing home position error (Finisher-L1) Description The stapler does not leave the swing home position when of detection the swing motor has been driven for 3 seconds. Measures 1. The swing home position sensor (PI105) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and swing motor is faulty. 3. The swing mechanism is faulty. 4. The swing motor (M106) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Title Swing home position error (Finisher-L1) Description The stapler does not return to the swing home position of detection when the swing motor has bee driven for 3 seconds. Measures 1. The swing home position sensor (PI105) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and swing motor is faulty. 3. The swing mechanism is faulty. 4. The swing motor (M106) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-74

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E537 -8001

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Description

Title

A. Error in the rear alignment motor (Finisher-K1) B. Rear aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The rear alignment plate does not come off the rear of detection alignment HP sensor when the rear alignment motor has been driven for 4 seconds. B. The aligning plate does not leave the aligning plate rear home position sensor when the alignment plate rear motor has been driven for 4 seconds. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the rear alignment HP sensor (S109) or the rear alignment motor (M109) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the rear alignment HP sensor or the rear alignment motor are faulty. A-3. The rear alignment HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The rear alignment motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The aligning plate rear home position sensor (PI107) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and aligning plate rear motor is faulty. B-3. The rear aligning plate is faulty. B-4. The rear aligning plate motor (M104) is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-75

E Detailed Occurance code code area E537 -8002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

-05

Items

Description

Title

A. Error in the rear alignment motor (Finisher-K1) B. Rear aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The rear alignment HP sensor does not detect the rear of detection alignment plate when the rear alignment motor has been driven for 4 seconds. B. The aligning plate does not leave the aligning plate rear home position sensor when the alignment plate rear motor has been driven for 4 seconds. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the rear alignment HP sensor (S109) or the rear alignment motor (M109) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the rear alignment HP sensor or the rear alignment motor are faulty. A-3. The rear alignment HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The rear alignment motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The aligning plate rear home position sensor (PI107) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and aligning plate rear motor is faulty. B-3. The rear aligning plate is faulty. B-4. The rear aligning plate motor (M104) is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-75

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E540 -8001

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Description

Title

A. Tray 1 time-out error (Finisher-A1) B. Upper tray time-out error (Finisher-B1) Description A. The tray 1 does not return to home position when the of detection tray 1 shift motor has been driven for 20 seconds. The tray 1 does not come off the tray 1 area sensor at the same area when the tray 1 shift motor has been driven for 4 seconds. B. If the tray does not return to home position when the tray 1 shift motor is driven for the specified period of time. If the tray does not move to other area when tray 1 shift motor is driven for the specified period of time. Measures A: A-1. The connectors of the tray 1 area sensors (S122/ S123/S124) or the tray 1 shift motor (M105) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the tray 1 area sensors or the tray 1 shift motor are faulty. A-3. The tray 1 area sensors is faulty. A-4. The tray 1 shift motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. B-3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. B-4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-76

E Detailed Occurance code code area E540 -8002

-05

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E540 -8003

-05

Title

Description of detection

Measures

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Description A. Tray 1 area error (Finisher-K1) B. Upper tray time out error (Finisher-L1) A. The tray 1 detects the discontinuous area with the tray 1 area sensors. B. The dangerous area is reached before the tray 1 paper surface sensor detects paper surface during the paper surface detection operation. A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation. A: A-1. The connectors of the tray 1 area sensors (S122/ S123/S124) or the tray 1 shift motor (M105) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the tray 1 area sensors or the tray 1 shift motor are faulty. A-3. The tray 1 area sensors is faulty. A-4. The tray 1 shift motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. B-3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. B-4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A. Error in the tray 1 lower safety switch (Finisher-K1) B. Swing guide switch/Staple safety switch error (Finisher-L1) A. The tray 1 lower safety switch is turned ON while the tray 1 operates. B. The swing guide switch or staple safety switch is activated while the tray is operating. A: A-1. The connector of the tray 1 lower safety switch (SW110) or the tray 1 shift motor (M105) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the tray 1 lower safety switch or the tray 1 shift motor are faulty. A-3. The tray 1 lower safety switch is faulty. A-4. The tray 1 shift motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. B-3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. B-4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-76

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Items

Description The tray 1 closing detect switch error (Finisher-L1) The FIG input cannot be detected when the tray 1 shift motor has been driven for 0.2 second. 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The tray 1 shift motor speed error (Finisher-L1) The lock detection signal turns OFF for 200 mseconds after the lock detection signal turned ON 150 mseconds. 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The tray 1 shift motor acceleration error (Finisher-L1) The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the tray 1 shift motor has been driven for 1 second. 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The tray 1 shift motor error (Finisher-L1) The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the tray 1 shift motor is at a stop. 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

E540 -8004

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E540 -8005

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E540 -8006

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E540 -8007

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

7

7-77

E Detailed Occurance code code area E540 -8013

-05

E542 -8001

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Error in the swing guide safety switch The swing guide safety switch is turned ON while the tray 1 operates. 1. The connector of the swing guide safety switch (front/ rear) (SW102/SW104) or the staple position switch (SW103) are disconnected. 2. The connector of the swing guide solenoid (SL101) or the tray 1 shift motor (M105) are disconnected. 3. The wiring of the swing guide safety switch (front/rear) or the staple position switch are faulty. 4. The wiring of the swing guide solenoid or the tray 1 shift motor are faulty. 5. The swing guide safety switch (front/rear) is faulty. 6. The staple position switch is faulty. 7. The swing guide solenoid is faulty. 8. The tray 1 shift motor is faulty. 9. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Title A. Tray 2 time-out error (Finisher-K1) B. Upper tray time out error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The tray 2 does not return to home position when the of detection tray 2 shift motor has been driven for 20 seconds. The tray 2 does not come off the tray 2 area sensor at the same area when the tray 2 shift motor has been driven for 4 seconds. B. If the tray does not return to home position when the tray 1 shift motor is driven for 25 seconds. If the tray does not move to other area when tray 2 shift motor is driven for 5 seconds. Measures A: A-1. The connectors of the tray 2 area sensors (S125/ S126/S127) or the tray 2 shift motor (M217) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the tray 2 area sensors or the tray 2 shift motor are faulty. A-3. The tray 2 area sensors is faulty. A-4. The tray 2 shift motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2 shift motor is faulty. B-3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. B-4. The tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-77

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E542 -8002

-05

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E542 -8003

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Description A. Tray 2 area error (Finisher-K1) B. Upper tray time out error (Finisher-L1) A. The tray 2 does not return to home position when the tray 2 shift motor has been driven for 20 seconds. The tray 2 does not come off the tray 2 area sensor at the same area when the tray 2 shift motor has been driven for 4 seconds. B. The upper limit area is reached before the tray 2 paper surface sensor 1 detects the paper surface during paper surface detection operation. A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation. The area beyond the the tray 2 paper surface sensor 2 is reached before the tray 2 paper surface sensor 2 detects the paper surface during evacuation operation. A: A-1. The connectors of the tray 2 area sensors (S125/ S126/S127) or the tray 2 shift motor (M217) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the tray 2 area sensors or the tray 2 shift motor are faulty. A-3. The tray 2 area sensors is faulty. A-4. The tray 2 shift motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2 shift motor is faulty. B-3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. B-4. The tray 2 shift motor (M108) is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the tray 1 lower safety switch (Finisher-K1) The tray 1 lower safety switch is turned ON while the tray 2 operates. 1. The connector of the tray 1 lower safety switch (SW110) or the tray 2 shift motor (M217) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the tray 1 lower safety switch or the tray 2 shift motor are faulty. 3. The tray 1 lower safety switch is faulty. 4. The tray 2 shift motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-78

E Detailed Occurance code code area

Items

Description The tray 2 shift motor clock error (Finisher-L1) The FG input cannot be detected when the tray 2 shift motor has been driven for 0.2 second. 1. The Tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The Tray 2 shift motor (M108) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The tray 2 shift motor speed error (Finisher-L1) The lock detection signal turns OFF for 200 mseconds after the lock detection signal turned ON 150 mseconds. 1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 2 shift motor (M108) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The tray 2 shift motor acceleration error (Finisher-L1) The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the tray 2 shift motor has been driven for 1 second. 1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 2 shift motor (M108) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The tray 2 shift motor error (Finisher-L1) The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the tray 2 shift motor is at a stop. 1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 2 shift motor (M108) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

E542 -8004

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E542 -8005

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E542 -8006

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E542 -8007

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

7-78

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E542 -8013

-05

E551 -0001

-05

E551 -0002

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Error in the swing guide safety switch The swing guide safety switch (front/rear) is turned ON while the tray 2 operates. 1. The connector of the swing guide safety switch (front/ rear) (SW102/SW104) or the staple position switch (SW103) are disconnected. 2. The connector of the swing guide solenoid (SL101) or the tray 2 shift motor (M217) are disconnected. 3. The wiring of the swing guide safety switch (front/rear) or the staple position switch are faulty. 4. The wiring of the swing guide solenoid or the tray 2 shift motor are faulty. 5. The swing guide safety switch (front/rear) is faulty. 6. The staple position switch is faulty. 7. The swing guide solenoid is faulty. 8. The tray 2 shift motor is faulty. 9. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Title A. Error in power supply fan (Document Insertion Unit) B. Error in power supply fan (FAN101) (Finisher) Description A. The lock signal ON is detected while the fan operation. of detection B. The lock signal is detected 1.2 seconds or more while the fan operation. Measures A: A-1. Power supply fan is faulty. A-2. Connector of the power supply fan is disconnected B: B-1. The connector of the power supply fan (FAN101) is disconnected. B-2. The wiring of the power supply fan is faulty. B-3. The power supply fan is faulty. B-4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Title A. Error in power supply fan (Paper Folding Unit) B. Error in power supply fan (FAN101) (Finisher) Description The lock status is released when the fan stops. of detection Measures A: A-1. Connector of the power supply fan is disconnected. A-2. Power supply fan is faulty. B: B-1. The connector of the power supply fan (FAN101) is disconnected. B-2. The wiring of the power supply fan is faulty. B-3. The power supply fan is faulty. B-4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-79

E Detailed Occurance code code area E551 -0011

-05

E551 -0021

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551

Items

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Error in the power supply fan of the insertion unit The loch signal is detected for the specified period of times while the fan operates. 1. The connector of the fan (F1) is disconnected. 2. The wiring of the fan is faulty. 3. The fan is faulty. 4. The insertion unit controller PCB is faulty. Title Error in the fan of the paper folding unit Description The loch signal is detected for the specified period of of detection times while the fan operates. Measures 1. The connector of the fan (F1) is disconnected. 2. The wiring of the fan is faulty. 3. The fan is faulty. 4. The paper folding unit controller PCB is faulty. T-7-10

7-79

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

■■E562 to E5F9 E Detailed Occurance code code area E562 -8001

-05

Items Title Description of detection Measures

E562 -8002

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E562 -8003

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E562 -8004

E568 -8001

-05

-05

Title

Description Error in slowing timing sensor (Paper folding unit (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) The receiving-light intensity failed to be within the threshold although the emitting-light intensity is adjusted to be within the threshold when adjusting the sensor. 1. Connector of the slowing timing sensor (S24/S30) is disconnected. 2. Slowing timing sensor is faulty. Error in the disengagement timing sensor of paper folding unit (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) The disengagement timing sensor (S21) adjustment failed. 1. Connector of the disengagement timing sensor (S21) is disconnected. 2. Disengagement timing sensor is faulty. Error in the folding position accuracy sensor (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) The folding position accuracy sensor (S23) adjustment failed. 1. Connector of the folding position accuracy sensor (S23) is disconnected. 2. Folding position accuracy sensor is faulty. Error in the upper stopper HP sensor (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) The upper stopper HP sensor (S16) adjustment failed.

Description of detection Measures 1. Connector of the upper stopper HP sensor (S16) is disconnected. 2. Upper stopper HP sensor is faulty. Title Error in the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor (Finisher-K1) Description The disengage roller does not come off the feed roller of detection separation HP sensor when the feed roller disengage/ buffer flapper motor has been driven for 3 seconds. Measures 1. The connector of the feed roller separation HP sensor (S111) or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor (M119) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the feed roller separation HP sensor or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor are faulty. 3. The feed roller separation HP sensor is faulty. 4. The feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-80

E Detailed Occurance code code area E568 -8002

-05

Items Title Description of detection Measures

E568 -8003

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E568 -8004

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Description Error in the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor (Finisher-K1) The feed roller separation HP sensor does not detect the disengage roller when the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the feed roller separation HP sensor (S111) or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor (M119) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the feed roller separation HP sensor or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor are faulty. 3. The feed roller separation HP sensor is faulty. 4. The feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor (Finisher-K1) The buffer flapper does not come off the buffer flapper HP sensor when the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the buffer flapper HP sensor (S142) or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor (M119) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the buffer flapper HP sensor or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor are faulty. 3. The buffer flapper HP sensor is faulty. 4. The feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor (Finisher-K1) The buffer flapper HP sensor does not detect the buffer flapper when the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the buffer flapper HP sensor (S142) or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor (M119) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the buffer flapper HP sensor or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor are faulty. 3. The buffer flapper HP sensor is faulty. 4. The feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-80

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E569 -8001

-05

Items Title

Description of detection

Measures

E569 -8002

-05

Title

Description of detection

Measures

E56A -8001

-05

Title

Description of detection

Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description Upper stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to go through HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) The upper stopper HP sensor (S16) failed to be OFF despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the upper stopper motor started to be driven while the upper stopper HP sensor was ON. 1. Connector of the upper stopper motor (M7) is disconnected. 2. Upper stopper motor is faulty. 3. Connector of the upper stopper HP sensor (S16) is disconnected. 4. Upper stopper HP sensor is faulty. Upper stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to return to HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) The upper stopper HP sensor (S16) failed to be ON despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the upper stopper motor started to be driven while the upper stopper HP sensor was OFF. 1. Connector of the upper stopper motor (M7) is disconnected. 2. Upper stopper motor is faulty. 3. Connector of the upper stopper HP sensor (S16) is disconnected. 4. Upper stopper HP sensor is faulty. C-fold stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to go through HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) The C-fold stopper motor HP sensor (S17) failed to be OFF despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the C-fold stopper motor started to be driven while the C-fold stopper motor HP sensor was ON. 1. Connector of the C-fold stopper motor (M8) is disconnected. 2. C-fold stopper motor is faulty. 3. Connector of the C-fold stopper HP sensor (S17) is disconnected. 4. C-fold stopper HP sensor is faulty.

7

7-81

E Detailed Occurance code code area E56A -8002

-05

Items Title

Description of detection

Measures

E56B -8001

-05

Title

Description of detection Measures

E56B -8002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Description C-fold stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to return to HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) The C-fold stopper motor HP sensor (S17) failed to be ON despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the C-fold stopper motor started to be driven while the C-fold stopper motor HP sensor was OFF. 1. Connector of the C-fold stopper motor (M8) is disconnected. 2. C-fold stopper motor is faulty. 3. Connector of the C-fold stopper HP sensor (S17) is disconnected. 4. C-fold stopper HP sensor is faulty. Folding belt motor of paper folding unit failed to go through HP (Document InsertionFolding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) During initialization or at paper delivery to the Folding upper tray, the Folding belt HP sensor has not turned OFF within the specified pulse. 1. Connector of the Folding belt motor is disconnected. 2. Folding belt motor is faulty. 3. Connector of the Folding belt motor HP sensor is disconnected. 4. Folding belt motor HP sensor is faulty. Folding tray motor of paper folding unit failed to return to HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) During initialization or at paper delivery to the Folding upper tray, the Folding tray motor HP sensor has not turned ON within the specified pulse. 1. Connector of the folding tray motor (M6) is disconnected. 2. Folding tray motor is faulty. 3. Connector of the folding tray motor HP sensor (S19) is disconnected. 4. Folding tray motor HP sensor is faulty.

7-81

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E56D -8001

-05

Items Title Description of detection Measures

E56D -8002

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E56E -8001

-05

Title Description of detection

Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description Error in the stacking tray paper retainer motor (Finisher-K1) The stacking tray paper retainer does not come off the stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor when the stacking tray paper retainer motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor (S114) or the stacking tray paper retainer motor (M114) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor or the stacking tray paper retainer motor are faulty. 3. The stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor is faulty. 4. The stacking tray paper retainer motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the stacking tray paper retainer motor (Finisher-K1) The stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor does not detect the stacking tray paper retainer when the stacking tray paper retainer motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor (S114) or the stacking tray paper retainer motor (M114) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor or the stacking tray paper retainer motor are faulty. 3. The stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor is faulty. 4. The stacking tray paper retainer motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Lead-edge retaining guide motor of paper folding unit failed to go through HP (Paper Folding Unit) The lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor failed to be OFF despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the lead-edge retaining guide motor started to be driven while the lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor was ON. 1. Connector of the lead-edge retaining guide motor (M10) is disconnected. 2. Lead-edge retaining guide motor is faulty. 3. Connector of the lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor (S25) is disconnected. 4. Lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor is faulty.

7

7-82

E Detailed Occurance code code area E56E -8002

-05

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E578 -8001

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E578 -8002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Description Lead-edge retaining guide motor of paper folding unit failed to return to HP (Paper Folding Unit) The lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor failed to be ON despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the lead-edge retaining guide motor started to be driven while the lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor was OFF. 1. Connector of the lead-edge retaining guide motor (M10) is disconnected. 2. Lead-edge retaining guide motor is faulty. 3. Connector of the lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor (S25) is disconnected. 4. Lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor is faulty. Error in the paper return guide motor (Finisher-K1) The paper return guide does not come off the paper return guide HP sensor when the paper return guide motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the paper return guide HP sensor (S112) or the paper return guide motor (M112) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the paper return guide HP sensor or the paper return guide motor are faulty. 3. The paper return guide HP sensor is faulty. 4. The paper return guide motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the paper return guide motor (Finisher-K1) The paper return guide HP sensor does not detect the paper return guide when the paper return guide motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the paper return guide HP sensor (S112) or the paper return guide motor (M112) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the paper return guide HP sensor or the paper return guide motor are faulty. 3. The paper return guide HP sensor is faulty. 4. The paper return guide motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-82

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E57B -8001

-05

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E57B -8002

-05

Title Description of detection

Measures

E57C -8001

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description Error in the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor (Finisher-K1) The paper trailing edge pushing guide does not come off the paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor when the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor (S113) or the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor (M113) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor or the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor are faulty. 3. The paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor is faulty. 4. The paper trailing edge pushing guide motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor (Finisher-K1) The paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor does not detect the paper trailing edge pushing guide when the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor (S113) or the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor (M113) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor or the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor are faulty. 3. The paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor is faulty. 4. The paper trailing edge pushing guide motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the processing tray paper retainer motor (Finisher-K1) The paper retainer does not come off the paper retainer HP sensor when the processing tray paper retainer motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the paper retainer HP sensor (S135) or the processing tray paper retainer motor (M118) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the paper retainer HP sensor or the processing tray paper retainer motor are faulty. 3. The paper retainer HP sensor is faulty. 4. The processing tray paper retainer motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-83

E Detailed Occurance code code area E57C -8002

-05

Items Title Description of detection Measures

E583 -8001

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E583 -8002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Description Error in the processing tray paper retainer motor (Finisher-K1) The paper retainer HP sensor does not detect the paper retainer when the processing tray paper retainer motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the paper retainer HP sensor (S135) or the processing tray paper retainer motor (M118) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the paper retainer HP sensor or the processing tray paper retainer motor are faulty. 3. The paper retainer HP sensor is faulty. 4. The processing tray paper retainer motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the tray auxiliary guide motor (Finisher-K1) The tray auxiliary guide does not come off the tray auxiliary guide front/rear HP sensors when the tray auxiliary guide motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor (S137) or the tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor (S136) are disconnected. 2. The connector of the tray auxiliary guide motor (M120) is disconnected. 3. The wiring of the tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor or the tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor are faulty. 4. The wiring of the tray auxiliary guide motor is faulty. 5. The tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor is faulty. 6. The tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor is faulty. 7. The tray auxiliary guide motor is faulty. 8. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the tray auxiliary guide motor (Finisher-K1) The tray auxiliary guide front/rear HP sensors does nor detect the tray auxiliary guide when the tray auxiliary guide motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor (S137) or the tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor (S136) are disconnected. 2. The connector of the tray auxiliary guide motor (M120) is disconnected. 3. The wiring of the tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor or the tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor are faulty. 4. The wiring of the tray auxiliary guide motor is faulty. 5. The tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor is faulty. 6. The tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor is faulty. 7. The tray auxiliary guide motor is faulty. 8. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-83

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E584 -8001

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description

Title

A. Error in the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (Finisher-K1) B. Shutter home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The shutter does not come off the shutter HP sensor of detection when the stack delivery lower/shutter motor has been driven for 3 seconds. B. The shutter does not leave the shutter home position when the stack ejection motor has been driven for 3 seconds. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the shutter HP sensor (S106) or the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (M122) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the shutter HP sensor or the stack delivery lower/shutter motor are faulty. A-3. The shutter HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The stack delivery lower/shutter motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The shutter home position sensor (PI113) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stack ejection motor, and between the finisher controller PCB and shutter clutch is faulty. B-3. The shutter mechanism is faulty. B-4. The stack ejection motor (M102)/the shutter clutch (CL101)/the stack ejection lower roller clutch (CL102) are faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-84

E Detailed Occurance code code area E584 -8002

-05

Items Title

Description of detection

Measures

E584 -8003

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description A. Error in the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (Finisher-K1) B. Shutter home position error (Finisher-L1) A. The shutter HP sensor does not detect the shutter when the stack delivery lower/shutter motor has been driven for 3 seconds. B. The shutter does not return to the shutter home position when the stack ejection motor has been driven for 3 seconds. A: A-1. The connector of the shutter HP sensor (S106) or the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (M122) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the shutter HP sensor or the stack delivery lower/shutter motor are faulty. A-3. The shutter HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The stack delivery lower/shutter motor is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The shutter home position sensor (PI113) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stack ejection motor, and between the finisher controller PCB and shutter clutch is faulty. B-3. The shutter mechanism is faulty. B-4. The stack ejection motor (M102)/the shutter clutch (CL101)/the stack ejection lower roller clutch (CL102) are faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (Finisher-K1) The shutter does not come off the shutter close detection sensor when the stack delivery lower/shutter motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the shutter close detection sensor (S148)/the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (M122) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the shutter close detection sensor / the stack delivery lower/shutter motor are faulty. 3. The shutter close detection sensor is faulty. 4. The stack delivery lower/shutter motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-84

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E584 -8004

-05

Items Title Description of detection Measures

E590 -8001

-05

Title Description of detection

Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description Error in the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (Finisher-K1) The shutter close detection sensor does not detect the shutter when the stack delivery lower/shutter motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The connector of the shutter close detection sensor (S148)/the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (M122) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the shutter close detection sensor / the stack delivery lower/shutter motor are faulty. 3. The shutter close detection sensor is faulty. 4. The stack delivery lower/shutter motor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A. Error in the Punch motor (Finisher-K1) B. Punch home position error (External 2 Hole Puncher) A. During initialization, the punch HP sensor does not detect the puncher when the punch motor has been driven for 0.5 second after the puncher has come off the punch HP sensor. After initialization, the punch motor does not return to home position. B. The puncher does not detect the punch home position sensor when the puncher motor has been driven for 200 msec. A: A-1. The connector of the punch HP sensor (S104) or the punch motor clock sensor (S105) are disconnected. A-2. The connector of the punch motor (M102) is disconnected. A-3. The wiring of the punch HP sensor or the punch motor clock sensor are faulty. A-4. The wiring of the punch motor is faulty. A-5. The punch HP sensor is faulty. A-6. The punch motor clock sensor is faulty. A-7. The punch motor is faulty. A-8. The puncher driver PCB (PCB1) is faulty. A-9. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The punch home position sensor (PI63) and punch motor clock sensor (PI62) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor is faulty. B-3. The punch mechanism is faulty. B-4. The punch motor (M61) is faulty. B-5. The punch controller PCB is faulty. B-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-85

E Detailed Occurance code code area E590 -8002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Items

Description

Title

A. Error in the Punch motor (Finisher-K1) B. Punch home position error (External 2 Hole Puncher) Description A. The puncher does not come off the punch HP sensor of detection when the punch motor has been driven for 0.2 second. The puncher does not come off the punch HP sensor during initialization. B. After the motor has been stopped at time of punch motor initialization, the puncher does not detect punch home position sensor. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the punch HP sensor (S104) or the punch motor clock sensor (S105) are disconnected. A-2. The connector of the punch motor (M102) is disconnected. A-3. The wiring of the punch HP sensor or the punch motor clock sensor are faulty. A-4. The wiring of the punch motor is faulty. A-5. The punch HP sensor is faulty. A-6. The punch motor clock sensor is faulty. A-7. The punch motor is faulty. A-8. The puncher driver PCB (PCB1) is faulty. A-9. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The punch home position sensor (PI63) and punch motor clock sensor (PI62) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor is faulty. B-3. The punch mechanism is faulty. B-4. The punch motor (M61) is faulty. B-5. The punch controller PCB is faulty. B-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-85

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E590 -8003

-05

E591 -0001

-05

E591 -0002

-05

E591 -8001

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description

Title Error in the Punch motor (Finisher-K1) Description The puncher does not come off the punch HP sensor of detection when the punch motor has been driven for 0.2 second. The puncher does not come off the punch HP sensor during initialization. Measures 1. The connector of the punch HP sensor (S104)/the punch motor clock sensor (S105) are disconnected. 2. The connector of the punch motor (M102) is disconnected. 3. The wiring of the punch HP sensor or the punch motor clock sensor are faulty. 4. The wiring of the punch motor is faulty. 5. The punch HP sensor is faulty. 6. The punch motor clock sensor is faulty. 7. The punch motor is faulty. 8. The puncher driver PCB (PCB1) is faulty. 9. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Title Upper limit error with Punch Waste Sensor (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) Description The light-receiving voltage was 3.0V or less despite of detection increase in sensor light-emission. Remedy 1. Failure of Punch Waste Sensor (PCB2). 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. Title Lower limit error with Punch Waste Sensor (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) Description The light-receiving voltage was 2.0V or more despite of detection reduction in sensor light-emission. Remedy 1. Failure of Punch Waste Sensor (PCB2). 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. Title Scrap full detection error (External 2 Hole Puncher) Description The voltage of the light received is 3.0 V or less even of detection when the light emitting duty of the scrap full detector sensor has been increased to 66 % or more. Measures 1. The wiring between the scrap full detector PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty. 2. The scrap full detector PCB is faulty. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-86

E Detailed Occurance code code area E591 -8002

-05

E592 -0003

-05

E592 -0004

-05

E592 -0005

-05

E592 -0006

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Items

Description

Title Scrap full detection error (External 2 Hole Puncher) Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even of detection when the light emitting duty of the scrap full detector sensor has been decreased to 0 %. Measures 1. The scrap full detector PCB is faulty. 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Title Upper limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor (B5R) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR5) was 2.5V or less of detection despite increase in sensor light-emission (LED5). Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ PCB4) 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. Title Lower limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor (B5R) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR5) was 2.0V or more of detection despite reduction in sensor light-emission (LED5). Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ PCB4) 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. Title Upper limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor (A4R) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR1) was 2.5V or less of detection despite increase in sensor light-emission (LED1). Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ PCB4) 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. Title Lower limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor (A4R) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR1) was 2.0V or more of detection despite reduction in sensor light-emission (LED1). Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ PCB4) 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB.

7-86

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E592 -0007

-05

Items Title Description of detection Remedy

E592 -0008

-05

Title Description of detection Remedy

E592 -0009

-05

Title Description of detection Remedy

E592 -000A

-05

Title Description of detection Remedy

E592 -000B

-05

Title Description of detection Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description Upper limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor (B4) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) The light-receiving voltage (PTR2) was 2.5V or less despite increase in sensor light-emission (LED2). 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ PCB4) 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. Lower limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor (B4) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) The light-receiving voltage (PTR2) was 2.0V or more despite reduction in sensor light-emission (LED2). 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ PCB4) 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. Upper limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor (LDR) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) The light-receiving voltage (PTR3) was 2.5V or less despite increase in sensor light-emission (LED3). 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ PCB4) 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. Lower limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor (LDR) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) The light-receiving voltage (PTR3) was 2.0V or more despite reduction in sensor light-emission (LED3). 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ PCB4) 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. Upper limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor (A3) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) The light-receiving voltage (PTR4) was 2.5V or less despite increase in sensor light-emission (LED4). 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ PCB4) 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB.

7

7-87

E Detailed Occurance code code area E592 -000C

-05

Items Title Description of detection Remedy

E592 -8001

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E592 -8002

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E592 -8003

-05

Title Description of detection

Measures

E592 -8004

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Description Lower limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor (A3) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) The light-receiving voltage (PTR4) was 2.0V or more despite reduction in sensor light-emission (LED4). 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ PCB4) 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. Trailing edge sensor error (External 2 Hole Puncher) The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor (LED5, PTR5) has been increased to 66 % or more. 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty. 2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Trailing edge sensor error (External 2 Hole Puncher) The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor has been decreased to 0 %. 1. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty. 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration sensor 1 error (External 2 Hole Puncher) The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 1 (LED1, PTR1) has been increased to 66 % or more. 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty. 2. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration sensor 1 error (External 2 Hole Puncher) The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 1 (LED1, PTR1) has been decreased to 0 %. 1. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty. 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-87

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E592 -8005

-05

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E592 -8006

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E592 -8007

-05

Title Description of detection

Measures

E592 -8008

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description Horizontal registration sensor 2 error (External 2 Hole Puncher) The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 2 (LED2, PTR2) has been increased to 66 % or more. 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty. 2. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration sensor 2 error (External 2 Hole Puncher) The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 2 (LED2, PTR2) has been decreased to 0 %. 1. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty. 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration sensor 3 error (External 2 Hole Puncher) The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 3 (LED3, PTR3) has been increased to 66 % or more. 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty. 2. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration sensor 3 error (External 2 Hole Puncher) The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 3 (LED3, PTR3) has been decreased to 0 %. 1) The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty. 2) The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3) The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-88

E Detailed Occurance code code area E592 -8009

-05

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E592 -800A

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Description Horizontal registration sensor 4 error (External 2 Hole Puncher) The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 4 (LED4, PTR4) has been increased to 66 % or more. 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty. 2. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration sensor 4 error (External 2 Hole Puncher) The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 4 (LED4, PTR4) has been decreased to 0 %. 1. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty. 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-88

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E593 -8001

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description

Title

A. Error in the punch slide motor (Finisher-K1) B. Horizontal registration home position error (External 2 Hole Puncher) Description A. The punch unit does not come off the horizontal of detection registration HP sensor when the punch slide motor has been driven for 0.68 second. B. At time of horizontal registration motor initialization, the punch slide unit does not leave the horizontal home position sensor even when it has been driven for 9 mm. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the horizontal registration HP sensor (S101) or the punch slide motor (M101) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the horizontal registration HP sensor or the punch slide motor are faulty. A-3. The horizontal registration HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The punch slide motor is faulty. A-5. The puncher driver PCB (PCB1) is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The horizontal registration home position (PI61) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor is faulty. B-3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty. B-4. The horizontal registration motor (M62) is faulty. B-5. The punch controller PCB is faulty. B-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

E Detailed Occurance code code area E593 -8002

-05

Items Title

Description of detection

Measures

E5A3 -0001

7

7-89

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Description A. Error in the punch slide motor (Finisher-K1) B. Horizontal registration home position error (External 2 Hole Puncher) A. The horizontal registration HP sensor does not detect the punch unit when the punch slide motor has been driven for 3.3 seconds. B. At time of horizontal registration motor initialization, the punch slide unit does not return to the horizontal registration home position sensor even when the unit has been driven for 37 mm. A: A-1. The connector of the horizontal registration HP sensor (S101) or the punch slide motor (M101) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the horizontal registration HP sensor or the punch slide motor are faulty. A-3. The horizontal registration HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The punch slide motor is faulty. A-5. The puncher driver PCB (PCB1) is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The horizontal registration home position (PI61) is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor is faulty. B-3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty. B-4. The horizontal registration motor (M62) is faulty. B-5. The punch controller PCB is faulty. B-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Error in the registration motor (Finisher-K1) The registration HP sensor does not turn ON when the registration motor has been driven for 2.933 seconds. 1. The connector of the registration HP sensor (S105) or the registration motor (M102) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the registration HP sensor/the registration motor are faulty. 3. The registration HP sensor is faulty. 4. The registration motor is faulty. 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty.

7-89

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E5A3 -0002

-05

E5A4 -8001

-05

E5A4 -8002

-05

E5AA -8001

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Error in the registration motor (Finisher-K1) The registration HP sensor does not turn OFF when the registration motor has been driven for 0.67 msecond. 1. The connector of the registration HP sensor (S105) or the registration motor (M102) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the registration HP sensor/the registration motor are faulty. 3. The registration HP sensor is faulty. 4. The registration motor is faulty. 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. Title Error in the press motor (Finisher-K1) Description The press motor HP sensor does not turn ON when the of detection press motor has been driven for 0.926 second. Measures 1. The connector of the press motor HP sensor (S106) or the press motor (M105) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the press motor HP sensor/the press motor are faulty. 3. The press motor HP sensor is faulty. 4. The press motor is faulty. 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. Title Error in the press motor (Finisher-K1) Description The press motor HP sensor does not turn OFF. of detection Measures 1. The connector of the press motor HP sensor (S106) or the press motor (M105) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the press motor HP sensor/the press motor are faulty. 3. The press motor HP sensor is faulty. 4. The press motor is faulty. 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. Title Error in the cutter motor (Finisher-K1) Description The home position of the trimming blade is not detected of detection when the cutter motor has been driven for 5 sec. Measures 1. The connector of the cutter motor clock sensor (S108) or the cutter motor (M106) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the cutter motor clock sensor/the cutter motor are faulty. 3. The cutter motor clock sensor is faulty. 4. The cutter motor is faulty. 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty.

7

7-90

E Detailed Occurance code code area E5AA -8002

-05

E5AA -8003

-05

E5AE -8000

-05

E5BA -8001

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Items

Description

Title Error in the cutter motor (Finisher-K1) Description The cutter motor clock sensor does not come off the of detection home position of the trimming blade when the cutter motor has been driven for 0.5 second. Measures 1. The connector of the cutter motor clock sensor (S108) or the cutter motor (M106) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the cutter motor clock sensor/the cutter motor are faulty. 3. The cutter motor clock sensor is faulty. 4. The cutter motor is faulty. 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. Title Cutter motor clock error (Finisher-K1) Description The cutter motor clock sensor does not detect the motor of detection clock when the cutter motor has been driven for 0.625 second. Measures 1. The connector of the cutter motor clock sensor (S108) or the cutter motor (M106) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the cutter motor clock sensor/the cutter motor are faulty. 3. The cutter motor clock sensor is faulty. 4. The cutter motor is faulty. 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. Title Trimmer stationary paper error Description The inlet sensor detects the stationary paper after of detection performing the paper delivery operation. Measures 1. The paper has jammed in the trimmer. 2. The connector of the inlet sensor (S101) is disconnected. 3. The wire of the inlet sensor is faulty. 4. The inlet sensor is faulty. 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. Title Error in the front estrangement motor (Finisher-K1) Description The front estrangement motor HP sensor does not turn of detection ON when the front estrangement motor has been driven for 0.191 second. Measures 1. The connector of the front estrangement motor HP sensor (S102) or the front estrangement motor (M103) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the front estrangement motor HP sensor/ the front estrangement motor are faulty. 3. The front estrangement motor HP sensor is faulty. 4. The front estrangement motor is faulty. 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty.

7-90

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E5BA -8002

E5BA -8011

E5BA -8012

E5BB -8001

-05

-05

-05

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description

Title Error in the front estrangement motor (Finisher-K1) Description The front estrangement motor HP sensor does not turn of detection OFF when the front estrangement motor has been driven for 0.724 second after the front estrangement motor HP sensor has turned ON. Measures 1. The connector of the front estrangement motor HP sensor (S102) or the front estrangement motor (M103) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the front estrangement motor HP sensor/ the front estrangement motor are faulty. 3. The front estrangement motor HP sensor is faulty. 4. The front estrangement motor is faulty. 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. Title Error in the rear estrangement motor (Finisher-K1) Description The rear estrangement motor HP sensor does not turn of detection ON when the rear estrangement motor has been driven for 0.18 second. Measures 1. The connector of the rear estrangement motor HP sensor (S104) or the rear estrangement motor (M104) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the rear estrangement motor HP sensor/ the rear estrangement motor are faulty. 3. The rear estrangement motor HP sensor is faulty. 4. The rear estrangement motor is faulty. 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. Title Error in the rear estrangement motor (Finisher-K1) Description The rear estrangement motor HP sensor does not turn of detection OFF when the rear estrangement motor has been driven for 0.537 second. Measures 1. The connector of the rear estrangement motor HP sensor (S104) or the rear estrangement motor (M104) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the rear estrangement motor HP sensor/ the rear estrangement motor are faulty. 3. The rear estrangement motor HP sensor is faulty. 4. The rear estrangement motor is faulty. 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. Title Error in the waste paper full sensor (Finisher-K1) Description The A/D input value does not enter into the D/A output of detection upper limit of the waste paper full sensor. Measures 1. The connector of the waste paper full sensor (emitting/ receiving) (S011) is disconnected. 2. The wire of the waste paper full sensor is faulty. 3. The waste paper full sensor is faulty. 4. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty.

7

7-91

E Detailed Occurance code code area

Items

Description Error in the waste paper full sensor (Finisher-K1) The A/D input value does not enter into the D/A output lower limit of the waste paper full sensor. 1. The connector of the waste paper full sensor (emitting/ receiving) (S011) is disconnected. 2. The wire of the waste paper full sensor is faulty. 3. The waste paper full sensor is faulty. 4. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. Tray lift motor of paper folding unit failed to go through HP (Document Insertion Unit) The paper feed sensor (S3) did not turned ON when the inserter paper feed tray moved up. 1. Connector of the motor (M2) is disconnected 2. Upper stopper motor is faulty 3. Connector of the Paper feed sensor (S3) is disconnected 4. Paper feed sensor is faulty Tray lift motor of paper folding unit failed to return to HP (Document Insertion Unit) During initialization or lowering of the inserter paper feed tray, the tray lower limit sensor (S5) has not turned ON within the specified pulses. 1. The connector of the tray lift motor (M2) is disconnected. 2. The tray lift motor is faulty. 3. The connector of the tray lower limit sensor (S5) is disconnected. 4. The tray lower limit sensor is faulty. Tray lift motor of paper folding unit failed to go through HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit) The paper feed sensor (S3) did not turned ON when the inserter paper feed tray moved up. 1. The connector of the tray lift motor (M2) is disconnected. 2. The tray lift motor is faulty. 3. The connector of the paper feed sensor (S3) is disconnected. 4. The Paper feed sensor is faulty.

E5BB -8002

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E5E1 -0001

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E5E1 -0002

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E5E1 -8001

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

7-91

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E5E1 -8002

-05

Items Title Description of detection Measures

E5F0 -8001

-05

Title

Description of detection

Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description Tray lift motor of paper folding unit failed to return to HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit) During initialization or lowering of the inserter paper feed tray, the tray lower limit sensor (S5) has not turned ON within the specified pulses. 1. The connector of the tray lift motor (M2) is disconnected. 2. The tray lift motor is faulty. 3. The connector of the tray lower limit sensor (S5) is disconnected. 4. The tray lower limit sensor is faulty. A. Error in the saddle lead edge stopper motor (Finisher-K1) B. Paper positioning plate home position error (Finisher-L1) A: The saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor does not detect the saddle lead edge stopper when the saddle lead edge stopper has been moved for 182 mm by saddle lead edge stopper motor. B: The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn ON when the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 1500 pulses. A: A-1. The connector of the saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor (S205) or the saddle lead edge stopper motor (M203) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor/the saddle lead edge stopper motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle lead edge stopper motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7) is faulty. B-2. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty. B-3. The paper positioning plate motor (M4) is faulty. B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-92

E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F0 -8002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Items

Description

Title

A. Error in the saddle lead edge stopper motor (Finisher-K1) B. Paper positioning plate home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The saddle lead edge stopper does not come off the of detection saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor when the saddle lead edge stopper motor has been driven for 50 pulses. B. The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn OFF when the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 300 pulses. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor (S205) or the saddle lead edge stopper motor (M203) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor/the saddle lead edge stopper motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle lead edge stopper motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7) is faulty. B-2. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty. B-3. The paper positioning plate motor (M4) is faulty. B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-92

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F1 -8001

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description

Title

A. Saddle folder/feeder motor clock error (Finisher-K1) B. Paper folding motor clock error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The drive speed of the saddle folder/feeder motor is of detection less than 5 mm/sec. B. The feed speed of the paper fold roller reaches 5 mm/ sec or less. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the saddle folder/feeder motor sensor (S214) or the saddle folder/feeder motor (M206) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle folder/feeder motor sensor or the saddle folder/feeder motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle folder/feeder motor sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle folder/feeder motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper folding home position sensor (PI21) is faulty. B-2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty. B-3. The paper folding motor (M2) is faulty. B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-93

E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F1 -8002

-05

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E5F2 -8001

-05

Title Description of detection

Measures

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description A. Error in the saddle folder/feeder motor (Finisher-K1) B. Paper fold home position error (Finisher-L1) A. The saddle folder HP sensor does not detect the home position of the paper fold roller during initialization. B. The status of the paper fold home position sensor does not change when the paper fold motor has been driven for 3 seconds. A: A-1. The connector of the saddle folder HP sensor (S229) or the saddle folder/feeder motor (M206) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle folder HP sensor/the saddle folder/feeder motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle folder HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle folder/feeder motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper folding home position sensor (PI21) is faulty. B-2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty. B-3. The paper folding motor (M2) is faulty. B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A. Error in the saddle roller guide motor (Finisher-K1) B. Guide home position error (Finisher-L1) A. The saddle roller guide HP sensor does not detect the saddle roller guide when the saddle roller guide has been moved for 20 mm by saddle roller guide motor. B. The guide home position sensor does not turn ON when the guide motor has been driven for 700 pulses. A: A-1. The connector of the saddle roller guide HP sensor (S207) or the saddle roller guide motor (M204) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle roller guide HP sensor/ the saddle roller guide motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle roller guide HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle roller guide motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The guide home position sensor (PI13) is faulty. B-2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty. B-3. The guide Motor (M3) is faulty. B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-93

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F2 -8002

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description

Title

A. Error in the saddle roller guide motor (Finisher-K1) B. Guide home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The saddle roller guide does not come off the saddle of detection roller guide HP sensor when the saddle roller guide motor has been driven for 50 pulses. B. The guide home position sensor does not turn OFF when the guide motor has been driven for 50 pulses. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the saddle roller guide HP sensor (S207) or the saddle roller guide motor (M204) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle roller guide HP sensor/ the saddle roller guide motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle roller guide HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle roller guide motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The guide home position sensor (PI13) is faulty. B-2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty. B-3. The guide Motor (M3) is faulty. B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-94

E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F3 -8001

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Items

Description

Title

A. Error in the saddle alignment guide motor (Finisher-K1) B. Aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The saddle alignment plate HP sensor does not detect of detection the saddle alignment guide when the saddle alignment guide has been moved for 177 mm by saddle alignment guide motor. B. The aligning plate home position sensor does not turn ON when the aligning plate motor has been driven for 500 pulses. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the saddle alignment plate HP sensor (S206) or the saddle alignment guide motor (M202) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle alignment plate HP sensor/the saddle alignment guide motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle alignment plate HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle alignment guide motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The aligning plate home position sensor (PI5) is faulty. B-2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty. B-3. The aligning motor (M5) is faulty. B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-94

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F3 -8002

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description

Title

A. Error in the saddle alignment guide motor (Finisher-K1) B. Aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The saddle alignment guide does not come off the of detection saddle alignment plate HP sensor when the saddle alignment guide motor has been driven for 50 pulses. B. The aligning plate home position sensor does not turn OFF when the aligning plate motor has been driven for 50 pulses. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the saddle alignment plate HP sensor (S206) or the saddle alignment guide motor (M202) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle alignment plate HP sensor/the saddle alignment guide motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle alignment plate HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle alignment guide motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The aligning plate home position sensor (PI5) is faulty. B-2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty. B-3. The aligning motor (M5) is faulty. B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-95

E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F4 -8001

-05

Items Title Description of detection

Measures

E5F4 -8002

-05

Title Description of detection

Measures

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description A. Error in the saddle stitcher motor (Finisher-K1) B. Stitcher (rear) home position error (Finisher-L1) A. The saddle stitcher HP sensor does not detect the saddle stitcher unit when the saddle stitcher motor has been driven for 0.48 second. B. The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON when the stitch motor (rear) has been driven backward for 0.5 second. A: A-1. The connector of the saddle stitcher HP sensor (S223) or the saddle stitcher motor (M209) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle stitcher HP sensor/the saddle stitcher motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle stitcher HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle stitcher motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The stitcher home position sensor (rear) (SW5) is faulty. B-2. The stitcher (rear) is faulty. B-3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A. Error in the saddle stitcher motor (Finisher-K1) B. Stitcher (rear) home position error (Finisher-L1) A. The saddle stitcher unit does not come off the saddle stitcher HP sensor when the saddle stitcher motor has been driven for 0.48 second. B. The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF when the stitch motor (rear) has been driven forward for 0.5 second. A: A-1. The connector of the saddle stitcher HP sensor (S223) or the saddle stitcher motor (M209) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle stitcher HP sensor/the saddle stitcher motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle stitcher HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle stitcher motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The stitcher home position sensor (rear) (SW5) is faulty. B-2. The stitcher (rear) is faulty. B-3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-95

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F5 -8001

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description

Title

A. Error in the saddle trailing edge retainer motor (Finisher-K1) B. Stitcher (front) home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor does of detection not detect the saddle trailing edge retainer when the saddle trailing edge retainer has been moved for 96 mm by saddle trailing edge retainer motor. B. The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON when the stitch motor (front) has been driven forward for 0.5 second. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor (S219) or the saddle trailing edge retainer motor (M210) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor/the saddle trailing edge retainer motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle trailing edge retainer motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The stitcher home position sensor (front) (SW7) is faulty. B-2. The stitcher (front) is faulty. B-3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-96

E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F5 -8002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Items

Description

Title

A. Error in the saddle trailing edge retainer motor (Finisher-K1) B. Stitcher (front) home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The saddle trailing edge retainer does not come off the of detection saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor when the saddle trailing edge retainer motor has been driven for 50 pulses. B. The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF when the stitch motor (front) has been driven backward for 0.5 second. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor (S219) or the saddle trailing edge retainer motor (M210) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor/the saddle trailing edge retainer motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle trailing edge retainer motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The stitcher home position sensor (front) (SW7) is faulty. B-2. The stitcher (front) is faulty. B-3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-96

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F6 -8001

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description

Title

A. Error in the saddle paper push-on plate motor (Finisher-K1) B. Paper pushing plate home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor does not of detection detect the saddle paper push-on plate when the saddle paper push-on plate motor has been driven for 0.5 second. B. The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 0.5 second. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor (S218) or the saddle paper push-on plate motor (M205) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor/the saddle paper push-on plate motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle paper push-on plate motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty. B-2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty. B-3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-97

E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F6 -8002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Items

Description

Title

A. Error in the saddle paper push-on plate motor (Finisher-K1) B. Paper pushing plate home position error (Finisher-L1) Description A. The saddle paper push-on plate does not come off of detection the saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor when the saddle paper push-on plate motor has been driven for 0.15 second. B. The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn OFF when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 150 msecond. Measures A: A-1. The connector of the saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor (S218) or the saddle paper push-on plate motor (M205) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor/the saddle paper push-on plate motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle paper push-on plate motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty. B-2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty. B-3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-97

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F6 -8003

-05

Items Title

Description of detection

Measures

E5F6 -8004

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description A. Saddle paper push-on plate motor clock error (Finisher-K1) B. Paper pushing plate motor clock error (Finisher-L1) A. The drive speed of the saddle paper push-on plate motor is less than 6 clocks. B. The number of pulses detected by the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor is 6 pulses or less. A: A-1. The connector of the saddle paper push-on plate motor sensor (S213) or the saddle paper push-on plate motor (M205) are disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the saddle paper push-on plate motor sensor/the saddle paper push-on plate motor are faulty. A-3. The saddle paper push-on plate motor sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle paper push-on plate motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B: B-1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty. B-2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty. B-3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty. B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Pushing position error (Finisher-L1) The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor does not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 0.1 second. 1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14)/ paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15)/paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) are faulty. 2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-98

E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F6 -8005

-05

E5F7 -8001

-05

E5F7 -8002

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Items

Description

Title Pushing position error (Finisher-L1) Description The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor of detection does not turn OFF when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 0.5 second. Measures 1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14)/ paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15)/paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) are faulty. 2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Title Error in the saddle trailing edge retainer motor (Finisher-K1) Description The saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor does not of detection detect the saddle trailing edge retainer when the saddle trailing edge retainer motor has been driven for 80 pulses. Measures 1. The connector of the saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor (S221) or the saddle trailing edge retainer motor (M210) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor/the saddle trailing edge retainer motor are faulty. 3. The saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor is faulty. 4. The saddle trailing edge retainer motor is faulty. 5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. 6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Title Error in the saddle trailing edge retainer motor (Finisher-K1) Description The saddle trailing edge retainer does not come off the of detection saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor when the saddle trailing edge retainer motor has been driven for 50 pulses. Measures 1. The connector of the saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor (S221) or the saddle trailing edge retainer motor (M210) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor/the saddle trailing edge retainer motor are faulty. 3. The saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor is faulty. 4. The saddle trailing edge retainer motor is faulty. 5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. 6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-98

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F8 -8001

-05

E5F8 -8002

-05

E5F9 -8001

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

Description

Title Error in the saddle tapping motor (Finisher-K1) Description The saddle paper tapping HP sensor does not detect the of detection saddle tapping plate when the saddle tapping motor has been driven for 50 pulses. Measures 1. The connector of the saddle paper tapping HP sensor (S215) or the saddle tapping motor (M213) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the saddle paper tapping HP sensor/the saddle tapping motor are faulty. 3. The saddle paper tapping HP sensor is faulty. 4. The saddle tapping motor is faulty. 5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. 6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Title Error in the saddle tapping motor (Finisher-K1) Description The saddle tapping plate does not come off the saddle of detection paper tapping HP sensor when the saddle tapping motor has been driven for 50 pulses. Measures 1. The connector of the saddle paper tapping HP sensor (S215) or the saddle tapping motor (M213) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the saddle paper tapping HP sensor/the saddle tapping motor are faulty. 3. The saddle paper tapping HP sensor is faulty. 4. The saddle tapping motor is faulty. 5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. 6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Title Error in the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor (Finisher-K1) Description The saddle lead-in roller HP sensor does not detect of detection the saddle lead-in roller when the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor has been driven for 50 pulses. Measures 1. The connector of the saddle lead-in roller HP sensor (S222) or the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor (M214) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the saddle lead-in roller HP sensor/the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor are faulty. 3. The saddle lead-in roller HP sensor is faulty. 4. The saddle lead-in roller disengage motor is faulty. 5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. 6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-99

E Detailed Occurance code code area E5F9 -8002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9

-05

Items

Description

Title

Error in the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor (Finisher-K1) Description The saddle lead-in roller does not come off the saddle of detection lead-in roller HP sensor when the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor has been driven for 50 pulses. Measures 1. The connector of the saddle lead-in roller HP sensor (S222) or the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor (M214) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the saddle lead-in roller HP sensor/the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor are faulty. 3. The saddle lead-in roller HP sensor is faulty. 4. The saddle lead-in roller disengage motor is faulty. 5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. 6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. T-7-11

7-99

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

■■E602 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0001

-00

E602 -0002

-00

Items

Description

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0003

Title Error in HDD Description HDD failed to be recognized. Startup partition (BOOTDEV) failed to be found at startup. Remedy 1. Turn OFF the main switch and check connection of HDD cable, and then turn ON the main switch. 2. If the Encryption Board has been installed, there may be an Encryption Board failure. In this case, disconnect the signal cable connecting to the Encryption Board and directly connect to the HDD. (It cannot be connected from the back side. Open the Main Controller Cover, and connect by going over the Main Controller PCB 1.) After connecting, power on by the safe mode. If the machine starts normally, replace the Encryption Board as the Encryption Board had failed. 3. Be sure that HDD spins stably (no problem in drive sound) and 5V/12V power is supplied when the main power is turned ON. (If the drive sound is abnormal, replace the HDD.) 4. Replace the HDD and reinstall the system. (In the case of using a USB memory device, insert a USB memory device where the system software has been registered to the slot of the host machine, and then execute main menu [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all).) 5. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. Title Error in HDD Description There is no system for the main CPU Remedy 1. Start in Safe Mode, then perform overall format using SST or USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Switch. (Prepare the USB memory which system software was registered. Insert the USB memory to the equipment. Execute [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite All) in the main menu.) 2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be caused by failure with HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-100

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description WriteAbort was detected with BootDevice Remedy 1. Execute detection and recovery of WriteAbortSector 1-1. Perform the following steps because Service Mode is not available. 1-2. Turn OFF the power. Then, while pressing 1+9 keys, turn ON the power. WriteAbortSector recovery routine is automatically started which makes the screen black. 1-3. After a while, progress is displayed because the process takes time (40 to 50 min.). The process is complete when the screen turns white. 1-1. Set as follows: CHK-TYPE=0; and execute HD-CHECK (40 to 50 min.), and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch. 2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch. 3. If no improvement is found despite the above measures, it can be caused by failure with HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-100

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0006

-00

E602 -0007

-00

E602 -0009

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description There is no system for the sub CPU Remedy Reinstall the system software. For details, see “Chapter 6: Upgrading”. For your reference, the method using USB memory is described below. 1. Prepare the USB memory which system software was registered. 2. Execute the following service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD to enter the download mode. (When it is not operated normally, start the safe mode.) 3. Insert the USB memory to the equipment. 4. Execute [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite All) in the main menu. (Be sure to download SYSTEM, LANGUAGE and RUI.) 5. System software is downloaded and the machine restarts automatically. At this time, if the machine restarts with the safe mode, E753 might occurs. Check the log. In case of the system software of the options which are not connected, turn OFF and then ON the power supply to restore. (For details, see the description for E753.)

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0010

-00

E602 -0011

-00

E602 -0012

-00

If the measures above do not solve the problem, replace the HDD and download the system software with the foregoing method. Title Error in HDD Description There is no ICCProfile Remedy 1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using SST; and then turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. 2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Error in HDD Description There is no Font file in /BOOTDEV/BOOT Remedy 1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using SST; and then turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. 2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-101

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description There is no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files Remedy 1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using SST; and then turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. 2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Error in HDD Description There is no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files Remedy 1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using SST; and then turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. 2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Error in HDD Description There is no file in which the Web browser refers to Remedy 1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the Web browser using SST, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. 2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-101

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0101

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

7-102

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0111

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power.(Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

7-102

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0201

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in management data area of image (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

7-103

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0211

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in management data area of image (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=2, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=2, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=2, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=2, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=2, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=2, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

7-103

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0301

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Storage area of image data (temporary data) (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0311

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=3, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD. Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=3, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=3, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD. Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

7-104

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Storage area of image data (temporary data) (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.) Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=3, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD. Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=3, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=3, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD. Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-104

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0401

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in thumbnail area (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

7-105

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0411

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in thumbnail area (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=4, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=4, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=4, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=4, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=4, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=4, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

7-105

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0501

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of universal data (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

7-106

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0511

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of universal data (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=5, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=5, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=5, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=5, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=5, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=5, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

7-106

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0601

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data) (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

7-107

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0611

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data) (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=6, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=6, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=6, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=6, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=6, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=6, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

7-107

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0701

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0711

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=7, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD. Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=7, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=7, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD. Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

7-108

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.) Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=7, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD. Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=7, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=7, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD. Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-108

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0801

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0811

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=8, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD. Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=8, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=8, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD. Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

7-109

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.) Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=8, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD. Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=8, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=8, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD. Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-109

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0901

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of PDL-related file (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

7-110

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -0911

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of PDL-related file (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=9, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=9, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=9, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=9, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=9, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=9, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

7-110

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -1001

-00

E602 -1011

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of firmware (BOOTDEV) (at startup) Remedy If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, 1. Format the BOOTDEV using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 2. Replace the HDD. Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of firmware (BOOTDEV) (after startup) Remedy If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, 1. Format the BOOTDEV using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 2. Replace the HDD.

7-111

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -1101

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in MEAP area (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.) Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD. Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD. Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

7-111

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -1111

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in MEAP area (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.) Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD. Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -1201

-00

E602 -1211

-00

E602 -1301

-00

E602 -1311

-00

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

7-112

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in Send area (at startup) Remedy If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=12, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Format the all using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD. Title Error in HDD Description Error in Send area (after startup) Remedy If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=12, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Format the all using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD. Title Error in HDD Description Error in MEAP area (at startup) Remedy If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=13, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Format the all using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD. Title Error in HDD Description Error in MEAP area (after startup) Remedy If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=13, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Format the all using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

7-112

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -1401

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of system log (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

7-113

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -1411

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of system log (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=14, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=14, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=14, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=14, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=14, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=14, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

7-113

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -1501

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in Advanced Box area (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

7-114

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -1511

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in Advanced Box area (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=15, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=15, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=15, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=15, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=15, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=15, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

7-114

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -1601

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in CDS area (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

7-115

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -1611

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description Error in CDS area (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, ask the followings to user. A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=16, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case A 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=16, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=16, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=16, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Case B 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. → Enter CHK-TYPE=16, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Back up necessary data. 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=16, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup data. 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

7-115

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -2000

-00

E602 -4000

-00

E602 -4001

-00

E602 -FF01

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

Description

Title Error in HDD Encryption Board Description Authentication error between the host machine and the Encryption Board. Remedy 1. After checking connection of the Encryption Board, disconnect and connect the connector and, turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Execute the key clear procedure.

E Detailed Occurance code code area E602 -FF11

* Key clear: system recovery procedure 1. Execute the key clear procedure with SST. → As a result, the disk becomes unformatted disk. Thus, it is necessary to execute step 2. → E602-0001 will be indicated if activating the machine with the unformatted disk. 2. Execute HDD format and system reinstallation with SST. Title Error in HDD Description Unable to mount the Linux system. Remedy 1. Check the cable and the power connector. 2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch. 3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Error in HDD Description No Linux system start script. Remedy 1. Check the cable and the power connector. 2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch. 3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Error in HDD Description HDD error (unidentified) (at startup) Remedy 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Disconnect and then connect the HDD connector. 3. Format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD.

7

7-116

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602

-00

Items

Description

Title Error in HDD Description HDD error (unidentified) (after startup) Remedy 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Disconnect and then connect the HDD connector. 3. Format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 4. Replace the HDD. T-7-12

7-116

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753

■■E604 to E753 E Detailed Occurance code code area E604 -1024

E611 -0000

E674 -0001

E674 -0004

E674 -0008

E674 -000C

E674 -0010

-00

-00

-00

-00

-00

-00

-00

Items Title Description of detection Measures Title

Description

7-117

E Detailed Occurance code code area E674 -0011

-00

E674 -0030

-00

E677 -0001

-00

E677 -0003

-00

Title Description of detection Measures

E677 -0004

-00

Title Description of detection Measures

E677 -0010

-00

E677 -0080

-00

Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures

Lack of memory Lack of memory (1,024MB required)

Add the DDR2-SDRAM Re-reboot due to failures such as SRAM damage when executing the power shutdown safeguard transmission job Description SRAM data is damaged and stored job data cannot be of detection read. If this causes the repeated reboot execution after recovery from power shutdown, a transmission is also repeated. Therefore “E code” is displayed. Measures Execute SRAM clear and delete power shutdown safeguard job Title FAX is abnormal Description Communication error with the FAX board of detection Measures 1. Cable connection check 2. FAX board replacement 3. Main controller board replacement Title FAX is abnormal Description Modem IC access is abnormal of detection Measures 1. Cable connection check 2. FAX board replacement 3. Main controller board replacement Title FAX is abnormal Description Port IC access is abnormal of detection Measures 1. Cable connection check 2. FAX board replacement 3. Main controller board replacement Title FAX is abnormal Description Modem IC/ port IC access is abnormal of detection Measures 1. Cable connection check 2. FAX board replacement 3. Main controller board replacement Title FAX is abnormal Description FAX is abnormal of detection Measures Main controller board replacement

7

Items

E710 -0001

-00

E711 -0001

-00

E711 -0001

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753

Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures

Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures

Description FAX is abnormal FAX is abnormal Main controller board replacement FAX is abnormal Check sum error System software download for 2 line FAX Print server failure Abnormality detected on the exhaust fan operation of printer server 1. Check supplying power to the exhaust fan 2. Exhaust fan replacement Print server failure Abnormality is detected during configuration check in start up 1. Cable connection check 2. Reinstallation system Print server failure Abnormality detected on the CPU fan operation of printer server 1. Check supplying power to the CPU fan 2. CPU fan replacement Print server failure Unsupported print server is connected Change for regular print server Print server failure Communication error in start-up 1. Cable connection check 2. Reinstallation system Printer IPC error In case that IPC communication IC in the printer engine detected a failure when turning power ON Check the cable. IPC communication is abnormal When 4 or more error occurrence is set to the error register in IPC chip within 1.5 seconds. Check the cable. IPC communication failure Occurrence of an error was set in the error resistor of the IPC chip more than four times in 1.5 seconds. Check the cable.

7-117

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area

Items

Description Finisher communication error Communication failed between the finisher and the host machine. 1. Check the cable connection. 2. Replace the finisher controller circuit PCB. 3. Replace the DC controller circuit PCB. Communication with the NE controller is abnormal Error in the NE controller start When the NE controller which should have been connected is not connected before the power off at power supply time to turn on Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR after cable check Communication with the NE controller is abnormal IPC error in the NE controller operation In the case of the errors that disconnection of IPC, or IPC communication is unrecoverable. Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR after cable check Coin vendor failure Error in the Coin vendor start When the Coin vendor which should have been connected is not connected before the power off at power supply time to turn on Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR after cable check Coin vendor failure IPC error in the Coin vendor operation In the case of the errors that disconnection of IPC, or IPC communication is unrecoverable. In the case of connection failure detection for a signal of paper pickup/delivery In the case of the detection of improper connection Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR after cable check Coin vendor failure In the case of communication error with the Coin vendor during the unit price acquisition in startup Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR after cable check Error in the card reader startup When the card reader, which should have been connected before the power off, is not connected at power ON. Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR after cable check

E713 -0001

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E717 -0001

-00

Title Description of detection

Measures E717 -0002

-00

Title Description of detection Measures

E719 -0001

-00

Title Description of detection

Measures E719 -0002

-00

Title Description of detection

Measures E719 -0003

E719 -0011

-00

-00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753

Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures

7

7-118

E Detailed Occurance code code area

Items

Description IPC error in the card reader operation In the case of the errors that disconnection of IPC, or IPC communication is unrecoverable. Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR after cable check Communication error in the card reader (a serial number) startup In case a communication with card reader cannot start in startup 1. Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR after cable connection check for card reader (Connector connection, pinching wire) 2. Execute the following service mode after card reader removal, and re-install card reader. • COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CARD • COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR Communication error after the card reader (a serial number) startup Communicate with card reader is succeeded in the startup, but it became impossible. Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR after cable connection check for card reader (Connector connection, pinching wire) Model mismatch error An accessory that is not supported is connected.

E719 -0012

-00

Title Description of detection Measures

E719 -0031

-00

Title Description of detection Measures

E719 -0032

-00

Title Description of detection Measures

E720 -0001

-05

E720 -0002

-05

E720 -0003

-05

E720 -0004

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753

Title Description of detection Measures Check the configuration of accessories. Staple Finisher-K1 is connected with iR ADV C9280. Title Model mismatch error Description An accessory that is not supported is connected. of detection Measures Check the configuration of accessories. Staple Finisher-K1 is connected with iR ADV C9270. Title Model mismatch error Description An accessory that is not supported is connected. of detection Measures Check the configuration of accessories. A wrong Finisher is connected. Title Model mismatch error Description A Finisher that is not supported is connected. of detection Measures Check the configuration of accessories. A Finisher that is not supported is connected to the host machine.

7-118

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E720 -0005

-05

E720 -0006

-05

E730 -1001

-00

E730 -100A

-00

E730 -A006

E730 -A007

E730 -B013

E730 -C000

-00

-00

-00

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753

Description

Title Different model error Description A wrong accessory is connected. of detection Remedy Check the configuration of accessories. A wrong Finisher is connected. Title Different model error Description A wrong accessory is connected. of detection Remedy Check the configuration of accessories. A wrong Finisher is connected. Title PDL software failure Description Initialization error of detection Measures 1. PDL reset processing 2. Power cycle (Power OFF/ON) Title PDL software failure Description In case system fatal error such as initialization failure of detection occurs Measures 1. PDL reset processing 2. Power cycle (Power OFF/ON) Title PDL software failure Description No response from PDL. In the case of no response from of detection PDL due to Subbootable failure or no existence. Measures 1. PDL reset processing 2. Power cycle (Power OFF/ON) 3. Main controller board connection check 4. Re-installation of firmware 5. Main controller board replacement Title PDL software failure Description In case of discrepancy of the version between the control of detection software in main unit and PDL control software. Measures 1. PDL reset processing 2. Power cycle (Power OFF/ON) 3. System full-format and installation Title PDL software failure Description Font data is damaged of detection Measures 1. Power cycle (Power OFF/ON) 2. System re-installation 3. System full-format and installation Title PDL software failure Description Memory acquisition error in the initialization of detection Measures 1. System full-format and installation 2. Main controller board 1 replacement

7

7-119

E Detailed Occurance code code area E730 -C001

-00

E731 -3000

-00

E731 -3001

-00

E731 -3002

-00

E731 -3015

-00

E732 -0000

-00

E732 -0001

-00

E732 -8888

-00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753

Items

Description

Title PDL software failure Description HDD access error of detection Measures 1. System full-format and installation 2. HDD replacement 3. Main controller board 1 replacement Title Image processing module failure Description Image processing module failure of detection Measures Main controller board 2 replacement Title Image processing module failure Description Image processing module failure of detection Measures Main controller board 2 replacement Title Image processing module failure Description Image processing module failure of detection Measures Main controller board 2 replacement Title Image processing module failure Description Image processing module failure of detection Measures Main controller board 2 replacement Title Reader communication is abnormal Description Negotiation failure of detection Measures 1. Connected connector check with the reader 2. Power supply check for the reader (check if initialization is executed in startup) 3. Replacement of the reader controller board and main controller board Title Reader communication is abnormal Description Communication error of detection Measures 1. Connected connector check with the reader 2. Power supply check for the reader (check if initialization is executed in startup) 3. Replacement of the reader controller board and main controller board Title Error in the reader type Description When a scanner for the different model is detected during of detection the communication with the reader. Measures Replace to the proper reader.

7-119

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E732 -9999

-00

E733 -0000

-00

E733 -0001

-00

E733 -0002

-00

E733 -0010

-00

E733 -0020

E733 -0021

-00

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753

Description

Title The Reader detection Description In case of first detection of the reader on printer model of detection (‘Please power cycle’ message is only displayed on the user screen instead of an error code. Service mode> DISPLAY> ERR is recorded in error log.) Measures --Title Printer communication is abnormal Description Cannot communicate with a printer in startup of detection Measures --Title Printer communication is abnormal Description Failure of communication between the controller and DC of detection controller Measures 1. Connected connector check with the printer 2. The power supply check (check if initialization is executed in startup) of the printer 3. Replacement of DC controller or main controller board Title Printer communication error Description An error occurred to detect printer vertical synchronous of detection signal. Measures 1. Check the connection to the printer. → Connect the connector/replace the harness. 2. Check the power of the printer (check if the initialization operation is executed at startup). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB/Main Controller PCB. Title Printer communication is abnormal Description Printer vertical synchronizing signal detection failure of detection Measures 1. Connected connector check with the printer 2. The power supply check (check if initialization is executed in startup) of the printer 3. Replacement of DC controller or main controller board Title Printer communication is abnormal Description Communication error of detection Measures 1. Connected connector check with the printer 2. The power supply check (check if initialization is executed in startup) of the printer 3. Replacement of DC controller or main controller board Title Printer communication is abnormal Description Communication error of detection Measures 1. Connected connector check with the printer 2. The power supply check (check if initialization is executed in startup) of the printer 3. Replacement of DC controller or main controller board

7

7-120

E Detailed Occurance code code area E743 -0000

-04

E743 -0003

-04

E743 -0004

-04

E744 -0001

-00

E744 -0002

-00

E744 -0003

-00

E744 -0004

-00

E744 -1000

-00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753

Items

Description

Title DDI communication error Description The reader controller PCB detected a failure in of detection communication between the main controller PCB and the reader controller PCB. Measures 1. Failure of the connection between the main controller PCB and the reader controller PCB 2. Failure of the reader controller PCB (PCB1) 3. Failure of the main controller PCB Title DDI communication error Description The reader controller PCB detected a failure in of detection communication between the main controller PCB and the reader controller PCB. Measures 1. Failure of the connection between the main controller PCB and the reader controller PCB 2. Failure of the reader controller PCB (PCB1) 3. Failure of the main controller PCB Title DDI communication error Description The reader controller PCB detected a failure in of detection communication between the main controller PCB and the reader controller PCB. Measures 1. Failure of the connection between the main controller PCB and the reader controller PCB 2. Failure of the reader controller PCB (PCB1) 3. Failure of the main controller PCB Title Language file /BootROM is abnormal Description In case of discrepancy in the version between Bootable of detection and the language in the HDD Measures Download the language file of correct version Title Language file /BootROM is abnormal Description When Size of the language in the HDD is too big of detection Measures Download the language file of correct version Title Language file /BootROM is abnormal Description When a language to switch, which stated in Config.txt, is of detection not found in the HDD. Measures Download the language file of correct version Title Language file /BootROM is abnormal Description When cannot switch to the language in the HDD of detection Measures Download the language file of correct version Title Language file /BootROM is abnormal Description In case wrong Boot ROM (for different model) is installed of detection Measures Replace with the Boot ROM for correct model

7-120

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E744 -2000

-00

E746 -0021

-00

E746 -0022

-00

E746 -0023

-00

E746 -0024

-00

E746 -0031

-00

E746 -0032

E746 -0033

-00

-00

Items Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753

Description Language file /BootROM is abnormal When engine ID in Soft ID is invalid

7-121

E Detailed Occurance code code area E746 -0034

-00

E746 -0035

-00

E747 -7f00

-00

E747 -ff01

-00

E747 -xxxx

-00

E748 -2010

-00

E748 -2011

-00

E748 -2012

-00

E748 -2021

-00

E748 -2022

-00

Replace with the Soft ID for correct model Image analysis board self-check failure detection Image analysis board self-check failure detection

1. Connection check of the image analysis board 2. Image analysis board replacement Title Image analysis board version is invalid Description Image analysis board version is invalid of detection Measures 1. Upgrading of the image analysis board software 2. Image analysis board replacement Title No response from image analysis board Description No response from image analysis board of detection Measures 1. Connection check of the image analysis board 2. Image analysis board replacement Title Image analysis board operation abnormality Description Image analysis board operation abnormality of detection Measures 1. Connection check of the image analysis board 2. Image analysis board replacement Title Hardware error (TPM) Description Hardware error (TPM) of detection Measures 1. TPM board non-installation 2. Installation of TPM board from other units 3. TPM chip broken Title The error that system restoration is impossible occurred (TPM) Description The error that system restoration is impossible occurred of detection (TPM) Measures The location of the security information in HDD/SRAM is unidentified Execute “Initialization of all data / setting” Title Error occurred; but possible for system restoration (TPM) Description Error occurred; but possible for system restoration (TPM) of detection Measures Discrepancy of the key Execute the re-store of the TPM key

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753

Items

Description

Title

Error occurred; but possible for automatic system restoration (TPM) Description Error occurred; but possible for automatic system of detection restoration (TPM) Measures Discrepancy of the key occurred. But restoration is possible when reboot. Power cycle (Power OFF/ON) Title TPM version error Description TPM which cannot be used in this machine was installed. of detection Measures Install the supported TPM. Title Bypass board is not connected Description Bypass board is not connected of detection Measures Bypass board is not connected Title DDR - SDRAM (P) is not connected Description DDR - SDRAM (P) is not connected of detection Measures DDR - SDRAM (P) is not connected Title Image processing IC failure Description Image processing IC failure of detection Measures Main controller board 2 replacement Title Flash board error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title Flash board error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title Flash board error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases Title Main controller board 2 access errors Description Main controller board 2 access errors of detection Measures Main controller board 1/2 removing and inserting, replacement Title Main controller board 2 access errors Description Main controller board 2 access errors of detection Measures Main controller board 1/2 removing and inserting, replacement

7-121

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E748 -2023

-00

E748 -2024

-00

E748 -2025

-00

E748 -2026

-00

E748 -4xxx

-00

E748 -9000

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753

Description

Title Main controller board 2 access errors Description Main controller board 2 access errors of detection Measures DDR2-SDRAM (M0/M1/P) removing and inserting, replacement Title Main controller board 2 access errors Description Main controller board 2 access errors of detection Measures Main controller board 1/2 removing and inserting, replacement Title Main Controller PCB 2 access error Description Disconnection of the Bypass PCB was detected. of detection Measures Remove and then install the Bypass PCB. Title Main Controller PCB 2 access error Description Disconnection of the Image Processing Sub PCB was of detection detected. Measures Remove and then install the Image Processing Sub PCB. Title Main controller board 2 errors Description Main controller board 2 errors of detection Measures Main controller board replacement Title System error Description --of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases

7-122

E Detailed Occurance code code area E749 -0006

E753 -0001

-06

-00

Items

Description

Title Restart direction due to configuration change. Description The option such as the Finisher and Paper Deck was of detection installed or removed when all of following conditions were met and the machine configuration is changed when the main power switch is turned ON. • Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Quick Startup at Power-on > ON • The Main Power Switch is turned OFF • The power plug of the machine is connected to the output. • The breaker is ON Measures It is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the main power. CAUTION This machine provides power to some PCBs even when in the main power OFF status. The power supply is not completely OFF by just turning OFF the main power switch and therefore, the machine is unable to detect a configuration change. When disconnecting and then connecting a connector, always disconnect the power plug or turn the breaker OFF. Refer to the Service Manual > Chapter 2 > External and Controls > Quick Startup for details. Title Error in Finisher Boot software Description The Boot software has not been written in ROM of the of detection finisher controller. Measures 1. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. 2. The host machine controller PCB is faulty. T-7-13

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753

7-122

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991

■■E804 to E991 E Detailed Occurance code code area E804 -0000

E804 -0001

E804 -0002

E804 -0003

E804 -0004

-00

-05

-05

-05

-05

E804 -0005

-05

E804 -0006

-05

E804 -0007

-05

Items

Description

Title Power supply cooling fan (FM3) error Description When detect a failure of the power supply cooling fan of detection Measures 1. Connector disconnection 2. Power supply cooling fan failure Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the pre-fixing feed suction fan of detection (FM1). Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the pre-fixing feed suction fan (FM1). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the primary charging suction fan of detection (FM2). Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the primary charging suction fan (FM2). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the primary charging suction fan of detection (FM3). Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the primary charging suction fan (FM3). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the developing/pre-transfer of detection charging fan (FM4). Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the developing/pre-transfer charging fan (FM4). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the color cleaning fan (FM5). of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the color cleaning fan (FM5). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the fixing heat fan (FM6). of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the fixing heat fan (FM6). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the IH power supply fan (FM7). of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the IH power supply fan (FM7).

7

7-123

E Detailed Occurance code code area E804 -0010

-05

E804 -0011

-05

E804 -0012

-05

E804 -0013

-05

E804 -0015

-05

E804 -0016

-05

E804 -0017

-05

E804 -0018

-05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991

Items

Description

Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the delivery heat fan 1 (FM10). of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the delivery heat fan 1 (FM10). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the delivery heat fan 2 (FM11). of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the delivery heat fan 2 (FM11). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the delivery heat fan 3 (FM12). of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the delivery heat fan 3 (FM12). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the delivery heat fan 4 (FM13). of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the delivery heat fan 4 (FM13). Title Fan error Description Error in Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Front) (FM15) of detection Measures 1. Check connection of the connector. 2. Replace the Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Front) (FM15). Title Fan error Description Error in Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM16) of detection Measures 1. Check connection of the connector. 2. Replace the Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM16). Title Fan error Description Error in Fixing Feed Cooling Fan (Front) (FM27) of detection Measures 1. Check connection of the connector. 2. Replace the Fixing Feed Cooling Fan (Front) (FM27). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the hopper cooling fan (FM18). of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the hopper cooling fan (FM18).

7-123

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E804 -0022

-05

E804 -0023

-05

E804 -0024

-05

E804 -0030

-05

E804 -0031

-05

E804 -0032

-05

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991

Description

Title Description of detection Measures

Fan error A failure was detected at the hopper cooling suction fan (FM22). 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the hopper cooling suction fan (FM22). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the anti-adhesion fan 1 (FM23). of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the anti-adhesion fan 1 (FM23). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the anti-adhesion fan 2 (FM24). of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the anti-adhesion fan 2 (FM24). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the decurler suction fan (FM30). of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the decurler suction fan (FM30). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the decurler side exhaust fan of detection (FM31). Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the decurler side exhaust fan (FM31). Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the decurler lower side exhaust of detection fan (FM32). Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the decurler lower side exhaust fan (FM32).

7

7-124

E Detailed Occurance code code area E840 -0001

E840 -0215

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991

-05

-05

Items

Description

Title Fixing Core/Shield Plate HP error Description of detection Home position could not be detected although 200 seconds have passed since the Fixing Core/Shield Plate started moving. Home position could not be detected although 8 seconds have passed since the Fixing Core/Shield Plate started moving. Remedy 1. Check connection of the connectors of Core Shutter Motor (M56) and Core Shift HP Sensor (PS98). 2. Check ha rness of the corresponding parts. → Replace the harness when it is disconnected. 3. Check the Fixing Film Unit. → Replace the Fixing Film Unit when it is damaged. 4. Replace the Core Shift Motor (M56) and Core Shift HP Sensor (PS98). 5. Replace the IH Unit. 6. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. NOTE: After performing the remedy work above, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. Title Fixing Core/Shield Plate HP error due to displacement of the Fixing Film Description Home position of the Fixing Core/Shield Plate could not of detection be detected due to displacement of the Fixing Film. Remedy 1. Check connection of the connectors of Core Shutter Motor (M56) and Core Shift HP Sensor (PS98). 2. Check harness of the corresponding parts. → Replace the harness when it is disconnected. 3. Check the Fixing Film Unit. → Replace the Fixing Film Unit when it is damaged. 4. Replace the Core Shift Motor (M56) and Core Shift HP Sensor (PS98). 5. Replace the IH Unit. 6. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. NOTE: After performing the remedy work above, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.

7-124

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area E841 -0001

E842 -0001

E843 -0001

E880 -0001

-05

-05

-05

-00

Items

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991

Description

Title Fixing Assembly reciprocation operation error Description Home position could not be detected although 5 seconds of detection have passed since the reciprocation operation of the Fixing Assembly started. Remedy 1. Check connection of the connectors of the Fixing Motor (M48) and the Fixing Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS100). 2. Check harness of the corresponding parts. → Replace the harness when it is disconnected. 3. Replace the Reciprocation Motor (M53) and the Fixing Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS100). 4. Replace the Fixing Base Unit. 5. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. NOTE: After performing the remedy work above, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. Title Heat Soaking Roller HP error Description Home position could not be detected although 10 of detection seconds have passed since engagement/disengagement of the Heat Soaking Roller started. Remedy 1. Check connection of the connectors of the Fixing Motor (M48) and the Fixing Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS100). 2. Check harness of the corresponding parts. → Replace the harness when it is disconnected. 3. Replace the Reciprocation Motor (M53) and the Fixing Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS100). 4. Replace the Fixing Base Unit. 5. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. NOTE: After performing the remedy work above, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. Title Disconnection of the power supply plug for fixing Description The product has two plugs, and the plug used to supply of detection power to the fixing assembly was disconnected. When this error occurs, a message indicating that the plug is disconnected is displayed. Measures Check the power supply plug for fixing. Title Controller fan1 (FM19) Error Description When detect a failure of the power supply cooling fan of detection Measures 1. Connector disconnection 2. Controller fan 1 (FM19) failure

7

7-125

E Detailed Occurance code code area E880 -0004

-00

E880 -0005

-00

E881 -0001

-00

Items

Description

Title Controller fan2 (FM20) error Description When detect a failure of the power supply cooling fan of detection Measures 1. Connector disconnection 2. Controller fan 2 (FM20) failure Title HDD cooling fan (FM21) error Description When detect a failure of the power supply cooling fan of detection Measures 1. Connector disconnection 2. HDD cooling fan (FM21) failure Title CPU abnormal temperature rising error Description It was detected that CPU was 100 deg C or more. of detection Remedy When it is detected that the temperature of the CPU is 100 deg C or more, forcible shutdown is executed. After that, the error is recorded in the error log. • If the error occurred during a service visit and then occurred again: Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.

E905 -0001

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E905 -0002

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991

• If the error does not occur during a service visit but is found in the log: 1. Check the space behind the host machine. If the space behind the host machine is less than 10 cm, ask the user to secure enough space. 2. Clean the inlet on the rear of the host machine. Remove dust. POD deck light air assist fan error Even when the maximum LOW interval was passed, there was no change in the signal. 1. Failure of the shutter 2. Failure of the swing sensor (PS11) 3. Failure of the swing motor (M3) 4. Failure of the deck controller PCB (UN1) POD deck pickup motor cooling fan error The pickup motor cooling fan is not placed at LOCK ON status. 1. Check the connector of the pickup motor cooling fan (FM4). 2. Replace the pickup motor cooling fan. 3. Replace the deck controller PCB.

7-125

7 E Detailed Occurance code code area

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991

Items

Description POD deck pickup motor cooling fan error The pickup motor cooling fan is not placed at LOCK OFF status. 1. Check the connector of the pickup motor cooling fan (FM4). 2. Replace the pickup motor cooling fan. 3. Replace the deck controller PCB. POD deck light air heater high temperature error A temperature over 120 degreeC was detected for 1 second consecutively. 1. Failure of the environment sensor (SR1) 2. Failure of the warm air fan (FAN1) 3. Failure of the cool air fan (FAN2) 4. Failure of the additional fan (FAN3) 5. Failure of the air heater (H1) 6. Failure of the deck controller PCB (UN1) POD deck light air heater low temperature error The heater is not placed in the Ready status even when a specified period of time has elapsed. 1. Failure of the environment sensor (SR1) 2. Failure of the warm air fan (FAN1) 3. Failure of the cool air fan (FAN2) 4. Failure of the additional fan (FAN3) 5. Failure of the air heater (H1) 6. Failure of the deck controller PCB (UN1) Backup RAM error SRAM in the DCON detected data error.

E905 -0003

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E906 -0001

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E906 -0002

-05

Title Description of detection Measures

E991 -0000

-05

E996 -0071

-05

Title Description of detection Measures Title Description of detection Remedy

7-126

Replace the DCON PCB Error avoidance jam (DADF) Error avoidance jam occurred.(DADF) Depending on the setting of JM-ERR-R in service mode, “010071” jam is displayed as an error. Collect log and contact to the sales companies. To cancel the setting, select COPIER> OPTION> FNCSW> J M-ERR-R, and set JM-ERR-R to 0. T-7-14

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991

7-126

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Jam Type

7-127

Jam Code Jam Type Jam types are shown below. Type DELAY STNRY OVERLAP TIMING NG OHP NG ADF OP COVER OP RESIDUAL PICKUP NG POWER ON DOOR OP SEQ NG DELAY ESC OTH JAM STNRY ESC STP SDL STP INIT ROT UP DEVICE OTHER ERROR RETRY ERR STOP ROT PROGRAM TIME OUT PUNCH MEDIA NG

Meaning Delay jam Stationary jam Double feed detection Timing error Incorrect paper ADF open Cover open Residual jam Pickup error Power ON Door open Sequence jam Delay jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray Other jams Stationary jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray Staple Saddle stitch staple Residual (at initial rotation) Upper stream device jam Others Error Retry error Press Stop key Keeps rotating Program Time-out Punch Misprint T-7-15

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Jam Type

7-127

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit

Main Unit PS75

PS70

PS23

PS111 PS29 PS31

PS28

PS30 PS32

PS27

PS33

PS53

PS24

PS49

PS34

PS25

PS54

PS58

PS26

PS40 PS63 PS59 PS68 PS64

7-128 ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

Sensor Name / Description

Sensor ID

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 010A 010B 010C 010D 010E 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 0130 0191

DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY OTHER

PS49 PS54 PS59 PS64 PS53 PS58 PS40 PS63 PS68 PS30 PS29 PS28 PS23 PS70 PS75 PS31 PS32 PS33 PS34 PS35 PS24 PS25 PS26 PS27 PS111 OTHER

00

0192

OTHER

00

0193

OTHER

00

0194

OTHER

Right Deck Pickup Sensor Left Deck Pickup Sensor Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor Vertical Path Sensor 1 Left Deck Pullout Sensor Vertical Path Sensor 2 Vertical Path Sensor 3 Vertical Path Sensor 4 Vertical Path Merging Sensor Transparency Sensor Registration Sensor Post-secondary Transfer Sensor Fixing Inlet Sensor Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor Outer Delivery Sensor Reverse Sensor Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3 Duplex Sensor 1 Duplex Sensor 2 Duplex Sensor 3 Duplex Sensor 4 Outer Delivery Transparency Sensor Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and image formation timing at Right Deck pickup (Check the feed path from the Right Deck Pickup Assembly to the Registration Assembly.) Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and image formation timing at Left Deck pickup (Check the feed path from the Left Deck Pickup Assembly to the Registration Assembly.) Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and image formation timing at Cassette 3 pickup (Check the feed path from the Cassette 3 Pickup Assembly to the Registration Assembly.) Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and image formation timing at Cassette 4 pickup (Check the feed path from the Cassette 4 Pickup Assembly to the Registration Assembly.)

PS35 F-7-1

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit

OTHER

OTHER

OTHER

7-128

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit

7-129

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

Sensor Name / Description

Sensor ID

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

Sensor Name / Description

Sensor ID

00

0195

OTHER

OTHER

00

0196

OTHER

00

0197

OTHER

00

0198

OTHER

00

0199

OTHER

00

019A

OTHER

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

0201 0202 0203 0204 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 020A 020B 020C 020D

STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY

Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and image formation timing at Option Deck pickup (Check the feed path from the Option Deck Pickup Assembly to the Registration Assembly of the host machine.) Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and image formation timing at Multipurpose Tray pickup (Check the feed path from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Assembly to the Registration Assembly.) Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and image formation timing at Multi Deck Upper Deck pickup (Check the feed path from the Upper Deck Pickup Assembly of the Multi Deck to the Registration Assembly of the host machine.) Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and image formation timing at Multi Deck Middle Deck pickup (Check the feed path from the Middle Deck Pickup Assembly of the Multi Deck to the Registration Assembly of the host machine.) Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and image formation timing at Multi Deck Lower Deck pickup (Check the feed path from the Lower Deck Pickup Assembly of the Multi Deck to the Registration Assembly of the host machine.) Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and image formation timing at 2-sided printing (Check the feed path around the Registration Assembly of the host machine.) Right Deck Pickup Sensor Left Deck Pickup Sensor Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor Vertical Path Sensor 1 Left Deck Pullout Sensor Vertical Path Sensor 2 Vertical Path Sensor 3 Vertical Path Sensor 4 Vertical Path Merging Sensor Transparency Sensor Registration Sensor Post-secondary Transfer Sensor

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

020E 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 0230 0A01 0A02 0A03 0A04 0A05 0A06 0A07 0A08 0A09 0A0A 0A0B 0A0C 0A0D 0A0E 0A10 0A11 0A12 0A13 0A14 0A15 0A16 0A17 0A18 0A19 0A30 0B00

STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON OTHER

PS70 PS75 PS31 PS32 PS33 PS34 PS35 PS24 PS25 PS26 PS27 PS111 PS49 PS54 PS59 PS64 PS53 PS58 PS40 PS63 PS68 PS30 PS29 PS28 PS23 PS70 PS75 PS31 PS32 PS33 PS34 PS35 PS24 PS25 PS26 PS27 PS111 PS112

00 00 00 00 00 00

0B01 0B02 0B03 0B04 0B05 0B06

COVER OP COVER OP COVER OP COVER OP COVER OP COVER OP

Fixing Inlet Sensor Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor Outer Delivery Sensor Reverse Sensor Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3 Duplex Sensor 1 Duplex Sensor 2 Duplex Sensor 3 Duplex Sensor 4 Outer Delivery Transparency Sensor Right Deck Pickup Sensor Left Deck Pickup Sensor Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor Vertical Path Sensor 1 Left Deck Pullout Sensor Vertical Path Sensor 2 Vertical Path Sensor 3 Vertical Path Sensor 4 Vertical Path Merging Sensor Transparency Sensor Registration Sensor Post-secondary Transfer Sensor Fixing Inlet Sensor Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor Outer Delivery Sensor Reverse Sensor Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3 Duplex Sensor 1 Duplex Sensor 2 Duplex Sensor 3 Duplex Sensor 4 Outer Delivery Transparency Sensor Waste Toner Container Sensor (Check that the Waste Toner Container is installed.) Front Cover Sensor Multi-purpose Tray Cover Sensor Lower Right Cover Sensor Lower Left Cover Sensor Buffer Front Cover Sensor Deck Left Front Cover Sensor

7

OTHER

OTHER

OTHER

OTHER

OTHER

PS49 PS54 PS59 PS64 PS53 PS58 PS40 PS63 PS68 PS30 PS29 PS28 PS23

Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit

PS80 PS79 PS39 PS36 PS87 S006

7-129

7 ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

00

0C00

ERROR*1

00

0CA0

ERROR*1

00

0CA2

ERROR*1

00

0CA3

ERROR*1

00

0CA4

ERROR*1

00

0CA5

ERROR*1

00

0CA6

ERROR*1

00

0CA7

ERROR*1

00

0CA8

ERROR*1

00

0CA9

ERROR*1

00

0CF1

ERROR*1

00 00

0D91 0D92

MEDIA NG MEDIA NG

00

0D93

MEDIA NG

00

1E00

OTHER

Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit

Sensor Name / Description Recovered by opening and closing the Door Recovered by opening and closing the Door Recovered by opening and closing the Door Recovered by opening and closing the Door Recovered by opening and closing the Door Recovered by opening and closing the Door Recovered by opening and closing the Door Recovered by opening and closing the Door Recovered by opening and closing the Door Recovered by opening and closing the Door Recovered by opening and closing the Door Misprint (paper length is short) Misprint (Although transparency setting is set, paper other than transparency is fed) Misprint (Although transparency setting is not set, transparency is fed) Finisher sequence error jam

7-130

Sensor ID ---------------------------------LENGTH NG OHP NG MEDIA NG OTHER

T-7-16 *1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the

power supply. If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will be notified.

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit

7-130

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader-A1 / Color Image Reader-A1

Duplex Color Image Reader-A1 / Color Image Reader-A1 PCB3

SR4

PCB2

SR12

SR10

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

0047 0048 0049 0050 0051 0052 0071 0073 0074 0075 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094 0095

DELAY STNRY DELAY STNRY DELAY STNRY SEQ NG*2 ERROR*1 ERROR*1 ERROR*1 ADF OP ADF OP COVER OP COVER OP RESIDUAL PICKUP NG

01

0096

LIMITED FUNCTION

7-131 Sensor Name / Description Lead sensor 1 Lead sensor 1 Lead sensor 2 Lead sensor 2 Delivery sensor Delivery sensor Disengaging HP sensor 1 Disengaging HP sensor 2 Pickup roller unit lifter HP sensor DADF open/closed sensor 1/2 DADF open/closed sensor 1/2 Cover open/closed sensor Cover open/closed sensor All feed type sensor Post-separation sensor 1/2/3

Sensor ID PCB4 PCB4 SR5 SR5 PCB5 PCB5 SR15 SR16 SR12 SR1, SR3 SR1, SR3 SR10 SR10 SR2, SR3, PCB2 -

T-7-17 *1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the

power supply. If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will be notified. PCB4

SR15

SR5

SR16

PCB5

SR3

*2 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the

SR2 F-7-2

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046

DELAY STNRY DELAY STNRY DELAY STNRY DELAY STNRY DELAY STNRY DELAY STNRY STNRY DELAY STNRY DELAY STNRY

Sensor Name / Description Post-separation sensor 3 Post-separation sensor 3 Delay detection sensor Delay detection sensor Registration sensor Registration sensor Lead sensor 1 Lead sensor 1 Lead sensor 2 Lead sensor 2 Delivery sensor Delivery sensor Post-separation sensor 3 Delay detection sensor Delay detection sensor Registration sensor Registration sensor

7

Sensor ID PCB2 PCB2 SR4 SR4 PCB3 PCB3 PCB4 PCB4 SR5 SR5 PCB5 PCB5 PCB2 SR4 SR4 PCB3 PCB3

power supply. If it is not recovered by the above operation, it is considered an error near the target sensor. Disconnect and then connect the connectors around the target sensor, check if the cable is open circuit, and replace the sensor.

Error Code > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader-A1 / Color Image Reader-A1

7-131

7

Error Code > Jam Code > POD Deck Light – A1

7-132

Paper Deck Unit – A1 PS1

POD Deck Light – A1 PS6

PS6

PS1

F-7-3

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

00 00 00 00 00 00

011A 011B 021A 021B 0A1A 0A1B

DELAY DELAY STNRY STNRY POWER ON POWER ON

Sensor Name / Description deck pickup sensor deck feed sensor deck pickup feed sensor deck feed sensor deck pickup feed sensor deck feed sensor

F-7-4

Sensor ID

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

PS6 PS1 PS6 PS1 PS6 PS1

00 00 00 00 00 00

011A 011B 021A 021B 0A1A 0A1B

DELAY DELAY STNRY STNRY POWER ON POWER ON

T-7-18

7

Error Code > Jam Code > POD Deck Light – A1

Sensor Name / Description Deck pickup sensor Deck pull-out sensor Deck pickup sensor Deck pull-out sensor Deck pickup sensor Deck pull-out sensor

Sensor ID PS1 PS6 PS1 PS6 PS1 PS6 T-7-19

7-132

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Multi-drawer Paper Deck – A1

Multi-drawer Paper Deck – A1 S001

S102

S101

S202

S201

S002

S003

S009 S005

S010

S004

S302

S301 F-7-5

7-133

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

011E 011F 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 0125 0126 0127 0129 021E 021F 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 0225 0226 0227 0229 0A1E 0A1F 0A20 0A21 0A22 0A23 0A24 0A25 0A26 0A27 0A29 2828

DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON OVERLAP

Sensor Name / Description Upper deck pickup sensor Upper deck pull-out sensor Middle deck pickup sensor Middle deck pull-out sensor Lower deck pickup sensor Lower deck pull-out sensor Lower deck feed sensor Vertical path upper sensor Vertical path middle sensor Vertical path lower sensor Delivery sensor Upper deck pickup sensor Upper deck pull-out sensor Middle deck pickup sensor Middle deck pull-out sensor Lower deck pickup sensor Lower deck pull-out sensor Lower deck feed sensor Vertical path upper sensor Vertical path middle sensor Vertical path lower sensor Delivery sensor Upper deck pickup sensor Upper deck pull-out sensor Middle deck pickup sensor Middle deck pull-out sensor Lower deck pickup sensor Lower deck pull-out sensor Lower deck feed sensor Vertical path upper sensor Vertical path middle sensor Vertical path lower sensor Delivery sensor Double feeding sensor

Sensor ID S101 S102 S201 S202 S301 S302 S004 S001 S002 S003 S005 S101 S102 S201 S202 S301 S302 S004 S001 S002 S003 S005 S101 S102 S201 S202 S301 S302 S004 S001 S002 S003 S005 S009, S010 T-7-20

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Multi-drawer Paper Deck – A1

7-133

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Buffer Path Unit - F1

Buffer Path Unit - F1

7-134 ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

00 00 00 00 00 00

011C 011D 021C 021D 0A1C 0A1D

DELAY DELAY STNRY STNRY RESIDUAL RESIDUAL

Sensor Name / Description Buffer Sensor 1 Buffer Sensor 2 Buffer Sensor 1 Buffer Sensor 2 Buffer Sensor 1 Buffer Sensor 2

Sensor ID PS85 PS86 PS85 PS86 PS85 PS86 T-7-21

PS86

PS85

F-7-6

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Buffer Path Unit - F1

7-134

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Insertion Unit -H1

Insertion Unit -H1

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

02 02 02

10E0 10E2 10E4

DELAY DELAY DELAY

02 02

10E5 10E6

02 02

10E7 10E8

02 02 02

11F0 11F2 11F4

SW1

02 02

11F5 11F6

S16

02 02 02 02

11F7 11F8 13CD 14CC

02

1FC0

02

1FC1

02 02 02

1FC2 1FC3 1FCE

02

1FCF

S3 S7 S8 SW2

S9

S19 S12

S18 S17

S20

S21

7-135

F-7-7

Sensor Name / Description

Entrance sensor Entrance sensor, Delivery sensor 2 Upper tray registration sensor, Lower tray registration sensor DELAY Middle feed sensor DELAY Middle feed sensor, Reverse entrance sensor DELAY Reverse sensor, Reverse entrance sensor DELAY Reverse timing sensor, Reverse entrance sensor STNRY Entrance sensor STNRY Delivery sensor 2 STNRY Upper tray registration sensor, Lower tray registration sensor STNRY Middle feed sensor STNRY Middle feed sensor, Reverse entrance sensor STNRY Reverse sensor STNRY Reverse timing sensor POWER ON Power ON jam COVER OP Front upper cover open/close switch, Upper cover open/close switch, Inserter open/close sensor TIME OUT Failed to detect OFF of EntryStart although a specified period of time has passed after replying ON of EntryStartAck TIME OUT • Failed to detect ON of EjectStartAck although a specified period of time has passed after notifying ON of EjectStart • Failed to detect OFF of EjectStartAck although a specified period of time has passed after notifying OFF of EjectStart OTHER Upper tray empty sensor OTHER Lower tray empty sensor ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the Door STOP Press Stop key

Sensor ID S20 S20, S21 S3, S7 S8 S8, S18 S17, S18 S16, S18 S20 S21 S3, S7 S8 S8, S18 S17 S16 SW1, SW2, S19 -

-

S9 S12 -

T-7-22 *1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the

power supply. If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will be notified.

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Insertion Unit -H1

7-135

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Professional Puncher - C1/Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1

Professional Puncher - C1/Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1 S2

S8

S1

RS5

S7

RS1

S6

RS2

RS4 S3

PS7 S5

S4

RS3

7-136

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

Sensor Name / Description

Sensor ID

02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02

1051 1052 1055 1057 1059 1152 1154 1156 1158 115A 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1370 1472 1F5E 1F5F 1F71 1F73 1F74

DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY POWER ON DOOR OP TIMING NG OTHER RESIDUAL TIMING NG ERROR

RS1 RS2 RS3 RS4 RS5 RS1 RS2 RS3 RS4 RS5 S1 S8 S7 S2 S3 S4 S5, S6 PS6 RS3 PS7 -

02

1F75

ERROR

02 02

1F76 1F77

OTHER TIMING NG

02 02

1F78 1F79

TIME OUT SEQ NG

02 02 02

1F7A 1F7B 1F7F

TIMING NG UP DEVICE STOP

bypass 1 sensor reverse path 1 sensor reverse path 2 sensor reverse path 3 sensor bypass 2 sensor bypass 1 sensor reverse path 1 sensor reverse path 2 sensor reverse path 3 sensor bypass 2 sensor Bypass 1 Sensor Bypass 2 Sensor Bypass 3 Sensor Punch Path 1 Sensor Punch Path 2 Sensor Punch Path 3 Sensor Punch Path 4 Sensor, Punch Path 5 Sensor Power ON jam front cover sensor reverse path 2 sensor reverse flapper HP sensor Idle rotation jam Jam during receipt from upstream installation Failure of a receiving/sending signal from the upstream unit (only when connected to the finisher) Failure of a receiving/sending signal from the downstream unit (only when connected to the finisher) Punch Die comes off The paper doesn’t come from puncher after the specified time Time out jam Abnormality during receipt from upstream installation Early arrival jam Jam caused by other installation Press Stop key (only if the finisher is connected)

F-7-8

-

T-7-23

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Professional Puncher - C1/Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1

7-136

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Insertion Unit -J1

Insertion Unit -J1 S2

S4

S1

7-137 ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02

10B1 10B2 10B3 10B4 11C1 11C2 11C3 11C4 1FD1

DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY OTHER

02

1FD7

02

1FD8

S12 SW1

S10

S11

Sensor Name / Description

Paper registration sensor Reverse entrance sensor Reverse sensor Reverse timing sensor Paper registration sensor Reverse entrance sensor Reverse sensor Reverse timing sensor No papers at the time of Inserter Tray pickup. Tray paper sensor 1, Tray paper sensor 2 POWER ON Paper registration sensor, Reverse sensor, Reverse timing sensor, Reverse entrance sensor DOOR OP Front upper cover open/close sensor, Inserter open/close sensor, Top cover open/close sensor

Sensor ID S4 S12 S10 S11 S4 S12 S10 S11 S7,S8

S4,S10,S11, S12 SW1,S1,S2

T-7-24

F-7-9

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Insertion Unit -J1

7-137

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Unit - G1

Paper Folding Unit - G1

SW1

S21

S20 S30

S31 S33 S32

7-138 ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

02 02 02 02 02 02 02

10E1 10E3 10E9 10EA 10EB 10EC 10ED

DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY

02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02

10EE 1FDF 11F1 11F3 11F9 11FA 11FB 11FC 11FD 11FE 1FD0

02

13DD

02 02 02

14DC 1FDE 1FD1

S22 S27

F-7-10

Sensor Name / Description

Entrance sensor Entrance sensor, Delivery sensor 2 Entrance sensor, Slowdown timing sensor Release timing sensor Fold position sensor Upper stopper paper sensor Delivery sensor 1, Upper stopper paper sensor DELAY Fold tray paper sensor STOP Press Stop key STNRY Entrance sensor STNRY Delivery sensor 2 STNRY Slowdown timing sensor STNRY Release timing sensor STNRY Fold position sensor STNRY Upper stopper paper sensor STNRY Delivery sensor 1 STNRY Fold tray paper sensor TIME OUT Failed to detect OFF of EntryStart although a specified period of time has passed after replying ON of EntryStartAck POWER ON Detected presence of paper at power-on/ at initialization/at warm-up rotation by any sensors on the feed path COVER OP Front upper cover switch ERROR*1 Detected error (E569/E56A/E56B/E56E) TIME OUT • Failed to detect ON of EjectStartAck although a specified period of time has passed after notifying ON of EjectStart • Failed to detect OFF of EjectStartAck although a specified period of time has passed after notifying OFF of EjectStart

Sensor ID S20 S20, S21 S20, S30 S31 S32 S33 S22, S33 S27 S20 S21 S30 S31 S32 S33 S22 S27 -

-

SW1 -

T-7-25 *1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the

power supply. If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will be notified.

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Unit - G1

7-138

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1

Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1 S4 S1 S12

S2

SW1 S10 S25

S11

S24 S22

S23

S21

S15 S18

7-139

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02

10B1 10B2 10B3 10B4 10B5 10B6 10B7 10B8 10B9 10BA 10BB 11C1 11C2 11C3 11C4 11C5 11C6 11C7 11C8 11C9 11CA 11CB 1FD1

DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY STNRY STNRY DELAY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY OTHER

02

13D7

02

14D8

F-7-11

Sensor Name / Description

Paper registration sensor Reverse entrance sensor Reverse sensor Reverse timing sensor Slowdown timing sensor Release timing sensor Fold position sensor Upper stopper sensor Delivery sensor C fold delivery sensor C fold tray empty sensor Paper registration sensor Reverse entrance sensor Reverse sensor Reverse timing sensor Slowdown timing sensor Release timing sensor Fold position sensor Upper stopper sensor Delivery sensor C fold delivery sensor C fold tray empty sensor No papers at the time of Inserter Tray pickup POWER ON Detected presence of paper at power-on by any sensors on the feed path COVER OP Front upper cover open/close sensor, Inserter open/close sensor, Top cover open/close sensor

Sensor ID S4 S12 S10 S11 S24 S21 S23 S22 S25 S15 S18 S4 S12 S10 S11 S24 S21 S23 S22 S25 S15 S18 SW1, S1, S2

T-7-26

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1

7-139

7

Error Code > Jam Code > External Hole Puncher - A1

External Hole Puncher - A1 PI63

7-140

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

02 02 02 02

1012 1122 1F44 1F45

DELAY STNRY PUNCH POWER ON

Sensor Name / Description Trailing edge sensor Trailing edge sensor Punch home position sensor Trailing edge sensor

Sensor ID LED5, PTR5 LED5, PTR5 PI63 LED5, PTR5 T-7-27

LED5,PTR5

F-7-12

7

Error Code > Jam Code > External Hole Puncher - A1

7-140

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-K1/Booklet Finisher-K1

Staple Finisher-K1/Booklet Finisher-K1 S104 S102 S101

S129

S201 S131

S223

S203

S226 S227 F-7-13

7-141

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02

1011 1012 1091 1092 1093 1094 1096 1121 1122 112F

DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY STNRY STNRY ERROR*1

02 02 02 02 02

11A1 11A2 11A3 11A4 11AF

02 02 02

1205 1307 1387

02

138A

02 02 02 02 02 02 02

1408 1488 148B 1506 1586 1F45 1F4F

02

1F8F

Sensor Name / Description

Inlet sensor Feed path senor Saddle delivery sensor 1 Saddle delivery sensor 2 Saddle inlet sensor Trimmer inlet sensor Saddle vertical path sensor Inlet sensor Feed path senor Detected error(E514/E530/E532/E535/ E537 /E540/E542/E568/E56D/E578/E57B/E57C /E583/E584) during paper feed STNRY Saddle delivery sensor 1 STNRY Saddle delivery sensor 2 STNRY Saddle inlet sensor STNRY Trimmer inlet sensor ERROR*1 Detected error (E5A3/E5A4/E5AA/E5BA/ E5BA) during paper feed TIMING Inlet sensor POWER ON Inlet sensor, Feed path senor POWER ON Saddle inlet sensor, Saddle vertical path sensor, Saddle delivery sensor 1, Saddle delivery sensor 2 POWER ON Detected presence of paper at power-on /after opening and then closing the door by any sensors on the feed path DOOR OP Front door sensor DOOR OP Front door sensor DOOR OP Front door sensor STP Staple hp sensor SDL STP Saddle stitcher hp senso PUNCH Punch hp sensor ERROR*1 Detected Punch Motor error/Punch Slide Motor error during paper feed ERROR*1 Detected error (E5F0/E5F1/E5F2/E5F3/ E5F4 /E5F5/E5F6/E5F7/E5F8/E5F9) during paper feed

Sensor ID S101 S102 S226 S227 S201 S101 S203 S101 S102 -

S226 S227 S201 S101 S101 S101, S102 S201, S203, S226, S227 -

S129 S129 S129 S131 S223 S104 -

T-7-28 *1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the

power supply. If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will be notified.

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-K1/Booklet Finisher-K1

7-141

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-L1/Booklet Finisher-L1

Staple Finisher-L1/Booklet Finisher-L1 PI118 PI102 PI104

MSW101 PI103

PI50

PI22 PI18

PI9

PI19

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02

1011 1013 1014 1091 1092 1093 109F 1121 1123 1124 112F

DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY OTHER STNRY STNRY STNRY ERROR*1

02

11A1

02 02 02

11A2 11A3 1307

02

1387

02

1408

02 02 02

1488 1506 1586

02

1F8F

PI20 SW5

PI11

SW7

PI17

7-142 Sensor Name / Description

Sensor ID

Inlet sensor PI103 Escape tray path sensor PI118 Delivery sensor PI104 No.1 paper sensor PI18 Delivery sensor PI11 Saddle inlet sensor PI22 Saddle time out Inlet sensor PI103 Escape tray path sensor PI118 Delivery sensor PI104 Detected error (E540/E514/E519/E530 /E532/E535/E537/E540/E542/E584) STNRY No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, PI18, PI19, No.3 paper sensor PI20 STNRY Delivery sensor,Vertical path paper sensor PI11, PI17 STNRY Saddle inlet sensor PI22 POWER ON Inlet sensor, Delivery sensor, Escape tray PI103, PI104, path sensor PI118 POWER ON Delivery sensor,Vertical path paper sensor, PI11, PI17, No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, PI18, PI19, No.3 paper sensor, Saddle inlet sensor PI20, PI22 COVER OP Front cover sensor, Front cover switch PI102, MSW101 COVER OP Inlet cover sensor, Front cover sensor PI9, PI102 STP Staple home position sensor PI50 SDL STP Stitcher HP sensor (front), Stitcher HP SW5, SW7 sensor (rear) ERROR*1 Detected error (E5F0/E5F1/E5F2/E5F3/ E5F6)

T-7-29 *1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the F-7-14

power supply. If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will be notified.

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-L1/Booklet Finisher-L1

7-142

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

Alarm Code Alarm Code Details Alarm Code

Level

Title

00-0246

1

00-0247

1

02-0025

3

04-0031

3

Error code display (4-digit) Error code display (4-digit) Insufficient LED light intensity error in Scanner Unit for reading the front side (DADF) Right deck lifter error

04-0131

3

Left deck lifter error

04-0231

3

Cassette 3 lifter error

04-0331

3

Cassette 4 lifter error

04-0431

3

Option deck lifter error

04-3039

3

Upper multi-cassette deck lifter error

04-3040

3

Upper multi-cassette deck lifter lower limit sensor error

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures

7-143 Alarm Code

Level

Title

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures

04-3041

3

04-3042

3

Movement: The upper deck lifter motor (M101) stops. The upper deck is not used. Measures: Check the motor ,sensor and wire Movement: The lifter moves down to the lower limit position. The upper deck is not used. Measures: Check the motor ,sensor and wire

04-3043

3

04-3044

3

04-3045

3

04-3053

3

04-3055

3

04-3060

3

04-3061

3

04-3062

3

Upper multi-cassette deck paper surface sensor error The upper limit of the upper multi-cassette deck lifter upper limit sensor has been exceeded. The lower limit of the upper multi-cassette deck lifter lower limit sensor has been exceeded. The upper limit of the value of counting the paper remaining on the upper multicassette deck has been exceeded. The lower limit of the value of counting the paper remaining on the upper multicassette deck has been exceeded. Reaching the life of the upper multicassette deck left separation fan / Failure of the fan Reaching the life of the upper multicassette deck right separation fan / Failure of the fan Error in home position detection with Multi Deck Upper Deck Swing Motor Error in Multi Deck Upper Deck Power Supply Fan Multi Deck Upper Deck Air Heater high temperature error

Soft counter PCB cannot write normally Soft counter PCB cannot restore data The light intensity is insufficient at LED light-on.

Movement: The right deck pickup motor (M43) stops. The right deck is not used. Cause: The right deck lifter does not move up. A failure occurred in the right deck paper surface sensor (PS52). Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. Movement: The left deck pickup motor (M42) stops. The left deck is not used. Cause: The left deck lifter does not move up. A failure occurred in the left deck paper surface sensor (PS57). Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. Movement: The cassette 3 pickup motor (M44) stops. The cassette 3 is not used. Cause: The cassette 3 lifter does not move up. A failure occurred in the cassette 3 paper surface sensor (PS62). Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. Movement: The cassette 4 pickup motor (M45) stops. The cassette 4 is not used. Cause: The cassette 4 lifter does not move up. A failure occurred in the cassette 4 paper surface sensor (PS67). Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. Movement: The option deck lifter motor stops. Option deck is not used. Cause: The option deck lifter does not move up. A failure occurred in the Option deck paper surface sensor. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. Movement: The upper deck lifter motor (M101) stops. The upper deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. Movement: The upper deck lifter motor (M101) stops. The upper deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

Movement: The lifter moves up to the lower limit position. The upper deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.

Movement: The upper deck lifter motor (M101) stops. The upper deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.

Movement: The upper deck lifter motor (M101) stops. The upper deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.

Movement: The fan stops.The air floatation fan stops.Not use the corresponding receptacle (handle as there is no paper) Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. Movement: The fan stops.The air floatation fan stops.Not use the corresponding receptacle (handle as there is no paper) Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. An error in the Swing Motor was detected.

Multi Deck Fan failed to rotate.

Air Heater detected abnormal high temperature.

7-143

7 Alarm Code

Level

Title

04-3063

3

04-3064

3

04-3139

3

Multi Deck Upper Deck Air Heater low temperature error Multi Deck Upper Deck Pickup Motor error Middle multi-cassette deck lifter error

04-3140

3

04-3141

3

04-3142

3

04-3143

3

04-3144

3

04-3145

3

04-3153

3

04-3155

3

Middle multi-cassette deck lifter lower limit sensor error Middle multi-cassette deck paper surface sensor error The upper limit of the middle multi-cassette deck lifter upper limit sensor has been exceeded. The lower limit of the middle multi-cassette deck lifter lower limit sensor has been exceeded. The upper limit of the value of counting the paper remaining on the middle multicassette deck has been exceeded. The lower limit of the value of counting the paper remaining on the middle multicassette deck has been exceeded. Reaching the life of the middle multicassette deck left separation fan / Failure of the fan Reaching the life of the middle multicassette deck right separation fan / Failure of the fan

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Air Heater detected abnormal low temperature.

Deck Pickup Motor failed to rotate.

Movement: The middle deck lifter motor (M201) stops. The middle deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. Movement: The middle deck lifter motor (M201) stops. The middle deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. Movement: The middle deck lifter motor (M201) stops. The middle deck is not used. Measures: Check the motor ,sensor and wire Movement: The lifter moves down to the lower limit position. The middle deck is not used. Measures: Check the motor ,sensor and wire

Movement: The lifter moves up to the lower limit position. The middle deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.

Movement: The middle deck lifter motor (M201) stops. The upper deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.

Movement: The middle deck lifter motor (M201) stops. The upper deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.

7-144 Alarm Code

Level

Title

04-3160

3

04-3161

3

04-3162

3

04-3163

3

04-3164

3

04-3239

3

Error in home position detection with Multi Deck Middle Deck Swing Motor Error in Multi Deck Middle Deck Power Supply Fan Multi Deck Middle Deck Air Heater high temperature error Multi Deck Middle Deck Air Heater low temperature error Multi Deck Middle Deck Pickup Motor error Lower multi-cassette deck lifter error

04-3240

3

04-3241

3

04-3242

3

04-3243

3

04-3244

3

04-3245

3

Movement: The fan stops.The air floatation fan stops.Not use the corresponding receptacle (handle as there is no paper) Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. Movement: The fan stops.The air floatation fan stops.Not use the corresponding receptacle (handle as there is no paper) Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

Lower multi-cassette deck lifter lower limit sensor error Lower multi-cassette deck paper surface sensor error The upper limit of the lower multi-cassette deck lifter upper limit sensor has been exceeded. The lower limit of the lower multi-cassette deck lifter lower limit sensor has been exceeded. The upper limit of the value of counting the paper remaining on the lower multicassette deck has been exceeded. The lower limit of the value of counting the paper remaining on the lower multicassette deck has been exceeded.

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures An error in the Swing Motor was detected.

Multi Deck Fan failed to rotate.

Air Heater detected abnormal high temperature.

Air Heater detected abnormal low temperature.

Deck Pickup Motor failed to rotate.

Movement: The lower deck lifter motor (M301) stops. The lower deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. Movement: The lower deck lifter motor (M301) stops. The lower deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. Movement: The lower deck lifter motor (M301) stops. The lower deck is not used. Measures: Check the motor ,sensor and wire Movement: The lifter moves down to the lower limit position. The middle deck is not used. Measures: Check the motor ,sensor and wire

Movement: The lifter moves up to the lower limit position. The lower deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.

Movement: The lower deck lifter motor (M301) stops. The upper deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.

Movement: The lower deck lifter motor (M301) stops. The upper deck is not used. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.

7-144

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

Alarm Code

Level

Title

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures

04-3253

3

Reaching the life of the lower multicassette deck left separation fan / Failure of the fan Reaching the life of the lower multicassette deck right separation fan / Failure of the fan Error in home position detection with Multi Deck Lower Deck Swing Motor Error in Multi Deck Lower Deck Power Supply Fan Multi Deck Lower Deck Air Heater high temperature error Multi Deck Lower Deck Air Heater low temperature error Multi Deck Lower Deck Pickup Motor error OHT sensor (PS29) adjustment failure

Movement: The fan stops.The air floatation fan stops.Not use the corresponding receptacle (handle as there is no paper) Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.

04-3255

04-3260

3

3

04-3261

3

04-3262

3

04-3263

3

04-3264

3

04-9090

3

06-0002

3

06-0003

3

06-0010

3

06-0011

3

10-0001

3

10-0002

3

7-145 Alarm Code

Level

Title

10-0003

3

10-0004

3

10-0017

3

10-0018

3

10-0019

3

10-0020

3

Multi Deck Fan failed to rotate.

10-0022

3

Air Heater detected abnormal high temperature.

10-0100

3

11-0001

3

11-0010

3

31-0006

3

31-0008

3

33-0010

3

33-0011

3

33-0023

3

33-0025

3

Toner low(M)(This alarm code issued by RDS.) Toner low(Ye)(This alarm code issued by RDS.) Toner (Y) prior delivery alarm Toner (M) prior delivery alarm Toner (C) prior delivery alarm Toner (BK) prior delivery alarm Patch detection light intensity abnormal change alarm Toner bottle change notification alarm Waste Toner Container full level alarm (waste toner full) Waste Toner Container near full level alarm (waste toner near full) HDD failure when equipped with the mirroring function HDD abnormality of S.M.A.R.T. value alarm Stream reading fan alarm Alarm for delivery fan heat dischare failure Optical unit (DADF) cooling fan alarm Optical unit (reader) cooling fan alarm

Movement: The fan stops.The air floatation fan stops.Not use the corresponding receptacle (handle as there is no paper) Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. An error in the Swing Motor was detected.

Air Heater detected abnormal low temperature.

Deck Pickup Motor failed to rotate.

Movement: OHT detection cannot be performed. Cause: An adjustment of the OHT sensor (PS29) failed at initial rotation. Measures: Re-adjust during pre-rotation. Fixing Film life alarm Total number of sheets fed through the Fixing Film Unit 1 exceeded the specified number. Fixing Web absence Fixing Web level is low. (Fixing Web Sensor detected low notice alarm web level.) Fixing reciprocation Home position could not be detected despite a reciprocation drive alarm drive operation of Fixing Assembly. Fixing Film life alarm Rotation time of the Fixing Film Unit exceeded the specified 2 time. Toner low(Bk)(This alarm code issued by RDS.) Toner low(Cy)(This alarm code issued by RDS.)

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures

Full level of the Waste Toner Container was detected.

Near full level alert of the Waste Toner Container was detected.

HDD failure when equipped with the mirroring function

A failure occurred in the fan at the time of job completion.

A failure occurred in the fan during job operation. A failure occurred in the fan during job operation.

7-145

7 Alarm Code

Level

34-0001

3

Title Image position correction patch detection alarm 1

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Movement: None Cause: The detection data of the average value of the image position correction patch pattern has exceeded the permitted range. • Scraches on the ITB • Failure of the photosensitive drum • Noise due to contact failure of the ITB guide (The ITB unit is not installed correctly.) Measures: 1. Check whether the color image is formed correctly for 4 colors. a. Perform test print in the following condition. COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 5 Output one sheet for each color in the paper of LTR/A4/A3 size (more than 290mm in a horizontal scanning direction). b. Check the following points. • Check whether the image is formed in the printing field except a margin. Check whether the image density is not low. • Check whether an unexpected image is not formed. If a correct image is not formed, check the following points. • Developing assembly: Check whether dirt is not applied to the developing. • Drum: Check whether dirt is not applied to the drum. Check whether there are no scratches on the drum. • ITB cleaning unit: Check whether an ITB cleaning failure has not occurred. (Check whether the previous image does not remain.) • Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the ITB or not. Based on the checking results and frequency of occurrence of the alarm, make a judgment of whether or not to replace the corresponding parts.

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

7-146 Alarm Code

Level

34-0002

3

Title Image position correction patch detection alarm 2

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Movement: None Cause: The image position correction patch pattern cannot be detected at all. • Failure of the patch sensor • Failure of the shutter • Image failure 1. Check whether the color image is formed correctly for 4 colors. a. Perform test print in the following condition. COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 5 Output one sheet for each color in the paper of LTR/A4/A3 size (more than 290mm in a horizontal scanning direction). b. Check the following points. • Check whether the image is formed in the printing field except a margin. Check whether the image density is not low. • Check whether an unexpected image is not formed. If a correct image is not formed, take measures to be taken for prevention of an image failure. (Check the developing assembly and drum unit.) • Developing assembly: Check whether dirt is not applied to the developing. • Drum: Check whether dirt is not applied to the drum. Check whether there are no scratches on the drum. • ITB cleaning unit: Check whether an ITB cleaning failure has not occurred. (Check whether the previous image does not remain.) • Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the ITB or not. • Based on the checking results and frequency of occurrence of the alarm, make a judgment of whether or not to replace the corresponding parts. 2. Damage or dirt of/on the patch sensor a. Check whether the shutter of the patch sensor operates correctly. b. Check whether dirt is not applied to the patch sensor. If dirt is applied, clean the sensor surface with alcohol. After cleaning, execute patch light intensity correction and base correction (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>PT-LPADJ). c. If the problem is not eliminated even after cleaning, replace the registration patch sensor unit. d. Check whether shorting has occurred to the patch sensor harness. If it occurred, replace both of the harness and the DC controller interface PCB. (It is necessary to replace the PCB because the DC controller interface PCB burns when shorting occurs.)

7-146

7 Alarm Code

Level

Title

34-0003

3

34-0004

3

An attempt to read 10 sets of auto registration patterns has failed, ending in a time-out condition. Image position correction patch correction alarm 1

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures The registration sensor is faulty, the registration sensor cleaning member is blocking the registration sensor, or no image has been drawn on the belt.

Movement: None Cause: The correction amount of the skew correction motor has exceeded the limit. • Failure of the laser scanner unit • Failure of installation of the laser scanner unit • Incorrect detection by the registration sensor (Scratches on the belt) Measures: 1. Check whether a color image is formed correctly for 4 colors. a. Perform test print in the following condition. COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 6 Output one sheet for each color in the paper of LTR/A4/A3 size (more than 290mm in a horizontal scanning direction). b. Check the following points. • Check whether there is color displacement in a horizontal scanning direction based on the Bk standard, and check whether there is a color which is extremely displaced. Replace the laser scanner unit for the color in which significant color displacement occurred. 2. Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the ITB or not. If there are a lot of them and this alarm occurs frequently, replace the ITB.

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

7-147 Alarm Code

Level

34-0005

3

Title Image position correction patch correction alarm 2

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Movement: None Cause: The vertical scanning direction writing correction limiter has been exceeded. • Incorrect detection by the registration sensor (Scratches on the belt) • Patch image failure Measures: 1. Check whether a color image is formed correctly for 4 colors. a. Perform test print in the following condition. COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 6 Output more than 2 sheets of A3-size paper consecutively. Or, output 4 sheets of A4-size paper consecutively. b. Check the following points. • Check whether an unexpected image is not formed. (Color displacement in a vertical scanning direction) If a correct image is not formed, take measures to be taken for prevention of an image failure. (Check the developing assembly and drum unit.) 2. Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the ITB or not. If there are a lot of them and this alarm occurs frequently, replace the ITB.

7-147

7 Alarm Code

Level

34-0006

3

Title Image position correction patch correction alarm 3

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Movement: None Cause: The horizontal scanning direction magnification correction limiter has been exceeded. • Incorrect detection by the registration sensor (Scratches on the belt) • Failure of the laser scanner unit • Failure of installation of the laser scanner unit • Patch image failure Measures: 1. Check whether a color image is formed correctly for 4 colors. a. Perform test print in the following condition. COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 6 Output one sheet for each color in the paper of LTR/A4/A3 size (more than 290mm in a horizontal scanning direction). b. Check the following points. • Check whether there is color displacement in a horizontal scanning direction based on the Bk standard, and check whether there is a color which is extremely displaced. Reinstall the laser scanner unit where significant color displacement occurred. If the problem cannot be still eliminated, replace the unit. If a correct image is not formed, take measures to be taken for prevention of an image failure. (Replace the drum unit, etc.) 2. Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the ITB or not. If there are a lot of them and this alarm occurs frequently, replace the ITB.

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

7-148 Alarm Code

Level

34-0007

3

Image position correction patch correction alarm 4

34-0010

3

34-1001

3

37-0001 37-0002 37-0003 37-0004 37-0005 37-0006 37-0007 37-1000 37-2000 38-0001 38-0002

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

ITB home position error ITB Steering Motor retry error For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D

Title

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Movement: None Cause: The horizontal scanning direction writing correction limiter has been exceeded. • Incorrect detection by the registration sensor (Scratches on the belt) • Failure of the laser scanner unit • Failure of installation of the laser scanner unit • Patch image failure Measures: 1. Check whether a color image is formed correctly for 4 colors. a. Perform test print in the following condition. COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 6 Output one sheet for each color in the paper of LTR/A4/A3 size (more than 290mm in a horizontal scanning direction). b. Check the following points. • Check whether there is color displacement in a horizontal scanning direction based on the Bk standard, and check whether there is a color which is extremely displaced. Reinstall the laser scanner unit where significant color displacement occurred. If the problem cannot be still eliminated, replace the unit. If a correct image is not formed, take measures to be taken for prevention of an image failure. (Replace the drum unit, etc.) 2. Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the ITB or not. If there are a lot of them and this alarm occurs frequently, replace the ITB. An error was detected at ITB home position. Retry occurred when detecting home position of the ITB Steering Motor. For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D

7-148

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

Alarm Code

Level

Title

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures

50-0007

3

A failure of lack of light intensity occurred when adjusting the output of the post-separation sensor 3.

50-0008

3

50-0009

3

50-0010

3

Lack of light intensity in the post-separation sensor 3 Lack of light intensity in the read sensor 1 Lack of light intensity in the delivery sensor A separation alarm occurred consecutively. Lack of light intensity in the registration sensor Insufficient LED light intensity error in Scanner Unit for reading the back side (DADF) Memory overflow Font memory overflow Micromemory overflow Image memory overflow Pattern memory overflow Hard disk error Detect operation abnormality for the HDD access request LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS

50-0013

50-0014

3

3

70-1 70-2

3 3

70-3

3

70-4

3

70-5

3

70-6 70-7

3 2

73-0004 73-0006 73-0007 73-0008 73-0009 73-0010 73-0011 73-0012 73-0013 73-0014 73-0015 73-0016 73-0017 73-0018

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

A failure of lack of light intensity occurred when adjusting the output of the read sensor 1. A failure of lack of light intensity occurred when adjusting the output of the delivery sensor. A failure occurred.

A failure of lack of light intensity occurred when adjusting the output of the registration sensor.

7-149 Alarm Code

Level

73-0019 73-0020 73-0021 73-0022 73-0023 73-0024 73-0025

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS

73-0026 75-0001

3 3

75-0002

3

75-9101

3

LIPS Error occurred in Yukon Error occurred due to invalid SVG analysis from Yukon Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9102

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9103

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9104

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9105

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9106

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

Light intensity was insufficient at LED lighting.

-

Title

-

Overflow of work memory for translator Error in configuration acquisition/management Memory management error in LIPS File management error in LIPS Reception data management error Page control error Macro management error Color management error Layout control error Font management error Letter drawing error Graphic drawing error Image drawing error Display error to LCD

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Text mode command error layer error Vector mode command error layer error Utility execution control error Database management error in LIPS Menu control error in LIPS Boot error in LIPS When the graphic library is in use for image processing, if the memory allocation is failed. Data format error of image mode -

When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.

7-149

7 Alarm Code

Level

75-9107

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9108

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9109

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9110

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9111

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9112

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9113

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9114

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9115

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

Title

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

7-150 Alarm Code

Level

75-9116

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9117

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9118

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9119

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-9120

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-910A

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-910B

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-910C

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-910D

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

Title

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.

7-150

7 Alarm Code

Level

75-910E

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-910F

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-911A

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-911B

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-911C

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-911D

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-911E

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-911F

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B101

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

Title

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

7-151 Alarm Code

Level

75-B102

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B103

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B104

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B105

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B106

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B107

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B108

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B109

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B10A

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

Title

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.

7-151

7 Alarm Code

Level

75-B10B

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75B10C

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75B10D

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B10E

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B10F

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B110

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B111

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B112

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B113

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

Title

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

7-152 Alarm Code

Level

75-B114

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B115

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B116

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B117

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B118

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B119

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B11A

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B11B

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B11C

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

Title

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.

7-152

7 Alarm Code

Level

75-B11D

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B11E

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B11F

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

75-B120

3

Failure in transfer of video data from an external controller

76-0001 76-0002

3 3

Font Font

76-0003 76-0004 76-0005 76-0006 76-0007

2 2 2 2 2

Font Font Font Font Font

76-0008

2

Font

77-0001 77-0002 77-0003 77-0005 77-0006 78-0003 78-0005 79-0001

2 2 2 2 1 3 1 3

79-0002

3

79-0003

1

79-0004

1

PDL PDL PDL PDL PDL GL GL In-house developed PCL In-house developed PCL In-house developed PCL In-house developed PCL

Title

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

7-153 Alarm Code

Level

When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of the video data is internally performed, so no measures need to be taken. However, when retransmission is performed over a specified number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. No memory for internal font Fails to assure the work area to analyze the font that is downloaded at “Resource Download”. Fails to access the file that stores the font. Fails to allocate the FM work memory. Fails to analyze the internal font. Alignment of font data is wrong. Failed to allocate work memory with scaler. There are 3 types depending on where to occur Failed to allocate work memory with scaler. There are 3 types depending on where to occur Fails to allocate the memory Failure of rendering DGL entry invalid Other errors DLG memory insufficient GL entry invalid System memory full A PCL initialization error

80-0001 80-0003 80-0010 80-0011 80-0015 80-0016 80-0018 80-0019 81-0001 81-0002 81-0003 81-0004 81-0005 82-0001 83-0001 83-0002 83-0003 83-0004 83-0005 83-0006 83-0007 83-0008 83-0009 83-0010 83-0011 83-0012 83-0013 83-0014 83-0015 83-0016 83-0017 83-0018

3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 1

BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Imaging Imaging Imaging Imaging Imaging RIP CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF CanonPDF

84-0001

3

84-0002 84-0003 84-0004

3 3 3

A PCL processing error

84-0005 84-0006 84-0007 84-0008

3 3 3 3

XPS memory full error XPS spool full error XPS print range error XPS document data error XPS page data error XPS image data error XPS font data error XPS non-support image error

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures

Overflow of work memory for translator Download overflow

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

Title

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Admin error DataArea error Graphics error Char error Print data cannot process this version. Overflow of work memory for translator Syntax error In case of invalid data format in BDL custom mode. Fails to allocate the memory Failure of rendering Overflow of work memory for translator Imaging initialization error Imaging processing error H/W Dart hangup by the DisplayList injustice PDF data error PDF compression analysis error PDF page compression error PDF data processing error PDF memory full PDF temporary file error PDF color analysis error PDF data reading error PDF output selection error PDF process file error PDF access error PDF analysis access error PDF font error PDF rendering error PDF data decode error PDF print range error PDF error PDF analysis error There is un-supported transparent object -

7-153

7 Alarm Code

Level

84-0009 85-0001

3 3

XPS rendering error Scanning input timeout error

85-0002

3

Scanning input encode error

85-0003

3

Scanning input encode error 2

85-0004

3

Scanning input VSync error

85-0005

3

Scanning input HSync error

85-0006

3

85-0007

3

85-0008

3

Image processing timeout error Image processing transfer error Illegal packet error

85-0009

3

Title

Process instruction error

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

7-154

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Remove and place the document, decrease the sharpness level, and perform printing again. If this alarm occurs frequently, check the connection of the DDIS video cable, replace the reader, and replace the video controller 2. Remove and place the document, decrease the sharpness level, and perform printing again. If this alarm occurs frequently, check the connection of the DDIS video cable, replace the reader, and replace the video controller 2. Remove and place the document, decrease the sharpness level, and perform printing again. If this alarm occurs frequently, check the connection of the DDIS video cable, replace the reader, and replace the video controller 2. Remove and place the document, decrease the sharpness level, and perform printing again. If this alarm occurs frequently, check the connection of the DDIS video cable, replace the reader, and replace the video controller 2. Remove and place the document, decrease the sharpness level, and perform printing again. If this alarm occurs frequently, check the connection of the DDIS video cable, replace the reader, and replace the video controller 2. When an error retry failed three times, E747-6xxx/7xxx is displayed. When an error retry failed three times, E747-6xxx/8xxx is displayed. When an error retry failed three times, E747-3xxx is displayed. When an error retry failed three times, E747-3xxx is displayed. T-7-30

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details

7-154

8

Service Mode ■ ■Overview ■ ■COPIER ■ ■FEEDER ■ ■SORTER ■ ■BOARD

8

Service Mode

8

Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations

Overview

8-2

Service mode item explanations

Instructions on how to use service mode items can be found within the service mode itself. The information explains what items have been added or changed from previous models.

Explanatory texts for the initial window, main items, sub items and minor items can be displayed. Select the desired initial window, main item, sub item or minor item, then pres [i] (Information button) to display an explanatory text (hereafter, service mode contents) on the selected item.

Entering Service Mode

E.g., COPIER > DISPLAY > Version window

Contact the sales company for the method to enter service mode.

Service Mode Menu TOP Screen 1) Press [i]

2) Minor item titles are displayed.

4) A detailed explanation on the item will be displayed (usage scenarios, instructions, settings range, etc.).

F-8-1

"MODELIST"

"MODELIST CLASSIC"

A brand new additional mode in the host machine. A function that can be used as a reference on how to use each item in Service Mode is installed. The new function, which will be described later, is available in MODELIST Mode. This mode is same as the old machine. The new function, which will be described later, is not available in the MODELIST CLASSIC Mode. 3) Select the desired minor item and press [i]

If " MODELIST " or " MODELIST CLASSIC " is pressed, the screen will switch to initial screen for each mode.

• The service mode contents can be displayed in J/E/F/I/G/S languages.

F-8-2

• Service mode contents, like system software, can be upgraded by SST.

8

Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations

8-2

8

Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description

I/O information enhancement

8-3

Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description

On the COPIER > I/O, the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used (sensor,

The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code

motor, fan, etc), makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part.

occurrence record screen.

And the screen will also display the input output signal. ERROR CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR

Device classification

Electrical parts classification

1) Press the button. Which button to press, will depend on which electrical parts intended and its device classification. For instance, if the host machine uses paper pass detection sensor, then press the button on the "COPIER" and "P-Sensor" position.

2) Then the selected electrical parts classification's mark, name, port number and 0/1 content will appear. F-8-4

ALARM CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR

3) If the "i" button is pressed, the screen displaying the electrical parts array will appear.

F-8-3 F-8-5

8

Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description

8-3

8

Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes

COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation

8-4

Security features

On the current machine, there are extremely many items in the COPIER > OPTION > BODY (in

To prevent unauthorized access to Service Mode, Password set is enabled.

related to host machine specification), that it is difficult to reach the intended item. In order to reach the intended item in shorter time, all items inside the BODY is classified to 15 categories. Classification Function switching

■■Related service modes • COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW (Level1)

Name FNC-SW

Set password type for transition to service mode.

Description Language, cassette, paper size type, NAVI/ DA connection, count-up spec., document size detection, dirt detection level

Display switching/ display timing

DSPLY-SW

UI (User Interface) display related

Image related (fixing)

IMG-FIX

Fixing related

Image related (transfer)

IMG-TR

Primary transfer, secondary transfer, ITB

Image related (developing)

IMG-DEV

Developer related

0: No password (default) 1: Service engineer 2: System administrator and Service engineer. • COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD (Level2) Password for service engineer for transition to service mode.

Image related (laser/ latent image) IMG-LSR

Laser, latent image related

Image related (reader/ ADF)

IMG-RDR

Reader, ADF image related

Image related (controller, other general items)

IMG-MCON MN-CON image related, and image related items other than those referred to above.

Image quality/ copy speed

IMG-SPD

Cleaning

CLEANING Cleaning of charging unit, drum, transfer roller, ITB, etc.

Environment settings

ENV-SET

Temperature, humidity, environmental heater, condensation, log acquisition

Paper feed (pickup, delivery)

FEED-SW

Stack performance, motor speed adjustment, delivery functions, etc.

Noise reduction

SOUND

Noise related

Network

NETWORK

Network settings, IFAX, SEND, E-RDS, etc.

Customization

CUSTOM

Customization

To reinforce the security, change the password from a default.

Power down sequence

******** (eight digit numeral) [default: 11111111] After the above setting, to enter Service Mode, enter password screen will appear.

T-8-1

8

Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes

8-4

8

Service Mode > Overview > Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)

1) Additional Functions > System Settings > System Manager Settings > enter System Manager ID > enter System Password Settings > press OK button.

8-5

Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2) Switching screens between level 1 and 2 has been made easier. When level 1 screen is displayed, press in the right upper side of the screen, and it will switch to level 2.

System Manager ID System Password

F-8-6

2) After entering the password for service technician (Service mode: COPIER > Option > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD), press OK button.

SM-PSWD

F-8-7

NOTE : If Service Engineer’s password is forgotten, password function is cancelable by using Service Support Tool (SST).

F-8-8

8

Service Mode > Overview > Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)

8-5

8

Service Mode > Overview > Back-up of service mode

Language switch

8-6

Back-up of service mode

The language of the explanatory text displayed in the Service Mode can be switched by

In factory setting, adjustments are made for each machine, and adjustment values are written

performing the below languange switch operation in User Mode

in the service label.

The explanatory text can be displayed by installing the Service Mode Content (SCMNT) in

When you replaced the DC controller PCB, or executed the RAM clear function, adjustment

HDD.

values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default. Therefore, when you made adjustments and

Service Mode Content (SCMNT) can be installed and upgraded on SST.

changed values of the Service Mode in the field, be sure to write down the changed values in

Additional Functions > Common Settings > Language Switch

the service label. When there is no relevant field in the service label, write down the values in a blank field.

Settings/Registration Service Label Language

English Japanese French German Italian Dutch

1/1

Keyboard Layout

F-8-10

Set

English(USA)Layout Cancel

OK

F-8-9

NOTE : If the Service Mode Content (SMCNT) of the concerned language is not installed, English explanatory text will be displayed. If English-language Service Mode Content (SMCNT) is not installed either, explanatory text can't be displayed.

8

Service Mode > Overview > Back-up of service mode

8-6

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

DISPLAY ■■VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION DC-CON Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range R-CON Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range PANEL Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ECO Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range FEEDER Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SORTER Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NIB Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SDL-STCH Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range OP-CON Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

8-7

Display of DCON firmware version To display the firmware version of DC Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of RCON firmware version To display the firmware version of Reader Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Control Panel CPU PCB ROM version To display the ROM version of Control Panel CPU PCB. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of ECO-ID PCB ROM version To display the ROM version of ECO-ID PCB. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of DADF Driver PCB ROM version To display the firmware version of DADF Driver PCB. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of FIN-CONT firmware version To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of network software version To display the version of the network software. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver To display the ROM version of the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Option Controller PCB ROM ver To display the ROM ver of Option Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

MN-CONT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RUI Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range PUNCH Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-EN Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-JP Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of MNCON firmware version To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of remote UI version To display the version of remote UI. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Puncher Unit version To display the version of Puncher Unit. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of English language file version To display the version of English language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of French language file version To display the version of French language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of German language file version To display the version of German language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Italian language file version To display the version of Italian language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Japanese language file ver To display the version of Japanese language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Czech language file version To display the version of Czech language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Danish language file version To display the version of Danish language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Greek language file version To display the version of Greek language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-7

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION LANG-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of Spanish language file version To display the version of Spanish language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Estonian language file ver To display the version of Estonian language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Finnish language file version To display the version of Finnish language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Hungarian language file ver To display the version of Hungarian language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Korean language file version To display the version of Korean language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Dutch language file version To display the version of Dutch language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Norwegian language file ver To display the version of Norwegian language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Polish language file version To display the version of Polish language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Portuguese language file ver To display the version of Portuguese language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Russian language file version To display the version of Russian language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Slovenian language file ver To display the version of Slovenian language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-8

LANG-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ECO-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range GDI-UFR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEAP Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of Swedish language file version To display the version of Swedish language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese language file ver: trad To display the version of Chinese language file (traditional). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese language file ver: smpl To display the version of Chinese language file (simplified). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of ECO-ID code To display the ECO-ID code. When upgrading the firmware ASCII character string (12 digits) Display of UFR function version To display the version of UFR function. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Bulgarian language file ver To display the version of Bulgarian language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Croatian language file ver To display the version of Croatian language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Romanian language file ver To display the version of Romanian language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Slovak language file version To display the version of Slovak language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Turkish language file version To display the version of Turkish language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of MEAP contents version To display the version of MEAP contents in HDD. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-8

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION OCR-CN Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range OCR-JP Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range OCR-KR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range OCR-TW Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOOTROM Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range TTS-JA Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range TTS-EN Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range TTS-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range TTS-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of Chinese OCR: simplified To display the version of Chinese OCR (simplified). “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Japanese OCR version To display the version of Japanese OCR. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Korean OCR version To display the version of Korean OCR. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Chinese OCR ver: traditional “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOOTROM version To display the version of BOOTROM. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Japanese voice dictionary version To display the version of Japanese voice dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of English voice dictionary version To display the version of English voice dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Italian voice dictionary version To display the version of Italian voice dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of French voice dictionary version To display the version of French voice dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-9

TTS-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range TTS-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range WEB-BRWS Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HELP Lv.1 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo LANG-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range WEBDAV Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range TIMESTMP Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of Spanish voice dictionary version To display the version of Spanish voice dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of German voice dictionary version To display the version of German voice dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Web browser version To display the version of Web browser. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Easy NAVI version To display the version of “Easy NAVI” file. Version should be displayed for Easy NAVI function because it is an external file. When upgrading the firmware Version should be displayed for EASY NAVI function because it is an external file. 00.01 to 99.99 EASY NAVI function is equipped as standard instead of the conventional HELP function. Display of Catalan language file version To display the version of Catalan language file. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of WebDAV version To display the version of “WebDAV” file. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of timestamp version To display the version of “Time Stamp” file. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-9

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ASR-JA Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ASR-EN Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo MEDIA-JA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-EN Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-DE Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-IT Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-FR Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of Japanese ASR dictionary version To display the version of Japanese automatic speech recognition dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ASR: Automatic Speech Recognition Dspl of English ASR dictionary version To display the version of English automatic speech recognition dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ASR: Automatic Speech Recognition Dspl of Japanese media information ver To display the version of Japanese media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of English media information version To display the version of English media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of German media information version To display the version of German media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Italian media information version To display the version of Italian media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of French media information version To display the version of French media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese media info ver: smpl To display the version of Chinese media information (simplified). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Slovak media information version To display the version of Slovak media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-10

MEDIA-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-ES Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of Turkish media information version To display the version of Turkish media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Czech media information version To display the version of Czech media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Greek media information version To display the version of Greek media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Spanish media information version To display the version of Spanish media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Estonian media information ver To display the version of Estonian media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Finnish media information version To display the version of Finnish media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Hungarian media information ver To display the version of Hungarian media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Korean media information version To display the version of Korean media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Dutch media information version To display the version of Dutch media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Norwegian media information ver To display the version of Norwegian media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Polish media information version To display the version of Polish media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-10

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION MEDIA-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range MEDIA-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ECO2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of Portuguese media information ver To display the version of Portuguese media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Russian media information version To display the version of Russian media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Slovenian media information ver To display the version of Slovenian media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Swedish media information version To display the version of Swedish media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese media info version:trad To display the version of Chinese media information (traditional). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Bulgarian media information ver To display the version of Bulgarian media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Croatian media information ver To display the version of Croatian media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Romanian media information ver To display the version of Romanian media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Catalan media information version To display the version of Catalan media information. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of ECO-ID PCB ROM ver (paper back) To display the ROM version of ECO-ID PCB (for paper back) when the 1-path DADF is connected. “--.--” is displayed when the 1-path DADF is not connected. When upgrading the firmware ECO2 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-11

FAX1 Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range FAX2/3/4 Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range IOCS Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SYSTEM Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ROOT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range TRIM Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range FOLD Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INS Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range PUNCH-IF Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range S-LNG-JP Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of 1-line FAX PCB ROM version To display the ROM version of 1-line FAX PCB. “NULL” is displayed if the PCB is not connected. When upgrading the firmware ASCII character string (21 digits) Dspl of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB ROM version To display the ROM version of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB. “NULL” is displayed if the PCB is not connected. When upgrading the firmware ASCII character string (21 digits) Display of BIOS version To display the BIOS version. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Linux kernel/tool/driver/file ver To display the version of Linux kernel/tool/driver/file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of ROOT version To display the ROOT version. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Trimmer ROM version To display the ROM version of Trimmer. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Paper Folding Unit ROM version To display the ROM version of Paper Folding Unit. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Inserter ROM version To display the ROM version of Inserter. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Multi-hole Puncher IFU ROM ver To display the ROM version of Interface Unit for Multi-hole Puncher. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode Japanese file ver To display the version of Japanese language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-11

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION S-LNG-EN Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range S-LNG-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range S-LNG-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range S-LNG-GR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range S-LNG-SP Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range UI-RES Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of service mode English file version To display the version of English language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode French file version To display the version of French language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode Italian file version To display the version of Italian language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode German file version To display the version of German language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode Spanish file version To display the version of Spanish language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UI resource file version To display the UIRES version. UIRES consists of the resource file which is necessary to display the native screen (top screen and software keyboard screen) of UI. When checking the version at the time of downloading UIRES to MFP 00.01 to 99.99 Display of COPY (JAVA UI) version To display the version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of SEND (JAVA UI) version To display the version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX (JAVA UI) version To display the version of BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of RUI portal version To display the RUI portal version. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-12

INTRO-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range TSP-JLK Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of useful func introduce appli ver To display the version of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Image Data Analyzer PCB version To display the version of Image Data Analyzer PCB. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli French file version To display the French language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Italian file version To display the Italian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli German file version To display the German language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Spanish file version To display the Spanish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl COPY appli Chinese file ver: smpl To display the simplified Chinese language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Chinese file ver:trad To display the traditional Chinese language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Korean file version To display the Korean language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-12

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPY-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of COPY appli Czech file version To display the Czech language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Danish file version To display the Danish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Greek file version To display the Greek language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Estonian file version To display the Estonian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Finnish file version To display the Finnish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Hungarian file version To display the Hungarian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Dutch file version To display the Dutch language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Norwegian file version To display the Norwegian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Polish file version To display the Polish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-13

COPY-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of COPY appli Portuguese file ver To display the Portuguese language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Russian file version To display the Russian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Slovenian file version To display the Slovenian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Swedish file version To display the Swedish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Indonesian file ver To display the Indonesian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Bulgarian file version To display the Bulgarian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Croatian file version To display the Croatian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Romanian file version To display the Romanian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Slovak file version To display the Slovak language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-13

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPY-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range COPY-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of COPY appli Turkish file version To display the Turkish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Catalan file version To display the Catalan language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Thai file version To display the Thai language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Vietnamese file ver To display the Vietnamese language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli French file version To display the French language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Italian file version To display the Italian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli German file version To display the German language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Spanish file version To display the Spanish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl SEND appli Chinese file ver: smpl To display the simplified Chinese language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-14

SEND-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of SEND appli Chinese file ver:trad To display the traditional Chinese language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Korean file version To display the Korean language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Czech file version To display the Czech language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Danish file version To display the Danish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Greek file version To display the Greek language file version of the SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Estonian file version To display the Estonian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Finnish file version To display the Finnish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Hungarian file version To display the Hungarian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Dutch file version To display the Dutch language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-14

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION SEND-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of SEND appli Norwegian file version To display the Norwegian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Polish file version To display the Polish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Portuguese file ver To display the Portuguese language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Russian file version To display the Russian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Slovenian file version To display the Slovenian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Swedish file version To display the Swedish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Indonesian file ver To display the Indonesian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Bulgarian file version To display the Bulgarian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Croatian file version To display the Croatian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-15

SEND-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of SEND appli Romanian file version To display the Romanian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Slovak file version To display the Slovak language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Turkish file version To display the Turkish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Catalan file version To display the Catalan language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Thai file version To display the Thai language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Vietnamese file ver To display the Vietnamese language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful func intro French file ver To display the version of French language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful func intro Italian file ver To display the version of Italian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful func intro German file ver To display the version of German language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-15

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION INTRO-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl useful func intro Spanish file ver To display the version of Spanish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Useful func intro Chinese file ver: smpl To display the version of simplified Chinese language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Useful func intro Chinese file ver: trad To display the version of traditional Chinese language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful func intro Korean file ver To display the version of Korean language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful func intro Czech file ver To display the version of Czech language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful func intro Danish file ver To display the version of Danish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful func intro Greek file ver To display the version of Greek language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful func intro Estonian file ver To display the version of Estonian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful func intro Finnish file ver To display the version of Finnish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-16

INTRO-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl useful func intro Hungarian file ver To display the version of Hungarian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful func intro Dutch file ver To display the version of Dutch language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful func intro Norwegian file ver To display the version of Norwegian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful func intro Polish file ver To display the version of Polish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful func intro Portuguese filever To display the version of Portuguese language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful func intro Russian file ver To display the version of Russian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful func intro Slovenian file ver To display the version of Slovenian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful func intro Swedish file ver To display the version of Swedish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful func intro Indon file ver To display the version of Indonesian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-16

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION INTRO-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range INTRO-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl useful func intro Bulgarian file ver To display the version of Bulgarian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful func intro Croatian file ver To display the version of Croatian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful func intro Romanian file ver To display the version of Romanian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful func intro Slovak file ver To display the version of Slovak language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful func intro Turkish file ver To display the version of Turkish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful func intro Catalan file ver To display the version of Catalan language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful func intro Thai file version To display the version of Thai language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Useful func intro Vietnamese file ver To display the version of Vietnamese language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu French file version To display the version of French language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-17

CSTMN-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of custom menu Italian file version To display the version of Italian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu German file version To display the version of German language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Spanish file version To display the version of Spanish language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl custom menu Chinese file ver: smpl To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Chinese file ver:trad To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Korean file version To display the version of Korean language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Czech file version To display the version of Czech language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Danish file version To display the version of Danish language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Greek file version To display the version of Greek language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-17

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION CSTMN-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of custom menu Estonian file version To display the version of Estonian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Finnish file version To display the version of Finnish language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Hungarian file ver To display the version of Hungarian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Dutch file version To display the version of Dutch language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Norwegian file ver To display the version of Norwegian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Polish file version To display the version of Polish language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Portuguese file ver To display the version of Portuguese language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Russian file version To display the version of Russian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Slovenian file ver To display the version of Slovenian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-18

CSTMN-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CSTMN-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of custom menu Swedish file version To display the version of Swedish language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Indonesian file ver To display the version of Indonesian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Bulgarian file ver To display the version of Bulgarian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Croatian file version To display the version of Croatian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Romanian file version To display the version of Romanian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Slovak file version To display the version of Slovak language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Turkish file version To display the version of Turkish language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Catalan file version To display the version of Catalan language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Thai file version To display the version of Thai language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-18

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION CSTMN-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of custom menu Vietnamese file ver To display the version of Vietnamese language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility French file version To display the version of French language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Italian file ver To display the version of Italian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility German file version To display the version of German language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Spanish file ver To display the version of Spanish language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl Accessibility Chinese file ver: smpl To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl accessibility Chinese file ver:trad To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Korean file version To display the version of Korean language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Czech file version To display the version of Czech language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-19

ACSBT-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of accessibility Danish file version To display the version of Danish language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Greek file version To display the version of Greek language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Estonian file ver To display the version of Estonian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Finnish file ver To display the version of Finnish language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Hungarian file ver To display the version of Hungarian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Dutch file version To display the version of Dutch language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Norwegian file ver To display the version of Norwegian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Polish file version To display the version of Polish language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Portuguese file ver To display the version of Portuguese language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-19

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ACSBT-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of accessibility Russian file ver To display the version of Russian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Slovenian file ver To display the version of Slovenian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Swedish file ver To display the version of Swedish language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Indonesian file ver To display the version of Indonesian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Bulgarian file ver To display the version of Bulgarian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Croatian file ver To display the version of Croatian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Romanian file ver To display the version of Romanian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Slovak file version To display the version of Slovak language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Turkish file ver To display the version of Turkish language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-20

ACSBT-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ACSBT-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ERS-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of accessibility Catalan file ver To display the version of Catalan language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Thai file version To display the version of Thai language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Vietnamese file ver To display the version of Vietnamese language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of ERS French file version To display the version of French language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Italian file version To display the version of Italian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS German file version To display the version of German language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Spanish file version To display the version of Spanish language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Chinese file ver:smpl To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System

8-20

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ERS-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of ERS Chinese file ver:trad To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Korean file version To display the version of Korean language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Czech file version To display the version of Czech language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Danish file version To display the version of Danish language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Greek file version To display the version of Greek language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Estonian file version To display the version of Estonian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Finnish file version To display the version of Finnish language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Hungarian file version To display the version of Hungarian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System

8

8-21

ERS-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of ERS Dutch file version To display the version of Dutch language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Norwegian file version To display the version of Norwegian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Polish file version To display the version of Polish language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Portuguese file ver To display the version of Portuguese language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Russian file version To display the version of Russian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Slovenian file version To display the version of Slovenian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Swedish file version To display the version of Swedish language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Indonesian file ver To display the version of Indonesian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System

8-21

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ERS-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ERS-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of ERS Bulgarian file version To display the version of Bulgarian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Croatian file version To display the version of Croatian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Romanian file version To display the version of Romanian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Slovak file version To display the version of Slovak language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Turkish file version To display the version of Turkish language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Catalan file version To display the version of Catalan language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Thai file version To display the version of Thai language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of ERS Vietnamese file version To display the version of Vietnamese language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC French file version To display the version of French language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-22

NLS-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of UAC Italian file version To display the version of Italian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC German file version To display the version of German language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Spanish file version To display the version of Spanish language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Chinese file ver:smpl To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Chinese file ver:trad To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Korean file version To display the version of Korean language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Czech file version To display the version of Czech language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Danish file version To display the version of Danish language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Greek file version To display the version of Greek language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Estonian file version To display the version of Estonian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-22

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION NLS-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of UAC Finnish file version To display the version of Finnish language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Hungarian file version To display the version of Hungarian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Dutch file version To display the version of Dutch language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Norwegian file version To display the version of Norwegian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Polish file version To display the version of Polish language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Portuguese file ver To display the version of Portuguese language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Russian file version To display the version of Russian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Slovenian file version To display the version of Slovenian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Swedish file version To display the version of Swedish language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Indonesian file ver To display the version of Indonesian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-23

NLS-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NLS-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range ROM-Y Lv.2 Details

Display of UAC Bulgarian file version To display the version of Bulgarian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Croatian file version To display the version of Croatian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Romanian file version To display the version of Romanian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Slovak file version To display the version of Slovak language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Turkish file version To display the version of Turkish language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Catalan file version To display the version of Catalan language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Y-clr Laser Scanner version To display the lot No., unit version and EEPROM version written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit (Y). Use case When checking the lot No. or EEPROM version of Laser Scanner Unit Adj/set/operate method N/A (display only) Display/adj/set range Lot No.: 4 digits (decimal notation), unit version: 1 digit (hexadecimal notation), EEPROM version: 1 digit (hexadecimal notation) ROM-M Display of M-clr Laser Scanner version Lv.2 Details To display the lot No., unit version and EEPROM version written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit (M). Use case When checking the lot No. or EEPROM version of Laser Scanner Unit Adj/set/operate method N/A (display only) Display/adj/set range Lot No.: 4 digits (decimal notation), unit version: 1 digit (hexadecimal notation), EEPROM version: 1 digit (hexadecimal notation)

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

8-23

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ROM-C Lv.2 Details

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of C-clr Laser Scanner version To display the lot No., unit version and EEPROM version written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit (C). Use case When checking the lot No. or EEPROM version of Laser Scanner Unit Adj/set/operate method N/A (display only) Display/adj/set range Lot No.: 4 digits (decimal notation), unit version: 1 digit (hexadecimal notation), EEPROM version: 1 digit (hexadecimal notation) ROM-K Display of Bk-clr Laser Scanner version Lv.2 Details To display the lot No., unit version and EEPROM version written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit (Bk). Use case When checking the lot No. or EEPROM version of Laser Scanner Unit Adj/set/operate method N/A (display only) Display/adj/set range Lot No.: 4 digits (decimal notation), unit version: 1 digit (hexadecimal notation), EEPROM version: 1 digit (hexadecimal notation) BCT Display of self diagnosis tool version Lv.1 Details To display the version of self diagnosis tool. Use case When upgrading the firmware Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 ASR-ES Dspl of Spanish ASR dictionary version Lv.1 Details To display the version of Spanish automatic speech recognition dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. Use case When upgrading the firmware Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Supplement/memo ASR: Automatic Speech Recognition ASR-FR Dspl of French ASR dictionary version Lv.1 Details To display the version of French automatic speech recognition dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. Use case When upgrading the firmware Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Supplement/memo ASR: Automatic Speech Recognition ASR-IT Dspl of Italian ASR dictionary version Lv.1 Details To display the version of Italian automatic speech recognition dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. Use case When upgrading the firmware Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Supplement/memo ASR: Automatic Speech Recognition

ASR-DE Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo LANG-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LANG-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

8

8-24

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of German ASR dictionary version To display the version of German automatic speech recognition dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 ASR: Automatic Speech Recognition Display of Thai language file version To display the version of Thai language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Vietnamese language file ver To display the version of Vietnamese language file. When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli French file version To display the version of French language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Italian file version To display the version of Italian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli German file version To display the version of German language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Spanish file version To display the version of Spanish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Chinese file ver:smpl To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Chinese file ver:trad To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-24

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION BOX-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of BOX appli Korean file version To display the version of Korean language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Czech file version To display the version of Czech language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Danish file version To display the version of Danish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Greek file version To display the version of Greek language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Estonian file version To display the version of Estonian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Finnish file version To display the version of Finnish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Hungarian file version To display the version of Hungarian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Dutch file version To display the version of Dutch language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Norwegian file version To display the version of Norwegian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-25

BOX-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of BOX appli Polish file version To display the version of Polish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Portuguese file ver To display the version of Portuguese language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Russian file version To display the version of Russian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Slovenian file version To display the version of Slovenian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Swedish file version To display the version of Swedish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Indonesian file ver To display the version of Indonesian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Bulgarian file version To display the version of Bulgarian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Croatian file version To display the version of Croatian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Romanian file version To display the version of Romanian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-25

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION BOX-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BOX-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of BOX appli Slovak file version To display the version of Slovak language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Turkish file version To display the version of Turkish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Catalan file version To display the version of Catalan language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Thai file version To display the version of Thai language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Vietnamese file version To display the version of Vietnamese language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of job hold application version To display the version of the job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold French file version To display the French language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Italian file version To display the Italian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold German file version To display the German language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-26

HOLD-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of job hold Spanish file version To display the Spanish language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Job hold Chinese file version: smpl To display the simplified Chinese language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Job hold Chinese file version: trad To display the traditional Chinese language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Korean file version To display the Korean language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Czech file version To display the Czech language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Danish file version To display the Danish language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Greek file version To display the Greek language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Estonian file version To display the Estonian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Finnish file version To display the Finnish language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-26

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION HOLD-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of job hold Hungarian file version To display the Hungarian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Dutch file version To display the Dutch language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Norwegian file version To display the Norwegian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Polish file version To display the Polish language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Portuguese file version To display the Portuguese language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Russian file version To display the Russian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Slovenian file version To display the Slovenian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Swedish file version To display the Swedish language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Indonesian file version To display the Indonesian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-27

HOLD-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HOLD-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range WSDS-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of job hold Bulgarian file version To display the Bulgarian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Croatian file version To display the Croatian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Romanian file version To display the Romanian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Slovak file version To display the Slovak language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Turkish file version To display the Turkish language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Catalan file version To display the Catalan language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Catalan file version To display the Catalan language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of job hold Catalan file version To display the Catalan language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99 Display of WSD-SCAN (JAVA UI) version To display the version of WSD-SCAN application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware 00.01 to 99.99

8-27

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

NLS-TH Lv.2 Details Use case

Display of UAC Thai file version To display the version of Thai language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware

Display/adj/set range NLS-VN Lv.2 Details

00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Vietnamese file version To display the version of Vietnamese language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware

Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

00.00 to 99.99 Display of RUI portal Czech file version To display the Czech language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Danish file version To display the Danish language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Display of RUI portal Greek file version To display the Greek language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Estonian file version To display the Estonian language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Finnish file version To display the Finnish language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Hungarian file ver To display the Hungarian language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Display of RUI portal Dutch file version To display the Dutch language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Norwegian file ver To display the Norwegian language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99

8

8-28

RPTL-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of RUI portal Polish file version To display the Polish language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Portuguese file ver To display the Portuguese language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Russian file version To display the Russian language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Slovenian file ver To display the Slovenian language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Swedish file version To display the Swedish language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Indonesian file ver To display the Indonesian language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Bulgarian file ver To display the Bulgarian language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Croatian file version To display the Croatian language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Romanian file version To display the Romanian language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Slovak file version To display the Slovak language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Turkish file version To display the Turkish language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99

8-28

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

8-29

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION RPTL-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RPTL-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Dspl of RUI portal Catalan file version To display the Catalan language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Display of RUI portal Thai file version To display the Thai language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of RUI portal Vietnamese file ver To display the Vietnamese language file version of the RUI portal. When upgrading the firmware 00.00 to 99.99 T-8-2

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

8-29

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS

■■USER

■■ACC-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > USER

SPDTYPE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range BRWS-STS Lv.1 Details

Use case Caution

Display/adj/set range

Related service mode

8-30 COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS

Dspl of Ctrollr Board engine speed type To display the engine speed type (ppm) of Controller Board. When checking the engine speed type of Controller Board 55 to 75 Display of service browser ON/OFF To display whether the service browser can be used. If the value is 1, [Service Browser] button is displayed on the service mode initial screen. The value of BRWS-STS switches whenever COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> BRWS-ACT is executed, but ON/OFF of service browser is enabled after reboot. If the service browser does not start even though the value of BRWS-STS is 1, turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When checking the usage status of service browser The value of BRWS-STS is linked with COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> BRWS-ACT, but the service browser cannot start even though 1 is displayed unless the main power switch is turned OFF/ ON. 0 to 2 0: OFF (Only at the time of factory shipment, not connected to the UGW server), 1: ON (Available), 2: OFF (Not available) COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> BRWS-ACT

FEEDER Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SORTER Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

DECK Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

T-8-3

CARD Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

RAM Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS

Display of DADF connection state To display the connection state of DADF. When checking the connection between the machine and DADF 0 to 1 0: Not connected, 1: Connected Connect state of Finisher-related option To display the connecting state of Finisher-related options. When checking the connection of Finisher-related options Left column (connecting state of Finisher-related options): 1 to 5 1: Without Saddle 2: With Saddle, without Folding Unit 3: With Saddle and Inserter, without Folding Unit 4: With Saddle and Folding Unit, without Inserter 5: With Saddle, Inserter and Folding Unit Right column (connecting state of Finisher-belonged Inserter): 0 to 4 0: no hole, 1: 2-hole, 2: 2/3-hole, 3: 4-hole, 4: 4-hole (SW) Dspl of Paper Deck connection state To display the connection state of the Paper Deck. When checking the connection between the machine and the Paper Decks 0 to 8 0: Not connected 1: Connected (small) (Display is hidden on this machine.) 2: Connected (large) 3: POD Deck Lite (with Multi-purpose Tray) 4: POD Deck Lite (without Multi-purpose Tray ) 5: Multi-purpose Tray only 6: POD deck 7: 2-POD deck connected 8: 3-POD deck connected (Display is hidden on this machine.) Dspl of connection state of Card Reader To display the connecting state of Card Reader. When checking the connection between the machine and the Card Reader 0 to 1 0: No card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy is not available.) 1: Card Reader is not connected, or card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy is available.) Display of MNCON PCB memory capacity To display the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB. When checking the memory capacity of the machine Numeric value

8-30

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS

COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS COINROBO Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range NIB Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

NETWARE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SEND Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range HDD Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range PCI1 Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS

Dspl of Coin Manager connection state To display the connecting state of the Coin Manager. When checking the connection between the machine and the Coin Manager 0 to 1 0: Not connected, 1: Connected Display of Network PCB connection state To display the connection state of the Network PCB. When checking the connection between the machine and the Network PCB 0 to 3 0: Not connected, 1: Ethernet PCB connected, 2: Token Ring PCB connected, 3: Ethernet PCB + Token Ring PCB connected Install state dspl of NetWare firmware To display the installation state of NetWare firmware. When checking whether NetWare firmware is installed to the machine 0 to 1 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Display of SEND support PCB existence To display whether there is a PCB to support SEND function. SEND function can be used only when the PCB is mounted. When checking the connection between the machine and the PCB that supports SEND function 0 to 1 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Display of HDD model name To display the model name of HDD. When checking the model name of HDD used on the machine Character string Display of PCI1-connected PCB name To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1. When checking the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1 -: No PCB connected Voice Board: Voice PCB 3DES Board: Encryption PCB 1Gbit-Board: Giga Ethernet PCB

8

8-31

PCI2 Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

PCI3 Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

IA-RAM Lv.1 Details Use case

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS

Display of PCI2-connected PCB name To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI2. When checking name of the PCB that is connected to PCI2 -: No PCB connected iSLOT: iSLOT Wireless LAN PCB Voice Board: Voice PCB Voice Board R: Voice Recognition PCB (Display is hidden on this machine.) 3DES Board: Encryption PCB 1Gbit-Board: Giga Ethernet PCB Display of PCI3-connected PCB name To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI3. When checking name of the PCB that is connected to PCI3 -: No PCB connected iSLOT: iSLOT Wireless LAN PCB Voice Board: Voice PCB Voice Board R: Voice Recognition PCB (Display is hidden on this machine.) 3DES Board: Encryption PCB 1Gbit-Board: Giga Ethernet PCB Display of MNCON PCB memory(IA) capacity To display the memory (IA) capacity of the Main Controller PCB. When checking the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB T-8-4

8-31

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG

■■ANALOG

COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG

TEMP Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Appropriate target value HUM Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Appropriate target value ABS-HUM Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Appropriate target value DR-TEMP FIX-UC Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit FIX-UE Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit FIX-LC Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Appropriate target value

8-32

Display of outside temperature To display the temperature outside the machine. This is measured by the Environment Sensor that measures the outside air. When checking the temperature outside the machine 0 to 60 deg C 20 to 27 Display of outside humidity To display the humidity outside the machine. This is measured by the Environment Sensor that measures the outside air. When checking the humidity outside the machine 0 to 100 % 30 to 70 Display of outside moisture amount To display the absolute moisture amount outside the machine. This is measured by the Environment Sensor that measures the outside air. When checking the moisture amount outside the machine 0 to 100 g/m3 0 to 22 [For R&D] Dspl of Fixing Belt center temperature To display the center temperature of the Fixing Belt detected by the Fixing Main Thermistor. When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Belt 0 to 999 deg C Dspl of Fixing Belt rear edge temperature To display the rear edge temperature of the Fixing Belt detected by the Fixing Sub Thermistor 1. When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Belt 0 to 999 deg C Dspl of Pressure Belt center temperature To display the center temperature of the Pressure Belt detected by the Pressure Main Thermistor. When checking the temperature at the center of the Pressure Belt deg C At standby: 90 to 140 At print: 70 to 150 (differs depending on modes)

8

FIX-UE2 Lv.1 Details

Dspl of Fixing Belt front edge temp To display the front edge temperature of the Fixing Belt detected by the Fixing Sub Thermistor 2. Use case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Belt Display/adj/set range 0 to 999 Unit deg C DR-TEMPL [For R&D] DEVHUM1 Dspl of Y/M color Dev Ass’y humidity Lv.2 Details To display the humidity of the Y and M Developing Assembly detected by the Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y/M). Use case When a failure occurs on the developing contrast Display/adj/set range 0 to 100 Unit % Appropriate target value 5 to 80 DEVHUM2 Dspl of C color Developing Ass’y humidity Lv.2 Details To display the humidity of the C Developing Assembly detected by the Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (C/Bk). Use case When a failure occurs on the developing contrast Display/adj/set range 0 to 100 Unit % Appropriate target value 5 to 80 DEVTEMP2 Dspl of C color Developing Ass’y temp Lv.2 Details To display the temperature of the C Developing Assembly detected by the Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (C/ Bk). Use case When a failure occurs on the developing contrast Display/adj/set range 0 to 100 Unit deg C Appropriate target value 10 to 45 Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> DEVHUM1, DEVHUM2, DEVTEMP1 PDK-TEMP Dspl of POD Deck compartment temp Lv.1 Details To display the compartment temperature of POD Deck Lite. It may be out of order if the indicated temperature is greatly different from the machine right after power-on. Display/adj/set range 0 to 60 Unit deg C Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> TEMP, PDK-HUM PDK-HUM Dspl of POD Deck compartment humidity Lv.1 Details To display the compartment humidity of POD Deck Lite. It may be out of order if the indicated humidity is greatly different from the machine right after power-on. Display/adj/set range 0 to 100 Unit % Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> HUM, PDK-TEMP

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG

8-32

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS

COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG MDK-TEMP Lv.1 Details

Dspl of Multi Deck compartment temp To display the compartment temperature of the Multi Deck. It may be out of order if the indicated temperature is greatly different from the machine right after power-on. Display/adj/set range 0 to 60 Unit deg C Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> TEMP, MDK-HUM MDK-HUM Dspl of POD Deck compartment humidity Lv.1 Details To display the compartment humidity of the Multi Deck. It may be out of order if the indicated humidity is greatly different from the machine right after power-on. Display/adj/set range 0 to 100 Unit % Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> HUM, MDK-TEMP DEVTEMP1 Dspl of Y/M Developing Ass’y temperature Lv.2 Details To display the temperature of the Y and M Developing Assembly detected by the Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y/M). Use case When a failure occurs on the developing contrast Display/adj/set range 0 to 100 Unit deg C Appropriate target value 10 to 45 Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> DEVHUM1, DEVHUM2, DEVTEMP2 FX-MTR Display of Fixing Motor current value Lv.1 Details To display the real-time current value of the Fixing Motor. Use case When checking the life of the Pressure Roller Unit mA FIX-UC2 Fixing Thermistor output temperature Lv.1 Details To display the output temperature of the Fixing Thermistor (Fixing Center Thermistor 1). Use case When checking the output temperature of the Fixing Center Thermistor 1 Display/adj/set range 0 to 999 Unit deg C FIX-UC3 Fixing Thermistor output temperature Lv.1 Details To display the output temperature of the Fixing Thermistor (Fixing Center Thermistor 2). Use case When checking the output temperature of the Fixing Center Thermistor 2 Display/adj/set range 0 to 999 Unit deg C

8-33

■■CST-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS WIDTH-MF Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Dspl of Multi-purpose Tray ppr width size To display the paper width size set on the Multi-purpose Tray. When checking the paper width side set on the Multi-purpose Tray Numeric value T-8-6

T-8-5

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS

8-33

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS

■■HV-STS

COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS

PRI-GRID Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode PRE-TR Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode 1ATVC-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit 1ATVC-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit 1ATVC-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit

8-34

Display of primary charging current To display the current that is Applied to the Primacy Charging Assembly At the latest. The result set in COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRIMARY is reflected. When checking ON/OFF of potential control -1200 to 0 uA COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRIMARY Dspl of pre-transfer charge DC current To display the DC component of current that is Applied to the Pretransfer Charging Assembly At the latest The result set in COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> PRE-TR is reflected. For checking -650 to 0 uA COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> PRE-TR Dspl pry trns paper interval current (Y) To display the decuple value of the paper interval current lastly flown on the Y Primary Transfer Roller by the primary transfer paper interval ATVC control. When estimating the life of Primary Transfer Roller based on the displayed value 0 to 900 uA Dspl pry trns paper interval current (M) To display the decuple value of the paper interval current lastly flown on the M Primary Transfer Roller by the primary transfer paper interval ATVC control. When estimating the life of Primary Transfer Roller based on the displayed value 0 to 900 uA Dspl pry trns paper interval current (C) To display the decuple value of the paper interval current lastly flown on the C Primary Transfer Roller by the primary transfer paper interval ATVC control. When estimating the life of Primary Transfer Roller based on the displayed value 0 to 900 uA

8

1ATVC-K4 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit 1ATVC-K1 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit 2EL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode PR-GRI-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode 2ATVC-F1 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS

Dspl pry trns ppr intvl crrnt (Bk):clr To display the decuple value of the paper interval current lastly flown on the Bk Primary Transfer Roller by the primary transfer paper interval ATVC control At full-color jobs. When estimating the life of Primary Transfer Roller based on the displayed value 0 to 900 uA Dspl pry trams ppr intvl crrnt (Bk):B&W To display the decuple value of the paper interval current lastly flown on the Bk Primary Transfer Roller by the primary transfer paper interval ATVC control At B&W jobs. When estimating the life of Primary Transfer Roller based on the displayed value 0 to 900 uA Dspl Sec Transfer Static Eliminator voltg To display the voltage which is Applied to the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator At the latest. For checking -4000 to 0 V COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 2EL Dspl of Prmry Charging Ass’y grid voltage To display the grid voltage of the Primary Charging Assembly. Check that the value is in the range of Bk Drum surface potential Vd + 0 to 200V. Values out of the tolerable range may indicate failures of the Primary Charging Assembly or the Photosensitive Drum. When checking the grid voltage of the Primary Charging Assembly 0 to 1200 V COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> DPOT-K Sec Trns ATVC target current:clr,1/1 SPD To display the decuple value of the target current At full-color 1/1 speed derived from the latest secondary transfer Full ATVC control. When judging whether the secondary transfer is appropriately set At image failure The correct value is not shown unless paper feed has triggered the secondary transfer ATVC control After power-off/on. -70 to 0 uA

8-34

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS

COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS PRIACV-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

PRIACV-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

PRIACV-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

2ATVC-M1 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS

Discharge current ctrl setting voltg (Y) To display the AC voltage setting value to be Applied to the Y Charging Roller At 1/1 speed derived from the latest discharge current control. When checking the voltage value (Y) for discharge current control 0 to 3000 V COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRIACV-M, PRIACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-M, PRIACI-C, PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M, PRISMP-C COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DISCHG Discharge current ctrl setting voltg (Y) To display the AC voltage setting value to be Applied to the M Charging Roller At 1/1 speed derived from the latest discharge current control. When checking the voltage value (M) for discharge current control 0 to 3000 V COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRIACV-Y, PRIACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-M, PRIACI-C, PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M, PRISMP-C COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DISCHG Discharge current ctrl setting voltg (C) To display the AC voltage setting value to be Applied to the C Charging Roller At 1/1 speed derived from the latest discharge current control. When checking the voltage value (C) for discharge current control 0 to 3000 V COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRIACV-Y, PRIACV-M, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-M, PRIACI-C, PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M, PRISMP-C COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DISCHG Sec Trns ATVC target current:B&W,1/1 SPD To display the decuple value of the target current At B&W 1/1 speed derived from the latest secondary transfer Full ATVC control. When judging whether the secondary transfer is appropriately set At image failure The correct value is not shown unless paper feed has triggered the secondary transfer ATVC control After power-off/on. Number uA COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 2TR-TGT1 to 8, TR-PPR1 to 8

8

8-35

2ATVC-F2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode 2ATVC-M2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode 2ATVC-F3 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode 2ATVC-M3 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS

Sec Trns ATVC target current:clr,1/2 SPD To display the decuple value of the target current At full-color 1/2 speed derived from the latest secondary transfer Full ATVC control. When judging whether the secondary transfer is appropriately set At image failure The correct value is not shown unless paper feed has triggered the secondary transfer ATVC control After power-off/on. Number uA COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 2TR-TGT1 to 8, TR-PPR1 to 8 Sec Trns ATVC target current:B&W,1/2 SPD To display the decuple value of the target current At B&W 1/2 speed derived from the latest secondary transfer Full ATVC control. When judging whether the secondary transfer is appropriately set At image failure The correct value is not shown unless paper feed has triggered the secondary transfer ATVC control After power-off/on. Number uA COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 2TR-TGT1 to 8, TR-PPR1 to 8 Sec Trns ATVC target current:clr,1/3 SPD To display the decuple value of the target current At full-color 1/3 speed derived from the latest secondary transfer Full ATVC control. When judging whether the secondary transfer is appropriately set At image failure The correct value is not shown unless paper feed has triggered the secondary transfer ATVC control After power-off/on. Number uA COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 2TR-TGT1 to 8, TR-PPR1 to 8 Sec Trns ATVC target current:B&W,1/3 SPD To display the decuple value of the target current At B&W 1/3 speed derived from the latest secondary transfer Full ATVC control. When judging whether the secondary transfer is appropriately set At image failure The correct value is not shown unless paper feed has triggered the secondary transfer ATVC control After power-off/on. Number uA COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 2TR-TGT1 to 8, TR-PPR1 to 8

8-35

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS

COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS PRIACI-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

PRIACI-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

PRIACI-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

PRISMP-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS

Discharge current ctrl set current (Y) To display the AC current setting value to be Applied to the Y Charging Roller At 1/1 speed derived from the latest discharge current control. When checking the current value (Y) for discharge current control 0 to 5000 uA COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRIMACV-Y, PRIMACV-M, PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-M, PRIACI-C, PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M, PRISMP-C COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DISCHG Discharge current ctrl set current (M) To display the AC current setting value to be Applied to the M Charging Roller At 1/1 speed derived from the latest discharge current control. When checking the current value (M) for discharge current control 0 to 5000 uA COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRIMACV-Y, PRIMACV-M, PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-C, PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M, PRISMP-C COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DISCHG Discharge current ctrl set current (C) To display the AC current setting value to be Applied to the C Charging Roller At 1/1 speed derived from the latest discharge current control. When checking the current value (C) for discharge current control 0 to 5000 uA COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRIMACV-Y, PRIMACV-M, PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-M, PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M, PRISMP-C COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DISCHG Discharge current ctrl sampling point(Y) To display the AC current value flown on the Y Charging Roller when the certain voltage is Applied by the latest discharge current control. AC current/current to be Applied At 1/1 speed is derived from 6 sampling results. When checking the sampling results of discharge current control 0 to 5000 uA COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRISMP-M, PRISMP-C, PRIMACV-Y, PRIMACV-M, PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-M, PRIACI-C COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DISCHG

8

8-36

PRISMP-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

PRISMP-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS

Discharge current ctrl sampling point(M) To display the AC current value flown on the Y Charging Roller when the certain voltage is Applied by the latest discharge current control. AC current/current to be Applied At 1/1 speed is derived from 6 sampling results. When checking the sampling results of discharge current control 0 to 5000 uA COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-C, PRIMACV-Y, PRIMACV-M, PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-M, PRIACI-C COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DISCHG Discharge current ctrl sampling point(C) To display the AC current value flown on the Y Charging Roller when the certain voltage is Applied by the latest discharge current control. AC current/current to be Applied At 1/1 speed is derived from 6 sampling results. When checking the sampling results of discharge current control 0 to 5000 uA COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M, PRIMACV-Y, PRIMACV-M, PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-M, PRIACI-C COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DISCHG T-8-7

8-36

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD

■■CCD

COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD

TARGET-B Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range TARGET-G Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range TARGET-R Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN-OB Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN-OG Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN-OR Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

8-37

Shading target value (B) To display the shading target value of Blue. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum) is considered a failure of the Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 0 to FFFF Shading target value (G) To display the target value of Green. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum) is considered a failure of the Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 0 to FFFF Shading target value (R) To display the shading target value of Red. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum) is considered a failure of the Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 0 to FFFF Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(B): frt To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 0 to FFFF Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(G): frt To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 0 to FFFF Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(R): frt To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 0 to FFFF

8

GAIN-EB Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN-EG Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN-ER Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range LAMP-BW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo LAMP-CL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo LAMP2-BW Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD

Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(B):frt To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 0 to FFFF Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(G):frt To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 0 to FFFF Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(R):frt To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 0 to FFFF Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(B&W): front To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (paper front) in B&W scanning mode. When image failure occurs at front side scanning in black mode 20 to 163 LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit. Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(color): frt To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (paper front) in color scanning mode. When image failure occurs at front side scanning in color mode 33 to 163 LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit. Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(B&W): back To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (paper back) in B&W scanning mode. When image failure occurs at back side scanning in black mode. 33 to 163 LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit.

8-37

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD

8-38

COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD LAMP2-CL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo OFST-BW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range OFST-CL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range OFST2-BW Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN-BW1 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN-BW2 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN-BW3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN-BW4 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN2BW1 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD

Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(color): back To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (paper back) in color scanning mode. When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode 33 to 163 LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit. Img Sensor offset value (B&W) [Front] To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at B&W scanning. When image failure occurs at front side scanning in black mode 1 to 95 Img Sensor offset value (color) [Front] To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at color scanning. When image failure occurs at front side scanning in color mode 1 to 95 Img Sensor offset value (B&W) [Back] To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at B&W scanning. When image failure occurs at back side scanning in black mode. 1 to 95 Img Sensor gain level adj VL1(B&W): frt To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of Scanner Unit (paper front). When image failure occurs at front side scanning in black mode 1 to 47 Img Sensor gain level adj VL2(B&W): frt To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 2 of Scanner Unit (paper front). When image failure occurs at front side scanning in black mode 1 to 47 Img Sensor gain level adj VL3(B&W): frt To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 3 of Scanner Unit (paper front). When image failure occurs at front side scanning in black mode 1 to 47 Img Sensor gain level adj VL4(B&W): frt To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 4 of Scanner Unit (paper front). When image failure occurs at front side scanning in black mode 1 to 47 Img Sensor gain level adj VL1(B&W): Back To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of Scanner Unit (paper back). When image failure occurs at back side scanning in black mode. 1 to 47

8

GAIN2BW2 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN2BW3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN2BW4 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN2-OR Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN2-OG Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN2-OB Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD

Use case Display/adj/set range

Img Sensor gain level adj VL2(B&W): Back To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 2 of Scanner Unit (paper back). When image failure occurs at back side scanning in black mode. 1 to 47 Img Sensor gain level adj VL3(B&W): Back To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 3 of Scanner Unit (paper back). When image failure occurs at back side scanning in black mode. 1 to 47 Img Sensor gain level adj VL4(B&W): Back To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 4 of Scanner Unit (paper back). When image failure occurs at back side scanning in black mode. 1 to 47 Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(R): bck To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 1 to 47 Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(G): bck To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 1 to 47 Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(B): bck To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 1 to 47

8-38

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD GAIN2-ER Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN2-EG Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range GAIN2-EB Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range OFST2-CL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(R):bck To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 1 to 47 Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(G):bck To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 1 to 47 Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(B):bck To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure 1 to 47 Img Sensor offset value (color) [Back] To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at color scanning. When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode 1 to 95

8-39

■■DPOT COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT DPOT-K Lv.1 Details

Use case Caution

Display/adj/set range Unit VCONT-K Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit VBACK-K Lv.2 Details

T-8-8

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit 2TR-PPR Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

Display of Bk Drum surface potential To display the current surface potential Vd on the Bk Photosensitive Drum that is specified as a result of the potential control. The value after the calculation of potential offset is displayed. If the offset value is not adjusted, negative value may be detected during printing. When the density failure or foggy image occurs, check whether the surface potential of the Drum is the factor. - To update the display, be sure to move to a different screen, and then move back to display it again. (The potential at the moment of showing this screen is displayed.) - If the value is out of range (-30 to 30), there is a possibility of Potential Sensor disconnection. -1100 to 0 V Dspl of Bk contrast potential setting VL To display the current setting value of Bk contrast potential Vcont. When checking contrast potential 0 to 800 V Dspl of Bk fogging removal potntl set VL To display the current setting value of Bk fogging removal potential Vback (difference between the developing DC bias and the charging potential). The fogging correction value is set based on this value and the value set in user mode (Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast). When checking the setting value of fogging removal potential at image failure such as fogging Fogging occurred in the normal use range of 150 to 250V is judged as an error on the high voltage or the Potential Sensor. 0 to 300 V Dspl of sec trns ATVC ppr allotted voltg To display the paper allotted voltage set by the latest secondary transfer Full ATVC control. The appropriate range may be exceeded due to wrong media setting. When transfer failure occurs on certain media 0 to 5000 V

8-39

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT 2TR-BASE Lv.2 Details

COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

Dspl of sec transfer ATVC base voltage To display the base voltage set by the latest secondary transfer Full ATVC control. The appropriate range may be exceeded due to wrong media setting. Use case When transfer failure occurs on certain media Display/adj/set range 0 to 6000 Unit V 1TR-DC-Y Dspl of primary transfer voltage (Y) Lv.2 Details To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller (Y). Use case When transfer failure occurs due to the primary transfer Display/adj/set range 0 to 5000 Unit V 1TR-DC-M Dspl of primary transfer voltage (M) Lv.2 Details To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller (M). Use case When transfer failure occurs due to the primary transfer Display/adj/set range 0 to 5000 Unit V 1TR-DC-C Dspl of primary transfer voltage (C) Lv.2 Details To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller (C). Use case When transfer failure occurs due to the primary transfer Display/adj/set range 0 to 5000 Unit V 1TR-DC-K Dspl of primary transfer voltage (Bk) Lv.2 Details To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk). Use case When transfer failure occurs due to the primary transfer Display/adj/set range 0 to 5000 Unit V CHG-AC-Y Display of primary charging AC bias (Y) Lv.2 Details To display the primary charging AC bias lastly applied to the Primary Charging Roller (Y). Use case When an image failure occurs due to charging failure Display/adj/set range 0 to 3000 Unit V Appropriate target value 1400 to 2400 Related service mode COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > CHACOUTM CHG-AC-M Display of primary charge AC current (M) Lv.2 Details To display the primary charging AC current lastly flown with the AC voltage applied on the Charging Roller (M). Use case When an image failure occurs due to charging failure Display/adj/set range 0 to 3000 Unit V Appropriate target value 1400 to 2400 Related service mode COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > CHACOUTM

8

8-40

CHG-AC-C Lv.2 Details

Display of primary charging AC bias (C) To display the primary charging AC bias lastly applied to the Primary Charging Roller (C). Use case When an image failure occurs due to charging failure Display/adj/set range 0 to 3000 Unit V Appropriate target value 1400 to 2400 Related service mode COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > CHACOUTM LPWR-Y Display of laser power (Y) Lv.2 Details To display Y laser power determined by D-max control. FF display with low image density is considered that the Photosensitive Drum may be near the end of life. Use case When the image density is low Display/adj/set range 00 to FF (hexadecimal) LPWR-M Display of laser power (M) Lv.2 Details To display M laser power determined by D-max control. FF display with low image density is considered that the Photosensitive Drum may be near the end of life. Use case When the image density is low Display/adj/set range 00 to FF (hexadecimal) LPWR-C Display of laser power (C) Lv.2 Details To display C laser power determined by D-max control. FF display with low image density is considered that the Photosensitive Drum may be near the end of life. Use case When the image density is low Display/adj/set range 00 to FF (hexadecimal) PVCONT-Y Dspl of target patch contrast potntl (Y) Lv.2 Details To display the target Y patch contrast potential. Check the target patch contrast potential to check whether the toner supply control is properly executed at image density failure. Investigate the other possible factors if the value is within the defined range. Use case - When analyzing the cause of the image density failure - When analyzing the cause of a problem Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Unit V

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

8-40

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

8-41

COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT PVCONT-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit PVCONT-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit PVCONT-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit

COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

Dspl of target patch contrast potntl (M) To display the target M patch contrast potential. Check the target patch contrast potential to check whether the toner supply control is properly executed at image density failure. Investigate the other possible factors if the value is within the defined range. - When analyzing the cause of the image density failure - When analyzing the cause of a problem Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 255 V Dspl of target patch contrast potntl (C) To display the target C patch contrast potential. Check the target patch contrast potential to check whether the toner supply control is properly executed at image density failure. Investigate the other possible factors if the value is within the defined range. - When analyzing the cause of the image density failure - When analyzing the cause of a problem Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 255 V Dspl of target patch contrast potntl (Bk) To display the target Bk patch contrast potential. Check the target patch contrast potential to check whether the toner supply control is properly executed at image density failure. Investigate the other possible factors if the value is within the defined range. - When analyzing the cause of the image density failure - When analyzing the cause of a problem Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 255 V

P-LPW-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range D-CONT-Y Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode D-CONT-M Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode D-CONT-C Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

Display of Bk patch target laser power To display the laser power to be used as a target Bk patch contrast potential. Check the laser power to be used as a target patch contrast potential to check whether the toner supply control is properly executed at image density failure. Investigate the other possible factors if the value is within the defined range. - When analyzing the cause of the image density failure - When analyzing the cause of a problem Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00 to FF (hexadecimal) Display of Y Drum total charging time To display the total charging time (charging counter) for the Drum Unit (Y). The counter can be reset in COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETY. When checking if the high voltage is properly set 0 to 1000000 msec COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> D-CONT-M, D-CONT-C, D-CONT-K COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETY Display of M Drum total charging time To display the total charging time (charging counter) for the Drum Unit (M). The counter can be reset in COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETM. When checking if the high voltage is properly set 0 to 1000000 msec COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> D-CONT-Y, D-CONT-C, D-CONT-K COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETM Display of C Drum total charging time To display the total charging time (charging counter) for the Drum Unit (C). The counter can be reset in COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETC. When checking if the high voltage is properly set 0 to 1000000 msec COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> D-CONT-Y, D-CONT-M, D-CONT-K COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETC

8-41

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

8-42

COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT D-CONT-K Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode LS-PWM-Y Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode LS-PWM-M Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode LS-PWM-C Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode LS-PWM-K Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode CHG-DCY2 Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit

COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

Display of Bk Drum total charging time To display the total charging time (charging counter) for the Drum (Bk). The counter can be reset in COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETK. When checking if the high voltage is properly set 0 to 1000000 msec COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> D-CONT-Y, D-CONT-M, D-CONT-C COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETK Display of Y-color PWM setting value To display the PWM value set for Y. When checking the current PWM setting 0 to 100 % COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> LS-PWM-M, LS-PWM-C, LS-PWM-K Display of M-color PWM setting value To display the PWM value set for M. When checking the current PWM setting 0 to 100 % COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> LS-PWM-Y, LS-PWM-C, LS-PWM-K Display of C-color PWM setting value To display the PWM value set for C. When checking the current PWM setting 0 to 100 % COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> LS-PWM-Y, LS-PWM-M, LS-PWM-K Display of Nk-color PWM setting value To display the PWM value set for BkY. When checking the current PWM setting 0 to 100 % COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> LS-PWM-Y, LS-PWM-M, LS-PWM-C Dspl of pry chg DC voltg (Y):1/2, 1/3 SPD To display the primary charging DC voltage lastly applied to the Charging Roller (Y) at 1/2 and 1/3 speed. When checking 0 to 1000 V

8

CHG-DCM2 Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit CHG-DCC2 Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit LPGAIN-Y Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit LPGAIN-M Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit LPGAIN-C Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit LPWR-K Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

Use case Display/adj/set range

Dspl of pry chg DC voltg (M):1/2, 1/3 SPD To display the primary charging DC voltage lastly applied to the Charging Roller (M) at 1/2 and 1/3 speed. When checking 0 to 1000 V Dspl of pry chg DC voltg (C):1/2, 1/3 SPD To display the primary charging DC voltage lastly applied to the Charging Roller (C) at 1/2 and 1/3 speed. When checking 0 to 1000 V Dspl of Y-color laser power gain value To display the gain value of Y laser power by D-max control. When checking D-max control results -100 to 100 % Dspl of M-color laser power gain value To display gain value of M laser power by D-max control. When checking D-max control results -100 to 100 % Dspl of C-color laser power gain value To display gain value of C laser power by D-max control. When checking D-max control results -100 to 100 % Display of laser power (Bk) To display Bk laser power determined by potential control. FF display with low image density is considered that the Photosensitive Drum may be nearly the end of life. When the image density is low 00 to FF (hexadecimal) T-8-9

8-42

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

■■DENS

COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

DENS-Y Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode DENS-M Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode DENS-C Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

8-43

Dspl of Y developer density change ratio To display the difference between Y-color developer density and the target value in % (percentage). Intolerable difference will trigger E020. This may be caused by deterioration of the developer, failure/disconnection of the Toner Density Sensor or error in toner supply system. The value is updated upon print operation after power-on. - When the density varies dramatically - When the density is unstable even after gradation correction -8 to 8 % COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-Y Dspl of M developer density change ratio To display difference between M-color developer density and the target value in % (percentage). Intolerable difference will trigger E020. This may be caused by deterioration of the developer, failure/disconnection of the Toner Density Sensor or error in toner supply system. The value is updated upon print operation after power-on. - When the density varies dramatically - When the density is unstable even after gradation correction -8 to 8 % COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-M Dspl of C developer density change ratio To display difference between C-color developer density and the target value in % (percentage). Intolerable difference will trigger E020. This may be caused by deterioration of the developer, failure/disconnection of the Toner Density Sensor or error in toner supply system. The value is updated upon print operation after power-on. - When the density varies dramatically - When the density is unstable even after gradation correction -8 to 8 % COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-C

DENS-K Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode DENS-S-Y Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DENS-S-M Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DENS-S-C Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DENS-S-K Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range D-Y-TRGT Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

Dspl of Bk developer density change ratio To display difference between Bk-color developer density and the target value in % (percentage). Intolerable difference will trigger E020. This may be caused by deterioration of the developer, failure/disconnection of the Toner Density Sensor or error in toner supply system. The value is updated upon print operation after power-on. - When the density varies dramatically - When the density is unstable even after gradation correction -8 to 8 % COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-K Dspl of ATR control patch density (Y) To display Y patch image density created by ATR control. When analyzing the cause of a problem Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 Dspl of ATR control patch density (M) To display M patch image density created by ATR control. When analyzing the cause of a problem Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 Dspl of ATR control patch density (C) To display C patch image density created by ATR control. When analyzing the cause of a problem Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 Dspl of ATR control patch density (Bk) To display Bk patch image density created by ATR control. When analyzing the cause of a problem Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 Dspl of ATR ctrl Y patch target density To display the target density for Y patch image created by ATR control. When analyzing the cause of a problem Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023

8-43

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

8-44

COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS D-M-TRGT Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range D-C-TRGT Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range REF-Y Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value REF-M Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value REF-C Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value REF-K Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value SGNL-Y Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value Related service mode

COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

Dspl of ATR ctrl M patch target density To display the target density for M patch image created by ATR control. When analyzing the cause of a problem Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 Dspl of ATR ctrl C patch target density To display the target density for C patch image created by ATR control. When analyzing the cause of a problem Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 Dspl of Y developer density target value To display the developer density target value for the ATR Sensor (Y). When analyzing the cause of a problem 0 to 255 50 to 200 Dspl of M developer density target value To display the developer density target value for the ATR Sensor (M). When analyzing the cause of a problem 0 to 255 50 to 200 Dspl of C developer density target value To display the developer density target value for the ATR Sensor (C). When analyzing the cause of a problem 0 to 255 50 to 200 Dspl of Bk developer density target value To display the developer density target value for the ATR Sensor (Bk). When analyzing the cause of a problem 0 to 255 50 to 200 Display of Y-color developer density To display the measured value of Y-color developer density. The density is measured with the ATR Sensor (Y) for each job. The value is updated upon print operation after power-on. When analyzing the cause of a problem 0 to 255 20 to 230 COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-Y

8

SGNL-M Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGNL-C Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGNL-K Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range P-SENS-P Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DEV-DC-Y Lv.2 Details Use case

Display/adj/set range Unit DEV-DC-M Lv.2 Details Use case

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

Display/adj/set range Unit

Display of M-color developer density To display the measured value of M-color developer density. The density is measured with the Toner Density Sensor (M) for each job. The value is updated upon print operation after power-on. When analyzing the cause of a problem 0 to 255 Display of C-color developer density To display the measured value of C-color developer density. The density is measured with the Toner Density Sensor (C) for each job. The value is updated upon print operation after power-on. When analyzing the cause of a problem 0 to 255 Display of Bk-color developer density To display the measured value of Bk-color developer density. The density is measured with the Toner Density Sensor (Bk) for each job. The value is updated upon print operation after power-on. When analyzing the cause of a problem 0 to 255 Dspl base intnsty at ATR ctrl (P-wave) To display the light intensity (P-wave) reflected from the background (ITB) at ATR control. Intolerable values may be caused by Patch Sensor disconnection, LED failure, soiled Sensor surface, Shutter failure, Registration Patch Shutter Open/Close Solenoid failure, insufficient ITB cleaning, etc. When checking the failure of Patch Sensor/ITB at low density, fogging deterioration or E020 display 0 to 1023 Dspl of developing DC voltage (Y) To display the latest Y developing DC voltage Vdc. - When image failure occurs due to carrier adherence - When fogging occurs - When fogging is deteriorated 0 to 1023 V Dspl of developing DC voltage (M) To display the latest M developing DC voltage Vdc. - When image failure occurs due to carrier adherence - When fogging occurs - When fogging is deteriorated 0 to 1023 V

8-44

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

8-45

COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS DEV-DC-C Lv.2 Details Use case

Display/adj/set range Unit DEV-DC-K Lv.2 Details Use case

Display/adj/set range Unit D-K-TRGT Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range D-CRNT-P Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range D-CRNT-S Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range P-SENS-S Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DENS-Y-H Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

Dspl of developing DC voltage (C) To display the latest C developing DC voltage Vdc. - When image failure occurs due to carrier adherence - When fogging occurs - When fogging is deteriorated 0 to 1023 V Dspl of developing DC voltage (Bk) To display the latest Bk developing DC voltage Vdc. - When image failure occurs due to carrier adherence - When fogging occurs - When fogging is deteriorated 0 to 1023 V Dspl of ATR ctrl Bk patch target density To display the Bk patch image target density created by ATR control. When analyzing the cause of a problem Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 Dspl of ATR ctrl dark current (P-wave) To display the dark current value (P-wave) measured at ATR control. When checking the Patch Sensor 0 to 1023 Dspl of ATR ctrl dark current (S-wave) To display the dark current value (S-wave) measured at ATR control. When checking the Patch Sensor 0 to 1023 Dspl base intnsty at ATR ctrl (S-wave) To display the light intensity (S-wave) reflected from the background (ITB) at ATR control. Intolerable values may be caused by insufficient ITB cleaning, etc. When checking ITB failure at low density or fogging deterioration 0 to 1023 Dspl of ATR ctrl Y-clr TD ratio history To display the latest 8 Y-toner density log data (T/D ratio) detected by the Toner Density Sensor at ATR control. Sharp change in values may indicate Toner Density Sensor disconnection/failure, whereas gradual change in values may indicate failure in toner supply system. When checking toner density in the Developing Assembly at low density or fogging deterioration 0 to 255

8

DENS-M-H Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DENS-C-H Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DS-S-Y-H Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DS-S-M-H Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range

Dspl of ATR ctrl M-clr TD ratio history To display the latest 8 M-toner density log data (T/D ratio) detected by the Toner Density Sensor at ATR control. Sharp change in values may indicate Toner Density Sensor disconnection/failure, whereas gradual change in values may indicate failure in toner supply system. When checking toner density in the Developing Assembly at low density or fogging deterioration 0 to 255 Dspl of ATR ctrl C-clr TD ratio history To display the latest 8 C-toner density log data (T/D ratio) detected by the Toner Density Sensor at ATR control. Sharp change in values may indicate Toner Density Sensor disconnection/failure, whereas gradual change in values may indicate failure in toner supply system. When checking toner density in the Developing Assembly at low density or fogging deterioration 0 to 255 Dspl of Y-clr patch image density history To display the latest 8 Y-patch image density log data. It is the reference for judging the cause at E020 occurrence, etc. Sharp change in values may indicate the failure in Patch Sensor, Shutter or laser, whereas gradual change may indicate failure in toner supply system. This is particularly caused by Patch Sensor. When analyzing the cause of E020 Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 Dspl of M-clr patch image density history To display the latest 8 M-patch image density log data. It is the reference for judging the cause at E020 occurrence, etc. Sharp change in values may indicate the failure in Patch Sensor, Shutter or laser, whereas gradual change may indicate failure in toner supply system. This is particularly caused by Patch Sensor. When analyzing the cause of E020 Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023

8-45

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

8-46

COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS DS-S-C-H Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DS-S-K-H Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range P-LED-DA Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Related service mode SPL-LG-Y Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SPL-LG-M Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

Dspl of C-clr patch image density history To display the latest 8 C-patch image density log data. It is the reference for judging the cause at E020 occurrence, etc. Sharp change in values may indicate the failure in Patch Sensor, Shutter or laser, whereas gradual change may indicate failure in toner supply system. This is particularly caused by Patch Sensor. When analyzing the cause of E020 Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 Dspl Bk-clr patch image density history To display the latest 8 Bk-patch image density log data. It is the reference for judging the cause at E020 occurrence, etc. Sharp change in values may indicate the failure in Patch Sensor, Shutter or laser, whereas gradual change may indicate failure in toner supply system. This is particularly caused by Patch Sensor. When analyzing the cause of E020 Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 Dspl of Patch Sensor LED light intensity To display the Patch Sensor LED intensity. The stain on Sensor window or soiled ITB (ITB cleaning failure) is suspected if the background light intensity (P-wave) is too low even with sufficient LED intensity and PT-LPADJ execution will not correct the problem. When checking the Patch Sensor Number COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-SENS-P COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> PT-LPADJ Display of Y toner supply history To display the latest 8 Y-toner supply log data. Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper. When checking toner supply status at E020 occurrence, low density or fogging deterioration 0 to 5 Display of M toner supply history To display the latest 8 M-toner supply log data. Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper. When checking toner supply status at E020 occurrence, low density or fogging deterioration 0 to 5

8

SPL-LG-C Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range DENS-K-H Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SPL-LG-K Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range CONT-M Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode CONT-Y Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode CONT-C Lv.1 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

Display of C toner supply history To display the latest 8 C-toner supply log data. Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper. When checking toner supply status at E020 occurrence, low density or fogging deterioration 0 to 5 Dspl of ATR ctrl Bk-clr TD ratio history To display the latest 8 Bk-toner density log data (TD ratio) detected by the ATR Sensor at ATR control. Sharp change in values may indicate the ATR Sensor disconnection/ failure, whereas gradual change in values may indicate failure in toner supply system. When checking toner density in the Developing Assembly at low density or fogging deterioration 0 to 255 Display of Bk toner supply history To display the latest 8 Bk-toner supply log data. Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper. When checking the toner supply status at low density or fogging deterioration 0 to 10 Dspl Toner Density Sensor (M) ctrl voltg To display the density detection control voltage of the Toner Density Sensor (M). When checking before clearing RAM data 0 to 255 V COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> CONT-M Dspl Toner Density Sensor (Y) ctrl volt To display the density detection control voltage of the Toner Density Sensor (Y). When checking before clearing RAM data 0 to 255 V COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> CONT-Y Dspl Toner Density Sensor (C) ctrl voltg To display the density detection control voltage of the Toner Density Sensor (C). When checking before clearing RAM data 0 to 255 V COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> CONT-C

8-46

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS CONT-K Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

Dspl Toner Density Sensor (Bk) ctrl voltg To display the density detection control voltage of the Toner Density Sensor (Bk). When checking before clearing RAM data 0 to 255 V COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> CONT-K T-8-10

■■FIXING COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING FX-MTR2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution

Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-MTR3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution

Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

8

8-47

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

Dspl Fix Motor crrnt VLlog at 321mm/sec To display the maximum Fixing Motor current values at process speed of 321mm/sec. Display an alarm (06-0004) when the value is 2.30 (2.3A) and higher, and display an error (E008-001) when the value is 2.60 (2.6A) and higher. When investigating the drive torque at the Pressure Roller replacement or error occurrence - Display unit for process speed of 321mm/sec differs from other process speeds. - Press the Clear key at FX-BLT-L when replacing the Pressure Belt Unit. For other than the replacement, execute FX-L-CLR to reset. 0 to 24 A COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> FX-L-CLR COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L Dspl Fix Motor crrnt VL history: 280mm/s To display the maximum and latest Fixing Motor current values at process speed of 280mm/sec. Display an alarm (06-0004) when the value is 200 (2.0 A) and higher, and display an error (E008-001) when the value is 220 (2.2 A) and higher. When investigating the drive torque at the Pressure Roller replacement or error occurrence Press the Clear key at FX-BLT-L when replacing the Pressure Belt Unit. For other than the replacement, execute FX-L-CLR to reset. 0 to 500, 0 to 500 mA COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> FX-L-CLR COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L

8-47

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING FX-MTR4 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution

Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-MTR5 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution

Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-MTR6 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution

Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

Dspl Fix Motor crrnt VL history: 160mm/s To display the maximum and latest Fixing Motor current values at process speed of 160 mm/sec. Display an alarm (06-0004) when the value is 130 (1.3 A) and higher, and display an error (E008-001) when the value is 150 (1.5 A) and higher. When investigating the drive torque at the Pressure Roller replacement or error occurrence Press the Clear key at FX-BLT-L when replacing the Pressure Belt Unit. For other than the replacement, execute FX-L-CLR to reset. 0 to 500, 0 to 500 mA COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> FX-L-CLR COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L Dspl Fix Motor crrnt VL history: 140mm/s To display the maximum and latest Fixing Motor current values at process speed of 140 mm/sec. Display an alarm (06-0004) when the value is 120 (1.2 A) and higher, and display an error (E008-001) when the value is 130 (1.3 A) and higher. When investigating the drive torque at the Pressure Roller replacement or error occurrence Press the Clear key at FX-BLT-L when replacing the Pressure Belt Unit. For other than the replacement, execute FX-L-CLR to reset. 0 to 500, 0 to 500 mA COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> FX-L-CLR COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L Dspl Fix Motor crrnt VL history: 107mm/s To display the maximum and latest Fixing Motor current values at process speed of 107 mm/sec. Display an alarm (06-0004) when the value is 100 (1.0 A) and higher, and display an error (E008-001) when the value is 120 (1.2 A) and higher. When investigating the drive torque at the Pressure Roller replacement or error occurrence Press the Clear key at FX-BLT-L when replacing the Pressure Belt Unit. For other than the replacement, execute FX-L-CLR to reset. 0 to 500, 0 to 500 mA COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> FX-L-CLR COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L

8

8-48

FX-MTR7 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution

Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-MTR8 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution

Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-U-TM1 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

Dspl Fix Motor crrnt VL history: 93mm/s To display the maximum and latest Fixing Motor current values at process speed of 93 mm/sec. Display an alarm (06-0004) when the value is 90 (0.9 A) and higher, and display an error (E008-001) when the value is 100 (1.0 A) and higher. When investigating the drive torque at the Pressure Roller replacement or error occurrence Press the Clear key at FX-BLT-L when replacing the Pressure Belt Unit. For other than the replacement, execute FX-L-CLR to reset. 0 to 500, 0 to 500 mA COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> FX-L-CLR COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L Dspl Fix Motor crrnt VL history: 32mm/s To display the maximum and latest Fixing Motor current values at process speed of 32 mm/sec. Display an alarm (06-0004) when the value is 70 (0.7 A) and higher, and display an error (E008-001) when the value is 80 (0.8 A) and higher. When investigating the drive torque at the Pressure Roller replacement or error occurrence Press the Clear key at FX-BLT-L when replacing the Pressure Belt Unit. For other than the replacement, execute FX-L-CLR to reset. 0 to 500, 0 to 500 mA COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> FX-L-CLR COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L Dspl Fix Belt Uni STBY total running time To display the total value of Fixing Roller’s “STBY-equivalent running time” at all process speeds. Display an alarm at 50400000 seconds (14000 hours), and display an error (E008-002) at 54000000 seconds (15000 hours). “STBY-equivalent running time” is proportional to the rotations. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U

8-48

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING FX-U-TM2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-U-TM3 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-U-TM4 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-U-TM5 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

Dspl Fix Roller running time: 321mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 321mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Roller running time: 280mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 280 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Roller running time: 160mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 160 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Roller running time: 140mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 140 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U

8

8-49

FX-U-TM6 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-U-TM7 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-U-TM8 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-L-TM1 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

Dspl Fix Roller running time: 107mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 107 mm/sec When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Roller running time: 93mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 93 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Roller running time: 32mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 32 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl PressBeltUni STBY total running time To display the total value of Pressure Roller’s “STBY-equivalent running time” at all process speeds. “STBY-equivalent running time” is proportional to the rotations. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Pressure Roller, press the Clear key at FXBLT-L to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L

8-49

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING FX-L-TM2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-L-TM3 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-L-TM4 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-L-TM5 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

Dspl Press Roller running time:321mm/s To display the running time of the Pressure Roller at process speed of 321mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Pressure Roller, press the Clear key at FXBLT-L to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L Dspl Press Roller running time:280mm/s To display the running time of the Pressure Roller at process speed of 280 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Pressure Roller, press the Clear key at FXBLT-L to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L Dspl Press Roller running time:160mm/s To display the running time of the Pressure Roller at process speed of 160 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Pressure Roller, press the Clear key at FXBLT-L to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L Dspl Press Roller running time:140mm/s To display the running time of the Pressure Roller at process speed of 140 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Pressure Roller, press the Clear key at FXBLT-L to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L

8

8-50

FX-L-TM6 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-L-TM7 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode FX-L-TM8 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode BLT-TM Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Related service mode

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

Dspl Press Roller running time:107mm/s When checking the use history at the Pressure Roller replacement or error occurrence When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Pressure Roller, press the Clear key at FXBLT-L to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L Dspl Press Roller running time:93mm/s To display the running time of the Pressure Roller at process speed of 93 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Pressure Roller, press the Clear key at FXBLT-L to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L Dspl Press Roller running time:32mm/s To display the running time of the Pressure Roller at process speed of 32 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Pressure Roller, press the Clear key at FXBLT-L to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L Dspl Fix Roller STBY total running time To display the total value of Fixing Roller’s “50 mm/s-equivalent running time” at all process speeds. Display an alarm at 11232000 seconds (3120 hours), and display an error (E008-002) at 12960000 seconds (36000 hours). Running time is proportional to the rotations. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U

8-50

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING BLT-TM1 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode BLT-TM2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode BLT-TM3 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode BLT-TM4 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

Fix Rol STBY total run time: pressured To display the total value of Fixing Roller’s “50 mm/s-equivalent running time” at all process speeds when pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Rol run time:pressured, 321mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 321mm/sec when pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Rol run time:pressured, 280mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 280 mm/sec when pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Rol run time:pressured, 160mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 160 mm/sec when pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U

8

8-51

BLT-TM5 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode BLT-TM6 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode BLT-TM7 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode BLT-TM8 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

Dspl Fix Rol run time:pressured, 140mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 140 mm/sec when pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Rol run time:pressured, 107mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 107 mm/sec when pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Rol run time:pressured, 93mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 93 mm/sec when pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Rol run time:pressured, 50mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 50 mm/sec when pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U

8-51

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING BLT2-TM1 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode BLT2-TM2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode BLT2-TM3 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode BLT2-TM4 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

Fix Rol STBY total run time: press<100% To display the total value of Fixing Roller’s “50 mm/s-equivalent running time” at all process speeds when some pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Rol run time:press<100%,321mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 321mm/sec when some pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Rol run time:press<100%,280mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 280 mm/sec when some pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Rol run time:press<100%,160mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 160 mm/sec when some pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U

8

8-52

BLT2-TM5 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode BLT2-TM6 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode BLT2-TM7 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode BLT2-TM8 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

Dspl Fix Rol run time:press<100%,140mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 140 mm/sec when some pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Rol run time:press<100%,107mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 107 mm/sec when some pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Rol run time:press<100%, 93mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 93 mm/sec when some pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U Dspl Fix Rol run time:press<100%, 50mm/s To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of 50 mm/sec when some pressure is applied to the roller. When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U

8-52

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING KIN-TM1 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode KIN-TM2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode KIN-TM3 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode KIN-TM4 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

Dspl Heat Soaking Roll 321mm/s run time To display the total value of Heat Soaking Roller’s “321mm/ s-equivalent running time” at all process speeds. Running time is proportional to the rotations. When checking the use history at the Heat Soaking Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Heat Soaking Roller, press the Clear key at FXKIN to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-KIN Dspl Heat Soaking Roll run time:321mm/s To display the running time of the Heat Soaking Roller at process speed of 321mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Heat Soaking Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Heat Soaking Roller, press the Clear key at FXKIN to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-KIN Dspl Heat Soaking Roll run time:280mm/s To display the running time of the Heat Soaking Roller at process speed of 280 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Heat Soaking Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Heat Soaking Roller, press the Clear key at FXKIN to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-KIN Dspl Heat Soaking Roll run time:160mm/s To display the running time of the Heat Soaking Roller at process speed of 160 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Heat Soaking Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Heat Soaking Roller, press the Clear key at FXKIN to reset. 0 to 4294967295

8

8-53

KIN-TM5 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode KIN-TM6 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode KIN-TM7 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode KIN-TM8 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

Dspl Heat Soaking Roll run time:140mm/s To display the running time of the Heat Soaking Roller at process speed of 140 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Heat Soaking Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Heat Soaking Roller, press the Clear key at FXKIN to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-KIN Dspl Heat Soaking Roll run time:107mm/s To display the running time of the Heat Soaking Roller at process speed of 107 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Heat Soaking Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Heat Soaking Roller, press the Clear key at FXKIN to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-KIN Dspl Heat Soaking Roll run time:93mm/s To display the running time of the Heat Soaking Roller at process speed of 93 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Heat Soaking Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Heat Soaking Roller, press the Clear key at FXKIN to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-KIN Dspl Heat Soaking Roll run time:50mm/s To display the running time of the Heat Soaking Roller at process speed of 50 mm/sec. When checking the use history at the Heat Soaking Roller replacement or error occurrence When replacing the Heat Soaking Roller, press the Clear key at FXKIN to reset. 0 to 4294967295 sec COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-KIN

8-53

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR

COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING KIN-HP Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode RCPR-HP Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode PRS-HP Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode CORE-DST Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Related service mode

Dspl Heat Soaking Roll eng/diseng times To display the number of times the Heat Soaking Roller Engagement/ Disengagement HP Sensor turns ON. The counter value is reset by pressing the Clear key. (It is also cleared by clearing FX-CNT.) When checking the use history at the error occurrence The counter value is also cleared by clearing FX-CNT. 0 to 4294967295 time COPIER> COUNTER> FIXING> FX-CNT Display of reciprocation HP times To display the number of times the Reciprocation HP Sensor turns ON. The counter value is reset by pressing the Clear key. (It is also cleared by clearing FX-CNT.) When checking the use history at the error occurrence The counter value is also cleared by clearing FX-CNT. 0 to 4294967295 time COPIER> COUNTER> FIXING> FX-CNT Dspl belt engagement/disengagement times To display the number of times the Belt Engagement HP Sensor turns ON. The counter value is reset by pressing the Clear key. (It is also cleared by clearing FX-CNT.) When checking the use history at the error occurrence The counter value is also cleared by clearing FX-CNT. 0 to 4294967295 time COPIER> COUNTER> FIXING> FX-CNT Copper Shield Plate shift amount To display the total shift amount of the Copper Shield Plate. The counter value is reset by pressing the Clear key. (It is also cleared by clearing FX-CNT.) When checking the use history at the error occurrence The counter value is also cleared by clearing FX-CNT. 0 to 4294967295 mm COPIER> COUNTER> FIXING> FX-CNT

8-54

■■SENSOR COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR W-TNR-1 Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

Status dspl of Waste Toner Full Sensor To display the output value and the judgment value of the Waste Toner Full Sensor of the Waste Toner Container. The value in the left shows the current output value. The value in the right shows the threshold value (depending on the adjustment result) to determine full level. - When checking the sensor - When checking clogging of waste toner 0 to 1023 T-8-12

T-8-11

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR

8-54

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

■■MISC

8-55

■■HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC

ENV-TR Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range LPOWER-Y Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value LPOWER-M Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value LPOWER-C Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value LPOWER-K Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Display of outside device environment To display the environment outside the machine in the latest output. When checking the current installation environment of the machine 0 to 7 Display of laser light intensity (Y) To display the Y laser intensity in real-time. When analyzing the cause of the image density failure Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00 to FF 50 to FF Display of laser light intensity (M) To display the M laser intensity in real-time. When analyzing the cause of the image density failure Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00 to FF 50 to FF Display of laser light intensity (C) To display the C laser intensity in real-time. When analyzing the cause of the image density failure Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00 to FF 50 to FF Display of laser light intensity (Bk) To display the Bk laser intensity in real-time. When analyzing the cause of the image density failure Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00 to FF 50 to FF T-8-13

TGT-A-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-A-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-A-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-A-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-B-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Dspl of ARCDAT screen A Y-color target VL To display the Y-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 0 to 700 Dspl of ARCDAT screen A M-color target VL To display the M-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 0 to 700 Dspl of ARCDAT screen A C-color target VL To display the C-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 0 to 700 Dspl of ARCDAT screen A Bk-clr target VL To display the Bk-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 0 to 700 Dspl of ARCDAT screen B Y-color target VL To display the Y-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 0 to 700

8-55

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C TGT-B-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-B-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-B-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-C-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-C-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Dspl of ARCDAT screen B M-color target VL To display the M-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 0 to 700 Dspl of ARCDAT screen B C-color target VL To display the C-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 0 to 700 Dspl of ARCDAT screen B Bk-clr target VL To display the Bk-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 0 to 700 Dspl of ARCDAT screen C Y-color target VL To display the Y-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 0 to 700 Dspl of ARCDAT screen C M-color target VL To display the M-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 0 to 700

8

8-56

TGT-C-C Lv.2 Details

Dspl of ARCDAT screen C C-color target VL To display the C-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated. Use case When hue variation occurs Display/adj/set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value 0 to 700 TGT-C-K Dspl of ARCDAT screen C Bk-clr target VL Lv.2 Details To display the Bk-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated. Use case When hue variation occurs Display/adj/set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value 0 to 700 SUM-A-Y Dspl ARCDAT screen A Y-color ctrl differ Lv.2 Details To display Y-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. Use case When hue variation occurs Display/adj/set range -1023 to 1023 SUM-A-M Dspl ARCDAT screen A M-color ctrl differ Lv.2 Details To display M-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. Use case When hue variation occurs Display/adj/set range -1023 to 1023 SUM-A-C Dspl ARCDAT screen A C-color ctrl differ Lv.2 Details To display C-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. Use case When hue variation occurs Display/adj/set range -1023 to 1023

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-56

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-57

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SUM-A-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-B-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-B-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-B-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-B-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Dspl ARCDAT screen A Bk-color ctrl differ To display Bk-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen B Y-color ctrl differ To display Y-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen B M-color ctrl differ To display M-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen B C-color ctrl differ To display C-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen B Bk-color ctrl differ To display Bk-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023

SUM-C-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-C-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-C-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-C-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGNL-A-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGNL-A-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Dspl ARCDAT screen C Y-color ctrl differ To display Y-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen C M-color ctrl differ To display M-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen C C-color ctrl differ To display C-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen C Bk-color ctrl differ To display Bk-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen A Y-patch current VL To display the current Y-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen A M-patch current VL To display the current M-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023

8-57

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-58

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SGNL-A-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGNL-A-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGNL-B-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGNL-B-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGNL-B-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGNL-B-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGNL-C-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Dspl ARCDAT screen A C-patch current VL To display the current C-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen A Bk-patch current VL To display the current Bk-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen B Y-patch current VL To display the current Y-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen B M-patch current VL To display the current M-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen B C-patch current VL To display the current C-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen B Bk-patch current VL To display the current Bk-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen C Y-patch current VL To display the current Y-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023

SGNL-C-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGNL-C-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGNL-C-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLTA-A-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLTA-A-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLTA-A-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Dspl ARCDAT screen C M-patch current VL To display the current M-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen C Bk-patch current VL To display the current Bk-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 Dspl ARCDAT screen C C-patch current VL To display the current C-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 Dspl of ARCDAT screen A Y-density differ To display the difference between the Y-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl of ARCDAT screen A M-density differ To display the difference between the M-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl of ARCDAT screen A C-density differ To display the difference between the C-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023

8-58

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C DLTA-A-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLTA-B-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLTA-B-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLTA-B-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLTA-B-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Dspl of ARCDAT screen A Bk-density differ To display the difference between the Bk-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl of ARCDAT screen B Y-density differ To display the difference between the Y-patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl of ARCDAT screen B M-density differ To display the difference between the M-patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl of ARCDAT screen B C-density differ To display the difference between the C-patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 Dspl of ARCDAT screen B Bk-density differ To display the difference between the Bk-patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023

8

8-59

DLTA-C-Y Lv.2 Details

Dspl of ARCDAT screen C Y-density differ To display the difference between the Y-patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. Use case When hue variation occurs Display/adj/set range -1023 to 1023 DLTA-C-M Dspl of ARCDAT screen C M-density differ Lv.2 Details To display the difference between the M-patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. Use case When hue variation occurs Display/adj/set range -1023 to 1023 DLTA-C-C Dspl of ARCDAT screen C C-density differ Lv.2 Details To display the difference between the C-patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. Use case When hue variation occurs Display/adj/set range -1023 to 1023 DLTA-C-K Dspl of ARCDAT screen C Bk-density differ Lv.2 Details To display the difference between the Bk-patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. Use case When hue variation occurs Display/adj/set range -1023 to 1023 TGT-A-Y2 ARCDAT scrn A Y-color target VL(1/2 SPD) Lv.2 Details To display the Y-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. Use case When checking ARCDAT control operation Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value 0 to 700

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-59

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-60

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C TGT-A-M2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-A-C2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-A-K2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-A-Y3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-A-M3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-A-C3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

ARCDAT scrn A M-color target VL(1/2 SPD) To display the M-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn A C-color target VL(1/2 SPD) To display the C-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn A Bk-clr target VL(1/2 SPD) To display the Bk-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn A Y-color target VL(1/3 SPD) To display the Y-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn A M-color target VL(1/3 SPD) To display the M-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn A C-color target VL(1/3 SPD) To display the C-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation 0 to 1023 0 to 700

TGT-A-K3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-B-Y3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-B-M3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-B-C3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-B-K3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-B-Y2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-B-M2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

ARCDAT scrn A Bk-clr target VL(1/3 SPD) To display the Bk-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn B Y-color target VL(1/3 SPD) To display the Y-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn B M-color target VL(1/3 SPD) To display the M-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn B C-color target VL(1/3 SPD) To display the C-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn B Bk-clr target VL(1/3 SPD) To display the Bk-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn B Y-color target VL(1/2 SPD) To display the Y-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn B M-color target VL(1/2 SPD) To display the M-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 0 to 700

8-60

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-61

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C TGT-B-C2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-B-K2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-C-Y2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-C-M2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-C-C2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

ARCDAT scrn B C-color target VL(1/2 SPD) To display the C-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn B Bk-clr target VL(1/2 SPD) To display the Bk-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn C Y-color target VL(1/2 SPD) To display the Y-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn C M-color target VL(1/2 SPD) To display the M-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn C C-color target VL(1/2 SPD) To display the C-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 0 to 700

TGT-C-K2 Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-C-Y3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-C-M3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-C-C3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TGT-C-K3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value SUM-A-Y2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

ARCDAT scrn C Bk-clr target VL(1/2 SPD) To display the Bk-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn C Y-color target VL(1/3 SPD) To display the Y-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn C M-color target VL(1/3 SPD) To display the M-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn C C-color target VL(1/3 SPD) To display the C-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn C Bk-clr target VL(1/3 SPD) To display the Bk-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When checking ARCDAT control operation 0 to 1023 0 to 700 ARCDAT scrn A Y-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD) To display Y-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023

8-61

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-62

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SUM-A-M2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SUM-A-C2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SUM-A-K2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SUM-B-Y2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

ARCDAT scrn A M-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD) To display M-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn A C-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD) To display C-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnA Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD) To display Bk-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn B Y-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD) To display Y-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023

8

SUM-B-M2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SUM-B-C2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SUM-B-K2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SUM-C-Y2 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range

ARCDAT scrn B M-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD) To display M-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn B C-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD) To display C-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnB Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD) To display Bk-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn C Y-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD) To display Y-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023

8-62

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-63

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SUM-C-M2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SUM-C-C2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SUM-C-K2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DLT-A-Y2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

ARCDAT scrn C M-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD) To display M-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn C C-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD) To display C-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnC Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD) To display Bk-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn A Y-density differ (1/2 SPD) To display the difference between Y-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023

8

DLT-A-M2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DLT-A-C2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DLT-A-K2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DLT-B-Y2 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range

ARCDAT scrn A M-density differ (1/2 SPD) To display the difference between M-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn A C-density differ (1/2 SPD) To display the difference between C-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn A Bk-density differ(1/2 SPD) To display the difference between Bk-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn B Y-density differ (1/2 SPD) To display the difference between Y-patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023

8-63

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-64

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C DLT-B-M2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DLT-B-C2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DLT-B-K2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DLT-C-Y2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

ARCDAT scrn B M-density differ (1/2 SPD) To display the difference between M-patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn B C-density differ (1/2 SPD) To display the difference between C-patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn B Bk-density differ(1/2 SPD) To display the difference between Bk-patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn C Y-density differ (1/2 SPD) To display the difference between Y-patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023

8

DLT-C-M2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DLT-C-C2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range DLT-C-K2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SGL-A-Y2 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range

ARCDAT scrn C M-density differ (1/2 SPD) To display the difference between M-patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn C C-density differ (1/2 SPD) To display the difference between C-patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn C Bk-density differ(1/2 SPD) To display the difference between Bk-patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnA Y-patch current VL(1/2 SPD) To display the current Y-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023

8-64

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-65

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SGL-A-M2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SGL-A-C2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SGL-A-K2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SGL-B-Y2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SGL-B-M2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

ARCDAT scrnA M-patch current VL(1/2 SPD) To display the current M-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnA C-patch current VL(1/2 SPD) To display the current C-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnA Bk ptch current VL(1/2 SPD) To display the current Bk-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnB Y-patch current VL(1/2 SPD) To display the current Y-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnB M-patch current VL(1/2 SPD) To display the current M-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023

8

SGL-B-C2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SGL-B-K2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SGL-C-Y2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SGL-C-M2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SGL-C-C2 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range

ARCDAT scrnB C-patch current VL(1/2 SPD) To display the current C-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnB Bkpatch current VL(1/2 SPD) To display the current Bk-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnC Y-patch current VL(1/2 SPD) To display the current Y-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnC M-patch current VL(1/2 SPD) To display the current M-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnC C-patch current VL(1/2 SPD) To display the current C-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023

8-65

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-66

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SGL-C-K2 Lv.2 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range SUM-A-Y3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-A-M3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-A-C3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-A-K3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

ARCDAT scrnC Bkpatch current VL(1/2 SPD) To display the current Bk-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnA Y-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD) To display Y-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnA M-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD) To display M-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnA C-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD) To display C-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnA Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/3 SPD) To display Bk-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023

8

SUM-B-Y3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-B-M3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-B-C3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-B-K3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-C-Y3 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Use case Display/adj/set range

ARCDAT scrnB Y-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD) To display Y-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnB M-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD) To display M-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnB C-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD) To display C-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnB Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/3 SPD) To display Bk-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnC Y-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD) To display Y-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023

8-66

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-67

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SUM-C-M3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-C-C3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SUM-C-K3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLT-A-Y3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLT-A-M3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

ARCDAT scrnC M-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD) To display M-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnC C-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD) To display C-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnC Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/3 SPD) To display Bk-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn A Y-density differ (1/3 SPD) To display the difference between the Y-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn A M-density differ (1/3 SPD) To display the difference between the M-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023

8

DLT-A-C3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLT-A-K3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLT-B-Y3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLT-B-M3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLT-B-C3 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Use case Display/adj/set range

ARCDAT scrn A C-density differ (1/3 SPD) To display the difference between the C-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn A Bk-density differ(1/3 SPD) To display the difference between the Bk-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn B Y-density differ (1/3 SPD) To display the difference between the Y-patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn B M-density differ (1/3 SPD) To display the difference between the M-patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn B C-density differ (1/3 SPD) To display the difference between the C-patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023

8-67

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-68

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C DLT-B-K3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLT-C-Y3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLT-C-M3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLT-C-C3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range DLT-C-K3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

ARCDAT scrn B Bk-density differ(1/3 SPD) To display the difference between the Bk-patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn C Y-density differ (1/3 SPD) To display the difference between the Y-patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn C M-density differ (1/3 SPD) To display the difference between the M-patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn C C-density differ (1/3 SPD) To display the difference between the C-patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023 ARCDAT scrn C Bk-density differ(1/3 SPD) To display the difference between the Bk-patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated. When hue variation occurs -1023 to 1023

8

SGL-A-Y3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGL-A-M3 Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range SGL-A-C3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGL-A-K3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGL-B-Y3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGL-B-M3 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

Use case Display/adj/set range

ARCDAT scrnA Y-patch current VL(1/3 SPD) To display the current Y-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnA M-patch current VL(1/3 SPD) When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnA C-patch current VL(1/3 SPD) To display the current C-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnA Bkpatch current VL(1/3 SPD) To display the current Bk-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnB Y-patch current VL(1/3 SPD) To display the current Y-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnB M-patch current VL(1/3 SPD) To display the current M-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023

8-68

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-69

COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SGL-B-C3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGL-B-K3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGL-C-Y3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGL-C-M3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGL-C-C3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range SGL-C-K3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

ARCDAT scrnB C-patch current VL(1/3 SPD) To display the current C-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnB Bkpatch current VL(1/3 SPD) To display the current Bk-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnC Y-patch current VL(1/3 SPD) To display the current Y-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnC M-patch current VL(1/3 SPD) To display the current M-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnC C-patch current VL(1/3 SPD) To display the current C-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 ARCDAT scrnC Bkpatch current VL(1/3 SPD) To display the current Bk-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed. When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer. When hue variation occurs 0 to 1023 T-8-14

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

8-69

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

I/O (I/O display mode) ■■Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to

Address

bit

P003

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15

Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Duplex Left Motor Current Switch I1

14 13 12 11 10

Not used Duplex Left Motor Enable Registration Motor Enable Registration Motor_MD Registration Motor Rotation Direction Registration Motor I1 Registration Motor I0

P056) Address

bit

P001

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

P002

Name

Symbol

Remarks

Not used Not used For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used For R&D use Not used For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used For R&D use For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use

P004

9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8

Name

For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Paper Loop Detect Sensor 2 Paper Loop Detect Sensor 1 Secondary Transfer End Sensor

Symbol

8-70

Remarks

M23

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.3 A 1/0: Drive current 0.5 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

M23 M34 M34 M34

0: 2phase, 1: 1-2phase 0:CCW, 1:CW

M34 M34

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.3 A 1/0: Drive current 0.5 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

PS91 PS90 PS23

1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

8-70

8 Address

bit

P005

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6

For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Duplex Sensor 4 Duplex Sensor 3 Duplex Sensor 2 Duplex Sensor 1 Recipro Motor I1 Recipro Motor I0

5 4 3 2 1

For R&D use Recipro Motor Enable For R&D use Fixing Motor_LOCK Duplex Left Motor Phase Pattern Switch Duplex Left Motor I0 For R&D use For R&D use Core Movement Motor Rotation Direction Core Movement Motor I1 Core Movement Motor I0

P006

0 15 14 13 12 11

10 9 8 7 6 5 4

3 2 1 0

Name

For R&D use Core Movement Motor Enable Inner Delivery Sensor Half Press Sensor Pre-fixing Feed Motor Phase Pattern Switch Pre-fixing Feed Motor I1 Pre-fixing Feed Motor I0

For R&D use Pre-fixing Feed Motor Enable Pressure Roller Engagement/ Disengagement HP Sensor Core Movement HP Sensor

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

Symbol

Remarks

Address

bit

P007

15

14 PS27 PS26 PS25 PS24 M53 M53

1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.0 A 1/0: Drive current 0.3 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

M53

1:Enable

M48 M32

0: Lock, 1: Error 0: 2phase, 1: 1-2phase

13

12

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

M32

M56

0:CCW, 1:CW

M35 M35

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 0.7 A 1/0: Drive current 0.3 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

M35 PS75 PS102 M35

1:Enable 1: Paper presence 1:Harf Press 0: 2phase, 1: 1-2phase

M35 M35

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 0.7 A 1/0: Drive current 0.35 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

M35 PS73

1:Enable 1:HP

PS98

1:HP

8

P008

0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name Heat Soaking Roller Engagement/Disgag\ement Motor Phase Pattern Switch Heat Soaking Roller Engagement/Disgag\ement Motor Rotation Direction Heat Soaking Roller Engagement/Disgag\ement Motor I1 Heat Soaking Roller Engagement/Disgag\ement Motor I0 For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Kona Watch Dock Pulse For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Fixing Unit Enter Sensor Heat Soaking Roller HP Sensor For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2 PV REQ Registration Sensor Vertical Path Merging Sensor Not used Not used Not used Resipro HP Sensor Engagement/Disgag\ement Motor Enable

Symbol

Remarks

M48

0: 2phase, 1: 1-2phase

M48

0: CCW, 1:CW

M48

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 0.5A 1/0: Drive current 0.3 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

M48

8-71

PS70 PS99

1: Paper presence 1:HP

PS35

1: Paper presence

PS34

1: Paper presence

PS28 PS30

1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence

PS100 M55

1: HP 1:Enable

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

8-71

8 Address

bit

P009

15 14 13 12

Name

Symbol

11 10 9 8

Right Deck Paper Sensor Right Deck Limit Sensor Right Deck Feed Sensor Right Deck Paper Height Sensor Left Deck Pullout Sensor Left Deck Paper Sensor Left Deck Limit Sensor Left Deck Feed Sensor

PS58 PS56 PS55 PS54

7

Left Deck Paper Height Sensor

PS57

6 5

Color Toner Sensor ON Waste Toner Bottle Engagement/Disgag\ement Detection Sensor Not used Outer Delivery Transparency Sensor Secondary Transfer Engagement/Disgag\ement Motor I1 Secondary Transfer Engagement/Disgag\ement Motor I0 For R&D use

4 3 2

1

0

PS51 PS50 PS49 PS52

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

Remarks 1: Paper presence 1:Limit 1: Paper presence 0: Paper surface reaches to the upper limit, 1: Up 1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1:Limit 0: Paper surface reaches to the upper limit, 1: Up 0: High voltage remote ON 1: High voltage remote OFF 0:Sensor OFF, 1:Sensor OFF 0:Bottle Non-wearing, 1:Bottle Wearing

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P010

15

SW15

0: ON, 1: OFF

SW15

0: ON, 1: OFF

SW14

0: ON, 1: OFF

SW14

0: ON, 1: OFF

SW14

0: ON, 1: OFF

SW14

0: ON, 1: OFF

PS43

0: ON, 1: OFF

PS44

0: ON, 1: OFF

PS41

0: ON, 1: OFF

PS42

0: ON, 1: OFF

PS45

0: ON, 1: OFF

PS46

0: ON, 1: OFF

PS47

0: ON, 1: OFF

PS48

0: ON, 1: OFF

1

Upper Cassette Size Detection Sensor 2 SW2 Upper Cassette Size Detection Sensor 2 SW1 Upper Cassette Size Detection Sensor 1 SW4 Upper Cassette Size Detection Sensor 1 SW3 Upper Cassette Size Detection Sensor 1 SW2 Upper Cassette Size Detection Sensor 1 SW1 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2 Right Lower Cover Sensor

PS39

0:Open

0

Left Lower Cover Sensor

PS36

0:Open

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7

PS111 M31

M31

0:Transparency I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.5 A 1/0: Drive current 0.3 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

6 5 4 3 2

8

8-72

Remarks

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

8-72

8 Address

bit

Name

P011

15 14

Not used Waste Toner Screw Lock Sensor Reverse Roller Disengagement Motor Enable Reverse Roller Disengagement Motor I1 Reverse Roller Disengagement Motor I0

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Not used Down Cassette Size Detection Sensor 2 SW4 Down Cassette Size Detection Sensor 2 SW3 Down Cassette Size Detection Sensor 2 SW2 Down Cassette Size Detection Sensor 2 SW1 Down Cassette Size Detection Sensor 1 SW4 Down Cassette Size Detection Sensor 1 SW3 Down Cassette Size Detection Sensor 1 SW2 Down Cassette Size Detection Sensor 1 SW1 Upper Cassette Size Detection Sensor 2 SW4 Upper Cassette Size Detection Sensor 2 SW3

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

Symbol SW10

Remarks 0:Lock

bit

P012

15 14

M54

1: Enable

M54

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.0 A 1/0: Drive current 0.3 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

M54

Address

13 12 11 10

SW17

0: ON, 1: OFF

9

SW17

0: ON, 1: OFF

SW17

0: ON, 1: OFF

SW17

0: ON, 1: OFF

8 7 6 5

SW16

0: ON, 1: OFF

SW16

0: ON, 1: OFF

4 3 2 1

SW16

0: ON, 1: OFF

0

SW16

0: ON, 1: OFF

SW15

0: ON, 1: OFF

SW15

0: ON, 1: OFF

8

Name Delivery Anti-adhesion Fan 2 Lock Delivery Anti-adhesion Fan 2 Half Speed Delivery Anti-adhesion Fan 2 Full Speed Delivery Anti-adhesion Fan 1 Lock Kona Watch Dock Pulse Delivery Anti-adhesion Fan 1 Half Speed Delivery Anti-adhesion Fan 1 Full Speed Cassette 4 Paper Sensor Cassette 4 Limit Sensor Cassette 4 Feed Sensor Cassette 4 Paper Height Senso Cassette 3 Paper Sensor Cassette 3 Limit Sensor Cassette 3 Feed Sensor Cassette 3 Paper Height Senso Not used

Symbol

8-73

Remarks

FM11

1: Lock, 1:Error

FM11

1: ON

FM11

1: ON

FM10

1: Lock, 1:Error

FM10

1: ON

FM10

1: ON

PS66 PS65 PS64 PS67

1: Paper presence 0: Normal, 1: Upper limit 1: Paper presence 0: Paper surface reaches to the upper limit, 1: Up 1: Paper presence 0: Normal, 1: Upper limit 1: Paper presence 0: Paper surface reaches to the upper limit, 1: Up

PS61 PS60 PS59 PS62

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

8-73

8 Address

bit

Name

P013

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Delivery Anti-adhesion Fan 4 Lock Delivery Anti-adhesion Fan 4 Half Speed Delivery Anti-adhesion Fan 4 Full Speed Reverse Roller Disengagement HP Sensor Secondary Transfer Roller Engagement/Disengagement Motor Enable Secondary Transfer Roller Engagement/Disengagement HP Sensor Not used Delivery Anti-adhesion Fan 3 Lock Delivery Anti-adhesion Fan 3 Half Speed Delivery Anti-adhesion Fan 3 Full Speed

8 7 6 5

4

3 2 1 0

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

Symbol

Remarks

FM13

1: Lock, 1:Error

FM13

1:ON

FM13

1:ON

PS101

1:HP

bit

P014

15

Cassette 3 Pickup Motor I0

14 13 12

For R&D use For R&D use Multi Inside Board Solenoid ON Left Deck Pickup Motor Enable Left Deck Pickup Motor Rotation Direction Left Deck Pickup Motor I1 Left Deck Pickup Motor I0

11 10 9 8

M31

1:Enable

PS22

1:HP

FM12

1: Lock, 1:Error

FM12

1:ON

FM12

1:ON

8

Address

7 6 5 4

Name

2 1

Not used Vertical Path Sensor 3 Not used Right Deck Pickup Motor Enable Right Deck Pickup Motor Rotation Direction Right Deck Pickup Motor I1 Right Deck Pickup Motor I0

0

Not used

3

Symbol

8-74

Remarks

M44

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.2A 1/0: Drive current 1.07 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

SL4

1:ON

M42 M42

1:Enable 0:CCW, 1:CW

M42 M42

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.2A 1/0: Drive current 1.07 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

PS63

1: Paper presence

M43

1:Enable

M43

0:CCW, 1:CW

M43 M43

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.2A 1/0: Drive current 1.07 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

8-74

8 Address

bit

P015

15 14 13

12 11 10 9 8 7 6

5 4 3 2 1 0

Name Delivery Motor Phase Pattern Switch Delivery Motor I1 Delivery Motor I0

Not used Reverse Sensor multi Paper Sensor Cassette 4 Pickup Motor Enable Cassette 4 Pickup Motor Rotation Direction Cassette 4 Pickup Motor I1 Cassette 4 Pickup Motor I0

Not used Duplex Sensor 1 Outer Delivery Sensor Cassette 3 Pickup Motor Enable Cassette 3 Pickup Motor Rotation Direction Cassette 3 Pickup Motor I1

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

Symbol

Remarks

M37

0: 2phase, 1: 1-2phase

M37 M37

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.3 A 1/0: Drive current 0.95 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

PS32 PS37 M45

1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1:Enable

M45

0:CCW, 1CW

M45 M45

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.3 A 1/0: Drive current 0.95 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

PS24 PS31 M44

1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1:Enable

M44

0:CCW, 1CW

Address

bit

Name

P016

15 14

For R&D use Right Deck Vertical Path Motor Enable Right Deck Vertical Path Motor Pattern Switch Right Deck Vertical Path Motor I1 Right Deck Vertical Path Motor I0

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4

Not used PVREQ Reverse Motor Enable Reverse Motor Pattern Switch Reverse Motor Rotation Direction Reverse Motor I1 Reverse Motor I0

3 2 1 0

For R&D use Registration Sensor Vertical Path Merging Sensor Delivery Motor Enable

Symbol

8-75

Remarks

M40

1:Enable

M40

0: 2phase, 1: 1-2phase

M40 M40

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.3 A 1/0: Drive current 0.5 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

M38 M38 M38

1:Enable 0: 2phase, 1: 1-2phase 0:CCW, 1CW

M38 M38

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.3 A 1/0: Drive current 0.5 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

PS28 PS30 M37

1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1:Enable

M44

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

8-75

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P017

15

Cassette Vertical Path Motor Enable Cassette Vertical Path Motor Pattern Switch Cassette Vertical Path Motor I1 Cassette Vertical Path Motor I0

M39

1:Enable

M39

0: 2phase, 1: 1-2phase

M39 M39

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.3 A 1/0: Drive current 0.5 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

14 13 12

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

For R&D use Vertical Path Sensor 1 Vertical Path Sensor 2 Left Deck Vertical Path Motor Enable Left Deck Vertical Path Motor Pattern Switch Left Deck Vertical Path Motor I1 Left Deck Vertical Path Motor I0 Not used For R&D use For R&D use Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3 For R&D use

Remarks

Address

bit

P018

15 14 13 12 11 10

PS53 PS40 M41

1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1:Enable

9

M41

0: 2phase, 1: 1-2phase

7

M41

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.3 A 1/0: Drive current 0.5 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

6

M41

8

5 4

PS35

1: Paper presence

P019

8

3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name Option Cooling Fan2 Lock Option Cooling Fan2 Full Speed Option Cooling Fan2 Half Speed Option Cooling Fan1 Lock Option Cooling Fan1 Full Speed Option Cooling Fan1 Half Speed Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2 Pre-registration Multipurpose Tray Drive Motor Enable Pre-registration Multipurpose Tray Drive Motor Pattern Switch Pre-registration Multipurpose Tray Drive Motor I1 Pre-registration Multipurpose Tray Drive Motor I0 For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Vertical Path Sensor 1 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 5V Remote Option Cooling Fan Connection Detection

Symbol

8-76

Remarks

FM24 FM24

1: Lock, 1:Error 1: ON

FM24

1: ON

FM23 FM23

1: Lock, 1:Error 1: ON

FM23

1: ON

PS33

1: Paper presence

PS34

1: Paper presence

M36

1: Enable

M36

0: 2phase, 1: 1-2phase

M36 M36

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.3 A 1/0: Drive current 0.5 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

PS68

1: Paper presence

0: Fan connection

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

8-76

8 Address

bit

P020

15 14 13 12

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name Not used Pre-exposure LED Error(Bk) Pre-exposure LED Bit0(Bk) Pre-exposure LED Bit1(Bk)

Pre-exposure LED ON(Bk) Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

Symbol UN29 UN29 UN29

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

Remarks 0: Error Change the current amount of BK pre-exposure bit0/bit1 0/0: 125mA (forbid setting) 0/1: 120mA (forbid setting) 1/0: 80mA 1/1: 40mA

UN29

Address

bit

P021

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8

Name

Symbol

8-77

Remarks

Post Developing Fan Full FM4 1: ON Speed (BK) Hopper Cooling Suction Fan FM22 1: Lock, 1:Error Lock Hopper Cooling Suction Fan FM22 1: ON Half Speed Hopper Cooling Suction Fan FM22 1: ON Full Speed Hopper Cooling Exhaust Fan FM18 1: Lock, 1:Error Lock Hopper Cooling Exhaust Fan FM18 1: ON Half Speed Hopper Cooling Exhaust Fan FM18 1: ON Full Speed Registration Detection Reset PS19,20 0: Reset Patch Sensor LED ON PS21 1: ON Registration Detection LED ON PS19,20 1: ON For R&D use For R&D use Multi-purpose Tray Door PS79 0: OPEN, 1: CLOSE Sensor Primary Charging Suction Fan FM2 1: Lock, 1:Error Lock Primary Charging Suction Fan FM2 1: ON Half Speed Primary Charging Suction Fan FM2 1: ON Full Speed

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

8-77

8 Address

bit

Name

P022

15 14

For R&D use Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y) CW For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Registration Sensor Vertical Path Merging Sensor Pre-fixing Feed Attraction Fan Lock Detection Pre-fixing Feed Attraction Fan Half Speed Pre-fixing Feed Attraction Fan Full Speed Cl Cleaner Fan Lock Detection Cl Cleaner Fan Half Speed Cl Cleaner Fan Full Speed Post Developing Fan Lock Detection Post Developing Fan Half Speed 12V Power Supply Fan Full Speed 24V Power Supply Fan Full Speed 24V Pickup SW 24V Finisher SW 24V Fixing Feed Unit SW 24VB Power Supply Remote 24VA Power Supply Remote KONA Communication monitor control 5V Photo Interrupter Power Supply Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P023

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Symbol M20

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

Remarks

Address

bit

P024

15

1: CW

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7

PS28 PS30 FM1

1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1: Lock, 1:Error

FM1

1: ON

FM1

1: ON

FM5 FM5 FM5 FM4

1: Lock, 1:Error 1: ON 1: ON 1: Lock, 1:Error

5 4 3 2 1

FM4

1: ON

0

1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON

8

6

P025

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name Drum Heater connector disconnection Drum Heater Limit 46 degree C Drum Heater RL Reset Drum Heater RL Set Caset Heater Triac ON Not used Fixing Feed Knob SW Not used 24VB Power Supply Failure Detection 24VA Power Supply Failure Detection AC Driver PCB Location 1 AC Driver PCB Location 0 Not used IH Fan Lock IH Power Supply Fan Full Speed IH Power Supply Fan Half Speed Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Fixing Web Level Sensor For R&D use For R&D use

Symbol

8-78

Remarks 1: connector disconnection 1: Limit 46 degree C 1: Reset 1: Set 1: ON 0: CLOSE, 1: OPEN 1: Error 1: Error

1: Lock, 1:Error 1: ON 1: ON

1: No Web

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

8-78

8 Address

bit

P030

15

Multi Deck Reset

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10

Multi Deck Connect Not used Not used Error Detection Jam Detection ITOP Signal Bideo Board Reset cancellation Bideo Board Ready Signal Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Fixing Feed Drawer Connect ITB Unit Identification

9 8 7 6 5 4

For R&D use Finisher Download Finisher Reset Finisher Mode Signal Finisher Remote Primary Charging Exhaust Fan Lock Detection Primary Charging Exhaust Fan Half Speed Primary Charging Exhaust Fan Full Speed For R&D use Multi Deck Remote

P031

3 2 1 0

Name

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

Symbol

Remarks 0: Clear Multi Deck RESET 1: Multi Deck RESET 0: Open, 1: Connect

Address

bit

Name

P032

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7

For R&D use Multi Deck AD chip select For R&D use For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used 12V Power Supply of Driver PCB 5V Power Supply of Driver PCB 3.3V Power Supply of High Voltage Buffer Driver PCB connection detection Not used Not used Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan Lock Detection Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Front Door Sensor Developing Stirring Motor (Bk) CW Developing Stirring Motor (C) CW Developing Stirring Motor (M) CW Developing Stirring Motor (Y) CW Not used

1: Error 1: Jam

1: Ready

6 5 4 -

3 2 1

0: Open, 1: Connect 0: IR-ADV C9200/7200 series 1: IR-ADV C9000/7000 series

FM3

1: Downloade 1: Reset 1: Enable (Connecting X4/5) 1: ON 0: Error, 1: Lock

FM3

1: ON

FM3

1: ON

1: ON

P033

0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8

Symbol

8-79

Remarks

0: Normal, 1: Power Down 0: Normal, 1: Power Down 0: Normal, 1: Power Down 0: Not connect 1: Connect

0: Error, 1: Lock

0: Open, 1: Close

PS80 M29

0: CW, 1:CCW (original turn)

M27

0: CW, 1:CCW (original turn)

M28

0: CW, 1:CCW (original turn)

M26

0: CW, 1:CCW (original turn)

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

8-79

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P034

15

Toner Cartridge Drive Motor (Y) CW Toner Cartridge Drive Motor (M) CW Toner Cartridge Drive Motor (C) CW Toner Cartridge Drive Motor (Bk) CW Pre-exposure LED ON (C) Pre-exposure LED ON (M) Pre-exposure LED ON (Y) Pre-exposure Error Detection (C) Pre-exposure Error Detection (M) Pre-exposure Error Detection (Y) Toner Cartridge inner door Sensor (C) Post-wire Cleaning Motor ON Post-wire Cleaning Motor Rotation Direction

M10

0: CCW, 1: CW

M13

0: CCW, 1: CW

M16

0: CCW, 1: CW

M7

0: CCW, 1: CW

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3

2 1 0

Steering Motor Enable Primary Transfer Engagemant/ Disengagement Motor Enable Post-Shutter HP

Remarks

bit

Name

Symbol

P035

15 14 13 12

Cam Phase Sensor (M) Cam Phase Sensor (C) Cam Phase Sensor (Bk) Hopper Level Detection Sensor (Y) Hopper Level Detection Sensor (M) Hopper Level Detection Sensor (C) Hopper Level Detection Sensor (Bk) Toner Cartridge door Sensor Toner Cartridge inner door Sensor (Y) Toner Cartridge inner door Sensor (M) For R&D use Toner Container inner door Sensor (Bk) For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use KONA 1 Live 5V RMT Toner Cartridge Reciprocation Cam HP Sensor (Y) Toner Cartridge Reciprocation Cam HP Sensor (M) Toner Cartridge Reciprocation Cam HP Sensor (C) Toner Cartridge Reciprocation Cam HP Sensor (Bk) For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Cam Phase Sensor (Y)

PS82 PS83 PS84 TS6

0: Absence, 1: Presence

TS7

0: Absence, 1: Presence

TS8

0: Absence, 1: Presence

TS5

0: Absence, 1: Presence

11 10

LED4 LED3 LED2 LED4

1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: Error

LED3

1: Error

LED2

1: Error

PS16

0: Open, 1: Close

9 8 7 6

0: Motor Stop, 1: Moter Drive 0: CCW (From this side to the depths) 1: CW 1: Enable 1: Enable 1: Close

Address

5 4

P036

3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8

8-80

Remarks

PS6 PS10

0: Close, 1: Open 0: Close, 1: Open

PS13

0: Close, 1: Open

PS7

0: Close, 1: Open

1: ON 1: ON 1: HP 1: HP 1: HP 1: HP

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

8-80

8 Address

bit

Name

P037

15

Steering Motor Phase Pattern Switch Steering Motor Phase Rotation Direction Steering Motor I1 Steering Motor I0

14 13 12

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

Remarks 0: 2phase, 1: 1-2phase 0: CCW, 1: CW I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.3 A 1/0: Drive current 0.5 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A

For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Post Charging shutter Rotation Direction Primary Charging Shutter Rotation Direction Not used Not used

Address

bit

Name

P038

15 14 13 12 11

Not used ITB Steering HP Sensor ITB HP Sensor ITB Displacement Sensor Hopper Screw Motor Rotation Detection (Bk) Hopper Screw Motor Rotation Detection (Y,M,C) Primary Charging Shutter HP Sensor For R&D use Pre-transfer Engagement/ Disengagement Motor Pattern Switch Pre-transfer Engagement/ Disengagement Motor Rotation Direction Pre-transfer Engagement/ Disengagement Motor I1 Pre-transfer Engagement/ Disengagement Motor I0

10 9 8 7

6

5 4 3 2

1 0

8

For R&D use Pre-transfer Engagement/ Disengagement Motor HP Sensor Post Charging Wire Cleaning Motor ON Post Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Rotation Direction

Symbol

PS5

8-81

Remarks 1: HP 1: HP 1: ON 0: CCW 0: CCW 1: Close

0: 2phase, 1: 1-2phase

0: CCW, 1: CW

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.3 A 1/0: Drive current 0.5 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A 0: Pre-transfer Engagement 1: Pre-transfer Disengagement 0: Motor Stop 1: Motor turn 0: CCW (From this side to the depths) 1: CW

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

8-81

8 Address

bit

P039

15 14

Not used Fixing Motor Gain

M48

13

Fixing Motor Rotation Direction

M48

12 11 10 9

Fixing Motor ON Not used Not used Fixing Feed Cooling Fan Full Speed (Center) Fixing Feed Cooling Fan Half Speed (Center) Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan 1 Full Speed Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan 1 Half Speed Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan 2 Full Speed Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan 2 Half Speed Transparency Sensor ON Transparency Sensor Gain 1 Transparency Sensor Gain 2 5V Remote Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used High Voltage Remote Secondary Transfer High Voltage CV ON Secondary Transfer High Voltage minus ON Secondary Transfer High Voltage Constant Current ON Secondary Transfer High Voltage Static Elimination High Voltage DC ON

M48

8 7 6 5 4

P040

3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

Remarks 0: High Speed Gain (More than 1700rpm) 0: CW (Fixing drive) 1: CCW (Engagement/ Disengagement) 0: ON

FM27

1: ON

FM27

1: ON

FM15

1: ON

FM15

1: ON

FM16

1: ON

FM16

1: ON

PS29 PS29 PS29

1: ON 1: ON 1: ON

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P041

15 14 13 12 11

Paper Width Size Detection 1 Paper Width Size Detection 2 Paper Width Size Detection 3 Paper Width Size Detection 4 Fixing Feed Cooling Fan Lock (Center) Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan 1 Lock Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan 2 Lock Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

PS94 PS95 PS96 PS97 FM27

1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 0: Lock, 1: Error

FM15

0: Lock, 1: Error

FM16

0: Lock, 1: Error

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8-82

Remarks

T-8-15

0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)

8-82

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)

■■Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016) Address

bit

P001

8-15 6-7 4-5 3

P002 P003 P004

P005

8-9 0-7 14-15 13 12 11

P006

Name

Not used Reserve For R&D use ZIFO,FIFO PCB Presence/ Absence 2 ZIFO,FIFO PCB Presence/ Absence 1 Debug SRAM PCB Presence/ Absence 0 For R&D use 9-15 Not used 0-8 For R&D use 4-15 Not used 0-3 For R&D use 15 Main Controller PCB 2 Version bit3 14 Main Controller PCB 2 Version bit2 13 Main Controller PCB 2 Version bit1 12 Main Controller PCB 2 Version bit0 11 Orfeo-A/ Orfeo-B PCB Detection 10 Orfeo-A/ Orfeo-B PCB Detection

For R&D use Not used For R&D use Not used

Clear reset of image process chip SCPRDY (Controller reception is available) 9-10 For R&D use 8 Not used 5-7 For R&D use 4 Not used 2-3 For R&D use 1 Not used 0 For R&D use 1-15 Not used 0 Image Analysis PCB power state

Symbol -

Remarks

Address P007

-

-

bit11,bit10 0,0: Short 0,1: Orfeo-B 1,0: Orfeo-A 1,1: OPEN -

-

1: Wake 0: Movement is possible

-

0: Abnormal, 1: Normal

8

Name

P008 P009 P010

P011 P012 P013 P014 P015 P016

12 11 10 9 8 0-7 0-15 0-15 0-15 0-15 0-15 0-15

bit3,bit2 0,1: ZIFO BOARD 1,0: FIFO BOARD 1,1: NO BOARD 0: Absence, 1: Presence

-

bit

8-15 Reserve 7 Reader Controller PCB power output state 6 PRTS (Controller reception is available) 5 PCTS (Printer reception is available) 4 PCPRDY (Controller reception is available) 3 PPRDY (Printer power ON) 2 Reserve 1 Reserve 0 Printer DCON reset state 0-15 Not used 0-1 Not used 13-15 For R&D use Not used Riser PCB Version bit3 Riser PCB Version bit2 Riser PCB Version bit1 Riser PCB Version bit0 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

8-83

Symbol

Remarks

-

0: Abnormal, 1: Normal

-

0: Movement is possible

-

0: Movement is possible

-

0: Movement is possible

-

0: Movement is possible 0: Abnormal, 1: Normal -

-

-

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)

T-8-16

8-83

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Reader / ADF (R-CON>P001 to P006)

■■Reader / ADF (R-CON>P001 to P006) Address

bit

P001

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5

Not used For R&D use 24V Power Supply Monitor Not used 12V Power Supply Monitor Board Test For R&D use ADF Glass HP Sensor Not used Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use HP Sensor For R&D use For R&D use Original Size Sensor ON Not used For R&D use For R&D use DF Type

SR11 SR2 -

4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

For R&D use Not used Watchdog Signal For R&D use For R&D use Not used For R&D use For R&D use Scanner Motor Reset Scanner Motor Enable Original Size Sensor 2 Original Size Sensor 1 ADF ConnectionDetection For R&D use

M1 M1 FC2 FC1 -

P002

P003

P004

Name

Symbol

Remarks 0: ON, 1:OFF 0: ON, 1:OFF 0: PCB check, 1: Normal start-up 0: ON, 1:OFF 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: Reverse duplex 1: 1-path duplex 0: Reset 0: Enable 0: Original presence 0: Original presence 0: Unconnected, 1: Connected

8

Address

bit

P005

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4

P006

3 2 1 0

Name Not used For R&D use For R&D use Not used FAN Lock Signal FAN ON Signal DF Cover Sensor 1 DF Cover Sensor 2 Scanner Motor Direction Not used For R&D use ADF Glass HP Sensor ADF Delay Sensor ADF Post-separation Sensor 3

ADF Delivery Sensor ADF Read Sensor 2 ADF Read Sensor 1 ADF Registration Sensor

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Reader / ADF (R-CON>P001 to P006)

8-84 Symbol FM2 FM2 SR1 SR3 -

SR11 SR4 SR2 SR3 PCB2 PCB5 SR5 PCB4 PCB3

Remarks 1: Failure 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: Open, 1: Close 0: Open, 1: Close 0: Back scan, 1: Scan

0: ON, 1:OFF 0: Paper presence 0: Paper presence

0: Paper presence 0: Paper presence 0: Paper presence 0: Paper presence T-8-17

8-84

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > ADF(FEEDER>P001 to P008)

■■ADF(FEEDER>P001 to P008) Address

bit

P001

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

P002

P003

P004

Name

Symbol

Remarks

Not used 24V Power Supply Monitor Not used DADF Fan Alarm LTR-R/LGL Identification Sensor AB/Inch Identification Sensor Tray Sensor Tray HP Sensor Paper Surface Sensor Not used Cover Sensor Original Sensor Not used Post-separation 3 Sensor Post-separation 2 Sensor Post-separation 1 Sensor Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor 0 Scanner Unit Cooling Fan Alarm 8-15 Not used 7 Disengagement HP Sensor 2 6 For R&D use

SR8 SR7 SR9 SR13 SR6 SR10 SR1 PCB2 SR3 SR2 SR12

0: Power supply 0: Failure 1: Paper presence 1: A4R, STMTR, B6R 0: Open, 1: Close 1: HP (lower limit) 1: Paper surface detection 0: Open 1: Original presence 1: Paper presence 0: Paper presence 0: Paper presence 1: HP (Escape)

FM3 SR16 -

5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SR15 SR20 SR19 SR18 SR17 M8 SL2 -

0: Failure 1: HP (Disengagement) 1: 1-path duplex, 0: Reverse duplex 1: HP (Disengagement) 1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1: ON 1: Up, 0: Down 1: ON 1: ON

For R&D use Disengagement HP Sensor 1 Original Size Sensor 4 Original Size Sensor 3 Original Size Sensor 2 Original Size Sensor 1 Not used Not used Not used Delivery LED 1 Not used Not used Tray Lifting Motor Direction Stamp Solenoid Original LED

8

Address

bit

P005

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6

Not used Not used Not used Not used Tray Lifting Motor Enable Not used Not used Not used Disengagement Motor 1 Enable Not used Not used Not used Not used Disengagement Motor 2 Enable Not used Not used Not used Glass Shift Motor Enable Not used Not used Glass Shift Motor Direction

M8 M6 M7 M9 M9

5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4

Feed Fan ON Not used Pickup Motor Enable Feed Motor Enable registration Motor Enable Read Motor Enable Not used Not used Not used Not used Pickup Roller Unit Lifting Motor Enable Back Side FAN ON Not used Delivery Motor Enable Delivery Motor Direction

FM1 M1 M2 M3 M4 FM10

1: Enable 1: Enable 1: Enable 1: Enable 0: Readin direction 1: Shading direction 1: ON 1: Enable 1: Enable 1: Enable 1: Enable 1: Enable

FM2 M5 M5

1: ON 1: Enable -

P006

P007

P008

3 2 1 0

Name

8-85

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > ADF(FEEDER>P001 to P008)

Symbol

Remarks

T-8-18

8-85

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Unit (DC-CON>P048 to P050)

■■Paper Deck Unit (DC-CON>P048 to P050) Address

bit

P048

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

P049

Name Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Deck Main Motor Hold Deck Open Solenoid Deck Lifter Motor Deck Lifter Motor ON Signal Deck Main Motor ON Signal Not used Not used Deck Pickup Clutch ON Signal Not used Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid Deck Open Indicator Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

Symbol M1 SL2 M2 M2 M1 CL2 SL1 LED100 -

8

Remarks 0: Open, 1: Close 0: Up, 1:Down 0: OFF, 1:ON 0: OFF, 1:ON 0: OFF, 1:ON 0: OFF, 1:ON -

Name

8-86

Address

bit

Symbol

Remarks

P050

15 14 13 12 11

For R&D not used For R&D For R&D Deck Open Sensor

PS9

10

Deck Set Sensor

PS5

9 8

Deck Lifter Lower Limit Detecting Switch Deck Paper Level Sensor

SW2 PS8

7

Deck Paper Supply Position Sensor

PS7

6 5

M1 SL1

4

Deck Main Motor Lock Signal Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid ON Signal Deck Pickup Sensor

0: Connected 1: unconnected 0: Paper Present, 1: Paper Absent 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: Paper Present, 1: Paper Absent 0: Paper Present, 1: Paper Absent 0: ON, 1: OFF

PS6

3

Deck Feed Sensor

PS1

2 1

Deck Lifter Position Sensor Deck Paper Sensor

PS4 PS2

0

Deck Open Detecting Switch

SW1

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Unit (DC-CON>P048 to P050)

0: Paper Present, 1: Paper Absent 0: Paper Present, 1: Paper Absent 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: Paper Present, 1: Paper Absent 0: Open, 1: close T-8-19

8-86

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > POD Deck Lite (DC-CON>P054 to P057)

■■POD Deck Lite (DC-CON>P054 to P057) Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P054

15 14 13 12 11 10

M2 PS9 PS5

Fix to 0 1: Error, 0: Normal Fix to 0 Fix to 1 1: Close, 0: Open 1: Open, 0: Close

SW2

1: Normal, 0: Abnormal

8

Large Deck ID Deck Lifter Motor Error Deck Lite ID Deck Lite ID Deck Receptacle Left Open Sensor Deck Engagement/Disengagement Sensor Deck Lifter Lower Limit Detection Switch Deck Paper Level Sensor

PS8

7

Deck Supply Position Sensor

PS7

6

PS10

5 4

Deck Receptacle Right Open Sensor 5V Detection Deck Pullout Sensor

1: Paper absence, 0: Paper presence 1: Paper absence, 0: Paper presence 1: Close, 0: Open

3

Deck Pickup Sensor

PS1

2

Deck Lifter Position Sensor

PS4

1

Deck Paper Sensor

PS2

0

Receptacle Open Switch

SW3

9

PS6

Remarks

1: 5V OFF, 0: 5V ON 1: Paper presence, 0: Paper absence 1: Paper presence, 0: Paper absence 1: Paper absence, 0: Paper presence 1: Paper absence, 0: Paper presence 1: ON, 0: OFF

Address

bit

P055

15 14 13 12 11 10

Not used Heater Error 1 Heater Ready POD Deck Detection Motor Cooling Fan Error Deck Foreign Matter Sensor

FAN4 PS13

9

Paper Level Sensor

PS12

8

Hot Air Fan/Cold Air Fan/Expansion FAN1, Fan/Swing Motor Error, Receptacle FAN2, Load Error FAN3, M3 Temperature DATA [3] Temperature DATA [2] Temperature DATA [1] Temperature DATA [0] Humidity DATA [3] Humidity DATA [2] Humidity DATA [1] Humidity DATA [0] BANK-RX1 BANK-RX0 BANK-TX Deck Pickup Clutch ON CL1 Hot Air Fan OFF FAN1 Air Heater ON H1 Open/Close Solenoid ON SL2, SL3 Lifter DOWN/UP Deck Lifter Motor ON M2 Cold Fan OFF FAN2 Cassette Heater ON H2, H3 Motor Cooling Fan FAN4 Deck Pickup Motor Current 1 M1 Deck Pickup Motor Current 0 M1 Deck Pickup Solenoid ON SL1 Indication LED ON -

P056

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8

Name

8-87

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > POD Deck Lite (DC-CON>P054 to P057)

Symbol

Remarks 1: Normal, 0: Error 1: Ready, 0: Not ready 1: Detect, 0: Not detect 1: Normal, 0: Error 1: Foreign matter absence, 0: Foreign matter presence 1: Paper absence, 0: Paper presence 1: Normal, 0: Error

1: bit3=1, 0: bit3=0 1: bit2=1, 0: bit2=0 1: bit1=1, 0: bit1=0 1: bit0=1, 0: bit0=0 1: bit3=1, 0: bit3=0 1: bit2=1, 0: bit2=0 1: bit1=1, 0: bit1=0 1: bit0=1, 0: bit0=0 Auto at bank switching Auto at bank switching Fix to 1 1: ON, 0: OFF 1: OFF, 0: ON 1: ON, 0: OFF 1: ON, 0: OFF 1: Down, 0: Up 1: ON, 0: OFF 1: ON, 0: OFF 1: ON, 0: OFF 1: ON, 0: OFF 1: OFF, 0: ON 1: OFF, 0: ON

8-87

8 Address

bit

P057

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Multi Deck Unit (DC-CON>P042 to P053)

Remarks

Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Expansion Fan OFF Not used Air Heater Control Signal

FAN3 H1

1: OFF, 0: ON 0 (0,0): 60 degC, 3 (1,1): 90 degC

Swing Control Signal

M3

0 (0,0): 250 pps, 3 (1,1): 850 pps

Fan Control Signal

FAN1, FAN2, FAN3

0 (0,0): 26V, 3 (1,1): 13.5V

■■Multi Deck Unit (DC-CON>P042 to P053) Address

bit

P042

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4

T-8-20

P043

3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8

8-88

Name

Symbol

Not use Middle Deck Pull-out Sensor S202 Vertical Path Lower Sensor S003 Vertical Path Middle Sensor S002 Not use Not use Lower Deck Pull-out Sensor S302 Lower Deck Feed Sensor S004 Upper Deck Swing HP Sensor S116 Not use Not use Upper Deck Lifter Lower Limit S112 sensor Not use Upper Deck Pull-out Sensor S102 Vertical Path Upper Sensor S001 Vertical Path Middle Sensor S002 Not use Upper Deck Lifter HP Sensor S111 Upper Deck Paper Presence/ S103 Absence Sensor Upper Deck Paper Surface Sensor S104 Upper Deck Foreign Substance S106 Sensor 2 Upper Deck Foreign Substance S106 Sensor 1 Upper Deck Lifter Upper Limit S105 Sensor Upper Deck Pickup Sensor S101 Not use Not use Deck Pickup Motor ERR M001 Upper Deck Safety Switch S108 Upper Deck Air Heater Unit ERR HT101 Upper Deck Air Heater Unit READY Upper Deck Night Flotation Fan ERR Upper Deck Left Flotation Fan ERR

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Multi Deck Unit (DC-CON>P042 to P053)

Remarks 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 0: Paper 0: Paper 0: Paper 0: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 0: Paper 0: Paper 0: Paper Reserve 0: Paper 0: Paper

1: Paper 0: Error 1: Open, 0: Close 0: High Temperature 1: Normal Temperature HT101 0: Low Temperature 1: Blast temperature FAN102 0: Error FAN101 0: Error

8-88

8 Address

bit

P044

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15

P045

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Multi Deck Unit (DC-CON>P042 to P053)

Symbol

Remarks

Not use Not use Upper Deck Lifter Motor-I1 M101 Reserve Upper Deck Lifter Motor-I0 M101 Middle Deck Lifter Motor-I1 M201 Reserve Middle Deck Lifter Motor-I0 M201 Lower Deck Lifter Motor-I1 M301 Reserve Lower Deck Lifter Motor-I0 M301 Not use Not use Horizontal Path Feed Motor-I1 M004 Reserve Horizontal Path Feed Motor-I0 M004 Vertical Path Lower Feed Motor-I1 M003 Reserve Vertical Path Lower Feed Motor-I0 M003 Vertical Path Upper Feed Motor-I1 M002 Reserve Vertical Path Upper Feed Motor-I0 M002 Lower Deck Pickup Roller Release SL301 1: ON Solenoid Middle Deck Pickup Roller Release SL201 1: ON Solenoid Upper Deck Pickup Roller Release SL101 1: ON Solenoid Deck Pickup Motor CLK M001 Lower Deck Swing Motor -CLK M302 Middle Deck Swing Motor-CLK M202 Upper Deck Swing Motor-CLK M102 Upper Deck Lifter Motor-CLK M101 Middle Deck Lifter Motor-CLK M201 Lower Deck Lifter Motor-CLK M301 Not use Horizontal Path Feed Motor-CLK M004 Vertical path Lower Feed MotorM003 CLK Vertical Path Upper Feed MotorM002 CLK 24V4 ON 1: ON Lifter EN Rock Clear 0: Clear

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P046

15 14 13

Not use Lower Deck Lifter HP Sensor Lower Deck Paper Presence/ Absence Sensor Lower Deck Paper Surface Sensor Lower Deck Foreign Substance Sensor2 Lower Deck Foreign Substance Sensor1 Lower Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor Lower Deck Pickup Sensor Middle Deck Swing HP Sensor Not use Not use Middle Deck Lifter Lower Limit Sensor Not use Not use Not use Not use Not use Middle Deck Lifter HP Sensor Middle Deck Paper Presence/ Absence Sensor Middle Deck Paper Surface Sensor Middle Deck Foreign Substance Sensor 2 Middle Deck Foreign Substance Sensor 1 Middle Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor Middle Deck Pickup Sensor Lower Deck Swing HP Sensor Not use Not use Lower Deck Lifter Lower Limit Sensor Not use Vertical Path Lower Sensor Lower Deck Feed Sensor Delivery Sensor

S211 S303

0: Paper 0: Paper

S304 S306

0: Paper Reserve

S306

0: Paper

S305

0: Paperr

S301 S216 S212

1: paper 0: Paper 0: Paper 0: Paper 0: Paper

S311 S203

0: Paper 0: Paper

S204 S206

0: Paper Reserve

S206

0: Paper

S205

0: Paper

S201 S316 S312

1: Paper 0: Paper 0: Paper 0: Paper 0: Paper

S003 S004 S005

0: Paper 0: Paper 0: Paper

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4

P047

3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8

8-89

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Multi Deck Unit (DC-CON>P042 to P053)

Remarks

8-89

8 Address

bit

P048

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5

P049

4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Multi Deck Unit (DC-CON>P042 to P053)

Remarks

Middle Deck Right Flotation Fan FAN202 1: ON EN Middle Deck Left Flotation Fan EN FAN201 1: ON Middle Deck Air Heater Unit ON HT201 1: +5V A1T2 ON SEL Middle Deck Air Heater Unit ON HT201 1: ON Middle Deck Air Heater Unit BIT1 HT201 1: BIT1 Select Middle Deck Air Heater Unit BIT0 HT201 1: BIT0 Select Middle Deck Swing Motor DIR M202 1: CW,0:CCW Middle Deck Swing Motor EN M202 1: ON Motor Drivers Reset 0: Reset Horizontal , Lower Deck Vertical 0: ON Path Lower Feed EN Horizontal Path Right Feed MODE 1: 1-2 phase both edges 0: W1-2 phase both edges Not use 1: BIT1 Select Power Supply ON LED 1: ON Not use 1: ON Not use Not use *STANDBY 0: STANDBY, Door type +Non 5V ON/OFF +24V2 ON 1: +24V2 ON Middle Deck LED 1: ON Middle Deck Open/Close Solenoid SL202 0: deck open Middle Deck Pull-out Clutch CL202 1: Connect Middle Deck Pickup Clutch CL201 1: Connect Middle Deck Lifter Motor CWB M201 0: CCW, 1: CW Middle Deck Lifter Motor EN M201 0: ON Upper Deck Right Flotation Fan FAN102 1: ON EN Upper Deck Left Flotation Fan EN FAN101 1: ON Upper Deck Air Heater Unit ON/ HT101 1: +5V A1T1 ON OFF SEL Upper Deck Air Heater Unit ON HT101 1: ON Upper Deck Air Heater Unit BIT1 HT101 1: BIT1 Select Upper Deck Air Heater Unit BIT0 HT101 1: BIT0 Select Upper Deck Swing Motor DIR M102 1: CW,0: CCW Upper Deck Swing Motor EN M102 1: ON

8

Address

bit

P050

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name Not use Not use Lower Deck Air Heater Unit Connect Detection Middle Deck Air Heater Unit Connect Detection Upper Deck Air Heater Unit Connect Detection Cassette Heater (Lower Deck) Connect Detection Cassette Heater (Middle Deck) Connect Detection Not use Not use Not use Not use Middle Deck Safety Switch Middle Deck Air Heater Unit ERR Middle Deck Air Heater Unit READY Middle Deck Right Flotation Fan ERR Middle Deck Left Flotation Fan ERR

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Multi Deck Unit (DC-CON>P042 to P053)

8-90 Symbol

Remarks

HT301 0: Connect HT201 0: Connect HT101 0: Connect CHT301 CHT201 S208 HT201

1: Open, 0: Close 0: High Temperature 1: Normal Temperature HT201 0: Low Temperature 1: Blast temperature FAN202 0: Error FAN201 0: Error

8-90

8 Address

bit

P051

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Multi Deck Unit (DC-CON>P042 to P053)

Remarks

Lower Deck Safety Switch S308 1: ON Middle Deck Safety Switch S208 1: ON Upper Deck Safety Switch S108 1: ON Not use Not use 0: Error Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 EER FAN001 0: Error Deck Left Front Cover Open/Close S006 1: Close, 0: Open, Sensor Deck Left Front Cover Safety S007 1: +24V 4Energization Detection Switch 0: Door close , Energization;0 Double Feed Detection Signal 0: Double Feed Double Feeding Sensor S009 GND Detection, Connect:0 Double Feeding Sensor S010 GND Detection, Connect:0 Lower Deck Safety Switch S308 1: Open, 0: Close Lower Deck Air Heater Unit ERR HT301 0: High Temperature 1: Normal Temperature Lower Deck Air Heater Unit HT301 0: Low Temperature READY 1: Blast temperature Lower Deck Right Flotation Fan FAN302 0: Error ERR Lower Deck Left Flotation Fan FAN301 0: Error ERR

Address

bit

Name

P052

15

Lower Deck Right Flotation Fan EN Lower Deck Left Flotation Fan EN Lower Deck Air Heater Unit ON/ OFF SEL Lower Deck Air Heater Unit ON Lower Deck Air Heater Unit BIT1 Lower Deck Air Heater Unit BIT0 Lower Deck Swing Motor DIR Lower Deck Swing Motor EN Vertical Path Lower Feed MODE

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5

4

3 2

1

P053

0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8-91 Symbol

Remarks

FAN302 1: ON FAN301 1: ON HT301 1: +5V A1T3 ON HT301 HT301 HT301 M302 M302 -

1: ON 1: BIT1 Select 1: BIT0 Select 1: CW,0:CCW 1: ON 0: W1-2 phase both edges 1: 1-2 phase both edges Vertical Path Lower Feed CWB 0: CCW, 1:CW Right Flotation Fan BIT1 FAN102, 1: Select BIT1 FAN202, FAN302 Right Flotation Fan BIT0 FAN102, 1: Select BIT0 FAN202, FAN302 Not use 1: BIT2 Select Left Flotation Fan BIT1 FAN101, 1: Select BIT1 FAN201, FAN301 Left Flotation Fan BIT0 FAN101, 1: Select BIT0 FAN201, FAN301 Vertical Path Upper Feed EN 0: ON AD HUM/TMP Switch 1: Humidity, 0: Temperature +24V3 ON 1: +24V3 ON Lower Deck LED 1: ON Lower Deck Open/Close Solenoid SL302 0: Deck open Lower Deck Pull-out Clutch CL302 1: Connect Lower Deck Pickup Clutch CL301 1: Connect Lower Deck Lifter Motor CWB M301 1: CW, 0: CCW Lower Deck Lifter Motor EN M301 0: ON Deck Pickup Motor EN M001 1: ON +24V1 ON 1: 24V1 ON Upper Deck LED 1: ON Upper Deck Open/Close Solenoid SL102 0: Deck open Upper Deck Pull-out Clutch CL102 1: Connect Upper Deck Pickup Clutch CL101 1: Connect Upper Deck Lifter Motor CWB M101 1: CW,0:CCW Upper Deck Lifter Motor EN M101 0: ON T-8-21

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Multi Deck Unit (DC-CON>P042 to P053)

8-91

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Buffer Path Unit (DC-CON>P026 to P029)

■■Buffer Path Unit (DC-CON>P026 to P029) Address

bit

P026

15

Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 2 I0

M53

14 13 12 11

For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 1 Enable Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 1 Rotation Direction Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 1 I1 Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 1 I0

M50

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.2 A 1/0: Drive current 0.5 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A 1: Enable

M50

0: CW, 1: CCW

10

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name

Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

Symbol

M50 M50 -

Remarks

Address

bit

P027

15 14 13

12 11 10 9 8 7 6

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.2 A 1/0: Drive current 0.5 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A -

5 4 3 2 1

0 P028

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8

Name

8-92 Symbol

Remarks

Decurler Feed Motor 2 Pattern Switch Decurler Feed Motor 2 I1 Decurler Feed Motor 2 I0

M52

1: 2phase, 0: 1-2phase

M52 M52

For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Decurler Feed Motor 1 Enable Decurler Feed Motor 1 Pattern Switch Decurler Feed Motor 1 I1 Decurler Feed Motor 1 I0

M51 M51

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.3 A 1/0: Drive current 0.5 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A 1: Enable 1: 2phase, 0: 1-2phase

For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 2 Enable Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 2 Rotation Direction Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 2 I1 For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Buffer Interlock Loop Detection Buffer Door Sensor Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Cam HP Sensor 2 Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Cam HP Sensor 1 Jam Sensor 2 Jam Sensor 1 Not used Not used Not used Decurler Feed Motor 2 Enable

M53

I1/I0 0/0: HOLD_OFF 0/1: Drive current 1.3 A 1/0: Drive current 0.5 A 1/1: Drive current 0 A 1: Enable

M53

0: CCW, 1CW

M53

-

PS87 PS89

0: Close 0: Close 1: HP

PS88

1: HP

PS86 PS85 M52

1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1: Enable

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Buffer Path Unit (DC-CON>P026 to P029)

M51 M51

8-92

8 Address

bit

Name

P029

15 14 13 12 11

Not used Not used Not used Decurler Lower Exhaust Fan Lock Decurler Lower Exhaust Fan Half Speed Decurler Lower Exhaust Fan Full Speed Decurler Side Exhaust Fan Lock Decurler Side Exhaust Fan Half Speed Decurler Side Exhaust Fan Full Speed Decurler Suction Fan Lock Decurler Suction Fan Half Speed Decurler Suction Fan Full Speed Not used Not used Not used Not used

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)

8-93

■■Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to

Remarks

P024) FM32 FM32

0: Lock, 1: Error 1: ON

FM32

1: ON

FM31 FM31

0: Lock, 1: Error 1: ON

FM31

1: ON

FM30 FM30 FM30

0: Lock, 1: Error 1: ON 1: ON

T-8-22

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P001

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3

Horizontal Registration HP Sensor Punch 2-/3-hole Encoder Punch 2-/3-hole Sensor Punch Position Sensor Buffer Feed Motor Rotation Signal Swing Guide Motor Clock Signal Swing Guide Motor Rotation Signal Inlet Sensor Swing Guide Height Detection Sensor Feed Path Senor Inlet Feed Motor Inlet Feed Motor Stack Delivery Lower/Shutter Motor Rotation Stack Delivery Lower/Shutter Motor Clock DA Converter 1 Clock Signal DA Converter 1 Data Output Signal DA Converter 1 Chip Select Signal Buffer Feed Motor Clock Signal Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Position Sensor Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Rear HP Sensor Tray Auxiliary Guide Rear HP Sensor Rear Alignment HP Sensor Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Front HP Sensor Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Front HP Sensor Front Alignment HP Sensor Staple HP Sensor

S101 S103 S102 M102 M110 M110 S101 S118

1: Home Position 1: Home Position 1: Home Position 0: CCW, 1: CW 0: CW, 1: CCW 0: Paper, 1: No paper 1: Detected

S102 M200 M200 M122

0: No paper, 1: Paper 0: CW, 1: CCW 0: CW, 1: CCW

M122

-

S149

1: Home

S138

1: Home

S136

0: Home

S109 S139

1: Home 1: Home

S137

0: Home

S108 S131

1: Home 1: Home

P002

2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8

Remarks

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)

8-93

8 Address

bit

P003

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

P004

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)

Remarks

Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor Lock M120 Signal Stacking Tray Paper Retainer M114 Motor Clock Signal DA Converter 2 Clock Signal DA Converter 2 Data Output Signal DA Converter 2 Chip Select Signal Processing Tray Paper Sensor S103 1: Detected Stacking Tray Paper Retainer HP S114 1: Home Sensor EXIO1 Chip Select Tray Paper Surface Sens ON PBA600 0: Light, 1: Charge DA converter 2 data input signal Staple Alignment Interference S128 1: Detedted Sensor Staple Edging Sensor S132 1: Detedted Staple Sensor S133 1: Detedted Staple Cartridge Sensor S134 0: 50staples, 1: 100staples -

8

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P005

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

Tray Paper Surface Sensor 3 Tray Paper Surface Sensor 4 Tray Paper Surface Sensor 1 Tray Paper Surface Sensor 2 Gripper Base Rear Sensor Gripper Base Front Sensor Gripper Position Sensor Gripper HP Sensor EXIO2 chip select Display LED2 Display LED1 Saddle Stitcher Motor CCW Signal

PBA700 PBA700 PBA700 PBA700 S117 S116 S115 S140 M209

1

Saddle Stitcher Motor ON Signal

M209

0

Saddle Stitcher Motor CW Signal

M209

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Punch E2 Data Input Signal Punch DA Data Input Signal Punch E2 Ship Select E2 Chip Select Punch DA Clock Output Signal Punch DA Data Output Signal E2 Data Input Signal Punch DA Chip Select Front Alignment Motor Rotation Front Alignment Motor CLK -

P006

-

8-94 Remarks

0: No paper, 1: Paper 0: No paper, 1: Paper 0: No paper, 1: Paper 0: No paper, 1: Paper 1: Front 1: Rear 0: Front, 1: Rear 1: Home 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF (ON,CW,CCW) 1,1,0: CW 1,0,1: CCW 0,1,1: Brake 0,0,0: Free (ON,CW,CCW) 1,1,0: CW 1,0,1: CCW 0,1,1: Brake 0,0,0: Free (ON,CW,CCW) 1,1,0: CW 1,0,1: CCW 0,1,1: Brake 0,0,0: Free 0: CW, 1: CCW -

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)

8-94

8 Address

bit

P007

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

P008

Name Rear Alignment Motor CLK Rear Alignment Motor Rotation Gripper Base Motor CLK Gripper Base Motor DIR Gripper Motor CLK Gripper Motor DIR Tray 2 Shift Motor ENBL Tray 2 Shift Motor CLK Tray 2 Shift Motor CW Tray 2 Shift Motor CUR

Symbol M109 M109 M116 M116 M117 M117 M217 M217 M217 M217

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)

Remarks 0: CW, 1: CCW 0: CW, 1: CCW 0: CW, 1: CCW 0: Enable 0: CW, 1: CCW 0: OFF, 1: ON

8

Address

bit

P009

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

P010

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name

Symbol

8-95 Remarks

Tray 2 Area Sensor 3 S127 0: No paper, 1: Paper Tray 2 Area Sensor 2 S126 0: No paper, 1: Paper Tray 2 Area Sensor 1 S125 0: No paper, 1: Paper Tray 2 Paper Sensor S105 0: No paper, 1: Paper Tray 1 Shift Motor ENBL M105 0: Enable Tray 1 Shift Motor CLK M105 Tray 1 Shift Motor CW M105 0: CW, 1: CCW Tray 1 Shift Motor CUR M105 0: OFF, 1: ON Stapler Shift HP Sensor S107 1: Home Escape Tray Paper Sensor S130 1: Detected Tray 1 Paper Sensor S104 0: No paper, 1: Paper Tray 1 Area Sensor 1 S122 0: No paper, 1: Paper Tray 1 Area Sensor 2 S123 0: No paper, 1: Paper Tray 1 Area Sensor 3 S124 0: No paper, 1: Paper Tray 1 Shift Motor M105 0: No paper, 1: Paper Tray 2 Shift Motor Alarm M217 0: No paper, 1: Paper Buffer Flapper HP Sensor S142 1: Home Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor S143 1: Detected Swing Guide HP Sensor S110 1: Home Shutter Close Detection Sensor S148 Shutter HP Sensor S106 0: Home Paper Trailing Edge Pushing Guide S113 1: Home HP Sensor Stack Delivery Lower/Shutter M122 0: OFF, 1:ON Motor Shutter Clutch CL102 0: OFF, 1:ON Swing Guide Solenoid SL101 0: OFF, 1:ON Front Door Sensor S129 0:open/1:close Paper Return Guide HP Sensor S112 1: Home Paper Retainer HP Sensor S135 1: Home Feed Roller Separation HP Sensor S111 1: Home

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)

8-95

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P011

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7

Stapler Shift Motor CLK Stapler Shift Motor DIR Paper Trailing Edge Pushing Guide Motor CLK Paper Trailing Edge Pushing Guide Motor DIR Paper Return Guide Roller Motor CLK Paper Return Guide Roller Motor DIR Saddle Roller Guide Motor DIR Feed Roller Disengage/Buffer Flapper Motor DIR Processing Tray Paper Retainer Motor CLK Processing Tray Paper Retainer Motor DIR Paper Return Guide Motor CLK Paper Return Guide Motor DIR

M107 M107 M113

0: CCW, 1: CW -

M113

0: CCW, 1: CW

M121

-

M121

0: CCW, 1: CW

M204 M119

0: CCW, 1: CW

M118

-

M118

0: CCW, 1: CW

M112 M112

0: CCW, 1: CW

6

P012

5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Remarks

8

Address

bit

P013

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

P014

Name Punch Slide Motor CW Punch Slide Motor CLK Inserter Connection IF Connection Punch Connection Punch Motor CCW Punch Motor CW Punch Motor ON Power Supply Fan ON Signal Inserter Eject Start Ack Inserter Entry Start IF Unit Ejection Start Ack IF Unit Entry Start Fold Eject Ack Fold Entry Start Power Supply Fan Alarm Inserter Eject Start Inserter Entry Start Ack IF Unit Ejection Start IF Unit Entry Start Ack Fold Eject Start Fold Entry Ack

Symbol M101 M101 M102 M102 M102 FAN101 FAN101 -

8-96 Remarks

0: CCW, 1: CW 0: Connected 0: Connected 0: Connectecd 0: CCW, 1: CW 0: CCW, 1: CW 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)

8-96

8 Address

bit

P015

15 14 13 12

Saddle Connection Staple Position Switch Swing Guide Safety Switch

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3

Front Door Switch 24V1-DETECT 24V-DETECT Relay ON Signal Feed Motor/Buffer Feed Motor Stepping Change Stack Delivery Upper Motor Stepping Change Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Motor Rotation Signal Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor Rotation Signal Push Switch (-) Push Switch (+) Dip Switch 4 Dip Switch 3 Dip Switch 2 Dip Switch 1

2

P016

1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name

Symbol SW103 SW102/ SW104 SW101 M101/ M102 M101/ M102 M114

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)

Remarks 0: Connected 0: Close, 1: Open 0: Close, 1: Open

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P017

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11

Punch Slide Motor Standby Signal Punch Slide Motor Enable Signal DipSW Input 2 DipSW Input 1 Saddle Delivery Tray Paper Sensor Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Move HP Sensor Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer HP Sensor Saddle Lead Edge Stopper Motor CLK Saddle Lead Edge Stopper Solenoid Saddle Alignment Roller Disengage Solenoid (Upper) Saddle Alignment Roller Disengage Solenoid (Lower) Saddle Inlet Flapper Solenoid

S228 S219

0: Stanfby, 1: Ready 0: Enable, 1: Disenable 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 1: Paper 1: Home

S221

1: Home

M203

-

0: Close, 1: Open 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: 2W12phase, 1:1 2phase 0: 2W12phase, 1: 12phase 0: CW, 1: CCW

M120

0: CCW, 1: CW

-

0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF

8

8-97

P018

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Remarks

SL205 SL203 1: ON SL204 1: ON SL206 -

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)

8-97

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P019

15

Saddle Trailing Edge Moving Motor Rotation Saddle Trailing Edge Moving Motor CLK Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Motor Rotation Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Motor CLK Saddle Alignment Guide Motor Rotation Saddle Alignment Guide Motor CLK Saddle Lead-in Roller HP Sensor Saddle Folder HP Sensor Staple HP Sensor Saddle Paper Push-on Plate HP Sensor Saddle Vertical Path Sensor Saddle Delivery Sensor 1 Saddle Paper Push-on Plate Motor Sensor Saddle Folder/Feeder Motor Sensor Saddle Alignment Plate HP Sensor Saddle Lead Edge Stopper HP Sensor Saddle Paper Push-on Plate Motor PWM Trimmer Connection Detection Saddle Stitcher Staple Sensor 2 Saddle Stitcher Staple Sensor 1 Saddle Roller Guide HP Sensor Saddle Delivery Sensor 2 Saddle Paper Tapping HP Sensor Saddle Inlet Sensor

M211

1: CW, 0: CCW

M211

-

M210

1: CW, 0: CCW

M210

-

M202

0: CW, 1: CCW

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P020

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Remarks

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P021

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Saddle Stitcher Motor CCW Signal Saddle Stitcher Motor CW Signal Saddle Stitcher Motor ON Signal Inserter Lock Power Source Detection Saddle Roller Guide Motor rotation Saddle Roller Guide Motor CLK Saddle Paper Tapping HP Sensor rRotation Saddle Paper Tapping HP Sensor CLK Inlet Feed Motor Standby Inlet Feed Motor Output Enable Saddle Alignment Roller Motor Rotation Saddle Alignment Roller Motor CLK Inlet Feed Motor Rotation Inlet Feed Motor Clock Saddle Feed Motor Rotation Saddle Feed Motor Clock Inlet Feed Motor Stepping Saddle Feed Motor Stepping Saddle Lead-in Roller Disengage Motor Rotation Saddle Lead-in Roller Disengage Motor CLK Saddle Folder/Feeder Motor CW Saddle Folder/Feeder Motor CCW Saddle Paper Push-on Plate Motor CW Saddle Paper Push-on Plate Motor CCW Chip Select For DAC Data In For DAC Data Out For DAC Clock For DAC

M209 M209 M209 -

0: CW, 1: CCW 0: CCW, 1: CW 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: Detected 24V

M204 M204 -

1: CW, 0: CCW 1: CW, 0: CCW

7 6 5

M202 S222 S229 S131 S218

1: Home 1: Home

S203 S226 S213

1: Detected 1: Paper 0: ON, 1: OFF

S206 S205

1: Home 1: Home

M205 S225 S224 S207 S227 S215 S201

4

1: Home

S214

0: Connected 1: Detedted 1: Detedted 1: Home 1: Paper 1: Home 1: Paper

8

8-98

3 2 1 0 P022

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

-

Remarks

-

M212

0: Standby 0: Enable 1: CW, 0: CCW

M212

-

M214

1: CW, 0: CCW 1: CW, 0: CCW 0: Half-step 0: Half-step 1: CW, 0: CCW

M214

-

M206 M206 M205

1: CW 1: CCW 1: CW

M205

1: CCW

-

0: ENABLE -

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)

8-98

8 Address

bit

P023

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

P024

Name LED PCB -

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Trimmer A1 (SORTER>P024 to P028)

Symbol -

■■Trimmer A1 (SORTER>P024 to P028)

Remarks 1:LED ON -

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P024

7

Feed Motor Current Value Setting D/A Output Waste Paper Full Sensor D/A Output Waste Paper Full Sensor A/D Input Push Switch Press Motor HP Sensor

M101

-

S011

-

S011 S011 S106

Inlet Sensor Waste Paper Box Detection Sensor Rear Estrangement Motor HP Sensor Front Estrangement Motor HP Sensor Paper Delivery Sensor DIPSW-1 DIPSW-2 DIPSW-3 DIPSW-4 Press Motor CW/CCW Switching Signal Press Motor Standby Signal Press Motor Output Permission Signal Press Motor Drive Clock Output Feed Motor CW/CCW Switching Signal Feed Motor Standby Signal Feed Motor Output Permission Signal Feed Motor Drive Clock Signal

S101 S109 S104

M105

0: ON, 1: OFF 0: Feed Position 1: Release Position 1: Paper 1: Waste Paper 0: Release Position 1: Feed Position 0: Feed Position 1: Release position 1: Paper 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: Release, 1: Touch

M105 M105

0: Standby, 1: Ready 0: Permission, 1: Prohibition

M105 M101

0: Permission, 1: Prohibition 0: Entrance, 1: Delivery

M101 M101

0: Standby, 1: Ready 0: Permission, 1: Prohibition

M101

0: Permission, 1: Prohibition

6 5 4 3

P025

2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7

T-8-23

6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8

8-99

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Trimmer A1 (SORTER>P024 to P028)

S102

Remarks

8-99

8 Address

bit

P026

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3

P027

2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Trimmer A1 (SORTER>P024 to P028)

Remarks

Registration Motor Permission M102 0: Permission, 1: Prohibition Signal Cutter Motor Encoder Lock M106 0: Permission, 1: Prohibition Registration Motor Drive Clock M102 Output Registration Motor Standby Signal M102 0: Standby, 1: Ready Registration Motor CW/CCW M102 1: Registration Completion Switching Signal Registration HP Sensor S105 1: Registration Completion Registration Motor Current Setting M102 PWM Output 24V Detection Signal 0:24V Detection Rear Estrangement Motor Drive M104 Clock Output Front Estrangement Motor Standby M103 0: Standby, 1: Ready Motor Front Estrangement Motor CW/ M103 0: CW, 1: CCW CCW Switching Signal Front Estrangement Motor Current M103 Setting PWM Output Rear Estrangement Motor Current M104 Setting PWM Output Press Motor Current Setting PWM M105 Output Front Estrangement Motor Output M103 0: Rermission, 1: prohibition Permission Signal Front Estrangement Motor Drive M103 Clock Output 5V Shutdown Signal 1: Shutdown Paddle Solenoid ON Signal SL102 0: ON, 1: OFF Stopper Solenoid ON Signal SL101 0: ON, 1: OFF Rear Estrangement Motor Output M104 0: Permission, 1: Prohibition Permission Signal

8

Address

bit

P028

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Name

8-100 Symbol

LED on PCB Cutter Motor CCW Signal M106 Cutter Motor CW Signal M106 Cutter Motor ON/OFF Output M106 M104 Rear Estrangement Motor CW/ CCW Witching Signal Front Estrangement Motor Standby M103 Signal Stopper Solenoid/Paddle Solenoid SL101/ Drive PWM Output SL102

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Trimmer A1 (SORTER>P024 to P028)

Remarks 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: CW, 1: CCW 0: CCW, 1: CW 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: Release, 1: Touch 0: Standby, 1: Ready T-8-24

8-100

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Unit G1 (SORTER>P028 to P037)

■■Paper Folding Unit G1 (SORTER>P028 to P037) Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P028

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15

Upper Stopper Paper Sensor Fold Position Accuracy Sensor Separation Timing Sensor Speed Down Timing Sensor Paper Delivery Start Response Paper Delivery Start Request Rotation Direction Of Fold Position Adjustment Motor Rotation Direction Of Fold Position Adjustment Motor CLK Saddle Folder/Feeder Motor CLK C-fold Stopper Solenoid Separation Solenoid Fold Tray Branch Flapper Solenoid Exit Motor Phase Switching 2 Exit Motor Phase Switching 1 Exit Motor 2CLK Upper Stopper Paper Sensor AD Fold Position Accuracy Sensor AD Separation Timing Sensor AD Speed Down Timing Sensor AD Fold Tray Branch Flapper Solenoid Flash Write Communication Received Flash Write Communication Send

S33 S32 S31 S30 M15

1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: CW, 1: CCW

M15

-

P029

14

P030

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

M11 SOL5 SOL3 SOL2 M13 M14 M13 S33 S32 S31 S30 SOL4 -

Remarks

0: PWM, 1: PWM 0: PWM, 1: PWM 0: PWM, 1: PWM 0: ON, 1: OFF P31=0,P32=0:2Phase P31=1,P32=0:1-2Phase 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 0: PWM, 1: PWM -

8-101

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P031

15 14 13

EEPROM/IO DO Signal C-fold Tray Motor CLK Lead Edge Holding Guide Motor CLK Rotation Direction Of Lead Edge Holding Guide Motor C-fold Stopper Adjustment Motor CLK Rotation Direction Of C-fold Stopper Adjustment Motor Upper Stopper Motor Rotation Direction Of Upper Stopper Motor External DAC CS Signal EEPROM CS Signal EEPROM/DA/IO/ DI Signal EEPROM/DA/IO/ CLK Signal PM Motor Output Enable External I/O Address Bus3 External I/O Address Bus2 External I/O Address Bus1 Fold Position Adjustment Clutch (Negative) Fold Position Adjustment Clutch (Positive) PM Motor Chip Enable Exit Motor 1 Enable Brushless Motor Enable HB Motor Enable Entrance Motor Phase Switching 2 Entrance Motor Switching 2

M7 M10

0: Data bit0, 1: Data bit1 -

M10

0: CW, 1: CCW

M9

-

M9

0: CW, 1: CCW

M8 M8

0: CW, 1: CCW

CL4

1: OFF, 0: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON

CL3

0: OFF, 1: ON

M14 M12 M5

0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON PH0=0,PH1=0:2Phase excitation PH0=1,PH1=0:1-2Phase excitation

12 11 10 9 8

P032

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Remarks

-

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Unit G1 (SORTER>P028 to P037)

8-101

8 Address

bit

P033

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

P034

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name Paper Delivery Start Response Paper Delivery Start C-fold Stopper Adjustment Motor Current Upper Stopper Motor Current C-fold Stopper Adjustment Motor Current Lead Edge Holding Guide Motor Current External I/O Data Bus 6 External I/O Data Bus5 External I/O Data Bus4 External I/O Data Bus3 External I/O Data Bus2 External I/O Data Bus1 -

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Unit G1 (SORTER>P028 to P037)

Remarks

M7

0: ON, 1: OFF 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: PWM, 1: PWM

M8 M9

0: PWM, 1: PWM 0: PWM, 1: PWM

M10

0: PWM, 1: PWM

-

-

8

8-102

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P035

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

Fold Unit Pull-out Sensor Fold Tray Paper Sensor Fold Tray Full Sensor Fold Tray HP Sensor Delivery 1 Sensor 2nd Fold Push-on Stopper HP Sensor C-fold Stopper HP Sensor Lead Edge Holding Guide HP Sensor Power Supply Fan Lock Detection Signal 3 Delivery 2 Sensor Inlet Sensor Front Upper Cover Sensor Brushless Motor Lock Detection Signal DSW8 DSW7 DSW6 DSW5 DSW4 DSW3 DSW2 DSW1

S29 S27 S26 S28 S22 S23

0: Close, 1: Open 1: Paper 1: Paper 0: HP outside, 1: HP input 1: Paper 0: HP outside, 1: HP input

S24 S25

0: HP outside, 1: HP input 0: HP outside, 1: HP input

1 0 P036

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Remarks

F1

0: Normal, 1: Lock

S21 S20 -

1: Paper 1: Paper 0: Close, 1: Open 0: Close, 1: Open

-

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Unit G1 (SORTER>P028 to P037)

0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF

8-102

8 Address

bit

P037

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name Wire-speed Sorting Identification Signal PCB Identification Signal2 PCB Identification Signal1 PSW2 PSW1 Fan 2 Enable PCB LED2 PCB LED1

Symbol -

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter H1 (SORTER>P038 to P047)

■■Inserter H1 (SORTER>P038 to P047)

Remarks 0: Low speed machine 1: High speed machine BIT2=1,BIT3=0:insetion 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF T-8-25

8

8-103

Address

bit

P038

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

P039

Name Name Paper Delivery Start Response Paper Delivery Start Request Inlet Motor CLK Lower Tray Document Set LED Exit Motor1CLK Upper Tray Document Set LED Exit Motor Phase Switching 2 Exit Motor Phase Switching 1 Exit Motor 2 CLK -

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter H1 (SORTER>P038 to P047)

Symbol M5 S10 S13 -

Remarks Remarks 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF P31=0,P32=0:2Phase P31=1,P32=0:1-2Phase P31=1,P32=0:1-2 phase -

8-103

8 Address

bit

P040

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

P041

0

Name Reserve Solenoid Upper Tray Registration Sensor Lower Tray Registration Sensor EEPROM/IO DO Signal EEPROM CS Signal EEPROM/DA/IO/ DI Signal EEPROM/DA/IO/ CLK Signal PMmotoroutput Enable Upper Tray Registration Clutch Lower Tray Registration Clutch Reserve Unit Motor Rotation Direction Reserve Unit Motor Phase Switching1

Symbol SOL1 S3 S7 CL1 CL2 M6 M6

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter H1 (SORTER>P038 to P047)

Remarks 0: PWM, 1: PWM 0: No paper, 1: Paper 0: No paper, 1: Paper 0: Data bit 0, 1: Data bit 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: CCW, 1: CW 0: 2Phase, 1: 1-2phase

8

Address

bit

P042

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

P043

0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name PM Motor Chip Enable Exit Motor 1 Enable Brushless Motor Enable HB Motor Enable Inlet Motor Phase Switching 2 Inlet Motor Phase Switching 1 Paper Delivery Start Response Paper Delivery Start Drive Switching Motor Rotation Direction Drive Switching Motor CLK Lower Tray Lift Motor Rotation Direction Lower Tray Lift Motor CLK Upper Tray Lift Motor Rotation Direction Upper Tray Lift Motor CLK Pickup Motor Rotation Direction Upper Tray Lift Motor Current Lower Tray Lift Motor Current Drive Switching Motor Current External I/O Data Bus 6 Reserve Unit Motor CLK External I/O Data Bus 5 External I/O Data Bus 4 External I/O Data Bus 3 External I/O Data Bus 2 External I/O Data Bus 1 Pickup Motor CLK

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter H1 (SORTER>P038 to P047)

8-104 Symbol

Remarks

M5 M5 M4

0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON PH0=0,PH1=0: 2Phase PH0=1,PH1=0: 1-2Phase 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: CW, 1: CCW

M4 M3

0: CW, 1: CCW

M3 M2

0: CW, 1: CCW

M2 M1 M2 M3 M4 M6 M1

0: CCW, 1: CW 0: PWM, 1: PWM 0: PWM, 1: PWM 0: PWM, 1: PWM -

8-104

8 Address

bit

Symbol

Remarks

Address

bit

P044

15

Lower Tray Pick Sensor

S6

P046

14 13 12 11 10

Lower Tray Last Paper Sensor 2 Lower Tray Last Paper Sensor 1 Lower Tray Empty Sensor Upper Tray Lower Limit Sensor Upper Tray Pick Sensor

S15 S14 S12 S4 S2

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Upper Tray Last Paper Sensor1 Upper Tray Empty Sensor Reserve Timing Sensor Reserve Sensor Reserve Inlet Sensor Intermediate Feed Sensor Drive Switching Sensor Unit Open/Close Sensor Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor Power Supply Lock Detect Signal 3 Delivery 2 Sensor Inlet Sensor Front Upper Cover Sensor Brushless Motor Lock Detection Signal

S11 S9 S16 S17 S18 S8 S1 S19 SW2 S5 F1 S21 S20 SW1 -

0: Outside pick position, 1: Pick position 0: No paper, 1: Paper 0: Paper, 1: No paper 0: No paper, 1: Paper 0:outside lower limit/1:lower limit 0: Outside pick position, 1: Pick position 0: Paper, 1: No paper 0: Paper, 1: No paper 0: No paper, 1: Paper 0: No paper, 1: Paper 0: No paper, 1: Paper 0: No paper, 1: Paper 0: Outside HP, 1: Inside HP 0: Close, 1: Open 0: Close, 1: Open 0: Outside lower limit 1: Lower limit 0: Normal, 1: Lock 0: No paper, 1: Paper 0: No paper, 1: Paper 0: Close, 1: Open 0: Normal, 1: lock

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4

P045

Name

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter H1 (SORTER>P038 to P047)

8

P047

3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Name DSW8 DSW7 DSW6 DSW5 DSW4 DSW3 DSW2 DSW1 Wire-speed Sorting Identification Signal PCB Identification Signal 2 PCB Identification Signal 1 PSW2 PSW1 F an 2 Enable PCB LED2 PCB LED1

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter H1 (SORTER>P038 to P047)

8-105 Symbol F1 -

Remarks 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: Low speed machine, 1: High speed machine BIT2=1,BIT3=0: Insetion 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF T-8-26

8-105

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)

■■Puncher Unit BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1 (SORTER>P058 to P059) Address

bit

P058

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

P059

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name Delivery Sensor Path Switching Motor HP Sensor Integration Unit Reverse Path 3 Sensor Integration Unit Reverse Path 2 Sensor Integration Unit Reverse Path 1 Sensor Integration Unit Bypass 1 Sensor P-puncher Bypass 8 Sensor P-puncher Bypass 7 Sensor P-puncher Bypass 6 Sensor P-puncher Bypass 5 Sensor P-puncher Bypass 4 Sensor P-puncher Bypass 3 Sensor P-puncher Bypass 2 Sensor P-puncher Bypass 1 Sensor Puncher Die Detect HP Sensor Puncher Die Sensor 7 Puncher Die Sensor 6 Puncher Die Sensor 5 Puncher Die Sensor 4 Puncher Die Sensor 3 Puncher Die Sensor 2 Puncher Die Sensor 1 -

Symbol

■■Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to

Remarks

PS5 PS7 RS4

1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper

RS3

1: Paper

RS2

1: Paper

RS1 S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S16 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 -

1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: Paper 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON -

8-106

P040) Addres

bit

Description

Symbol

P001

8-15 7 6 5

Not used Punch Serial Communication Escape Feed Motor Clock Signal Folding Serial Communication (RxD) Folding Serial Communication (TxD) Front Cover Sensor Saddle Unit Connection Detection

M112 -

4 3 2 1

P002

P003

Punch Serial Communication (RxD) 0 Punch Serial Communication (TxD) 8-15 Not used 7 Punch Serial Communication 6 Not used 5 Not used 4 Not used 3 Inserter Communication (IN) 2 Tray Motor Clock Signal 1 Not used 0 Swing Motor Clock Signal 8-15 Not used 7 Punch Feed Motor Phase B* Signal 6 Punch Feed Motor Phase A* Signal 5 Punch Feed Motor Phase B Signal 4 Punch Feed Motor Phase A Signal 3 Feed Motor Phase B* Signal 2 Feed Motor Phase A* Signal 1 Feed Motor Phase B Signal 0 Feed Motor Phase A Signal

-

Remarks 0: OFF, 1: ON -

PI102 0: Close, 1: Open 0: Saddle present, 1: Saddle absent M106 M63 M63 M63 M63 M101 M101 M101 M101

0: OFF, 1: ON -

T-8-27

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)

8-106

8 Addres P004

P005

P006

P007

bit

Description

8-15 Not used 7 PSW2 On The Finisher Controller PCB 6 PSW1 On The Finisher Controller PCB 5 Stack Ejection Motor Clock Signal 4 Tray 2 Shift Motor FG Signal 3 Tray 1 Shift Motor FG Signal 2 Feed Motor Clock Signal 1 Punch Feed Motor Clock Signal 0 Punch Paper Trailing Edge Detection 8-15 Not used 7 Not used 6 Not used 5 Tray Motor Clock Signal 4 Saddle Serial Signal 3 Saddle Serial Signal 2 PWM Output For Solenoid 1 For R&D 0 For R&D 8-15 Not used 7 Not used 6 Not used 5 Expansion I/O Read Signal 4 For R&D 3 Expansion I/O Write Signal 2 For R&D 1 For R&D 0 PSW3 On The Finisher Controller PCB 8-15 Not used 7 Not used 6 Not useN 5 Not used 4 Not used 3 Tray 1 Shift Motor Lock Detection 2 Chip Select 2 1 Chip Select 1 0 Front Cover Sensor

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)

Remarks

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

M102 M108 M107 M101 M63 M107 PI102

0: Not Detected, 1: Detected 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: OFF, 1: Lock Detectioon 0: Close, 1: Open

8

Addres

bit

P008

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6

P009

P010

Description

Not used Tray 2 Shift Area Sensor 1 Tray 2 Shift Area Sensor 2 Tray 2 Shift Area Sensor 3 Inlet Sensor Swing Guide HP Sensor Download Mode Not used Not used Not used Tray 1 Paper Sensor Host Machine Software IPC Communication (RxD) 5 Host Machine Software IPC Communication (TxD) 4 Tray 1 Shift Area Sensor 1 3 Tray 1 Shift Area Sensor 2 2 Tray 1 Shift Area Sensor 3 1 Tray 2 Shift Motor Lock Detection 0 Tray 2 Paper Sensor 8-15 Not used 7 DIPSW1-8 On The Finisher Controller PCB 6 DIPSW1-7 On The Finisher Controller PCB 5 DIPSW1-6 On The Finisher Controller PCB 4 DIPSW1-5 On The Finisher Controller PCB 3 DIPSW1-4 On The Finisher Controller PCB 2 DIPSW1-3 On The Finisher Controller PCB 1 DIPSW1-2 On The Finisher Controller PCB 0 DIPSW1-1 On The Finisher Controller PCB

8-107

Symbol

Remarks

PI103 PI105 PI111 -

0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent 0: Besides HP, 1: HP 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent -

M108 PI112 -

0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: OFF, 1: Lock detectioon 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent 0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)

8-107

8 Addres

bit

P011

8-15 7 6 5 4 3

P012

P013

Description

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)

Remarks

Not used EEPROM Clock Signal EEPROM Enable Signal 0: OFF, 1: ON EEPROM Output Signal 0: OFF, 1: ON Not used M110 Gear Change Motor Electric Current Change I1 2 Gear Change Motor Electric M110 Current Change I0 1 Gear Change Motor Phase B M110 Signal 0 Gear Change Motor Phase A M110 Signal 8-15 Not used 7 Swing Height Sensor PI123 0: Close, 1: Open 6 Gear Change Home Position PI117 0: HP, 1: Besides HP Sensor 5 Not used 4 Rear End Assist HP Sensor PI109 0: HP, 1: Besides HP 3 Processing Tray Sensor PI108 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent 2 Rear Aligning Plate HP Sensor PI107 0: HP, 1: Besides HP 1 Front Aligning Plate HP Sensor PI106 0: HP/1: Besides HP 0 EEPROM Input Signal 8-15 Not used 7 Tray 2 Shift Motor ON Signal M108 0: OFF, 1: ON 6 Tray 2 Shift Motor CW/CCW Signal M108 0: CW, 1: CCW 5 Feed Roller Separation Solenoid SL101 0: OFF, 1: ON 4 Punch Feed Motor Standby M63 0: Standby, 1: Drive 3 Punch Feed Motor Electric Current M63 Change I0 2 Punch Feed Motor Electric Current M63 Change I1 1 Feed Motor Electric Current M101 Change I0 0 Feed Motor Electric Current M101 Change I1

8

Addres P014

P015

P016

bit

Description

8-15 Not used 7 Tray 1 Shift Motor Enable Signal 6 Tray 1 Shift Motor CW/CCW Signal 5 Tray 1 Shift Motor ON Signal 4 Rear End Assist Motor Enable Signal 3 Rear End Assist Motor eElectric Current Change I1 2 Rear End Assist Motor Electric Current Change I0 1 Rear End Assist Motor Directiojn Change 0 Inserter Serial Communication (OUT) 8-15 Not used 7 Staple Motor Direction Change CW Signal 6 Staple Motor Direction Change CCW Signal 5 Stapler Shift Motor Enable Signal 4 Stack Ejection Motor Electric Current Change I0 3 Stack Ejection Motor Electric Current Change I1 2 Stack Ejection Motor Torque Terminal 1 Swing Motor Electric Current Change 0 Swing Motor Direction Change 8-15 Not used 7 Not used 6 Rear Aligning Plate Motor Direction Change 5 Rear Aligning Plate Motor Clock Signal 4 Rear Aligning Plate Motor Electric Current Change I0 3 Not used 2 Front Aligning Plate Motor Electric Current Change I0 1 Front Aligning Plate Motor Direction Change 0 Front Aligning Plate Motor Clock Signal

Symbol

8-108 Remarks

M107 M107

0: Standby, 1: Drive 0: CW, 1: CCW

M107 M109

0: OFF, 1: ON 0: Standby, 1: drive

M109

-

M109

-

M109

0: CW, 1: CCW

-

0: OFF, 1: ON

M41

-

M41

-

M105 M102

0: Drive, 1: Standby -

M102

-

M102

0: 71%, 1: 100%

M106

0: High, 1: Low

M106 M104

0: CW, 1: CCW 0: CW, 1: CCW

M104

-

M104

0: High, 1: Low

M103

0: High, 1: Low

M103

0: CW, 1: CCW

M103

-

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)

8-108

8 Addres

bit

P017

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2

P018

P019

P020

1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2

Description Not used Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 1 Tray 1 Paper Surface Sensor Shutter HP Sensor Stapler Shift HP Sensor Stapler Alignment Interference Sensor Stapler Needle Presence

Stapler READY Stapler HP Detection Not used Stapler Shift Motor Buffer Roller Separation Solenoid Shutter Clutch Stack Ejection Lower Roller Clutch Buffer Rear End Holding Solenoid 1st Delivery Roller Separation Solenoid 1 Stapler Shift Motor Electric Current Change I1 0 Stapler Shift Motor Electric Current Change I0 8-15 Not used 7 Inserter Unit Connection Detection 6 fFeed Path Sensor 5 Swing Guide Switch Signal 4 Staple Safety Switch Signal 3 Not used 2 Not used 1 Not used 0 Stapler Shift Motor Lock Signal 8-15 Not used 7 Not used 6 Not used 5 Not used 4 Not used 3 Escape Feed Motor Phase B* Signal 2 Escape Feed Motor Phase A* Signal 1 Escape Feed Motor Phase B Signal 0 Escape Feed Motor Phase A Signal

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)

Symbol

Remarks

Addres

bit

PI115 PI114 PI113 PI110 PI116

0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent 0: HP, 1: Besides HP 0: HP, 1: Besides HP 0: Interference, 1: Not interference

P021

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5

M105 SL102 CL101 CL102 SL104 SL103

0: Needle present, 1: Needle absent 0: Standby, 1: Drive 0: Besides HP, 1:HP 0: CCW, 1: CW 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON

M105

-

M105

-

PI104 MS102 MS104 M105 M112

P023

0: Connected, 1: Unconnected 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON -

M112

-

M112

-

M112

-

8

P022

P024

Description

Symbol

8-109 Remarks

Not used Puncher Unit Connection Detection 0: Connected, 1: Unconnected Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 2 PI120 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent Not used Not used Not used Escape Tray Full Sensor PI119 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent Escape Door Sensor PI121 0: Close, 1: Open Escape Tray Path Sensor PI118 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used For Host Machine Download 0: OFF, 1: ON Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Motor Enable Signal 0: Standby, 1: Drive Punch Serial Communication 0: OFF, 1: ON (OUT) 4 Not used 3 Escape Solenoid SL105 0: OFF, 1: ON 2 Escape Feed Motor Standby Signal M112 0: Standby, 1: Drive 1 Escape Feed Motor Electric M112 Current Change I1 0 Escape Feed Motor Electric M112 Current Change I0 8-15 Not used 7 Not used 6 Not used 5 Not used 4 Not used 3 Stack Ejection Motor Phase B* M102 Signal 2 Stack Ejection Motor Phase A* M102 Signal 1 Stack Ejection Motor Phase B M102 Signal 0 Stack Ejection Motor Phase A M102 Signal

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)

8-109

8 Addres

bit

P025

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

P026

P027

P028

Description Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used For Host Machine Download Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

Symbol -

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)

Remarks 0: OFF, 1: ON -

8

Addres

bit

P029

8-15 7 6 5 4 3

P030

P031

P032

Description

Not used Alignment Plate HP Sensor Not used Not used Not used Saddle Staple Unit Connection Detection 2 Vertical Path Paper Sensor 1 Not used 0 Not used 8-15 Not used 7 Not used 6 Feed Motor Clock Signal 5 Paper Folding Motor PWM Signal 4 Solenoid PWM Signal 3 Stitcher HP Sensor (Rear) 2 Stitcher HP Sensor (Front) 1 Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor 0 Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor 8-15 Not used 7 Guide Motor Phase B Signal 6 Guide Motor Phase A Signal 5 Alignment Motor B Signal 4 Alignment Motor A Signal 3 Not used 2 Paper Positioning Plate Motor Phase B Signal 1 Paper Positioning Plate Motor Phase A Signal 0 Feed Motor CW/CCW Signal 8-15 Not used 7 Saddle Rear Staple Electric Current Detection (AD) 6 Saddle Front Staple Electric Current Detection (AD) 5 Not used 4 Not used 3 Feed Motor Clock Signal 2 Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor 1 Paper pushing Plate Motor Clock Sensor 0 Not used

Symbol PI5 PI17 M1 M2 SW5 SW7 PI15 PI14 M3 M3 M5 M5 M4

8-110 Remarks

0: Besides HP, 1: HP 0: Connected, 1: Unconnected 0: Paper absent, 1: Paper present 0: bBesides HP, 1: HP 0: Besides HP, 1: HP 0: Top position, 1: Besides top position 0: Besides HP, 1: HP -

M4

-

M1 -

0: CCW, 1: CW 0: OFF, 1: ON

-

0: OFF, 1: ON

M1 PI4 PI1

-

-

-

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)

8-110

8 Addres

bit

P033

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6

P034

P035

P036

Description

Not used Not used Not used No.2 Paper Deflecting Solenoid No.1 Paper Deflecting Solenoid Saddle Inlet Solenoid Paper Folding HP Sensor For R&D For R&D Not used Not used PSW1 On The Saddle Controller PCB 5 Not used 4 Power ON Signal 3 Guide Motor I0 2 Feed Motor Enable 1 Feed Motor Electric Current Change I1 0 Feed Motor Electric Current Change I0 8-15 Not used 7 Not used 6 Not used 5 Not used 4 Not used 3 Stitcher Motor (Rear) CW Signal 2 Not used 1 Staple Sensor (Rear) 0 24V Detection 8-15 Not used 7 Not used 6 Feed plate Contact Solenoid 5 Paper Folding Motor RV 4 Paper Positioning Plate Motor I0 3 Alignment Motor I0 2 Paper Positioning Plate Paper Sensor 1 Paper Positioning Plate HP Sensor 0 Tray Paper Sensor

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)

Remarks

SL2 SL1 SL5 PI21 -

0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON

M3 M1 M1

0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON -

M1

-

M6 SW4 SL4 M2 M4 M5 PI8

0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent

PI7 PI6

0: HP, 1: Besides HP 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent

8

Addres P037

P038

P039

bit

Description

8-15 Not used 7 Paper Pushing Plate Motor EN Signal 6 Paper Pushing Plate Motor FWD Signal 5 Paper Pushing Plate Motor RV Signal 4 Paper Folding Motor FWD Signal 3 Not used 2 For R&D 1 For R&D 0 For R&D 8-15 Not used 7 Stitcher Motor (Rear) CCW Signal 6 Saddle Software IPC Communication 5 Saddle Software IPC Communication 4 Stitcher Motor (Front) CW Signal 3 Stitcher Motor (Front) CCW Signal 2 Staple Sensor (Front) 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Not used Nnot used Not used SW504-8 On The Saddle Controller PCB SW504-7 On The Saddle Controller PCB SW504-6 On The Saddle Controller PCB SW504-5 On The Saddle Controller PCB SW504-4 On The Saddle Controller PCB SW504-3 On The Saddle Controller PCB SW504-2 On The Saddle Controller PCB SW504-1 On The Saddle Controller PCB

Symbol

8-111 Remarks

M8

0: ON, 1: OFF

M8

0: OFF, 1: ON

M8

0: OFF, 1: ON

M2 M6 -

0: OFF, 1: ON 0: ON, 1: OFF -

M7 M7 SW6

-

-

0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: Needle absent, 1: Needle present 0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)

8-111

8 Addres

bit

P040

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Description Not used Saddle Inlet Sensor Guide HP Sensor Crescent Roller Phase Sensor Delivery Sensor Inlet Cover Sensor Saddle Trailing Edge Sensor 3 Saddle Trailing Edge Sensor 2 Saddle Trailing Edge Sensor 1

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > External Punch A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046)

Symbol

Remarks

PI22 PI13 PI12 PI11 PI9 -

0: Paper absent, 1: Paper present 0: Besides HP, 1: HP 0: Besides HP, 1: HP 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent 0: Colse, 1: Open 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON

■■External Punch A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046) Address

bit

P041

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2

T-8-28

P042

P043

P044

8

8-112

Name Not used Punch Home Position Sensor Punch Motor Clock Sensor Trailing Edge Detection Snsor

Punch OUT Signal Not used SW601-3 On The Punch Controller PCB 1 SW601-2 On The Punch Controller PCB 0 SW601-1 On The Punch Controller PCB 8-15 Not used 7 Not used 6 Not used 5 Not used 4 Not used 3 Not used 2 Punch TxD 1 Punch RxD 0 Punch In 8-15 Not used 7 Punch Motor CW Signal 6 Punch Motor CCW Signal 5 Horizontal Registration Motor 4 Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor 3 EEPROM CS 2 EEPROM CLK 1 EEPROM DataOut 0 EEPROM DataIn 8-15 Not used 7 Not used 6 Sensor PWM Signal 5 Horizontal Registration Motor Electric Current Setting 4 Not used 3 Not used 2 Not used 1 Not used 0 Not used

Symbol

Remarks

PI63 PI62 LED5, PT5 -

0: ON, 1: OFF 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent 0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

M61 M61 M62 PI61

0: ON, 1: OFF 0: ON, 1: OFF 0: Desides standby, 1: Drive 0: Besides HP, 1: HP

M62

0: ON, 1: OFF 0: Drive electric current 1: Maintenance electric current -

-

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > External Punch A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046)

8-112

8 Address P045

P046

bit

Name

8-15 Not used 7 SW602 On The Punch Controller PCB 6 SW603 On The Punch Controller PCB 5 for R&D 4 Not used 3 LED602 On The Punch Controller PCB 2 Horizontal Registration Motor Phase B Signal 1 Horizontal Registration Motor Phase A Signal 0 LED601 On The Punch Controller PCB 8-15 Not used 7 Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 On The LED PCB 6 Scrap Full Detector PCB 5 4 3 2 1 0

Upper Door Switch Front Door Switch Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 On The LED PCB Horizontal Registration Sensor 3 On The LED PCB Horizontal Registration Sensor 4 On The LED PCB Trailing Edge Sensor On The LED PCB

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter J1 / Paper Folding Inserter Unit G1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: ON, 1: OFF

-

0: OFF, 1: ON

M62 M62 LED1, PT1 LED2, PT2 LED3, PT3 LED4, PT4 LED5, PT5

■■Inserter J1 / Paper Folding Inserter Unit G1 (SORTER>P047 to

Remarks

-

P061)

0: Phase B* ON 1: Phase B ON 0: Phase A* ON 1: Phase A ON 0: OFF, 1: ON

Address

bit

P047

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7

P048

0: Paper present 1: Paper absent 0: Paper present 1: Paper absent 0: Open, 1: Close 0: Open, 1: Close 0: Paper present 1: Paper absent 0: Paper present 1: Paper absent 0: Paper present 1: Paper absent 0: Paper present 1: Paper absent

P049

T-8-29

P050

8

8-113

Name

Not used Reserve Unit Motor *B Reserve Unit Motor *A Reserve Unit Motor Reserve Unit Motor A Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) *B Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) *A Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) B Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) A Not used DA Converter Cssignal C Fold Flapper Solenoid Fold Transport Motor Clock Signal Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) *B Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) *A Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) B Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) A Not used Front upper Cover Open/Close Sensor 6 Top Cover Open/Close Sensor 5 Slowdown Timing Sensor 4 PCB Identification Signal 2 3 PCB Identification Signal 1 2 Interface Fin Data Enable Signal 1 0 8-15 Not used 7 Through Pass /IN_Motor Driver Current 6 Paper Feed Motor Driver Current 5 C Fold Paper Full Sensor 4 Upper Stopper Path Sensor AD 3 Fold Position Sensor AD 2 Release Timing Sensor AD 1 Slowdown Timing Sensor AD 0 Tray Paper Width Senor AD

Symbol

Remarks

M3 M3 M3 M3 M9 M9 M9 M9 SL5 M5 M4 M4 M4 M4 SW1

1: Active 1: Active 1: Active 1: Active 1: Active 1: Active 1: Active 1: Active 1: Absorption 1: Active 1: Active 1: Active 1: Active 1: Active

S2 S24 -

0: Open 1: Paper on PF3098 1: H 2: L PF4154 1: L 2: L Analog input

S20 S22 S23 S21 S24 S9

Analog input 0: Full Analog input Analog input Analog input Analog input Analog input

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter J1 / Paper Folding Inserter Unit G1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)

8-113

8 Address

bit

P051

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6

P052

P053

P054

Name

Not used Not used Folding Unit Sensor By Borah Motor Driver_Standby Signal 5 Reverse Solenoid_PWM 4 Straight Path Flapper Solenoid PWM 3 Skew Sorrection Pressure Solenoid PWM 2 Skew Correction Release Solenoid PWM 1 PCB LED2 0 PCB LED1 8-15 Not used 7 6 DSW5 5 DSW6 4 DSW7 3 Upper Stopper Motor B PHASE 2 Upper Stopper Motor A PHASE 1 Upper Stopper Motor B ENABLE 0 Upper Stopper Motor A ENABLE 8-15 Not used 7 Tray Lift Motor Driver Current 6 Reverse Unit Motor Driver Current 5 Inserter Open/Close Sensor 4 Tray Paper Sensor 2 3 Tray Paper Sensor 1 2 Paper Feed Sensor 1 Tray Lower Limit Sensor 0 Paper Set Sensor

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter J1 / Paper Folding Inserter Unit G1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)

Remarks

S14 -

1: No unit 1: Movement is possible L:stop

SL1 SL2

PWM PWM

SL4

PWM

SL3

PWM

M7 M7 M7 M7 S1 S8 S7 S3 S5 S6

0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: OUT*X, 1: OUTX 0: OUT*X, 1: OUTX 0: OFF, 1: Output 0: OFF, 1: Output Analog output Analog output 1: Open 0: Paper on 0: Paper on 0: ON 1: Lower limit 1: Empty

8

Address

bit

P055

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5

P056

P057

P058

Name

Not used C Fold Tray Motor B PHASE C Fold Tray Motor A PHASE C Fold Tray Motor B ENABL C Fold Tray Motor A ENABL C Fold Stopper Motor B PHASE C Fold Stopper Motor A PHASE C Fold Stopper Motor B ENABL C Fold Stopper Motor A ENABL Not used Fold Position Adjustment Motor *B Fold Position Adjustment Motor *A Fold Position Adjustment Motor B Fold Position Adjustment Motor A Reverse Sensor C Fold Stopper Sensor C Fold Tray Motor Sensor C Fold Tray Empty Sensor Not used C Fold Stopper Solenoid C Fold Guide Solenoid EEPROM/DA Converter CLK Signal 4 EEPROM CS Signal 3 Tray Lift Motor B PHASE 2 Tray Lift Motor A PHASE 1 Tray Lift Motor B ENABLE 0 Tray Lift Motor A ENABLE 8-15 Not used 7 EEPROM/DA Converter Disignal 6 Fold Transport Motor ON/OFF Signal 5 4 Fold Adjustment Regi Clutch BACK 3 Fold Adjustment Regi Clutch FEED 2 Paper Set LED 1 0 Interface Ins Data Enable Signal

Symbol

Remarks

M6 M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10 M10 S10 S17 S19 S18 SL7 SL6 -

0: OUT *X, 1: OUT X 0: OUT *X, 1: OUT X 0: OFF, 1: Output 0: OFF, 1: Output 1: Active 1: Active 1: Active 1: Active 1: Paper on 1: Home 1: Home 0: Paper on 1: Absorption 1: Absorption -

M2 M2 M2 M2 M5

0: OUT *X, 1: OUT X 0: OUT *X, 1: OUT X 0: OFF, 1: Output 0: OFF, 1: Output 1: Absorption

-

8-114

-

1: ON 1: Absorption 1: Absorption 1: ON -

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter J1 / Paper Folding Inserter Unit G1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)

8-114

8 Address

bit

P059

8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

P060

P061

Name Not used Fold Transport Motor Lock Signal Delivery Sensor Upper Stopper Sensor Upper Stopper Path Sensor Paper Feed Motor *B Paper Feed Motor *A Paper Feed Motor B Paper Feed Motor A Not used DSW8 DSW4 DSW3 DSW2 Reverse Entrance Sensor DSW1 Reverse Timing Sensor Paper Registration Sensor Not used PSW 2 PSW 1 Delivery Sensor Fold Position Sensor Release Timing Sensor

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter J1 / Paper Folding Inserter Unit G1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)

Symbol S25 S16 S22 M1 M1 M1 M1 S12 S11 S4 S25 S23 S21

8-115

Remarks 1: Lock 1: Paper on 1: Paper on 1: Paper on 1: Active 1: Active 1: Active 1: Active 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: Paper on 0: ON 1: Paper on 0: Paper on 0: ON 0: ON 1: Paper on 1: Paper on 1: Paper on T-8-30

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter J1 / Paper Folding Inserter Unit G1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)

8-115

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY

ADJUST

8-116 COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY

ADJ-Y-DF Lv.1 Details

■■ADJ-XY COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY ADJ-X Lv.1 Details

Adj of img pstn in book mode: vert scan To adjust the image reading start position (image lead edge position) in vertical scanning direction. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the smaller value. When out of original area is copied, set the larger value. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the trailing edge side by 0.1mm. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 ADJ-Y Adj of img pstn in book mode: horz scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the smaller value. When out of original area is copied, set the larger value. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the rear side by 0.1mm. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0

8

Adj img pstn in DADF mode:horz scan[Frt] To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at DADF reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the rear side by 0.1mm. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 STRD-POS Adj read pstn in DADF mode: front side Lv.1 Details To adjust the reading position at DADF reading (front side). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit mm Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS ADJ-X-MG Adj img ratio in book mod:vert scan[frt] Lv.1 Details To make a fine adjustment of image magnification in vertical scanning direction at copyboard reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the image magnification changes by 0.01%. +: Enlarge -: Reduce Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit % Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY

8-116

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY ADJY-DF2 Lv.1 Details

Adj img pstn in DADF mode:horz scan[bck] To adjust the image position of back side in horizontal scanning direction at simultaneous duplex reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the rear side by 0.1mm. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 ADJ-Y-MG Fine adj img ratio:book, horz scan Lv.1 Details To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction at copyboard reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the backup value. As the value is incremented by 1, the image magnification ratio changes by 0.1%. +: Enlarge -: Reduce Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Default value 0 T-8-31

8

8-117

■■CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD W-PLT-X Lv.1 Details

White level data(X) entry of white plate When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass. Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range 1 to 9999 Default value 8271 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z, BW-TGT W-PLT-Y White level data(Y) entry of white plate Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass. Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 1 to 9999 Default value 8735 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Z, BW-TGT W-PLT-Z White level data(Z) entry of white plate Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass. Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 1 to 9999 Default value 9418 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, BW-TGT

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-117

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD SH-TRGT Lv.1 Details Use case

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Shading target value (B&W) To set the B&W shading target value in copyboard reading mode. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Scanner Unit Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 1 to 2047 Default value 1126 100-RG Img Sensr RG color displace crrct VL:Frt Lv.1 Details To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper front). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range -256 to 256 Unit line Default value 0 100-GB Img Sensr GB color displace crrct VL:Frt Lv.1 Details To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper front). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range -256 to 256 Unit line Default value 0

8

8-118

DFTAR-R Lv.1 Details

Shading target value (R) [Front side] When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1to 2047 Default value 1159 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 DFTAR-G Shading target value (G) [Front side] Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1to 2047 Default value 1189 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 DFTAR-B Shading target value (B) [Front side] Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1to 2047 Default value 1209 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-118

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-119

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF2-M1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-M2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-M3 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-M4 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-M5 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 2 setting: horz scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 3 setting: horz scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 4 setting: horz scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 5 setting: horz scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

8

MTF2-M6 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-M7 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-M8 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-M9 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-S1 Lv.1 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

MTF value 6 setting: horz scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 7 setting: horz scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 8 setting: horz scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 9 setting: horz scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 1 setting: vert scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

8-119

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-120

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF2-S2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-S3 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-S4 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-S5 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-S6 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

MTF value 2 setting: vert scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 3 setting: vert scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 4 setting: vert scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 5 setting: vert scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 6 setting: vert scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

8

MTF2-S7 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-S8 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-S9 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode 100DF2GB Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

MTF value 7 setting: vert scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 8 setting: vert scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 9 setting: vert scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC Img Sns GB clr displc crrct VL:bck,DRead To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper back). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -256 to 256 line 0

8-120

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-121

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 100DF2RG Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value DFCH2R2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value DFCH2R10 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value DFCH2B2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Img Sns RG clr displc crrct VL:bck,DRead To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper back). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -256 to 256 line 0 Complex chart No.2 data (R) [Front side] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Red data (for paper front) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000 Complex chart No.10 data(R) [Front side] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Red data (for paper front) of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0 Complex chart No.2 data (B) [Front side] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Blue data (for paper front) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000

DFCH2B10 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value DFCH2G2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value DFCH2G10 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value CCD-CHNG Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value Related service mode

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Complex chart No.10 data(B) [Front side] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Blue data (for paper front) of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0 Complex chart No.2 data (G) [Front side] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Green data (for paper front) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000 Complex chart No.10 data(G) [Front side] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Green data (for paper front) of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0 Scanner Unit(ppr frt) rplce flag setting To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at the replacement of Scanner Unit (paper front). When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper front), enter 1. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. - When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper front) - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Data at factory shipment is used. 1: Data at factory shipment is not used. (Scanner Unit (paper front) is already replaced.) 0 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTFMCL, MTFSCL, MTFMBW, MTFSBW

8-121

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-122

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF-M1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-M2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-M3 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-M4 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-M5 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 2 setting: horz scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 3 setting: horz scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 4 setting: horz scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 5 setting: horz scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

8

MTF-M6 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-M7 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-M8 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-M9 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-S1 Lv.1 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

MTF value 6 setting: horz scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 7 setting: horz scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 8 setting: horz scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 9 setting: horz scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 1 setting: vert scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

8-122

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-123

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF-S2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-S3 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-S4 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-S5 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-S6 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

MTF value 2 setting: vert scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 3 setting: vert scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 4 setting: vert scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 5 setting: vert scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 6 setting: vert scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

8

MTF-S7 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-S8 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-S9 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode DFCH-R2 Lv.1 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

MTF value 7 setting: vert scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 8 setting: vert scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 9 setting: vert scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 80 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC Complex chart No.2 data (R) [Back side] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Red data (for paper back) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR

8-123

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-124

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFCH-R10 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Complex chart No.10 data (R) [Back side] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Red data (for paper back) of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2550 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR DFCH-B2 Complex chart No.2 data (B) [Back side] Lv.1 Details To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Blue data (for paper back) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1 to 2550 Default value 2000 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR DFCH-B10 Complex chart No.10 data (B) [Back side] Lv.1 Details To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Blue data (for paper back) of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2550 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR

DFCH-G2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

DFCH-G10 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

MTF2-M10 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-M11 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Complex chart No.2 data (G) [Back side] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Green data (for paper back) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR Complex chart No.10 data (G) [Back side] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Green data (for paper back) of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR MTF value 10 setting: horz scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 11 setting: horz scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

8-124

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-125

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF2-M12 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-S10 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-S11 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF2-S12 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-M10 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

MTF value 12 setting: horz scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 10 setting: vert scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 11 setting: vert scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 12 setting: vert scan [Front] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 10 setting: horz scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

8

MTF-M11 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-M12 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-S10 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-S11 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF-S12 Lv.1 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

MTF value 11 setting: horz scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 12 setting: horz scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 10 setting: vert scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 11 setting: vert scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 12 setting: vert scan [Back] Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

8-125

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFCH2K2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value DFCH2K10 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value DFCH-K2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

DFCH-K10 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) [Front] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the B&W data (for paper front) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000 Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) [Front] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the B&W data (for paper front) of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0 Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) [Back] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the B&W data (for paper back) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10, DFCH-K10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) [Back] To derive the front/back side linearity, set the B&W data (for paper back) of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10, DFCH-K2 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR

8

8-126

DFTAR-BW Lv.1 Details

Shading target value (B&W) [Front side] When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 700 to 1400 Default value 1209 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4 DFTBK-G Shading target value (G) [Back side] Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper back), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper back) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 700 to 1400 Default value 1136 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 DFTBK-B Shading target value (B) [Back side] Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper back), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper back) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 700 to 1400 Default value 1126 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-126

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFTBK-R Lv.1 Details

Shading target value (R) [Back side] When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper back), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper back) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 700 to 1400 Default value 1156 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 CCD-CHG2 Scanner Unit(paper back) rplce flag set Lv.1 Details To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at the replacement of Scanner Unit (paper back). When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper back), enter 1. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case - When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper back) - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Data at factory shipment is used. 1: Data at factory shipment is not used. (Scanner Unit (paper back) is already replaced.) Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2MCL, MTF2SCL, MTF2MBW, MTF2SBW DFTBK-BW Shading target value (B&W) [Back side] Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper back), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper back) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 700 to 1400 Default value 1126 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4 T-8-32

8

8-127

■■IMG-REG COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG REG-H-Y Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value REG-H-C Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value REG-H-K Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value REG-HS-Y Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG

Adj Y color write start pstn: horz scan To adjust the write start position of Y-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel. When Y-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -128 to 127 0 Adj C-color write start pstn: horz scan To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel. When C-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -128 to 127 0 Adj Bk-color write start pstn: horz scan To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel. When Bk-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -128 to 127 0 Adj Y color write start pstn: horz scan To adjust the write start position of yellow color image in the horizontal scanning direction in smaller increments than 1 pixel. When Y-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -5 to 5 (At the processing speed of 280 mm/sec) -4 to 4 (At the processing speed of 321 mm/sec) 0

8-127

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG

COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG REG-HS-C Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value REG-V-Y Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value REG-V-C Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value REG-V-K Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG

Fine adj C write start pstn: horz scan To adjust the write start position of cyan color image in the horizontal scanning direction in smaller increments than 1 pixel. When C-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -5 to 5 (At the processing speed of 280 mm/sec) -4 to 4 (At the processing speed of 321 mm/sec) 0 Adj Y color write start pstn: vert scan To adjust the write start position of Y-color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel. When Y-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -128 to 127 0 Adj C-color write start pstn: vert scan To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel. When C-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -128 to 127 0 Adj Bk-color write start pstn: vert scan To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel. When Bk-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -128 to 127 0

8

8-128

REG-H-M Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value REG-V-M Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value REG-VS-Y Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value REG-VS-M Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG

Adj M-color write start pstn: horz scan To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel. When M-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -128 to 127 0 Adj M-color write start pstn: vert scan To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel. When M-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -128 to 127 0 Fine adj Y write start pstn: vert scan To adjust the write start position of yellow color image in the vertical scanning direction in the unit of 1/8 pixel. When magenta color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -7 to 7 pixel 0 Fine adj M write start pstn: vert scan To adjust the write start position of magenta color image in the vertical scanning direction in the unit of 1/8 pixel. When magenta color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -7 to 7 pixel 0

8-128

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG

COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG REG-VS-C Lv.1 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG

Fine adj C write start pstn: vert scan To adjust the write start position of cyan color image in the vertical scanning direction in the unit of 1/8 pixel. Use case When magenta color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -7 to 7 Unit pixel Default value 0 MAG-H-K Adj of Bk color magnification: horz scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the standard magnification of Bk color in horizontal scanning direction. Other colors are adjusted by auto registration. All correction values registered in the media list are proportionally changed. Use case When adjusting the standard magnification due to environmental change, etc. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit pixel Default value 0 REG-HS-M Fine adj M write start pstn: horz scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in smaller increments than 1 pixel. Use case When M-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 (At the processing speed of 280 mm/sec) -4 to 4 (At the processing speed of 321 mm/sec) Default value 0

8

8-129

MAG-V Lv.1 Details

Adj of Bk color magnification: vert scan To adjust the standard magnification of Bk color in vertical scanning direction by changing the Polygon Mirror speed. Other colors are adjusted by auto registration. All correction values registered in the media list are proportionally changed. Use case When adjusting the standard magnification due to environmental change, etc. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit % Default value 0 LSR-H-1 Laser emit position horz scan offset 1 Lv.1 Details To adjust the laser emitting position (the horizontal scanning direction). Use case When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit When re-entering the value at the time of DC Controller PCB replacement/RAM clear Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -50 to 60 Unit mm Default value 0 LSR-H-2 Laser emit position horz scan offset 2 Lv.1 Details To adjust the laser emitting position (the horizontal scanning direction). Use case When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit When re-entering the value at the time of DC Controller PCB replacement/RAM clear Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -50 to 60 Unit mm Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG

8-129

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG LSR-V-Y Lv.1 Details Use case

Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value LSR-V-M Lv.1 Details Use case

Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value LSR-V-C Lv.1 Details Use case

Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value LSR-V-K Lv.1 Details Use case

Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

Laser emit pstn vertical scan offset (Y) To adjust the laser emitting position (the vertical scanning direction). When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit When re-entering the value at the time of DC Controller PCB replacement/RAM clear Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -14 to 14 mm 0 Laser emit pstn vertical scan offset (M) To adjust the laser emitting position (the vertical scanning direction). When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit When re-entering the value at the time of DC Controller PCB replacement/RAM clear Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -14 to 14 mm 0 Laser emit pstn vertical scan offset (C) To adjust the laser emitting position (the vertical scanning direction). When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit When re-entering the value at the time of DC Controller PCB replacement/RAM clear Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -14 to 14 mm 0 Laser emit pstn vertical scan offset (K) To adjust the laser emitting position (the vertical scanning direction). When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit When re-entering the value at the time of DC Controller PCB replacement/RAM clear Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -14 to 14 mm 0 T-8-33

8

8-130

■■DENS COPIER > ADJUST > DENS REF-Y Lv.1 Details

Y toner dens target VL entry To enter the target value of the Toner Density Sensor (Y) of ATR control after RAM clear. Use case When checking the value before RAM clear and re-entering it after RAM clear Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 REF-M M toner dens target VL entry Lv.1 Details To enter the target value of the Toner Density Sensor (M) of ATR control after RAM clear. Use case When checking the value before RAM clear and re-entering it after RAM clear Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 REF-C C toner dens target VL entry Lv.1 Details To enter the target value of the Toner Density Sensor (C) of ATR control after RAM clear. Use case When checking the value before RAM clear and re-entering it after RAM clear Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 SIGG-Y Adj of Y color ATR patch dens target VL Lv.1 Details To enter the Y color ATR patch density target value which is set at Developing Assembly INIT. After the entry, write the value in the service label. Use case When re-entering the value at the time of DC Controller PCB replacement/RAM clear Display/adj/set range 0 to 1023 Default value 0 SIGG-M Adj of M color ATR patch dens target VL Lv.1 Details To enter the M color ATR patch density target value which is set at Developing Assembly INIT. After the entry, write the value in the service label. Use case When re-entering the value at the time of DC Controller PCB replacement/RAM clear Display/adj/set range 0 to 1023 Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

8-130

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

COPIER > ADJUST > DENS SIGG-C Lv.1 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

Adj of C color ATR patch dens target VL To enter the C color ATR patch density target value which is set at Developing Assembly INIT. After the entry, write the value in the service label. Use case When re-entering the value at the time of DC Controller PCB replacement/RAM clear Display/adj/set range 0 to 1023 Default value 0 SIGG-K Adj of Bk color ATR patch dens target VL Lv.1 Details To enter the Bk color ATR patch density target value which is set at Developing Assembly INIT. After the entry, write the value in the service label. Use case When re-entering the value at the time of DC Controller PCB replacement/RAM clear Display/adj/set range 0 to 1023 Default value 0 HLMT-PTY Toner Dens Sensr(Y) dens crrct upr limit Lv.2 Details To adjust the upper limit of the target density (T/D ratio) adjustment on the Toner Density Sensor (Y). Density failures and carrier adherence are alleviated when the upper limit is smaller, and fogging and scattering are alleviated when it is larger. The value is returned to 0 if COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/-4 is executed upon replacement of the developer. Use case - When adjusting the toner density (T/D ratio) upon occurrence of density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, and scattering, etc. - When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. - Do not use the setting value 11. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: +2.0%, -1: +1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: -1.0%, 2: -2.0% Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/-4 Supplement/memo Toner dropping: A symptom that toner drops from the Developing Assembly

8

8-131

HLMT-PTM Lv.2 Details

Toner Dens Sensr(M) dens crrct upr limit To adjust the upper limit of the target density (T/D ratio) adjustment on the Toner Density Sensor (M). Density failures and carrier adherence are alleviated when the upper limit is smaller, and fogging and scattering are alleviated when it is larger. The value is returned to 0 if COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M/-4 is executed upon replacement of the developer. Use case - When adjusting the toner density (T/D ratio) upon occurrence of density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, and scattering, etc. - When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. - Do not use the setting value 11. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: +2.0%, -1: +1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: -1.0%, 2: -2.0% Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M/-4 Supplement/memo Toner dropping: A symptom that toner drops from the Developing Unit HLMT-PTC Toner Dens Sensr(C) dens crrct upr limit Lv.2 Details To adjust the upper limit of the target density (T/D ratio) adjustment on the Toner Density Sensor (C). Density failures and carrier adherence are alleviated when the upper limit is smaller, and fogging and scattering are alleviated when it is larger. The value is returned to 0 if COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C/-4 is executed upon replacement of the developer. Use case - When adjusting the toner density (T/D ratio) upon occurrence of density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, and scattering, etc. - When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. - Do not use the setting value 11. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: +2.0%, -1: +1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: -1.0%, 2: -2.0% Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C/-4 Supplement/memo Toner dropping: A symptom that toner drops from the Developing Unit

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

8-131

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

COPIER > ADJUST > DENS LLMT-PTY Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

Toner Dens Sensr(Y)dens crrct lowr limit To adjust the lower limit of the target density (T/D ratio) adjustment of the Toner Density Sensor (Y). If the lower limit is smaller, the density increase can be prevented in the case of high duty because QM down of developer is restrained, but carrier adherence gets worse. The value is returned to 0 if COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/-4 is executed upon replacement of the Developing Assembly. Use case - When adjusting the toner density (T/D ratio) upon occurrence of density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, and scattering, etc. - When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: +2.0%, -1: +1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: -1.0%, 2: -2.0% Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/-4 LLMT-PTM Toner Dens Sensr(M)dens crrct lowr limit Lv.2 Details To adjust the lower limit of the target density (T/D ratio) adjustment of the Toner Density Sensor (M). If the lower limit is smaller, the density increase can be prevented in the case of high duty because QM down of developer is restrained, but carrier adherence gets worse. The value is returned to 0 if COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M/-4 is executed upon replacement of the Developing Assembly. Use case - When adjusting the toner density (T/D ratio) upon occurrence of density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, and scattering, etc. - When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: +2.0%, -1: +1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: -1.0%, 2: -2.0% Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M/-4

8

8-132

LLMT-PTC Lv.2 Details

Toner Dens Sensr(C)dens crrct lowr limit To adjust the lower limit of the target density (T/D ratio) adjustment of the Toner Density Sensor (C). If the lower limit is smaller, the density increase can be prevented in the case of high duty because QM down of developer is restrained, but carrier adherence gets worse. The value is returned to 0 if COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C/-4 is executed upon replacement of the Developing Assembly. Use case - When adjusting the toner density (T/D ratio) upon occurrence of density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, and scattering, etc. - When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: +2.0%, -1: +1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: -1.0%, 2: -2.0% Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C/-4 DMAX-Y Adj D-max ctrl Y color dens target VL Lv.2 Details An image failure might occur because the density target value of the D-max control becomes out of the setting table due to environment change. Adjust the offset of the yellow density target value of D-max control. The offset is reset when D-max control (Full Adjust) is executed. Use case When an image failure occurs due to environment change Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -30 to 30 Default value 0 DMAX-M Adj D-max ctrl M color dens target VL Lv.2 Details An image failure might occur because the density target value of the D-max control becomes out of the setting table due to environment change. Adjust the offset of the magenta density target value of D-max control. The offset is reset when D-max control (Full Adjust) is executed. Use case When an image failure occurs due to environment change Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -30 to 30 Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

8-132

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

COPIER > ADJUST > DENS DMAX-C Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

Adj D-max ctrl C color dens target VL An image failure might occur because the density target value of the D-max control becomes out of the setting table due to environment change. Adjust the offset of the cyan density target value of D-max control. The offset is reset when D-max control (Full Adjust) is executed. Use case When an image failure occurs due to environment change Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -30 to 30 Default value 0 P-TG-Y Adj of Y color ATR patch dens target VL Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for Y. When the target value determined upon initialization is changed, the T/D ratio is also changed. Fogging and density increase are alleviated when the value is smaller, and carrier adherence is alleviated when it is larger. Use case When density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, etc. occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Make 50 prints of approx. 10% image ratio (e.g. COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE: 16) 4 times. 4) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Caution Execute the auto gradation adjustment first to increase the density. If you adjust the offset of the target value, fogging might get worse. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: -0.5%, -1: -1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: +0.5%, 2: +1.0% Default value 0

8

8-133

P-TG-M Lv.2 Details

Adj of M color ATR patch dens target VL To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for M. When the target value determined upon initialization is changed, the T/D ratio is also changed. Fogging and density increase are alleviated when the value is smaller, and carrier adherence is alleviated when it is larger. Use case When density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, etc. occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Make 50 prints of approx. 10% image ratio (e.g. COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE: 16) 4 times. 4) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Caution Execute the auto gradation adjustment first to increase the density. If you adjust the offset of the target value, fogging might get worse. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: -0.5%, -1: -1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: +0.5%, 2: +1.0% Default value 0 P-TG-C Adj of C color ATR patch dens target VL Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for C. When the target value determined upon initialization is changed, the T/D ratio is also changed. Fogging and density increase are alleviated when the value is smaller, and carrier adherence is alleviated when it is larger. Use case When density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, etc. occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Make 50 prints of approx. 10% image ratio (e.g. COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE: 16) 4 times. 4) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Caution Execute the auto gradation adjustment first to increase the density. If you adjust the offset of the target value, fogging might get worse. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: -0.5%, -1: -1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: +0.5%, 2: +1.0% Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

8-133

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

COPIER > ADJUST > DENS P-TG-K Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

Adj of Bk color ATR patch dens target VL To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for Bk. When the target value determined upon initialization is changed, the T/D ratio is also changed. Fogging and density increase are alleviated when the value is smaller, and carrier adherence is alleviated when it is larger. Use case When density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, etc. occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Make 50 prints of approx. 10% image ratio (e.g. COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE: 16) 4 times. 4) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Caution Execute the auto gradation adjustment first to increase the density. If you adjust the offset of the target value, fogging might get worse. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: -0.5%, -1: -1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: +0.5%, 2: +1.0% Default value 0 ALF-C Adjustment of Patch Sensor alpha value Lv.1 Details To adjust the coefficient alpha value of the Patch Sensor. The value multiplied by 1000 is displayed on the screen. When replacing the Patch Sensor/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case - When clearing RAM data - When replacing the Patch Sensor Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2047 Default value 1200 Supplement/memo alpha value: Ratio of P wave and S wave P-K-Y Adj Y color ptch dens convs coeffct k Lv.2 Details To adjust the yellow patch density conversion coefficient k value of the Patch Sensor. The value multiplied by 100 is displayed on the screen. Use case When the Patch Sensor fails to read the density Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 170 P-K-M Adj M color ptch dens convs coeffct k Lv.2 Details To adjust the magenta patch density conversion coefficient k value of the Patch Sensor. The value multiplied by 100 is displayed on the screen. Use case When the Patch Sensor fails to read the density Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 170

8

8-134

P-K-C Lv.2 Details

Adj C color ptch dens convs coeffct k To adjust the cyan patch density conversion coefficient k value of the Patch Sensor. The value multiplied by 100 is displayed on the screen. Use case When the Patch Sensor fails to read the density Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 170 P-K-K Adj Bk color ptch dens convs coeffct k Lv.2 Details To adjust the black patch density conversion coefficient k value of the Patch Sensor. The value multiplied by 100 is displayed on the screen. Use case When the Patch Sensor fails to read the density Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 170 HLMT-PTK Toner Dens Sensr(Bk)dens crrct upr limit Lv.2 Details To adjust the upper limit of the target density (T/D ratio) adjustment of the Toner Density Sensor (Bk). Density failures and carrier adherence are alleviated when the upper limit is smaller, and fogging and scattering are alleviated when it is larger. The value is returned to 0 if COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K/-4 is executed upon replacement of the developer. Use case - When adjusting the toner density (T/D ratio) upon occurrence of density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, and scattering, etc. - When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. - Do not use the setting value 11. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: -0.5%, -1: -1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: +0.5%, 2: +1.0% Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K/-4 Supplement/memo Toner dropping: A symptom that toner drops from the Developing Unit

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

8-134

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

8-135

COPIER > ADJUST > DENS LLMT-PTK Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

Tonr Dens Sensr(Bk)dens crrct lowr limit To adjust the lower limit of the target density (T/D ratio) adjustment of the Toner Density Sensor (Bk). If the lower limit is smaller, the density increase can be prevented in the case of high duty because QM down of developer is restrained, but carrier adherence gets worse. The value is returned to 0 if COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K/-4 is executed upon replacement of the Developing Assembly. Use case - When adjusting the toner density (T/D ratio) upon occurrence of density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, and scattering, etc. - When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: -0.5%, -1: -1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: +0.5%, 2: +1.0% Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K/-4 REF-K Bk toner dens target VL entry Lv.1 Details To enter the target value of the Toner Density Sensor (Bk) of ATR control after RAM clear. Use case When checking the value before RAM clear and re-entering it after RAM clear Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 90(RAM clear) DMLMT-HY Y toner charging DC voltage upper limit Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage upper limit for Y in D-max control. Use case When a failure occurs due to limiter of D-max control Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Execute quick adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -1500 to 1500 Unit V Default value 0

DMLMT-HM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value DMLMT-HC Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value DMLMT-LY Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value DMLMT-LM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

M toner charging DC voltage upper limit To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage upper limit for M in D-max control. When a failure occurs due to limiter of D-max control 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Execute quick adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Do not use this at the normal service. -1500 to 1500 V 0 C toner charging DC voltage upper limit To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage upper limit for C in D-max control. When a failure occurs due to limiter of D-max control 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Execute quick adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Do not use this at the normal service. -1500 to 1500 V 0 Y toner charging DC voltage lower limit To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for Y in D-max control. When a failure occurs due to limiter of D-max control 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Execute quick adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Do not use this at the normal service. -300 to 300 V 0 M toner charging DC voltage lower limit To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for M in D-max control. When a failure occurs due to limiter of D-max control 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Execute quick adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Do not use this at the normal service. -300 to 300 V 0

8-135

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

COPIER > ADJUST > DENS DMLMT-LC Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

C toner charging DC voltage lower limit To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for C in D-max control. Use case When a failure occurs due to limiter of D-max control Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Execute quick adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -300 to 300 Unit V Default value 0 CONT-Y Toner Density Sensor (Y) control voltage Lv.1 Details To enter the density detection control voltage of the Toner Density Sensor (Y). When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When the backup data is cleared by RAM clear, etc. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 CONT-M Toner Density Sensor (M) control voltage Lv.1 Details To enter the density detection control voltage of the Toner Density Sensor (M). When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When the backup data is cleared by RAM clear, etc. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0

8

8-136

CONT-C Lv.1 Details

Toner Density Sensor (C) control voltage To enter the density detection control voltage of the Toner Density Sensor (C). When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When the backup data is cleared by RAM clear, etc. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 CONT-K Toner Density Sensor(Bk) control voltage Lv.1 Details To enter the density detection control voltage of the Toner Density Sensor (Bk). When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When the backup data is cleared by RAM clear, etc. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

T-8-34

8-136

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK

■■BLANK

COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK

BLANK-T Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value BLANK-L Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value BLANK-R Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value BLANK-B Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8-137

Adjustment of leading edge margin To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0423 mm). - When reducing the margin upon user’s request - When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. 0 to 1000 29 Adjustment of left edge margin To adjust the margin on the left edge of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0423 mm). - When reducing the margin upon user’s request - When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1000 29 Adjustment of right edge margin To adjust the margin on the right edge of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0423 mm). - When reducing the margin upon user’s request - When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1000 29 Adjustment of trailing edge margin To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0423 mm). - When reducing the margin upon user’s request - When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1000 29

8

BLANK-T2 Lv.2 Details

Adj of leading edge margin: Thin paper To adjust the margin on the leading edge of thin paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0423 mm). Use case - When reducing the margin upon user’s request - When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1000 Default value 0 BLANK-B2 Adj of trailing edge margin: Thin paper Lv.2 Details To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of thin paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0423 mm). Use case - When reducing the margin upon user’s request - When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1000 Unit pixel Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK

T-8-35

8-137

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

■■V-CONT

8-138 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT VCONT-K Lv.2 Details

Adj of Bk color contrast potential To adjust the offset of the contrast potential Vcont for Bk. As the value is incremented by 1, the contrast potential changes by 10V. +: Image becomes darker. -: Image becomes lighter. When the value is too large, paper winds around the Fixing Belt or a transfer failure occurs. In principle, the adjustment of the density should be performed in Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Density Adjustment Mode. Use case When adjusting the density of D-max control in the case that an image density failure occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DPC 4) Execute Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-Y, VCONT-M, VCONT-C COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DPC VBACK-Y Adj Y color fogging removal potential Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Y. A value obtained by adding the adjustment value in Adjustment/ Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast to the fogging removal potential is set as the fogging adjustment value. As the value is incremented by 1, the fogging removal potential changes by 10 V. +: Fogging, blanking of image edge, and carrier adherence are alleviated. -: Coarse image, blanking of image edge, and carrier adherence are alleviated. Use case At the occurrence of Y fogging Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-M, VBACK-C, VBACK-K

8

VBACK-M Lv.2 Details

Adj M color fogging removal potential To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for M. A value obtained by adding the adjustment value in Adjustment/ Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast to the fogging removal potential is set as the fogging adjustment value. As the value is incremented by 1, the fogging removal potential changes by 10 V. +: Fogging, blanking of image edge, and carrier adherence are alleviated. -: Coarse image, blanking of image edge, and carrier adherence are alleviated. Use case At the occurrence of M fogging Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y, VBACK-C, VBACK-K VBACK-C Adj C color fogging removal potential Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for C. A value obtained by adding the adjustment value in Adjustment/ Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast to the fogging removal potential is set as the fogging adjustment value. As the value is incremented by 1, the fogging removal potential changes by 10 V. +: Fogging, blanking of image edge, and carrier adherence are alleviated. -: Coarse image, blanking of image edge, and carrier adherence are alleviated. Use case At the occurrence of C fogging Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y, VBACK-M, VBACK-K Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

8-138

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT VBACK-K Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

Adj Bk color fogging removal potential To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk. A value obtained by adding the adjustment value in Adjustment/ Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast to the fogging removal potential is set as the fogging adjustment value. As the value is incremented by 1, the fogging removal potential changes by 10 V. +: Fogging, blanking of image edge, and carrier adherence are alleviated. -: Coarse image, blanking of image edge, and carrier adherence are alleviated. Use case At the occurrence of Bk fogging Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y, VBACK-M, VBACK-C COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> VBACK-K Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast

8

8-139

EPOTOFST Lv.1 Details

Manual entry of Potential Sensor offset To set the offset auto adjustment value of Potential Sensor manually. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset value changes by 1V. +: Identified as the lower potential than the detected one -: Identified as the higher potential than the detected one Use case When an error is displayed by executing OFST (auto offset adjustment) at the replacement of Potential Sensor (When the value out of specified range is set due to Potential Sensor disconnection/ connection failure/installation failure), restore to the factory setting values. 1) To stop the error, set 0 (V) in EPOTOFST. 2) Check around the Potential Sensor. If there is an error, address it and if not, go to the step 3). 3) Enter the value of service label. 4) If image fogging or the like occurs, increase the value by 10V increment. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> OFST PT-VCT-Y Adj Y ATR patch target contrast potntl Lv.2 Details To adjust the Y patch target contrast potential for ATR patch. As the value is incremented by 1, the target contrast potential changes by 1 V. +: Potential is increased. -: Potential is decreased. Use case When density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, etc. occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Make 50 prints of approx. 10% image ratio (e.g. COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE: 16) 4 times. 4) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Display/adj/set range -40 to 50 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> PT-VCT-M, PT-VCT-C, PT-VCT-K

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

8-139

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT PT-VCT-M Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

Adj M ATR patch target contrast potntl To adjust the M patch target contrast potential for ATR patch. As the value is incremented by 1, the target contrast potential changes by 1 V. +: Potential is increased. -: Potential is decreased. Use case When density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, etc. occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Make 50 prints of approx. 10% image ratio (e.g. COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE: 16) 4 times. 4) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Display/adj/set range -40 to 50 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> PT-VCT-Y, PT-VCT-C, PT-VCT-K PT-VCT-C Adj C ATR patch target contrast potntl Lv.2 Details To adjust the C patch target contrast potential for ATR patch. As the value is incremented by 1, the target contrast potential changes by 1 V. +: Potential is increased. -: Potential is decreased. Use case When density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, etc. occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Make 50 prints of approx. 10% image ratio (e.g. COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE: 16) 4 times. 4) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Display/adj/set range -40 to 50 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> PT-VCT-Y, PT-VCT-M, PT-VCT-K

8

8-140

PT-VCT-K Lv.2 Details

Adj Bk ATR patch target contrast potntl To adjust the Bk patch target contrast potential for ATR patch. As the value is incremented by 1, the target contrast potential changes by 1 V. +: Potential is increased. -: Potential is decreased. Use case When density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, etc. occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Make 50 prints of approx. 10% image ratio (e.g. COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE: 16) 4 times. 4) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Display/adj/set range -40 to 50 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> PT-VCT-Y, PT-VCT-M, PT-VCT-C VDGAIN-Y Adj of Y color charging DC voltage Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage Vd for Y. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage changes by 10 V. Increase the gain when the density is low and decrease the gain when the density is high or an spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VDGAIN-M, VDGAIN-C VDGAIN-M Adj of M color charging DC voltage Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage Vd for M. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage changes by 10 V. Increase the gain when the density is low and decrease the gain when the density is high or an spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VDGAIN-Y, VDGAIN-C

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

8-140

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT VDGAIN-C Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

Adj of C color charging DC voltage To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage Vd for C. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage changes by 10 V. Increase the gain when the density is low and decrease the gain when the density is high or an spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VDGAIN-Y, VDGAIN-M LPGAIN-Y Adjustment of Y color laser power Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the laser power for Y. As the value is incremented by 1, the laser power changes by 4 Hex. Increase the gain when the density is low and decrease the gain when the density is high or a spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -30 to 30 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> LPGAIN-M, LPGAIN-C LPGAIN-M Adjustment of M color laser power Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the laser power for M. As the value is incremented by 1, the laser power changes by 4 Hex. Increase the gain when the density is low and decrease the gain when the density is high or a spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -30 to 30 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> LPGAIN-Y, LPGAIN-C

8

8-141

LPGAIN-C Lv.2 Details

Adjustment of C color laser power To adjust the offset of the laser power for C. As the value is incremented by 1, the laser power changes by 4 Hex. Increase the gain when the density is low and decrease the gain when the density is high or a spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -30 to 30 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> LPGAIN-Y, LPGAIN-M VBACK2-Y Adj Y fogging removal potential: 1/2SPD Lv.2 Details To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for Y at 1/2 speed. +: Fogging is alleviated, but white/black spots are increased due to carrier adherence. -: White/black spots are alleviated, but fogging is increased. Use case When any image failure occurs at 1/2 speed Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK2-M, VBACK2-C, VBACK2-K Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

8-141

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT VBACK2-M Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

Adj M fogging removal potential: 1/2SPD To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for M at 1/2 speed. +: Fogging is alleviated, but white/black spots are increased due to carrier adherence. -: White/black spots are alleviated, but fogging is increased. Use case When any image failure occurs at 1/2 speed Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK2-Y, VBACK2-C, VBACK2-K Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast VBACK2-C Adj C fogging removal potential: 1/2SPD Lv.2 Details To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for C at 1/2 speed. +: Fogging is alleviated, but white/black spots are increased due to carrier adherence. -: White/black spots are alleviated, but fogging is increased. Use case When any image failure occurs at 1/2 speed Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK2-Y, VBACK2-M, VBACK2-K Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast

8

8-142

VBACK2-K Lv.2 Details

Adj Bk fogging removal potential: 1/2SPD To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk at 1/2 speed. +: Fogging is alleviated, but white/black spots are increased due to carrier adherence. -: White/black spots are alleviated, but fogging is increased. Use case When any image failure occurs at 1/2 speed Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK2-Y, VBACK2-M, VBACK2-C Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast VBACK3-Y Adj Y fogging removal potential: 1/3SPD Lv.2 Details To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for Y at 1/3 speed. +: Fogging is alleviated, but white/black spots are increased due to carrier adherence. -: White/black spots are alleviated, but fogging is increased. Use case When any image failure occurs at 1/3 speed Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK3-M, VBACK3-C, VBACK3-K Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

8-142

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT VBACK3-M Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

Adj M fogging removal potential: 1/3SPD To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for M at 1/3 speed. +: Fogging is alleviated, but white/black spots are increased due to carrier adherence. -: White/black spots are alleviated, but fogging is increased. Use case When any image failure occurs at 1/3 speed Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK3-Y, VBACK3-C, VBACK3-K Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast VBACK3-C Adj C fogging removal potential: 1/3SPD Lv.2 Details To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for C at 1/3 speed. +: Fogging is alleviated, but white/black spots are increased due to carrier adherence. -: White/black spots are alleviated, but fogging is increased. Use case When any image failure occurs at 1/3 speed Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK3-Y, VBACK3-M, VBACK3-K Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast

8

8-143

VBACK3-K Lv.2 Details

Adj Bk fogging removal potential: 1/3SPD To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk at 1/3 speed. +: Fogging is alleviated, but white/black spots are increased due to carrier adherence. -: White/black spots are alleviated, but fogging is increased. Use case When any image failure occurs at 1/3 speed Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK3-Y, VBACK3-M, VBACK3-C Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

T-8-36

8-143

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL

■■PASCAL

8-144 COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL

COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL OFST-P-Y Lv.1 Details

Y density adj at test print reading To adjust the offset of Y-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -128 to 128 Default value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment OFST-P-M M density adj at test print reading Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of M-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range -128 to 128 Default value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment OFST-P-C C density adj at test print reading Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of C-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range -128 to 128 Default value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment

8

OFST-P-K Lv.1 Details

Bk density adj at test print reading To adjust the offset of Bk-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range -128 to 128 Default value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL

T-8-37

8-144

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

■■COLOR

8-145 COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR ADJ-Y Lv.1 Details

Y color balance adjustment To adjust the default value of the color balance for Y when the density of Y varies between machines. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. If the value is too large, a transfer failure and/or a fixing failure occurs. Use case Upon user’s request (to alleviate the variation of the density between machines) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0 ADJ-M M-color balance adjustment Lv.1 Details To adjust the default value of the color balance for M when the density of M varies between machines. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. If the value is too large, a transfer failure and/or a fixing failure occurs. Use case Upon user’s request (to alleviate the variation of the density between machines) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0 ADJ-C C-color balance adjustment Lv.1 Details To adjust the default value of the color balance for C when the density of C varies between machines. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. If the value is too large, a transfer failure and/or a fixing failure occurs. Use case Upon user’s request (to alleviate the variation of the density between machines) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0

8

ADJ-K Lv.1 Details

Bk-color balance adjustment To adjust the default value of the color balance for Bk when the density of Bk varies between machines. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. If the value is too large, a transfer failure and/or a fixing failure occurs. Use case Upon user’s request (to alleviate the variation of the density between machines) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0 OFST-Y Adj of Y bright area dens&color balance Lv.1 Details To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Y. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Lower the value when the background cannot be read correctly because the density of a document is dark and increase the value when the density of a document is light. Lower the value when removal of the background is not performed correctly and a fogging-like image appears. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case - When the background of a document cannot be read correctly - When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly and a fogging-like image appears Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -32 to 32 Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

8-145

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR OFST-M Lv.1 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

Adj of M bright area dens&color balance To adjust the bright area density and color balance of M. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Lower the value when the background cannot be read correctly because the density of a document is dark and increase the value when the density of a document is light. Lower the value when removal of the background is not performed correctly and a fogging-like image appears. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case - When the background of a document cannot be read correctly - When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly and a fogging-like image appears Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -32 to 32 Default value 0 OFST-C Adj of C bright area dens&color balance Lv.1 Details To adjust the bright area density and color balance of C. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Lower the value when the background cannot be read correctly because the density of a document is dark and increase the value when the density of a document is light. Lower the value when removal of the background is not performed correctly and a fogging-like image appears. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case - When the background of a document cannot be read correctly - When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly and a fogging-like image appears Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -32 to 32 Default value 0

8

8-146

OFST-K Lv.1 Details

Adj Bk bright area dens&color balance To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Bk. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Lower the value when the background cannot be read correctly because the density of a document is dark and increase the value when the density of a document is light. Lower the value when removal of the background is not performed correctly and a fogging-like image appears. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case - When the background of a document cannot be read correctly - When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly and a fogging-like image appears Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -32 to 32 Default value 0 LD-OFS-Y Color balance adj of Y low dens area Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0 LD-OFS-M Color balance adj of M low dens area Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the low density area of M. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

8-146

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR LD-OFS-C Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

Color balance adj of C low dens area To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0 LD-OFS-K Color balance adj of Bk low dens area Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0 MD-OFS-Y Color balance adj of Y mid dens area Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0

8

8-147

MD-OFS-M Lv.2 Details

Color balance adj of M mid dens area To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0 MD-OFS-C Color balance adj of C mid dens area Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0 MD-OFS-K Color balance adj of Bk mid dens area Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

8-147

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR HD-OFS-Y Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

Color balance adj of Y high dens area To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0 HD-OFS-M Color balance adj of M high dens area Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the high density area of M. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0 HD-OFS-C Color balance adj of C high dens area Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0

HD-OFS-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PL-OFS-Y Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PL-OFS-M Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PL-OFS-C Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

8

8-148

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

Color balance adj of Bk high dens area To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -8 to 8 0 Clr blnce adj of Y low dens area:PDL To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -8 to 8 0 Clr blnce adj of M low dens area:PDL To adjust the color balance of the low density area of M at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -8 to 8 0 Clr blnce adj of C low dens area:PDL To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -8 to 8 0

8-148

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR PL-OFS-K Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PM-OFS-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PM-OFS-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PM-OFS-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

Clr blnce adj of Bk low dens area:PDL To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -8 to 8 0 Clr blnce adj of Y mid dens area:PDL To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -8 to 8 0 Clr blnce adj of M mid dens area:PDL To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -8 to 8 0 Clr blnce adj of C mid dens area:PDL To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -8 to 8 0

8

8-149

PM-OFS-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PH-OFS-Y Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PH-OFS-M Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PH-OFS-C Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

Clr blnce adj of Bk mid dens area:PDL To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -8 to 8 0 Clr blnce adj of Y high dens area:PDL To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -8 to 8 0 Clr blnce adj of M high dens area:PDL To adjust the color balance of the high density area of M at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -8 to 8 0 Clr blnce adj of C high dens area:PDL To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -8 to 8 0

8-149

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI

COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR PH-OFS-K Lv.2 Details

Clr blnce adj of Bk high dens area:PDL To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -8 to 8 Default value 0 T-8-38

8

8-150

■■HV-PRI COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI PRIMARY Lv.1 Details

Adjustment of primary charging current To adjust the offset of primary charging current for the Primary Charging Assembly. As the value is incremented by 1, the current is increased by 50 uA. Use case - When the output difference from the initial value is large due to the Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage Transformer - When changing the primary charging current and then checking the high voltage output Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -10 to 6 Unit uA Default value 0 DIS-TGY Discharge current ctrl Y offset adj Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current for Y upon discharge current control for plain paper. Use case When an image failure (sand-like image) occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -10 to 15 Unit uA Default value 0 DIS-TGM Discharge current ctrl M offset adj Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current for M upon discharge current control for plain paper. Use case When an image failure (sand-like image) occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -10 to 15 Unit uA Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI

8-150

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI DIS-TGC Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value DIS-TGY2 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value DIS-TGM2 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value DIS-TGC2 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PRI-GAIN PRI-OFST

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI

Discharge current ctrl C offset adj To adjust the offset of the target current for C upon discharge current control for plain paper. When an image failure (sand-like image) occurs 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -10 to 15 uA 0 Discharge current ctrl Y offset adj To adjust the offset of the target current for Y upon discharge current control for plain paper. When an image failure (sand-like image) occurs 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -20 to 20 uA 0 Discharge current ctrl M offset adj To adjust the offset of the target current for M upon discharge current control for plain paper. When an image failure (sand-like image) occurs 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -20 to 20 uA 0 Discharge current ctrl C offset adj To adjust the offset of the target current for C upon discharge current control for plain paper. When an image failure (sand-like image) occurs 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. -20 to 20 uA 0 [Not used] [Not used]

8

8-151

OFSTAC-Y Lv.1 Details

Adj of Y color charging AC voltage To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for Y. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage value is increased by 20 Vpp. Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high or a spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution - Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. - If the value is too large, the life of the Photosensitive Drum becomes shorter. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTAC-M, OFSTAC-C OFSTAC-M Adj of M color charging AC voltage Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for M. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage value is increased by 20 Vpp. Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high or a spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution - Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. - If the value is too large, the life of the Photosensitive Drum becomes shorter. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTAC-Y, OFSTAC-C

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI

8-151

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI OFSTAC-C Lv.1 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI

Adj of C color charging AC voltage To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for C. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage value is increased by 20 Vpp. Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high or a spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution - Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. - If the value is too large, the life of the Photosensitive Drum becomes shorter. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTAC-Y, OFSTAC-M OFSTACY2 Adjust Y charge AC voltage (1/2 speed) Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for Y at 1/2 speed. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 20 Vpp. Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high or a spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACM2, OFSTACC2 OFSTACM2 Adjust M charge AC voltage (1/2 speed) Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for M at 1/2 speed. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 20 Vpp. Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high or a spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACY2, OFSTACC2

8

8-152

OFSTACC2 Lv.1 Details

Adjust C charge AC voltage (1/2 speed) To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for C at 1/2 speed. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 20 Vpp. Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high or a spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACY2, OFSTACM2 OFSTACY3 Adjust Y charge AC voltage (1/3 speed) Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for Y at 1/3 speed. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 20 Vpp. Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high or a spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACM3, OFSTACC3 OFSTACM3 Adjust M charge AC voltage (1/3 speed) Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for M at 1/3 speed. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 20 Vpp. Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high or a spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACY3, OFSTACC3

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI

8-152

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI OFSTACC3 Lv.1 Details

Adjust C charge AC voltage (1/3 speed) To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for C at 1/3 speed. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 20 Vpp. Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high or a spotted image occurs. Use case - At the occurrence of an image density failure - At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACY3, OFSTACM3 PRI-FREQ Adjustment of YMC charging AC frequency Lv.2 Details To adjust the charge AC frequency for Y, M and C. This mode is effective when horizontal lines or fogging occurs. As the value is smaller, moire is likely to occur. Use case At a charge failure Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the items. 2) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution - Do not use this at the normal service. - Be sure to perform discharge current control (COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DISCHG) after the execution. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: 2.3kHz 1: 2.0kHz 2: 1.8kHz Default value 0 DHT-ON Forcible ON of Drum Heater (Bk) Lv.2 Details To forcibly turn ON the Drum Heater (Bk) regardless of the environment when the power is turned ON. Use case When the density of Bk gets lower at the end of the continuous print Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Default value 0 T-8-39

8

8-153

■■HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR PRE-TR Lv.1 Details

Set Pre-transfer charge current adj VL To set the output adjustment value of pre-transfer charging current. When the toner scattering occurs at the image end side, decrease the value. As the value is increased by 1, the current is increased by 5 uA. Use case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When an image failure occurs (leopard patterns on Bk solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -30 to 40 Unit uA Default value 0 2TR-TGT1 Sec trns indiv set target currnt: set 1 Lv.2 Details To adjust the target current of secondary transfer for setting 1. Setting 1 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-CLR1 and TR-DUP1. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. When low-voltage mottled image or toner scattering on solid image occurs, increase the current. When high-voltage mottled image or density loss due to excessive transfer occurs, decrease the current. As the value is incremented by 1, the current changes by 2 uA. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure occurs on all paper types (mottled image, density loss due to excessive transfer, toner scattering on solid image, etc.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-CLR1, TRDUP1, 2TR-SHR1

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-153

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-154

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-TGT2 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv set target currnt: set 2 To adjust the target current of secondary transfer for setting 2. Setting 2 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2, TR-CLR2 and TR-DUP2. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. When low-voltage mottled image or toner scattering on solid image occurs, increase the current. When high-voltage mottled image or density loss due to excessive transfer occurs, decrease the current. As the value is incremented by 1, the current changes by 2 uA. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure occurs on all paper types (mottled image, density loss due to excessive transfer, toner scattering on solid image, etc.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2, TR-CLR2, TRDUP2, 2TR-SHR2

8

2TR-TGT3 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv set target currnt: set 3 To adjust the target current of secondary transfer for setting 3. Setting 3 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV3, TR-PPR3, TR-CLR3 and TR-DUP3. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. When low-voltage mottled image or toner scattering on solid image occurs, increase the current. When high-voltage mottled image or density loss due to excessive transfer occurs, decrease the current. As the value is incremented by 1, the current changes by 2 uA. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure occurs on all paper types (mottled image, density loss due to excessive transfer, toner scattering on solid image, etc.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV3, TR-PPR3, TR-CLR3, TRDUP3, 2TR-SHR3

8-154

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-155

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-TGT4 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv set target currnt: set 4 To adjust the target current of secondary transfer for setting 4. Setting 4 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV4, TR-PPR4, TR-CLR4 and TR-DUP4. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. When low-voltage mottled image or toner scattering on solid image occurs, increase the current. When high-voltage mottled image or density loss due to excessive transfer occurs, decrease the current. As the value is incremented by 1, the current changes by 2 uA. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure occurs on all paper types (mottled image, density loss due to excessive transfer, toner scattering on solid image, etc.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV4, TR-PPR4, TR-CLR4, TRDUP4, 2TR-SHR4

8

2TR-TGT5 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv set target currnt: set 5 To adjust the target current of secondary transfer for setting 5. Setting 5 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV5, TR-PPR5, TR-CLR5 and TR-DUP5. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. When low-voltage mottled image or toner scattering on solid image occurs, increase the current. When high-voltage mottled image or density loss due to excessive transfer occurs, decrease the current. As the value is incremented by 1, the current changes by 2 uA. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure occurs on all paper types (mottled image, density loss due to excessive transfer, toner scattering on solid image, etc.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV5, TR-PPR5, TR-CLR5, TRDUP5, 2TR-SHR5

8-155

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-156

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-TGT6 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv set target currnt: set 6 To adjust the target current of secondary transfer for setting 6. Setting 6 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV6, TR-PPR6, TR-CLR6 and TR-DUP6. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. When low-voltage mottled image or toner scattering on solid image occurs, increase the current. When high-voltage mottled image or density loss due to excessive transfer occurs, decrease the current. As the value is incremented by 1, the current changes by 2 uA. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure occurs on all paper types (mottled image, density loss due to excessive transfer, toner scattering on solid image, etc.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV6, TR-PPR6, TR-CLR6, TRDUP6, 2TR-SHR6

8

2TR-TGT7 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv set target currnt: set 7 To adjust the target current of secondary transfer for setting 7. Setting 7 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV7, TR-PPR7, TR-CLR7 and TR-DUP7. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. When low-voltage mottled image or toner scattering on solid image occurs, increase the current. When high-voltage mottled image or density loss due to excessive transfer occurs, decrease the current. As the value is incremented by 1, the current changes by 2 uA. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure occurs on all paper types (mottled image, density loss due to excessive transfer, toner scattering on solid image, etc.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV7, TR-PPR7, TR-CLR7, TRDUP7, 2TR-SHR7

8-156

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-TGT8 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv set target currnt: set 8 To adjust the target current of secondary transfer for setting 8. Setting 8 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8, TR-CLR8 and TR-DUP8. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. When low-voltage mottled image or toner scattering on solid image occurs, increase the current. When high-voltage mottled image or density loss due to excessive transfer occurs, decrease the current. As the value is incremented by 1, the current changes by 2 uA. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure occurs on all paper types (mottled image, density loss due to excessive transfer, toner scattering on solid image, etc.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8, TR-CLR8, TRDUP8, 2TR-SHR8

8

8-157

2TR-SHR1 Lv.2 Details

Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 1 To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 1. Setting 1 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-CLR1 and TR-DUP1. When this condition is satisfied, the paper allotted voltage that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage changes by 100V. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-CLR1, TRDUP1, 2TR-TGT1 2TR-SHR2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 2 Lv.2 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 2. Setting 2 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2, TR-CLR2 and TR-DUP2. When this condition is satisfied, the paper allotted voltage that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage changes by 100V. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2, TR-CLR2, TRDUP2, 2TR-TGT2

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-157

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-SHR3 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 3 To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 3. Setting 3 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV3, TR-PPR3, TR-CLR3 and TR-DUP3. When this condition is satisfied, the paper allotted voltage that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage changes by 100V. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV3, TR-PPR3, TR-CLR3, TRDUP3, 2TR-TGT3 2TR-SHR4 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 4 Lv.2 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 4. Setting 4 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV4, TR-PPR4, TR-CLR4 and TR-DUP4. When this condition is satisfied, the paper allotted voltage that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage changes by 100V. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV4, TR-PPR4, TR-CLR4, TRDUP4, 2TR-TGT4

8

8-158

2TR-SHR5 Lv.2 Details

Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 5 To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 5. Setting 5 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV5, TR-PPR5, TR-CLR5 and TR-DUP5. When this condition is satisfied, the paper allotted voltage that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage changes by 100V. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV5, TR-PPR5, TR-CLR5, TRDUP5, 2TR-TGT5 2TR-SHR6 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 6 Lv.2 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 6. Setting 6 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV6, TR-PPR6, TR-CLR6 and TR-DUP6. When this condition is satisfied, the paper allotted voltage that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage changes by 100V. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV6, TR-PPR6, TR-CLR6, TRDUP6, 2TR-TGT6

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-158

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-159

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-SHR7 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 7 To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 7. Setting 7 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV7, TR-PPR7, TR-CLR7 and TR-DUP7. When this condition is satisfied, the paper allotted voltage that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage changes by 100V. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV7, TR-PPR7, TR-CLR7, TRDUP7, 2TR-TGT7 2TR-SHR8 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 8 Lv.2 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 8. Setting 8 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8, TR-CLR8 and TR-DUP8. When this condition is satisfied, the paper allotted voltage that is set here is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage changes by 100V. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8, TR-CLR8, TRDUP8, 2TR-TGT8

8

TR-PPR1 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 1 To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 1. Setting 1 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-CLR1 and TR-DUP1. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT1 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR1 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 13 1: Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 2: Recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 3: Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m2) 4: Heavy paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 5: Heavy paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 6: Coated paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 7: Coated paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 8: Transparency 9: Textured paper 10, 11: Not used 12: Postcard 13: Labels Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV1, TR-CLR1, TR-DUP1, 2TRTGT1, 2TR-SHR1

8-159

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-160

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-PPR2 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 2 To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 2. Setting 2 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2, TR-CLR2 and TR-DUP2. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT2 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR2 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 13 1: Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 2: Recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 3: Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m2) 4: Heavy paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 5: Heavy paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 6: Coated paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 7: Coated paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 8: Transparency 9: Textured paper 10, 11: Not used 12: Postcard 13: Labels Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV2, TR-CLR2, TR-DUP2, 2TRTGT2, 2TR-SHR2

8

TR-PPR3 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 3 To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 3. Setting 3 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV3, TR-PPR3, TR-CLR3 and TR-DUP3. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT3 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR3 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 13 1: Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 2: Recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 3: Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m2) 4: Heavy paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 5: Heavy paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 6: Coated paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 7: Coated paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 8: Transparency 9: Textured paper 10, 11: Not used 12: Postcard 13: Labels Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV3, TR-CLR3, TR-DUP3, 2TRTGT3, 2TR-SHR3

8-160

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-161

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-PPR4 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 4 To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 4. Setting 4 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV4, TR-PPR4, TR-CLR4 and TR-DUP4. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT4 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR4 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 13 1: Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 2: Recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 3: Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m2) 4: Heavy paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 5: Heavy paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 6: Coated paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 7: Coated paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 8: Transparency 9: Textured paper 10, 11: Not used 12: Postcard 13: Labels Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV4, TR-CLR4, TR-DUP4, 2TRTGT4, 2TR-SHR4

8

TR-PPR5 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 5 To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 5. Setting 5 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV5, TR-PPR5, TR-CLR5 and TR-DUP5. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT5 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR5 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 13 1: Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 2: Recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 3: Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m2) 4: Heavy paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 5: Heavy paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 6: Coated paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 7: Coated paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 8: Transparency 9: Textured paper 10, 11: Not used 12: Postcard 13: Labels Default value 1

8-161

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-162

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-PPR6 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 6 To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 6. Setting 6 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV6, TR-PPR6, TR-CLR6 and TR-DUP6. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT6 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR6 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 13 1: Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 2: Recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 3: Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m2) 4: Heavy paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 5: Heavy paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 6: Coated paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 7: Coated paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 8: Transparency 9: Textured paper 10, 11: Not used 12: Postcard 13: Labels Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV6, TR-CLR6, TR-DUP6, 2TRTGT6, 2TR-SHR6

8

TR-PPR7 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 7 To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 7. Setting 7 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV7, TR-PPR7, TR-CLR7 and TR-DUP7. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT7 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR7 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 13 1: Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 2: Recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 3: Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m2) 4: Heavy paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 5: Heavy paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 6: Coated paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 7: Coated paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 8: Transparency 9: Textured paper 10, 11: Not used 12: Postcard 13: Labels Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV7, TR-CLR7, TR-DUP7, 2TRTGT7, 2TR-SHR7

8-162

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-PPR8 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 8 To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 8. Setting 8 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8, TR-CLR8 and TR-DUP8. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT8 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR8 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 13 1: Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 2: Recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2) 3: Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m2) 4: Heavy paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 5: Heavy paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 6: Coated paper (106 to 220 g/m2) 7: Coated paper (221 to 300 g/m2) 8: Transparency 9: Textured paper 10, 11: Not used 12: Postcard 13: Labels Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV8, TR-CLR8, TR-DUP8, 2TRTGT8, 2TR-SHR8

8

8-163

TR-ENV1 Lv.2 Details

Sec trns indiv setting environment:set 1 To set the environment (absolute moisture amount) for setting 1. Setting 1 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-CLR1 and TR-DUP1. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT1 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR1 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the environment occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 3 1: Low humidity (Absolute moisture amount: 5.8g/m3 and less) 2: Normal humidity (5.9 to 15g/m3) 3: High humidity (15.1g/m3 and more) Default value 2 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-PPR1, TR-CLR1, TR-DUP1, 2TRTGT1, 2TR-SHR1 TR-ENV2 Sec trns indiv setting environment:set 2 Lv.2 Details To set the environment (absolute moisture amount) for setting 2. Setting 2 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2, TR-CLR2 and TR-DUP2. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT2 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR2 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the environment occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 3 1: Low humidity (Absolute moisture amount: 5.8g/m3 and less) 2: Normal humidity (5.9 to 15g/m3) 3: High humidity (15.1g/m3 and more) Default value 2 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-PPR2, TR-CLR2, TR-DUP2, 2TRTGT2, 2TR-SHR2

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-163

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-ENV3 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting environment:set 3 To set the environment (absolute moisture amount) for setting 3. Setting 3 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV3, TR-PPR3, TR-CLR3 and TR-DUP3. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT3 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR3 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the environment occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 3 1: Low humidity (Absolute moisture amount: 5.8g/m3 and less) 2: Normal humidity (5.9 to 15g/m3) 3: High humidity (15.1g/m3 and more) Default value 2 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-PPR3, TR-CLR3, TR-DUP3, 2TRTGT3, 2TR-SHR3 TR-ENV4 Sec trns indiv setting environment:set 4 Lv.2 Details To set the environment (absolute moisture amount) for setting 4. Setting 4 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV4, TR-PPR4, TR-CLR4 and TR-DUP4. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT4 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR4 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the environment occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 3 1: Low humidity (Absolute moisture amount: 5.8g/m3 and less) 2: Normal humidity (5.9 to 15g/m3) 3: High humidity (15.1g/m3 and more) Default value 2 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-PPR4, TR-CLR4, TR-DUP4, 2TRTGT4, 2TR-SHR4

8

8-164

TR-ENV5 Lv.2 Details

Sec trns indiv setting environment:set 5 To set the environment (absolute moisture amount) for setting 5. Setting 5 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV5, TR-PPR5, TR-CLR5 and TR-DUP5. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT5 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR5 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the environment occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 3 1: Low humidity (Absolute moisture amount: 5.8g/m3 and less) 2: Normal humidity (5.9 to 15g/m3) 3: High humidity (15.1g/m3 and more) Default value 2 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-PPR5, TR-CLR5, TR-DUP5, 2TRTGT5, 2TR-SHR5 TR-ENV6 Sec trns indiv setting environment:set 6 Lv.2 Details To set the environment (absolute moisture amount) for setting 6. Setting 6 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV6, TR-PPR6, TR-CLR6 and TR-DUP6. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT6 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR6 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the environment occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 3 1: Low humidity (Absolute moisture amount: 5.8g/m3 and less) 2: Normal humidity (5.9 to 15g/m3) 3: High humidity (15.1g/m3 and more) Default value 2 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-PPR6, TR-CLR6, TR-DUP6, 2TRTGT6, 2TR-SHR6

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-164

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-ENV7 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting environment:set 7 To set the environment (absolute moisture amount) for setting 7. Setting 7 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV7, TR-PPR7, TR-CLR7 and TR-DUP7. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT7 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR7 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the environment occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 3 1: Low humidity (Absolute moisture amount: 5.8g/m3 and less) 2: Normal humidity (5.9 to 15g/m3) 3: High humidity (15.1g/m3 and more) Default value 2 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-PPR7, TR-CLR7, TR-DUP7, 2TRTGT7, 2TR-SHR7 TR-ENV8 Sec trns indiv setting environment:set 8 Lv.2 Details To set the environment (absolute moisture amount) for setting 8. Setting 8 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8, TR-CLR8 and TR-DUP8. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT8 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR8 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the environment occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 3 1: Low humidity (Absolute moisture amount: 5.8g/m3 and less) 2: Normal humidity (5.9 to 15g/m3) 3: High humidity (15.1g/m3 and more) Default value 2 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-PPR8, TR-CLR8, TR-DUP8, 2TRTGT8, 2TR-SHR8

8

8-165

TR-CLR1 Lv.2 Details

Sec trns indiv setting color mode: set 1 To set B&W/color for setting 1. Setting 1 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-CLR1 and TR-DUP1. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT1 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR1 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the color mode occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 2 1: B&W mode, 2: Color mode Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-DUP1, 2TRTGT1, 2TR-SHR1 TR-CLR2 Sec trns indiv setting color mode: set 2 Lv.2 Details To set B&W/color for setting 2. Setting 2 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2, TR-CLR2 and TR-DUP2. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT2 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR2 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the color mode occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 2 1: B&W mode, 2: Color mode Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2, TR-DUP2, 2TRTGT2, 2TR-SHR2

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-165

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-CLR3 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting color mode: set 3 To set B&W/color for setting 3. Setting 3 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV3, TR-PPR3, TR-CLR3 and TR-DUP3. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT3 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR3 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the color mode occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 2 1: B&W mode, 2: Color mode Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV3, TR-PPR3, TR-DUP3, 2TRTGT3, 2TR-SHR3 TR-CLR4 Sec trns indiv setting color mode: set 4 Lv.2 Details To set B&W/color for setting 4. Setting 4 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV4, TR-PPR4, TR-CLR4 and TR-DUP4. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT4 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR4 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the color mode occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 2 1: B&W mode, 2: Color mode Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV4, TR-PPR4, TR-DUP4, 2TRTGT4, 2TR-SHR4

8

8-166

TR-CLR5 Lv.2 Details

Sec trns indiv setting color mode: set 5 To set B&W/color for setting 5. Setting 5 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV5, TR-PPR5, TR-CLR5 and TR-DUP5. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT5 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR5 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the color mode occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 2 1: B&W mode, 2: Color mode Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV6, TR-PPR5, TR-DUP5, 2TRTGT5, 2TR-SHR5 TR-CLR6 Sec trns indiv setting color mode: set 6 Lv.2 Details To set B&W/color for setting 6. Setting 6 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV6, TR-PPR6, TR-CLR6 and TR-DUP6. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT6 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR6 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the color mode occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 2 1: B&W mode, 2: Color mode Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV6, TR-PPR6, TR-DUP6, 2TRTGT6, 2TR-SHR6

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-166

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-CLR7 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting color mode: set 7 To set B&W/color for setting 7. Setting 7 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV7, TR-PPR7, TR-CLR7 and TR-DUP7. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT7 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR7 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the color mode occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 2 1: B&W mode, 2: Color mode Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV7, TR-PPR7, TR-DUP7, 2TRTGT7, 2TR-SHR7 TR-CLR8 Sec trns indiv setting color mode: set 8 Lv.2 Details To set B&W/color for setting 8. Setting 8 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8, TR-CLR8 and TR-DUP8. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT8 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-SHR8 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs due to the color mode occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 2 1: B&W mode, 2: Color mode Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8, TR-DUP8, 2TRTGT8, 2TR-SHR8

8

8-167

TR-DUP1 Lv.2 Details

Sec trns indiv setting feed side: set 1 To set the feed side for setting 1. Setting 1 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-CLR1 and TR-DUP1. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT1 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-TGT1 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs on the 1st/2nd side occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 4 1: 1-sided, 2: Auto 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 2-sided, 4: POD Deck Lite Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-CLR1, 2TRTGT1, 2TR-SHR1 TR-DUP2 Sec trns indiv setting feed side: set 2 Lv.2 Details To set the feed side for setting 2. Setting 2 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2, TR-CLR2 and TR-DUP2. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT2 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-TGT2 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs on the 1st/2nd side occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 4 1: 1-sided, 2: Auto 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 2-sided, 4: POD Deck Lite Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2, TR-CLR2, 2TRTGT2, 2TR-SHR2

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-167

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-DUP3 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting feed side: set 3 To set the feed side for setting 3. Setting 3 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV3, TR-PPR3, TR-CLR3 and TR-DUP3. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT3 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-TGT3 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs on the 1st/2nd side occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 4 1: 1-sided, 2: Auto 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 2-sided, 4: POD Deck Lite Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV3, TR-PPR3, TR-CLR3, 2TRTGT3, 2TR-SHR3 TR-DUP4 Sec trns indiv setting feed side: set 4 Lv.2 Details To set the feed side for setting 4. Setting 4 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV4, TR-PPR4, TR-CLR4 and TR-DUP4. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT4 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-TGT4 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs on the 1st/2nd side occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 4 1: 1-sided, 2: Auto 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 2-sided, 4: POD Deck Lite Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV4, TR-PPR4, TR-CLR4, 2TRTGT4, 2TR-SHR4

8

8-168

TR-DUP5 Lv.2 Details

Sec trns indiv setting feed side: set 5 To set the feed side for setting 5. Setting 5 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV5, TR-PPR5, TR-CLR5 and TR-DUP5. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT5 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-TGT5 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs on the 1st/2nd side occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 4 1: 1-sided, 2: Auto 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 2-sided, 4: POD Deck Lite Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV5, TR-PPR5, TR-CLR5, 2TRTGT5, 2TR-SHR5 TR-DUP6 Sec trns indiv setting feed side: set 6 Lv.2 Details To set the feed side for setting 6. Setting 6 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV6, TR-PPR6, TR-CLR6 and TR-DUP6. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT6 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-TGT6 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs on the 1st/2nd side occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 4 1: 1-sided, 2: Auto 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 2-sided, 4: POD Deck Lite Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV6, TR-PPR6, TR-CLR6, 2TRTGT6, 2TR-SHR6

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-168

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-DUP7 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sec trns indiv setting feed side: set 7 To set the feed side for setting 7. Setting 7 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV7, TR-PPR7, TR-CLR7 and TR-DUP7. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT7 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-TGT7 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs on the 1st/2nd side occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 4 1: 1-sided, 2: Auto 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 2-sided, 4: POD Deck Lite Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV7, TR-PPR7, TR-CLR7, 2TRTGT7, 2TR-SHR7 TR-DUP8 Sec trns indiv setting feed side: set 8 Lv.2 Details To set the feed side for setting 8. Setting 8 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8, TR-CLR8 and TR-DUP8. When this condition is satisfied, the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT8 and paper allotted voltage that is set in 2TR-TGT8 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Use case When an image failure that differs on the 1st/2nd side occurs (mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 4 1: 1-sided, 2: Auto 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 2-sided, 4: POD Deck Lite Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8, TR-CLR8, 2TRTGT8, 2TR-SHR8

8

8-169

1TR-TGY Lv.2 Details

Adj of prmry trns ATVC Y target current To adjust the offset of the target current for Y upon primary transfer ATVC control. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 0.5 uA. Increase the value if spots (white spots), leopard pattern image or mottled image occurs. Decrease the value if white dots occur. Use case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0 1TR-TGM Adj of prmry trns ATVC M target current Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current for M upon primary transfer ATVC control. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 0.5 uA. Increase the value if spots (white spots), leopard pattern image or mottled image occurs. Decrease the value if white dots occur. Use case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0 1TR-TGC Adj of prmry trns ATVC C target current Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current for C upon primary transfer ATVC control. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 0.5 uA. Increase the value if spots (white spots), leopard pattern image or mottled image occurs. Decrease the value if white dots occur. Use case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-169

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 1TR-TGK1 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Prmry trns ATVC Bk target current (B&W) To adjust the offset of the target current for Bk upon primary transfer ATVC control. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 0.5 uA. Increase the value if spots (white spots), leopard pattern image or mottled image occurs. Decrease the value if white dots occur. Use case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0 1TR-TGK4 Prmry trns ATVC Bk target current(color) Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current for Bk upon primary transfer ATVC control in color mode. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 0.5 uA. Increase the value if spots (white spots), leopard pattern image or mottled image occurs. Decrease the value if white dots occur. Use case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit uA Default value 0

8

8-170

2EL Lv.2 Details

Set of Sec Trns Static Eliminator bias To adjust the application voltage of the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator. As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage is increased by 500V. When the Static Eliminator trace (crow’s footprint image) occurs, increase the value. When the Static Eliminator trace (water-drop image) and separation failure occur, decrease the value. If the voltage after the adjustment is out of -4000 to 0V, it is forcibly set to the upper/lower limit value. Use case When an image failure due to the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator occurs (related with Static Eliminator trace and separation failure) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution If the value is set too high, the Static Eliminator trace occurs again. Display/adj/set range -8 to 6 Unit V Default value 0 POSTSW-K Pre-trns charging assembly ON/OFF Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. Use case When an image is smeared by the Drum Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When 0 is set, black mottled image and/or leopard patterns (horizontal long lines) might occur. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0:OFF,1:ON Default value 1 2TC-I11 [Not used (for expansion)] 2ELSW Sec Trns Static Eliminator bias ON/OFF Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator bias. Use case When stain on the back of paper occurs at secondary transfer Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0:OFF,1:ON Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> 2EL

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-170

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 1TR-TGY2 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Adj Y Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed To adjust the offset of the target current value for Y upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/2 speed. Increase the value when spots, mottled image, or image failure due to insufficient transfer current occurs. Decrease the value when image fogging due to transfer memory or drum memory due to strong transfer current occurs. Use case When an image failure due to inappropriate primary transfer current setting occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Default value 0 1TR-TGM2 Adj M Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current value for M upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/2 speed. Increase the value when spots, mottled image, or image failure due to insufficient transfer current occurs. Decrease the value when image fogging due to transfer memory or drum memory due to strong transfer current occurs. Use case When an image failure due to inappropriate primary transfer current setting occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Default value 0 1TR-TGC2 Adj C Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current value for C upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/2 speed. Increase the value when spots, mottled image, or image failure due to insufficient transfer current occurs. Decrease the value when image fogging due to transfer memory or drum memory due to strong transfer current occurs. Use case When an image failure due to inappropriate primary transfer current setting occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Default value 0

8

8-171

1TR-TK12 Lv.2 Details

Adj Bk Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed To adjust the offset of the target current value for pure black upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/2 speed. Increase the value when spots, mottled image, or image failure due to insufficient transfer current occurs. Decrease the value when image fogging due to transfer memory or drum memory due to strong transfer current occurs. Use case When an image failure due to inappropriate primary transfer current setting occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Default value 0 1TR-TGY3 Adj Y Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3 speed Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current value for Y upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/3 speed. Increase the value when spots, mottled image, or image failure due to insufficient transfer current occurs. Decrease the value when image fogging due to transfer memory or drum memory due to strong transfer current occurs. Use case When an image failure due to inappropriate primary transfer current setting occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Default value 0 1TR-TGM3 Adj M Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3 speed Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current value for M upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/3 speed. Increase the value when spots, mottled image, or image failure due to insufficient transfer current occurs. Decrease the value when image fogging due to transfer memory or drum memory due to strong transfer current occurs. Use case When an image failure due to inappropriate primary transfer current setting occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-171

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-172

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 1TR-TGC3 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Adj C Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3 speed To adjust the offset of the target current value for C upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/3 speed. Increase the value when spots, mottled image, or image failure due to insufficient transfer current occurs. Decrease the value when image fogging due to transfer memory or drum memory due to strong transfer current occurs. Use case When an image failure due to inappropriate primary transfer current setting occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Default value 0 1TR-TK13 Adj Bk Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3 speed Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current value for pure black upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/3 speed. Increase the value when spots, mottled image, or image failure due to insufficient transfer current occurs. Decrease the value when image fogging due to transfer memory or drum memory due to strong transfer current occurs. Use case When an image failure due to inappropriate primary transfer current setting occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Default value 0 1TR-TK42 Adj clr Bk Pry Trn ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2SPD Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current value for Bk (color) upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/2 speed. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 2 micro A. Increase the value if spots (white spots), leopard pattern image occurs. Decrease the value if white dots occur. Decrease the value if mottled image due to paper surface nature occurs when paper type is heavy paper 1/2. Use case When an image failure due to inappropriate primary transfer current setting occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit uA Default value 0

8

1TR-TK43 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Adj clr Bk Pry Trn ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3SPD To adjust the offset of the target current value for Bk (color) upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/3 speed. Increase the value when spots, mottled image, or image failure due to insufficient transfer current occurs. Decrease the value when image fogging due to transfer memory or drum memory due to strong transfer current occurs. Use case When an image failure due to inappropriate primary transfer current setting occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Default value 0 T-8-40

8-172

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

■■FEED-ADJ

8-173 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ REGIST Lv.1 Details

Adj of rgst start timing: Plain paper To adjust the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor in the case of plain paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the leading edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.) -: Top margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 ADJ-C1 Right Deck write start pstn in horz scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Right Deck (paper width is within 320 mm.) As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution If the paper width is larger than 320 mm, execute mechanical adjustment. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit mm Default value 0

8

ADJ-C2 Lv.1 Details

Left deck write start pstn in horz scan To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Left Deck (paper width is within 320 mm.) As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution If the paper width exceeds 320 mm, execute mechanical adjustment. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit mm Default value 0 ADJ-C3 Cassette 3 write start pstn in horz scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 3 (paper width is within 320 mm.) As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution If the paper width exceeds 320 mm, execute mechanical adjustment. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit mm Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

8-173

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ ADJ-C4 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

Cassette 4 write start pstn in horz scan To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 4 (paper width is within 320 mm.) As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution If the paper width exceeds 320 mm, execute mechanical adjustment. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit mm Default value 0 ADJ-MF Write start pstn in horz scan: MP tray Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Multi-purpose Tray (paper width is within 320 mm.) As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution If the paper width exceeds 320 mm, execute mechanical adjustment. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit mm Default value 0

8

8-174

ADJ-DK Lv.1 Details

Write start pstn in horz scan:Deck/POD D To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Paper Deck/ POD Deck Lite (paper width is within 320 mm.) As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution If the paper width exceeds 320 mm, execute mechanical adjustment. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit mm Default value 0 ADJ-REFE Write start pstn in horz scan: 2nd side Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the horizontal scanning direction. The image write start position is set in the relative amount against the first side regardless of the paper pickup cassette/tray/deck. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit mm Default value 0 REG-THCK Rgst start timing adj: Heavy, 1/2 speed Lv.1 Details To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding heavy paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.) -: Top margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value -20

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

8-174

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ REG-DUP1 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

Rgst start timing adj: Plain, 2nd side To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding the second side of plain paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.) -: Top margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value -10 REG-DUP2 Rgst start timing adj: Heavy, 2nd side Lv.1 Details To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding the second side of heavy paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.) -: Top margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value -10 LP-FEED1 Cassette pre-rgst arch amount: Plain Lv.1 Details To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain paper from the cassette. As the value is incremented by 1, the pre-registration arch amount changes by 0.1 mm. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain paper from the cassette. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0

8

8-175

LP-FEED2 Lv.1 Details

Casstt pre-rgst arch amount:Heavy/Transp To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding heavy paper/transparency from the cassette. As the value is incremented by 1, the pre-registration arch amount changes by 0.1 mm. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain paper from the cassette. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 LP-MULT1 MP Tray pre-rgst arch amount: Plain Lv.1 Details To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain paper from the Multi-purpose Tray. As the value is incremented by 1, the pre-registration arch amount changes by 0.1 mm. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain paper from the cassette. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 LP-MULT2 MP Tray pre-rgst arch amount:Heavy/Trans Lv.1 Details To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding heavy paper/transparency from the Multi-purpose Tray. As the value is incremented by 1, the pre-registration arch amount changes 0.1 mm. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain paper from the cassette. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

8-175

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ LP-DUP1 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

Duplex pre-rgst arch amount: Plain To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain paper in duplex mode. As the value is incremented by 1, the pre-registration arch amount changes by 0.1 mm. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain paper from the cassette. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 LP-DUP2 Duplex pre-rgst arch amount:Hvy/Transp Lv.1 Details To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding heavy paper/transparency in duplex mode. As the value is incremented by 1, the pre-registration arch amount changes by 0.1 mm. +: Increase -: Decrease Use case To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain paper from the cassette. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0

8

8-176

PFIX-FAN Lv.2 Details

Pre-fix Feed Attraction Fan amount set To adjust the suction feeding capability of the Pre-fixing Feed Unit by setting the airflow amount of the Pre-fixing Feed Attraction Fan (FM1). Heavy paper of small irregular size can be fed when full speed is set, but noise becomes larger. Noise is alleviated when half speed is set, but a jam might occur unless an upward curl is added to postcards and B5-size heavy papers before they reach the Pre-fixing Feed Unit. When 0 is set, the fan rotates at full speed in case that postcards/ envelopes of 200mm or shorter in feed direction and 106g/m2 or more are fed at 1/2 speed or 1/3 speed. The fan rotates at half speed in other cases. Cases of full speed: postcard/2 on 1 postcard/4 on 1 postcard, Catalog Globe No.8 (envelope) When 1 is set, the fan rotates at full speed if the following conditions are satisfied, and rotates at half speed in other cases. - The paper weight set in user mode (Settings/Registration> Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Type Management Settings) is 104/149/179/219/255/299g/m2.* - The length in feed direction is 200mm or shorter. When 2 is set, the fan always rotates at half speed. Use case Upon user’s request (alleviation of noise/feeding of small-size heavy paper) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution - When full speed is set, noise becomes larger. - When half speed is set, a jam might occur unless an upward curl is added to paper depending on the paper type. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Full speed for postcard/2 on 1 postcard/4 on 1 postcard; Half speed for other papers 1: Full speed for paper of 200mm or shorter in feed direction and a specific paper weight*; Half speed for other papers 2: Half speed Default value 0 Related user mode Settings/Registration> Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Type Management Settings Supplement/memo * The paper weight (B) that serves as the condition for the fan to rotate at full speed is set according to the paper weight classification (A) of the paper used. A: 91 to 105g/m2 => B: 104g/m2 A: 106 to 150 g/m2 => B: 149 g/m2 A: 151 to 180 g/m2 => B: 179 g/m2 A: 181 to 220 g/m2 => B: 219 g/m2 A: 221 to 256 g/m2 => B: 255 g/m2 A: 257 to 300 g/m2 => B: 299 g/m2

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

8-176

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ ADJ-MDK1 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

Write pstn in horz scan:Multi Deck(Upr) To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Multi Deck (Upper) (paper width is within 320 mm.) As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1mm. +: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution If the paper width exceeds 320 mm, execute mechanical adjustment. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit mm Default value 0 ADJ-MDK2 Write pstn in horz scan:Multi Deck(Mid) Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Multi Deck (Middle) (paper width is within 320 mm.) As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1mm. +: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution If the paper width exceeds 320 mm, execute mechanical adjustment. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit mm Default value 0

8

8-177

ADJ-MDK3 Lv.1 Details

Write pstn in horz scan:Multi Deck(Lowr) To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Multi Deck (Lower) (paper width is within 320 mm.) As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1mm. +: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution If the paper width exceeds 320 mm, execute mechanical adjustment. Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit mm Default value 0 REG-H2 Rgst start timing adj: Heavy,1/3 speed Lv.1 Details To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding heavy paper at 1/3 speed. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller (An image moves upward.) -: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves downward.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 REG-S Rgst start timing adj:Coated, 1/3,1/2SPD Lv.1 Details To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor in the case of slow feeding of coated paper at 1/3 speed in iR-ADV C9xxx. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller (An image moves upward.) -: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves downward.) When Productivity Priority mode is selected in user mode, timing to turn ON at 1/2 speed is changed and the margin is adjusted. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 Related user mode Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Coated Productivity/ Image Quality Priority

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

8-177

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ REG-MF Lv.1 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

Rgst start timing adj: MP Tray, Plain To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding plain paper from the Multi-purpose Tray. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller (An image moves upward.) -: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves downward.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 REG-MFH1 Rgst start tmg adj: MP Tray,Hvy,1/2 SPD Lv.1 Details To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding heavy paper at 1/2 speed from the Multi-purpose Tray. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller (An image moves upward.) -: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves downward.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 REG-MFH2 Rgst start tmg adj: MP Tray,Hvy,1/3 SPD Lv.1 Details To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding heavy paper at 1/3 speed from the Multi-purpose Tray. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller (An image moves upward.) -: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves downward.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0

8

8-178

REG-MFS Lv.1 Details

Rgst start tmg:MP Tray,Coated,1/3,1/2SPD To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding coated paper at 1/3 speed from the Multi-purpose Tray in iR-ADV C9xxx. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller (An image moves upward.) -: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves downward.) When Productivity Priority mode is selected in user mode, timing to turn ON at 1/2 speed is changed and the margin is adjusted. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 Related user mode Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Coated Productivity/ Image Quality Priority PFIX-SPD Adj of Pre-fix Feed Motor speed Lv.2 Details To adjust the speed of the Pre-fixing Feed Motor. As the value is incremented by 1, the speed is increased by 0.1%. +: The speed is increased. -: The speed is decreased. Increase the value (speed) if a jam occurs as the result that the trailing edge of thin paper or recycled paper winds around the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. If the value is too large, the arch between the pre-fixing feed and fixing processes becomes too large, and consequently an image failure and/or jam might occur. Use case When the trailing edge of thin paper or recycled paper winds around the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller, and a jam occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit % Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

8-178

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ EXT-SPD Lv.2 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

Adj of Delivery Motor speed To adjust the speed of the Delivery Motor. The rotation speed of the Outer Delivery Roller changes in the case of the straight delivery and duplex mode. As the value is incremented by 1, the speed is increased by 0.5%. +: The speed is increased. -: The speed is decreased. If the value is too large, paper is pulled by both the delivery side and fixing side, and consequently noise might occur and/or the motor might become out of sync. If the value is too small, arch is created between the Outer Delivery Roller and Fixing Assembly, and consequently a jam due to paper bending might occur. Use case - When uneven gloss occurs - When noise is generated from the Outer Delivery Drive Assembly Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit % Default value 0

8

8-179

TBLT-SPD Lv.1 Details

Fine adjustment of ITB speed To make a fine adjustment of the ITB speed to alleviate blur image (random uneven pitch). When the speed is changed, image magnification in the vertical scanning direction is changed. As the value is incremented by 1, speed of the ITB Drive Motor is increased by 0.025%. +: The speed is increased. -: The speed is decreased. Increase the speed (1 to 4) when blur image occurs. The adjustment result is reflected to 1/1 speed, 1/2 speed, and 1/3 speed. Use case When blur image (random uneven pitch) occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (1 to 4; switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Output an halftone image. If blur image is alleviated, execute step 3 and later. If not, change the setting value to 5 to 8, and check again. 3) As needed, change the magnification in the vertical scanning direction in “Fine Adjust Zoom” in user mode. 4) As needed, change the leading edge margin with REGIST in service mode. 5) Adjust the color displacement in the vertical scanning direction in “Auto Correct Color Mismatch” in user mode. Caution - The operation is enabled when the setting value of COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR > ITB-TYPE is “1”. - If the setting value is out of the range between -4 and 0, banding of other pitch might get worse. - After execution, check magnification in the vertical scanning direction and leading edge margin, and then execute auto registration. Display/adj/set range -30 to 30(-30 to -9,9 to 30:Not used) Unit % Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-TR> ITB-TYPE COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> REGIST Related user mode Preferences > Paper Settings > Set Paper Type Management > Details/Edit > Adjust Image Position > Fine Adjust Zoom Adjustment/ Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Correct Color Mismatch

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

8-179

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ REG-DUPS Lv.1 Details

Rgst start tmg: Coated(2nd), 1/3 ,1/2SPD To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding coated paper at 1/3 speed. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.) -: Top margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.) When Productivity Priority mode is selected in user mode, timing to turn ON at 1/2 speed is changed and the margin is adjusted. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 Related user mode Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Coated Productivity/ Image Quality Priority T-8-41

8

8-180

■■CST-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ MF-A4R Lv.1 Details

Adj of MP Tray A4R paper width To adjust the width of A4R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4R. Use case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When registering a new value Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4R MF-A6R Adj of MP Tray A6R paper width Lv.1 Details To adjust the width of A6R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A6R. Use case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When registering a new value Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A6R

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ

8-180

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ

COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ MF-A4 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ

Adj of MP Tray A4 paper width To adjust the width of A4 paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4. Use case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When registering a new value Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4 MDK1-A4 Adj of Multi Deck (Upper) A4 paper width Lv.1 Details To adjust the width of A4 size paper in the Multi Deck (Upper). When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4. Use case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When the Paper Width Detection PCB is replaced or a new value is registered Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4

8

8-181

MDK1-A5R Lv.1 Details

Adj of Multi Deck(Upper) A5R paper width To adjust the width of A5R size paper in the Multi Deck (Upper). When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A5R. Use case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When the Paper Width Detection PCB is replaced or a new value is registered Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A5R MDK2-A4 Adj of Multi Deck (Mid) A4 paper width Lv.1 Details To adjust the width of A4 size paper in the Multi Deck (Middle). When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4. Use case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When the Paper Width Detection PCB is replaced or a new value is registered Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ

8-181

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ

COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ MDK2-A5R Lv.1 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ

Adj of Multi Deck (Mid) A5R paper width To adjust the width of A5R size paper in the Multi Deck (Middle). When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A5R. Use case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When the Paper Width Detection PCB is replaced or a new value is registered Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A5R MDK3-A4 Adj of Multi Deck (Lower) A4 paper width Lv.1 Details To adjust the width of A4 size paper in the Multi Deck (Lower). When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4. Use case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When the Paper Width Detection PCB is replaced or a new value is registered Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4

8

8-182

MDK3-A5R Lv.1 Details

Adj of Multi Deck(Lower) A5R paper width To adjust the width of A5R size paper in the Multi Deck (Lower). When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A5R. Use case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When the Paper Width Detection PCB is replaced or a new value is registered Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A5R

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ

T-8-42

8-182

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

■■MISC

8-183 COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

COPIER > ADJUST > MISC SEG-ADJ Lv.1 Details

Set criteria for text/photo: front side To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map mode. As the value is larger, the original is more likely judged as a photo document, and as the value is smaller, the original is more likely judged as a text document. Use case To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map mode. As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a photo document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a text document. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the QA Center. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 Default value 0 K-ADJ Set criteria for black text: front side Lv.1 Details To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing. As the value is larger, the text tends to be judged as black. Use case When preferring the text to be judged as black Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 Default value 0 ACS-ADJ Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS:front Lv.1 Details To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode. As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a B&W document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a color document. Use case When adjusting the color recognition level in ACS mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 Default value 0

8

ACS-EN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value ACS-CNT Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value ACS-EN2 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value ACS-CNT2 Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value

Set judgment area in ACS mode:front To set the judgment area in ACS mode. As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -2 to 2 1 Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:front To set the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color presence in ACS mode. As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color presence in ACS mode 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -2 to 2 0 Set ACS mode jdgmt area in DADF mode To set the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading. As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -2 to 2 1 Set ACS jdgmt pixel count area in DADF To set the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color presence in ACS mode at DADF reading. As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color presence in ACS mode at DADF reading 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -2 to 2 0

8-183

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

8-184

COPIER > ADJUST > MISC WT-ER-LV Lv.1 Details

COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

Setting of Drum Cleaning Motor speed To set the speed of Drum Cleaning and Waste Toner Feed Drive Motor (M30). When 10mm uneven pitch occurs, accelerate the speed. Use case When 10mm uneven pitch occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: 120%, 1: 150%, 2: 160%, 3: 170% Default value 0 REOS-PG Set Reos processing coeffct at 1200dpi Lv.2 Details To set an optimal processing coefficient for 1200dpi print. Print PG of the type 55 in COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE, check the images in the 4 areas of this PG, and specify the number of the area in which the character proportion and line width become optimum in the case of PDL1200 dpi setting. After the setting is done, output the vertical and horizontal patterns with 3 dots and 10 spaces, which are the same as the PG above, in 1200 dpi, and confirm that the result is the same as the specified area. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 4 Default value 2 Related service mode COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE SEG-ADJ3 Set criteria for text/photo: back side Lv.1 Details To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path). As the value is larger, the original is more likely judged as a photo document, and as the value is smaller, the original is more likely judged as a text document. Use case When adjusting the classification level of text and photo in Text/ Photo/Map mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 Default value 0

K-ADJ3 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value ACS-ADJ3 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value ACS-EN3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value ACS-CNT3 Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

Set Bk text jdgmt stdrd: back side To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing (back side at duplex reading with 1 path). As the value is increased, the text tends to be detected as black. When preferring the text to be judged as black (back side at duplex reading with 1 path) 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -3 to 3 0 Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS:back To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path). As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a B&W document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a color document. When adjusting the color recognition level in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path) 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -3 to 3 0 Set judgment area in ACS mode:back To set the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path). As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path) 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -2 to 2 1 Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:back To set the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color presence in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path). As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color presence in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path) 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -2 to 2 0

8-184

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED

COPIER > ADJUST > MISC SH-ADJ Lv.1 Details

Adjustment of sharpness: front side To adjust the sharpness of the images which are set in the user mode. - Image to be read in the copyboard reading mode - Image on the first side of a document to be read in the reversepath duplex stream reading mode - Image on the first side of a document to be read in the 1-path duplex stream reading mode As the value is larger, the image gets sharper. If the value is too large, moire is likely to occur in an output image of COPY and SEND. To match the image quality with that of the second side in the 1-path duplex stream reading mode, decrease the value when moire on the first side is stronger than the second side and increase the value when it is weaker. Use case When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY and SEND output Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> SH-ADJ2 SH-ADJ2 Adjustment of sharpness: back side Lv.1 Details To adjust the sharpness of images on the second side of a document, which is set in the user mode, in the 1-path duplex stream reading mode. As the value is larger, the image gets sharper. If the value is too large, moire is likely to occur in an output image of COPY and SEND. To match the image quality with that of the second side in the 1-path duplex stream reading mode, decrease the value when moire on the first side is stronger than the second side, and increase the value when it is weaker. Use case When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY and SEND output Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> SH-ADJ T-8-43

8

8-185

■■EXP-LED COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED PR-EXP-Y Lv.2 Details

Setting of Y Pre-exposure LED current To set the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y). Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost. Decrease the value when potential is not applied well. Use case - When drum ghost is significant (drum pitch is not correct) - When potential is not applied well Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit mA Default value 0 PR-EXP-M Setting of M Pre-exposure LED current Lv.2 Details To set the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M). Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost. Decrease the value when potential is not applied well. Use case - When drum ghost is significant (drum pitch is not correct) - When potential is not applied well Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit mA Default value 0 PR-EXP-C Setting of C Pre-exposure LED current Lv.2 Details To set the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C). Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost. Decrease the value when potential is not applied well. Use case - When drum ghost is significant (drum pitch is not correct) - When potential is not applied well Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit mA Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED

8-185

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED

8-186

COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED PR-EXP-K Lv.2 Details

Setting of Bk Pre-exposure LED current To set the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk). Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost. Decrease the value when potential is not applied well. Use case - When drum ghost is significant (drum pitch is not correct) - When potential is not applied well Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: 40 mA, 1: 80 mA, 2: 80 mA Unit mA Default value 0 T-8-44

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED

8-186

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

FUNCTION

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL STIR-4 Lv.1 Details

■■INSTALL COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL STIR-Y Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Required time Related service mode STIR-M Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Required time Related service mode STIR-C Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Required time Related service mode STIR-K Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Required time Related service mode

8-187

Stirring of Y color developer To stir developer in the Y Developing Assembly. - At installation of the machine - When an image failure occurs Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 0 60sec COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-M, STIR-C, STIR-K, STIR-4 Stirring of M color developer To stir developer in the M Developing Assembly. - At installation of the machine - When an image failure occurs Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 0 60sec COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y, STIR-C, STIR-K, STIR-4 Stirring of C color developer To stir developer in the C Developing Assembly. - At installation of the machine - When an image failure occurs Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 0 60sec COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y, STIR-M, STIR-K, STIR-4 Stirring of Bk color developer To stir developer in the Bk Developing Assembly. - At installation of the machine - When an image failure occurs Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 0 60sec COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y, STIR-M, STIR-C, STIR-4

8

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Required time Related service mode SPLY-H-Y Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SPLY-H-M Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SPLY-H-C Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SPLY-H-K Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

Stirring of all color developer To stir developer in the Developing Assemblies of 4 colors (Y/M/C/ Bk). - At installation of the machine - When an image failure occurs Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 0 60sec COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y, STIR-M, STIR-C, STIR-K Supply of Y toner to Supply Screw Supply Y color toner from the Hopper to the Supply Screw. - At installation - When replacing the Hopper 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Press OK key to stop operation. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Supply of M toner to Supply Screw Supply M color toner from the Hopper to the Supply Screw. - At installation - When replacing the Hopper 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Press OK key to stop operation. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Supply of C toner to Supply Screw Supply C color toner from the Hopper to the Supply Screw. - At installation - When replacing the Hopper 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Press OK key to stop operation. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Supply of Bk toner to Supply Screw Supply Bk color toner from the Hopper to the Supply Screw. - At installation - When replacing the Hopper 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Press OK key to stop operation. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 0

8-187

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL SPLY-H-4 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value STRD-POS Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Related service mode Supplement/memo CARD Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode KEY Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

Supply of 4 colors toner to Supply Screw Supply 4 colors (Y/M/C/Bk) toner from the Hopper to the Supply Screw. - At installation - When replacing the Hopper 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Press OK key to stop operation. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Scan position auto adj in DADF mode To adjust the DADF scanning position automatically. At DADF installation/uninstallation 1) Set a paper for stream reading position adjustment, and then close the DADF. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The operation automatically stops after the adjustment. 3) Write the value displayed by COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>STRDPOS in the service label. Write the adjusted value in the service label. At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS For the details of paper for stream reading position adjustment, refer to the Service Manual. Card number setting To set the card number to be used for Card Reader. A series of numbers from the entered number to the number of cards specified by CARD-RNG can be used. - At installation of the Card Reader - After replacing the HDD 1) Enter the number, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The card management information (department ID and password) is initialized. 0 to 2001 0 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CARD-RNG (LEVEL2) ON/OFF of management key function To set whether to enable or disable the management key function. At installation 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0

8

8-188

INISET-Y Lv.1 Details

Exe of Y Dev Ass’y initial install mode To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Y Developing Assembly. 1. Patch light intensity correction 2. Background correction 3. Potential control 4. Idle rotation of the Developing Assembly 5. Initialization of the Toner Density Sensor 6. Initialization of the Patch Sensor 7. Counter reset of the Developing Assembly After execution, the AINR-OFF setting automatically returns to “0: OFF”. Use case When replacing the Y Developing Assembly Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution - When installing the machine or replacing the Developing Assembly of other color, do not use this item. . - Execute this item after setting “AINR-OFF” to “1: ON”. Display/adj/set range During operation: xxx second (remaining time), At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Default value 0 Required time 155sec Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M, INISET-C, INISET-K, INISET-4, AINR-OFF INISET-M Exe of M Dev Ass’y initial install mode Lv.1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the M Developing Assembly. 1. Patch light intensity correction 2. Background correction 3. Potential control 4. Idle rotation of the Developing Assembly 5. Initialization of the Toner Density Sensor 6. Initialization of the Patch Sensor 7. Counter reset of the Developing Assembly After execution, the AINR-OFF setting automatically returns to “0: OFF”. Use case When replacing the M Developing Assembly Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution - When installing the machine or replacing the Developing Assembly of other color, do not use this item. . - Execute this item after setting “AINR-OFF” to “1: ON”. Display/adj/set range During operation: xxx second (remaining time), At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Default value 0 Required time 155sec Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y, INISET-C, INISET-K, INISET-4, AINR-OFF

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

8-188

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL INISET-C Lv.1 Details

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

Exe of C Dev Ass’y initial install mode To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the C Developing Assembly. 1. Patch light intensity correction 2. Background correction 3. Potential control 4. Idle rotation of the Developing Assembly 5. Initialization of the Toner Density Sensor 6. Initialization of the Patch Sensor 7. Counter reset of the Developing Assembly After execution, the AINR-OFF setting automatically returns to “0: OFF”. Use case When replacing the C Developing Assembly Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution - When installing the machine or replacing the Developing Assembly of other color, do not use this item. . - Execute this item after setting “AINR-OFF” to “1: ON”. Display/adj/set range During operation: xxx second (remaining time), At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Default value 0 Required time 155sec Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y, INISET-M, INISET-K, INISET-4, AINR-OFF AINR-OFF ON/OFF of warm-up rotation deactivation Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF to disable execution of warm-up rotation. Warm-up rotation can be omitted when turning OFF/ON the power to check the image, etc. after the adjustment of warm-up rotation, etc. This mode is executed when warm-up rotation is not needed. Use case - At installation - When replacing the Developing Assembly Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to enable the operation (cancel disabling) before the machine is used by the user. The operation is automatically enabled by executing INISET-Y/M/C/K/4. Display/adj/set range 0: OFF (warm-up rotation enabled), 1: ON (warm-up rotation disabled) Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y, INISET-M, INISET-C, INISET-K, INISET-4

8

8-189

E-RDS Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Set use/no use of Embedded-RDS function To set whether to use the Embedded-RDS function. When using Embedded-RDS Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Not used, 1: Used (All the counter information is sent.) Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COMLOG, RGW-ADR Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol RGW-PORT Set port number of Sales Co’s server Lv.1 Details To set the port number of the sales company’s server to be used for Embedded-RDS. Use case When using Embedded-RDS Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set. Display/adj/set range 1 to 65535 Default value 443 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, COM-TEST, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol COM-TEST Dspl connect result w/ Sales Co’s server Lv.1 Details To display the result of the connection test with the sales company’s server. Use case When using Embedded-RDS Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When connection is completed: OK, When connection is failed: NG Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

8-189

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL COM-LOG Lv.1 Details

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

Dspl connect error w/ Sales Co’s server To display error information when the connection with the sales company’s server failed. Use case When using Embedded-RDS Adj/set/operate method Display only Caution Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set. Display/adj/set range Year, date, time, error code, error detail information (maximum 128 characters) Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, RGW-ADR Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol RGW-ADR URL setting of Sales Company’s server Lv.1 Details To set the URL of the sales company’s server to be used for Embedded-RDS. Use case When using Embedded-RDS Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the URL. 2) Enter the URL, and then press OK key. Caution - Do not use Shift-JIS character strings. - Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set. Display/adj/set range URL Default value https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol CNT-DATE Set counter send start date to SC server Lv.1 Details To set the year, month, date, hour and minute to send counter information to the sales company’s server. This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function is available. Use case When the Embedded-RDS third-party expanded function is available Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range YYYYMMDDHHMM (12 digits) YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date, HH: Hour, MM: Minute Default value 0 Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol

8

8-190

CNT-INTV Lv.1 Details

Set counter send interval to SC server To set the interval of sending counter information to the sales company’s server in a unit of one hour. This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function is available. Use case - When restarting potential control after execution of COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> PO-CNT - When the D-max control condition is changed Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1 to 168 (=1 week) Default value 24 Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol INISET-4 All color Dev Ass’y initial instal mode Lv.1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Assemblies of 4 colors (Y, M, C, Bk). 1. Patch light intensity correction 2. Background correction 3. Potential control 4. Idle rotation of the Developing Assembly 5. Initialization of the Toner Density Sensor 6. Initialization of the Patch Sensor 7. Counter reset of the Developing Assembly After execution, the AINR-OFF setting automatically returns to “0: OFF”. Use case - At installation - When replacing the Developing Assemblies of all colors Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution - Use this item only when replacing Developing Assemblies of 4 colors simultaneously. - Execute this item after setting “AINR-OFF” to “1: ON”. Display/adj/set range During operation: xxx second (remaining time), At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Default value 0 Required time 155sec Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y, INISET-M, INISET-C, INISET-K, AINR-OFF

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

8-190

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL INISET-K Lv.1 Details

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

Exe of Bk Dev Ass’y initial instal mode To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Bk Developing Assembly. 1. Patch light intensity correction 2. Background correction 3. Potential control 4. Idle rotation of the Developing Assembly 5. Initialization of the Toner Density Sensor 6. Initialization of the Patch Sensor 7. Counter reset of the Developing Assembly After execution, the AINR-OFF setting automatically returns to “0: OFF”. Use case When replacing the Bk Developing Assembly Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution - When installing the machine or replacing the Developing Assembly of other color, do not use this item. . - Execute this item after setting “AINR-OFF” to “1: ON”. Display/adj/set range During operation: xxx second (remaining time), At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Default value 0 Required time 155sec Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y, INISET-M, INISET-C, INISET-4, AINR-OFF INIT-ITB Creation of ITB edge profile Lv.1 Details To create the initial ITB edge profile to be used for the ITB displacement correction control. The initial ITB edge profile is created after neutral position of the Steering Roller is determined by the ITB displacement correction control. Use case When replacing the ITB Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When the operation finished normally: OK Default value 0 Required time 3min

8

8-191

BRWS-ACT Lv.1 Details

ON/OFF of service browser To set ON/OFF of service browser. ON/OFF of service browser switches whenever the main power switch is turned OFF/ON after execution. If connection with the UGW server is successful, “OK!” is displayed. If “NG!” is displayed, execute a communication test using COMTEST. The setting is enabled after reboot. Whether the service browser is ON or OFF can be checked in COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWSSTS (1: ON, 2: OFF). Use case - When using the service browser - At operation check Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution After execution, turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After reboot, be sure to check the usage status in COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWS-STS. Display/adj/set range At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> COM-TEST COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWS-STS CDS-CTL Set country/area when using CDS Lv.1 Details To set country/area to enable CDS. Use case When enabling CDS Display/adj/set range Country/area set in COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG, CA (Canada), LA (Latin America) and HK (Hong Kong) Default value The value differs according to the location. Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG Supplement/memo CDS: Contents Delivery System TD-AD-Y Setting of Y-toner density Lv.1 Details To set toner density of the Y Developing Assembly to optimal value at that time. Use case When replacing to a new Y Developing Assembly Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Use this item only when replacing the Developing Assembly. Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> TD-AD-M, TD-AD-C, TD-AD-K, TD-AD-4C TD-AD-M Setting of M-toner density Lv.1 Details To set toner density of the M Developing Assembly to optimal value at that time. Use case When replacing to a new M Developing Assembly Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Use this item only when replacing the Developing Assembly. Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> TD-AD-Y, TD-AD-C, TD-AD-K, TD-AD-4C

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

8-191

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL TD-AD-C Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Default value Related service mode TD-AD-K Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Default value Related service mode TD-AD-4C Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Default value Related service mode BIT-SVC Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

Setting of C-toner density To set toner density of the C Developing Assembly to optimal value at that time. When replacing to a new C Developing Assembly Select the item, and then press OK key. Use this item only when replacing the Developing Assembly. 0 COPIER> FUNCTION> TD-AD-Y, TD-AD-M, TD-AD-K, TD-AD-4C Setting of Bk-toner density To set toner density of the Bk Developing Assembly to optimal value at that time. When replacing to a new Bk Developing Assembly Select the item, and then press OK key. Use this item only when replacing the Developing Assembly. 0 COPIER> FUNCTION> TD-AD-Y, TD-AD-M, TD-AD-C, TD-AD-4C Setting of all color toner density To set toner density of the Developing Assemblies of all colors to 10%. When replacing to a new Developing Assemblies for all colors Select the item, and then press OK key. 0 COPIER> FUNCTION> TD-AD-Y, TD-AD-M, TD-AD-C, TD-AD-K OFF/ON of Web Service of eRDS To switch ON/OFF of the Web Service function of eRDS. When OFF is selected, authentication information cannot be obtained from eRDS. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0:OFF, 1:ON 1

8-192

■■CCD COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD DF-WLVL1 Lv.1 Details

White level adj in book mode: color To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard Glass. Use case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass - When replacing the Scanner Unit - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When the operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL2 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTBK-R, DFTBK-G, DFTBK-B DF-WLVL2 White level adj in DADF mode: color Lv.1 Details To adjust the white level for DADF scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF. Use case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass - When replacing the Scanner Unit - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the DADF. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When the operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B, DFTAR2-R, DFTAR2-G, DFTAR2-B, DFTAR-BW, DFTAR2BW, DFTBK-R, DFTBK-G, DFTBK-B

T-8-45

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD

8-192

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD DF-LNR Lv.1 Details

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD

Deriving of DADF front/back linearity To derive the front/back side linearity characteristics in the use of DADF based on the scanning data of the DADF complex chart (No. 2, No. 10). Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the value of the reader’s service label. (under COPIER> ADJUST> CCD) DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-K2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10, DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10, DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2, DFCH2R10, DFCH2G10, DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When the operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-K2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10, DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10, DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2, DFCH2R10, DFCH2G10, DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10 MTF-CLC Deriving of MTF filter coefficient Lv.1 Details To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the MTF value of the DADF complex chart. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the value of the reader’s service label. (under COPIER> ADJUST> CCD) MTF-MXX, SXX, MTR2-MXX, SXX 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When the operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-M1 to M12, MTF-S1 to S12, MTF2-M1 to M12, MTF2-S1 to S12 DF-WLVL3 White level adj in book mode (B&W) Lv.1 Details To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard Glass. Use case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass - When replacing the Scanner Unit - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When the operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTBK-BW

8

8-193

DF-WLVL4 Lv.1 Details

White level adj in DADF mode (B&W) To adjust the white level for DADF scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF. Use case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass - When replacing the Scanner Unit - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the DADF. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When the operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z BW-TGT Set of B&W shading target value Lv.1 Details After the white level data (X/Y/Z) for the Standard White Plate is set, read the Standard White Plate and set the black and white shading target value. Use case When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Be sure to execute this item after execution of COPIER> ADJUST> CCD>W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z. Display/adj/set range 1 to 2047 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD

T-8-46

8-193

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC

■■LASER

8-194

■■DPC COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER

COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC

LD-ADJ-Y Lv.2 Details

Restore Y Skew Crrct Motor initial pstn When Y-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger than estimation, the Skew Correction Motor (Y) is locked, and color displacement cannot be corrected even when color displacement correction control is executed. This item places the Skew Correction Motor (Y) to the center position in such cases. Use case When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit to identify the failure position Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 0 Required time 10sec LD-ADJ-M Restore M Skew Crrct Motor initial pstn Lv.2 Details When M-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger than estimation, the Skew Correction Motor (M) is locked, and color displacement cannot be corrected even when color displacement correction control is executed. This item places the Skew Correction Motor (M) to the center position in such cases. Use case When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit to identify the failure position Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 0 Required time 10sec LD-ADJ-C Restore C Skew Crrct Motor initial pstn Lv.2 Details When C-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger than estimation, the Skew Correction Motor (C) is locked, and color displacement cannot be corrected even when color displacement correction control is executed. This item places the Skew Correction Motor (C) to the center position in such cases. Use case When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit to identify the failure position Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 0 Required time 10sec

DPC Lv.1 Details

Execution of potential control To execute potential control for the Photosensitive Drum manually. (It is usually executed automatically.) When this item is executed, the same condition is set for development of plain paper and coated paper. Use case When checking potential control operation Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Since the same condition is set for development of plain paper and coated paper groups, be sure to execute D-max control for both groups after execution of this item. Default value 0 Required time 30sec OFST Potential adjustment of Potential Sensor Lv.1 Details To adjust the detection potential offset value of the Potential Sensor automatically. Use case - When replacing the Photosensitive Sensor - At diagnosis for a failure of the Photosensitive Sensor Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution An error is displayed when disconnection/connection failure/ installation failure occurs to the Potential Sensor at the time of replacement. In this case, manually set the value to 0 by EPOTOFST and then make an adjustment. Default value 0 Required time 4sec Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> EPOTOFST

T-8-47

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC

8-194

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC

COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC DRM-RSET Lv.1 Details

COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC

Exe of all color Drums replacement mode When replacement of Drum Unit is completed within 30 minutes, warm-up rotation may not be executed at power-off/on because of high fixing temperature. In such cases, drum potential becomes unstable, causing an image failure to occur. To prevent this symptom, this item forcibly executes the same operation as warm-up rotation. At this time, laser power values, etc., that were corrected according to drum counter for all colors, total charging time, target Vd values for potential control and drum durability are reset. Use case When replacing the Drum Units for all colors Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When the drum replacement mode is enabled, it becomes disabled automatically after execution. Caution Be sure to execute this item after replacement of the Drum Units for all colors. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled (Not executed), 1: Enabled (Executed) Default value 0 Required time 2min Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETY, DRMRSETM, DRMRSETC, DRMRSETK DRMRSETY Forcible exe of Y Drum replacement mode Lv.1 Details When replacement of Drum Unit is completed within 30 minutes, warm-up rotation may not be executed at power-off/on because of high fixing temperature. In such cases, drum potential becomes unstable, causing an image failure to occur. To prevent this symptom, this item forcibly executes the same operation as warm-up rotation. At this time, laser power values, etc., that were corrected according to Y drum counter, total charging time, target Vd values for potential control and drum durability are reset. Use case - When detection of the Drum Unit replacement has failed - When the Drum Unit used in other machine for a while is used as a dummy unit Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When the drum replacement mode is enabled, it becomes disabled automatically after execution. Caution Use a Drum Unit that is not close to the end of life as a dummy unit. When using a Drum Unit that is close to the end of life, it affects the life of developer, etc. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled (Not executed), 1: Enabled (Executed) Default value 0 Required time 2min Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRM-RSET, DRMRSETM, DRMRSETC, DRMRSETK

8

8-195

DRMRSETM Lv.1 Details

Forcible exe of M Drum replacement mode When replacement of Drum Unit is completed within 30 minutes, warm-up rotation may not be executed at power-off/on because of high fixing temperature. In such cases, drum potential becomes unstable, causing an image failure to occur. To prevent this symptom, this item forcibly executes the same operation as warm-up rotation. At this time, laser power values, etc., that were corrected according to M drum counter, total charging time, target Vd values for potential control and drum durability are reset. Use case - When detection of the Drum Unit replacement has failed - When the Drum Unit used in other machine for a while is used as a dummy unit Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When the drum replacement mode is enabled, it becomes disabled automatically after execution. Caution Use a Drum Unit that is not close to the end of life as a dummy unit. When using a Drum Unit that is close to the end of life, it affects the life of developer, etc. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled (Not executed), 1: Enabled (Executed) Default value 0 Required time 2min Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRM-RSET, DRMRSETY, DRMRSETC, DRMRSETK

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC

8-195

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC

COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC DRMRSETC Lv.1 Details

8-196 COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC

Forcible exe of C Drum replacement mode When replacement of Drum Unit is completed within 30 minutes, warm-up rotation may not be executed at power-off/on because of high fixing temperature. In such cases, drum potential becomes unstable, causing an image failure to occur. To prevent this symptom, this item forcibly executes the same operation as warm-up rotation. At this time, laser power values, etc., that were corrected according to C drum counter, total charging time, target Vd values for potential control and drum durability are reset. Use case - When detection of the Drum Unit replacement has failed - When the Drum Unit used in other machine for a while is used as a dummy unit Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When the drum replacement mode is enabled, it becomes disabled automatically after execution. Caution Use a Drum Unit that is not close to the end of life as a dummy unit. When using a Drum Unit that is close to the end of life, it affects the life of developer, etc. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled (Not executed), 1: Enabled (Executed) Default value 0 Required time 2min Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRM-RSET, DRMRSETY, DRMRSETM, DRMRSETK

DRMRSETK Lv.1 Details

Forcible exe of Bk Drum replacement mode When replacement of Drum is completed within 30 minutes, warmup rotation may not be executed at power-off/on because of high fixing temperature. In such cases, drum potential becomes unstable, causing an image failure to occur. To prevent this symptom, this item forcibly executes the same operation as warm-up rotation. At this time, laser power values, etc., that were corrected according to Bk drum counter, total charging time, target Vd values for potential control and drum durability are reset. Use case - When detection of the Drum Unit replacement has failed - When the Drum Unit used in other machine for a while is used as a dummy unit Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When the drum replacement mode is enabled, it becomes disabled automatically after execution. Caution Use a Drum that is not close to the end of life as a dummy unit. When using a Drum that is close to the end of life, it affects the life of developer, etc. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled (Not executed), 1: Enabled (Executed) Default value 0 Required time 2min Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRM-RSET, DRMRSETY, DRMRSETM, DRMRSETC T-8-48

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC

8-196

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CST

■■CST

8-197 COPIER > FUNCTION > CST

COPIER > FUNCTION > CST MF-A4R Lv.1 Details

Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4R stdrd width To register the standard value of A4R paper width (210mm) on the Multi-purpose Tray. Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R. Use case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB is replaced or a new value is registered Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R, and write it down on the service label. Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R MF-A6R Reg Multi-purpose Tray A6R stdrd width Lv.1 Details To register the standard value of A6R paper width (105 mm) on the Multi-purpose Tray. Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R. Use case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB is replaced or a new value is registered Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A6R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R, and write it down on the service label. Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R MF-A4 Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4 standard width Lv.1 Details To register the standard value of A4 paper width (297 mm) on the Multi-purpose Tray. Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4. Use case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB is replaced or a new value is registered Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4 paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4, and write it down on the service label. Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4

8

MDK1-A4 Lv.1 Details

Reg Multi Deck (Upper) A4 standard width To register the standard value of A4 paper width (297 mm) on the Multi Deck (Upper). Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK1-A4. Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4 paper on the Multi Deck (Upper), and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK1-A4, and write it down on the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK1-A4 MDK1-A5R Reg Multi Deck (Upper) A5R stdrd width Lv.1 Details To register the standard value of A5R paper width (148.5 mm) on the Multi Deck (Upper). Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK1A5R. Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A5R paper on the Multi Deck (Upper), and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK1-A5R, and write it down on the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK1-A5R MDK2-A4 Reg Multi Deck (Middle) A4 stdrd width Lv.1 Details To register the standard value of A4 paper width (297 mm) on the Multi Deck (Middle). Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK2-A4. Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4 paper on the Multi Deck (Middle), and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK2-A4, and write it down on the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK2-A4

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CST

8-197

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING

COPIER > FUNCTION > CST MDK2-A5R Lv.1 Details

Reg Multi Deck (Middle) A5R stdrd width To register the standard value of A5R paper width (148.5 mm) on the Multi Deck (Middle). Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK2A5R. Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A5R paper on the Multi Deck (Middle), and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK2-A5R, and write it down on the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK2-A5R MDK3-A4 Reg Multi Deck (Lower) A4 standard width Lv.1 Details To register the standard value of A4 paper width (297 mm) on the Multi Deck (Lower). Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK3-A4. Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4 paper on the Multi Deck (Lower), and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK3-A4, and write it down on the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK3-A4 MDK3-A5R Reg Multi Deck (Lower) A5R stdrd width Lv.1 Details To register the standard value of A5R paper width (148.5 mm) on the Multi Deck (Lower). Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK3A5R. Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A5R paper on the Multi Deck (Lower), and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK3-A5R, and write it down on the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK3-A5R

8-198

■■CLEANING COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING TBLT-CLN Lv.1 Details

ITB cleaning To execute three idle rotations of the ITB and clean the ITB. The Process Unit forms toner patch on the ITB with 100mm interval (for 2 rotations) by doing the operation that is the same at image formation. The Primary Transfer Roller comes into contact with the ITB, but the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is disengaged. This mode is stopped when the last toner patch passes through the ITB Cleaning Unit. Use case - When image failure occurs periodically due to the assumption of soiled ITB - When contacting with the ITB at the time of periodical replacement, etc. Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Stop cleaning, 1: Execute cleaning WIRE-CLN Cleaning of Charge Wire(1-reciprocation) Lv.1 Details To clean the Charging Wire of the Primary Charging Wire/Pretransfer Charging Wire simultaneously (1 reciprocation). Use case - When replacing the Primary Charging Assembly/Pre-transfer charging assembly - When replacing the Charging Wire - When vertical lines occur on an image Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! TB-INSD Cleaning inside ITB Lv.1 Details To execute two idle rotations of the ITB and clean inside of the ITB and Primary Transfer Roller. Both the Primary Transfer Roller and the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller are engaged with ITB. Positive/reverse bias secondary transfer high voltage is alternately applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. After the two idle rotations of the ITB, operation stops. Use case - When image failure occurs periodically due to the assumption of inside ITB or Primary Transfer Roller soiling - When contacting with the inside of ITB at the time of periodical replacement Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!

T-8-49

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING

8-198

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING BK-BNDEX Lv.1 Details

Toner supply to Photosensitive Drum To form the toner band on the Photosensitive Drum, and collect it with the Drum Cleaning Blade to decrease friction between the two. All Photosensitive Drums and the ITB perform idle rotation, and stop after toner cleaning. Use case When image smear occurs due to the Drum Cleaning Blade Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! WIRE-EX Cleaning of Charge Wire(5-reciprocation) Lv.1 Details To clean the Primary Charging Wire and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire simultaneously (5 reciprocations). Polish new Charging Wires to remove foreign matters or protrusions. Use case - When replacing the Primary Charging Assembly/Pre-transfer Charging Assembly - When replacing the Charging Wire - When vertical lines occur on an image Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 2TR-CLN Clean of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Lv.1 Details To clean paper dust adhered on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Both the Primary Transfer Roller and the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller are engaged to the ITB. The Process Unit does operation that is the same at image formation. It forms 4 toner bands which the 4 colors are laid on top of another on the ITB. The base voltage (Vb) calculated with the Secondary Transfer ATVC control is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller until the toner bands pass through, so that toner is adhered on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. After the toner bands passed, Secondary Transfer Outer Roller cleaning control is executed (positive/reverse bias is applied every 2 rotations of the roller). Toner is adhered on the ITB. When the toner adhered on the ITB passed through the ITB Cleaning Unit, the operation is stopped. Use case - When the backside of the paper is soiled by the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller - When contacting with the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller at the time of jam processing, etc. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Stop cleaning, 1: Execute cleaning

8-199

■■FIXING COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING NIP-CHK Lv.1 Details

Check of fixing nip width To check whether the fixing nip width is appropriate by printing. If it is not appropriate, a fixing failure may occur. Use case - When replacing the fixing-related parts (fixing Roller, Pressure Roller) - When a fixing failure occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4/LTR plain paper (75 to 90g/m2) on the main unit deck. 2) Select the cassette, and then press OK key. Printing is started, and a sheet is automatically stopped at the fixing nip (10 seconds) and then is automatically delivered. 3) Measure the nip width. Default value 0 CORE-CHK Oprtn chck:Copper Shield Plt, Core shift Lv.1 Details To execute cleaning of the Copper Shield Plate, and check the operation of it. Use case When checking the Copper Shield Plate control Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 0 T-8-51

T-8-50

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING

8-199

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK

■■PANEL

■■PART-CHK COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL

LCD-CHK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range LED-CHK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

LED-OFF Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method KEY-CHK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

TOUCHCHK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

8-200 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK

Check of LCD Panel dot missing To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the Control Panel. When replacing the LCD Panel 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Check that the LCD Panel lights up in the order of white, black, red, green and blue. 3) Press STOP key to terminate checking. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Check of Control Panel LED To check whether the LED on the Control Panel lights up. When replacing the LCD Panel 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Check that the LED lights up in the order. 3) Use LED-OFF to terminate checking. Termination of Control Panel LED check To terminate the check of LED on the Control Panel. During execution of LED-CHK Select the item, and then press OK key. Check of key input To check the key input on the Control Panel. When replacing the LCD Panel 1) Select the item and press the key on the Control Panel. 2) Check that the input value is displayed. 3) Cancel the selection to terminate checking. Adj of coordinate pstn of Touch Panel To adjust the coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control Panel. When replacing the LCD Panel 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Press the nine “+” keys in sequence.

CL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Specification of operation Clutch To specify the Transfer Cleaning Clutch (CL1) to operate. When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation “1”, and then press OK key. 1 to 7 1: Deck Pickup Clutch (CL1) 2: Multi Deck (Upper) Pickup Clutch (CL2) 3: Multi Deck (Upper) Pullout Clutch (CL5) 4: Multi Deck (Middle) Pickup Clutch (CL3) 5: Multi Deck (Middle) Pullout Clutch (CL6) 6: Multi Deck (Lower) Pickup Clutch (CL4) 7: Multi Deck (Lower) Pullout Clutch (CL7) During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL-ON CL-ON Operation check of Clutch Lv.1 Details To start operation check of the Transfer Cleaning Clutch (CL1). During operation, ON/OFF is repeated with an interval of 3 seconds. Use case When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation Adj/set/operate method 1) Drive the ITB and Drum (COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR > 13) 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. 3) Check the gear of the Transfer Cleaning Assembly. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> MAIN-DRV COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL Supplement/memo Remove the Inner Cover so that the Clutch can be checked visually.

T-8-52

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK

8-200

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK

COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK FAN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK

Specification of operation Fan To specify the Fan to operate. When replacing the Fan/checking the operation Enter the value, and then press OK key. 1 to 23 1: Pre-fixing Feed Suction Fan (FM1) 2: Primary Charging Suction Fan (FM2) 3: Primary Charging Exhaust Fan (FM3) 4: Developing/Pre-transfer Charging Fan (FM4) 5: Color Cleaning Fan (FM5) 6: Fixing Heat Fan (FM6) 7: IH Power Supply Fan (FM7) 8: Power Supply Fan 1 (FM8) 9: Power Supply Fan (FM9) 10: Delivery Heat Fan 1 (FM10) 11: Delivery Heat Fan 2 (FM11) 12: Delivery Heat Fan 3 (FM12) 13: Delivery Heat Fan 4 (FM13) 14: Power Supply Cooling Fan (38V) (FM14) 15: Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Front) (FM15) 16: Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM16) 17: Hopper Cooling Fan (FM18) 18: Hopper Cooling Suction Fan (FM22) 19: Anti-adhesion Fan 1 (FM23) 20: Anti-adhesion Fan 2 (FM24) 21: Decurler Suction Fan (FM30) 22: Decurler Side Suction Fan (FM31) 23: Decurler Lower Exhaust Fan (FM32) During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FAN-ON FAN-ON Operation check of Fan Lv.1 Details To start operation check of the Fan specified by FAN. Use case When replacing the Fan/checking the operation Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FAN

8

8-201

MTR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Specification of operation Motor To specify the Motor to operate. When replacing the Motor/checking the operation Enter the value, and then press OK key. 1 to 21 1: Duplex Left Motor (M32) 2: Duplex Right Motor (M33) 3: Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36) 4: Registration Motor (M34) 5: Pre-fixing Feed Motor (M35) 6: Delivery Motor (M37) 7: Reverse Motor (M38) 8: Left Deck Pickup Motor (M42) 9: Right Deck Pickup Motor (M43) 10: Cassette 3 Pickup Motor (M44) 11: Cassette 4 Pickup Motor (M45) 12: Deck Pickup Motor (M1) 13: Decurler Feeding Motor 1 (M51) 14: Decurler Feeding Motor 2 (M52) 15: Cassette Vertical Path Motor (M39) 16: Right Deck Vertical Path Motor (M40) 17: Left Deck Vertical Path Motor (M41) 18: Vertical Path Upper Feed Motor (M002) 19: Vertical Path Lower Feed Motor (M003) 20: Horizontal Path Feed Motor (M004) 21: Deck Pickup Motor (M001) During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR-ON MTR-ON Operation check of Motor Lv.1 Details To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR. The operation automatically stops after operation of 5 seconds. Use case When replacing the Motor/checking the operation Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution While the Toner Container Drive Motor is active, be sure to remove the Toner Container. Otherwise, toner leakage may occur in the machine. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK

8-201

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK SL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Specification of operation solenoid To specify the Solenoid to operate. When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation Enter the value, and then press OK key. 1 to 10 1: Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL2) 2: Reverse Upper Wheel Detachment Solenoid (SL3) 3: Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid (SL4) 4: Right Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL5) 5: Left Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL6) 6: Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid (SL7) 7: Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid (SL8) 8: Multi Deck (Upper) Pickup Solenoid (SL9) 9: Multi Deck (Middle) Pickup Solenoid (SL10) 10: Multi Deck (Lower) Pickup Solenoid (SL11) During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL-ON SL-ON Operation check of solenoid Lv.1 Details To start operation check of the solenoid specified by SL. The operation stops after “ON for 0.5 sec” => “OFF for 10 sec” => “ON for 0.5 sec” => “OFF for 10 sec” => “ON for 0.5 sec”. Use case When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL T-8-53

■■CLEAR COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR ERR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Default value DC-CON Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Default value R-CON Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Related service mode JAM-HIST Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Default value ERR-HIST Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Default value PWD-CLR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Default value

8

8-202

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

Clear of error code To clear error codes (E000, E001, E002, E003, E717, E719). At error occurrence 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 RAM clear of DC Controller PCB To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB. When clearing RAM data of the DC Controller PCB 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter necessary setting value. - The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. 0 RAM clear of Reader Controller PCB To clear the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB. When clearing RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Before execution of this item, be sure to output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT. After execution, enter necessary setting values. - The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Clear of jam log To clear the jam log. When clearing the jam log Select the item, and then press OK key. 0 Clear of error code log To clear the error code log. When clearing the error code log Select the item, and then press OK key. 0 Clear of system administrator password To clear the password of the system administrator set in the user mode. When clearing the password of the system administrator Select the item, and then press OK key. 0

8-202

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR ADRS-BK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

Clear of address book To clear the address book data. When clearing the address book data 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution The address book data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. CNT-MCON Clear of Main Controller service counter Lv.1 Details To clear the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB. Use case When clearing the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER CNT-DCON Clear of DC Controller service counter Lv.1 Details To clear the service counter (FIN-STPR, FIN-PDDL, SADDLE, STPL) counted by the DC Controller PCB. Use case When clearing the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-2> FIN-STPR, FIN-PDDL, SADDLE, STPL OPTION Clear of service mode setting VL(OPTION) Lv.1 Details To return the value specified in service mode (OPTION) to the default value (value at the time of RAM clear). Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter necessary setting value. - This item is executed for the data on the Main Controller PCB, DC Controller PCB and Reader Controller PCB. Default value 0

8

8-203

MMI Lv.1 Details

Clear of user mode setting value To clear the user mode setting values (excluding values for Control Panel, common settings, and FAX). - Common Settings - Timer Settings - Adjustment/Cleaning - Report Output - System Settings - Copy Settings - Communications Settings - Printer Settings Use case When clearing various setting values of user mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution The setting value is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. Default value 0 MN-CON RAM clear of MNCON PCB SRAM Board Lv.1 Details To clear the RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board. All data on the SRAM Board is initialized. Use case When clearing RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. The machine is automatically rebooted. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Forwarding Settings, Settings/Registration (Preferences), Adjustment/Maintenance, Function Settings, Set Destination, Management Settings, TPM Settings, etc. are deleted. - Inform the user that all images in Inbox will be deleted and get approval for it. - Since the file management information is initialized, images on the HDD cannot be read. - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter necessary setting value. - The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. - If MN-CON is executed while a login application other than Default Authentication is activated, any symptom occurs. (e.g. The login screen is not displayed.) In this case, switch the login application to Default Authentication once so that it returns to normal state. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT CARD Clear of card ID-related data Lv.1 Details To clear the data related to the card ID (department). Use case When clearing the data related to the card ID Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution The data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

8-203

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR W-TN-CLR Lv.1 Details Use case Default value Related service mode CA-KEY Lv.2 Details

8-204 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

Clear of waste toner full alarm & error To clear the Waste Toner Container full alarm/error. When replacing the Waste Toner Containe 0 COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> WT-FL-LM Deletion of CA certificate and key pair To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally registered by the user. Use case When a service person replaces/discards the device Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Check that OK is displayed. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Unless this item is executed at the time of replacement/discard of the device, the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally registered by the user remain in the HDD, which is a problem in terms of security. - Do not execute this item carelessly because the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally registered are deleted. If they are deleted mistakenly, they need to be again registered by the user. If no CA certificate and key pair are additionally registered, the machine condition becomes the same as the one at the time of factory shipment. - When NG is displayed in 2), there is a possibility that deletion was not executed. In this case, surely execute the deletion by initializing the HDD, etc. Display/adj/set range At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG ERDS-DAT Initialization of E-RDS SRAM data Lv.1 Details To initialize the SCM value of the Embedded-RDS stored in the SRAM. SCM values are ON/OFF of E-RDS, server’s port number, server’s SOAP URL, and communication schedule with the server (how often the data is acquired), etc. The value set by COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGWPORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG is cleared. Use case When clearing the setting values of RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, and COM-LOG Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution The method of using the SRAM in E-RDS differs depending on the Bootable version. Therefore, unless the SRAM data is cleared at the time of version upgrade, data inconsistency occurs. Display/adj/set range At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG

KEY-CLR Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution

Display/adj/set range USBM-CLR Lv.1 Details Use case JV-CACHE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method FXTX-CLR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method LANG-CLR Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Supplement/memo FIN-MCON Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Encrypt key clear of HDD Encrypt Board To clear the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board (Security Kit) for replacement. Processing is executed at the time of installation of the Encryption Board, and a new encryption key is generated. When replacing the encryption key for the HDD Encryption Board 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Check that OK is displayed. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Since all data in the HDD becomes unavailable when executing this item, be sure to initialize the HDD after turning OFF/ON the main power switch. At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Initialize USB MEAP priority rgst info To initialize the registered ID data retained in the OS field by calling the API provided by the OS. When a failure occurs in USB MEAP priority registration Cache clear of JAVA application To clear the cache information used by JAVA application. When initializing the JAVA application Select the item, and then press OK key. Clearing fax job information To clear fax job information stored on SRAM. Use this mode to restore from E611-0001. When E611-0001 occurs Select the item, and then press OK key. Uninstallation of language files To uninstall the language files other than Japanese and English files. After execution, the machine automatically enters the download mode. When installing a new language file while there are 7 installed language files 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Select the firmware in which the necessary language is included by SST, and perform downloading. The language files are not uninstalled if a language file is not installed by SST after the execution of this service mode. Screen is displayed in English after the execution, so switch the language. Clearing Finisher info in controller To clear the Finisher information which the Main Controller retains. After execution, set the Delivery Tray again in user mode (Settings/ Registration> Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Settings). When switching to another type of Finisher in the field Select the item, and then press OK key. T-8-54

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

8-204

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R

■■MISC-R

8-205 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R SCANLAMP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range 1PSCLB-A Lv.1 Details

Light-up check of LED Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Correct Color Mismatch. When replacing the LED Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! DADF 2 faces color differ crrct (front) To acquire scanning data on the front side in order to correct the color difference between the front and back side at the time of duplex stream reading. A significant color difference may occur between the front and back side of the image scanned on DADF caused by variations in the light source of the lamp and changes in durability. Such a color difference is corrected by executing 1PSCLB-B following 1PSCLB-A. Use case When a significant color difference occurs between the front and back side caused by variations in the light source of the lamp and changes in durability Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the DADF. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Be sure not to turn OFF/ON the power after OK is displayed by 1PSCLB-A. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-B 1PSCLB-B DADF 2 faces color differ crrct (back) Lv.1 Details To acquire scanning data on the back side in order to correct the color difference between the front and back side at the time of duplex stream reading. A significant color difference may occur between the front and back side of the image scanned on DADF caused by variations in the light source of the lamp and changes in durability. Such a color difference is corrected by executing 1PSCLB-B following 1PSCLB-A. Use case When a significant color difference occurs between the front and back side caused by variations in the light source of the lamp and changes in durability Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the document used by 1PSCLB-A on DADF, so that the front side is faced down and the cyan image is placed at the left rear side. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Be sure not to turn OFF/ON the power after OK is displayed by 1PSCLB-A. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-A

8

1PCLBSET Lv.1 Details

DADF 2 faces color differ crrct ref side To set which side of the front or back side should be the reference side when correcting a color difference at the time of duplex stream reading. The correction result is reflected after executing the following operation: specify the reference side, execute a series of color difference correction processing, and then turn OFF/ON the power. Use case Before starting correction of color difference in DADF duplex printing Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: N/A, 1: Front side, 2: Back side Default value 0 1PCLBUDR DADF 2 faces clr differ crrct lowr limit Lv.1 Details Colors which do not need to be corrected are sometimes corrected as a result of correction of color difference in duplex stream reading. To keep colors which do not need to be corrected, the correction amount is adjusted so that the effect of correction is weakened. The result is reflected when correction of color difference is executed again after the setting is made. When “1: ON” is specified, unnecessary correction is not executed, but an expected effect may not be obtained for other colors. Use case If the color difference occurs on the colors which didn’t have any difference before correction, adjust the correction amount before executing the color difference correction again. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution Expected correction result may not be obtained. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 1PCLBOVR DADF 2 faces clr differ crrct upr limit Lv.1 Details Excessive correction is sometimes made when correcting color difference in duplex stream reading. To control excessive correction, adjust the correction amount to weaken the effect of correction. The result is reflected when correction of color difference is executed again after the setting is made. When “1: Weak control” or “2: Strong control” is specified, excessive correction is not made, but an expected effect may not be obtained for other colors. Use case If the color difference occurs on the colors which didn’t have any difference before correction, adjust the correction amount before executing the color difference correction again. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution Expected correction result may not be obtained. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: No control, 1: Weak control, 2: Strong control Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R

8-205

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R CLM-PLTN Lv.1 Details

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R

Sampling of color copyboard read MTF VL The MTF value for the Reader Unit is sometimes displaced from the factory setting value depending on the condition at transportation/ storage. If the machine is installed without correcting the value, it may cause an image failure such as moire. Therefore, it is necessary to readjust the MTF value by reading the MTF adjustment chart at installation. When color copyboard reading is performed, the controller performs sampling of the MTF value. This value is set in COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-Mx, MTF2-Sx. Use case At installation Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the MTF chart on the Copyboard Glass. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-M1 to 12, MTF2-S1 to 12 BWM-PLTN Sampling of B&W copyboard read MTF value Lv.1 Details The MTF value for the Reader Unit is sometimes displaced from the factory setting value depending on the condition at transportation/ storage. If the machine is installed without correcting the value, it may cause an image failure such as moire. Therefore, it is necessary to readjust the MTF value by reading the MTF adjustment chart at installation. When B&W copyboard reading is performed, the controller performs sampling of the MTF value. This value is set in COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-Mx, MTF2-Sx. Use case At installation Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the MTF chart on the Copyboard Glass. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-M1 to 12, MTF2-S1 to 12 CLM-DF1 Sampling of clr front stream read MTF VL Lv.1 Details The MTF value for the Reader Unit is sometimes displaced from the factory setting value depending on the condition at transportation/ storage. If the machine is installed without correcting the value, it may cause an image failure such as moire. Therefore, it is necessary to readjust the MTF value by reading the MTF adjustment chart at installation. When color front side stream reading is performed, the controller performs sampling of the MTF value. This value is set in COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-Mx, MTF2-Sx. Use case At installation Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the MTF chart on the ADF. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. 3) Perform color front side stream reading with the MTF chart set on the ADF. (CLM-DF1) Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-M1 to 12, MTF2-S1 to 12

8

8-206

BWM-DF1 Lv.1 Details

Sampling of B&W front stream read MTF VL The MTF value for the Reader Unit is sometimes displaced from the factory setting value depending on the condition at transportation/ storage. If the machine is installed without correcting the value, it may cause an image failure such as moire. Therefore, it is necessary to readjust the MTF value by reading the MTF adjustment chart at installation. When B&W front side stream reading is performed, the controller performs sampling of the MTF value. This value is set in COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-Mx, MTF2-Sx. Use case At installation Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the MTF chart on the ADF. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. 3) Perform B&W front side stream reading with the MTF chart set on the ADF. (BWM-DF1) Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-M1 to 12, MTF2-S1 to 12 CLPLT-EN Color copyboard read MTF VL initial set Lv.1 Details To return the MTF value for color copyboard reading to the factory setting value. Since overwriting is performed with the backup data retained in the Reader Controller PCB, the MTF value obtained by sampling of the MTF chart becomes disabled. When CLM-PLTN is executed, the value is automatically set to 1. When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with CLM-PLTN becomes disabled and returned to the factory setting value. Use case When returning the MTF value to the initial setting value upon user’s request in case that a sufficient quality level cannot be obtained on the front side of a color image even performing a fine adjustment with CLM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with CLM-PLTN. Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Factory setting value, 1: Adjustment value at installation Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> CLM-PLTN, CLM-TGT COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-M1 to 12, MTF2-S1 to 12

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R

8-206

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R BWPLT-EN Lv.1 Details

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R

B&W copyboard read MTF value initial set To return the MTF value for B&W copyboard reading to the factory setting value. Since overwriting is performed with the backup data retained in the Reader Controller PCB, the MTF value obtained by sampling of the MTF chart becomes disabled. When BWM-PLTN is executed, the value is automatically set to 1. When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with BWM-PLTN becomes disabled and returned to the factory setting value. Use case When returning the MTF value to the initial setting value upon user’s request in case that a sufficient quality level cannot be obtained on the front side of a B&W image even performing a fine adjustment with BWM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with BWM-PLTN. Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Factory setting value, 1: Adjustment value at installation Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> BWM-PLTN, BWM-TGT COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-M1 to 12, MTF2-S1 to 12 CLDF1-EN Clr front stream read MTF VL initial set Lv.1 Details To return the MTF value for color front side stream reading to the factory setting value. Since overwriting is performed with the backup data retained in the Reader Controller PCB, the MTF value obtained by sampling of the MTF chart becomes disabled. When CLM-DF1 is executed, the value is automatically set to 1. When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with CLM-DF1 becomes disabled and returned to the factory setting value. Use case When returning the MTF value to the initial setting value upon user’s request in case that a sufficient quality level cannot be obtained on the front side of a color image even performing a fine adjustment with CLM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with CLM-DF1. Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Factory setting value, 1: Adjustment value at installation Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> CLM-DF1, CLM-TGT COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-M1 to 12, MTF2-S1 to 12

8

8-207

BWDF1-EN Lv.1 Details

B&W front stream read MTF VL initial set To return the MTF value for B&W front side stream reading to the factory setting value. Since overwriting is performed with the backup data retained in the Reader Controller PCB, the MTF value obtained by sampling of the MTF chart becomes disabled. When BWM-DF1 is executed, the value is automatically set to 1. When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with BWM-DF1 becomes disabled and returned to the factory setting value. Use case When returning the MTF value to the initial setting value upon user’s request in case that a sufficient quality level cannot be obtained on the front side of a B&W image even performing a fine adjustment with BWM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with BWM-DF1. Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Factory setting value, 1: Adjustment value at installation Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> BWM-DF1, BWM-TGT COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-M1 to 12, MTF2-S1 to 12 CLM-TGT Fine adjustment of color MTF value Lv.1 Details To perform the filter processing inside of the Reader Controller so that the MTF value measured by CLM-PLTN/CLM-DF1/CLM-DF2 becomes 55% or lower of the value. When 1 is specified, the MTF correction filter is calculated again, and the MTF value becomes 50% or lower of the value (the image becomes foggy). The backup MTF filter correction coefficient is updated. Use case When decreasing the MTF value (to make the image foggy) upon user’s request (moire, incorrect judgment) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: 55% 1: 50% (The image becomes foggy.) Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R

8-207

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R BWM-TGT Lv.1 Details

Fine adjustment of B&W MTF value To perform the filter processing inside of the Reader Controller so that the MTF value measured by BWM-PLTN/BWM-DF1/BWM-DF2 becomes 55% or lower of the value. When 1 is specified, the MTF correction filter is calculated again, and the MTF value becomes 50% or lower of the value (the image becomes foggy). The backup MTF filter correction coefficient is updated. Use case When decreasing the MTF value (to make the image foggy) upon user’s request (moire, incorrect judgment) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: 55% 1: 50% (The image becomes foggy.) Default value 0 SCANLMP2 Light-up check of LED Lamp Unit: back Lv.1 Details To light up the LED Lamp Unit for back side, which is placed in the ADF, and check whether there is a missing block or no lighting in LED. Use case When replacing the LED Lamp Unit for back side Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! RD-SHPOS Shift to fixed pstn of Reader Scan Unit Lv.2 Details To move the Reader Scanner Unit to the position where it is fixed when moving. When moving the Reader after installation, the Reader Scanner Unit may move and get damage. By moving the Scanner Unit to the specified position and securing it in place with a screw before moving, damage can be prevented. Use case When moving the Reader after installation Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution When the machine is moved after Reader is installed, be sure to shift the Scanner Unit to the specific position to be fixed and then tighten the screws. If the Scanner Unit is not fixed, it might cause damage when the machine is moved. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! T-8-55

■■MISC-P COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P P-PRINT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method MAIN-DRV Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Unit HIST-PRT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method TRS-DATA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method USER-PRT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method LBL-PRNT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method PRE-EXP Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range

8

8-208

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

Output of service mode setting value To print the service mode setting value. Before executing the CLEAR service mode, etc. Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj of user mode Drum cleaning time To adjust the duration to execute cleaning of the Photosensitive Drum to be performed by the user mode. The Photosensitive Drum and ITB perform idle rotation for the specified period of time without high voltage applied. - Upon user’s request - When image smear occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. When the period is too long, flip occurs on the Drum Cleaning Blade or the blade is getting close to the end of life. sec Output of jam and error log To print the jam log and error log. When printing the jam/error log Select the item, and then press OK key. Moving memory reception data to Inbox To move the data received in memory to Inbox. When moving the data received in memory to Inbox Select the item, and then press OK key. Output of user mode list To print the user mode list. When printing the user mode list Select the item, and then press OK key. Output of service label To print the service label. When printing the service label Select the item, and then press OK key. Light-up of Pre-exposure LED To light up the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y/M/C/Bk). Open the Front Cover, and check that the LEDs light up visually. It automatically stops after all light up. When checking that the Pre-exposure LEDs light up Select the item, and then press OK key. Drum memory may occur, so be sure not to execute this item frequently. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!

8-208

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P D-PRINT Lv.1 Details

Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range 1ATVC-EX Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ENV-PRT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ITB-ROT 1TR-ROT ATR-EX Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTR-EX Lv.2 Details

Use case

Adj/set/operate method PJH-P-1 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

Output of service mode (DISPLAY) To output items displayed by DISPLAY in the service mode . Items output by P-PRINT, LBL-PRNT and HIST-PRT, and ALARM are excluded. Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Execute of primary transfer ATVC control To execute the primary transfer ATVC control to optimize the primary transfer voltage. - At occurrence of the primary transfer failure - When replacing the Primary Transfer Roller and ITB Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Temp&hmdy/surface temp of Fix Roll To output data of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/ surface temperature of the Fixing Roller as a log. When figuring out the past temperature inside the machine/fixing temperature information at problem analysis Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! [Not used (for expansion)] [Not used (for expansion)] Execution of ATR contro To execute the ATR control for all colors. - At occurrence of E020 - At operation check Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Execution of warm-up rotation To execute the regular warm-up rotation performed first time for the day excluding the Photosensitive Drum idle rotation and Charging Wire cleaning. - When restarting potential control after execution of COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> PO-CNT - When the D-max control condition is changed Select the item, and then press OK key. Detail info of print job log: 100 jobs To print the print job history for the latest 100 jobs with detailed information. In the case of less than 100 jobs, the history of all print jobs is printed. When printing the print job log with detailed information Select the item, and then press OK key.

8

8-209

PJH-P-2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method PT-LPADJ Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Related service mode AT-IMG-X Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range WTN-OFST Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range USBH-PRT Lv.1 Details Display/adj/set range DISCHG Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Related service mode

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

Detail info of print job log: all jobs To print the history of all print jobs stored in the machine with detailed information (for maximum 5000 jobs). The difference between PJH-P-1 and this item is only the number of jobs printed. When printing the print job log with detailed information Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj of Patch Sensor light intensity To execute correction of patch intensity and correction of background When replacing the Patch Sensor Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-SENS-P, P-SENS-S, P-LED-DA COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> ALF-C Exe image position correction control To execute a series of operation of image position correction control at parts replacement. Image position correction control is usually executed by the printer engine at the specified timing according to operating condition and environmental variation. This service mode is linked with following user mode: Adjustment/ Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Correct Color Mismatch. - When removing the Drum Unit - When releasing the ITB pressure Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Adj of Waste Toner Full Sensor To adjust offset of Waste Toner Full Sensor. - When replacing the Waste Toner Full Sensor - When replacing the DC Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Output of USB device information report To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a report. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Execution of discharge current control To execute the discharging current control. When image failure occurs due to uneven YMC discharge. Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M, PRISMP-C, PRIMACV-Y, PRIMACV-M, PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-M, PRIACI-C

8-209

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P SPIT-EX Lv.1 Details

Execution of toner ejection To supply new toner by ejecting the toner in the Developing Assembly. Use this mode when the image density is low or coarseness occurs on halftone image after the machine is left for a long time. Use case When the image density is low or coarseness occurs on halftone image after the machine is not used for a long time (e.g. summer vacation) Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. DRUM-TH Drum Thermopile operation check Lv.1 Details To check if the Drum Thermopile detects the surface temperature of the Drum correctly. The operation status and the surface temperature are displayed. Use case When replacing the Drum Thermopile Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! FX-HPRS Set Fixing Roll position: transportation Lv.2 Details To secure the Fixing Roller in the position to prevent it from being damaged at transportation. Use case At transportation Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.

■■SYSTEM COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DOWNLOAD Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution CHK-TYPE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

T-8-56

Related service mode Supplement/memo HD-CHECK Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Related service mode HD-CLEAR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range

Related service mode

8

8-210

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM

Shift to download mode To make the machine enter the download mode and wait for a command. Perform downloading by SST or USB. At upgrade 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Perform downloading by SST or USB. Do not turn OFF/ON the power of the device during downloading. HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK exe partition No. To specify the partition number of the HDD to execute HD-CLEAR/ HD-CHECK. When executing HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK Enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 65535 0: Entire HDD 1,2,3,4: Image data storage area 5: Universal file storage area 6,7,8: Universal file storage area (temporary file) 9: PDL file storage area 10: Program file storage area 11: MEAP application 12: Address book/transfer setting 13: MEAP stored data 14: System log storage area 15: Advanced Box area 16: Delivery server area COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> HD-CLEAR, HD-CHECK Universal file: Management information of user setting data, various log data, PDL spool data, and image data, etc. Entire HDD check and recovery To check the entire HDD and execute recovery processing. Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE. During operation: %, When operation finished normally: OK! COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE Initialization of specified partition To initialize the HDD partition specified by CHK-TYPE. When initializing the HDD partition Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE. First 2 digits: Progress ratio (%, Returns to “00” at termination) Last 2 digits: Result at termination (00: Normally finished, Others: Abnormally finished) COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE

8-210

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM

COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DEBUG-1 Lv.2 Details

8-211 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM

Setting of log type and save timing To set the types of logs to be stored and the timing to store logs in the HDD. Logs are used to analyze the cause of a problem. Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Save PLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception 1: Save PLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception/Encode 2: Save SUBLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception/Encode 3: Save SUBLOG in overwrite mode at detection of Reboot/ Exception/Encode Default value 3 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DEBUG-2(LEVEL2) Supplement/memo PLOG can be printed by COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DEBUG-2. SUBLOG cannot be printed. (It should be uploaded from SST.) DEBUG-2 Output of log saved on HDD Lv.2 Details To print the PLOG saved in HDD by COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DEBUG-1. (A4: Approx. 20 sheets) SUBLOG is not printed. It should be uploaded from SST or USB. Use case When printing PLOG Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DEBUG-1(LEVEL2) DSRAMBUP Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM Lv.2 Details To back up the setting data in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of problem occurrence Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old data is deleted. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

DSRAMRES Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Display/adj/set range Related service mode RSRAMBUP Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Display/adj/set range Related service mode RSRAMRES Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Display/adj/set range Related service mode R-REBOOT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Restore of DC Controller PCB SRAM To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB. When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of problem occurrence Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old data is deleted. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Backup of Reader Controller PCB SRAM To back up the setting data in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of problem occurrence Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old data is deleted. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Restore of Reader Controller PCB SRAM To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of problem occurrence Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old data is deleted. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP Reboot of host machine: remote To reboot the host machine by remote control via RUI. When rebooting the host machine by remote control Select the item, and then press OK key. T-8-57

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM

8-211

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

OPTION

8-212 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

DH-SW Lv.2 Details

■■FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW PO-CNT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

ON/OFF of potential control function To set ON/OFF of potential control function. When replacing the Potential Sensor 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to set the value back to 1 (ON) after servicing. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 1 MODEL-SZ Fixed magnifictn & DADF orgnl dtct size Lv.1 Details To set the fixed magnification ratio display and the original detection size with DADF. It is set automatically at the time of installation of the Reader according to the location. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: AB configuration (6R5E) for Japan, 1: Inch configuration (5R4E) for North/Middle/South America, 2: A configuration (3R3E) for Europe, 3: AB/Inch configuration (6R5E) for Asia, Oceania, South America Default value The value differs according to the location. SCANSLCT ON/OFF of scan area calculate function Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of the function to calculate scanning area from the specified paper size. When the paper size is larger than the original size, selecting ON reduces productivity because the scanning area gets larger. Use case When matching the scanning area with the paper size Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF (calculated from the detected original size) 1: ON (calculated from the specified paper size) Default value 0

8

ON/OFF of auto D-half control To set ON/OFF of auto D-half control. Execution interval can be set by COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> INTROT-2. Use case - When D-half-related failure occurs/when identifying the cause of D-half-related failure - Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to set the value back to 1 (ON) after servicing. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> DH-TMG SENS-CNF Setting of original detection size Lv.2 Details To set original detection size according to AB configuration/Inch configuration/A configuration. Select 1 (Inch configuration) for Inch configuration machine or 2 (A configuration) for A configuration machine. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: AB configuration, 1: Inch configuration Default value 0 CONFIG Set country/regn/lang/location/ppr size Lv.1 Details To set the country/region, language, location, paper size configuration for multiple system software in HDD. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the setting item. 2) Switch with +/- key, and then press OK key. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range XX YY.ZZ.AA XX: Country/region JP: Japan, US: USA, GB: Great Britain, FR: France, DE: Germany, IT: Italy, AU: Australia, SG: Singapore, NL: Netherlands, KR: Korea, CN: China, TW: Taiwan, ES: Spain, SE: Sweden, PT: Portugal, NO: Norway, DK: Denmark, FI: Finland, PL: Poland, HU: Hungary, CZ: Czech Republic, SI: Slovenia, GR: Greece, EE: Estonia, RU: Russia, SK: Slovakia, RO: Romania, HR: Croatia, BG: Bulgaria, TR: Turkey, TH: Thailand, VN: Vietnam YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese) ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON) AA: Paper size configuration (00: AB configuration, 01: Inch configuration, 02: A configuration, 03: Inch/AB configuration) Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-212

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW W/SCNR Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value ORG-LGL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value ORG-LTR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value ORG-B5 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

Setting of Reader Unit installation To set installation of the Reader Unit. 1 (Installed) is automatically selected once the Reader Unit is detected at the start of the machine. When installing/removing the Reader Unit 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Not installed, 1: Installed According to the setting at shipment Special paper size set in DADF mode: LGL To set the size of special paper (LGL configuration) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode. - Upon user’s request - When picking up special paper size original from DADF 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 10 0: LEGAL-R, 1: FOOLSCAP-R, 2: OFICIO-R, 3: FOLIO-R, 4: Australian FOOLSCAP-R, 5: Ecuador OFICIO-R, 6: Bolivia OFICIO-R, 7: Argentine OFICIO-R, 8: Argentine LEGAL-R, 9: Government LEGAL-R, 10: Mexico OFICIO-R 0 Special paper size set in DADF mode: LTR To set the size of special paper (LTR configuration) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode. - Upon user’s request - When picking up special paper size original from DADF 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 3 0: LETTER, 1: EXECUTIVE, 2: Argentine LETTER, 3: Government LETTER 0 Special paper size set in DADF mode: B5 To set the size of special paper (B5) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode. - Upon user’s request - When picking up special paper size original from DADF 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: B5, 1: Korean government office paper 0

8

8-213

INTROT-1 Lv.1 Details

Set ini/last rotation auto adj exe intvl To set the paper interval to execute process auto adjustment (ACR toner ejection control) at initial/last rotation. As the value is incremented by 1, the interval is increased by 1 sheet. Use case When matching the use environment of the user Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Increasing the number of sheets (widening the interval) causes higher frequency of image failure. Display/adj/set range 50 to 1000 Unit sheet Default value 100 INTROT-2 Set of last rotation auto adj exe intvl Lv.1 Details To set the paper interval to execute auto adjustment (D-max control, D-half control) at last rotation. As the value is incremented by 1, the paper interval is increased by 1 sheet. When 0 is specified, the control is not executed. Use case When matching the use environment of the user Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Increasing the number of sheets (widening the interval) causes higher frequency of image failure. Display/adj/set range 0 to 20000 0: No control Unit sheet Default value 15000 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-P INTROT-T Clr displace crrct:horz scan after start Lv.1 Details Color displacement may occur right after starting a job (1 to 5 sheets) due to the ITB Unit specific variation. When the setting value is changed, write start position of each color is adjusted according to the color displacement correction level only right after starting a job (1 to 5 sheets), so color displacement can be corrected. Use case When color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use the setting value 4 to 10. Use 0 to 3 in the normal operation. Display/adj/set range 0 to 10 0: Color displacement correction level 0 1: Color displacement correction level 1 2: Color displacement correction level 2 3: Color displacement correction level 3 4 to 10: Not used Default value 2

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-213

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW MODELSZ2 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode To set ON/OFF for global support of document size detection in copyboard reading mode. Use case Upon user’s request (mixed media original with AB/Inch configuration) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Do not use this at the normal service. - The Document Size Sensor (Photo Sensor) is additionally required to correctly detect the document size when the original consists of mixed media (AB/Inch configuration). Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Detected with detection size according to location, 1: Detected with AB/Inch mixed media. Default value 0 SVMD-ENT Setting of entry method to service mode Lv.2 Details To set the way to get in service mode to prevent information leak. Use case As needed Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [2] and [8] at the same time [Settings/Registration] 1: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [4] and [9] at the same time [Settings/Registration] Default value 0 FXWRNLVL Set No.of fed sht FxBltUnt warn dspl lvl Lv.2 Details To set the threshold value for the number of fed sheets to display the life alarm message of Fixing Belt Unit. Use case When switching the warning level of the Fixing Belt Unit Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Error display threshold value 1: The value 20,000 smaller than the error display threshold value 2: The value 40,000 smaller than the error display threshold value 3: The value 60,000 smaller than the error display threshold value Default value 2 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> FX-U-ERR COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> FXMSGSW2

8

8-214

KSIZE-SW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Set of Chinese paper (K-size) support To set to detect/display the Chinese paper (K size paper: 8K, 16K). When using K-size paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Go through the following: COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > MODELSZ; and if MODEL-SZ is “0: AB configuration”, this mode is enabled. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Not supported, 1: Supported Default value JP:0, USA:0, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:1, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ Supplement/memo 8K paper: 270 x 390 mm, 16K paper: 270 x 195 mm ORG-A4R Special paper size set in DADF mode: A4R Lv.2 Details To set the size of special paper (A4R) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode. When picking up A4R size original from the DADF of the Inch/AB configuration models, the size is converted into the specified size so that an image can be formed properly. Use case - Upon user’s request - When picking up special paper size original from DADF Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: A4R, 1: FOLIO-R Default value 0 PDF-RDCT PDF reduction set at forwarding Lv.2 Details To set whether to reduce the image for transmission when converting the image received by IFAX into PDF for e-mail/file transmission. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: With the current setting, 1: Image reduction Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-214

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW REBOOTSW Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

Restart setting at E240 error occurrence To set whether to reboot in the case of E240 error. In the case of E240 error, the machine is automatically rebooted due to the possibility of continuous operation of the drive system while the spooled print job is cleared. Print job can be obtained if selecting the setting not to reboot. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Do not use this at the normal service. - Be sure to get approval from the user by telling the possibility of continuous operation of the drive system in the case of E240 error. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Rebooted, 1: Not rebooted Default value 0 Supplement/memo E240 error: Communication error between the Main Controller and the DC Controller. SJB-UNW Reserve upper limit of secure print job Lv.2 Details To set the upper limit for the number of reserved jobs in secure print job. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: 50 jobs, 1: 90 jobs Default value 0 WEBV-SW ON/OFF of WebDAV function Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of WebDAV function. OFF setting can reduce memory use of the machine. In addition, the following WebDAV-related items are hidden in user mode. - Settings/Registration> Set Destination> Register Destinations> Register New Dest.> File> Protocol> WebDAV - Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Send> Common Settings> Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX Use case When reducing memory use of the machine Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF Default value 0 Related user mode Settings/Registration> Set Destination> Register Destinations> Register New Dest.> File> Protocol> WebDAV Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Send> Common Settings> Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX Supplement/memo WebDAV function is equipped as standard with the machine.

8

8-215

CARD-RNG Lv.2 Details

Card number setting (department number) To set the number of cards (departments) that can be used with the Card Reader. Use case When setting the number of cards (departments) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1 to 1000 Default value 1000 COMP-PRT Img proc memory allocate at job conflict Lv.2 Details When making 2 or more composition prints (page number, number of copies, stamp, date, booklet, watermark), memory for image processing is allotted preferentially to print jobs. Meanwhile, memory for image processing of scan/send and PDL input becomes insufficient depending on the options and document size, and these jobs might be unprocessed until composition prints are finished. If these jobs are interfered each other, image processing can be put forward little by little by allotting memory equally to each job. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Print priority, 1: Equal allocation Default value 0 ARCDT-SW ON/OFF of ARCDAT control Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of ARCDAT control. When “1: OFF” is set, the result of ARCDAT control is not reflected to LUT. When the hue variation occurs in the case of failure value displayed in COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C, turn OFF the ARCDAT control once and check the hue. If hue variation is alleviated, analyze the cause of ARCDAT control error (developer, Patch Sensor, etc.). Use case When hue variation occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to set “0: ON” again when ARCDAT control recovers. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-215

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW SJOB-CL Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

Set of scan job canceling by logout To set whether to cancel the scan job in operation by logout of the user. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - The job with scanning completed cannot be canceled. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 Supplement/memo Scan job: A job after the scanning operation is completed. USB-RCNT Auto connect set at USB device disconnct Lv.2 Details To set to enable/disable automatic connection when the USB device is disconnected. With the setting to disable automatic connection, USB device cannot be used if disconnecting and then connecting the USB device. To enable connection again, the power needs to be turned OFF/ON. With the setting to enable automatic connection, reconnection is made after disconnecting, and then connecting the USB device. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution With the setting to enable automatic connection, disconnecting of 1 area makes automatic connection of all USB devices if there is USB hub. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: No automatic connection, 1: Automatic connection Default value 0 UNLMTBND Over 400 binders print job support set Lv.1 Details To set whether to support print job that exceeds 400 binders. With the setting to support, the machine makes prints by sharing binders according to job attribution. Select “1: Not supported” if the user does not print job* with large quantity of binders. Use case When supporting print job that exceeds 400 binders Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Automatic setting (When the print server is not connected: not supported; When the print server is connected: supported) 1: Not supported Default value 0 Supplement/memo * : A job that requires finishing (such as stapling) in one job. Does not apply in the case of executing finishing with multiple sets of output.

8

8-216

MIBCOUNT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value Related service mode MEAP-PRI Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value CNTR-SW Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value W/RAID Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

Scope range set of Charge Counter MIB To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB (Management Information Base). For customization 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: All charge counters are obtained, 1: Only the displayed counter* is obtained, 2: All charge counters are not obtained *: Counter specified by the following: COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER 1 to 6 0 COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER1 to 6 Setting of MEAP task priority Selecting “1: ON” increases MEAP task priority. When improving processing performance of MEAP 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Init of parts counter replacement timing To return the estimated life of parts counter to the initial value. Upon user’s request 1) Enter 0, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0: Returned to the initial value 0 Setting of HDD Mirroring Kit installation To set installation condition of HDD Mirroring Kit. Select “1: Installed” when installing the HDD Mirroring Kit. Select “0: Not installed” when removing the HDD Mirroring Kit. When installing/removing HDD Mirroring Kit 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Not installed, 1: Installed 0

8-216

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW PSWD-SW Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

Password type set to enter service mode To set the type of password that is required to enter when getting into service mode. 2 types are available: one for “service technician” and the other for “system administrator + service technician”. When selecting the type for “system administrator + service technician”, enter the password for service technician after the password entry by the user’s system administrator. Use case Upon request from the user who concerns security Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: No password, 1: Service technician, 2: System administrator + service technician Default value 0 SM-PSWD Password setting for service technician Lv.2 Details To set password for service technician that is used when getting into service mode. Use case When password is required to get into service mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to select 1 or 2 for PSWD-SW in advance. Display/adj/set range 1 to 99999999 Default value 11111111 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PSWD-SW RPT2SIDE Set of report 1-sided/2-sided output Lv.1 Details To set whether to use 1-sided or 2-sided for report output of service mode. Use case When making 2-sided report output to reduce the number of output pages Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT

8

8-217

BRWS-FAV Lv.2 Details

Set of service browser favorite register To set whether to allow registration of favorites in the browser for service. When 1 is set, favorites in the browser for service can be edited, and any URLs can be accessed. Use case When service engineers edit favorites in the browser for service Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 PSCL-MS Set of auto gradation adjustment: Heavy Lv.1 Details To set at which speed (1/1 speed, 1/2 speed, or 1/3 speed) PASCAL control and D-half control are executed at auto gradation adjustment. When 2 is set, it is executed only for the lastly used speed only. The time required for auto gradation adjustment is short, but switching to another speed takes time. This is suitable for the users who frequently use a specific paper type. When 3 is set, it is executed for all speeds. The time required for auto gradation adjustment is long (approx. 3 minutes), but switching to another speed is quick. This is suitable for the users who use various paper types. Use case When setting the speed according to the materials used by the user Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 2 to 3 2: Lastly used speed, 3: All speeds Default value 2 DMX-DISP ON/OFF auto grdtn adj D-max PASCAL ctrl Lv.1 Details To set whether to execute D-max PASCAL control at full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. When 0 is set, D-max PASCAL control and PASCAL control are executed. Four A4-size sheets are used for test prints (one for D-max PASCAL control and three for PASCAL control). When 1 is set, PASCAL control (gradation adjustment) only is executed. Three A4-size sheets are used for test prints (for PASCAL control). Use case When making the setting according to the usage of the user Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-217

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW STND-PNL Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

Set of 3-D Control Panel installation To set whether the 3-D Control Panel is installed. When the 3-D Control Panel is installed, set “1: Installed”. Use case At installation of the 3-D Control Panel Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Default value 0 INVALPDL Disabling PDL license Lv.1 Details To disable the registered PDL license. When “1: Disabled” is set, PDL is disabled even if a PDL license is registered. This is set to the machines installed at convenience stores, which do not allow PDL to be used. Use case When prohibiting the use of PDL Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Registered PDL license is enabled, 1: Disabled Default value 0 IMGCNTPR Setting of image quality mode Lv.1 Details To set the image quality mode. The counter priority mode is applied when 1 is set, and the image quality priority mode is applied when 0 is set. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Image quality priority mode, 1: Counter priority mode Default value 0 CDS-FIRM Set to allow firmware update by admin Lv.1 Details To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to perform firmware update linked with CDS and collection of log files. When 1 is set, “Deliver Update” is added to remote UI, and “Firmware Update” is added to the Register/Update Software menu of local UI. Log files can be collected from remote UI. Use case When allowing the administrator to update the firmware and collect log files Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use it for purposes other than collecting log files. In Japan, the firmware cannot be updated by user. Be sure to return the value to 0 after use. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value EUR: 1, Other: 0 Supplement/memo CDS: Content Delivery System

8

8-218

CDS-MEAP Lv.1 Details

Set to allow MEAP installation by admin To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to install MEAP applications and enable iR options from CDS. When “1: Enabled” is set, Updater can be activated from the user mode. Use case When allowing the administrator to install MEAP applications and enable iR options from CDS Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 1 Supplement/memo CDS: Content Delivery System CDS-UGW Set to allow firmware update from UGW Lv.1 Details To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW server. When “1: Enabled” is set, Updater accepts the operation from the UGW server in cooperation with CDS. Use case When allowing update of the firmware from the UGW server Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 Supplement/memo CDS: Content Delivery System LOCLFIRM Set to allow firmware update by file Lv.1 Details To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to update the firmware from the remote UI using a local file. This update is executed as a measure for vulnerability in emergency situations. Use case When prohibiting the administrator to update the firmware using a file Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 1

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-218

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW T1HP-POS Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

Set pry-trns diseng/eng pstn:initial VL To set the engagement or disengagement position as the home position of the Primary Transfer Rollers (Y, M, C). When “0: Engagement position” is set, the Primary Transfer Rollers of 4 colors engage the ITB in the initial state. When “1: Disengagement position” is set, the Primary Transfer Roller of Bk only engages the ITB in the initial state. Set “0: Engagement position” if you give priority to the first copy time in the color mode. Set “1: Disengagement position” if you give priority to the first copy time in the B&W mode. Use case Upon user’s request (Frequency to use color/B&W) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Engagement position, 1: Disengagement position Default value 0 MC-FANSW Set of Controller Cooling Fan control Lv.1 Details To set full speed/half speed to fan control of the Controller Cooling Fan 1 and 2. When “1: Full speed” is set, the heat exhaust efficiency is enhanced. Use case - When HDD damage occurs multiple times - When the machine is installed in a high temperature environment in which HDD damage is likely to occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Half speed, 1: Full speed Default value 0

8

8-219

OP-FAN Lv.2 Details

Setting of Anti-adhesion Fan airflow In the normal sequence, the Anti-adhesion Fan is set to OFF for the reverse delivery, and 1/1 speed for the straight delivery or 2-sided delivery. Set the airflow of the Anti-adhesion Fan when the delivery adhesion occurs or the delivery stackability decreases. Set to 1 (1/2 speed) or 2 (1/1 speed) when the delivery adhesion occurs at the time of the reverse delivery. Set to 1 (1/2 speed) or 3 (OFF) when the delivery stackability decreases at the time of the straight delivery or the 2-sided delivery. Use case - When the delivery adhesion occurs at the time of the reverse delivery - When the delivery stackability is low at the time of the straight delivery or the 2-sided delivery Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution - When changing the value from 3 to 1 or 2, the delivery stackability decreases. - When changing the value from 2 to 1 or 3, the delivery adhesion may deteriorate. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Normal sequence, 1: 1/2 speed, 2: 1/1 speed, 3: OFF Default value 0 BXNUPLOG ON/OFF of Nup log at Inbox print Lv.2 Details To set whether to keep Nup log at Inbox print. Use case When keeping Nup log at Inbox print Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 1 SDLMTWRN ON/OFF cpcty warn dspl at E-mail/I-Fax TX Lv.1 Details To set whether to display the warning message when sending data that exceeds the upper limit value for the transmission data size via E-mail/I-Fax. Use case For customization Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related user mode Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data Size for Sending

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-219

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW JLK-PWSC Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

ON/OFF of PCAM password auth doc scan To set whether to scan the PCAM password authentication document with the MEAP application. Use case When scanning the PCAM password authentication document Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 FAX-INT Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode Lv.2 Details To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception print automatically. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Normal, 1: Interruption operation mode Default value 0 PDL-Z-LG Setting of drawing algorithm Lv.1 Details To switch the drawing algorithm of the iR C series and the iR-ADV C series to obtain output the user expects. When 0 is set, image is output as displayed on the screen by the new algorithm adopted from the iR-ADV C Series. Pseudo outline (boundary for processing divided graphics separately) occurred with the iR C series does not occur. However, when PDL job with special data structure is sent, output the user expects may not be obtained. When 1 is set, the drawing algorithm adopted by the conventional iR C series is used. Output equivalent to that of the iR C Series can be obtained; however, drawing-related phenomenon occurred with the series occurs. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use setting value 2 and 3. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Drawing algorithm of iR-ADV C series, 1: Drawing algorithm of the conventional iR C series, 2, 3: For R&D use Default value 0

8

8-220

CDS-LVUP Lv.1 Details

Set to allow CDS periodical update To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to use the periodical update function linked with CDS. When 1 is set, the periodical update function can be used from user mode. Use case When allowing the user to use the periodical update function Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not set 1 in Japan. The firmware cannot be updated by user. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value The value differs according to the location. Supplement/memo CDS: Content Delivery System AMSOFFSW OFF of AMS mode Lv.1 Details Normally, the machine enters in AMS (ACQ) mode automatically when the following conditions are satisfied. - AMS license which is an iR option is installed. - The AMS-supported login application is activated. When turning OFF the AMS mode, set 0. Use case When turning OFF the AMS mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enable the AMS mode. - Enter the iR option license for AMS. - Make settings to activate SSOH. - Turn OFF/ON the main power switch twice. - Press Counter button, and display the Device Configuration screen. - Check that “ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM” is displayed. 2) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 4) Check that AMS mode is disabled. - Press Counter button, and display the Device Configuration screen. - Check that “ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM” is not displayed. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value JP:0 USA:1 EUR:1 AU:1 CN:1 KR:1 TW:1 ASIA:1 UA-OFFSW ON/OFF of unified auth function Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of the Unified Authentication function. Set the value to 0 when not preferring to use the Unified Authentication function because of security concern. Use case Upon user’s request (not to use the Unified Authentication function) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-220

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW MIB-NVTA Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

RFC-compatible character stringMIB write As default, MIB object which NVT-ASCII can be written exists in order to link with LUI entry value. This violates RFC order, so a problem like garbled 2-byte characters may occur in the SNMP monitoring system, such as the 3rd vendor’s MPS. Whether non-RFC-compatible character strings are written in MIB can be set using this mode. When 1 is set, only the character strings which are strictly compatible with RFC are written. (Writing operation is executed from the SNMP manager.) LUI is not linked. Use case Upon user’s request (operation with RFC-compatible system) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Compatible in a conventional manner, 1: RFC-compatible, 2 to 3: Not used Default value 0 Supplement/memo RFC: Document of internet-related technical standards NVT-ASCII: Network Virtual Terminal-ASCII MIB-EXT ON/OFF of link with Ex-Cont on network Lv.1 Details To set whether to link with External Controller on network (HewlettPackard Co.). Use case When linking with External Controller of Hewlett-Packard Co. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: OFF, 1: ON, 2: Not used Default value 0 SVC-RUI Enabling of RUI function for servicing Lv.1 Details To set whether to enable the RUI function for servicing (not provided to end users). When 0 is set, the RUI function is disabled. When setting the value other than 0, RUI function is enabled. The value entered becomes password to use the RUI function. The data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. Use case When preferring to use the import function of background image file of main menu Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. The data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 Default value 0

8

8-221

LCDSFLG Lv.1 Details

Enabling of local CDS server To set whether to use the local CDS server. When CDSFIRM is 1, this setting is enabled. Use case When using the local CDS server Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When CDSFIRM is 1, this setting is enabled. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM Related user mode Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Software Management Setting> Setting Supplement/memo When local CDS is used, iW EMC/MC device firmware update plugin is required. STNDBY-B Setting of standby mode Lv.1 Details To set the continu of standby mode In standby mode, the Fixing Roller is heated and rotated while it is in the contact state at waiting time so it is possible to output with the minimum FCOT. Use case Upon user’s request (FCOT) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution By setting a value other than 0 when the machine is not frequently used, the life may become shorter than the estimated life. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: Continu the standby mode Default value 0 STNDBY-A Setting of operation at sleep Lv.1 Details To set the sleep operation when pressing the Control Panel Power Switch. Normally, the entire machine shifts to sleep mode. When 1 is set, only the LCD backlight is turned off. Use case Upon user’s request (FCOT) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution By setting 1 when the machine is not frequently used, the life may become shorter than the estimated life. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: The entire machine is in sleep mode, 1: Only the LDC backligh is turned off Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > STNDBY-B

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-221

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW BXSHIFT Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

Setting of binding at 0mm binding margin To set whether to judge the job as a job “without binding” when storing a PDL job in Inbox while the binding margin is set to “0”. By setting the binding margin to 0 mm while “0” is set, the job is processed as “without binding”. “Booklet” in “Options” on the Inbox screen can be also used.When “1” is set, it is judged as “with binding” even the binding margin is 0 mm so “Booklet”, which has an exclusive relationship with “binding”, cannot be used. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Without binding, 1: With binding Default value 0 STRT-SEQ Set of image quality control at startup Lv.1 Details To set the threshold value for image quality control to be executed at startup when there is any changes in an environment. +: Likely to execute image quality control -: Less likely to execute image quality control Use case When prioritizing productivity over image quality stability, or when prioritizing image quality stability over productivity Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution Do not set -3 without permission from the QA Center. Otherwise, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: Not used, -3: 30-second startup (not execute image quality control), -2: Lowest threshold value, -1: Low threshold value, 0: Default, 1: Moderate threshold value, 2: High threshold value, 3: Highest threshold value, 4: Execute image quality control every time Default value 0

8

8-222

ENV-SEQ Lv.1 Details

Set image auto adj at environment change To set auto adjustment of image which is executed according to the environment changes. Use case When prioritizing productivity over image quality stability, or when prioritizing image quality stability over FCOT Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When 5 is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range 0 to 5 0: Execute control due to environment change 1: Execute control even environment change is small 2: Execute control only when environment change is very large 3: Execute control other than image adjustment due to environment change (execute color displacement correction) 4: Execute control other than image adjustment and color displacement correction due to environment change (without using toner) 5: Not execute control Default value 0 HOME-SW Set screen displayed with Main Menu key Lv.1 Details To set whether to display the main menu screen or the screen registered as the startup screen when pressing Main Menu key. Use case Upon user’s request (to change the startup screen) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Main Menu screen, 1: Screen registered as the startup screen Default value 0 NO-LGOUT Display/hide of logout button Lv.1 Details To set whether to display or hide [Logout] button. When 0 is set, [Logout] button is displayed on the screen, and logout with the ID key is enabled. (Normal) When 1 is set, [Logout] button is not displayed, and logout with the ID key is disabled. Use case Upon user’s request (for customization, etc.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Display, 1: Hide Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-222

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW T-DLV-BK Lv.2 Details Use case

8-223 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

Set of Bk-toner level displaying alarm To set the Bk-toner level to display “absence of toner” message. When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the usage status Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Since toner level is calculated based on the developing supply count, some errors may occur. Display/adj/set range 0 to 40 Unit % Default value JP:10, USA:10, EUR:5, AU:10, CN:10, KR:10, TW:10, ASIA:10 Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-CL T-DLV-CL Set Y/M/C-toner level displaying alarm Lv.2 Details To set the Y/M/C-toner level to display “absence of toner” message. Use case When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the usage status Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Since toner level is calculated based on the developing supply count, some errors may occur. Display/adj/set range 0 to 40 Unit % Default value 5 Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK JM-ERR-D Handling 0CAx jam as an error: DCON Lv.2 Details To display 0CAF jam as the error E996-0CAF. By handling the jam as an error, the machine stops, so that loss of the log can be prevented. Be sure to enable the service mode at the user’s site where 0CAF jam occurs. After that, if the error E996-0CAF occurs, the log which has been backed up can be obtained. Use case When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0CAF jam Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > JM-ERR-R

JM-ERR-R Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode LOW-SEQ Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value DSC-RPT Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value ASLPMAX Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value

Handling 0071 jam as an error: RCON To display 0071 jam as the error E996-0071. By handling the jam as an error, the machine stops, so that loss of the log can be prevented. Be sure to enable the service mode at the user’s site where 0CAx jam occurs. After that, if the error E996-0CAx occurs, the log which has been backed up can be obtained. When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0071 jam 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error 0 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > JM-ERR-D Setting of low speed control To set the low speed control. When prioritizing productivity over image quality stability, or when prioritizing image quality stability over productivity and FCOT Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 5 0: Not execute low speed control, 1: Image quality top priority, 2: Image quality priority, 3: Time priority, 4 to 5: Not used 0 Set discharge current ctrl: condensation To execute the discharge current control at condensation. If condensation is built up at startup, output of the charged high voltage may becomes unstable. If voltage is insufficient, horizontal lines appear. If it is too much, image smear occurs. When 0 is set, discharge current control is executed for 30 seconds in total. When 1 to 3 is set, the control is executed multiple times. As the value is larger, the number of times to execute the control is increased. When horizontal lines or an image smear occurs Select the item, and then press OK key. 0 to 3 0: Normal, 1: Execute the control 3 times, 2: 6 times, 3: 9 times 0 Set auto sleep shift time maximum value Set auto sleep shift time maximum value Upon user’s request Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: 4 hours 1: 60 minutes JP:0 USA:0 EUR:1 AU:0 CN:0 KR:0 TW:0 ASIA:0 T-8-58

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-223

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

■■DSPLY-SW

8-224 COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW UI-COPY Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/hide of copy screen To set whether to display or hide the copy function. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1 UI-BOX Display/hide of Inbox screen Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Inbox function. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: No Inbox function (Storing is not available even with PDL to Inbox.) 1: Inbox function is active 2: Inbox function is active (with limitation; Storing is available with PDL to Inbox despite no display on the Control Panel/remote UI) Default value 1 Related user mode Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Mail Box The setting value is changed to 2 when turning OFF the foregoing user mode, and the value is changed to 1 when turning ON the mode at power-off/on. As the setting value of this service mode is changed, the setting value of the foregoing user mode is also changed. UI-SEND Display/hide of send screen Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the SEND function. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1 UI-FAX Display/hide of FAX screen Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the FAX function. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1

8

NWERR-SW Lv.2 Details

OFF/ON of network-related error display To set OFF/ON of network-related error message display. When setting “0: OFF” while the machine is not connected to network, the error message “Check the network connection.” is not displayed. Use case When using the machine as a copy machine Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 1: Normal model, 0: Self-copy model UISW-DSP ON/OFF of user screen switch display Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of the switch to change the standard screen and simple screen for the users. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 T-CRG-SW ON/OFF of Toner Cntner rplce user mode Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Toner Container replacement screen in user mode. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

8-224

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW FXMSG-SW Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

ON/OFF of Fixing Ass’y rplce warning dis To set whether to display the warning prompting to replace the Fixing Assembly on the Control Panel when the Fixing Assembly reaches its life. Criteria for judging the life differ, depending on the setting value of FXMSGSW2. FXMSGSW2 = 0: Fixing Assembly Motor current value + Fixing Roller rotation time FXMSGSW2 = 1: Items above + Total number of sheets fed on Fixing Roller Use case When displaying the Fixing Assembly replacement message Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> FXMSGSW2 COPIER> DISPLAY> ALARM-2 COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING>FX-MTR2 to 8, FX-U-TM1 COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT ANIM-SW Screen switch set from MEAP to warning Lv.2 Details To set to enable/disable switching from MEAP screen to the error/ jam screen. If disabling this mode, the screen will not be switched to the warning screen in the case of an error/jam/alarm, and a message is appeared on the MEAP screen indicating to contact the service person. Use case When setting switching from MEAP screen to the error/jam screen Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> MEAP-DSP UI-PRINT Display/hide of print job screen Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the print job screen. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1

IMGC-ADJ Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode UI-RSCAN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value UI-EPRNT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value UI-WEB Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8

8-225

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

Dis/hide of img adj item in user mode To set whether to display or hide the item relating to image adjustment in user mode. When selecting “1: Display”, detailed image adjustment procedure will be displayed only for the duplicated paper specified with the following settings: Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Type Management Settings. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Preferences> Paper Settings> Set Paper Type Management Display/hide of remote scan screen To set whether to display or hide the remote scan screen on the Control Panel. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 Display/hide of extended print screen To set whether to display or hide the extended print screen (print screen for print server). Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 Display/hide of Web browser screen To set whether to display or hide the Web browser screen. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1

8-225

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW UI-HOLD Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

Display/hide of hold job screen To set whether to display the hold job screen on the Control Panel. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Hide (when POD function is OFF and JAL is OFF) 1: Display (when POD function is ON and JAL is OFF) 2: Hide (when POD function is OFF and JAL is ON) 3: Hide (when POD function is ON and JAL is ON) Default value 1 Supplement/memo POD function: JDF + HOLD functions JAL function: A function to save the print result as a thumbnail. RMT-CNSL ON/OFF of MEAP console screen Lv.1 Details Selecting “1: ON” enables to obtain log for Function Composer on console screen. Use case When obtaining log for Function Composer Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 UI-SBOX ON/OFF of Advanced Box screen display Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel. Use case When not displaying the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value EUR: 0, Other: 1 Related user mode Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Advanced Box / Network The setting value is changed to 0 when turning OFF the foregoing user mode, and the value is changed to 1 when turning ON the mode at power-off/on.

8

8-226

UI-MEM Lv.2 Details

ON/OFF of memory media screen display To set ON/OFF of the memory media screen display on the Control Panel. Use case When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related user mode Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Memory Media The setting value is changed to 0 when turning OFF the foregoing user mode, and the value is changed to 1 when turning ON the mode at power-off/on. UI-NAVI Dis/hide of Tutorial Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide “Tutorial” in the main menu. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1 FCOT-DSP ON/OFF of FCOT priority mode in usermode Lv.1 Details To set whether to display “Color/Black Priority for First Print Time” in the user mode. When 1 is set, the home position of the Primary Transfer Rollers for Y, M, C can be switched. (Equivalent to COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> T1HP-POS.) Use case When setting “Color/Black Priority for First Print Time” in the user mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> T1HP-POS Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Color/Black Priority for First Print Time

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

8-226

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW FXMSGSW2 Lv.2 Details

Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

SLS-PTH Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value UI-CUSTM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value CNTCNFSW Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

ON/OFF of Fix Belt Uni life criteria To set whether the total number of sheets fed on Fixing Roller is included as one of the criteria for judging the message indication of the Fixing Assembly replacement. When FXMSG-SW is 1, this setting is enabled. Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> FXMSG-SW COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> FXWRNLVL COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT Adj developer ejectn interval:continuous In case of many continuous jobs, the developer might increase or decrease too much. To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the interval (the number of sheets) which the developer is forcibly ejected. When the developer increases or decreases too much at continuous jobs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 10 0 ON/OFF of custom menu screen display To set ON/OFF of the custom menu screen display on the Control Panel. When not displaying the custom menu screen on the Control Panel 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 ON/OFF of Counter Check screen display To set whether to display the Counter Check screen. When 1 is set, the Counter Check screen can be displayed. The setting value automatically returns to 0 (OFF) when the screen is closed. When checking the counter at servicing Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER>OPTION>BODY>BUSI-SW

8

8-227

SDTM-DSP Lv.1 Details

Display/hide of auto shutdown shift time To set whether to display or hide auto shutdown shift time menu in user mode. Use case When displaying or hiding auto shutdown shift time menu Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:1, AU:1, CN:1, KR:1, TW:1, ASIA:1 Related user mode Settings/Registration> Preferences> Time/Energy Settings> Auto Shutdown Time Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER>OPTION>CLEANING>PR-CLN

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

T-8-59

8-227

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

■■IMG-FIX

8-228 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX AUTO-DH Lv.1 Details

ON/OFF of Drum clean at warm-up rotation To set OFF/ON of the Photosensitive Drum cleaning at warm-up rotations. When setting “1: ON”, set the cleaning time in increments of 1 second with D-CLN-TM. Use case When image smear occurs in an HH environment Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> D-CLN-TM FX-WUT Set of Fixing Assembly warm-up time Lv.2 Details To set the warm-up time of the Fixing Assembly, which is performed first time for the day. Use “0: Initial value” in the normal operation. Extend the time as needed when a fixing failure occurs first time for the day. Use case - When a fixing failure occurs first time for the day - In the environment of 15 deg C or lower - When using media out of the specifications Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 4 0: Initial value, 1: Initial value + 30 seconds, 2: Initial value + 60 seconds, 3: Initial value + 120 seconds, 4: Initial value + 180 seconds Unit sec Default value 0 TMP-P1-1 Adj of Plain ppr 1 print temperature 1 Lv.2 Details To adjust the print temperature 1 for “Plain 1.” Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs, and set a negative value when a separation failure or wrinkles occur. When an image failure occurs, adjust appropriately. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, a separation failure, wrinkles or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -3 or less is set, a fixing failure might occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

8

TMP-P1-2 Lv.2 Details

Plain ppr1ini rotn temp, print temp 2&3 To adjust the initial ration temperature and print temperature 2 and 3 for “Plain 1”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs, and set a negative value when a separation failure or wrinkles occur. When an image failure occurs, adjust appropriately. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, a separation failure, wrinkles or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -3 or less is set, a fixing failure might occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-P2-1 Adj of plain ppr 2 print temperature 1 Lv.2 Details To adjust the print temperature 1 for “Plain 2”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs, and set a negative value when a separation failure or wrinkles occur. When an image failure occurs, adjust appropriately. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, a separation failure, wrinkles or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -3 or less is set, a fixing failure might occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-P2-2 Plain ppr2 ini rotn temp, print temp 2&3 Lv.2 Details To adjust the initial ration temperature and print temperature 2 and 3 for “Plain 2”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs, and set a negative value when a separation failure or wrinkles occur. When an image failure occurs, adjust appropriately. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, a separation failure, wrinkles or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -3 or less is set, a fixing failure might occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-228

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX TMP-H1-1 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Adj of heavy ppr 1 print temperature 1 To adjust the print temperature 1 for “Heavy 1.” Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs, and set a negative value when a separation failure or wrinkles occur. When an image failure occurs, adjust appropriately. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, a separation failure, wrinkles or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -3 or less is set, a fixing failure might occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-H1-2 Heavy ppr1 ini rotn temp, print temp 2&3 Lv.2 Details To adjust the initial ration temperature and print temperature 2 and 3 for “Heavy 1”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs, and set a negative value when a separation failure or wrinkles occur. When an image failure occurs, adjust appropriately. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, a separation failure, wrinkles or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -3 or less is set, a fixing failure might occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-H2-1 Adj of heavy ppr 2 print temperature 1 Lv.2 Details To adjust the print temperature 1 for “Heavy 2”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of gloss occurs. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

8

8-229

TMP-H2-2 Lv.2 Details

Heavy ppr2 ini rotn temp, print temp 2&3 To adjust the initial rotation temperature, print temperature 2 and 3 for “Heavy 2”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of gloss occurs. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-H3-1 Adj of heavy ppr 3 print temperature 1 Lv.2 Details To adjust the print temperature 1 for “Heavy 3”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of gloss occurs. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-H3-2 Heavy ppr3 ini rotn temp, print temp 2&3 Lv.2 Details To adjust the initial rotation temperature, print temperature 2 and 3 for “Heavy 3”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of gloss occurs. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-229

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX TMP-H4-1 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Adj of heavy ppr 4 print temperature 1 To adjust the print temperature 1 for “Heavy 4”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of gloss occurs. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-H4-2 Heavy ppr4 ini rotn temp, print temp 2&3 Lv.2 Details To adjust the initial rotation temperature, print temperature 2 and 3 for “Heavy 4”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of gloss occurs. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-C1 Coat ppr1 ini rotn temp, print temp 1-3 Lv.2 Details To adjust the initial rotation temperature and print temperature 1 to 3 for “Coated 1” which paper weight is customized to 106 to 128g/m2. Set a negative value when wrinkles occur. In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of gloss occurs. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When wrinkles, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

8

8-230

TMP-C2 Lv.2 Details

Coat ppr2 ini rotn temp, print temp 1-3 To adjust the initial rotation temperature, print temperature 1 to 3 for “Coated 2”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of gloss occurs. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-C3 Coat ppr3 ini rotn temp, print temp 1-3 Lv.2 Details To adjust the initial rotation temperature, print temperature 1 to 3 for “Coated 3”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of gloss occurs. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-C4 Coat ppr4 ini rotn temp, print temp 1-3 Lv.2 Details To adjust the initial rotation temperature, print temperature 1 to 3 for “Coated 4”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of gloss occurs. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-230

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX TMP-THIN Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Thin ppr ini rotn temp, print temp 1-3 To adjust the initial rotation temperature, print temperature 1 to 3 for “Thin Paper”. Set a negative value when wrinkles or separation failure occurs, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of gloss occurs. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When wrinkles, a separation failure, a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-OHT Transp ini rotn temp, print temp 1-3 Lv.2 Details To adjust the initial rotation temperature, print temperature 1 to 3 for “Transparency”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of gloss occurs. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

8

8-231

DWN-TMP Lv.2 Details

Adj of down sequence temp threshold VL To adjust the threshold value of the temperature at which the machine goes into the down sequence. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. As the value is smaller, the machine is less likely to enter the down sequence. When -4 is set, the down sequence actually becomes OFF. Use case When making adjustments according to the environment and media. Conditions in which the machine is likely to go into the down sequence (the center temperature is likely to be lowered): 500 sheets or more of continuous prints in small size, LL or lower temperature environment, input voltage lower than the rated voltage Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 -3: -9 deg C, -2: -6 deg C, -1: -3 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +3 deg C, 2: +6 deg C, 3: +9 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-R1-1 Adj rcycl paper 1 print temperature 1 Lv.2 Details To adjust the print temperature 1 for “Recycled 1.” Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs, and set a negative value when a separation failure or wrinkles occur. When an image failure occurs, adjust appropriately. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, a separation failure, wrinkles or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -3 or less is set, a fixing failure might occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-231

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX TMP-R2-1 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Adj rcycl paper 2 print temperature 1 To adjust the print temperature 1 for “Recycled 2.” Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs, and set a negative value when a separation failure or wrinkles occur. When an image failure occurs, adjust appropriately. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, a separation failure, wrinkles or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -3 or less is set, a fixing failure might occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-R1-2 Adj rcycl1 ini rotn temp, print temp 2&3 Lv.2 Details To adjust the initial ration temperature and print temperature 2 and 3 for “Recycled 1”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs, and set a negative value when a separation failure or wrinkles occur. When an image failure occurs, adjust appropriately. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, a separation failure, wrinkles or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -3 or less is set, a fixing failure might occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-R2-2 Adj rcycl2 ini rotn temp, print temp 2&3 Lv.2 Details To adjust the initial ration temperature and print temperature 2 and 3 for “Recycled 2”. Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs, and set a negative value when a separation failure or wrinkles occur. When an image failure occurs, adjust appropriately. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When a fixing failure, a separation failure, wrinkles or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -3 or less is set, a fixing failure might occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

8

8-232

FX-ERRSW Lv.2 Details

ON/OFF of Fixing Roller life judgment To set whether to judge the life of the Fixing Roller using the number of fed sheets. The number of fed sheets is counted by COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U. When 1 is set, FX-U-ERR (error display) is enabled. Use case When enabling the judgment of the Fixing Roller life Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 4 1: 250 K, 2: 300 K, 3: 350 K, 4: 400 K Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> FX-U-ERR FX-U-ERR Set Fix Roller life error thresholdVL Lv.2 Details To set the threshold value for the number of fed sheets which an error indicating that the Fixing Roller reaches its life is displayed when the life of the Fixing Roller is judged by the number of fed sheets. The number of fed sheets is counted by COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U. When FX-ERRSW is 1, this setting is enabled. Use case When enabling the judgment of the Fixing Roller life Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 4 1: 250 K, 2: 300 K, 3: 350 K, 4: 400 K Default value 3 Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> FX-ERRSW COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> FXWRNLVL COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> FXMSG-SW, FXMSGSW2 LOW-NS ON/OFF of silent mode at shift to copy Lv.1 Details To set whether to activate the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan (FM6) in silent mode when shifting from standby mode to copy mode. When shifting from standby mode to copy mode, noise occurs because the rotation speed of the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan is switched from 40% to 70%. When 1 is set, the noise is alleviated by changing the timing of switching the fan rotation speed (silent mode). Use case Upon user’s request (alleviation of noise when shifting to copy mode) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-232

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX FX-WAIT Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Change of fixing initial rotation time To set the initial rotation time according to the temperature condition of the Fixing Assembly. When 0 is set, initial rotation starts once a job is received. When setting a value other than 0, a job is stopped until difference of detected temperatures of the Fixing Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor falls within the certain range. If it does not fall within the range after 60 seconds have passed, a job is started. Use case When wrinkles or warp on the trailing edge occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution With this setting, initial rotation time becomes longer. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Not execute initial rotation 1: Stop a job until temperature difference between the edge and center becomes within 5 deg C 2: Stop a job until temperature difference between the edge and center becomes within 10 deg C 3: Stop a job until temperature difference between the edge and center becomes within 20 deg C Default value 0 TMPC1A-2 Adj coated ppr 1A print fix ctrl temp Lv.2 Details To adjust the print fixing control temperature (Print 1 to 5) when using coated paper 1A. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

8

8-233

TMPC1B-2 Lv.2 Details

Adj coated ppr 1B print fix ctrl temp To adjust the print fixing control temperature (Print 1 to 5) when using coated paper 1B. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMPC1C-2 Adj coated ppr 1C print fix ctrl temp Lv.2 Details To adjust the print fixing control temperature (Print 1 to 5) when using coated paper 1C. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-233

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX TMP-C2-1 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr2 To adjust the initial rotation temperature (Print0) when using coated paper 2. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-C2-2 Adj coated ppr 2 print fix ctrl temp Lv.2 Details To adjust the print fixing control temperature (Print 1 to 5) when using coated paper 2. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

8

8-234

TMP-C3-1 Lv.2 Details

Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr3 To adjust the initial rotation temperature (Print 0) when using coated paper 3. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-C3-2 Adj coated ppr 3 print fix ctrl temp Lv.2 Details To adjust the print fixing control temperature (Print 1 to 5) when using coated paper 3. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-234

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX TMP-C4-1 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr4 To adjust the initial rotation temperature (Print 0) when using coated paper 4. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-C4-2 Adj coated ppr 4 print fix ctrl temp Lv.2 Details To adjust the print fixing control temperature (Print 1 to 5) when using coated paper 4. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

8

8-235

TMPC5A-1 Lv.2 Details

Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr5A To adjust the initial rotation temperature (Print 0) when using coated paper 5A. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMPC5A-2 Adj coated ppr 5A print fix ctrl temp Lv.2 Details To adjust the print fixing control temperature (Print 1 to 5) when using coated paper 5A. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-235

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX TMPC5B-1 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr5B To adjust the initial rotation temperature (Print 0) when using coated paper 5B. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMPC5B-2 Adj coated ppr 5B print fix ctrl temp Lv.2 Details To adjust the print fixing control temperature (Print 1 to 5) when using coated paper 5B. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

8

8-236

TMPC5C-1 Lv.2 Details

Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr5C To adjust the initial rotation temperature (Print 0) when using coated paper 5C. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMPC5C-2 Adj coated ppr 5C print fix ctrl temp Lv.2 Details To adjust the print fixing control temperature (Print 1 to 5) when using coated paper 5C. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-236

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX TMPOHT-1 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Adj initial rotation temp: transparency To adjust the initial rotation temperature (Print 0) when using transparency. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMPOHT-2 Adj transparency print fix ctrl temp Lv.2 Details To adjust the print fixing control temperature (Print 1 to 5) when using transparency. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

8

8-237

FX-CU-P1 Lv.2 Details

Adj Copper Shield Plate shft pstn: pln 1 To adjust the shift position of the Copper Shield Plate when using plain paper 1. The setting is applied to all paper sizes. Use case When overheating, wrinkles, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4 to -3: -6 mm, -2: -3 mm, -1: -1 mm, 0: 0 mm, 1: +1 mm, 2: +3 mm, 3 to 4: +6 mm Unit mm Default value 0 FX-CU-P2 Adj Copper Shield Plate shft pstn: pln 2 Lv.2 Details To adjust the shift position of the Copper Shield Plate when using plain paper 2. The setting is applied to all paper sizes. Use case When overheating, wrinkles, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4 to -3: -6 mm, -2: -3 mm, -1: -1 mm, 0: 0 mm, 1: +1 mm, 2: +3 mm, 3 to 4: +6 mm Unit mm Default value 0 FX-CU-R1 Adj Copper Shield Plate shft pstn:rcycl1 Lv.2 Details To adjust the shift position of the Copper Shield Plate when using recycled paper 1. The setting is applied to all paper sizes. Use case When overheating, wrinkles, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4 to -3: -6 mm, -2: -3 mm, -1: -1 mm, 0: 0 mm, 1: +1 mm, 2: +3 mm, 3 to 4: +6 mm Unit mm Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-237

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX FX-CU-R2 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Adj Copper Shield Plate shft pstn:rcycl2 To adjust the shift position of the Copper Shield Plate when using recycled paper 2. The setting is applied to all paper sizes. Use case When overheating, wrinkles, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4 to -3: -6 mm, -2: -3 mm, -1: -1 mm, 0: 0 mm, 1: +1 mm, 2: +3 mm, 3 to 4: +6 mm Unit mm Default value 0 FX-CU-TN Adj Copper Shield Plate shft pstn: thin Lv.2 Details To adjust the shift position of the Copper Shield Plate when using thin paper. The setting is applied to all paper sizes. Use case When overheating, wrinkles, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4 to -3: -6 mm, -2: -3 mm, -1: -1 mm, 0: 0 mm, 1: +1 mm, 2: +3 mm, 3 to 4: +6 mm Unit mm Default value 0 FX-CU-OT Cu Plt shft pstn:excpt pln1/2,rcycl1,thn Lv.2 Details To adjust the shift position of the Copper Shield Plate when using paper other than plain paper 1, plain paper 2, recycled paper 1, and thin paper. The setting is applied to all paper sizes. Use case When overheating, wrinkles, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4 to -3: -6 mm, -2: -3 mm, -1: -1 mm, 0: 0 mm, 1: +1 mm, 2: +3 mm, 3 to 4: +6 mm Unit mm Default value 0

8

8-238

WEB-PRS Lv.2 Details

Set Heat Soaking Roller engagement tmg To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged. While it is in engagement state, the Edge Fan is turned ON. Use case When overheating occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -1 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: Not used, -3: 0 sheet, -2: 5 sheets, -1: 15 sheets, 0: 27 sheets, 1: 55 sheets, 2: 90 sheets, 3: 150 sheets, 4:Not used Unit sheet Default value 0 WEB-TMP Adj Heat Soaking Roller eng threshold VL Lv.2 Details To adjust the threshold value of the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller to which the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged. When the detected temperature of the Fixing Sub Thermistor exceeds the threshold, the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged. Use case When overheating, wrinkles, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2 to 4: +10 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 EF-TMP11 Set Edge Fan ON condition: initial rotn Lv.2 Details To set the condition to turn ON/OFF the Edge Fan at initial rotation. When the detected temperature of the Fixing Sub Thermistor becomes higher than that of the Fixing Main Thermistor for a certain level, the Edge Fan is turned ON. At this time, the Heat Soaking Roller is not engaged. When the temperature difference becomes a certain level or below, the Edge Fan is turned OFF. Use case When overheating, warp, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution With this setting, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: OFF 1: ON when the temperature difference is 25 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is 20 deg C or less 2: ON when the temperature difference is 15 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is 10 deg C or less 3: ON when the temperature difference is 5 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is 0 deg C or less Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-238

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX EF-TMP21 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Edg Fan ON cndtn:nrrw ppr outpt,temp dif To set the condition to turn ON/OFF the Edge Fan when outputting paper which width is 215.9 mm or less. When the detected temperature of the Fixing Sub Thermistor becomes higher than that of the Fixing Main Thermistor for a certain level, the Edge Fan is turned ON. When the temperature difference becomes below a certain level, the Edge Fan is turned OFF. Use case When overheating, warp, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: ON when the temperature difference is 15 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is less than 10 deg C -1: ON when the temperature difference is 20 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is less than 15 deg C 0: ON when the temperature difference is 25 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is less than 20 deg C 1: ON when the temperature difference is 30 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is less than 25 deg C 2: ON when the temperature difference is 35 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is less than 30 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 EF-TMP22 Edg Fan ON cndtn:nrrw ppr outpt,edg temp Lv.2 Details To set the condition to turn ON/OFF the Edge Fan when outputting paper which width is 215.9 mm or less. When the detected temperature of the Fixing Sub Thermistor becomes a certain level or higher, the Edge Fan is turned ON. When the detected temperature becomes below a certain level, the Edge Fan is turned OFF. Use case When overheating, warp, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -1 to 1 -1: ON when the detected temperature is 220 deg C or higher, and OFF when the detected temperature is lower than 210 deg C 0: ON when the detected temperature is 230 deg C or higher, and OFF when the detected temperature is lower than 220 deg C 1: ON when the detected temperature is 240 deg C or higher, and OFF when the detected temperature is lower than 230 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

8

8-239

EF-TMP23 Lv.2 Details

Edg Fan ON cndtn:wide ppr outpt,edg temp To set the condition to turn ON/OFF the Edge Fan when outputting paper which width is larger than 215.9 mm. When the detected temperature of the Fixing Sub Thermistor becomes a certain level or higher, the Edge Fan is turned ON. When the detected temperature becomes below a certain level, the Edge Fan is turned OFF. Use case When overheating, warp, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -1 to 10 -1: ON when the detected temperature is 230 deg C or higher, and OFF when the detected temperature is lower than 220 deg C 0: ON when the detected temperature is 240 deg C or higher, and OFF when the detected temperature is lower than 230 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 DWN-TMP2 Adj Thrmstr temp threshold: dwn seq shft Lv.2 Details To adjust the threshold value of the detected temperature of the Thermistor to shift to down sequence. The setting is applied regardless of paper type or paper size. Use case When overheating, wrinkles, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0 to 3: 0 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 IHOFFTMP Adj Thrmstr temp threshold: IH power OFF Lv.2 Details To adjust the threshold value of the detected temperature of the Thermistor to turn OFF the IH. The setting is applied regardless of paper type or paper size. Use case When overheating, wrinkles, or an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0 to 3: 0 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-239

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX FX-L-CHG Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Adj of target temp: pressure temperature To adjust the target temperature according to the pressure temperature. The setting is applied regardless of paper type or paper size. Use case When a mottled image (color unevenness) occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 -3: -9 deg C, -2: -6 deg C, -1: -3 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +3 deg C, 2: +6 deg C, 3: +9 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 WEB-FEED Adjustment of Fixing Web feed amount Lv.2 Details To adjust the feed amount of the Fixing Web in pulse. Increase the value when soiled back, offset, or web chattering occurs. Use case When soiled back, offset, or web chattering occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution As the value is larger, the Fixing Web consumption is increased. As the value is decreased, soiled back, offset, or web chattering may occur. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 -3: -30 pulses, -2: -20 pulses, -1: -10 pulses, 0: 0 pulse, 1: +10 pulses, 2: +20 pulses, 3: +30 pulses Default value 0 COL-SHRT Stby temp thrshld:s-ppr,lst rtn,prdctvty Lv.2 Details To adjust the threshold value of the detected temperature of the Fixing Sub Thermistor to receive a new job at last rotation of a job using small size paper in productivity priority mode. The setting is applied regardless of paper type or paper size. Use case When changing the waiting time after feeding small size paper Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2 to 4: +10 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

COL-LONG Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Unit Default value FX-MIX1 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value FX-MIX2 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value FX-MIX3 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8

8-240

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Stby temp thrshld: s-ppr,lst rtn,quality To adjust the threshold value of the detected temperature of the Fixing Sub Thermistor to receive a new job at last rotation of a job using small size paper in quality priority mode. The setting is applied regardless of paper type or paper size. When changing the waiting time after feeding small size paper Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2 to 4: +10 deg C deg C 0 Set prdctvty/qlty prrty: 1/1SPD, mix ppr To set whether productivity priority mode or quality priority mode is to be prioritized at 1/1 speed when papers are mixed. When changing whether productivity priority mode or quality priority mode is to be prioritized while papers are mixed Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 2 0: def, 1: Productivity priority mode, 2: Quality priority mode 0 Set prdctvty/qlty prrty: 1/2SPD, mix ppr To set whether productivity priority mode or quality priority mode is to be prioritized at 1/2 speed when papers are mixed. When changing whether productivity priority mode or quality priority mode is to be prioritized while papers are mixed Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 2 0: def, 1: Productivity priority mode, 2: Quality priority mode 0 Set prdctvty/qlty prrty: 1/3SPD, mix ppr To set whether productivity priority mode or quality priority mode is to be prioritized at 1/3 speed when papers are mixed. When changing whether productivity priority mode or quality priority mode is to be prioritized while papers are mixed Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 2 0: def, 1: Productivity priority mode, 2: Quality priority mode 0

8-240

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX CF-TMP11 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ini rotn, temp dif To set the condition to turn ON/OFF the Center Fan at initial rotation. When the detected temperature of the Fixing Main Thermistor becomes higher than that of the Fixing Sub Thermistor for a certain level, the Center Fan is turned ON. When the temperature difference becomes a certain level or below, the Center Fan is turned OFF. Use case When wrinkles or warp on the trailing edge occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -2 to 3 -2: ON when the temperature difference is 25 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is 20 deg C or less -1: ON when the temperature difference is 20 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is 15 deg C or less 0: ON when the temperature difference is 15 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is 10 deg C or less 1: ON when the temperature difference is 10 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is 5 deg C or less 2: ON when the temperature difference is 5 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is 0 deg C or less 3: ON when the temperature difference is 0 deg C or more, and OFF when the temperature difference is -5 deg C or less Default value 0 CF-TMP12 Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ini rotn, transp Lv.2 Details To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan for transparency at initial rotation. When 1 is set, the Center Fan is turned ON. When the difference of the detected temperatures of the Fixing Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor is within a certain range, or it is switched to primary temperature control, it is turned OFF. Use case When wrinkles or warp on the trailing edge occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0

8

8-241

CF-TMP13 Lv.2 Details

Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ini rotn, all ppr To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan for all paper types at initial rotation. When 0 is set, it is turned ON only for thin paper, plain paper 1, and recycled paper 1. When 1 is set, it is turned ON for all paper types. When the difference of the detected temperatures of the Fixing Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor is within a certain range, or it is switched to primary temperature control, it is turned OFF. Use case When wrinkles or warp on the trailing edge occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 CF-TMP14 Adj fix ctrl temp: ini rotn, Ctr Fan ON Lv.2 Details To adjust the fixing control temperature to turn ON the Center Fan at initial rotation. Use case When a fixing failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: -10 deg C, 1: -5 deg C, 2: 0 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 CF-TMP21 Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ppr feed, temp dif Lv.2 Details To set the condition to turn ON/OFF the Center Fan when paper is fed. When the detected temperature of the Fixing Sub Thermistor becomes higher than that of the Fixing Main Thermistor for a certain level, the Center Fan is turned OFF. When the temperature difference becomes a certain level or below, the Center Fan is turned ON. Use case When wrinkles or warp on the trailing edge occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -3 to 2 Temperature difference = Fixing Sub Thermistor - Fixing Main Thermistor -3: OFF when the temperature difference is -15 deg C or less -2: OFF when the temperature difference is -10 deg C or less -1: OFF when the temperature difference is -5 deg C or less 0: OFF when the temperature difference is 0 deg C or less 1: OFF when the temperature difference is 5 deg C or less 2: OFF when the temperature difference is 10 deg C or less Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-241

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX CF-TMP22 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value CF-TMP23 Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value CF-TMP24 Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value CF-TMP25 Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Adj fix ctrl temp: ppr feed, Ctr Fan ON To adjust the fixing control temperature to turn ON the Center Fan when paper is fed. When uneven gloss occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -2 to 0 -2: -20 deg C, -1: -10 deg C, 0: 0 deg C 0 Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ppr feed, thin ppr To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan when feeding thin paper. When 0 is set, it is turned OFF after a specified number of sheets according to the paper width is fed. When 1 is set, it is turned ON while paper is fed. When the difference of detected temperatures of the Fixing Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor becomes a certain level or below, it is turned OFF. When wrinkles or warp on the trailing edge occurs(E339S) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -1 to 1 -1: OFF, 0: OFF after feeding a specified number of sheets, 1: ON 0 Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ppr feed, plain 1 To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan when feeding plain paper 1. When 0 is set, it is turned OFF after a specified number of sheets according to the paper width is fed. When 1 is set, it is turned ON while paper is fed. When the difference of detected temperatures of the Fixing Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor becomes a certain level or below, it is turned OFF. When wrinkles or warp on the trailing edge occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -1 to 1 -1: OFF, 0: OFF after feeding a specified number of sheets, 1: ON 0 Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ppr feed, rcycl 1 To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan when feeding recycled paper 1. When 0 is set, it is turned OFF after a specified number of sheets according to the paper width is fed. When 1 is set, it is turned ON while paper is fed. When the difference of detected temperatures of the Fixing Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor becomes a certain level or below, it is turned OFF. When wrinkles or warp on the trailing edge occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -1 to 1 -1: OFF, 0: OFF after feeding a specified number of sheets, 1: ON 0

8

8-242

CF-TMP26 Lv.2 Details

Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ppr feed, transp To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan when feeding transparency. When -1 is set, it is turned OFF. When 0 is set, it is turned ON/OFF according to the setting for each paper size. When 1 is set, it is turned ON. When the difference of detected temperatures of the Fixing Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor becomes a certain level or below, it is turned OFF. Use case When wrinkles or warp on the trailing edge occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -1 to 1 -1: OFF 0: Based on the setting for each paper size 1: ON (Based on CF-TMP21) Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > CF-TMP21 CF-TMP27 Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ppr feed, all ppr Lv.2 Details To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan when feeding all paper size. When 0 is set, it is turned OFF When 0 is set, it is turned ON/OFF according to the setting for each paper size. When 1 is set, it is turned ON. When the difference of detected temperatures of the Fixing Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor becomes a certain level or below, it is turned OFF. Use case When wrinkles or warp on the trailing edge occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -1 to 1 -1: OFF 0: Based on the setting for each paper size 1: ON (Based on CF-TMP21) Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > CF-TMP21 FX-CU-13 Set heat generation wid: 1st/2nd fed sht Lv.1 Details To set whether to set the heat generation width to 13 inches for the first 2 fed sheets. When 1 is set, heat is produced for the width of the paper to be fed first. Use case When wrinkles or warp on the trailing edge occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution By setting 1, waiting time may occur when papers are mixed. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: 13 inches for the first 2 fed sheets, 1: Width of the first sheet to be fed Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-242

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX FIX-MODE Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range

Default value FIX-RCPR Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Unit Default value FX-MIX4 Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value FX-MIX5 Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Set plain paper 1print fix ctrl temp To set the print fixing control temperature when using plain paper 1. When 0 is set, normal fixing temperature control mode is applied. When a fixing failure occurs, set 1. When a fixing failure occurs on plain paper 1 Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. By setting 1, waiting time may occur when papers are mixed. 0 to 2 0: Normal fixing temperature control mode, 1: Increase the control temperature 0 to 16 deg C higher than normal (depending on the environment temperature), 2: Not used 0 Set Fixing Assembly reciprocation ctrl To set the details of the reciprocation control for the Fixing Assembly. When -1 is set, reciprocation is not executed. When 1 is set, reciprocation speed (shift amount per fed sheet) is changed. When alleviating the degree of scratches caused by paper edge Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -1 to 1 -1: Reciprocation OFF, 0: Reciprocation ON, 1: Change the reciprocation speed pulse 0 Adj min wait: 1/1SPD, mix ppr, prdctvty To adjust the minimum waiting time required for switching paper size at 1/1 speed when papers which widths are different are mixed in productivity priority mode. When the uneven gloss occurs, increase the value. When changing the waiting time Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. As the waiting time is shortened, warp may get worse. -2 to 2 -2: x1/2 , -1: x2/3, 0: def, 1: x1.5, 2: x2 0 Adj min wait: 1/1SPD, mix ppr, quality To adjust the minimum waiting time required for switching paper size at 1/1 speed when papers which widths are different are mixed in quality priority mode. When the uneven gloss occurs, increase the value. When changing the waiting time Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. As the waiting time is shortened, warp may get worse. -2 to 2 -2: x1/2 , -1: x2/3, 0: def, 1: x1.5, 2: x2 0

8

8-243

FX-MIX6 Lv.2 Details

Adj min wait: 1/2SPD, mix ppr, prdctvty To adjust the minimum waiting time required for switching paper size at 1/2 speed when papers which widths are different are mixed in productivity priority mode. When the uneven gloss occurs, increase the value. Use case When changing the waiting time Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution As the waiting time is shortened, warp may get worse. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: x1/2 , -1: x2/3, 0: def, 1: x1.5, 2: x2 Default value 0 FX-MIX7 Adj min wait: 1/2SPD, mix ppr, quality Lv.2 Details To adjust the minimum waiting time required for switching paper size at 1/2 speed when papers which widths are different are mixed in quality priority mode. When the uneven gloss occurs, increase the value. Use case When changing the waiting time Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution As the waiting time is shortened, warp may get worse. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: x1/2 , -1: x2/3, 0: def, 1: x1.5, 2: x2 Default value 0 WEB-AFT Setting of web feed interval Lv.1 Details To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which the web feed operation is executed. If more than the specified number of sheets are fed for a job which requires web cleaning, the soiled web part is fed to bring out clean surface of the web. As the value is smaller, the web feed operation is executed frequently. Use case When a soiled image occurs Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -3 to 0 -3: 500 sheets, -2: 1000 sheets, -1: 1500 sheets, 0: 2000 sheets Unit sheet Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-243

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX KIN-SW1 Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

Heat Soak Rol eng/diseng ctrl: 52-81g/m2 To switch engagement/disengagement control of the Heat Soaking Roller when using 52 to 81g/m2 size paper. Use case When leading edge of the 1st side of 2-sided is soiled for width of a full turn of the Pressure Roller Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution In the case of users who perform continuous feeding frequently, the life of the Fixing Belt may be shortened. Display/adj/set range 0: Engage/disengage the Heat Soaking Roller according to the number fed sheets 1: Not engage the Heat Soaking Roller only at 1-sided feed 2: Always not engage the Heat Soaking Roller Default value 0 KIN-SW2 Heat Soak Rol eng/diseng ctrl: 82-105g/m2 Lv.2 Details To switch engagement/disengagement control of the Heat Soaking Roller when using 82 to 105g/m2 size paper. Use case When leading edge of the 1st side of 2-sided is soiled for width of a full turn of the Pressure Roller Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution In the case of users who perform continuous feeding frequently, the life of the Fixing Belt may be shortened. Display/adj/set range 0: Engage/disengage the Heat Soaking Roller according to the number fed sheets 1: Not engage the Heat Soaking Roller only at 1-sided feed 2: Always not engage the Heat Soaking Roller Default value 0 KIN-SW3 Heat Soak Rol eng/diseng ctrl:=/>106g/m2 Lv.2 Details To switch engagement/disengagement control of the Heat Soaking Roller when using 106g/m2 size paper or larger. Use case When leading edge of the 1st side of 2-sided is soiled for width of a full turn of the Pressure Roller Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution In the case of users who perform continuous feeding frequently, the life of the Fixing Belt may be shortened. Display/adj/set range 0: Engage/disengage the Heat Soaking Roller according to the number fed sheets 1: Not engage the Heat Soaking Roller only at 1-sided feed 2: Always not engage the Heat Soaking Roller Default value 0

8

8-244

TMPC1A-1 Lv.2 Details

Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr1A To adjust the initial rotation temperature (Print0) when using coated paper 1A. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMPC1B-1 Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr1B Lv.2 Details To adjust the initial rotation temperature (Print0) when using coated paper 1B. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-244

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX TMPC1C-1 Lv.2 Details

Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr1C To adjust the initial rotation temperature (Print0) when using coated paper 1C. As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg C. +: Increase -: Decrease Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. Use case When a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 TMP-THN2 Thin ppr ini rotn temp, print temp 1-3 Lv.2 Details To adjust the initial rotation temperature, print temperature 1 to 3 for “Thin Paper”. Set a negative value when wrinkles or separation failure occurs, and set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs. In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of gloss occurs. Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation. Use case When wrinkles, a separation failure, a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 -4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C Default value 0 T-8-60

8

8-245

■■IMG-TR COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR 2TR-RVON Lv.2 Details

ON/OFF end edge white spot crrct scrn To set whether to display the screen to set ON/OFF of the paper trailing edge weak bias in user mode. When 1 is set, trailing edge white spot correction screen is displayed in user mode. If ON is set in this screen, weak bias is applied to the paper trailing edge, and white spots at the trailing edge are alleviated. Use case Upon user’s request (when white spots occur at the trailing edge) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1:ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> IMGC-ADJ Related user mode Adjustment/ Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Tail End White Patch Correct TR-BND1 Set ITB toner band dens: Bk plain color Lv.2 Details To adjust the density of ITB band in single Bk color mode. As the value is increased, toner consumption can be reduced, but the ITB Cleaning Blade might be flipped. Use case When preferring to reduce toner consumption Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution If the value is too large, the ITB Cleaning Blade might be flipped by friction. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Darker 1: Normal 2: Lighter Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-TR> TR-BND2, TRCLN1-P, TRCLN2-P TR-BND2 Set ITB toner band length:Bk plain color Lv.2 Details To adjust the length of ITB band in single Bk color mode. As the value is increased, an image failure due to the ITB Cleaning Blade can be alleviated, but toner consumption is increased. Use case When an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution As the value is increased, toner consumption is increased. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: 10 mm, 1: 100 mm, 2: 210 mm Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-TR> TR-BND1, TRCLN1-P, TRCLN2-P

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR

8-245

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR TRCLN1-P Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR

Set ITB toner supply intvl: Bk pln color To set the intervals at which a toner band is formed on the ITB at last rotation in single Bk color mode. Decrease the setting value when an image failure due to the ITB Cleaning Blade occurs. Use case When an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution If the value is too large, the ITB Cleaning Blade might be flipped by friction. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1000 Unit sheet Default value 70 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-TR> TR-BND1, TR-BND2, TRCLN2-P TRCLN2-P Set of ITB toner supply intvl: ppr intvl Lv.2 Details To set the intervals of toner supply at paper intervals in single Bk color mode. Decrease the setting value when an image failure due to the ITB Cleaning Blade occurs. Use case When an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution If the value is too large, the ITB Cleaning Blade might be flipped by friction. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1000 Unit sheet Default value 200 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-TR> TR-BND1, TR-BND2, TRCLN1-P ITB-TYPE Setting of ITB thickness Lv.2 Details To set thickness of the ITB to be used. Setting value of the primary transfer current differs depending on the thickness of ITB. Use case When replacing the ITB Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution After the setting is changed, execute the following procedures. 1) Service mode: COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> INTR-EX 2) User mode: Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation> Full Adjust Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Thick (old belt) 1: Thin (new belt) + old Primary Transfer Roller (8 mm shaft dia.) 2: Thin (new belt) + new Primary Transfer Roller (6 mm shaft dia.) Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> INTR-EX Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation> Full Adjust

8

8-246

TR-BND3 Lv.2 Details

Setting of ITB toner band length: color To set the length of toner band to be formed on the ITB at color. As the value is increased, an image failure due to the ITB Cleaning Blade can be alleviated, but toner consumption is increased. Use case When an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution If the value is too large, the ITB Cleaning Blade might be flipped by friction. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: 10 mm, 1: 100 mm, 2: 210 mm Default value 0 TR-BND4 Setting of ITB toner band density: color Lv.2 Details To set the density of toner band to be formed on the ITB at color. As the value is increased, toner consumption can be reduced, but the ITB Cleaning Blade might be flipped. Use case When preferring to reduce toner consumption Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution As the value is increased, toner consumption is increased. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Darker 1: Normal 2: Lighter Default value 0 TRCLN3-P Set ITB tonr supply intvl:clr, last rotn Lv.2 Details To set the interval at which a toner band is formed on the ITB at last rotation at color. Decrease the setting value when an image failure due to the ITB Cleaning Blade occurs. Use case When an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution If the value is too large, the ITB Cleaning Blade might be flipped by friction. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1000 Unit sheet Default value 70

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR

8-246

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR TRCLN4-P Lv.2 Details

Set ITB tonr supply intvl:clr, ppr intvl To set the interval at which a toner band is formed on the ITB at paper interval at color. Decrease the setting value when an image failure due to the ITB Cleaning Blade occurs. Use case When an image failure occurs Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution If the value is too large, the ITB Cleaning Blade might be flipped by friction. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1000 Unit sheet Default value 200 T-8-61

8

8-247

■■IMG-DEV COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV DEVL-VTH Lv.2 Details

Set low duty toner ejectn image duty VL To set the threshold value of the image duty, which is the condition to perform the low duty toner ejection sequence. When any of the average image duty of 4 colors indicates the threshold value or below, low duty toner ejection sequence is executed at the paper interval calculated by dividing the value specified in DEVL-PTH by the value of “threshold value - average image duty value”. There are 5 selections for setting value and they changes automatically depending on the inside temperature. As the value is larger, coarseness is decreased, but productivity is lowered and toner consumption is increased. As the value is smaller, productivity and toner consumption are improved, but coarseness is worsened. Use case While printing low duty (low image ratio) images, - When graininess (coarseness) occurs - When low productivity or high toner consumption is pointed out by the user Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range 1 to 5 The value differs depending on the inside temperature. (Following indicates the case of below 40 deg C, 40 deg C or higher and below 42 deg C, 42 deg C or higher from the left.) 1: 1.5%, 3%, 5% 2: 2%, 3%, 5% 3: 3%, 4%, 5% 4: 5%, 5%, 10% 5: 1%, 2%, 3% Default value 2 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> DEVL-PTH INTPPR-1 Set Wire clean interval in ppr interval Lv.2 Details To set the paper interval for automatic cleaning of the Primary Charging Wire and Pre-transfer Charging Wire. Use case - When the density varies dramatically - When decreasing downtime Display/adj/set range 0 to 9999 Unit sheet Default value 4000

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

8-247

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV DEVL-PTH Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

Set low duty toner ejectn img duty ttlVL To set the total value of the image duty, which is the condition to perform the low duty toner ejection sequence. When any of the average image duty of 4 colors indicates the threshold value or below, low duty toner ejection sequence is executed at the paper interval calculated by dividing the total value by the value of “threshold value - average image duty value”. (The value specified in DEVL-VTH is used as a threshold value.) Use case While printing low duty (low image ratio) images, - When graininess (coarseness) occurs - When low productivity or high toner consumption is pointed out by the user Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly. Display/adj/set range 0 to 4 0: 50 %, 1: 100 %, 2: 150 %, 3: 200 %, 4: 250 % Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> DEVL-VTH CDEV-IDL ON/OFF Dev Ass’y(YMCBk) first idle rotn Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of idle rotation of the Y, M, C, Bk Developing Assemblies to be performed first time for the day. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 PCHINT-1 ATR patch ppr interval adj (1st limit) Lv.2 Details To adjust the paper interval which patch detection is performed by ATR control. (1st limit) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 4 0: 25 sheets, 1: 50 sheets, 2: 100 sheets, 3: 150 sheets, 4: 200 sheets Default value 1 PCHINT-2 ATR patch ppr interval adj (2nd limit) Lv.2 Details To adjust the paper interval which patch detection is performed by ATR control. (2nd limit) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 4 0: 100 sheets, 1: 200 sheets, 2: 300 sheets, 3: 400 sheets, 4: 500 sheets Default value 1

8

8-248

PCHINT-V Lv.2 Details

Adj ATR patch VD counter total VL intvl To adjust the interval calculated by the total video counter value at which the patch detection is performed in ATR control and weighting at high duty. If any of the average image duty of 4 colors indicates the threshold value or higher, the patch detection of ATR control is executed at the paper interval calculated by dividing the total standard value by the average image duty value. Patch detection is normally executed at the paper interval per 200 sheets; however, if the foregoing condition is satisfied, detection will be executed even though it does not reach the specified number of sheet. When the negative value is specified, weighting (6.5 times) is applied to the video counter total value only if a new Toner Container is set and also in case of high duty (threshold value: 80% or higher). As the value is incremented by 1, the total standard value of video counter is increased by 1000%. When 0 or higher value is specified, weighting is always applied when the duty value indicates the threshold value or higher. Combination of threshold value and weighting differs depending on the setting value. Total standard value of video counter is fixed to 6000%. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 -10: Total standard value 10000 %, -9: 9000 %, -8: 8000 %, -7: 7000 %, -6: 6000 %, -5: 5000 %, -4: 4000 %, -3: 3000 %, -2: 2000 %, -1: 1000 % 0: Threshold value 80 %, weighting 6.5 times 1: 60 %, 6.5 times 2: 40 %, 6.5 times 3: 20 %, 6.5 times 4: 80 %, 8 times 5: 60 %, 8 times 6: 40 %, 8 times 7: 20 %, 8 times 8: 80 %, 10 times 9: 60 %, 10 times 10: 40 %, 10 times Default value -6

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

8-248

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV ADJ-VPP Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

Adj of developing AC bias Vpp To adjust Vpp of the developing AC bias. Ring marks and uneven sleeve pitch are alleviated when the value is decreased in the - direction, and white spots are alleviated when the value is increased in the + direction. When the value is set to “0”, Vpp is controlled at low speed according to the life of Developing Assembly (in the number of sheets). Other than 0 setting, Vpp is controlled regardless of the life. Use case When image failures (ring marks, white spots) occur Caution When the value is decreased too much in the - direction, density might be lowered. Display/adj/set range -4 to 2 -4: 1.3 kV -3: 1.4 kV -2: 1.5 kV -1: 1.6 kV (1/1 speed), 1.3 kV (1/2, 1/3 speed) 0: 1.6 kV (1/1 speed), 1.4 to 1.6 kV (1/2, 1/3 speed, durability control) 1: 1.6 kV (1/1 speed), 1.5 kV (1/2, 1/3 speed) 2: 1.6 kV Default value 0 DMX-OF-Y Adjustment of Y-color D-max setting Lv.2 Details To adjust D-max control setting in the case where density of solid area on Y-color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation adjustment is executed. Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high. Use case When density of solid area on an image is not appropriate even performing auto gradation adjustment Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute auto gradation adjustment. Caution Be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) after the setting is done. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 Default value 0

8

8-249

DMX-OF-M Lv.2 Details

Adjustment of M-color D-max setting To adjust D-max control setting in the case where density of solid area on M-color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation adjustment is executed. Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high. Use case When density of solid area on an image is not appropriate even performing auto gradation adjustment Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute auto gradation adjustment. Caution Be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) after the setting is done. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 Default value 0 DMX-OF-C Adjustment of C-color D-max setting Lv.2 Details To adjust D-max control setting in the case where density of solid area on C-color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation adjustment is executed. Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high. Use case When density of solid area on an image is not appropriate even performing auto gradation adjustment Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute auto gradation adjustment. Caution Be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) after the setting is done. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

8-249

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV DMX-OF-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value SLS-TM-Y Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SLS-TM-M Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SLS-TM-C Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

Adjustment of Bk-color D-max setting To adjust D-max control setting in the case where density of solid area on Bk-color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation adjustment is executed. Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high. When density of solid area on an image is not appropriate even performing auto gradation adjustment 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute auto gradation adjustment. Be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) after the setting is done. -3 to 3 0 Adj Y developer ejectn time:continuous In case of many continuous jobs, the developer might increase or decrease too much. To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the time which Y-color developer is forcibly ejected. When the developer increases or decreases too much at continuous jobs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 10 0 Adj M developer ejectn time:continuous In case of many continuous jobs, the developer might increase or decrease too much. To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the time which M-color developer is forcibly ejected. When the developer increases or decreases too much at continuous jobs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 10 0 Adj C developer ejectn time:continuous In case of many continuous jobs, the developer might increase or decrease too much. To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the time which C-color developer is forcibly ejected. When the developer increases or decreases too much at continuous jobs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 10 0

8

8-250

SLS-TM-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value 2S-SS-3C Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value 2S-SS-K Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value 3S-SS-3C Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

Adj Bk developer ejectn time:continuous In case of many continuous jobs, the developer might increase or decrease too much. To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the time which Bk-color developer is forcibly ejected. When the developer increases or decreases too much at continuous jobs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 10 0 Adj YMC developer ejectn block: 1/2 SPD When processing many jobs at 1/2 speed (heavy paper), the developer might increase or decrease too much. To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the number of supply blocks until transition to YMC-color developer forcible ejection. When the developer increases or decreases too much due to frequent use of 1/2 speed (heavy paper) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 5 0 Adj Bk developer ejectn block: 1/2 SPD When processing many jobs at 1/2 speed (heavy paper), the developer might increase or decrease too much. To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the number of supply blocks until transition to Bk-color developer forcible ejection. When the developer increases or decreases too much due to frequent use of 1/2 speed (heavy paper) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 5 0 Adj YMC developer ejectn block: 1/3 SPD When processing many jobs at 1/3 speed (heavy paper), the developer might increase or decrease too much. To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the number of supply blocks until transition to YMC-color developer forcible ejection. When the developer increases or decreases too much due to frequent use of 1/3 speed (heavy paper) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 5 0

8-250

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV 3S-SS-K Lv.2 Details

Adj Bk developer ejectn block: 1/3 SPD When processing many jobs at 1/3 speed (heavy paper), the developer might increase or decrease too much. To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the number of supply blocks until transition to Bk-color developer forcible ejection. Use case When the developer increases or decreases too much due to frequent use of 1/3 speed (heavy paper) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 5 Default value 0 BKDH Set of Drum Heater control Lv.2 Details To set the contents of the Drum Heater control according to the humidity. Use case When it is a high humidity environment and the machine is used frequently Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution Be sure to turn ON the Environment Heater Switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Normal, 1: Turn ON the Drum Heater while the shutter is open in all environments, 2: Heater control in a high humidity environment Default value 0

8-251

■■IMG-LSR COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR PRI-FAN Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range

Default value

Setting of Primary Charge Fan ON timing To set the timing to forcibly turn ON the Primary Charging Suction Fan, Primary Charging Exhaust Fan and Developing/Pre-transfer Charging Fan. When “1” is set, they are always turned ON by full speed and when “2” is set, they are always turned ON by half speed during power-ON. When image is smeared by the drum 0 to 2 0: Release forcible turn ON, 1: Always ON by full speed, 2: Always ON by half speed 0 T-8-63

T-8-62

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR

8-251

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR

■■IMG-RDR

8-252 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR DFDST-L1 Lv.1 Details

DADF mode dust dtct level adj: ppr intvl To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed at paper interval in DADF mode. Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust detection. As the value is smaller, the dust is less detected. Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely detected. Use case - When black line occurs due to dust - Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared on the image can be detected. When reducing the value too much, black lines may appear on the image. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 0: OFF Default value 200 Supplement/memo Black lines can appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected. DFDST-L2 DADF mode dust dtct level adj: after job Lv.1 Details To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed after the job is completed in DADF mode. Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust detection. As the value is smaller, the dust is less detected. Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely detected. Use case - When black line occurs due to dust - Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared on the image can be detected. When reducing the value too much, black lines may appear on the image. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 0: OFF Default value 200 Supplement/memo Black lines can appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.

8

DF2DSTL1 Lv.1 Details

DADF dust dtct lvl adj at ppr intvl:bck To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed at paper interval by the Scanner Unit (paper back) in DADF mode. Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust detection. As the value is smaller, the dust is less detected. Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely detected. Use case - When black line appears due to dust - Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared on the image can be detected. When reducing the value too much, black lines may appear on the image. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 0: OFF Default value 200 DF2DSTL2 Adj DADF dust dtct level at job end:bck Lv.1 Details To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed by the Scanner Unit (paper back) after the job is completed in DADF mode. Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust detection. As the value is smaller, the dust is less detected. Decrease the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely detected. Use case - When black line appears due to dust - Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared on the image can be detected. When reducing the value too much, black lines may appear on the image. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 0: OFF Default value 200

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR

T-8-64

8-252

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

■■IMG-MCON

8-253 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON PASCAL Lv.1 Details

Use/no use of auto gradation adj data To set to use/not to use the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT that is generated by auto gradation adjustment (full/quick adjustment) control. Selection is available as to whether to use gamma LUT at the time of image formation. Use case When PASCAL-related failure occurs/when identifying the cause of PASCAL-related failure Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Initial LUT is used. (Auto gradation adjustment is not used.) 1: Auto gradation adjustment is used. 2 to 3: Not used Default value 1 SCR-SLCT Halftone process in Photo Printout mode Lv.2 Details To set halftone process (error diffusion, screen 2 types) in Photo Printout mode when making a copy. Change the setting if the copy image has a problem with the initial setting (Low screen ruling). Select 0 (error diffusion) in the case of moire (suitable for character reproduction). Select 2 (High screen ruling) in the case of rough dots. Use case When moire image or rough dots occurs on copy image Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Error diffusion, 1: Low screen ruling, 2: High screen ruling Default value 1 Related user mode Function Settings> Copy> Photo Printout Mode TMC-SLCT Setting of error diffusion coefficient Lv.2 Details To set coefficient to be used for error diffusion process. Specify according to the level of granularity and dot stability. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Small granularity/low dot stability 1: Small granularity/low dot stability (color mode), Large granularity/ high dot stability (black mode) 2: Large granularity/high dot stability Default value 2

8

PRN-FLG Lv.2 Details

Select of image area flag (PDL image) To set the image area flag for the image processing which is performed when a PDL image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate. If an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate, the following operations are performed as default: - Processing to prioritize reproduction of text - Replacing Bk-color to black plain color Set 1 when moire occurs or jaggy is significant. Set 2 when not preferring to replace Bk color with single Bk color. Use case - When moire occurs or jaggy is significant in case of printing an image containing many halftone dots or photos - When avoiding to replace Bk-color with single black color Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution This setting trades off with reproducibility of text. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: High screen ruling, gray compensation LUT 1: Error diffusion, gray compensation LUT 2: High screen ruling, normal LUT Default value 0 SCN-FLG Select of image area flag (copy image) Lv.2 Details To set the image area flag for the image processing which is performed when a scanned image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate. If an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate, processing to prioritize reproduction of text is performed by default. Set 1 when an image contains many halftone photo images. Set 2 when an image contains many printed photos. Use case When copying an image which contains many halftone dots and photos Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution This setting trades off with reproducibility of text. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Text 1: Halftone photo image 2: Printed photos Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

0

8-253

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON TNR-DWN Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

Set of toner deposit amount reduction To reduce the toner deposit amount when toner scatters or paper winds around the Fixing Assembly in the case of full color. When 1 is set, blur of images is decreased, but the hue is changed. Use case When an image is blurred due to toner scattering, etc. in the case of full color Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Standard 1: Reduce toner amount both for 1-sided and 2-sided modes 2: Standard for 1-sided mode and reduce toner amount for both sides in 2-sided mode Default value 0 TMIC-BK ON/OFF of TMIC Bk_LUT end edge correct Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of the trailing edge adjustment of Bk_LUT for PDL and for copy which are used by TMIC. When the trailing edge adjustment is set to ON, the density of the high density area becomes high, and consequently text and thin lines become clear. While an image becomes clear, the hue of the gradation area of photos, etc. is changed. Use case When thin lines are partly missing or characters are faded Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: ON for PDL, OFF for copy 1: OFF for PDL, OFF for copy 2: ON for PDL, ON for copy 3: OFF for PDL, ON for copy Default value 2 DH-MODE Set ptch data at Dhalf except full crrct Lv.2 Details To set whether to use the high-density patch data that has been scanned by D-half control of full correction at the time of D-half control other than full correction. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Used, 1: Not used Default value 0 DH-TMG Set auto D-max/half control exe interval Lv.2 Details To set the paper interval to execute auto D-max/D-half control. D-max/D-half control is executed at the time of warm-up rotations after completion of job with specified number of sheets. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 15000 Unit sheet Default value 1000

8

8-254

MIX-FLG Lv.2 Details

Set img processing at img composition To set the image processing which is performed when an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate by the Main Controller upon image composition. Use case When an image processing failure occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Equivalent to PDL text mode (Black text is reproduced with 4 colors. Error diffused image. The hue of the photo area is more vivid than that of 2.) 1: Equivalent to PDL photo mode (Black text is reproduced with 4 colors. Screen processed image.) 2: Equivalent to scanned text mode (Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color. Error diffused image. The hue of the photo area might be different from that of 0.) 3: Equivalent to scanned photo mode (Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color. Screen processed image.) Default value 0 REPORT-Z Set of image processing at report print Lv.1 Details To set the image processing which is performed when printing a report. Use case When there is a request for image improvement Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Equivalent to PDL text mode (Black text is reproduced with 4 colors. Error diffused image. The hue of the photo area is more vivid than that of 2.) 1: Equivalent to PDL photo mode (Black text is reproduced with 4 colors. Screen processed image.) 2: Equivalent to scanned text mode (Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color. Error diffused image. The hue of the photo area might be different from that of 0.) 3: Equivalent to scanned photo mode (Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color. Screen processed image.) Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

8-254

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON IFXEML-Z Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

Set img proc at clr iFAX,mail recv print To set the image processing which is performed when printing color iFAX or received e-mail. Use case When there is a request for image improvement Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Equivalent to PDL text mode (Black text is reproduced with 4 colors. Error diffused image. The hue of the photo area is more vivid than that of 2.) 1: Equivalent to PDL photo mode (Black text is reproduced with 4 colors. Screen processed image.) 2: Equivalent to scanned text mode (Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color. Error diffused image. The hue of the photo area might be different from that of 0.) 3: Equivalent to scanned photo mode (Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color. Screen processed image.) Default value 0 BMLNKS-Z Set img proc at BMLinkS reception print Lv.1 Details To set the image processing which is performed when printing received BMLinkS. Use case When there is a request for image improvement Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Equivalent to PDL text mode (Black text is reproduced with 4 colors. Error diffused image. The hue of the photo area is more vivid than that of 2.) 1: Equivalent to PDL photo mode (Black text is reproduced with 4 colors. Screen processed image.) 2: Equivalent to scanned text mode (Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color. Error diffused image. The hue of the photo area might be different from that of 0.) 3: Equivalent to scanned photo mode (Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color. Screen processed image.) Default value 0 Supplement/memo BMLinkS (Business Machine Linkage Service): An integrated network OA device interface

8

8-255

REDU-CNT Lv.2 Details

Set toner deposit amount limt at clr adj To set whether to limit the toner deposit amount at color adjustment (color balance, fine adjustment of density). When 1 is set, the color adjustment value is reflected to an image precisely, but toner scattering in the Transfer Assembly and Fixing Assembly might occur, and paper might wind around the Fixing Assembly. When COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> IMGC-ADJ is set to 1, this setting can be also made in the user mode. Use case - Upon user’s request - When reflecting the color adjustment value to an image precisely Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When 1 is set, toner scattering in the Transfer Assembly and Fixing Assembly might occur, and paper might wind around the Fixing Assembly. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Toner deposit amount is limited to the specified amount. 1: Toner deposit amount is not limited. Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> IMGC-ADJ Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Density Adjustment Mode VP-ART Setting of line art processing Lv.2 Details To set outline processing for line art on scalable PDF. In the outline processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is recognized as line art, and is converted into vector data. Specify whether to convert the binary image outline into vector data or to recognize it as one line (as a thin line). For the thin line, the line width can be specified. Change this value when you want to obtain an output of a wide-width line as one line rather than as an outline (when you want to prioritize edit operation as a line rather than image quality). Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99 Default value 1

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

8-255

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON VP-TXT Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

Set of character vectorization process To set vectorization processing for text on scalable PDF. In the vectorization processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is recognized as text, and is converted into vector data. In regular vectorization, function approximation is not used for small text not to change the image quality. When the value is changed, function approximation processing is executed for small text, which realizes smooth text although the image quality is changed. Change this value when you want to prioritize smoothness in small text. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99 Default value 1 PASCL-TY Set of paper type for auto gradation adj Lv.2 Details Auto gradation adjustment is normally executed with the recommended paper specified for each location. However, if you want to change the paper type, use this setting to change the paper type. Use case When executing the auto gradation adjustment using a paper other than the recommended paper type Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not change the setting in the normal operation. Display/adj/set range 1 to 3 1: CS-814 (Except for USA and Europe. Mainly for Japan) 2: Hammermill (For USA) 3: Mondi (For Europe) Default value The value differs according to the location. AST-SEL Adj of advanced smoothing effect Lv.2 Details To adjust the smoothing effect which is set in the advanced smoothing UI. Set 3 if the effect is not improved by selecting “High” on the UI. Set 0 if too much effect is obtained even though “Low” is set. Use case When image failures (jaggy, moire) occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 Default value 2 Supplement/memo AST: Advanced Smoozing Technology

8

8-256

REGM-SEL Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo ERS-SEL Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode L-PWR-SW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SCR-SW Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

Adj of fine-line density correction To adjust the fine line and text density which is set in user mode (fine density correction). Set 4 if density is too low even though +2 is set in user mode and set 0 if density is too high even though -2 is set in user mode. When line and text adjusted by fine line density adjustment is too dark or too light in the case of 1200 dpi print 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 4 2 REGM-SEL: REos GaMma SELect Effective Resolution System Proc mthd To set the processing method of Effective Resolution System for images and texts. Select one of 1 to 7 when moire (a symptom of hue changing depending on the location) occurs on a patterned image with 1200 dpi. When moire occurs on a patterned image with 1200 dpi Enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 7 0 Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Printer> Printer Settings> Settings> Print Quality> Resolution> Superfine Adjustment of thin line width To adjust the line width of thin lines. As the value is larger, lines become thicker. When enhancing the reproducibility of thin lines 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Execute Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust). 0 to 3 0: No adjustment, 1: 10 %, 2: 20 %, 3: 30 % 0 Set of low screen ruling dither To set the dithering method for low screen ruling. When changing the value, confirm the change by setting “1: Low screen ruling” in COPIER> TEST> PG> TXPH. Upon user’s request (Dot dithering is used) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. 0 to 1 0: Line dithering, 1: Dot dithering 0 COPIER> TEST> PG> TXPH

8-256

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON PRESTART Lv.2 Details

Setting to extend initial rotation time To set whether to extend the time from start of initial rotation to image formation. When hue is not stable at the start of printing, engine can be stable by extending the initial rotation time. Use case When hue is not stable at the time of printing in first few sheets Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF and then ON the main power supply. Display/adj/set range 0 to 5 Unit sec Default value 0 PSCL-TBL Set auto gradation adjustment parameters Lv.1 Details To set the parameters of auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment). When 0 is set, the parameters are optimized for GF-C081 (81 g/m2) standard paper (Canon-recommended paper). When 1 is set, the parameters are optimized for 64 g/m2 paper. Use case When paper arc occurs on 64 g/m2 paper at auto gradation adjustment Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. Caution Be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) after the setting is done. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Standard paper (81 g/m2), 1: Plain paper (other than 81 g/m2), 2 to 3: Not used Default value 0 BGE-OFS Fine adj of background adjustment level Lv.2 Details To make a fine adjustment of the background adjustment (background removal) level which can be set manually. Break up the adjustment values into smaller ones when user does not satisfy with the default adjustment values. Use case When color fogging occurs on the output image when copying yellowed blank paper as an original Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Caution Since the background color is set to be washed out with this mode, not only the background of yellowed blank paper, but also other light colors (light blue, etc.) are washed out. Display/adj/set range -15 to 15 Default value 0 Related user mode Copy> Options> Density> Background Density

8-257

■■IMG-SPD COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD ARC-INT1 Lv.2 Details

Set of ARCDAT interruption interval To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which ARCDAT control is executed. When the number of sheets reaches the specified value, ARCDAT control is executed by interrupting an ongoing job. If the value is too large, the density of image becomes different before and after the interruption. If the value is too small, the productivity is lowered. Actual setting value is calculated by dividing the entry value by 0.9 and rounding up after the decimal points. (e.g.: If an entry value is 100, setting value will be 122.) Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 5 to 1000 Unit sheet Default value 100 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> ARC-INT2 ARC-INT2 Set ARCDAT exe interval: last rotation Lv.2 Details To set the number of sheets which ARCDAT control is not executed, from the start of a job. ARCDAT control which is supposed to be executed during the specified number of sheets is executed at last rotation of the previous job. Since the number of interruptions during a job is reduced, the productivity is enhanced. However, the number of times of ARCDAT control executed at last rotation might be increased depending on the print conditions. Actual setting value is calculated by dividing the entry value by 0.9 and rounding up after the decimal points. (e.g.: If an entry value is 25, setting value will be 28.) Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution Do not set a larger value than ARC-INT1. Display/adj/set range 5 to 1000 Unit sheet Default value 25 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> ARC-INT1

T-8-65

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD

8-257

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD CHG-INT Lv.2 Details

Set dischg crrnt ctrl intvl: last rotn To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which discharge current control for Y, M, and C is executed at last rotation. When the number of sheets reaches the specified value, discharge current control is executed at last rotation of the job. If the value is too large, Y, M, C image failure occurs before and after the execution. If the value is too small, the productivity is lowered. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 10000 Unit sheet Default value 0 COAT-SW Setting of coated paper feeding speed Lv.1 Details To set the feeding speed (1/3, 1/2 speed) for coated paper (105g/m2 or more) 1/3 speed: Proper gloss mode (22ppm) 1/2 speed: High productivity mode (35ppm) Use case When improving productivity in printing on coated paper Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: 1/3 speed, 1: 1/2 speed Default value 0 TAB-SW ON/OFF of cleaning at tab paper feeding Lv.1 Details To set whether to clean when tab paper is fed. When printing an image on a whole tab area of tab paper, the backside of the succeeding paper is soiled. When 1 is set, cleaning is executed every time a tab paper is fed. Soiled backside can be prevented, but productivity decreases. Use case - When the backside of the succeeding paper to tab paper is soiled - Upon user’s request (to improve quality) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to get approval from the user in advance by telling that Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: OFF, 1: ON, 2: Not used Default value 0 T-8-66

8

8-258

■■CLEANING COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING W-CLN-P Lv.2 Details

Set last rotation simple wire cln intvl To set the paper interval for automatic cleaning of the Primary Charging Wire. The Primary Charging Wire is cleaned (1 reciprocation) at the time of last rotation after completion of job with every specified number of sheets. The operation is enabled when the setting value of COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-PH is 1: ON. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 50 to 10000 Unit sheet Default value 2000 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-PH W-CLN-T Set of Pre-trns Chg Wire auto cln intvl Lv.2 Details To set the paper interval for automatic cleaning of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire. Cleaning is executed at the time of last rotation after completion of job with every specified number of sheets. The operation is enabled when the setting value of COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-PH is 1: ON. Use case Upon user’s request Display/adj/set range 50 to 10000 Unit sheet Default value 2000 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-PH D-CLN-TM Set of warm-up rotation Drum clean time Lv.2 Details To adjust the time for cleaning the surface of the Photosensitive Drum which is performed at warm-up rotations. This item is enabled when AUTO-DH is 1: ON. Use case When image smear occurs in a HH environment Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 300 Unit sec Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> AUTO-DH

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING

8-258

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING

COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING OHP-PTH Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING

Set of ITB clean transp threshold value When a large number of transparencies is fed, surface active agent which coats the surface of an transparency adheres to the ITB, and consequently the transfer efficiency is lowered, causing an image failure. After feeding a certain number of transparencies, a patch is formed on the ITB, and the ITB Cleaning Blade scrapes it off together with surface active agent. This setting is used to set the threshold value for the number of fed transparency which is the condition to execute ITB cleaning. Use case When an image failure occurs due to lowering of the transfer efficiency Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 100 0: Not executed Unit sheet Default value 15 W-CLN-PH ON/OFF of Charging Wire auto cleaning Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of automatic cleaning of the Primary Charging Wire and Pre-transfer Charging Wire. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-P, W-CLN-T CORE-CLN Set Copper Shield Plt Shaft clean intvl Lv.2 Details To set the number of sheets as the intervals (frequency) to clean the Shift Shaft of the Copper Shield Plate. When 0 is set, cleaning is executed every 1000 sheets. Decrease the value if Copper Shield Plate shift error occurs frequently. When 2 is set, cleaning is not executed. Use case When Copper Shield Plate shift error occurs frequently Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution As the value is decreased (frequency of cleaning is increased), last rotation time may be increased. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 -2: 250 sheets, -1: 500 sheets, 0: 1000 sheets, 1: 2000 sheets, 2: Cleaning is not executed Unit sheet Default value 0

8

8-259

WEB-CLN Lv.2 Details

Setting of Fixing Web cleaning interval To set the number of sheets as the intervals (frequency) to execute cleaning with the Fixing Web. When 0 is set, cleaning is executed every 100 sheets. When 4 is set, it is not executed. Use case When soiled paper edge or lines on the paper edge occurs frequently Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution As the value is decreased (frequency of cleaning is increased), the Fixing Web consumption is increased. Display/adj/set range -3 to 4 -3: 25 sheets, -2: 50 sheets, -1: 75 sheets, 0: 100 sheets, 1: 150 sheets, 2: 200 sheets, 3: 300 sheets, 4: Cleaning is not executed Default value 0 Default value 20 Related service mode COPIER>OPTION>DSPLY-SW>PRCLNSW

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING

T-8-67

8-259

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

■■ENV-SET

8-260

■■FEED-SW COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET

COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

ENVP-INT Lv.1 Details

Temp, humid &Fix Roller temp log get cycle To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside the machine and the surface temperature of the Fixing Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the cycle is increased by 1 minute. Obtained log can be displayed by selecting the following: COPIER > DISPLAY > ENVRNT. Use case At problem analysis Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 480 Unit min Default value 60 Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ENVRNT DRY-CISU ON/OFF of condensation prevention mode Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of condensation mode. When droplets are appeared on the Scanner Unit due to condensation and image failure or E225 occurs, set “1: ON”. By selecting 1, the Scanner Unit (paper front) stops the fan for 15 seconds and the Scanner Unit (paper back) lights LED for 30 seconds from the next startup. Use case When droplets appear on the Scanner Unit due to condensation and image failure or E225 occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF (Normal mode), 1: ON (Anti-condensation mode) Default value 0 T-8-68

8

EVLP-SPD Lv.1 Details

Envelope feeding speed setting To set the envelope feeding speed. By feeding an envelop at 1/2 speed (default) in the case of a high humidity environment, the glue flap may adhere at the time of fixing. As a result of that, the envelop may not be opened. By setting to 1/1 speed, adhesion can be prevented, but fixing might be deteriorated in a low humidity environment. Use case When a glue flap of envelope adheres Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution The fixing is deteriorated by setting 1/1 speed in a low humidity environment. Display/adj/set range 0 to 5 0: 0 %, 1: +2 %, 3: +6 %, 4: +8 %, 5: +10 % Default value 0 DK5-REST Adj paper level for Multi Deck (Upper) Lv.1 Details To adjust the threshold value for paper level to be determined as “no paper” in Multi Deck (Upper). When the setting value is increased for the case that too many sheets are remained in the Deck, paper can be used almost to the limit. As the value is incremented by 1, the paper level decreases by approx. 20 sheets. Use case Upon user’s request Caution The number of remaining papers varies according to the air-floatation condition. Display/adj/set range 0 to 5 Unit sheet Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK6-REST, DK7-REST DK6-REST Adj paper level for Multi Deck (Middle) Lv.1 Details To adjust the threshold value for paper level to be determined as “no paper” in Multi Deck (Middle). When the setting value is increased for the case that too many sheets are remained in the Deck, paper can be used almost to the limit. As the value is incremented by 1, the paper level decreases by approx. 20 sheets. Use case Upon user’s request Caution The number of remaining papers varies according to the air-floatation condition. Display/adj/set range 0 to 5 Unit sheet Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK5-REST, DK7-REST

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

8-260

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW DK7-REST Lv.1 Details

Use case Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value Related service mode REG-SPD2 Lv.2 Details

Display/adj/set range Unit Default value Related service mode REG-SPD3 Lv.2 Details

Display/adj/set range Unit Default value Related service mode

COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

Adj paper level for Multi Deck (Lower) To adjust the threshold value for paper level to be determined as “no paper” in Multi Deck (Lower). When the setting value is increased for the case that too many sheets are remained in the Deck, paper can be used almost to the limit. As the value is incremented by 1, the paper level decreases by approx. 20 sheets. Upon user’s request The number of remaining papers varies according to the air-floatation condition. 0 to 5 sheet 0 COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK5-REST, DK6-REST Speed adj of Rgst Roller: 1/2 speed To adjust the Registration Roller speed when 1/2 speed is set for heavy paper/transparency, etc. Increase the value if the image at the leading edge of paper shrinks in the feeding direction, and decrease the value if it expands. Decrease the value if wavy-line image occurs. If these symptoms are not alleviated after adjustment is made, replace the Registration Roller. -30 to 30 % 0 COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> REG-SPD, REG-SPD3 Speed adj of Rgst Roller: 1/3 speed To adjust the Registration Roller speed when 1/3 speed is set for heavy paper/coated paper, etc. Increase the value if the image at the leading edge of paper shrinks in the feeding direction, and decrease the value if it expands. Decrease the value if wavy-line image occurs. If these symptoms are not alleviated after adjustment is made, replace the Registration Roller. -30 to 30 % 0 COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> REG-SPD, REG-SPD2

8

8-261

REG-SPD Lv.2 Details

Speed adj of Rgst Roller: plain paper To adjust the Registration Roller speed when 1/1 speed is set for plain paper, etc. Increase the value if the image at the leading edge of paper shrinks in the feeding direction, and decrease the value if it expands. Decrease the value if wavy-line image occurs. If these symptoms are not alleviated after adjustment is made, replace the Registration Roller. Display/adj/set range -30 to 30 Unit % Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> REG-SPD2, REG-SPD3 INSRT-SW Insert ppr presence/absence jdgmt ON/OFF Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of paper presence/absence judgment of the Inserter. When 1 is set, a job is started before the Inserter starts paper detections so productivity is improved.. Use case Upon user’s request (improvement of productivity when using the Inserter) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution If there is no insertion sheet in the Inserter while 1 is set, pages will be out of order. Consequently, a lot of papers being fed from the host machine will be handled as jam papers. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: ON (starting pickup after confirming the presence of papers) 1: OFF (starting pickup without judging paper presence and absence) Default value 0 PINT-REG Set ppr intvl img pstn crrct frequency Lv.2 Details To set the paper interval for executing the paper interval image position correction control. As the paper interval is larger (low frequency of execution), color displacement tends to occur. This control is executed at warm-up rotation to be performed first time for the day and after jam processing regardless the setting value. Use case Upon user’s request (shortening the time required for paper interval control) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When increasing the paper interval, confirm the tolerance of color displacement with the user. Display/adj/set range 0 to 5 0: 1000 sheets, 1: 200 sheets, 2: 600 sheets, 3: 800 sheets, 4: 2000 sheets, 5: no correction Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

8-261

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW DK2-TURN Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

ON/OFF of Left Deck Pickup Rol last rotn To set whether to execute last rotation of the Pickup Roller on the Left Deck for 50 msec after completion of job. As the usage is extended, a part of the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn and the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. By rotating the Pickup Roller after completion of job, it can reduce wear of the Separation Roller. Use case - When frequency of use is relatively low - When pickup jam tends to occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-TURN, DK3-TURN, DK4TURN, DK5-TURN, DK6-TURN, DK7-TURN DK3-TURN ON/OFF of Cassette3 Pickup Rol last rotn Lv.1 Details To set whether to execute last rotation of the Pickup Roller on the Cassette 3 for 50 msec after completion of job. As the usage is extended, a part of the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn and the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. By rotating the Pickup Roller after completion of job, it can reduce wear of the Separation Roller. Use case - When frequency of use is relatively low - When pickup jam tends to occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-TURN, DK2-TURN, DK4TURN, DK5-TURN, DK6-TURN, DK7-TURN

8

8-262

DK4-TURN Lv.1 Details

ON/OFF of Cassette4 Pickup Rol last rotn To set whether to execute last rotation of the Pickup Roller on the Cassette 4 for 50 msec after completion of job. As the usage is extended, a part of the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn and the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. By rotating the Pickup Roller after completion of job, it can reduce wear of the Separation Roller. Use case - When frequency of use is relatively low - When pickup jam tends to occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-TURN, DK2-TURN, DK3TURN, DK5-TURN, DK6-TURN, DK7-TURN DK1-TURN ON/OFF Right Deck Pickup Roll last rotn Lv.1 Details To set whether to execute last rotation of the Pickup Roller on the Right Deck for 50 msec after completion of job. As the usage is extended, a part of the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn and the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. By rotating the Pickup Roller after completion of job, it can reduce wear of the Separation Roller. Use case - When frequency of use is relatively low - When pickup jam tends to occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK2-TURN, DK3-TURN, DK4TURN, DK5-TURN, DK6-TURN, DK7-TURN

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

8-262

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW DK5-TURN Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

ON/OFF M-Deck (upr) Pickup Rol last rotn To set whether to execute last rotation of the Pickup Roller on the Multi Deck (Upper) for 50 msec after completion of job. As the usage is extended, a part of the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn and the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. By rotating the Pickup Roller after completion of job, it can reduce wear of the Separation Roller. Use case - When frequency of use is relatively low - When pickup jam tends to occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-TURN, DK2-TURN, DK3TURN, DK4-TURN, DK6-TURN, DK7-TURN DK6-TURN ON/OFF M-Deck (Mid) Pickup Rol last rotn Lv.1 Details To set whether to execute last rotation of the Pickup Roller on the Multi Deck (Middle) for 50 msec after completion of job. As the usage is extended, part of the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller become worn and the roller stops the rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. By rotating the Pickup Roller after completion of job, it can reduce wear of the Separation Roller. Use case - When frequency of use is relatively low - When pickup jam tends to occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-TURN, DK2-TURN, DK3TURN, DK4-TURN, DK5-TURN, DK7-TURN

8

8-263

DK7-TURN Lv.1 Details

ON/OFF M-Deck (Low) Pickup Rol last rotn To set whether to execute last rotation of the Pickup Roller on the Multi Deck (Lower) for 50 msec after completion of job. As the usage is extended, a part of the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn and the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. By rotating the Pickup Roller after completion of job, it can reduce wear of the Separation Roller. Use case - When frequency of use is relatively low - When pickup jam tends to occur Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-TURN, DK2-TURN, DK3TURN, DK4-TURN, DK5-TURN, DK6-TURN DK1-AIR ON/OFF of PDF Deck Lite air assist Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of the POD Deck Lite air assist. In the initial settings, the air assist is OFF for plain paper or heavy paper, and ON for coated paper, texture paper, heavy paper 2 to 5, OHT, etc. When a jam or double feed error frequently occurs with plain paper, etc., set the value to 1. When the transfer performance is low with coated paper, texture paper, etc., set the value to 2. Use case - When a jam or double feed error frequently occurs with plain paper or heavy paper 1 - When the transfer performance is low with coated paper, texture paper, etc. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Initial setting, 1: ON, 2: OFF Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK2-AIR, DK3-AIR, DK4-AIR

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

8-263

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW DK2-AIR Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

ON/OFF of Multi Deck (Upper) air assist To set ON/OFF of the POD Deck (Upper) air assist. In the initial settings, the air assist is OFF for plain paper or heavy paper, and ON for coated paper, texture paper, heavy paper 2 to 5, OHT, etc. When a jam or double feed error frequently occurs with plain paper, etc., set the value to 1. When the transfer performance is low with coated paper, texture paper, etc., set the value to 2. Use case - When a jam or double feed error frequently occurs with plain paper or heavy paper 1 - When the transfer performance is low with coated paper, texture paper, etc. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Initial setting, 1: ON, 2: OFF Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-AIR, DK3-AIR, DK4-AIR DK3-AIR ON/OFF of Multi Deck (Middle) air assist Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of the POD Deck (Middle) air assist. In the initial settings, the air assist is OFF for plain paper or heavy paper, and ON for coated paper, texture paper, heavy paper 2 to 5, OHT, etc. When a jam or double feed error frequently occurs with plain paper, etc., set the value to 1. When the transfer performance is low with coated paper, texture paper, etc., set the value to 2. Use case - When a jam or double feed error frequently occurs with plain paper or heavy paper 1 - When the transfer performance is low with coated paper, texture paper, etc. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Initial setting, 1: ON, 2: OFF Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-AIR, DK2-AIR, DK4-AIR

8

8-264

DK4-AIR Lv.1 Details

ON/OFF of Multi Deck (Lower) air assist To set ON/OFF of the POD Deck (Lower) air assist. In the initial settings, the air assist is OFF for plain paper or heavy paper, and ON for coated paper, texture paper, heavy paper 2 to 5, OHT, etc. When a jam or double feed error frequently occurs with plain paper, etc., set the value to 1. When the transfer performance is low with coated paper, texture paper, etc., set the value to 2. Use case - When a jam or double feed error frequently occurs with plain paper or heavy paper 1 - When the transfer performance is low with coated paper, texture paper, etc. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Initial setting, 1: ON, 2: OFF Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-AIR, DK2-AIR, DK3-AIR TFL-RTC Set delvry dest at rcvry after tray full Lv.1 Details To select the delivery destination for a job with multiple pages after recovering the Delivery Tray that reaches the full level. When 0 (default) is set, a job is output from the delivery destination again from which the last job was delivered. When 1 is set, a job is output from the delivery destination which priority is set as high at “Output Tray Settings” in user mode. Use case When changing the delivery tray Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Output from the tray from which the last job was output. 1: Output from the delivery destination which priority is high among the delivery trays. Default value 0 Related user mode Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Settings D-MXDSZ Prdctvty prrty mod in media mix: 2-sided Lv.1 Details At a 2-sided job in media mixed situation, productivity is reduced because paper circulation inside of the machine is stopped. When 1 (productivity priority mode) is set, productivity improves because paper circulation is not stopped. Use case Upon user’s request (Improving productivity in media mixed situation Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Normal mode, 1: Productivity priority mode Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

8-264

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW USZ-FEED Lv.1 Details

ON/OFF Job set/ppr source ppr size chck To set whether to check if the paper size set for the job matches the paper size set on the paper source. When 1 is set, papers are picked up without checking even user defined size papers that differ from the job setting size are set on a paper source. Use case When forcibly picking up papers even the paper size setting differs between a job and a paper source Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0

■■NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK RAW-DATA Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range

T-8-69

Default value IFAX-LIM Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SMTPTXPN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SMTPRXPN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8

8-265

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

Setting of received data print mode To set print mode for the received image data. This item is used to identify the cause whether it’s due to image data or image processing in the case of problem with received image. When a problem with received image occurs 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to set the value back to “0: Normal print operation” after recovering from the trouble. 0 to 1 0: Normal print operation, 1: Print with original data without image processing 0 No. of max print lines at IFAX reception To set the maximum number of lines for e-mail text to be printed when receiving IFAX. Setting of this item can prevent endless printing of the attached file data in the case of receiving an error e-mail or failure in interpretation of the context. Selecting 0 prints the header/footer in 1 sheet when receiving e-mail text without attached file. When preventing endless print in the case of failure in reception 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: E-mail text not printed, 999: Unlimited 500 Setting of SMTP TX port number To set SMTP transmission port number. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 25 Setting of SMTP reception port number To set SMTP reception port number. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 25

8-265

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK POP3PN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

Setting of POP3 reception port number To set POP3 reception port number. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 Default value 110 FTPTXPN Specification of SEND port (FTP) number Lv.2 Details To specify address port (FTP) number for SEND. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 Default value 21 STS-PORT ON/OFF of TOT sync status comctn port Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF for Inquiry/Response (sync)-mode status communication port with T.O.T. Select “1: ON” in the case of connecting the PC and the machine with the crossover cable while Service NAVI is used. Use case When the Service NAVI is used Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> CMD-PORT Supplement/memo T.O.T: TUIF over TCP. Communication protocol to be used for communication with the built-in application (UI) and the internal application such as COPY/ SEND/ BOX, etc. (Canon’s own protocol). CMD-PORT ON/OFF TOTasync command comctn port Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF for asynchronous command communication port with T.O.T. Select “1: ON” in the case of connecting the PC and the machine with the crossover cable while Service NAVI is used. Use case When the Service NAVI is used Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> STS-PORT Supplement/memo T.O.T: TUIF over TCP. Communication protocol to be used for communication with the built-in application (UI) and the internal application such as COPY/ SEND/ BOX, etc. (Canon’s own protocol).

8

8-266

NS-CMD5 Lv.2 Details

Limit CRAM-MD5 auth method at SMTP auth To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used Default value 0 Supplement/memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it’s authenticated. NS-GSAPI Limit GSSAPI auth method at SMTP auth Lv.2 Details To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used Default value 0 Supplement/memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it’s authenticated. NS-NTLM Limit NTLM auth method at SMTP auth Lv.2 Details To restrict use of NTLM authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used Default value 0 Supplement/memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it’s authenticated.

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

8-266

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK NS-PLNWS Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

Limit plaintext auth at SMTP auth encry To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext authentication, at the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the communication packet is encrypted. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used Default value 0 Supplement/memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it’s authenticated. NS-PLN Limit plaintext auth at SMTPauth noencry Lv.2 Details To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext authentication, at the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the communication packet is not encrypted. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used Default value 0 NS-LGN Limit LOGIN authentication at SMTP auth Lv.2 Details To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP authentication. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used Default value 0 Supplement/memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it’s authenticated.

8

8-267

MEAP-PN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Display/adj/set range Default value CHNG-STS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode CHNG-CMD Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MEAP-SSL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value LPD-PORT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

HTTP port No.setting of MEAP application To set HTTP port number of MEAP application. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not specify port 8080 when the print server is connected. Otherwise, you cannot browse the device RUI in which MEAP authentication application is running (Port 8080 is reserved for redirection of EFI Controller to the iR side.) 1 to 65535 8000 Set of TOT status connection port number To set the port number for status connection with T.O.T. When the Service NAVI is used 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 65535 20010 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> STS-PORT Set of TOT command connection port No. To set the port number for command connection with T.O.T. When the Service NAVI is used 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 65535 20000 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> CMD-PORT HTTPS port setting of MEAP To set the port of HTTPS server in the case of using SSL with HTTP of MEAP. When setting HTTPS port for MEAP 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 8443 Setting of LPD port number To set the LPD port number. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 65535 515 LPD port: Network port for TCP/IP communication when making prints through network.

8-267

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK WUEV-SW Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value WUEV-INT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value Related service mode WUEV-POT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode WUEV-RTR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

Setting of sleep notification execution To set whether to notify the sleep mode to the application (imageWARE, etc) on the network when shifting to/recovering from the sleep mode. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Notified, 1: Not notified 0 Setting of sleep notification interval To set the interval of sleep notification. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW is set to 0: Notified. 60 to 65535 sec 600 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW Port number setting for sleep notice To set port number of the PC to notify the sleep mode. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW is set to 0: Notified. 1 to 65535 11427 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW Setting of sleep notification range To set the number of available routers to the target for sleep notification. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW is set to 0: Notified. 0 to 254 3 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW

8

8-268

WUEN-LIV Lv.2 Details

Recovery time setting after sleep notice To set the time from the sleep start from network without job assignment until the mode is shifted to the sleep mode. Use case When setting the startup time after sleep notification Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1 to 600 Unit sec Default value 15 IFX-CHIG Set operation by IFAX recv e-mail text Lv.1 Details To set the number of characters for the IFAX received e-mail text, so that the e-mail is not printed/forwarded when the characters in the text is less than the number of specified characters. This machine can output blank paper because some senders send e-mail text consisting of linefeed codes only. In such case, specify 2 (number of characters) so that there will be no output of blank paper. In the case of specifying any number other than 0, header/footer is printed/forwarded in 1 sheet only if the e-mail (body) text is less than the specified value while no TIFF file is attached. As the value is incremented by 1, the number of target characters in e-mail body text is increased by 1 character. Use case When reducing printouts of blank paper due to e-mail received by IFAX Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that there will be no print of e-mail (body) text if the number of characters is less than the specified value. Display/adj/set range 0 to 999 0: E-mail text is not ignored. Unit char Default value 0 Supplement/memo 1 Japanese Kanji character is calculated as 2 bytes, and the control codes (such as linefeed code, etc) are included in the number of characters.

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

8-268

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK DNSTRANS Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

Setting of DNS transfer priority To set priority order of the protocol (IPv4/IPv6) to be used for DNS query. In the case of using both IPv6 and IPv4 while the DNS server supports IPv4, it takes time because of timeout when executing DNS query with priority on IPv6. The time can be shortened by placing priority on IPv4. Use case When it takes time to execute DNS query with priority on IPv6 because the DNS server supports IPv4 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: IPv4, 1: IPv6 Default value 1 PROXYRES Setting of proxy response to Windows Lv.2 Details To set whether to provide proxy response or return the device status when an inquiry is received via Windows while the device is in sleep mode. Use case When executing status response for query from Windows correctly Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: No proxy response, 1: Proxy response Default value 1 WOLTRANS Setting of sleep recovery protocol Lv.1 Details To set the protocol for recovery from sleep mode according to the value of WOL (Wake On LAN) trans. Reception of a specific network packet is one of the requirements for the device to recover from sleep mode. When the number of network protocols supported by the device increases, the types of network packets which activate recovery from sleep mode vary. However, there is a possibility that the existing network protocol is actually used. Select the type of network packet which activates recovery from sleep mode according to the environment where the device is used. Use case When selecting protocol for sleep recovery Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1 to 3 1: WSD and SNMP, 2: WSD and CPCA, 3: CPCA and SNMP Default value 1

8

8-269

802XTOUT Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value IKERETRY Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo SPDALDEL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo

NCONF-SW Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

Set of IEEE802.1X authentication timeout To set timeout value for IEEE802.1X authentication. If the device executes 802.1X authentication, change the wait time for response from the authentication server. When response from the authentication server is slow/fast 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 10 to 120 sec 30 Setting of IKE retry times To set the number of retries in the case of no response from the communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 3 1 IKE: Internet Key Exchange Initialization of SPD value To initialize all the SPD values that are under management. SPD values can be initialized without clearing SRAM. At the time of SPD value mismatch when IPSec Board is added 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 SPD: Database that manages SA (Security Association). SPD value is managed when IPSec Board is used. Normally, SRAM needs to be cleared in the case of mismatch in SPD value. ON/OFF of Network Configurator function To set ON/OFF of Network Configurator function. If the user does not use the function, select OFF to prevent remote attack through network. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Network Configurator function is a function to be used for communication with NetSpot Device Installer, etc., and the network setting can be changed from the remote.

8-269

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK IKEINTVL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value Supplement/memo IPSDEBLV Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SP-LINK Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value AFS-JOB Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode AFC-JOB Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

Setting of IKE retry interval To set retry interval in the case of no response from the communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 10 sec 5 IKE: Internet Key Exchange Setting of IPSec debug level For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use 0 to 10 0 Mode setting at 1W sleep To set the mode to shift to sleep mode When 0 is set, 10base-T standby is executed, therefore standby power 1W is realized in sleep mode. When 1 is set, like existing models, the machine enters sleep mode after negotiation. When shifting to sleep mode after negotiation 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Shift to sleep mode with 10base-T 1: Shift to sleep mode after negotiation 0 Set of FAX server job reception port To set the reception port of the fax server to which a fax client sends jobs. When changing the job reception port of the fax server 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 20317 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFC-EVNT Set of FAX client job sending port To set the port of a fax client from which jobs are sent to the fax server. When changing the job sending port of a fax client 0 to 65535 20317 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFS-JOB, AFC-EVNT

8

8-270

AFC-EVNT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Set of FAX client event reception port To set the event notification reception port of a fax client. When changing the event notification reception port of a fax client 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 Default value 29400 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFS-JOB ILOGMODE Setting of Firewall range Lv.1 Details To set all protocols or TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast as the target of Firewall. When 0 is set, the machine responds to ARP, ICMP multicast and broadcast which have no direct relation, and consequently the number of logs is increased. When 1 is set, the machine filters TCP, UDP and ICMP unicast only. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: All protocols support mode 1: TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast support mode 2, 3: Not used Default value 0 ILOGKEEP Setting of IP Filter log time Lv.1 Details To set the retention time from the log time blocked by IP Filter. When access is made again from a same address which was blocked by IP Filter before, if it is within the retention time from the previous log time, its log is not recorded. If access is frequently made from a same IP address, the log record of the UI might be filled with its logs. If the user considers that a single log for a same IP address is enough, set the longer retention time. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 48 0: 1 minute (special mode) 1 to 48: 1 hour to 48 hours Default value 1

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

8-270

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK IPTBROAD Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

Set to allow broad/multicast TX To set whether to send broadcast packets and multicast packets. Transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets is permitted without specifying an exception address. It is permitted within the device even if it is rejected in the default setting of the IPv4/v6 transmission filter. Set “1: Disabled” when the user does not want to send them. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 5 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled, 2 to 5: Not used Default value 0 PFWFTPRT Set of RST reply at IP filter FTP SEND Lv.1 Details When FTP SEND is executed using an IP filter by which packets from a specific remote PC are rejected, SYN is returned to the port 113 if the PC supports authentication of the FTP port 113. However, since the IP filter blocks the packets, the block logs are increased and the performance is lowered. When 1 is set, RST is returned to the port 113 without blocking packets. Use case When executing FTP SEND against the OS which supports authentication of the FTP port 113 while the IP filter is enabled Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 IPMTU Setting of MTU size Lv.1 Details To set MTU size of network packet. This item is used when performing SEND communication between locations connected with Ethernet in a field environment where MTU black hole problem occurs. Use case When MTU black hole problem occur Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 10 1: 600 bytes, 2: 700 bytes, ..., 9: 1400 bytes, 10: 1500 bytes Unit byte Default value 10

8

8-271

DDNSINTV Lv.1 Details

Set of DDNS periodical update interval DNS registration is executed only once at start-up with the current iR, so the registered contents are deleted in an environment where the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals. To set the interval of DDNS periodical update for not deleting the registered contents. Use case When the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 48 0: No periodical update, 1: 1-hour interval, 2: 2-hour interval, ..., 47: 47-hour interval, 48: 48-hour interval Unit hour Default value 24

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

T-8-70

8-271

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM

■■CUSTOM

COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM

SC-L-CNT Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode SCANTYPE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value ABK-TOOL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo DEV-SP1 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

8-272

Set large paper jdgmt reference at scan To set the judgment reference of the scan counter as to which to use B4 or LTR to determine large size. The threshold is determined by the combination with the setting of B4-L-CNT. SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=0: paper exceeding B4 is determined as large size, paper with B4 or smaller is determined as small size. SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=1: paper with B4 or larger is determined as large size, paper smaller than B4 is determined as small size. As needed 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: B4 size, 1: LTR size 0 COPIER> OPTION> USER> B4-L-CNT Switch of DADF + Reader To switch to a different type DADF + Reader Unit. At installation 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Reverse Duplex DADF + Reader, 1: 1-Path Duplex DADF + Reader 0 Allow access from address book mntc tool To set whether to accept import from the address book maintenance tool. When executing import from the address book maintenance tool 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Address book maintenance tool: Tool provided from CMJ. Device special settings 1 To execute the device special settings. To execute the device special setting. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000

8

DEV-SP2 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value DEV-SP3 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value DEV-SP4 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value DEV-SP5 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value DEV-SP6 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM

Device special settings 2 To execute the device special settings. To execute the device special setting. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000 Device special settings 3 To execute the device special settings. To execute the device special setting. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000 Device special settings 4 To execute the device special settings. To execute the device special setting. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000 Device special settings 5 To execute the device special settings. To execute the device special setting. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000 Device special settings 6 To execute the device special settings. To execute the device special setting. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000

8-272

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM

COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM DEV-SP7 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM

Device special settings 7 To execute the device special settings. To execute the device special setting. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. Display/adj/set range 00000000 to 11111111 Default value 00000000 DEV-SP8 Device special settings 8 Lv.2 Details To execute the device special settings. Use case To execute the device special setting. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. Display/adj/set range 00000000 to 11111111 Default value 00000000 USEUPTNR Set Toner Container use-up mode Lv.1 Details To set rotation operation when Toner Container is used up. As the value is larger, the time the Toner Container Drive Motor keeps driving after the Toner Container can be replaced becomes longer. Toner in the Hopper is used up further, and it becomes possible to make the time until image formation is stopped (replacement timing of the Toner Container) longer. Use case Upon user’s request Caution When the setting value is 0, if the toner consumption is high (at the time of continuous output of high duty image), toner in the Hopper may be used up before the replacement timing of the Toner Container. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 Default value 1 DFEJCLED ON/OFF of DADF delivery LED Lv.1 Details To set whether to light up the delivery LED of DADF. Use case Upon user’s request (The LED is too bright.) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF Default value 0

8

8-273

RDEV-SP1 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value RDEV-SP2 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value RDEV-SP3 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value RDEV-SP4 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value RDEV-SP5 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM

RCON device special settings 1 To execute the device special setting. For customization, etc. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. 00000000 to 11111111 0 RCON device special settings 2 To execute the device special setting. For customization, etc. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. 00000000 to 11111111 0 RCON device special settings 3 To execute the device special setting. For customization, etc. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. 00000000 to 11111111 0 RCON device special settings 4 To execute the device special setting. For customization, etc. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. 00000000 to 11111111 0 RCON device special settings 5 To execute the device special setting. For customization, etc. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. 00000000 to 11111111 0

8-273

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM

8-274

COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM RDEV-SP6 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

RCON device special settings 6 To execute the device special setting. For customization, etc. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. Display/adj/set range 00000000 to 11111111 Default value 0 RDEV-SP7 RCON device special settings 7 Lv.2 Details To execute the device special setting. Use case For customization, etc. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. Display/adj/set range 00000000 to 11111111 Default value 0 RDEV-SP8 RCON device special settings 8 Lv.2 Details To execute the device special setting. Use case For customization, etc. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. Display/adj/set range 00000000 to 11111111 Default value 0 T-8-71

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM

8-274

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

■■USER

COPIER > OPTION > USER COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPY-LIM Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SLEEP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo SIZE-DET Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value COUNTER1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value COUNTER2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8-275

Setting of upper limit for copy To set the upper limit value for copy. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 9999 999 ON/OFF of auto sleep function To set ON/OFF of auto sleep function. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 The time to shift to the sleep mode can be set in the user mode (Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time). ON/OFF of original size detect function To set ON/OFF of original size detection function. Upon user’s request (glare of the Scan Lamp, etc) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1, ON 1 Display of software counter 1 To display counter type for software counter 1 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display only. No change is available. 0 to 999 0: No registration The value differs according to the location. Setting of software counter 2 To set counter type for software counter 2 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: No registration The value differs according to the location.

8

COUNTER3 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value COUNTER4 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value COUNTER5 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value COUNTER6 Lv.1 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

Setting of software counter 3 To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: No registration The value differs according to the location. Setting of software counter 4 To set counter type for software counter 4 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: No registration The value differs according to the location. Setting of software counter 5 To set counter type for software counter 5 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: No registration 0 Setting of software counter 6 To set counter type for software counter 6 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: No registration 0

8-275

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-276

COPIER > OPTION > USER DATE-DSP Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode MB-CCV Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value CONTROL Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value B4-L-CNT Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode

COPIER > OPTION > USER

Setting of date/time display format To set date/time display format according to the country or region. After the display format is set with this mode, the order of date is reflected to the followings: Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Date/Time Settings, and report output. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: YYMM/DD, 1: DD/MMYY, 2: MM/DD/YY The value differs according to the location. Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Date/Time Settings Control card usage limit for Mail Box To restrict use of control card for Mail Box. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Unlimited, 1: Limited 1 Charge setting of PDL job To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connected charge management device (Coin Manager or non-Canon-made control card). Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: No charge, 1: Charge 0 Count setting of B4 size To set B4 count with software counter 1 to 8 as to whether B4 is counted as large size or small size. Selecting 1 counts B4 or larger size paper as large size while paper smaller than B4 size as small size. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Small size, 1: Large size 0 COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM> SC-L-CNT

8

TRY-STP Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value MF-LG-ST Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value CNT-DISP Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value COPY-JOB Lv.1 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

Set of suspension at full Finisher Tray To set whether to suspend or continue output when the full Finisher Tray is detected. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: At detection of full tray, 1: Detection of height only 0 Display/hide of long original mode To set whether to display or hide the [Long Original] button. When 1 is set, [Long Original] button is displayed in Copy> Options screen and the long length paper becomes available. Upon user’s request (use of long original or long length paper) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Long length paper is delivered from the Second Delivery Outlet (excluding delivery from the Inner Finisher). 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Display/hide of serial number To set whether to display or hide the serial number on the Counter Check screen. When setting to display/hide serial number on the Counter Check screen 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Display, 1: Hide 0 Setting of copy job reservation To set whether to allow copy job reservation when the Card Reader/ Coin Manager is used. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled 0

8-276

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER > OPTION > USER OP-SZ-DT Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > USER

Orgnl size dtct ON/OFF at copyboard open To set ON/OFF of original size detection while the Copyboard is opened. When “0: OFF” is set, enter original size manually from the Control Panel. When “1: ON” is set, original size is detected automatically. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 NW-SCAN Setting of network scan function usage Lv.2 Details To set whether to allow use of network scan function. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Do not change this mode in Japan. - For PS/PCL machines for outside Japan, fix the setting value as “1: Enabled”. For others, permit the use. Display/adj/set range 0 to1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 1 JOB-INVL Job intvl setting at interruption copy Lv.2 Details To set output interval between jobs at the time of interruption copy. Sorting is difficult after interruption copy because of the continuous output of the next job. Paper interval becomes longer when starting pickup for the next job after the last sheet of the previous job is delivered. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Continuous output of the interruption copy and the next job 1: Starting pickup for the next job after the interruption copy is delivered all. 2: Starting pickup for the next job after the previous job is delivered all. (For all jobs) Default value 0

8

8-277

LGSW-DSP Lv.2 Details

ON/OFF of “Log display ON/OFF setting” To set whether to display “Management Settings> Device Management> Display Log” in user mode. When “1: ON” is set, “Display Log” is displayed in the “Device Management” screen. When ON is set, the logs of each job are displayed in “System Status.” When “0: OFF” is set, “Display Log” is not displayed in the “Device Management” screen, and the logs of each job are not displayed either. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Related user mode Management Settings > Device Management > Display Log TAB-ROT Set of landscape img rotn at PDL:tab ppr Lv.1 Details To set whether to rotate landscape image by 180 degrees when PDL print is made on tab paper. When “1: Rotated” is set, image is rotated. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Not rotated, 1: Rotated Default value 0 PR-PSESW Display/hide of output pause button Lv.1 Details To set whether to display or hide [Pause Printing] button on the system status/stop screen. Use case - Upon user’s request - When promptly stopping the print job in operation or under reservation Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-277

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER > OPTION > USER IDPRN-SW Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > USER

Charge target job set of dept mngm cntr To set the job type that advances the department management counter. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: PRINT category: Inbox Print, Report Print, Send Local Print, PDL Print COPY category: COPY 1: PRINT category: Report Print, Send Local Print, PDL Print COPY category: COPY, Inbox Print Default value 0 CPRT-DSP ON/OFF of [Print Charge Log] button Lv.1 Details To set whether to display the [Print Charge Log] button to print the charge logs on the charge log screen in user mode. When “1: ON” is set, the button is displayed in Management Settings> Charge Management> Charge Log Screen. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related user mode Management Settings > Charge Management > Charge Log PCL-COPY Set of PCL COPIES command control method Lv.2 Details To set the binder control method of COPIES command with PCL. Select whether to use the control method of Canon-made PCL or use the same control method of non-Canon-made PCL. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 0: Control method of Canon-made PCL (following the value of COPIES command that is specified for each page to control on a page basis) 1: Control method of non-Canon-made PCL (handling the value of COPIES command, which is specified for page 1 when collating, as bind figure while the value of COPIES command for the next page or later is invalid. Same control applies as Canon-made PCL when not collating) 2 to 65535: For future use Default value 0

8

8-278

CNT-SW Lv.1 Details

Set default dspl items on charge counter To set default display items of the charge counter on the Counter Check screen. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this mode Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Counter 1 - Total 1: 101 Counter 2 - Total (Black 1): 108 Counter 3 - Copy (Full Color + Single Color/1): 232 Counter 4 - Total A (Full Color + Single Color/1): 149 1: Counter 1 - Total 2: 102 Counter 2 - Copy (Full Color + Single Color/2): 231 Counter 3 - Total A (Full Color + Single Color/2): 148 Counter 4 - Copy (Black 2): 222 Counter 5 - Total A (Black 2): 133 Default value 0 TAB-ACC ON/OFF of auto cst change for tab ppr Lv.1 Details To set to enable/disable auto cassette change when tab paper runs out. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to instruct the user to thoroughly comply the following: - Use tab paper with the same number of tabs. - Set tab paper. Be sure to comply the above; otherwise, proper print is not available and it can cause soiling inside the machine because of toner. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Auto cassette change disabled, 1: Auto cassette change enabled Default value 1 BCNT-AST Set of inbox print charge target job Lv.1 Details To set the job type that advances the count in inbox print with NE Controller (ASSIST). Use case When switching the job type that is subject to counting of the inbox print with NE Controller Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: PDL job, 1: Copy job Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-278

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER > OPTION > USER PRJOB-CP Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo DFLT-CPY Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value Related user mode DFLT-BOX Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value Related user mode DOC-REM Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > OPTION > USER

Set count TX at RX/report print To set to enable/disable a page-basis count pulse transmission to the charge management device at the time of reception print or report print. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: No transmission, 1: Transmission 0 Charging management device: Coin manager, Non-Canon-made control card Setting of color mode for copy To set the default color mode for copy operation. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Based on Auto/ACS/Printer Driver settings, 1: Color mode, 2: Black mode JP:0, USA:0, EUR:2, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Function Settings> Copy> Select Color Settings for Copy> Use Auto (Color/Black) Selection Set of color mode for inbox print To set the default color mode for inbox print operation. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Based on Auto/ACS/Printer Driver settings, 1: Color mode, 2: Black mode JP:0, USA:0, EUR:2, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Function Settings> Copy> Select Color Settings for Copy> Use Auto (Color/Black) Selection Display/hide of original removal message To set whether to display or hide the message to remove original when scanning with DADF without opening/closing DADF after scanning with the Copyboard. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0

8

8-279

DPT-ID-7 Lv.2 Details

Password entry set at dept ID reg/auth To set whether to enter a password at the time of registration/ authentication of department ID. With the setting to require entry, entry of 7-digit password is required beside department ID. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Department ID only, 1: 7-digit (password) entry Default value 0 RUI-RJT Connct set at invalid auth from remoteUI Lv.2 Details To set whether to disconnect HTTP port when the machine receives invalid authentication from remote UI 3 times. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Continued connection, 1: Disconnected Default value 0 SND-RATE Set compress ratio at SEND high compress Lv.2 Details To set the compression ratio when the data compression ratio for SEND (transmission) is set to “Compact”. As the value is larger, the compression ratio is higher (the file size becomes small). Use case When making the transmission file size smaller Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution As the value is too large, an image is deteriorated. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Compression ratio 1/16, 1: Compression ratio 1/20, 2: Compression ratio 1/24 Default value 0 Related user mode Function Settings > Send > Common Settings > Data Compression Ratio

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-279

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER > OPTION > USER FREG-SW Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > USER

Dspl/hide of MEAP counter free rgst area To set whether to display or hide the free register area of MEAP counter for SEND. Use case At problem analysis Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Do not use this at the normal service. - Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 0 Supplement/memo Individual count-up (counter advance) of MEAP application is available in the free register area of MEAP counter. IFAX-SZL Setting of IFAX send size limit Lv.2 Details To set for restricting data size at the time of IFAX transmission that does not go through the server. With the setting to restrict the data size, it is to be #830 error in the case of sending data that exceeds the upper limit value. In the case that the data goes through the server, the size of transmission data is always restricted. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Limited, 1: Unlimited (Restriction applies when data goes through the server.) Default value 1 Related user mode Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Maximum Data Size for Sending Supplement/memo Specify the upper limit value for transmission data size in user mode.

8

8-280

IFAX-PGD Lv.2 Details

Set page split TX at IFax Simple mode TX To set whether to allow split-data transmission on a page basis in the case that the transmission size in I-Fax Simple mode exceeds the upper limit value. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution In the case to enable split-data transmission, be sure to receive approval from the user in advance by explaining the following: - No guarantee for page order on the reception side - There is a possibility of interruption of other received jobs between pages. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 Related user mode Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Maximum Data Size for Sending Supplement/memo Specify the upper limit value for transmission data size in user mode. MEAPSAFE Setting of MEAP safe mode Lv.2 Details To set safe mode for MEAP platform. MPSF is displayed on the Control Panel in safe mode. In safe mode, MEAP application is stopped while just the system application, which starts with initial state, is activated. This mode enables obtaining log for cause analysis of MEAP failure. Use case Perform system recovery processing when MEAP platform fails to be activated due to resource conflict between MEAP applications, service registration or use order. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Normal mode, 1: Safe mode Default value 0 TRAY-FLL Set of target tray for tray full notice Lv.2 Details To set the tray which is the target of an output tray full notification. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: All trays to which paper can be output, 1: All trays which are specified as the dedicated trays Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-280

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER > OPTION > USER PRNT-POS Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value AFN-PSWD Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value PTJAM-RC Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value PDL-NCSW Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value

COPIER > OPTION > USER

ON/OFF of all pauses at error job cancel To set whether to pause the print operation of following jobs when a job is canceled due to an error inside the machine (#037, etc.) except service calls during PDL print. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Access limit setting to user mode To set whether to enter a password when accessing to the user mode. When 1 is set, password entry of system administrator is required after pressing Settings/Registration key. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Password is not required, 1: Password is required 0 Auto reprint setting at PDL print jam To set whether to automatically restart printing after clearing jam that occurs with PDL print. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Not automatically reprinted, 1: Automatically reprinted 1 Card mngm setting for PDL print job To set to make PDL print job be subject to card management by the Card Reader. With the setting to enable this mode, PDL print is available only when the card ID of the card inserted to the Card Reader matches the department ID. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: PDL print is available with no card inserted. 1: PDL print is available only when the card ID matches the department ID in the case that the card is inserted. 0

8

8-281

SLP-SLCT Lv.2 Details

Usage setting of network applications With the setting to use network-related application, the machine can be recovered through network because it does not shift to sleep mode 1. For this machine to recover from sleep mode 1 through network, a particular packet needs to be received; however, the existing network-related application does not send this packet. With the setting not to use the network-related application, this machine cannot recover from sleep mode 1 through network when it gets into sleep mode 1. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Not used (Shift to sleep mode 1 is available.) 1: Used (Shift to sleep mode 1 is not available.) Default value 0 Supplement/memo Network-related application: NetSpot Accountant, imageWARE PS-MODE Compatible mode setting at PS usage Lv.2 Details To set the image processing at PS print. Although the same line width is set, it may differ depending on the drawing position. By selecting 8, line widths which vary depending on the drawing position can be uniformed. Use case At replacement Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 0 to 7: Spare 8: Strokeadjustment is enabled. 9 to 65535: Spare Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-281

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER > OPTION > USER CNCT-RLZ Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo

COUNTER7 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value COUNTER8 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value 2C-CT-SW Lv.2 Details Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > OPTION > USER

Setting of connection serialize function Connection serialize is a function to assure job grouping function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0. The setting to enable this mode can avoid job rearrangement because the machine does not receive job data from other connection until it completes job data reception from the current connection. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Connection: Connection to be established through network between multiple hosts (PC, etc). Job grouping function: A function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0 to prevent job interruption from other PC by group job (sending multiple jobs in 1 session at job transmission). Setting of software counter 7 To set counter type for software counter 7 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: No registration 0 Setting of software counter 8 To set counter type for software counter 8 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: No registration 0 Set of color counter at 2-color mode To set whether to use the single color counter or full color counter for count-up in 2-color mode. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Single color counter, 1: Full color counter JP:0, USA:1, EUR:1, AU:1, CN:1, KR:1, TW:1, ASIA:1

8

8-282

JA-FUNC Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

ON/OFF of job archive function To set ON/OFF of job archive function. When setting job archive function 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Changing this mode is not available in service mode, but reference is available (in service mode). This mode is available only with the MEAP program that supports job archive. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 JA-JOB Setting of job archive target job Lv.2 Details To set the job type subject to job archive. With the job archive function enabled, archive operation is executed when executing the target job. Use case When setting job archive function Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Changing this mode is not available in service mode, but reference is available (in service mode). This mode is available only with the MEAP program that supports job archive. Display/adj/set range 0: N/A, 3: Limited to FAX/IFAX, 0xFFFFFFFF: All jobs Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > USER > JA-FUNC JA-RESTR Setting of job archive limit items Lv.2 Details To set restriction items for job archive specification. With job archive function enabled, follow the setting to execute operation to restrict specification. Use case When setting restriction items for job archive Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Changing this mode is not available in service mode, but reference is available (in service mode). This mode is available only with the MEAP program that supports job archive. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 32 specification restrictions with Bit definition Bit0: Function to obtain image file (0: OFF, 1: ON) Bit1: Function to compose form registration (0: OFF, 1: ON) Bit2: Function to edit document (0: OFF, 1: ON) Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > USER > JA-FUNC

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-282

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER > OPTION > USER LDAP-SW Lv.1 Details Use case

COPIER > OPTION > USER

Search condition set for LDAP server To set the condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server. When specifying condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 5 0: Includes the next, 1: Not include the next, 2: Equivalent to the next, 3: Not equivalent to the next, 4: Starts with the next, 5: Finishes with the next Default value 4 Supplement/memo LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol): Registering LDAP server enables to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server and the result can be registered in the Address Book, etc. Registration is available by the following: Set Destination > Register LDAP Server FROM-OF Deletion of e-mail sender’s address Lv.1 Details To set whether to delete the sender’s address (From) at the time of e-mail transmission. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Retained, 1: Deleted Default value 0 DOM-ADD Additional entry of e-mail destn domain Lv.2 Details To set to automatically add the domain specified in user mode to the sending address (To) entered at the time of e-mail transmission. If specifying “xxx.com” as a domain in user mode in advance, just entering “aaa” enables to display “[email protected]” when sending e-mail. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Not added, 1: Added Default value 0

8

8-283

FILE-OF Lv.1 Details

File send prohibition to entered address To set to prohibit the file transmission to entered address. File transmission is not available by entering the address because of no “File” display on the transmission screen. The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be selected, but even if a job is sent, it is to be a transmission error. (End code #762 is displayed.) Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be selected, but it is to be a transmission error. Therefore, be sure to receive approval from the user in advance to delete the address. Set the transmission prohibition after deleting the address. - When #762 is displayed without executing the procedure above, explain the user that it is different from the description in the User’s Guide. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled Default value 0 MAIL-OF Mail send prohibition to entered address Lv.1 Details To set to prohibit the e-mail transmission to entered address. E-mail transmission is not available by entering the address because of no “E-Mail” display on the transmission screen. The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be selected, but even if a job is sent, it is to be a transmission error. (End code #762 is displayed.) Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be selected, but it is to be a transmission error. Therefore, be sure to receive approval from the user in advance to delete the address. Set the transmission prohibition after deleting the address. - When #762 is displayed without executing the procedure above, explain the user that it is different from the description in the User’s Guide. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-283

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER > OPTION > USER IFAX-OF Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > USER

IFAX send prohibition to entered address To set to prohibit the IFAX transmission to entered address. I-Fax transmission is not available by entering the address because of no “I-Fax” display on the transmission screen. The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be selected, but even if a job is sent, it is to be a transmission error. (End code #762 is displayed.) Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be selected, but it is to be a transmission error. Therefore, be sure to receive approval from the user in advance to delete the address. Set the transmission prohibition after deleting the address. - When #762 is displayed without executing the procedure above, explain the user that it is different from the description in the User’s Guide. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled Default value 0 LDAP-DEF Initial condtn set of LDAP server search Lv.1 Details To set initial condition for search target attribute that is specified at the time of LDAP server Details search. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 6 0: Name, 1: E-mail, 2: FAX, 3: Organization, 4: Organization unit, 5: No registration 1 (any setting), 6: No registration 2 (any setting) Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > USER > LDAP-SW JA-DPI Display of job archive record resolution Lv.2 Details To display the resolution of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than FAX reception and I-Fax reception, etc. Only display is available in service mode. The setting is available only in the MEAP applications which support job archiving. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: No conversion, 1: 100 x 100 dpi, 2: 200 x 200 dpi, 3: 300 x 300 dpi Default value 3

8

8-284

JA-COMPR Lv.2 Details

Dspl job archive record compress ratio To display the compression ratio of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than FAX reception and I-Fax reception, etc. Only display is available in service mode. The setting is available only in the MEAP applications which support job archiving. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 5 0: No conversion, 1: Compression ratio 1/4, 2: Compression ratio 1/8, 3: Compression ratio 1/16, 4: Compression ratio 1/32, 5: Compression ratio 1/64 Default value 3 DK3-ASST Set of M-Deck(Middle) Air Heater control Lv.1 Details To set the condition to turn on the Air Heater at the Multi Deck (Middle) in accordance with media/environment. When the media is switched from non-coated paper to coated paper, pickup operation does not start until the temperature of the Air Heater reaches the specified temperature; thus, waiting time occurs. By selecting 1, the Air Heater is ON only for the coated paper. When the use environment is near the threshold for turning ON/OFF the Air Heater, switching occurs frequently, which increases the wait time. By selecting 2, the heater is always ON regardless of media and environment. Use case Upon user’s request (shorten the wait time) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When selecting 2, be sure to receive approval from the user in advance after explaining that there is a possibility that transfer performance may decrease if humidity decreases. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: ON/OFF depending on the media/environment condition 1: ON only for the coated paper 2: Always ON (No environment/media-dependant) Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-284

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER > OPTION > USER FREE-DSP Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > USER

Display/hide of charge disable screen To set whether to display or hide the charge disable screen for switching between charge and no charge. The hardware switch for switching charge/no charge in the Coin Manager enables the mode in which all the services are available for free (store manager mode) by temporarily releasing the charging system. Even without the hardware switch, the mode can be switched with the software switch when it is set to display the charge disable screen in Settings/Registration. Use case When enabling all the services to be provided for free by temporarily releasing the charging system Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 0 TNRB-SW Display/hide of Toner Container counter Lv.2 Details To set whether to display the Toner Container counter on the Counter Check screen. Use case When not showing the screen to users Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Hide, 1: Display (Toner Container counter only), 2: Display (Toner Container counter + ejection counter) Default value JP:0, USA:2, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 JA-FORMT Display of job archive record format Lv.2 Details To display the format of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than FAX reception and IFAX reception, etc. Whether the images processed by Packet JPEG are recorded in Packet JPEG, or converted into Raster JPEG and then recorded is displayed. Only display is available in service mode. The setting is available only in the MEAP applications which support job archiving. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Packet JPEG, 1: Raster JPEG Default value 0

8

8-285

HDCR-DSW Lv.1 Details

Dspl/hide of HDD complete delete ON/OFF To set whether to display or hide “Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion” in user mode. With this setting, HDD data complete deletion function is available with ON/OFF button on the screen. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1 Related user mode Management Settings > Data Management > HDD Data Complete Deletion > Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion DK1-ASST Set of P-Deck Air Heater control Lv.1 Details To set the condition to turn on the Air Heater at the POD Deck Lite in accordance with media/environment. When the media is switched from non-coated paper to coated paper, pickup operation does not start until the temperature of the Air Heater reaches the specified temperature; thus, waiting time occurs. By selecting 1, the Air Heater is ON only for the coated paper. When the use environment is near the threshold for turning ON/OFF the Air Heater, switching occurs frequently, which increases the wait time. By selecting 2, the heater is always ON regardless of media and environment. Use case Upon user’s request (shorten the wait time) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When selecting 2, be sure to receive approval from the user in advance after explaining that there is a possibility that transfer performance may decrease if humidity decreases. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: ON/OFF depending on the media/environment condition 1: ON only for the coated paper 2: Always ON (No environment/media-dependant) Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-285

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-286

COPIER > OPTION > USER DK4-ASST Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > USER

Set of M-Deck (Lower) Air Heater control To set the condition to turn on the Air Heater at the Multi Deck (Lower) in accordance with media/environment. When the media is switched from non-coated paper to coated paper, pickup operation does not start until the temperature of the Air Heater reaches the specified temperature; thus, waiting time occurs. By selecting 1, the Air Heater is ON only for the coated paper. When the use environment is near the threshold for turning ON/OFF the Air Heater, switching occurs frequently, which increases the wait time. By selecting 2, the heater is always ON regardless of media and environment. Use case Upon user’s request (shorten the wait time) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When selecting 2, be sure to receive approval from the user in advance after explaining that there is a possibility that transfer performance may decrease if humidity decreases. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: ON/OFF depending on the media/environment condition 1: ON only for the coated paper 2: Always ON (No environment/media-dependant) Default value 0 DK2-ASST Set of M-Deck (Upper) Air Heater control Lv.1 Details To set the condition to turn on the Air Heater at the Multi Deck (Upper) in accordance with media/environment. When the media is switched from non-coated paper to coated paper, pickup operation does not start until the temperature of the Air Heater reaches the specified temperature; thus, waiting time occurs. By selecting 1, the Air Heater is ON only for the coated paper. When the use environment is near the threshold for turning ON/OFF the Air Heater, switching occurs frequently, which increases the wait time. By selecting 2, the heater is always ON regardless of media and environment. Use case Upon user’s request (shorten the wait time) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When selecting 2, be sure to receive approval from the user in advance after explaining that there is a possibility that transfer performance may decrease if humidity decreases. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: ON/OFF depending on the media/environment condition 1: ON only for the coated paper 2: Always ON (No environment/media-dependant) Default value 0

8

BWCL-DSP Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SCALL-SW Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SCALLCMP Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value USBH-DSP Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode

Display/hide of clr/B&W selection screen To set whether to display the color/B&W selection screen to select the default of the color mode. When displaying the color mode default selection screen 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Display/hide of Service Call button To set whether to display or hide the Service Call button on the Control Panel. When the sales company supports service initiated by the Service Call button 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Set of repair request complete notice With this setting enabled, a notification of repair completion is sent to UGW server to clear the repair-request status that is retained internally. When service technician uses this mode after completing repair 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Display/hide of “Use USB Host” To set whether to display “Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use USB Host”. By selecting “1: Display”, whether to use USB host on USB Settings screen can be selected. When switching to display or hide “Use USB Host” on USB Settings screen 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use USB Host

8-286

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER > OPTION > USER USBM-DSP Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > USER

Dspl/hide of USB ex-memory device driver To set whether to display “Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for External USB Device”. By selecting “0: Hide”, the item is not displayed, and the user administrator cannot change the setting of the MEAP driver for the USB external memory device. Use case When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of “Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device”, set 0 after the specified setting is completed. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1 Related user mode Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device USBI-DSP Dspl/hide of USB input device driver set Lv.2 Details To set whether to display “Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device”. By selecting “0: Hide”, the item is not displayed, and the user administrator cannot change the setting of the MEAP driver for the USB input device. Use case When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of “Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device”, set 0 after the specified setting is completed. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1 Related user mode Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device CTCHKDSP Display/hide of Print List Lv.1 Details To set whether to display or hide “Print List” on the Counter Check screen. Model name, serial number information, counter check date and counter information can be output as Total Page Count List. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1

8

8-287

USBR-DSP Lv.2 Details

Dspl/hide of USB infrared device driver To set whether to display “Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device.” Use case When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of “Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device,” set 0 after the specified setting is completed. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 0 Related user mode Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for Bluetooth Device POL-SCAN Dspl/hide Rights Management Server set Lv.1 Details When “1: Display” is set, the Rights Management Server function screen is displayed. While the Rights Management Server function is a standard feature, it is possible to hide if not necessary. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value JP:1, USA:0, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 W-TN-DSP Dis/hide of waste toner counter clear Lv.1 Details To set whether to display the “Initialize After Waste Toner Replacement” on the Settings/Registration screen. When “1” is set, users can initialize the waste toner counter by themselves. Use case When allowing users to clear the counter of waste toner. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> W-TN-CLR Related user mode Settings/Registration> Adjustment/ Maintenance> Maintenance> Initialize After Waste Toner Replacement JA-SBOX Setting of linking with Advanced Box:SAM Lv.2 Details To set the link with Advanced Box when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, linking with Advanced Box is enabled. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-287

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-288

COPIER > OPTION > USER JA-DFAX Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Default value JA-REP Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Default value JA-FREP Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Default value JA-BOX Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Default value JA-FORM Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Default value JA-PREV Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > OPTION > USER

Setting of direct fax transmission: SAM To set the direct fax transmission when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the direct fax transmission is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of TX Report with image: SAM To set the TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the TX Report with image is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of Fax TX Report with image: SAM To set the Fax TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the Fax TX Report with image is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of Inbox document operation: SAM To set the operation for Inbox document at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set, the Inbox document can be operated. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of image composition: SAM To set the image composition when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the image composition is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of preview page deletion: SAM To set whether a page is deleted from the scan preview screen at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set, a page is deleted from the scan preview screen. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0

8

JA-PULL Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Default value JA-PDLB Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Default value JA-JOBK Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Default value JA-JDF Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range Default value JA-RUI Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

Use case Display/adj/set range Default value

Setting of network scan: SAM To set the network scan when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the network scan is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Set of printer driver multi box save:SAM To set whether a document can be simultaneously saved to multiple Inboxes from the printer driver at the time of iW SAM. When 1 is set, a document can be saved to multiple Inboxes from the printer driver. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of job merge allowance:SAM To set whether merging jobs is allowed when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, jobs can be merged. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of JDF: SAM To set the use of JDF when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, JDF can be used. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of Inbox document access: SAM To set the Inbox document access from remote UI at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set, accessing to the Inbox document from remote UI is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0

8-288

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER > OPTION > USER JA-WEB Lv.2 Details

COPIER > OPTION > USER

Setting of Inbox document upload: SAM To set the Inbox document upload with the Web browser at the time of iW SAM. When 1 is set, uploading of the Inbox document with the Web Browser is enabled. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 CS-ACC Set paper source switch in color mode Lv.1 Details To change “Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off” in user mode to switch of paper source in color mode. When 1 is set, the meaning of ON/OFF of “Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off” screen changes. ON: Paper sources that can be selected when color mode is other than “B&W” OFF: Paper sources that can be selected when color mode is “B&W” Use case When switching the paper source in color mode Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Same as conventional machines, 1: Paper source switch in color mode Default value 0 Related user mode Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off EXP-CRYP Confdntial encrypt ON/OFF:add book exprt Lv.1 Details To set whether to encrypt the confidential part (password part) in the Address Book when exporting the address book and device settings via RUI. When 0 is set, the confidential part in the address book is exported without encryption. Use case When there is a need to export password without encryption because of operation and tool Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure not to allow the user to execute export without encryption because of security concern. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 1

8

8-289

SLEEP1SW Lv.1 Details

Power supply when shifting to SLEEP1 When shifting to SLEEP1 mode, the power stops to be supplied, so it takes time to activate after a job is received. When 1 is set, the power keeps to be supplied even after shifting to SLEEP1 mode, so the activation of job processing becomes earlier. Use case Upon user’s request (when job processing after shifting to SLEEP1 is slow) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 1 CNCL-ATH ON/OFF of auth at secure job stop Lv.1 Details To set whether to conduct authentication when stopping a secure job in the secure print screen. When 0 is set, pressing [Stop] button deletes the secure job immediately. By setting 1 when user authentication is not conducted, the authentication screen is displayed and only the jobs which authentication was succeeded are deleted, so security for the secure job is enhanced. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 SMD-EXPT Setting of export target data: remote UI Lv.1 Details To set whether to export “service mode data” from remote UI. When 1 is set, “service mode data” is displayed as the target data of export on remote UI. When installing more than 1 machine at the same time, the same service mode data can be registered. Use case When installing more than 1 machine at the same time Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 0 Supplement/memo By selecting “service mode data” as the target data of export on remote UI after setting SMD-EXPT to 1, service mode data can be exported from remote UI.

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-289

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

8-290

■■CST

COPIER > OPTION > USER SNDSTREN Lv.1 Details

Set of setting delete aftr scan and send To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the address after transmission from the “Scan and Send” screen. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Delete, 1: Retain Default value JP:1, USA:0, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 FAXSTREN Set of setting delete aftr fax transmit Lv.1 Details To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the address after transmission from the “Fax” screen. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Delete, 1: Retain Default value JP:1, USA:0, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0

COPIER > OPTION > CST U1-NAME Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value U2-NAME Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range T-8-72

Default value U3-NAME Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value U4-NAME Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

Dspl/hide of ppr name in ppr size groupU1 To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group U1 detection. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Dspl/hide of ppr name in ppr size groupU2 To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group U2 detection. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Dspl/hide of ppr name in ppr size groupU3 To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group U3 detection. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Dspl/hide of ppr name in ppr size groupU4 To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group U4 detection. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0

8-290

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

8-291

COPIER > OPTION > CST P-SZ-C1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

COPIER > OPTION > CST

Setting of Right Deck paper size To set the paper size used in the Right Deck. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR Default value 0 P-SZ-C2 Setting of Left Deck paper size Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in the Left Deck. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR Default value 0 D1-CURL Set of curl correct at Right Deck pickup Lv.1 Details To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from the Right Deck. As the value is incremented by 1, the curl correction level is increased. Regardless of face-up or face-down, increase the value in the case of upward curl and decrease it in the case of downward curl. When this setting is made, the same curl correction level is applied to all media. This setting is linked with the value specified to the Right Deck in “Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer” in user mode. Use case Upon user’s request Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Default value 0 Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer

8

D2-CURL Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode D3-CURL Lv.1 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

Use case Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode

Set of curl correct at Left Deck pickup To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from the Left Deck. As the value is incremented by 1, the curl correction level is increased. Regardless of face-up or face-down, increase the value in the case of upward curl and decrease it in the case of downward curl. When this setting is made, the same curl correction level is applied to all media. This setting is linked with the value specified to the Left Deck in “Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer” in user mode. Upon user’s request -10 to 10 0 Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer Set of curl correct at Cassette 3 pickup To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from Cassette 3. As the value is incremented by 1, the curl correction level is increased. Regardless of face-up or face-down, increase the value in the case of upward curl and decrease it in the case of downward curl. When this setting is made, the same curl correction level is applied to all media. This setting is linked with the value specified to Cassette 3 in “Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer” in user mode. Upon user’s request -10 to 10 0 Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer

8-291

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

8-292

COPIER > OPTION > CST D4-CURL Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode D5-CURL Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode

COPIER > OPTION > CST

Set of curl correct at Cassette 4 pickup To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from Cassette 4. As the value is incremented by 1, the curl correction level is increased. Regardless of face-up or face-down, increase the value in the case of upward curl and decrease it in the case of downward curl. When this setting is made, the same curl correction level is applied to all media. This setting is linked with the value specified to Cassette 4 in “Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer” in user mode. Upon user’s request -10 to 10 0 Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer Set curl correct at Deck/POD Deck pickup To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from the Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite. As the value is incremented by 1, the curl correction level is increased. Regardless of face-up or face-down, increase the value in the case of upward curl and decrease it in the case of downward curl. When this setting is made, the same curl correction level is applied to all media. This setting is linked with the value specified to the POD Deck Lite in “Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer” in user mode. Upon user’s request -10 to 10 0 Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer

8

D6-CURL Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode D7-CURL Lv.1 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

Use case Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode

Set of curl correct at MP tray pickup To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from the Multi-purpose Tray. As the value is incremented by 1, the curl correction level is increased. Regardless of face-up or face-down, increase the value in the case of upward curl and decrease it in the case of downward curl. When this setting is made, the same curl correction level is applied to all media. This setting is linked with the value specified to the Paper Deck in “Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer” in user mode. Upon user’s request -10 to 10 0 Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer Set curl correct at M-Deck (Upr) pickup To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from the Multi Deck (Upper). As the value is incremented by 1, the curl correction level is increased. Regardless of face-up or face-down, increase the value in the case of upward curl and decrease it in the case of downward curl. When this setting is made, the same curl correction level is applied to all media. This setting is linked with the value specified to the Multi Deck (Upper) in “Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer” in user mode. Upon user’s request -10 to 10 0 Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer

8-292

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

COPIER > OPTION > CST D8-CURL Lv.1 Details

COPIER > OPTION > CST

Set curl correct at M-Deck (Mid) pickup To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from the Multi Deck (Middle). As the value is incremented by 1, the curl correction level is increased. Regardless of face-up or face-down, increase the value in the case of upward curl and decrease it in the case of downward curl. When this setting is made, the same curl correction level is applied to all media. This setting is linked with the value specified to the Multi Deck (Middle) in “Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Action > Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer” in user mode. Use case Upon user’s request Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Default value 0 Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer D9-CURL Set curl correct at M-Deck (Lowr) pickup Lv.1 Details To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from the Multi Deck (Lower). As the value is incremented by 1, the curl correction level is increased. Regardless of face-up or face-down, increase the value in the case of upward curl and decrease it in the case of downward curl. When this setting is made, the same curl correction level is applied to all media. This setting is linked with the value specified to the Multi Deck (Lower) in “Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Action > Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer” in user mode. Use case Upon user’s request Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Default value 0 Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer CST3-P1 Setting of Cst3 paper size (A5R/STMTR) Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in Cassette 3. Use case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 3 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: A5R, 1: STMTR Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Related user mode Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection

8

8-293

CST3-P2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Setting of Cst3 paper size (B5/EXEC) To set the paper size used in Cassette 3. When setting the paper size for the Cassette 3 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: B5, 1: EXEC Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Related user mode Preferences> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Paper Selection CST4-P1 Setting of Cst4 paper size (A5R/STMTR) Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in Cassette 4. Use case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 4 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: A5R, 1: STMTR Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Related user mode Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection CST4-P2 Setting of Cst4 paper size (B5/EXEC) Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in Cassette 4. Use case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 4 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: B5, 1: EXEC Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Related user mode Preferences> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Paper Selection CST5-P1 Setting of M-Deck (Upr) paper size Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in the Multi Deck (Upper). Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: A5R, 1: STMTR Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Related user mode Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

8-293

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

COPIER > OPTION > CST CST5-P2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

COPIER > OPTION > CST

Setting of M-Deck (Upr) paper size To set the paper size used in the Multi Deck (Upper). Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: B5, 1: EXEC Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Related user mode Preferences> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Paper Selection CST6-P1 Setting of M-Deck (Mid) paper size Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in the Multi Deck (Middle). Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: A5R,1: STMTR Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Related user mode Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection CST6-P2 Setting of M-Deck (Mid) paper size Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in the Multi Deck (Middle). Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: B5, 1: EXEC Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Related user mode Preferences> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Paper Selection CST7-P1 Setting of M-Deck (Lowr) paper size Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in the Multi Deck (Lower). Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: A5R,1: STMTR Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Related user mode Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection

8

8-294

CST7-P2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Setting of M-Deck (Lowr) paper size To set the paper size used in the Multi Deck (Lower). Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: B5, 1: EXEC Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Related user mode Preferences> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Paper Selection CST3-U1 Set Cst3 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry1 Lv.1 Details To set the area-specific standard size paper category 1 used in Cassette 3. Use case When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 3 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 43 0: Do not use special papers, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGL-R, 24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 28: B-OFI, 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35 to 36: Not used, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41: Not used, 42: FA4, 43 : Not used Default value 0 CST3-U3 Set Cst3 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry3 Lv.1 Details To set the area-specific standard size paper category 3 used in Cassette 3. Use case When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 3 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 31 0: Do not use special papers, 1 to 21: Not used, 22: K-LGL, 23 to 28: Not used, 29: A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR Default value 0 CST4-U1 Set Cst4 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry1 Lv.1 Details To set the area-specific standard size paper category 1 used in Cassette 4. Use case When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 4 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 43 0: Do not use special papers, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGL-R, 24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 28: B-OFI, 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35 to 36: Not used, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41: Not used, 42: FA4, 43 : Not used Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

8-294

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

COPIER > OPTION > CST CST4-U3 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value CST5-U1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value CST5-U3 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value CST6-U1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value

COPIER > OPTION > CST

Set Cst4 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry3 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 3 used in Cassette 4. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 4 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 31 0: Do not use special papers, 1 to 21: Not used, 22: K-LGL, 23 to 28: Not used, 29: A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR 0 MDeck(Upr) special paper category1 To set the special paper category 1 used in the Multi Deck (Upper). When setting area-specific standard size paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 43 0: Do not use special papers, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGL-R, 24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 28: B-OFI, 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35 to 36: Not used, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41: Not used, 42: FA4, 43 : Not used 0 MDeck(Upr) special paper category3 To set the special paper category 3 used in the Multi Deck (Upper). When setting area-specific standard size paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 31 0: Do not use special papers, 1 to 21: Not used, 22: K-LGL, 23 to 28: Not used, 29: A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR 0 MDeck(Mid) special ppr category1 To set the special paper category 1 used in the Multi Deck (Middle). When setting area-specific standard size paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 43 0: Do not use special papers, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGL-R, 24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 28: B-OFI, 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35 to 36: Not used, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41: Not used, 42: FA4, 43 : Not used 0

8

8-295

CST6-U3 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

MDeck(Mid) special ppr category3 To set the special paper category 3 used in the Multi Deck (Middle). When setting area-specific standard size paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 31 0: Do not use special papers, 1 to 21: Not used, 22: K-LGL, 23 to 28: Not used, 29: A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR Default value 0 CST7-U1 MDeck(Low) special ppr category1 Lv.1 Details To set the special paper category 1 used in the Multi Deck (Lower). Use case When setting area-specific standard size paper Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 43 0: Do not use special papers, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGL-R, 24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 28: B-OFI, 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35 to 36: Not used, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41: Not used, 42: FA4, 43 : Not used Default value 0 CST7-U3 MDeck(Low) special ppr category3 Lv.1 Details To set the special paper category 3 used in the Multi Deck (Lower). Use case When setting area-specific standard size paper Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 31 0: Do not use special papers, 1 to 21: Not used, 22: K-LGL, 23 to 28: Not used, 29: A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

T-8-73

8-295

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC

■■ACC

COPIER > OPTION > ACC Related user mode

COPIER > OPTION > ACC COIN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Display/adj/set range

Default value Related service mode

8-296

Setting of charge management To set charge management method. At installation of Coin Manager 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Following items are automatically specified when changing the value to 3 (from 0 to 2) when setting 3. The change will not be returned even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 (from 3) once the mode has been changed. - COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL, AFN-PSWD=1 - COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> DA-CNCT=1 - COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX=0 - Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv4 Settings> IP Address Range Settings> RX/Print Range: Permit IPv4 Address=ON - Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv6 Settings> IP Address Range Settings> RX/Print Range: Permit IPv6 Address=ON - Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > FTP Print Settings > Use FTP Printing=OFF - Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPP Print Settings=ON - Preferences> Network> SMB Server Settings> SMB Printer Settings> Use SMB=ON - Function Settings> Send> E-mail/I-Fax Settings> Communication Settings> SMTP Receive, POP=OFF Following items are automatically specified when changing the value to 4 (from 0 to 2) when setting 4. The change will not be returned even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 (from 4) once the mode has been changed. - COPIER> OPTION> USER> AFN-PSWD=1 - COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX, UIRSCAN, UI-EPRNT, UI-HOLD=0 - Management Settings> Device Management> Display Log=OFF 0 to 7 0: No charge 1: Charge with Coin Manager 2: Charge with remote counter 3: Charge with DA (only in Japan) 4: Charge with this machine itself 5: New SC mode 6: External charge mode 6 7: External charge mode 7 0 COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> DA-CNCT COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX

8

Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Communication Settings Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > FTP Print Settings Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > IPP Print Settings Supplement/memo Control card can be used with “0: No charge”. DA: Digital Accessory DK-P Setting of Paper Deck paper size Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in the Paper Deck. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR Default value 0 CARD-SW Screen set when Coin Manager connected Lv.1 Details To set coin or card that the user is urged to insert on the Control Panel when the Coin Manager is connected. Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Coin, 1: Card, 2: Coin and card, 3: Card (for customization) Default value 0 CC-SPSW Support setting of control card I/F Lv.2 Details To set support level for control card (CCIV/CCV) interface. To keep processing performance of printer engine, select “1: Priority on speed”. To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets, select “2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets”. Use case Upon user’s request (when connecting to the external counter management system using the control card interface) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution With priority on speed, output cannot be correctly stopped by the upper limit number of sheets. With priority on the upper limit number of sheets, processing performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup location. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC

8-296

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC

COPIER > OPTION > ACC UNIT-PRC Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

COPIER > OPTION > ACC

Setting of Coin Manager currency unit To set currency unit to be handled with Coin Manager At installation of Coin Manager 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 6 0: Japanese yen, 1: Euro, 2: Pound, 3: Swiss Franc, 4: Dollar, 5: No currency unit (no fractional unit), 6: No currency unit (with fractional unit) Default value 0 DA-PUCT Set pickup/delivery comctn at DA charge Lv.2 Details When a pickup and delivery notification error occurs due to network failure, etc., the print operation might be done without charging. This is to set the number of sheets that can be picked up after the machine receives Ack single from DA. When the value is decreased, the number of prints to be made without charging is decreased, but the productivity may decrease. When the value is increased, the productivity does not decrease, but the number of prints to be made without charging is increased. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution As the value is smaller, the number of prints to be made without charging is decreased, but the productivity might be lowered. Display/adj/set range 2 to 10 Default value 6 Supplement/memo DA: Digital Accessory MIN-PRC Set of Coin Manager minimum price Lv.1 Details To set the minimum amount to be handled with Coin Manager. Enter 10 when specifying 10 Japanese yen as the minimum amount to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen. In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by going through the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC > UNIT-PRC, entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($ 0.50). Use case At installation of Coin Manager Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER > OPTION > ACC > COIN. Display/adj/set range 0 to 9999 Default value 10 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC Supplement/memo As for the charging amount, it causes an error if specifying the value that is smaller than the minimum currency unit with Settings/ Registration mode.

8

8-297

MAX-PRC Lv.1 Details

Set of Coin Manager maximum price To set the maximum amount to be handled with Coin Manager. Enter 8800 when specifying 8800 Japanese yen as the maximum amount to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen. In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by going through the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC > UNIT-PRC, entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($ 0.50). Use case At installation of Coin Manager Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER > OPTION > ACC > COIN. Display/adj/set range 0 to 9999 Default value 8800 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC Supplement/memo As for charging amount, it causes an error if specifying the value that is larger than the maximum currency unit with Settings/Registration mode. MIC-TUN Manual adj of voice recognize microphone Lv.1 Details To manually adjust the voice receiving level (sensitivity) of the connected voice recognition microphone. Microphone sensitivity is automatically tuned in user mode; however, adjust it manually as needed. Use case When the sensitivity of microphone is not improved by auto tuning Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 128 Related user mode Preferences > Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings > Tune Microphone

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC

8-297

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE

COPIER > OPTION > ACC SRL-SPSW Lv.1 Details

Setting of Serial I/F Kit support To set the support level of the Serial Interface Kit. To keep processing performance of printer engine, select “1: Priority on speed”. To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets, select “2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets”. Use case At installation of Serial Interface Kit Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution With priority on speed, output cannot be correctly stopped by the upper limit number of sheets. With priority on the upper limit number of sheets, processing performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup location. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets Default value 0 PDL-THR Norm PDL print set: External charge mode Lv.2 Details To set the normal PDL print processing when setting external charge mode 6/7 with COIN. When 0 is set, a job is canceled. When 1 is set, a job is executed. Use case When setting the normal PDL print in external charge mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Cancel, 1: Execute Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN CR-TYPE Setting of Card Reader Lv.1 Details To set the model of the Card Reader. Set 0 in the case of connecting the Card Reader-C1. It operates even 0 is set, but recognition rate decreases. Use case When connecting the Card Reader-F1 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Card Reader-F1, 1: Card Reader-C1 Default value 0 T-8-74

■■INT-FACE COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE IMG-CONT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value AP-OPT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value AP-ACCNT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value AP-CODE Lv.2 Details Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value NWCT-TM Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value Supplement/memo

8

8-298

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE

Connection setting of print server To set connection with print server. At installation 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 5 0: Normal mode (Print server not connected), 1, 2: Not used, 3: Print server connected, 4, 5: Not used 0 Output set of appli with print server To set whether to permit output from the application (PrintMe) equipped with print server. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0 Job dept ID set of appli w/ print server To set department ID to the print job from the application (PrintMe) equipped with print server. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 9999999 0 Set output pass code from print server To set the pass code for output from print server. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 9999999 0 Timeout setting of network connection To set the time to keep network connection between this machine and the PC application (keep-alive setting). As the value is incremented by 1, the time is increased by 1 minute. When PC application is connected 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 5 min 5 Expected PC application: Network print application, E-mail function, cascade copy, MEAP network application, etc.

8-298

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE CNT-TYPE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value AUTHMODE Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Default value

Display of print server connection To display an automatically connected print server. At installation of print server 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 999 1 Setting to allow print server connection To set whether to permit the print server connection prohibited models to connect the printer server. When “0: Disabled” is set, even if a machine is connected to the print server, it is not activated correctly and fails to make prints. When “1: Enabled” is set, specific models only can be connected to the print server. For customization 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0

■■LCNS-TR COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-SEND Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-SEND Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

T-8-75

Display/adj/set range ST-ENPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-ENPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range

8

8-299

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Installation state dspl of SEND function To display installation state of SEND function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether SEND function is installed 1) Select ST-SEND. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND. 0 to 1 1 Trns license key dspl of SEND function To display transfer license key to use SEND function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-SEND. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND. 24 digits Installation state dspl of encrypted PDF To display installation state of encrypted PDF transmission function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether encrypted PDF transmission function is installed 1) Select ST-ENPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF. 0 to 1 0 Trns license key dspl of encrypted PDF To display transfer license key to use encrypted PDF transmission function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-ENPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits

8-299

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-SPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-SPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range ST-EXPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-EXPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Installation state dspl of searchable PDF To display installation state of searchable PDF when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether searchable PDF is installed 1) Select ST-SPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF. 0 to 1 0 Trns license key dspl of searchable PDF To display transfer license key to use searchable PDF when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-SPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits Instal state dspl of encryPDF+searchblPDF To display installation state of encrypted PDF + searchable PDF when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether encrypted PDF + searchable PDF are installed 1) Select ST-EXPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF. 0 to 1 0 Trns license key of encryPDF+searchblPDF To display transfer license key to use encrypted PDF + searchable PDF when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-EXPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed for Japan. 24 digits

8

8-300

ST-PDFDR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PDFDR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-SCR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-SCR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl of direct print PDF To display installation state of direct print PDF function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether direct print PDF function is installed 1) Select ST-PDFDR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key dspl of direct print PDF To display transfer license key to use direct print PDF function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PDFDR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR. 24 digits Install state dspl of encry secure print To display installation state of encrypted secure print when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether encrypted secure print is installed 1) Select ST-SCR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR. 0 to 1 0 Trns license key dspl of encry secure pnt To display transfer license key to use encrypted secure print when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-SCR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR. This mode is enabled when there is “3DES+USH-H” Board. 24 digits

8-300

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-BRDIM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-BRDIM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-VNC Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-VNC Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl of BarDIMM function To display installation state of BarDIMM function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether BarDIMM function is installed 1) Select ST-BRDIM. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM. 0 to 1 0 Transfer license key dspl of BarDIMM func To display transfer license key to use BarDIMM function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-BRDIM. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM. 24 digits Install state dspl of Remote Oprtr Soft To display installation state of Remote Operators Software when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether Remote Operators Software is installed 1) Select ST-VNC. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns dspl of Remote Operators Softl To display transfer license key to use Remote Operators Software when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-VNC. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC. 24 digits

8

8-301

ST-WEB Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-WEB Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-HRPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-HRPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl of Web Access Software To display installation state of Web Access Software when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether Web Access Software is installed 1) Select ST-WEB. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB. 0 to 1 0 Trns license key dspl of Web Access Soft To display transfer license key to use Web Access Software when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-WEB. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB. 24 digits Install state dspl of high compress PDF To display installation state of high compression PDF function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether high compression PDF function is installed 1) Select ST-HRPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key dspl of high compress PDF To display transfer license key to use high compression PDF function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-HRPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF. 24 digits

8-301

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-TRSND Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-TRSND Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-WTMRK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-WTMRK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl of trial SEND function To display installation state of trial SEND function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether trial SEND function is installed 1) Select ST-TRSND. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key dspl of trial SEND function To display transfer license key to use trial SEND function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-TRSND. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND. 24 digits Install state dspl of secure watermark To display installation state of secure watermark function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether secure watermark function is installed 1) Select ST-WTMRK. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK. 0 to 1 0 Trns license key dspl of secure watermark To display transfer license key to use secure watermark function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-WTMRK. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK. 24 digits

ST-TSPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-TSPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range ST-USPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-USPDF Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range

8

8-302

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl of time stamp PDF: JP To display installation state of time stamp PDF transmission function (JP only) when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether time stamp PDF transmission function (JP only) is installed 1) Select ST-TSPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key dspl of time stamp PDF: JP To display transfer license key to use time stamp PDF transmission function (JP only) when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-TSPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits Install state dspl of dgtl user sign PDF To display installation state of digital user signature PDF transmission function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether digital user signature PDF transmission function is installed 1) Select ST-USPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key dspl of dgtl user sign PDF To display transfer license key to use digital user signature PDF transmission function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-USPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits

8-302

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-DVPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-DVPDF Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range ST-SCPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-SCPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl of device sign PDF To display installation state of device signature PDF transmission function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether device signature PDF transmission function is installed 1) Select ST-DVPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key dspl of device sign PDF To display transfer license key to use device signature PDF transmission function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-DVPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits Install state dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF To display installation state of Trace & Smooth PDF when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether Trace & Smooth PDF is installed 1) Select ST-SCPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF. 0 to 1 0 Trns license key dspl of Trace&Smooth PDF To display transfer license key to use Trace & Smooth PDF when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-SCPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits

8

8-303

ST-AMS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-AMS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-ERDS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo TR-ERDS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Instal state dspl of Access Mngm System To display installation state of Access Management System when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether Access Management System is installed 1) Select ST-AMS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key dspl of Access Mngm System To display transfer license key to use Access Management System when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-AMS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS. 24 digits Inst state dspl: monitor service func To display installation state of monitoring service function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether monitoring service function is installed 1) Select ST-ERDS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS. 0 to 1 0 Monitoring service function: A function to send charge counter to the third party’s charge server. Trn lcns key dspl: monitor service func To display transfer license key to use monitoring service function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-ERDS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS. 24 digits Monitoring service function: A function to send charge counter to the third party’s charge server.

8-303

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-PS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-PCL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PCL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state display of PS function To display installation state of PS function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether PS function is installed 1) Select ST-PS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS. 0 to 1 0 Transfer license key dspl of PS function To display transfer license key to use PS function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS. 24 digits Installation state dspl of PCL function To display installation state of PCL function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether PCL function is installed 1) Select ST-PCL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL. 0 to 1 0 Transfer license key dspl of PCL function To display transfer license key to use PS function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PCL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL. 24 digits

8

8-304

ST-PSLI5 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PSLI5 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-LIPS5 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-LIPS5 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Installation state display of PS/UFR II To display installation state of PS/UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether PS/UFR II is installed 1) Select ST-PSLI5. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5. 0 to 1 0 Transfer license key dspl of PS/UFR II To display transfer license key to use PS/UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PSLI5. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5. 24 digits Installation state display of UFR II To display installation state of UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether UFR II function is installed 1) Select ST-LIPS5. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5. 0 to 1 0 Transfer lcns key dspl of UFR II function To display transfer license key to use UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-LIPS5. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5. 24 digits

8-304

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-LIPS4 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-LIPS4 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-PSPCL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PSPCL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state display of LIPS4 func: JP To display installation state of LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed 1) Select ST-LIPS4. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4. 0 to 1 0 Trns license key dspl of LIPS4 func: JP To display transfer license key to use LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-LIPS4. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4. 24 digits Install state dspl of PS/PCL function To display installation state of PS/PCL function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether PS/PCL function is installed 1) Select ST-PSPCL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL. 0 to 1 0 Transfer license key dspl of PS/PCL func To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PSPCL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL. 24 digits

8

8-305

ST-PCLUF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PCLUF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-PSLIP Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PSLIP Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl of PCL/UFR II function To display installation state of PCL/UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether PCL/UFR II function is installed 1) Select ST-PCLUF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF. 0 to 1 0 Trns license key dspl of PCL/UFR II func To display transfer license key to use PCL/UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PCLUF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF. 24 digits Installation state dspl of PS function To display installation state of PS function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether PS function is installed 1) Select ST-PSLIP. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP. 0 to 1 0 Transfer license key dspl of PS function To display transfer license key to use PS function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PSLIP. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP. 24 digits

8-305

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-PSPCU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PSPCU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-LXUFR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-LXUFR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func To display installation state of PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether PS/PCL/UFR II function is installed 1) Select ST-PSPCU. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PSPCU. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU. 24 digits Install state dspl of UFR II function To display installation state of UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether UFR II function is installed 1) Select ST-LXUFR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR. 0 to 1 1 Trns license key dspl of UFR II function To display transfer license key to use UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-LXUFR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR. 24 digits

8

8-306

ST-HDCR2 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-HDCR2 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-JBLK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-JBLK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set To display installation state of HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether HDD Initialize All Data/Settings is installed 1) Select ST-HDCR2. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set To display transfer license key to use HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-HDCR2. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2. 24 digits Install state dspl of Document Scan Lock To display installation state of Document Scan Lock when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether Document Scan Lock is installed 1) Select ST-JBLK. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key dspl of Document Scan Lock To display transfer license key to use Document Scan Lock when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-JBLK. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK. 24 digits

8-306

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-AFAX Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-AFAX Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-REPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-REPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Installation state dspl of remote fax To display installation state of remote fax client function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether remote fax client function is installed 1) Select ST-AFAX. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX. 0 to 1 0 Transfer license key dspl of remote fax To display transfer license key to use remote fax client function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-AFAX. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX. 24 digits Install state dspl:reader extensions PDF To display installation state of reader extensions PDF function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether reader extensions PDF function is installed 1) Select ST-REPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key dspl:reader extensions PDF To display transfer license key to use reader extensions PDF function when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-REPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF. 24 digits

8

8-307

ST-OOXML Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-OOXML Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-XPS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-XPS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl of Office Open XML To display installation state of Office Open XML transmission function when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether Office Open XML transmission function is installed 1) Select ST-OOXML. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key dspl of Office Open XML To display transfer license key to use Office Open XML when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-OOXML. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML. 24 digits Install state dspl of direct print XPS To display installation state of direct print XPS when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether direct print XPS is installed 1) Select ST-XPS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key dspl of direct print XPS To display transfer license key to use direct print XPS when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-XPS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS. 24 digits

8-307

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ST-2600 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-2600 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-OPFNT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-OPFNT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Instal state dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func To display installation state of security function of IEEE2600.1 when disabling the function with license transfer. When checking whether security function of IEEE2600.1 is installed 1) Select ST-2600. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600. 0 to 1 0 Trn lcns key dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func To display transfer license key to use security function of IEEE2600.1 when disabling the function with license transfer. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-2600. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600. 24 digits Install status display of PCL Font Set To display the installation status of PCL Font Set when transfer is disabled When checking whether PCL option font is installed 1) Select ST-OPFNT. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under ST-OPFNT. 0 to 1 0 Trns lcns key display of PCL Font Set To display transfer license key to use PCL Font Set function with Policy when transfer is disabled. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select TR-OPFNT. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT. 24 digits

8

8-308

ST-NCAPT Lv.2 Details

Install state display of NetCap func To display installation state of network packet capture function when disabling the function with license transfer. Use case When checking whether network packet capture function is installed Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-NCAPT. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-NCAPT. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Not installed, 1: Installed When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 0 TR-NCAPT Transfer license key dspl of NetCap func Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use network packet capture function when disabling the function with license transfer. Use case - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-NCAPT. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-NCAPT. Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters)

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

T-8-76

8-308

8

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG

TEST

8-309 COPIER > TEST > PG DENS-Y Lv.1 Details

■■PG COPIER > TEST > PG TYPE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Test print To execute the test print. At problem analysis Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Test print is executed. Caution Be sure to return the value to 0 after the test print output. Display/adj/set range 0 to 100 0: Image from CCD (Normal print) 1 to 3: For R&D use 4: 16 gradations 5: Whole-area halftone image 6: Grid 7 to 9: For R&D use 10: MCYBk horizontal stripes 11: For R&D use 12: YMCBk 64 gradations 13: For R&D use 14: Full color 16 gradations 15 to 100: For R&D use Default value 0 TXPH Setting of test print image mode Lv.1 Details To set the image mode at the time of test print output. This mode is enabled for test print only. Use case At problem analysis Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 6 0: Error diffusion 1: Low screen ruling (approx. 133 to 190 lines) 2: High screen ruling (approx. 200 to 268 lines) 3: Copy screen (approx. 220 lines) 4: REOS screen (no screen structure) 5 to 6: Not used THRU Image correction table use at test print Lv.1 Details To set whether to use the image correction table at the time of test print output. Use case At problem analysis Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Used, 1: Not used

8

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range DENS-M Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range DENS-C Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range DENS-K Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COLOR-Y Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COLOR-M Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Adj of Y-color density at test print To adjust Y-color density when performing test print (TYPE=5). As the value is larger, the image gets darker. At test print (TYPE=5) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 255 Adj of M-color density at test print To adjust M-color density when performing test print (TYPE=5). As the value is larger, the image gets darker. At test print (TYPE=5) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 255 Adj of C-color density at test print To adjust C-color density when performing test print (TYPE=5). As the value is larger, the image gets darker. At test print (TYPE=5) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 255 Adj of Bk-color density at test print To adjust Bk-color density when performing test print (TYPE=5). As the value is larger, the image gets darker. At test print (TYPE=5) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 255 Y-color output setting at test print To make a setting of Y-color output for test print. The setting is applied to all types. When setting “COLOR-Y” to 1 and other items to “0”, a single Y color is output. At test print Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Not output, 1: Output M-color output setting at test print To make a setting of M-color output for test print. The setting is applied to all types. When setting “COLOR-M” to 1 and other items to “0”, a single M color is output. At test print Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Not output, 1: Output

8-309

8

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG

8-310

COPIER > TEST > PG COLOR-C Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COLOR-K Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range F/M-SW Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value PG-PICK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

2-SIDE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > TEST > PG

C-color output setting at test print To make a setting of C-color output for test print. The setting is applied to all types. When setting “COLOR-C” to 1 and other items to “0”, a single C color is output. At test print Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Not output, 1: Output Bk-color output setting at test print To make a setting of Bk-color output for test print. The setting is applied to all types. When setting “COLOR-K” to 1 and other items to “0”, a single Bk color is output. At test print Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Not output, 1: Output Setting of PG full color/mono color To set for the output in full color/monochrome color with PG. When separating (identifying) the cause whether it’s due to color or monochrome. Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Full color, 1: Single color 0 Setting of test print paper source To set the paper source at the time of test print output. - At problem analysis - At test print output Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 1 to 19 1: Right Deck, 2: Left Deck, 3: Cassette3, 4: Cassette4, 5 to 6: Not used, 7: POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck, 8: Multi-purpose Tray, 9 to 16: Not used, 17: Multi Deck (Upper) 18: Multi Deck (Middle), 19: Multi Deck (Lower) Setting of PG 2-sided mode To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output. At problem analysis Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided 0

8

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG

PG-QTY Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value FINISH Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value Related service mode

Setting of PG output quantity To set the number of sheets for PG output. At problem analysis Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 1 to 999 sheet 1 Accessory processing function test print To execute the test print relating to accessory processing function. When checking operation of accessory processing function Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 99 0: N/A 1: Staple (front) *1 2: Staple (2 points) *1 3: Staple (rear) *1 4: Booklet (saddle stitch) *1 5: Z-fold (single sleeve) *1 6: 2-fold *1 7: C-fold *2 8: V-fold *2 9: 4-fold *2 10: Z-fold (out-3-fold) *2 11: Punch (Inner Puncher) *3 12: Multiple-hole punch *4 13: Shift *1 14 to 99: Spare (for future use) *1 Finisher, *2 Multi-folding machine, *3 Inner Puncher, *4 Multiplehole Puncher 0 COPIER> TEST> PG> PG-QTY T-8-77

8-310

8

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK

■■NETWORK

8-311 COPIER > TEST > NETWORK

COPIER > TEST > NETWORK PING Lv.1 Details Use case

Network connection check To check connection between this machine and TCP/IP network. - When checking network connection at the time of installation - At network connection failure Adj/set/operate method 1) Turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Connect the network cable to this machine, and then turn ON the main power switch. 3) Inform the system administrator at user’s site that installation of this machine is complete, and ask for network setting. 4) Ask the system administrator to check the network connection, and check the remote host address of PING transmission target. 5) Select the item and enter the remote host address, and then press OK key and Start key. OK: Connection is normal. Checking procedure is complete. NG: Connection failed. Go to step 6) if the cable connection is OK. In case of cable connection failure, connect again and then go to step 5). 6) Select the item and enter loopback address, and then press OK key and Start key. OK: TCP/IP setting of this machine is normal. Go to step 7) to check NIC. NG: TCP/IP setting of this machine has failure. Go to step 3) to check the setting again. 7) Select the item and enter the local host address, and then press OK key. OK: Network setting of this machine and NIC are normal. Inform the system administrator that the trouble is due to network environment and ask for countermeasure. NG: Connection failure/fault with NIC. Check connection of NIC/ replace NIC. Display/adj/set range 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 At normal state: OK, At failure occurrence: NG Supplement/memo - Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal in network. - Loopback address: 127.0.0.1. Checking TCP/IP of this machine is AZ733available because the signal is returned before NIC. - NIC: Network interface board - Local host address: IP address of this machine BML-DISP Set System Monitor scrn: BMlinks support Lv.2 Details To set whether to only display the device configuration in the System Monitor screen when supporting BMlinks. When 1 is set, the Status and Log are not displayed. Use case When supporting BMlinks Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Ordinary System Monitor screen 1: Screen in which only the device configuration is displayed Default value 0

8

IPV6-ADR Lv.1 Details

Adj/set/operate method Caution

Display/adj/set range Related service mode PING-IP6 Lv.1 Details

Adj/set/operate method Related service mode IPSECPOL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

IPSECINT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK

Setting of PING send address (IPv6) To set the IPv6 address to send PING. When PING is sent to this address by COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6, the network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be checked. Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. - Enter a consistent character string as an address of IPv6. - Enter an address within 39 characters including hexadecimal numbers (0 to 9, a to f) and a separator (:). Up to 40 characters including hexadecimal numbers (0 to 9, A to F) and a separator (:) COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6 PING transmission to IPv6 address To send PING to the address specified by IPV6-ADR. The network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be checked. Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> IPV6-ADR Polling test of IPSec Encryption Board To execute polling test of IPSec Encryption Board. To check whether a hardware failure has occurred. When checking whether a hardware failure has occurred to the IPSec Encryption Board Select the item, and then press OK key. At normal state: OK At failure occurrence: NG (0: The board cannot be recognized. 1: An error occurred to the result.) Interrupt test of IPSec Encryption Board To execute the interrupt test of IPSec Encryption Board. To check whether a hardware failure has occurred. When checking whether a hardware failure has occurred to the IPSec Encryption Board Select the item, and then press OK key. At normal state: OK At failure occurrence: NG (0: The board cannot be recognized. 1: An error occurred to the result.) T-8-78

8-311

8

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP

■■NET-CAP

COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP

CAPOFFON Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value STT-STP Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value CAPSTATE Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value PONSTART Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value OVERWRIT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8-312

ON/OFF of NetCap function To set ON/OFF of network packet capture function. When switching ON/OFF of network packet capture function Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Start and stop of network packet capture To start and stop network packet capture. When starting and stopping network packet capture Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Stop, 1: Start 0 Status of NetCap function To display the status of network packet capture function When displaying the status of network packet capture function None 0 to 4 0 Start of NetCap function at power-on To set whether to enable network packet capture function from power-on. When switching whether to enable network packet capture function from power-on Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0 Data overwriting control: NetCap function To set whether to finish capturing or continue overwriting when HDD becomes full. When setting whether to finish capturing or continue overwriting when HDD becomes full Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: No overwriting (finish network packet capture), 1: Overwriting 0

8

PAYLOAD Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Payload discard: NetCap function To set whether to discard payload of captured packet. When setting whether to discard payload of captured packet Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Save captured packet data as is, 1: Discard payload and save the packet data Default value 0 FILE-CLR Deletion of file: NetCap function Lv.2 Details To delete data collected by network packet capture function. Use case When deleting data collected by network packet capture function Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. SIMPFILT Settings of packet data filtering Lv.2 Details To set whether to perform filtering when capturing packet data. When 0 is set, filtering is not performed (All the data are captured.) When 1 is set, packet data is captured only when the receiver’s or sender’s address coincides with the Mac address of this machine. Use case At problem analysis (at packet data analysis) Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Not filtered, 1: Filtered 2: Not used ENCDATA Setting of packet data encryption Lv.2 Details To set whether to encrypt the packet data when writing the captured packet data to the USB memory. Use case - At problem analysis (at packet data analysis) - When improving security of written packet data Caution This setting is enabled only when writing data to the USB memory. Even when the packet data is loaded using SST, the file is specified, therefore the setting is disabled. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Encrypted (encrypted file) 1: Not encrypted (plain text file) 2: Encrypted (encrypted file + plain text file) Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP

T-8-79

8-312

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL

COUNTER

COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL 2-SIDE Lv.1 Details

■■TOTAL COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL SERVICE1 Lv.1 Details

Display/adj/set range SERVICE2 Lv.1 Details

Display/adj/set range COPY Lv.1 Details

Display/adj/set range PDL-PRT Lv.1 Details

Display/adj/set range FAX-PRT Lv.1 Details

Display/adj/set range BOX-PRT Lv.1 Details

Display/adj/set range RPT-PRT Lv.1 Details

Display/adj/set range

8-313

Service-purposed total counter 1 To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 Service-purposed total counter 2 To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine. Large size: 2, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 Total copy counter To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 PDL print counter To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at PDL print. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 FAX reception print counter To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at FAX reception. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 Inbox print counter To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at Inbox print. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 Report print counter To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at report print. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999

8

Display/adj/set range SCAN Lv.1 Details

Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL

2-sided copy/print counter To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at 2-sided copy/print. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 Scan counter To count the number of scan operations according to the charge counter when the scanning operation is complete. Large size: 1, small size: 1 0 to 99999999 T-8-80

8-313

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER

■■PICK-UP

■■FEEDER COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP

C1 Lv.1 Details Unit C2 Lv.1 Details Unit C3 Lv.1 Details Unit C4 Lv.1 Details Unit MF Lv.1 Details Unit DK Lv.1 Details Unit 2-SIDE Lv.1 Details Unit D1 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value D2 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value D3 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value

8-314 COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER

Cassette 1 pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 sheet Cassette 2 pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 sheet Cassette 3 pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 sheet Cassette 4 pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 sheet Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 sheet Deck pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 sheet 2-sided pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 sheet POD Upper Deck pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 When checking the total counter of POD Upper Deck sheet 0 POD Middle Deck pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 When checking the total counter of POD Middle Deck sheet 0 POD Lower Deck pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 When checking the total counter of POD Lower Deck sheet 0

FEED Lv.1 Details Use case Unit DFOP-CNT Lv.1 Details Use case Unit

DADF original pickup total counter DADF original pickup total counter When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF sheet DADF hinge open/close counter DADF hinge open/close counter When checking the DADF hinge open/close counter time T-8-82

T-8-81

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER

8-314

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JAM

■■JAM

COPIER > COUNTER > JAM COPIER > COUNTER > JAM

TOTAL Lv.1 Details Use case Unit FEEDER Lv.1 Details Use case Unit SORTER Lv.1 Details Use case Unit 2-SIDE Lv.1 Details Use case Unit MF Lv.1 Details Use case Unit C1 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit C2 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit C3 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit C4 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit DK Lv.1 Details Use case Unit

8-315

Printer total jam counter Printer total jam counter When checking the total jam counter of printer time Feeder total jam counter Feeder total jam counter When checking the total jam counter of feeder time Finisher total jam counter Finisher total jam counter When checking the total jam counter of finisher time Duplex Unit jam counter Duplex Unit jam counter When checking the jam counter of Duplex Unit time Multi-purpose Tray jam counter Multi-purpose Tray jam counter When checking the jam counter of Multi-purpose Tray time Right Deck jam counter Right Deck jam counter When checking the jam counter of machine’s Right Deck time Left Deck jam counter Left Deck jam counter When checking the jam counter of machine’s Left Deck time Cassette 3 pickup jam counter Cassette 3 pickup jam counter When checking the jam counter of machine’s Cassette 3 time Cassette 4 pickup jam counter Cassette 4 pickup jam counter When checking the jam counter of machine’s Cassette 4 time POD Deck Lite jam counter POD Deck Lite jam counter When checking the jam counter of POD Deck Lite time

8

MDK1 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value MDK2 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value MDK3 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JAM

Multi Deck (Upper) jam counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 When checking the jam counter of Multi Deck (Upper) time 0 Multi Deck (Middle) jam counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 When checking the jam counter of Multi Deck (Middle) time 0 Multi Deck (Lower) jam counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 When checking the jam counter of Multi Deck (Lower) time 0 T-8-83

8-315

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > MISC

■■MISC

COPIER > COUNTER > MISC COPIER > COUNTER > MISC

T-SPLY-Y Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value T-SPLY-M Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value T-SPLY-C Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value T-SPLY-K Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value ALLPW-ON Lv.1 Details Use case Unit HDD-ON Lv.1 Details Use case Unit ST-NDL Lv.1 Details Unit Default value ENT-PTH Lv.1 Details Unit Default value

8-316

Y toner supply counter Number of Y color toner supply blocks. Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw. When checking the usage status of toner block 0 M toner supply counter Number of M color toner supply blocks. Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw. When checking the usage status of toner block 0 C toner supply counter Number of C color toner supply blocks. Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw. When checking the usage status of toner block 0 Bk toner supply counter Number of Bk color toner supply blocks. Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw. When checking the usage status of toner block 0 Number of DCON PCB power-on times Number of power-on times (Non-all-night Power Unit). To count up when power is turned ON (Non-all-night Power Unit). When checking the usage status of the product time Number of HDD start-up times To count up at HDD start-up. When checking the usage status of the product time Staple needle counter To count the use of the staple needle. time 0 Entrance paper path counter Entrance paper path counter sheet 0

8

TRAY-CHA Lv.1 Details Unit Default value PUNCH Lv.1 Details Unit Default value PUN-CAB Lv.1 Details Unit Default value PUN-WST Lv.1 Details Default value SADDLE Lv.1 Details Unit Default value SDL-STPL Lv.1 Details Unit Default value SDL-NDL Lv.1 Details Unit Default value ESC-PTH Lv.1 Details Unit Default value SUC-A-Y SUC-A-M SUC-A-C SUC-A-K

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > MISC

Tray change counter Tray change counter time 0 Punch Unit counter Punch Unit counter time 0 Punch Unit Cable counter Punch Unit Cable counter time 0 Punch waste counter Punch Unit punch waste counter 0 Saddle paper path counter Saddle paper path counter sheet 0 Saddle Staple counter Saddle Staple Unit counter time 0 Saddle staple needle counter Saddle staple needle counter time 0 Escape paper path counter Escape paper path counter sheet 0 For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use

8-316

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JOB

COPIER > COUNTER > MISC FX-WEB Lv.1 Details

Web Level Sensor parts counter To display the accumulated number of sheets fed through the web (on a small size conversion basis) after the Web Level Sensor is turned ON. 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value To reset the number of fed sheets (DRBL-1/FX-WEB1 to 4, MISC/ FX-WEB) by pressing the Clear key. (Use this mode when replacing the web and Fixing Unit.) Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Unit sheet Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER>DRBL-1>FIX-WEB COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> FX-WEB-TM1 to 8

8-317

■■JOB COPIER > COUNTER > JOB DVPAPLEN Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Default value DVRUNLEN Lv.1 Details

T-8-84

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

Average paper length of job Average paper length in the period from when the printer engine starts printing operation to when it stops the operation. Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed continuously as a large job, the average paper length affects calculation of the life. When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts 0 to 99999999 mm 0 Average distance of job Average running distance in the period from when the printer engine starts printing operation to when it stops the operation. Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed continuously as a large job, the average running distance affects calculation of the life. When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts 0 to 99999999 mm 0 T-8-85

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JOB

8-317

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1

■■PRDC-1

COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1

PRM-WIRE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PRM-GRID Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PO-WIRE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PRM-CLN Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

8-318

Primary Charging Wire parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Grid Plate parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Pre-transfer Charging Wire parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Primary Charge Wire Clean Pad prts cntr Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad 1, 2 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8

PO-CLN Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PRM-CLN2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PO-CLN2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PO-UNIT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1

Pre-transfer Chg Wire Cln Pad prts cntr Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad 1, 2 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Prmry Charge Wire Cleanr Pad2 prts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Pre-trn Chg Wire Clnr Pad2 parts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Pre-transfer Charging Ass’y parts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8-318

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1

COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 PRM-UNIT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value GRID-PAD Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value OZ-FIL1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value AR-FIL1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1

Primary Charging Assembly parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Grid Cleaning Pad parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Ozone Filter parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Dustproof Filter parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8

8-319

TN-FIL1 Lv.1 Details

Toner Filter parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1

T-8-86

8-319

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

■■DRBL-1

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

TR-BLT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value 2TR-ROLL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value TR-STC-H Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value 2TR-INRL Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

8-320

ITB parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Sec Transfer Outer Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Sec Transfer Static Eliminator prts cntr Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Sec Transfer Inner Roller parts counter Secondary Transfer Inner Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8

ITB-BLD1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PT-DRM Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value CLN-BLD Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value DV-UNT-C Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

ITB Cleaning Blade parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Bk Photosensitive Drum parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Developing Assembly (C) parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8-320

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 DV-UNT-Y Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value DV-UNT-M Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value DV-UNT-K Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C1-PU-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

Developing Assembly (Y) parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Developing Assembly (M) parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Developing Assembly (Bk) parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Right Deck Pickup Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8

8-321

C1-SP-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value C1-FD-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C2-PU-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C2-SP-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

Right Deck Separation Roller parts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Right Deck Feed Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Left Deck Pickup Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Left Deck Separation Roller prts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0

8-321

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 C2-FD-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C3-PU-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C3-SP-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C3-FD-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

Left Deck Feed Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 3 Pickup Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 3 Separation Roller parts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 3 Feed Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8

8-322

C4-PU-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C4-SP-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C4-FD-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value M-SP-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

Cassette 4 Pickup Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 4 Separation Roller parts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 4 Feed Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Multi-purpose Tray Sprtn Roll prts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0

8-322

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 M-FD-RL Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roll prts cntr Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 WST-TNR Waste Toner Container parts counter Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit image Default value 0 ITB-SCRP ITB Inner Scraper Holder parts counter Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0

8

8-323

FX-BLT-U Lv.1 Details

Fixing Roller parts counter To display the accumulated number of paper transported through Fixing Roller on a small size conversion basis. 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life By pressing Clear key, the accumulated number of paper transported through Fixing Roller, the running time of the Fixing Roller (FX-U-TM1 to 8), and displacement control steering setting value (FX-U-STR) are reset. Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> BLT-TM, BLT-TM1 to 8, BLT2-TM1 to 8 PT-DR-Y Y Photosensitive Drum parts counter Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 PT-DR-M M Photosensitive Drum parts counter Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

8-323

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 PT-DR-C Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value 1TR-RL-Y Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value 1TR-RL-M Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value 1TR-RL-C Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

C Photosensitive Drum parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Primary Transfer Roller(Y) parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Primary Transfer Roller(M) parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Primary Transfer Roller(C) parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8

8-324

1TR-RL-K Lv.1 Details

Primary Transfer Roller(Bk) prts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 SU-SHT-K Drum Clean Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) prts cntr Lv.1 Details Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 EDGE-F-K Edge Scraper (Bk) parts counter Lv.1 Details Edge Scraper 1, 2 (Bk) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

8-324

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 FX-L Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

Pressure Roller parts counter To display the accumulated number of sheets fed through Pressure Roller on a small size conversion basis. 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value By pressing Clear key, the accumulated number of sheets fed through Pressure Roller and the running time of the Pressure Roller (FX-L-TM1 to 8) are reset. Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> FX-L-TM1 to 8 FX-WEB1 Dspl/clear fed sht: Web, s-size convs Lv.1 Details To display the accumulated number of sheets fed through the web (on a small size conversion basis, and including web take-up in cleaning mode). 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value To reset the number of fed sheets (DRBL-1/FX-WEB1 to 4, MISC/ FX-WEB) by pressing the Clear key. (Use this mode when replacing the web and Fixing Unit.) Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB DRBL-1>FX-WEB1 to 4

8

8-325

FX-WEB2 Lv.1 Details

Dspl/clear fed sht:web N-SPD,s-siz convs To display the number of fed sheets (on a small size conversion basis) when feeding the web at normal speed. 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value To reset the number of fed sheets (DRBL-1/FX-WEB1 to 4, MISC/ FX-WEB) by pressing the Clear key. (Use this mode when replacing the web and Fixing Unit.) Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB DRBL-1>FX-WEB1 to 4 FX-WEB3 Dspl/clear fed sht:web W-SPD,s-siz convs Lv.1 Details To display the number of fed sheets (on a small size conversion basis) when feeding the web at double speed. 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value To reset the number of fed sheets (DRBL-1/FX-WEB1 to 4, MISC/ FX-WEB) by pressing the Clear key. (Use this mode when replacing the web and Fixing Unit.) Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB DRBL-1>FX-WEB1 to 4

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

8-325

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 FX-WEB4 Lv.1 Details

Dspl/clear fed sht:web clean,s-siz convs To display the number of fed sheets (on a small size conversion basis) at cleaning operation. 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value To reset the number of fed sheets (DRBL-1/FX-WEB1 to 4, MISC/ FX-WEB) by pressing the Clear key. (Use this mode when replacing the web and Fixing Unit.) Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB DRBL-1>FX-WEB1 to 4 FX-UH-RL Fixing Heat Soaking Roller parts counter Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 T-8-87

8

8-326

■■DRBL-2 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 DF-PU-RL Lv.1 Details

Pickup Roller parts counter: DADF 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 DF-FD-RL Feed Roller parts counter: DADF Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 DF-SP-RL Separation Roller parts counter: DADF Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-326

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 LNT-TAP1 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Dust Removal Sheet 1 counter: DADF Dust-colleting 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 LNT-TAP2 Dust Removal Sheet 2 counter: DADF Lv.1 Details Dust-colleting typeE 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 STAMP Stamp parts counter: DADF Lv.1 Details To display the estimated life and parts counter of DADF stamp. 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life to be entered by operator Use case At replacement Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0

PD-PU-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PD-SP-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PD-PU-CL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PD-FD-RL Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

8

8-327

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Pickup Roller parts counter: Deck 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Separation Roller parts counter: Deck 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Upr Deck Pickup Clutch prts cntr:M Deck 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Feed Roller parts counter: Deck Feed Roller of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite/Multi Deck (Upper) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0

8-327

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 PD-PU-SL Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value FIN-STPR Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value SDL-STPL Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value FN-BFFRL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Upr Deck Pickup Solend prts cntr: M Deck Pickup Roller Release Solenoid 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Stapler parts counter/B1 Stapler Unit 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time 0 Saddle Stapler parts counter Saddle Stapler Unit 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time 0 Buffer Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8

8-328

DL-STC-L Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value DL-STC-R Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value ENT-STC Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value CENT-STC Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Static Eliminator prts cntr/B1 Swing Guide Assembly Static Eliminator (Front/Rear) Delivery Static Eliminator (Left) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life to be entered by operator At replacement To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Static Eliminator prts cntr/B1 Feed Guide Assembly Static Eliminator Delivery Static Eliminator (Right) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life to be entered by operator At replacement To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Inlet Static Eliminator prts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Swinging Sttc Elim prts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8-328

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 BACK-ROL Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Paper Return Roller parts counter Paper Return Roller (Front/Rear) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 STK-STC Stck Delv Rol Sttc Elim prts cntr Lv.1 Details Process delivery static eliminator 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 IS-P-RL1 Pickup Roll prts cntr: INS-H1/J1, PF/INS Lv.1 Details INS-H1: Upper Tray Pickup Roller INS-J1, PF/INS: Inserter Pickup Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0

8

8-329

IS-S-RL1 Lv.1 Details

Sprtn Roll prts cntr: INS-H1/J1, PF/INS INS-H1: Upper Tray Separation Roller INS-J1, PF/INS: Inserter Separation Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 IS-F-RL1 Feed Roller prts cntr: INS-H1/J1, PF/INS Lv.1 Details INS-H1: Upper Tray Feed Roller INS-J1, PF/INS: Inserter Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 IS-TQLM1 Drv Torq Limt prts cntr:INS-H1/J1,PF/INS Lv.1 Details INS-H1: Upper Tray Torque Limiter INS-J1, PF/INS: Inserter Drive Torque Limiter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-329

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 IS-P-RL2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value IS-S-RL2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value IS-F-RL2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value IS-TQLM2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Lowr Tray Pickup Roll prts cntr: INS-H1 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Lower Tray Sprtn Roll parts cntr: INS-H1 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Lower Tray Feed Roller prts cntr: INS-H1 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Lower Tray Torque Limt prts cntr: INS-H1 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0

8

8-330

BEHL-RL Lv.1 Details

Stck Tray Ppr Rtnr Roll prts cntr Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 IU-ELM Static Eliminator parts counter: P-PuncherIFU Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 DIESET1 Die set 1 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-330

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 DIESET2 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Die set 2 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET3 Die set 3 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET4 Die set 4 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-331

DIESET5 Lv.1 Details

Die set 5 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET6 Die set 6 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET7 Die set 7 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-331

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 DIESET8 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Die set 8 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET9 Die set 9 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET10 Die set 10 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-332

DIESET11 Lv.1 Details

Die set 11 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET12 Die set 12 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET13 Die set 13 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-332

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 DIESET14 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Die set 14 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET15 Die set 15 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET16 Die set 16 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-333

DIESET17 Lv.1 Details

Die set 17 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET18 Die set 18 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET19 Die set 19 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-333

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 DIESET20 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Die set 20 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET21 Die set 21 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET22 Die set 22 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-334

DIESET23 Lv.1 Details

Die set 23 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET24 Die set 24 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET25 Die set 25 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-334

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 DIESET26 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Die set 26 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET27 Die set 27 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET28 Die set 28 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-335

DIESET29 Lv.1 Details

Die set 29 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET30 Die set 30 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET31 Die set 31 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-335

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 DIESET32 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Die set 32 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET33 Die set 33 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET34 Die set 34 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-336

DIESET35 Lv.1 Details

Die set 35 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET36 Die set 36 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET37 Die set 37 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-336

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 DIESET38 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Die set 38 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET39 Die set 39 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET40 Die set 40 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-337

DIESET41 Lv.1 Details

Die set 41 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET42 Die set 42 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET43 Die set 43 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-337

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 DIESET44 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Die set 44 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET45 Die set 45 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET46 Die set 46 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-338

DIESET47 Lv.1 Details

Die set 47 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET48 Die set 48 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET49 Die set 49 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-338

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 DIESET50 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Die set 50 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET51 Die set 51 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET52 Die set 52 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-339

DIESET53 Lv.1 Details

Die set 53 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET54 Die set 54 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET55 Die set 55 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-339

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 DIESET56 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Die set 56 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET57 Die set 57 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET58 Die set 58 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-340

DIESET59 Lv.1 Details

Die set 59 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET60 Die set 60 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET61 Die set 61 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-340

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 DIESET62 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Die set 62 parts counter: P-puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET63 Die set 63 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 DIESET64 Die set 64 parts counter: P-puncher Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 Supplement/memo Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-341

BEHLTQLM Lv.1 Details

Tray 1/2 Torque Limt parts cntr Process Tray Torque Limiter (Tray 1/2 Paper Retainer) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 SWG-RL Proc Tray Ppr Rtn Roll prts cntr Lv.1 Details Process Tray Paper Return Roller (Front/Rear) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 SWG-DL-1 Swng Ejectn Roll (F/R) prts cntr Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-341

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 SWG-DL-2 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Delivery Upr Roll (Ctr) prts cntr Swing Guide Delivery Upper Roller (Center) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 SHT-CL Swng Guide Electmag Clt prts cntr Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 SHT-TQLM Shutter Torque Limiter prts cntr Lv.1 Details Stack Wall Lower Assembly Torque Limiter (Shutter) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0

SWG-TQLM Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value SUB-TQLM Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value TRY-TQLM Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value TR2-TQLM Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

8

8-342

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Process Tray Torq Limt prts cntr Process Tray Torque Limiter (Process Tray Paper Retainer) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Sub Guide Torque Limt prts cntr Process Tray Torque Limiter (Sub Guide) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Tray 1 Torque Limiter prts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Tray 2 Torque Limiter prts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0

8-342

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 SWG-RB Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value TRM-GD Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value IS-CL2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value IS-ELM1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Proc Tray Ppr Rtnr Rubr prts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Scar Prev Sheet Plate prts cntr: Trimmer Scar Prevention Sheet (Upper/Lower) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Lowr Tray Electmag Clt prts cntr: INS-H1 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time 0 Thru Fd Inlt Sttc Elim prts cntr: INS-H1 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0

8

8-343

IS-CL1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value IS-RV-SL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value IS-ELM2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-ELM2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Upr Tray Electmag Clt parts cntr: INS-H1 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time 0 Reverse Solenoid parts counter: INS-H1 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time 0 Thru Feed Out Sttc Elim prts cntr:INS-H1 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Thru Feed Out Sttc Elim prts cntr: PFU 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0

8-343

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 PF-CL2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-ELM1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-CL1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-RL-SL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Pre-fold Lowr Rol Drv Clt2 prts cntr:PFU 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time 0 Thru Feed Inlet Sttc Elim prts cntr: PFU 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Pre-fold Lowr Rol Drv Clt1 prts cntr:PFU 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time 0 Fold/Separation Solenoid parts cntr: PFU 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0

8

8-344

PF-FL-SL Lv.1 Details

Thru/Fold Flapper Solend parts cntr: PFU Through/Fold Branch Flapper Solenoid 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 PD-PU-R2 Mid Deck Pickup Roll parts cntr: M Deck Lv.1 Details Middle Deck Pickup Roller (Front/Rear) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 PD-SP-R2 Mid Deck Sprtn Roll parts cntr: M Deck Lv.1 Details Middle Deck Separation Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-344

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 PD-FD-R2 Lv.1 Details

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Mid Deck Feed Roller parts cntr: M Deck Middle Deck Pickup/Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 PD-PU-C2 Mid Deck Pickup Clutch prts cntr: M Deck Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Default value 0 PD-PU-S2 Mid Deck Pickup Solend prts cntr: M Deck Lv.1 Details Middle Deck Pickup Roller Release Solenoid 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0

8

8-345

PD-PU-R3 Lv.1 Details

Lowr Deck Pickup Roll parts cntr: M Deck Lower Deck Pickup Roller (Front/Rear) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 PD-SP-R3 Lower Deck Sprtn Roll parts cntr: M Deck Lv.1 Details Lower Deck Separation Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 PD-FD-R3 Lower Deck Feed Roller prts cntr: M Deck Lv.1 Details Lower Deck Pickup/Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-345

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 PD-PU-C3 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PD-PU-S3 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value TRM-CUT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value IS-COLL1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Lowr Deck Pickup Clutch prts cntr:M Deck 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time 0 Lowr Deck Pickup Solend prts cntr:M Deck Lower Deck Pickup Roller Release Solenoid 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Trimmer Unit trimming counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Horz Fd Drv Roll prts cntr:INS-J1,PF/INS 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0

8

8-346

IS-COLL2 Lv.1 Details

Fold Uni Ppr Fd Drv Rol prts cntr:PF/INS 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0 SWG-SL Swing Solenoid parts counter Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

T-8-88

8-346

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > V-CNTR

■■T-CNTR

■■V-CNTR COPIER > COUNTER > T-CNTR

YELLOW Lv.1 Details Use case MAGENTA Lv.1 Details Use case CYAN Lv.1 Details Use case BLACK Lv.1 Details Use case

8-347 COPIER > COUNTER > V-CNTR

Y Toner Container counter To count up in the unit of 0.1 Y color Toner Container consumed. When checking the consumption volume of Toner Container M Toner Container counter To count up in the unit of 0.1 M color Toner Container consumed. When checking the consumption volume of Toner Container C Toner Container counter To count up in the unit of 0.1 C color Toner Container consumed. When checking the consumption volume of Toner Container Bk Toner Container counter To count up in the unit of 0.1 Bk color Toner Container consumed. When checking the consumption volume of Toner Container T-8-89

TOTAL Lv.1 Details Use case YELLOW Lv.1 Details Use case MAGENTA Lv.1 Details Use case CYAN Lv.1 Details Use case BLACK Lv.1 Details Use case

Video count total counter To display distribution of total video count for each color. Small size: 1, Large size: 1 When checking distribution of video count Video count Y counter To display distribution of yellow video count. Small size: 1, Large size: 1 When checking distribution of video count Video count M counter To display distribution of magenta video count. Small size: 1, Large size: 1 When checking distribution of video count Video count C counter To display distribution of cyan video count. Small size: 1, Large size: 1 When checking distribution of video count Video count Bk counter To display distribution of black video count. Small size: 1, Large size: 1 When checking distribution of video count T-8-90

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > V-CNTR

8-347

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

■■SORTER

COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

DIESET1 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET2 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET3 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET4 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET5 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET6 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo

8-348

Punching tonal on die set 1: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 1. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 2: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 2. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 3: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 3. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 4: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 4. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 5: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 5. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 6: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 6. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

DIESET7 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET8 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET9 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET10 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET11 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET12 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

Punching tonal on die set 7: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 7. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 8: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 8. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 9: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 9. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 10: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 10. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 11: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 11. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 12: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 12. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8-348

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER DIESET13 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET14 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET15 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET16 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET17 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET18 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo

COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

Punching tonal on die set 13: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 13. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 14: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 14. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 15: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 15. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 16: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 16. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 17: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 17. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 18: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 18. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-349

DIESET19 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET20 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET21 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET22 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET23 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET24 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

Punching tonal on die set 19: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 19. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 20: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 20. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 21: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 21. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 22: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 22. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 23: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 23. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 24: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 24. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8-349

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER DIESET25 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET26 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET27 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET28 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET29 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET30 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo

COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

Punching tonal on die set 25: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 25. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 26: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 26. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 27: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 27. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 28: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 28. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 29: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 29. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 30: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 30. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-350

DIESET31 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET32 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET33 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET34 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET35 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET36 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

Punching tonal on die set 31: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 31. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 32: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 32. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 33: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 33. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 34: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 34. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 35: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 35. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 36: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 36. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8-350

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER DIESET37 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET38 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET39 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET40 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET41 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET42 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo

COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

Punching tonal on die set 37: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 37. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 38: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 38. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 39: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 39. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 40: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 40. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 41: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 41. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 42: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 42. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-351

DIESET43 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET44 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET45 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET46 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET47 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET48 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

Punching tonal on die set 43: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 43. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 44: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 44. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 45: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 45. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 46: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 46. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 47: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 47. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 48: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 48. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8-351

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER DIESET49 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET50 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET51 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET52 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET53 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET54 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo

COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

Punching tonal on die set 49: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 49. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 50: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 50. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 51: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 51. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 52: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 52. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 53: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 53. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 54: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 54. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8

8-352

DIESET55 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET56 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET57 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET58 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET59 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET60 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

Punching tonal on die set 55: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 55. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 56: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 56. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 57: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 57. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 58: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 58. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 59: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 59. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 60: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 60. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8-352

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > V2-CNTR

COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER DIESET61 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET62 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET63 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo DIESET64 Lv.1 Details Use case Unit Default value Supplement/memo

Punching tonal on die set 61: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 61. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 62: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 62. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 63: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 63. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1 Punching tonal on die set 64: P-Puncher Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher die set 64. At the time of checking the usage of each die set time 0 Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1

8-353

■■V2-CNTR COPIER > COUNTER > V2-CNTR TOTAL Lv.1 Details Use case YELLOW Lv.1 Details Use case MAGENTA Lv.1 Details Use case CYAN Lv.1 Details Use case BLACK Lv.1 Details Use case

Video count total counter To display distribution of total video count for each color. Small size: 1, Large size: 2 When checking distribution of video count Video count Y counter To display distribution of yellow video count. Small size: 1, Large size: 2 When checking distribution of video count Video count M counter To display distribution of magenta video count. Small size: 1, Large size: 2 When checking distribution of video count Video count C counter To display distribution of cyan video count. Small size: 1, Large size: 2 When checking distribution of video count Video count Bk counter To display distribution of black video count. Small size: 1, Large size: 2 When checking distribution of video count T-8-92

T-8-91

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > V2-CNTR

8-353

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF

■■FIXING

8-354

■■LF COPIER > COUNTER > FIXING

COPIER > COUNTER > LF

FX-CNT Lv.1 Details

Fixing Assembly feed counter To display the accumulated number of paper transported through Fixing Assembly on a small size conversion basis. Use case When checking durability of Fixing Assembly Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Caution When clearing the counter, press Clear key at FX-BLT-U and FXBLT-L. Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U, FX-L,FX-KIN,FX-WEB

Y-DRM-LF Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Default value M-DRM-LF Lv.1 Details

T-8-93

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Default value C-DRM-LF Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Default value K-DRM-LF Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

Display of Drum Unit (Y) life To display how much the Drum Unit (Y) is close to the end of life in % (percentage). When a new part is set, the value becomes 0%. When checking the life of Drum Unit 0 to 100 % 0 Display of Drum Unit (M) life To display how much the Drum Unit (M) is close to the end of life in % (percentage). When a new part is set, the value becomes 0%. When checking the life of Drum Unit 0 to 100 % 0 Display of Drum Unit (C) life To display how much the Drum Unit (C) is close to the end of life in % (percentage). When a new part is set, the value becomes 0%. When checking the life of Drum Unit 0 to 100 % 0 Display of Drum Unit (Bk) life To display how much the Drum Unit (Bk) is close to the end of life in % (percentage). When a new part is set, the value becomes 0%. When checking the life of Drum Unit 0 to 100 % 0 T-8-94

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF

8-354

8

Service Mode > FEEDER > DISPLAY

FEEDER

FEEDER > DISPLAY DRSN-RCV Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

DISPLAY FEEDER > DISPLAY FEEDSIZE Lv.1 Details TRY-WIDE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Unit SPSN-LMN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SPSN-RCV Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range RDSN-LMN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range RDSN-RCV Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range DRSN-LMN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

8-355

Dspl of original size detected by DADF To display the original size detected by DADF. Distance of Original Width Detect Slider To display the distance between the Original Width Detection Sliders. At original size detection error Check whether the value matching the slide position is displayed when the Original Width Slider is moved to the specified size width position. 0 to approx. 2970 mm Dspl of Post-sprtn Sensr emission voltage To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Post-separation Sensor. When jams frequently occur N/A (Display only) 0 to 255 Dspl of Post-sprtn Sensr recv voltage To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Post-separation Sensor. When jams frequently occur Remove and insert the paper at the sensor position, and check the value at presence/absence of the paper. 0 to 255 Dspl of Lead Sensor emission voltage To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Lead Sensor. When jams frequently occur N/A (Display only) 0 to 255 Display of Lead Sensor reception voltage To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Lead Sensor. When jams frequently occur Remove and insert the paper at the sensor position, and check the value at presence/absence of the paper. 0 to 255 Dspl of Delivery Sensor emit voltg To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Delivery Sensor. When jams frequently occur N/A (Display only) 0 to 255

8

Service Mode > FEEDER > DISPLAY

Display/adj/set range RGSN-LMN Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range RGSN-RCV Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

Dspl of Delivery Sensor recv voltg To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Delivery Sensor. When jams frequently occur Remove and insert the paper at the sensor position, and check the value at presence/absence of the paper. 0 to 255 Display of Rgst Sensor emission voltage To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Registration Sensor. When jams frequently occur 0 to 255 Display of Rgst Sensor reception voltage To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Registration Sensor. When jams frequently occur 0 to 1023 T-8-95

8-355

8

Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST

ADJUST

8-356 FEEDER > ADJUST LA-SPD2 Lv.1 Details

FEEDER > ADJUST DOCST Lv.1 Details

Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: front To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image for DADF scanning. Execute when the output image after DADF installation is displaced. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge of the image is decreased by 0.1 mm. (The image moves in the direction of the leading edge of the sheet.) Use case - When installing DADF - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 LA-SPEED Fine adj of DADF image magnifictn: front Lv.1 Details To adjust the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction for DADF scanning. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1 % in vertical scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.) Use case - When installing DADF - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -30 to 30 Unit % Default value 0 DOCST2 Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: back Lv.1 Details To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image for DADF scanning. Execute when the output image after DADF installation is displaced. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge of the image is decreased by 0.1 mm. (The image moves in the direction of the leading edge of the sheet.) Use case - When installing DADF - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0

8

Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST

Fine adj of DADF image magnifictn: back To adjust the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction for DADF scanning. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1 % in vertical scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.) Use case - When installing DADF - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -200 to 200 Unit % Default value 0 ADJMSCN1 Zoom adj in 2-sided horz scan way: front Lv.1 Details To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1 % in horizontal scanning direction. Use case When a displacement occurs to the front/back side image magnification ratio at the time of duplex scanning Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit % Default value 0 ADJMSCN2 Zoom adj in 2-sided horz scan way: back Lv.1 Details To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1 % in horizontal scanning direction. Use case When a displacement occurs to the front/back side image magnification ratio at the time of duplex scanning Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit % Default value 0

8-356

8

Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION

FEEDER > ADJUST ADJSSCN1 Lv.1 Details

Zoom adj in 2-sided vert scan way: front To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1 % in vertical scanning direction. Use case When a displacement occurs to the front/back side image magnification ratio at the time of duplex scanning Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit % Default value 0 ADJSSCN2 Zoom adj in 2-sided vert scan way: back Lv.1 Details To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1 % in vertical scanning direction. Use case When a displacement occurs to the front/back side image magnification ratio at the time of duplex scanning Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -10 to 10 Unit % Default value 0 T-8-96

8-357

FUNCTION FEEDER > FUNCTION SENS-INT Lv.1 Details Use case

Adj/set/operate method MTR-CHK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

TRY-A4 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method TRY-A5R Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method TRY-LTR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method TRY-LTRR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

8

Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION

Initialization of DADF Sensors To initialize DADF Sensors. When replacing Reader Controller PCB / Post-separation Sensor 1 (SR2) / Post-separation Sensor 2 (SR3) / Post-separation Sensor 3 (PCB2) / Registration Sensor (PCB3) / Lead Sensor 1 (PCB4) / Lead Sensor 2 (SR5) Select the item, and then press OK key. Specification of DADF Operation Motor To specify the DADF Motor to operate. The motor is activated by MTR-ON. At operation check Enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 9 0: Pickup Motor (M1), 1: Feed Motor (M2), 2: Registration Motor (M3), 3: Read Motor (M4), 4: Delivery Motor (M5), 5: Disengagement Motor 1 (M6), 6: Disengagement Motor 2 (M7), 7: Tray Lifter Motor (M8), 8: Glass Shift Motor (M9), 9: Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Motor (M10) Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: A4 To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 1 for the DADF Tray. (A4) - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR) - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 2: A5R To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 2 for the DADF Tray. (A5R) - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR) - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: LTR To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 1 for the DADF Tray. (LTR) - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR) - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref2: LTRR To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 2 for the DADF Tray. (LTRR) - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR) - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Select the item, and then press OK key.

8-357

8

Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION

8-358

FEEDER > FUNCTION FEED-CHK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Related service mode FAN-CHK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Related service mode FAN-ON Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution

Related service mode SL-CHK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Related service mode

FEEDER > FUNCTION

Specify DADF individual feed mode To specify the feed mode for DADF. Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON. At operation check Enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 3 0: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation 1: 2-sided pickup/delivery operation 2: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp) 3: 2-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp) FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-ON Specification of DADF Operation Fan To specify the DADF Fan to operate. The fan is activated by FAN-ON. At operation check Enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Motor Driver Cooling Fan (FM1), 1: Read Motor Cooling Fan (FM2) FEEDER> FUNCTION>FAN-ON Operation check of DADF Fan To start operation check of the Fan specified by FAN-CHK. At operation check 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops. 2) Press OK key. The operation check is completed. Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not displayed). FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-CHK Specification of DADF Operation Solenoid To specify the DADF solenoid to operate. The solenoid is activated by SL-ON. At operation check Enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Disengagement Solenoid (SL1), 1: Stamp Solenoid (SL2) FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-ON

SL-ON Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Operation check of DADF Solenoid To start operation check of the solenoid specified by SL-CHK. At operation check 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops. 2) Press OK key. The operation check is completed. Caution Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not displayed). Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-CHK MTR-ON Operation check of Motor Lv.1 Details To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR-CHK. Use case At operation check Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops. 2) Press OK key. The operation check is completed. Caution Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not displayed). Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK ROLL-CLN Rotation of DADF Rollers Lv.1 Details To rotate the DADF Rollers for cleaning. Clean the roller with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while it is rotating. Use case At roller cleaning Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Clean the rotating rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. 3) Press OK key. The rollers stop. FEED-ON Operation check of DADF individual feed Lv.1 Details To start operation check of the feed mode specified by FEED-CHK. Use case At operation check Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-CHK T-8-97

8

Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION

8-358

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

SORTER

8-359 SORTER > ADJUST PF-B4Z1 Lv.1 Details

ADJUST SORTER > ADJUST PNCH-HLE Lv.1 Details

Adj of punch hole pstn from paper edge Adjust the vertical registration of the paper to be punched. Incrementing the value by 1 moves the punch hole position toward the edge. +: Toward inlet direction -: Toward delivery direction Use case Upon user’s request Display/adj/set range -4 to 2 Unit mm Default value 0 PNCH-Y Adj punch hole side rgst pstn (Booklet) Lv.1 Details To adjust the punch hole in side registration direction. As the value is incremented by 1, the punch hole moves by 0.1 mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front Use case When the punch hole is misaligned in the side registration direction Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -5 to 5 Unit mm Default value 0 PF-A3Z1 Adj of A3 Z-fold position (1st): PFU Lv.1 Details To adjust the 1st fold position of A3 paper Z-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. Use case When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -65 to 65 Unit mm Default value 0 PF-A3Z2 Adj of A3 Z-fold position (2nd): PFU Lv.1 Details To adjust the 2nd fold position of A3 paper Z-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. Use case When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -65 to 65 Unit mm Default value 0

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-B4Z2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-A4RZ1 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-A4RZ2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

Adj of B4 Z-fold position (1st): PFU To adjust the 1st fold position of B4 paper Z-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0 Adj of B4 Z-fold position (2nd): PFU To adjust the 2nd fold position of B4 paper Z-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0 Adj of A4R Z-fold position (1st): PFU To adjust the 1st fold position of A4R paper Z-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0 Adj of A4R Z-fold position (2nd): PFU To adjust the 2nd fold position of A4R paper Z-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0

8-359

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-360

SORTER > ADJUST PF-LDRZ1 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-LDRZ2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-LGLZ1 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-LGLZ2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

SORTER > ADJUST

Adj of LDR Z-fold position (1st): PFU To adjust the 1st fold position of LDR paper Z-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0 Adj of LDR Z-fold position (2nd): PFU To adjust the 2nd fold position of LDR paper Z-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0 Adj of LGL Z-fold position (1st): PFU To adjust the 1st fold position of LGL paper Z-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0 Adj of LGL Z-fold position (2nd): PFU To adjust the 2nd fold position of LGL paper Z-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

PFLTRRZ1 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PFLTRRZ2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-A4RC1 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-A4RC2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

Adj of LTRR Z-fold position (1st): PFU To adjust the 1st fold position of LTRR paper Z-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0 Adj of LTRR Z-fold position (2nd): PFU To adjust the 2nd fold position of LTRR paper Z-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0 Adj of A4R C-fold position (1st): PFU To adjust the 1st fold position of A4R paper C-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -30 to 75 mm 0 Adj of A4R C-fold position (2nd): PFU To adjust the 2nd fold position of A4R paper C-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -75 to 45 mm 0

8-360

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-361

SORTER > ADJUST PFLTRRC1 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PFLTRRC2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-A4R31 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-A4R32 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

SORTER > ADJUST

Adj of LTRR C-fold position (1st): PFU To adjust the 1st fold position of LTRR paper C-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -30 to 75 mm 0 Adj of LTRR C-fold position (2nd): PFU To adjust the 2nd fold position of LTRR paper C-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -75 to 45 mm 0 Adj of A4R out-3-fold position(1st): PFU To adjust the 1st fold position of A4R paper out-3-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0 Adj of A4R out-3-fold position(2nd): PFU To adjust the 2nd fold position of A4R paper out-3-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

PFLTRR31 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PFLTRR32 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-A4R41 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-A4R42 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

Adj of LTRR out-3-fold pstn (1st): PFU To adjust the 1st fold position of LTRR paper out-3-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0 Adj of LTRR out-3-fold pstn (2nd): PFU To adjust the 2nd fold position of LTRR paper out-3-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0 Adj of A4R 4-fold position (1st): PFU To adjust the 1st fold position of A4R paper 4-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -75 to 30 mm 0 Adj of A4R 4-fold position (2nd): PFU To adjust the 2nd fold position of A4R paper 4-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0

8-361

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-362

SORTER > ADJUST PFLTRR41 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PFLTRR42 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PF-A4R21 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PFLTRR21 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

SORTER > ADJUST

Adj of LTRR 4-fold position (1st): PFU To adjust the 1st fold position of LTRR paper 4-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -75 to 30 mm 0 Adj of LTRR 4-fold position (2nd): PFU To adjust the 2nd fold position of LTRR paper 4-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -65 to 65 mm 0 Adj of A4R 2-fold position (1st): PFU To adjust the 1st fold position of A4R paper 2-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -75 to 30 mm 0 Adj of LTRR 2-fold position (1st): PFU To adjust the 1st fold position of LTRR paper 2-fold position on Paper Folding Unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -75 to 30 mm 0

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

PRCS-ALG Lv.1 Details

Adj Process Tray Align Plate width: Bklt To adjust the width of Alignment Plate on Finisher Process Tray Assembly. As the value is incremented by 1, the width of Alignment Plate is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Increase (widen) -: Decrease (narrow) Use case When the paper displacement occurs on paper stack Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 STP-F1 Front 1-staple position : Bklt Lv.1 Details To adjust the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper front 1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-K1). As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1 mm. +: Toward front -: Toward rear To adjust the A4 paper front 1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-L1). As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.49 mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front Use case Fin-K1: When the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper front staple position is displaced Fin-L1: When the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper front staple position is displaced Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range Fin-K1: -50 to 50 Fin-L1: -6 to 6 Unit mm

8-362

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-363

SORTER > ADJUST

SORTER > ADJUST

STP-F2 Lv.1 Details

Front 1-staple position: Bklt To adjust the A3/B4/A4/B5/LDR/LTR/EXEC/8K/16K paper front 1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-K1). As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1 mm. +: Toward front -: Toward rear To adjust the A4R paper front 1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-L1). As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.49 mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front Use case Fin-K1: When the A3/B4/A4/B5/LDR/LTR/EXEC/8K/16K paper front staple position is displaced Fin-L1: When the A4R paper front staple position is displaced Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range Fin-K1: -50 to 50 Fin-L1: -6 to 6 Unit mm STP-R1 Rear 1-staple position : Bklt Lv.1 Details To adjust the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper rear 1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-K1). As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1 mm. +: Toward front -: Toward rear To adjust the A4 paper rear 1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-L1). As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.49 mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front Use case Fin-K1: When the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper rear staple position is displaced Fin-L1: When the A4 paper rear staple position is displaced Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range Fin-K1: -50 to 50 Fin-L1: -6 to 6 Unit mm

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

STP-R2 Lv.1 Details

Rear 1-staple position : Bklt To adjust the A3/B4/A4/B5/LDR/LTR/EXEC/8K/16K paper rear 1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-K1). As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1 mm. +: Toward front -: Toward rear To adjust the A4R paper rear 1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-L1). As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.49 mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front Use case Fin-K1: When the A3/B4/A4/B5/LDR/LTR/EXEC/8K/16K paper rear staple position is displaced Fin-L1: When the A4R paper rear staple position is displaced Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range Fin-K1: -50 to 50 Fin-L1: -6 to 6 Unit mm STP-2P Adj front/rear 2-staple position: Bklt Lv.1 Details To adjust the front/rear 2-staple position on Finisher. As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1 mm. +: Toward front -: Toward rear Use case When the front/rear 2-staple position is displaced Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -25 to 25 Unit mm BFF-SFT Paper displace amount on buffer: Bklt Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper displacement amount on Finisher Buffer Assembly. As the value is incremented by 1, the paper position moves by 0.1 mm. +: -: Use case When the paper displacement occurs on the 1st to 3rd sheets of the 2nd sets (B5/A4/LTR) and later Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0

8-363

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-364

SORTER > ADJUST

SORTER > ADJUST

PNCH-X Lv.1 Details

Punch hole position in feed way: Bklt To adjust the punch hole position on Finisher in feed direction. As the value is incremented by 1, the punch hole moves by 0.1 mm. +: Toward delivery direction -: Toward inlet direction Use case When the punch hole is displaced in feed direction Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit mm Default value 0 TRM-RG1 Skew adj (small size): Bklt Lv.1 Details To adjust the skew of A4 size or smaller paper stack on Finisher Trimmer. As the value is incremented by 1, the paper stack stop position moves by 0.1 mm. +: Toward delivery direction -: Toward inlet direction Use case When the skew occurs on A4 or smaller paper stack Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 TRM-RG2 Skew adj (large size): Bklt Lv.1 Details To adjust the skew of paper stack larger than A4 size on Finisher Trimmer. As the value is incremented by 1, the paper stack stop position moves by 0.1 mm. +: Toward delivery direction -: Toward inlet direction Use case When the skew occurs on paper stack larger than A4 size Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

TRM-CUT1 Lv.1 Details

Trimming position adj (small size): Bklt To adjust the trimming position of A4 size or smaller paper stack on Finisher Trimmer. As the value is incremented by 1, the paper stack stop position moves by 0.1 mm. +: Toward delivery direction -: Toward inlet direction Use case When the trimming position is displaced on A4 or smaller paper stack Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 TRM-CUT2 Trimming position adj (large size): Bklt Lv.1 Details To adjust the trimming position of the paper stack larger than A4 size on Finisher Trimmer. As the value is incremented by 1, the paper stack stop position moves by 0.1 mm. +: Toward delivery direction -: Toward inlet direction Use case When the trimming position is displaced on the paper stack larger than A4 size Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 BFF-SFT2 Paper displace amount on buffer: Bklt Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper displacement amount on Finisher Buffer Assembly. As the value is incremented by 1, the paper position moves by 0.1 mm. +: -: Use case When the paper displacement occurs on the 2nd to 3rd sheets of the 2nd sets (B5/A4/LTR) and later Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0

8-364

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-365

SORTER > ADJUST

SORTER > ADJUST

SDL-STP Lv.1 Details

Adj of Saddle Stitcher staple position (Fin-K1) To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher. As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1mm. +: Toward front -: Toward rear (Fin-L1) Adjust the staple position for saddle stitching. Incrementing the value by 1 moves the staple position 0.5 mm downward. Use case When the staple position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range Fin-K1: -20 to 20 Fin-L1: -3 to 3 Unit mm Default value 0 SDL-FLD Adj of Saddle Stitcher fold position Lv.1 Details To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1mm. Use case When the fold position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit mm Default value 0 SDL-ALG Adj of Saddle Stitcher alignment width Lv.1 Details (Fin-K1) To adjust the alignment width of Saddle Stitcher. As the value is incremented by 1, the alignment width is increased by mm. +: -: (Fin-L1) Adjust the travel length of the alignment plate for saddle stitching. Use case When the misalignment occurs within a paper stack on the Saddle Stitcher Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range Fin-K1: -20 to 20 Fin-L1: 0 to 1 Unit mm Default value 0

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

SDL-RLPT Lv.1 Details

Adj Sddl Sttch Diseng Roll diseng amount To adjust the disengagement amount of Saddle Stitcher Disengagement Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the disengagement amount is increased by mm. +: -: Use case When the feed failure (with thin paper, etc.) occurs on the Saddle Stitcher Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit mm Default value 0 SDL-RLFD Adj Sddl Sttch Diseng Roller feed amount Lv.1 Details To adjust the feed amount of Saddle Stitcher Disengagement Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the feed amount is increased by mm. +: -: Use case When the feed failure (with thin paper, etc.) occurs on the Saddle Stitcher Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit mm Default value 0 SDL-RLHD Adj Sddl Sttch Diseng Roll fold position Lv.1 Details To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher Disengagement Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by mm. +: -: Use case To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher Disengagement Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by mm. +: -: Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -20 to 20 Unit mm Default value 0

8-365

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-366

SORTER > ADJUST BFR-UPA4 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value BFR-UPB5 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value BFR-UPLT Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value RTR-DWA4 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

SORTER > ADJUST

Adj Swng Roll rising tmg for A4 To adjust the Swing Roller rise timing when A4 size paper is waited in the buffer path. As the value is incremented by 1, the rise timing becomes early by 1 msec. When misalignment occurs in A4 size buffer paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 50 msec 0 Adj Swng Roll rising tmg for B5 To adjust the Swing Roller rise timing when B5 size paper is waited in the buffer path. As the value is incremented by 1, the rise timing becomes early by 1 msec. When misalignment occurs in B5 size buffer paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 50 msec 0 Adj Swng Roll rising tmg for LTR To adjust the Swing Roller rise timing when LTR size paper is waited in the buffer path. As the value is incremented by 1, the rise timing becomes early by 1 msec. When misalignment occurs in LTR size buffer paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 50 msec 0 Adj Ppr Rtn Roll fall tmg (A4) To adjust the Paper Return Roller fall timing when A4 size paper is waited in the buffer path. As the value is incremented by 1, the fall timing becomes early by 1 msec. When misalignment occurs in A4 size buffer paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 50 msec 0

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

RTR-DWB5 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value RTR-DWLT Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value BF-SB-A4 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value BF-SB-B5 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

Adj Ppr Rtn Roll fall tmg (B5) To adjust the Paper Return Roller fall timing when B5 size paper is waited in the buffer path. As the value is incremented by 1, the fall timing becomes early by 1 msec. When misalignment occurs in B5 size buffer paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 50 msec 0 Adj Ppr Rtn Roll fall tmg (LTR) To adjust the Paper Return Roller fall timing when LTR size paper is waited in the buffer path. As the value is incremented by 1, the fall timing becomes early by 1 msec. When misalignment occurs in LTR size buffer paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 50 msec 0 Adj switchback position for A4 To adjust the paper switchback position when A4 size paper is waited in the buffer path. As the value is incremented by 1, the switchback amount is increased by 1 mm. When misalignment occurs in A4 size buffer paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 50 mm 0 Adj switchback position for B5 To adjust the paper switchback position when B5 size paper is waited in the buffer path. As the value is incremented by 1, the switchback amount is increased by 1 mm. When misalignment occurs in B5 size buffer paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 50 mm 0

8-366

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-367

SORTER > ADJUST BF-SB-LT Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value RTR-UPA4 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value RTR-UPB5 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value RTR-UPLT Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

SORTER > ADJUST

Adj switchback position for LTR To adjust the paper switchback position when LTR size paper is waited in the buffer path. As the value is incremented by 1, the switchback amount is increased by 1 mm. When misalignment occurs in LTR size buffer paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 50 mm 0 Adj Ppr Rtn Roll rise angle(A4) To adjust the Paper Return Roller rise angle when processing is performed to A4 size paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the roller rise angle is increased by 1 degree. When misalignment occurs in A4 size buffer paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 44 deg C 0 Adj Ppr Rtn Roll rise angle(B5) To adjust the Paper Return Roller rise angle when processing is performed to B5 size paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the roller rise angle is increased by 1 degree. When misalignment occurs in B5 size buffer paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 44 deg C 0 Adj Ppr Rtn Roll rise angle(LTR) To adjust the Paper Return Roller rise angle when processing is performed to LTR size paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the roller rise angle is increased by 1 degree. When misalignment occurs in LTR size buffer paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 44 deg C 0

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

PUNCH-SB Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value ST-ALG1 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value ST-ALG2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value STP-F3 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

Adj Punch Unit ppr swback amount To adjust the paper switchback amount in the high accuracy punch mode of Finisher. As the value is incremented by 1, the switchback amount is increased by 1 mm. When the punch accuracy deteriorates in the paper feed direction 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 2 to 4 mm 0 Adj Stacker A4 size align pstn To adjust the A4 size paper alignment position. As the value is incremented by 1, the travel length of the Alignment Plate is increased by 0.42 mm. When misalignment occurs in A4 size paper Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 mm 0 Adj Stacker LTR size align pstn To adjust the LTR size paper alignment position. As the value is incremented by 1, the travel length of the Alignment Plate is increased by 0.42 mm. When misalignment occurs in LTR size paper Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 mm 0 Adj A4R frt stpl pstn (<45 deg) To adjust the one front staple position on the A4R size paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves to the rear side by 0.49 mm. When misalignment occurs at the front staple position on A4R size paper Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -6 to 6 mm 0

8-367

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-368

SORTER > ADJUST STP-F4 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value STP-R3 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value STP-R4 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value SW-UP-RL Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

SORTER > ADJUST

Adj LTRR frt stpl pstn (<45 deg) To adjust the one front staple position on the LTRR size paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves to the rear side by 0.49 mm. When misalignment occurs at the front staple position on LTRR size paper Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -6 to 6 mm 0 Adj A4R rear stpl pstn (<45 deg) To adjust the one rear staple position on the A4R size paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves to the rear side by 0.49 mm. When misalignment occurs at the rear staple position on A4R size paper Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -6 to 6 mm 0 Adj LTRRL rear stpl pstn(<45 deg) To adjust the one rear staple position on the LTRR size paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves to the rear side by 0.49 mm. When misalignment occurs at the rear staple position on LTRR size paper Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -6 to 6 mm 0 Adj of Swing Roller falling pstn To adjust the Swing Roller fall position. As the value is incremented by 1, the Swing Roller fall position moves downward by 0.2 mm. When paper fails to be transported to the Processing Tray and misalignment occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -17 to 33 mm 0

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

PRCS-RET Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value UP-CL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value DW-CL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value THC-CL Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

Adj Process Tray return amount To adjust the pull-back amount of the paper on the Processing Tray. As the value is incremented by 1, the pull-back amount is decreased by 1.4 mm. When the paper is bent in the Processing Tray Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 0 to 5 mm 0 Setting of upward curl prev mode Set 1 when upward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs. When upward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Setting downward curl prev mode Set 1 when downward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs. When downward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Setting heavy ppr curl prev mode Set 1 when upward curl occurs on the heavy paper delivered. When 1 is set, the amount of Stack Tray descension for stack delivery increases. The paper surface detection is performed for every sheet, not for every 5 sheets. When upward curl occurs on the heavy paper delivered Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0

8-368

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-369

SORTER > ADJUST THC-PUSH Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value OFST-STC Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value THN-STC Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value STP-P-CH Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

SORTER > ADJUST

Setting heavy ppr out prev mode Set 1 when the already stacked paper is pushed out at the time of heavy paper delivery. When 1 is set, the Stack Tray moves down temporarily before the heavy paper is delivered to the Processing Tray if the leading sheet is heavy paper. When the already stacked paper is pushed out at the time of heavy paper delivery Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Set poor offset stack prev mode Set 1 when paper is not appropriately stacked in the small size offset mode. When 1 is set, buffer operation is not performed in the small size offset mode. When paper is not appropriately stacked in the small size offset mode Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Set poor thin ppr stack prev mode Set 1 when thin paper is not appropriately stacked. When 1 is set, the stacking condition of thin paper improves. When thin paper is not appropriately stacked Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Set stpl stack displace prev mode Set 1 when the paper on the top is misaligned in the staple delivery mode. When 1 is set, paper stack alignment operation is executed twice immediately before stapling. When the paper on the top is misaligned in the staple delivery mode Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

TRY-NIS Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value TRY-SU Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value FIN-NIS Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value 1SHT-SHF Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SDL-SWCH Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

Set tray switch noise reduct mode Set 1 when the operation noise after switching the Stack Tray is loud. When 1 is set, the Stack Tray rise operation becomes slow. When the operation noise after switching the Stack Tray is loud Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Set tray switching speedup mode Set 1 when the Stack Tray switching time is long. When 1 is set, the Stack Tray rise speed becomes fast. When the Stack Tray switching time is long Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Set tray drive noise reduct mode Set 1 when the Finisher operation noise is loud. When 1 is set, the initial Finisher operation is minimized. When the Finisher operation noise is loud Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Set 1-sheet Offset+Collate Set 1 when enabling Offset and Collate for 1-sheet document. When enabling Offset and Collate for 1-sheet document Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Sddl stack capacity switch mode Set 1 when increasing the stacking capacity for saddle stitching. When 1 is set, the stacking capacity increases over the upper limit. When increasing the stacking capacity for perfect binding Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0

8-369

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-370

SORTER > ADJUST

SORTER > ADJUST

SDL-ALM Set sddl full stack alarm mode Lv.1 Details Set 1 when disabling the stack full alarm for saddle stitching. Use case When disabling the stack full alarm for saddle stitching Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Z-FL-CH Set Z-fold stapleable quantity Lv.1 Details To set the maximum number of stitch pages in Z-fold stapling. This item is used to prevent missing pages in Z-fold stapling by decreasing the maximum number of stitch pages. Use case When missing pages occurs in Z-fold stapling Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: 10 sheets, 1: 5 sheets Unit sheet Default value 0 THN-STCL Setting the Poor Stacking of Large/Thin Paper Prevention Mode Lv.1 Details Set 1 when large/thin paper is not appropriately stacked. When 1 is set, the stacking condition of large/thin paper improves. Use case When large/thin paper is not appropriately stacked. Adj/set/operate method After inputting value, press the OK key. Caution When 1 is set, the stack delivery speed deceases. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Normal, 1: Prevention mode Default value 0 SW-ADJ Swing guide height adjustment Lv.1 Details To adjust the height of the swing guide. As the value is changed by 1, the height of swing guide is increased/ decreased by 0.23 mm. +: increase (high) -: decrease (low) Use case When adjusting the height of the Swing Guide at the time that nip pressure is high Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -10 to 4 Unit mm

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

GRP-ALG Lv.1 Details

Gripper standby position adjustment To adjust the standby position of the gripper to change the gripping timing. As the value is changed by 1, the standby position of gripper is increased/decreased by 0.12 mm. +: increase (early) -: decrease (late) Use case When adjusting the timing that the Gripper grabs a paper stack Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -40 to 40 Unit mm PRTN-ALG Paper retainer position adjustment Lv.1 Details To adjust the fall amount of the paper retainer. As the value is changed by 1, the fall amount of paper retainer is increased/decreased by 0.65 degrees. +: increase (down) -: decrease (up) Use case When adjusting the position where the Paper Retainer comes into contact with paper Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -12 to 12 BFF-SFT3 Paper shift amount adjustment-3 in the buffer path Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper dislocation amount (between 3rd sheet and 4th sheet) of buffer assembly of the finisher. As the value is changed by 1, the paper dislocation amount is increased/decreased by 0.1 mm. +:increase -:decrease Use case When the paper displacement occurs on the 3rd and 4th sheets of the 2nd sets (B5/A4/LTR) and later Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm

8-370

8

Service Mode > SORTER > FUNCTION

SORTER > ADJUST BFF-SFT4 Lv.1 Details

Paper shift amount adjustment-4 in the buffer path To adjust the paper dislocation amount (between 4th sheet and 5th sheet) of buffer assembly of the finisher. As the value is changed by 1, the paper dislocation amount is increased/decreased by 0.1 mm. +:increase -:decrease Use case When the paper displacement occurs on the 4th and 5th sheets of the 2nd sets (B5/A4/LTR) and later Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Unit mm T-8-98

8-371

FUNCTION SORTER > FUNCTION FN-SENS1 Lv.1 Details Use case

Adj/set/operate method FN-SENS2 Lv.1 Details Use case

Adj/set/operate method FIN-BK-R Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Related service mode FIN-BK-W Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Related service mode VR1-A4R Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

8

Service Mode > SORTER > FUNCTION

Adj punched ppr size sensor output: Bklt To automatically adjust the output of A3/LDR/B4/A4R/B5R Sensors on the Finisher Punch Unit in order. - When installing/replacing the Punch Unit - When replacing the Punch Waste Sensor - When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj Punch Waste Sensor output: Booklet To automatically adjust the output of Punch Waste Sensor on the Finisher Punch Unit. - When installing/replacing the Punch Unit - When replacing the Punch Waste Sensor - When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key. Controller PCB backup data read: Staple To read the backup data from Finisher Controller PCB and save to the hard disk. When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key. In processing: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-W Controller PCB backup data write: Staple To write the backup data saved on the hard disk to Finisher Controller PCB. When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key. In processing: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-R Adj Upr Tray width volume (A4R):Inserter To adjust the paper minimum width (A4R) of Inserter Upper Tray automatically. When the size mismatch jam is incorrectly detected at the pickup from Inserter Upper Tray 1) Set the A4R paper on the Inserter Upper Tray and align it with the width of Slide Guide. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key.

8-371

8

Service Mode > SORTER > FUNCTION

8-372

SORTER > FUNCTION VR1-A4 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

VR1-LTRR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

VR1-LTR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

VR2-A4R Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

VR2-A4 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

SORTER > FUNCTION

Adj Upr Tray width volume (A4):Inserter To adjust the paper minimum width (A4) of Inserter Upper Tray automatically. When the size mismatch jam is incorrectly detected at the pickup from Inserter Upper Tray 1) Set the A4 paper on the Inserter Upper Tray and align it with the width of Slide Guide. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj Upr Tray width volume (LTRR):Inserter To adjust the paper minimum width (LTRR) of Inserter Upper Tray automatically. When the size mismatch jam is incorrectly detected at the pickup from Inserter Upper Tray 1) Set the LTRR paper on the Inserter Upper Tray and align it with the width of Slide Guide. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj Upr Tray width volume (LTR):Inserter To adjust the paper minimum width (LTR) of Inserter Upper Tray automatically. When the size mismatch jam is incorrectly detected at the pickup from Inserter Upper Tray 1) Set the LTR paper on the Inserter Upper Tray and align it with the width of Slide Guide. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj Lower Tray width vol (A4R): Inserter To adjust the paper minimum width (A4R) of Inserter Lower Tray automatically. When the size mismatch jam is incorrectly detected at the pickup from Inserter Lower Tray 1) Set the A4R paper on the Inserter Lower Tray and align it with the width of Slide Guide. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj Lower Tray width vol (A4): Inserter To adjust the paper minimum width (A4) of Inserter Lower Tray automatically. When the size mismatch jam is incorrectly detected at the pickup from Inserter Lower Tray 1) Set the A4 paper on the Inserter Lower Tray and align it with the width of Slide Guide. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key.

VR2-LTRR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

VR2-LTR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

FIN-CON Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method Caution

Related service mode PF-CON Lv.1 Details

Adj/set/operate method PF-SENS1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method PF-SENS2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

8

Service Mode > SORTER > FUNCTION

Adj Lower Tray width vol (LTRR): Inserter To adjust the paper minimum width (LTRR) of Inserter Lower Tray automatically. When the size mismatch jam is incorrectly detected at the pickup from Inserter Lower Tray 1) Set the LTRR paper on the Inserter Lower Tray and align it with the width of Slide Guide. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj Lower Tray width vol (LTR): Inserter To adjust the paper minimum width (LTR) of Inserter Lower Tray automatically. When the size mismatch jam is incorrectly detected at the pickup from Inserter Lower Tray 1) Set the LTR paper on the Inserter Lower Tray and align it with the width of Slide Guide. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Controller PCB RAM clear: Booklet To execute the RAM clear of Finisher Controller PCB to delete all the adjustment contents and counter information. 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter the necessary setting values. - RAM clear is executed After the main power is turned OFF/ON. COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Controller PCB RAM clear: PFU To execute the RAM clear of Inserter/Folder Controller PCB on Paper Folding Unit to delete all the adjustment contents and counter information. Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj Speed Down Timing Sensor output: PFU To adjust the output of Slowdown Timing Sensor on Paper Folding Unit automatically. - When replacing the Slowdown Timing Sensor - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj Release Timing Sensor output: PFU To adjust the output of Release Timing Sensor on Paper Folding Unit automatically. - When replacing the Release Timing Sensor - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key.

8-372

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

SORTER > FUNCTION PF-SENS3 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method PF-SENS4 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method TRM-SENS Lv.1 Details Use case

Adj/set/operate method IS-CON Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method

Adj Fold Position Sensor output: PFU To adjust the output of Fold Position Sensor on Paper Folding Unit automatically. - When replacing the Fold Position Sensor - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj Upper Stopper Path Sensor output:PFU To adjust the output of Upper Stopper Path Sensor on Paper Folding Unit automatically. - When replacing the Upper Stopper Path Sensor - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj of Trimmer Dust Sensr output:Booklet To adjust the output of Saddle Dust Sensor on Saddle Unit automatically. - When installing the Trimmer - When replacing the Trimmer Dust Sensor - When replacing the Saddle Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key. DC Controller PCB RAM clear: Inserter To execute the RAM clear of Inserter DC Controller PCB to delete all the adjustment contents and counter information. Select the item, and then press OK key. T-8-99

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

8-373

OPTION SORTER > OPTION BLNK-SW Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Set Sddl Fin fold pstn margin: Staple To set the margin width of fold position on Saddle Finisher. When changing the margin width of fold position 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Normal, 1: Wider Default value 0 BUFF-SW ON/OFF of buffer operation Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of the buffer operation during the small size stapling mode Use case When the misalign of paper is caused by the electrostatic charge between the paper during the the small size stapling mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When the buffer operation is set to OFF, productivity decreases. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Supplement/memo This setting can be also made with DIP switch of the Finisher. For details, refer to the Service Manual for Finisher. TRY-OVER Set limit of stack capacity Lv.1 Details To set the limit of stack capacity for Z-fold paper and half hold paper. (“Stack over” is detected when the paper is stacked over the limit of stack height.) If the limit of stack capacity is removed, paper can be stacked beyond the maximum stack capacity. Use case When stacking the paper beyond the maximum stack capacity of tray. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Tell users and get an agreement that when the high density paper is stacked until the maximum volume, a tray may not be able to move up. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Normal operation, 1: Remove the stack limit Default value 0

8-373

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

8-374

SORTER > OPTION PUCH-SW Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value ALG-IMPR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value BUFF-SW2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value 1SHT-SRT Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

SORTER > OPTION

High-prdctvty/-accurcy punch mode To switch the high-productivity punch mode or high-accuracy punch mode of Finisher. When switching the high-productivity punch mode or high-accuracy punch mode 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0 Set Finisher alignment mode To set the special mode for improving the alignment condition. When using the special mode for improving the alignment condition 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 20 0 Setting Finisher buffer operation To set ON/OFF of buffer operation in the Finisher. When 1 is set, the alignment condition of the paper delivered from the lower path may be improved, but productivity decreases. When misalignment occurs in the buffer paper delivered from the lower path 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When the buffer operation is set to OFF, productivity decreases. 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF 0 Setting of 1-sheet Offset&Collate To set ON/OFF of Offset&Collate for 1-sheet document. When 1 is set, Offset&Collate for 1-sheet document is enabled, but the paper is not appropriately stacked. When preferring to execute 1-sheet Offset&Collate with low stacking condition 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

SD-LMTLS Lv.1 Details

Set sddl delivery limitless oprtn To set ON/OFF of the Finisher Saddle Assembly limitless delivery operation. When 1 is set, “stack over” does not occur and saddle operation can be performed continuously, but the stacking condition decreases. Use case When preferring to perform saddle operation continuously Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When limitless operation is set to ON, the saddle stacking condition decreases. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 SD-STCNB Set sddl delivery stack quantity Lv.1 Details To increase the saddle stacking number. When 1 is set, the “saddle stack over” count is increased, and the stacking number increases. Use case When preferring to increase the stacking number of the Saddle Delivery Assembly Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Default value 0 BUFF-THK Set buffer oprtn for heavy paper Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of buffer operation for heavy paper (181 to 220g/m2). When 1 is set, productivity of sort and staple mode of Finisher is improved, but the stacking condition decreases. Use case When improving productivity of sort and staple mode for heavy paper (181 to 220 g/m2) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When improving productivity, the stacking condition may decrease. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related service mode SORTER> OPTION> PRD-PRTY

8-374

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

8-375

SORTER > OPTION

SORTER > OPTION

PRCS-SP1 Lv.1 Details

Set stacking speed at sort (Fin-K1) When stacking heavy paper (181g/m2 or more) on the Finisher Process Tray, the speed is normally decreased. When 1 is set, the stacking speed at sort mode does not decrease and productivity is improved, but the stacking condition may decrease. (Fin-L1)Setting the feed speed change when transporting paper to the rear end assist of the processing tray. Use case (Fin-K1) When improving productivity of sort mode for heavy paper (181 g/m2 or more) (Fin-L1) When the misalign of paper is caused by the poor return during the sort mode or the stay pull mode. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When improving productivity, the stacking condition may decrease. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Speed is decreased, 1: Speed is not decreased Default value Fin-K1:0 Fin-L1:1 PRCS-SP2 Set stack SPD at Hvy sort/staple Lv.1 Details When stacking heavy paper (181g/m2 or more) on the Finisher Process Tray, the speed is normally decreased. When 1 is set, the stacking speed at sort and staple mode does not decrease and productivity is improved, but the stacking condition may decrease. Use case When improving productivity of sort and staple mode for heavy paper (181 g/m2 or more) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When improving productivity, the stacking condition may decrease. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Speed is decreased, 1: Speed is not decreased Default value 0 BUFF-MX1 Buffer oprtn at mixed weight sort Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of buffer operation when mixing papers which weights are different. When 1 is set, productivity of sort mode of Finisher is improved, but the stacking condition decreases. Use case When improving productivity of sort mode in the case of mixing papers which weights are different Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When improving productivity, the stacking condition may decrease. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

BUFF-MX2 Lv.1 Details

Buffer at mix weight sort/staple To set ON/OFF of buffer operation when mixing papers which weights are different. When 1 is set, productivity of sort and staple mode of Finisher is improved, but the stacking condition decreases. Use case When improving productivity of sort and staple mode in the case of mixing papers which weights are different Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When improving productivity, the stacking condition may decrease. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Related service mode SORTER> OPTION> PRD-PRTY PRCS-MX1 Set stck SPD at mix ppr type sort Lv.1 Details The speed is decreased when stacking papers on the Finisher Process Tray in the case of mixing papers which the paper types (paper weight or paper material) differ. When 1 is set, the stacking speed at sort mode does not decrease and productivity is improved, but the stacking condition may decrease. Use case When improving productivity of sort mode in the case of mixing papers which the paper types differ Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When improving productivity, the stacking condition may decrease. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Speed is decreased, 1: Speed is not decreased Default value 0 PRCS-MX2 Stck SPD at mix ppr sort/staple Lv.1 Details The speed is decreased when stacking papers on the Finisher Process Tray in the case of mixing papers which the paper types (paper weight or paper material) differ. When 1 is set, the stacking speed at sort and staple mode does not decrease and productivity is improved, but the stacking condition may decrease. Use case When improving productivity of sort and staple mode in the case of mixing papers which paper types differ Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When improving productivity, the stacking condition may decrease. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Speed is decreased, 1: Speed is not decreased Default value 0

8-375

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

8-376

SORTER > OPTION BUF-THK1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value PRD-PRTY Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SLD-BCK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range

Default value STCR-DWN Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

SORTER > OPTION

Set No. of buffer for hvy ppr 1 To set the number of heavy paper 1 (91 to 180g/m2) for buffer. When 1 is set, productivity of staple mode of Finisher is improved. When prioritizing productivity of staple mode of Finisher using heavy paper 1 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: 2 sheets, 1: 3 sheets 0 Prdctvty prrty btch at sort/staple To simultaneously set productivity priority. When 1 is set, productivity of sort and staple mode of Finisher’s corresponding items is improved. When prioritizing productivity of sort and staple mode of Finisher 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Normal, 1: Priority on productivity 0 Set bleed-thru improvement mode When the back of the coated paper as the cover is soiled, set 1/2. When the backside of the paper is soiled while coated paper is used as cover 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Productivity is improved, but jam or misalignment might occur. 0 to 2 0: OFF, 1: ON (coated paper + recycled paper), 2: ON (coated paper + plain paper) 0 Set occasional misalign prev mode To set ON/OFF of occasional misalignment prevention mode. When misalignment in feed direction occurs at approx. every 30 sheets for thin/plain paper (105g/m2 and less), set 1. When misalignment in feed direction occurs occasionally for thin/ plain paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

PRCS-SP3 Lv.1 Details

Change of paper stack speed for non-buffer mode: Finisher When the value is changed to 1, the paper stack speed becomes slow in the non-buffer mode. Use case When misalignment due to too much paper return (buckling on the trailing edge) occurs in staple mode for thin/plain paper Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When setting this mode, the feeding speed of non-buffered paper to the Process Tray is changed, so it may be necessary to readjust the Process Tray pull-back amount (SORTER> ADJUST> PRCS-RET). Display/adj/set range 0 to 8 0: 700 mm/sec 1: 650 mm/sec 2: 600 mm/sec 3: 550 mm/sec 4: 500 mm/sec 5: 450 mm/sec 6 to 8: 450 mm/sec Default value 0 Related service mode SORTER > ADJUST > PRCS-RET NSRT-STC Set poor stack prev mode at non-collate Lv.1 Details Set this mode when the stackability at non-collate delivery is low. With this setting, the stackability at non-collate delivery is improved. Use case When the stackability at non-collating is low Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Deliver printed paper to the Stack Tray in non-collate mode 1: Deliver 2-sided printed paper via the Processing Tray in noncollate mode 2: Deliver 1-sided/2-sided printed paper via the Processing Tray in non-collate mode 1: ON Default value 1 THN-TRSW Narrow width paper jam prevention Lv.1 Details Set this mode when a delivery stationary jam occurs at the time of delivering thin paper (63g/m2 and less) which width direction is 139.6 mm and smaller to the Stacker. Use case When delivery stationary jam occurs at the time of delivering thin paper (63g/m2 and less) which width direction is 139.6 mm and smaller to the First/Second Tray Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Deliver to the destination specified on UI 1: Deliver to the Tray on the host machine Default value 0

8-376

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

8-377

SORTER > OPTION THN-SW Lv.1 Details

Switch thin ppr stack cpcty: Stack Tray When this mode is enabled, stack capacity of the Stack Tray for thin paper is increased. Stack capacity is changed from the capacity for large size paper to the capacity for small size paper. Use case When increasing the stack capacity of the tray for thin paper Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 SWGUP-SW ON/OFF of the swing unit escape operation Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of the swing unit escape operation for the 1st sheet of thin paper Use case When corner bend occurs on the first sheet while feeding thin paper Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 CALG-SW ON/OFF ctr align oprtn: corner-stpl mode Lv.1 Details To set whether to perform center alignment operation in cornerstaple mode. Use case When switching the alignment position from center to front/rear side Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF (Center alignment), 1: ON (Front/rear side alignment) Default value 0 T-8-100

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

8-377

8

Service Mode > BOARD > OPTION

BOARD

BOARD > OPTION TR-DSP Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

OPTION BOARD > OPTION MENU-1 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value MENU-2 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value MENU-3 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value MENU-4 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SURF-OFF Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8-378

Hide/dspl of printer setting menu level 1 To set whether to display or hide the level 1 of printer setting menu. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Hide/dspl of printer setting menu level 2 To set whether to display or hide the level 2 of printer setting menu. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Hide/dspl of printer setting menu level 3 To set whether to display or hide the level 3 of printer setting menu. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Hide/dspl of printer setting menu level 4 To set whether to display or hide the level 4 of printer setting menu. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 UFR board function ON/OFF To set ON/OFF of the function according to the SURF board connection status. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0

8

Service Mode > BOARD > OPTION

Display/adj/set range Default value

Hide/dspl of toner reduction function To set whether to display or hide the toner reduction function. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 T-8-101

8-378

9

Installation ■ to look at this Installation Procedure ■How ■ Before Installation ■Checking the Contents ■ ■Checking ■ ■Unpacking ■ ■Installation

9

Installation

9

Installation > Checking Before Installation > Checking the Installation Environment

How to look at this Installation Procedure

9-2

Checking Before Installation Following shows requirements for the installation site.

Description on the parts included in the package

Therefore, it is desirable to see the installation site in advance before bringing in the machine to the user’s site.

The parts with a diagonal line in the contents list will not be used.

Checking Power Supply

In the case of using the components After unpacking, check the parts included in the package by referring to the illustration of “Components” in this Installation Procedure.

1) There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (+, -10%) for exclusive use by the machine.

Checking the Installation Environment 1) The environment of the installation site must be in the range as shown below.

Packaged Item

Avoid installation near the faucet, water boiler, humidifier or refrigerator. Guaranteed range for operation/image, Temperature: 10.0 to 30.0 deg C, Humidity: 20 to

F-9-1

80%

Symbol marks in the illustration

2) It is desirable to hang curtains over the window if the machine is installed near the source

Symbol marks are used in this Installation Procedure for the frequent work/operation. Check the descriptions below. Screw

of fire, a dusty area, or a place subject to generation of ammonia gas or direct sunlight. 3) Room odor can be bothering when running the machine for a long time in a poorlyventilated room although the ozone amount generated while running this equipment does

Harness

Connector

not harm human health. Be sure to provide adequate ventilation of the room to keep the work environment comfortable.

Tighten

Remove

Connect

Disconnect

Secure

Free

Claw

Insert

Remove

Push

Plug in

Turn on

Checking instruction

Check

Visual Check

Sound Check F-9-2

9

Installation > Checking Before Installation > Checking the Installation Environment

9-2

9

Installation > Checking Before Installation > Checking Installation Space

Checking Installation Space

9-3

• When the Booklet Finisher-K1, Paper Folding Unit-G1, Professional Puncher Integration

1) The foot of this equipment should be in contact with the floor. This equipment should be kept on the level.

Unit-B1, Professional Puncher-C1, Document Insertion Unit-H1, Buffer Pass Unit-J1, Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-F1, and Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1 are attached. 2

2) The machine must be away from the wall by 100 mm or more to secure a sufficient space

800 mm or more

500 mm or more

to operate the machine. For iR-ADV C9280 PRO/C9270 Series

500 mm or more

500 mm or more

3,933 mm

500 mm or more

100 mm or more

1,524 mm

1

1,524 mm

• When the Copy Tray-P1 and Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-F1 are attached.

F-9-4

1,759 mm

NOTE: *2 : Make sure to provide at least 100 mm of space if none of the Paper Folding Unit-G1, Professional Puncher-C1, Document Insertion Unit-H1, or Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1 is attached.

500 mm or more

1,644 mm 500 mm or more

F-9-3

NOTE: *1 : Make sure to provide at least 800 mm of space if you attach one or more of the following: Paper Folding Unit-G1, Professional Puncher-C1, Document Insertion Unit-H1, or Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1.

9

Installation > Checking Before Installation > Checking Installation Space

9-3

9

Installation > Checking Before Installation > Points to Note at Installation Work

For iR-ADV C7280/C7270/C7260 Series

9-4

3) To install the host machine, install it in a well-ventilated place. Especially when there are

• When the Copy Tray-P1 and Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-F1 are attached. 100 mm or more

multiple host machines, be sure to locate the machine where the machine is free from direct exhaust of other machines. Be sure to keep the machine away from the air-inlet duct

500 mm or more

which is used for ventilation of the room. 4) When it is difficult to secure a space at rear side, install the following spacer to the duct at bottom of rear side.

1,524 mm

• FL2-9160

1,644 mm

500 mm or more

500 mm or more

NOTE: Be sure that the spacer is not overlapped with the [A] area when installing it.

F-9-5

• When the Booklet Finisher-L1, External 2/3 Hole Puncher-A1, Buffer Pass Unit-J1, Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-F1, and POD Deck Lite-A1 are attached. 100 mm or more

500 mm or more

1,524 mm

[A] F-9-7

Points to Note at Installation Work Take note of the following points when installing the host machine. 1) Moving the host machine from a cool place to a warm place can generate condensation,

2,554 mm

causing moisture beads on the metal surface. Using the host machine while the machine

500 mm or more

500 mm or more

is condensed can cause image failure. Therefore, when moving the machine from a cool place to a warm place to install, unpack the host machine and leave it for 2 hours or more F-9-6

before the installation work so that the machine becomes used to the room temperature. 2) Be sure to work with a group of 4 or more people to install the host machine. CAUTION: Be sure to first complete the installation of the host machine only, and then perform checking after power-on.

9

Installation > Checking Before Installation > Points to Note at Installation Work

9-4

9

Installation > Checking Before Installation > Order to Install the Host Machine and the Options

Table of options combination

Order to Install the Host Machine and the Options

NOTE:

• Following table shows the combination of options to be installed at the right side of the Host Machine. • Refer to the table below to install the options described in the table. Be sure to check the combination before the installation work.

Utility Tray Utility Tray

9-5

Voice Guidance Voice Operation Kit Kit

Card Reader

NOTE: In the case of installing the Host Machine and the other options at the same time, follow the order as described below to install the options first so that the installation operability is improved. 1. Checking Before Installation 2. Unpacking 3. IInstalling the Upright Arm (for the models in which the Upright Control Panel is equipped

-

No

No

Yes

Voice Guidance Kit

No

-

No

Yes

4. Installation of the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover

Voice Operation Kit

No

No

-

Yes

5. Installation of the Upright Control Panel (for the models in which the Upright Control Panel

Card Reader

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

as standard)

is equipped as standard) T-9-1

Yes: installation is available, No: installation is not available

6. Installation of the Buffer Path Unit (for the models in which the Buffer Path Unit is equipped as standard) 7. Installation of the Pickup Assembly 8. Installation of the Process Unit 9. Installation of the Black Developing Assembly 10. Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe) 11. Installation of the Noise Reduction Cover 12. Securing the Host Machine 13. Preparation for Main Power Connection 14. Turning ON the Main Power 15. Installation of Toner Container 16. Settings at Installation 17. Setting the Deck 18. Setting the Paper Cassette 19. Auto Gradation Adjustment 20. Image Position Adjustment

9

Installation > Checking Before Installation > Order to Install the Host Machine and the Options

9-5

9

Installation > Checking Before Installation > Types of the Accessory Box

9-6

Types of the Accessory Box The Accessory Box packed with the host machine differs depending on the models; thus, be sure to check the contents by referring the following table. Model

Area

Accessory Box 1

Accessory Box 2

Accessory Box 3

Accessory Box 4

Accessory Box 5

Accessory Box 6

C9280 PRO

USA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

C9280 PRO

Europe

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

C9280 PRO

Asia/Oceania

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

-

C9270 PRO

USA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

C9270 PRO

ASIA

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

-

C7280i

Europe

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

C7270

USA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

C7270i

Europe

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

C7260i

Europe

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

C7270

Asia/Oceania

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

-

C7260

USA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

C7260

ASIA/Oceania

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

T-9-2

Yes: included in the package

9

Installation > Checking Before Installation > Types of the Accessory Box

9-6

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

Checking the Contents

9-7

[13] Screw (TP; M4x8) X 4

[14] Rubber Cap X 1

[15] Screw (RS Tightening black; M4x12) X 2

[16] Screw (Binding; M4x10) X 1

[17] Rubber Cap X 2

[18] Joint Cover R X 1

[19] Joint Cover L X 1

[20] Front Base Cover X 1

[21] Rear Base Cover X 1

[22] Cable Clamp X 2

[23] Screw (P Tightening; M3x8) X4

[24] Screw (TP; M4x8) X 8

●● Accessory Box 1 (for the models with the Upright Control Panel) [1] Color Developing Assembly X 3

[4] Filter X 2

[7] ITB Inner Cover X 1

[10] Reader Fixing Plate R X1

[2] Black Developing Assembly X 1

[5] Noise Reduction Cover X1

[8] Handle Cover X 6

[11] Reader Fixing Plate L X1

[3] Color Drum Unit X 3

[6] Service Book Holder X1

[9] Right Rear Cover X 1

[12] Screw (RS Tightening; M4x8) X8

F-9-9

F-9-8

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

NOTE: [8] : Use the 6 covers when the Buffer Path Unit is not installed. Use 4 of them when it is installed. [9], [10], [11], [12], [13], [14] : Use the parts at the installation of the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover.

9-7

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

●● Accessory Box 1 (for the models with the Flat Control Panel) [1] Color Developing Assembly X 3

[4] Filter X 2

[2] Black Developing Assembly X 1

[5] Noise Reduction Cover X1

9-8

[13] Screw (TP; M4x8) X 4

[14] Rubber Cap X 1

[16] Screw (Binding; M4x10) X 1

[17] Touch Pen X 1

[3] Color Drum Unit X 3

[6] Service Book Holder X1

[15] Screw (RS Tightening black; M4x12) X 2

F-9-11

[7] ITB Inner Cover X 1

[8] Handle Cover X 6

[9] Right Rear Cover X 1

[10] Reader Fixing Plate R X1

[11] Reader Fixing Plate L X1

[12] Screw (RS Tightening; M4x8) X8

NOTE: [8] : Use the 6 covers when the Buffer Path Unit is not installed. Use 4 of them when it is installed. [9], [10], [11], [12], [13], [14] : Use the parts at the installation of the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover.

F-9-10

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

9-8

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

●● Accessory Box 2 [1] Right Upper Cover 1 X1

[2] Left Upper Cover X 1

9-9

●● Accessory Box 4 (for the model in which the Buffer Path Unit is equipped as standard)

[3] Box Upper Cover X 1

[1] Delivery Outlet Upper Guide X 1

[2] Buffer Front Cover X 1

[3] Cover Support Plate (Front) X 1

[4] Cover Support Plate (Rear) X 1

[5] Hinge Shaft X 2

[6] Screw (RS Tightening; M4x8) X 9

[7] Screw (P Tightening; M4x10) X 1

[8] Wire Saddle X 1

[4] Front Upper Cover X 1

Two Hinge Shafts are attached.

F-9-12

NOTE: [1], [2], [3] : Use the parts at the installation of the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover.

●● Accessory Box 3 (for the model in which the Buffer Path Unit is equipped as standard) [1] Buffer Path Unit X 1

[2] Connecting Harness Cover X 1

[3] BufferLeft Lower Cover X1

F-9-14

F-9-13

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

9-9

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

●● Accessory Box 6 (only with the products designed for Europe) [1] Waste Toner Container X1

9-10

●● USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe) [1] Case Sheet X 1

[2] Cushion X 4

F-9-18

F-9-15

●● Upper area of the Host Machine (for the models with the Upright Control Panel)

< CD/Guides > Check the contents against the following. Europe

[1] Upright Control Panel X1

USA

F-9-16

●● Inside of the Cassette (Lower) [1] Size Plate R X 2

C7280i C7270i C7260i

Asia Oceania

e-Manual

1pc

2pc

2pc

1pc

Setup Guide

1pc

-

-

1pc

Basic Operation Guide

1pc

-

-

1pc

Before Using This Machine

1pc

-

-

1pc

Drum Unit Warranty

1pc

-

-

-

AMS KIT Software/Manual CD

1pc

-

-

-

AMS Introduction Booklet

1pc

-

-

-

-

1pc

1pc

-

1pc

-

1pc

1pc

-

-

1pc

-

1pc

2pc

2pc

1pc

Users Guide

[2] Size Plate L X 2

C9280 PRO

UFRII User Software CD PCL User Software iW Management Console CD

T-9-3

F-9-17

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

9-10

9

Installation > Unpacking > Unpacking

Unpacking

9-11

3) Hold the handles at the right side of the host machine and lift the host machine to remove the pad. Put the plastic bag aside in the direction of the arrow.

Unpacking

CAUTION: Be sure not to lift the host machine too much. Otherwise, it will lose the balance.

CAUTION: The host machine weights about 220 kg. For safety, be sure to work carefully to move and install the machine.

Handles

Be sure to work with a group of 4 or more people to install the Host Machine.

NOTE: The dimension of the Host Machine and the transport container is as shown in the figure. Be sure to secure a space to unpack, and then start the installation work.

Plastic Bag 1,307 mm

Pads F-9-20

4) Hold the handles at the left side of the host machine and lift the host machine to remove the pad and the plastic bag. 1,140 mm

991 mm

CAUTION: Be sure not to lift the host machine too much. Otherwise, it will lose the balance.

F-9-19

1) Remove the tapes attaching the host machine and the Package Box and bring down the

Handles

Package Box from the pallet. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop the Box when removing the tapes. 2) Pull the plastic bag all the way down.

Pads Plastic Bag F-9-21

9

Installation > Unpacking > Unpacking

9-11

9

Installation > Unpacking > Unpacking

5) Take out the 2 Slope Plates stored at the right side of the Pallet and remove the 2 pins which are secured at the back of the Slope Plate with tape.

9-12

8) Install the Handle Cover. < Model with Buffer Path Unit: Using 4 Handle Covers >

6) Turn around the 2 Slope Plates to install as shown in the figure, and then fit the pin-holes of the pallet with the pin-holes of the Slope Plates to put the 2 pins into the holes.

• 4 Protrusions • 4 Claws Model with Buffer Path Unit

Pin

x4 Claw

Slope Plates

Protrusion F-9-22

F-9-24

7) Hold the handles at the left side of the host machine, and then, while supporting the corner of the host machine, fit the casters to the center of the Slope Plate to slowly bring the machine down.

< Model without Buffer Path Unit: Using 6 Handle Covers > • 6 Protrusions • 6 Claws Model without Buffer Path Unit

CAUTION:

x6

Be careful not to make the casters off from the Slope Plate. Claw

Handles

Protrusion F-9-25

Handles F-9-23

9

Installation > Unpacking > Unpacking

9-12

9

Installation > Unpacking > Installing the Upright Arm

9) When not installing the Buffer Path Unit with the model with Buffer Path Unit, remove the Buffer Mounting Plate (Front) and the Buffer Mounting Plate (Rear), and install the 2 Handle Cover. • 4 Screws • 2 Protrusions

9-13

Installing the Upright Arm NOTE: Perform the models in which the Upright Control Panel is equipped as standard. In the case of Upright Control Panel model, be sure to perform the following procedure.

• 2 Claws

x4

Buffer Mounting Plate (Front)

1) Put the Upright Arm straight into the round hole of the Frame Base.

Claw

CAUTION:

x2

• When installing the Upright Arm, be sure to place the cables as indicated in the figure below. • Be careful not to get the cable caught when installing the Upright Arm. Upright Arm

Buffer Mounting Plate (Rear)

Control Panel Cable

Protrusion

Frame Base

F-9-26

10)

Remove the tapes to remove the Left Box Cover.

CAUTION: Because the Left Box Cover is not secured with the screw, be careful not to drop the Box Cover when removing the tapes.

Power Supply Cable

Tapes

F-9-27

11)

Remove the tapes attached over the outer surface of the host machine.

9

Installation > Unpacking > Installing the Upright Arm

9-13

9

Installation > Unpacking > Installing the Upright Arm

2) Bring down the Upright Control Panel together with the cushioning materials from the host machine.

9-14

4) Secure the Control Panel Cable and the Power Cable with the edge saddle and also secure the Control Panel Cable with the reuse band.

Upright Control Panel

NOTE: Check that the Control Panel Cable and the Power Supply Cable are secured in place using the Edge Saddle. Edge Saddle Power Cable

x2

Control Panel Cable

Cushioning Materials

F-9-28

3) Align the hole on the Upright Arm and the hole on the Frame Base, and secure the Upright

Reuse Band

Arm in place. • 2 Screws (TP; M4 x 8)

F-9-30

Upright Arm

5) Secure the Power Supply Cable with the cable clamp.

x2

• 1 screw (TP: M4x8)

Power Supply Cable Frame Base F-9-29

Cable Clamp F-9-31

9

Installation > Unpacking > Installing the Upright Arm

9-14

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Upright Control Panel

Installation

9-15

2) Remove the packing tapes on the Upright Control Panel.

NOTE:

• When installing the host machine and Reader Unit or Printer Cover simultaneously, be sure to install the Reader Unit or Printer Cover after completing "Unpacking > Installing the Upright Arm". • When installing the Reader Unit, refer to “Installation Procedure of the Reader Unit”. • When installing the Reader Unit, be sure to execute the following work after the installation. • In the case of using the machine as a printer model, refer to “Installation Procedure of the Printer Cover-B1”.

3) Turn the Panel Base to make the [A] part with protrusion come to the upper side.

[A]

[A]

Installation of the Upright Control Panel 1) Install the Front Base Cover and the Rear Base Cover. • 2 Screws (P tightening; M3 x 8)

F-9-33

x2

Front Base Cover

Rear Base Cover F-9-32

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Upright Control Panel

9-15

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Upright Control Panel

4) Install the Upright Control Panel to the Upright Arm.

5) Route the Power Supply Cable as shown in the figure and connect the Power Supply

• 2 Protrusions

Connector.

• 2 Bosses

6) Fix the cable with the Cable Clamp.

• 4 Screws (TP; M4 x 8)

• 1 Screw (TP; M4 x 8)

NOTE: When installing the Upright Control Panel, be sure to tighten the upper screw first.

x4

9-16

CAUTION: • Be sure not to route the Power Supply Cable in clockwise direction. • Route the Power Supply Cable at the bottom of the Cable Clamp to place inside the black guide.

Upright Control Panel

Protrusion

Boss

Cable Clamp

Boss

Power Supply Connector Upright Arm F-9-34

Power Supply Cable

CAUTION: Be careful not to trap the Flexible Cable with the Panel Base.

F-9-36

F-9-35

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Upright Control Panel

9-16

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Upright Control Panel

7) Route the Control Panel Cable as shown in the figure and connect the Control Panel

9-17

9) Install the Joint Cover L.

Connector.

Joint Cover L

8) Secure the cable with the Reuse Band and cut the extra part. CAUTION: • Be sure not to route the Power Supply Cable in clockwise direction. • Be sure to store the slack [A] of the Control Panel Cable inside the cover.

Ferrite Core

Reuse Band

Control Panel Cable

Control Panel Cable

[A] F-9-39

10)

Install the Joint Cover R.

• 2 Screws (P tightening; M3 x 8) • 2 Rubber Caps CAUTION: F-9-37

CAUTION:

Be sure to put the Power Cable through groove on the Joint Cover R.

Check that the tape of the Control Panel Cable is outside the Pipe Cover. If not, be sure to adjust cable so that the tape can be seen.

Joint Cover R

x2

Groove

Power Supply Cable F-9-40

Tape F-9-38

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Upright Control Panel

9-17

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Buffer Path Unit > Unpacking

Installation of the Buffer Path Unit

9-18

1) Lift the Buffer Path Unit straight upward, and then place the bottom of the Buffer Path Unit

■■Unpacking

facing down.

NOTE: Be sure to open the plastic before starting the work. Holding the Buffer Path Unit while the plastic is wrapped around can cause the Buffer Path Unit slipped over.

CAUTION: Do no hold inside the dashed frame as shown in the figure; otherwise, it can cause the Paper Path Guide deformed.

F-9-43

CAUTION: Do not move the Buffer Path Unit while making [A] area as the supporting point nor place it on the floor while the Unit is tilted; otherwise, [A] area can be deformed.

F-9-41

CAUTION: Be sure to hold Frame [A] and Frame [B] areas of the Buffer Path Unit. Avoid the harness to hold [B] area; otherwise, the harness can be damaged. [B]

[A] F-9-44

Harness

2) Remove the tapes.

[A]

F-9-42

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Buffer Path Unit > Unpacking

9-18

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Buffer Path Unit > Installation Procedure

■■Installation Procedure

9-19

3) Put the 3 hooks of the Delivery Outlet Upper Guide into the holes of the Reverse Door Cover, and slide in the direction of the arrow to install the Delivery Outlet Upper Guide.

1) Remove Left Lower Cover 1.

• 1 Screw (Binding; M4 x 10)

• 2 Screws (the removed Left Lower Cover and the screws are not used)

Hook

Hook

x2 Hook

F-9-47

F-9-45

CAUTION:

2) Install the Cover Support Plate (Front) and the Cover Support Plate (Rear).

Before installing the Buffer Path Unit to the Host Machine, check that the Jam Process Lever is positioned as shown in the figure.

• 2 Claws • 2 Screws (RS tightening; M4 x 8) Cover Support Plate (Front)

x2

Claw

x2 Cover Support Plate (Rear) F-9-46

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Buffer Path Unit > Installation Procedure

F-9-48

9-19

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Buffer Path Unit > Installation Procedure

4) Put the 4 shafts [A] of the Buffer Path Unit into the 4 U-shaped slots [B] on the left side of the host machine, and install the equipment.

9-20

6) Insert a flat-blade screwdriver, and remove the Connector Cover. (The removed Connector Cover will not be used.) • 1 Claw

CAUTION:

• 2 Protrusions

Be careful not to come in contact with Delivery Outlet Upper Guide at installation. Claw

[B] [A] [B]

Delivery Outlet Upper Guide

Protrusion

[A]

F-9-51

7) Install the Connecting Harness Stopping Plate. F-9-49

5) Shift the Buffer Path Unit in the direction of the arrow, and fix it while pushing it on the Buffer Mounting Plate (Front).

CAUTION: Be careful not to trap the harnesses with the Connecting Harness Stopping Plate.

• 1 Screw (RS tightening; M4 x 8)

x2

F-9-50

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Buffer Path Unit > Installation Procedure

F-9-52

9-20

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Buffer Path Unit > Installation Procedure

8) Connect the 3 connectors to the host machine.

10)

9-21

Install the Buffer Left Lower Cover.

• 2 Protrusions • 4 Screws (RS tightening; M4 x 8)

Connector

x3

NOTE: In case of connecting to the downstream equipment, secure the cover at the [A] point together with the Shunt Cable. Protrusion

x4 F-9-53

9) Put the Buffer Cable through the groove of the Connecting Harness Cover, and install the Connecting Harness Cover to the host machine. • 2 Protrusions

[A]

• 1 Claw

F-9-55

11)

Protrusion

Install the Wire Saddle and secure the Buffer Cable with the Wire Saddle.

Claw

Buffer Cable

F-9-54

Wire Saddle F-9-56

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Buffer Path Unit > Installation Procedure

9-21

9 12)

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Buffer Path Unit > Installation Procedure

Rotate the Jam Process Lever in counter clockwise direction and make the machine

in paper pass condition shown in the figure below.

15)

9-22

When the Buffer Front Cover is misaligned when viewed from the front, loosen 2

screws [A], and after adjusting the side position of the Front Cover, tighten screws.

Buffer Front Cover

Jam Process Lever F-9-57

13)

Align the hinge positions of the Buffer Front Cover and the Buffer Path Unit in 2

places, and insert the Hinge Shaft in the direction of the arrow.

[A]

F-9-59

Hinge Shaft

F-9-58

14)

Close the Buffer Front Cover.

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Buffer Path Unit > Installation Procedure

9-22

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Pickup Assembly

Installation of the Pickup Assembly

9-23

6) Loosen the screw to slide the Deck Pressure Plate in the direction of the arrow and check that the screw is positioned at the engraved mark “1”, and then tighten the screw.

1) Remove 2 pieces of shipping tags from Right Lower Cover 3.

Engraved Mark

Deck Pressure Plate

2) Open the Vertical Path Cover and remove the 2 Pressure Release Spacers at the pickup slot of each cassette.

Pressure Release Spacers

Screw

F-9-61

7) Close the Left and the Right Decks.

F-9-60

8) Remove the tape by pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit fully toward the front. Tape

3) Close the Vertical Path Cover. 4) Open the Front Cover. 5) Press the Release Button, and open the Left/Right Deck. NOTE: Be sure to release the Release button slowly because it may not come out if releasing it abruptly.

Tape Fixing Feed Unit

F-9-62

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Pickup Assembly

9-23

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Pickup Assembly

9) Push the 2 Lock Springs of the Rails (both sides) to release the lock and further pull out the

10)

9-24

Open the Inner Delivery Unit.

Fixing Feed Unit until it stops. CAUTION: Do not release the Lock Springs at the rear side of the Rails (both sides); otherwise the Frame of the Fixing Feed Unit can be off.

Inner Delivery Unit F-9-64

11)

Remove the Fixing Upper Cover.

• 1 Stepped Screw • 1 Screw (W Sems)

W Sems Lock Spring

x2

Stepped Screw

Lock Spring F-9-63

Fixing Upper Cover

F-9-65

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Pickup Assembly

9-24

9 12)

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Process Unit

Remove the Stepped Screw with the tag. (The removed Stepped Screw will not be

used.) NOTE: It is desirable to keep the removed Stepped Screw (M3x18.5) because it may be used when moving the host machine.

9-25

14)

Install the Fixing Upper Cover. (2 Screws)

15)

Close the Inner Delivery Unit.

16)

Close the Fixing Feed Unit.

Installation of the Process Unit 1) Remove the Left Small Cover and the Right Small Cover of the Process Unit Inner Cover. • 2 Screws • 4 Protrusions NOTE: The 2 screws will not come off from the cover.

Protrusion

Screw

Protrusion

Screw

F-9-66

13)

Remove the 6 Fixation Members.

Left Small Cover

Right Small Cover

NOTE: It is desirable to keep the Fixation Members because they may be used when moving the host machine.

Fixation Member

F-9-68

Fixation Member

F-9-67

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Process Unit

9-25

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Process Unit

2) Bring down the 2 Levers of the Process Unit Inner Cover to pull out to the front and open

9-26

4) Take out the Developing Assembly (Yellow) from the attached container box.

the Process Unit Inner Cover. CAUTION: • The color is specified for the Color Developing Assembly. • Do not tilt or shake the Color Developing Assembly strongly when taking it out; otherwise, the toner can be scattered. Lever

5) Unpack the Developing Assembly (Yellow) to remove the packing material. CAUTION: • Be sure not to remove the tape [A] on the Supply Mouth until right before installing to the host machine. • Be sure not to remove the tape [B] and [C]. • Be sure not to remove the tape [B] and [C] because they are fixing the roller in place to prevent it moving when removing the Sleeve Seal. F-9-69

3) Remove the tape, and remove the ITB Fixation Member. NOTE: It is desirable to keep the Fixation Member because they may be used when moving the host machine.

• When touching the Developing Assembly (Yellow), check that no foreign particle (especially metal chip) is attached on your hands before starting the work. (If foreign particle is attached on the Sleeve, it can cause image failure). • After the unpacking work, do not put the supply inlet facing down because it can cause toner leak.

ITB Fixation Member

Supply Inlet

Packing Material

Tape

[B] F-9-70

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Process Unit

[C]

[A] F-9-71

9-26

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Process Unit

6) Remove the Sleeve Seal from the Developing Assembly (Yellow).

9-27

8) Make the coupling of the Sleeve rotate a full turn or 1.5 turns in the direction of the arrow (counter clockwise).

CAUTION: When removing the Sleeve Seal, be careful not to make any crease in the seal.

CAUTION:

Otherwise, the Toner Blocking Sheet may be caught and damaged by the crease.

Do not turn the Developing Sleeve in the reverse direction. By rotating it in the reverse direction, toner clots on the Sleeve may damage the Toner Blocking Sheet on the cylinder.

Color Developing Assembly

NOTE: Toner clots are removed by rotating the Sleeve in the direction of the arrow (counter clockwise).

Sleeve Seal

F-9-72

7) Remove the tapes [B] and [C] fixing the Roller. Coupling

F-9-74

9) Take out the Drum Unit (Yellow) from the attached packing box. CAUTION: The color is specified for the Color Drum Unit. [B] [C] F-9-73

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Process Unit

9-27

9 10)

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Process Unit

Unpack the Drum Unit (Yellow), and remove the packing materials.

12)

9-28

Release the lock of the Fixing Levers of the Color Drum Unit (Yellow) and lift the

Fixing Levers up. CAUTION: • Do not touch the Photosensitive Drum.

Lock

• Be sure not to remove the Protection Sheet during work.

Protection Sheet

Fixing Lever

Packing Material F-9-77

F-9-75

11)

Pull the 2 Spacers in the direction of the arrow from the Drum Unit (Yellow) to

remove.

Spacer

Packing Material

F-9-76

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Process Unit

9-28

9 13)

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Process Unit

Fit the 2 protrusions on the Developing Assembly (Yellow) into the Drum Unit (Yellow),

and combine the Developing Assembly (Yellow) and the Drum Unit (Yellow). Then, turn the Fixation Lever in the direction of the arrow and assemble the Process Unit.

9-29

CAUTION: Check that the lock is engaged and also check that the groove is visible as shown in the figure. (If installing the Process Unit while the Fixation Lever is not properly locked, the unit may not be able to be removed from the host machine.)

CAUTION: Be sure to use the correct color when assembling.

Lock Fixation Lever

Fixation Lever Slot Protrusion

Groove Slot F-9-79

Protrusion

14)

Secure the harness using the Harness Guide and the Reuse Band, and connect the

connector.

Color Developing Assembly

Color Drum Unit F-9-78

x4 Connector

Harness Guide Reuse Band

Harness Guide F-9-80

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Process Unit

9-29

9 15)

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Process Unit

9-30

Remove the tape [A] on the Supply Mouth and Toner Mouth Packing.

CAUTION: Be sure to remove the Toner Mouth Packing certainly.

Guide[B]

Guide[A] [A] Toner Mouth Packing

Process Unit F-9-81

16)

Hold the upper front area and the left side of the Process Unit as shown in the figure

F-9-83

and place the rib at the right side of the Process Unit to the guide [A] of the Process Unit Inner Cover, and then fit the lower left side of the Process Unit to the guide [B] of the Process Unit Inner Cover to push in horizontally. CAUTION: Do not touch the Photosensitive Drum at the lower side with your hand when putting in the Process Unit.

NOTE: The guides positions [A] and [B] of the Process Unit Inner Cover differ between the Process Cartridge (Y) (M) and the Process Cartridge (C). The positions of guide [A] and [B] are shown in the figure below. Guide[A] （Yellow）

Guide[B] （Yellow）

Guide[A] （Magenta）

Guide[A] （Cyan）

Guide[B] （Magenta）

Guide[B] （Cyan） F-9-84

F-9-82

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Process Unit

9-30

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Black Developing Assembly

NOTE: While holding the Process Unit with both hands, insert about 2/3 of it, and then push the handle of the Process Unit with your finger as shown in the figure to insert all the way until it stops.

9-31

Installation of the Black Developing Assembly 1) Take out the Black Developing Assembly from the attached packing box. CAUTION: Do not tilt or shake the Black Developing Assembly strongly when taking it out; otherwise, the toner can be scattered.

2) Unpack the Black Developing Assembly and remove the packing material. CAUTION: • Be sure not to remove the tape [A] on the Supply Mouth until right before installing to the host machine. • Be sure not to remove the tape [B] and [C].

F-9-85

17)

• Be sure not to remove the tape [B] and [C] because they are fixing the roller in place to prevent it moving when removing the Sleeve Seal. • When touching the Black Developing Assembly, check that no foreign particle (especially metal chip) is attached on your hands before starting the work. (If foreign particle is attached on the Sleeve, it can cause image failure)

Connect the Connector.

• After the unpacking work, do not put the supply inlet facing down because it can cause toner leak.

Connector Packing Material

[B] [C] [A]

F-9-86

18)

Repeat the step 4) through 17) and install the Magenta and Cyan Process Units in

the same way. Supply Inlet

CAUTION: Be sure to use the correct color to install.

F-9-87

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Black Developing Assembly

9-31

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Black Developing Assembly

3) Remove the Sleeve Seal from the Developing Assembly (Black).

9-32

5) Make the Gear of the Sleeve rotate a full turn or 1.5 turns in the direction of the arrow (counter clockwise).

CAUTION: When removing the Sleeve Seal, be careful not to make any crease in the seal.

CAUTION:

Otherwise, the Toner Blocking Sheet may be caught and damaged by the crease.

Do not turn the Developing Sleeve in the reverse direction. By rotating it in the reverse direction, toner clots on the Sleeve may damage the Toner Blocking Sheet on the cylinder.

Black Developing Assembly

NOTE: Toner clots are removed by rotating the cylinder in the direction of the arrow (counter clockwise).

Sleeve Seal

F-9-88

4) Be sure to remove the tape [B] and [C] after removing the Sleeve Seal. Gear

F-9-90

[B]

[C] F-9-89

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Black Developing Assembly

9-32

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Black Developing Assembly

6) Move the lock of the Developing Assembly Pressure Lever in the direction of the arrow to release the fixation.

9-33

7) Pull out the Developing Assembly Pressure Lever until it stops to release the pressure. 8) Turn the Developing Assembly Pressure Lever in the direction of the arrow.

Developing Assembly Pressure Lever

Developing Assembly Pressure Lever

Lock

F-9-92

9) Remove the tape [A] on the Supply Mouth and Toner Mouth Packing. CAUTION: Be sure to remove the Toner Mouth Packing certainly.

F-9-91

[A] Toner Mouth Packing F-9-93

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Black Developing Assembly

9-33

9 10)

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Black Developing Assembly

Hold the front right side and the left side of the Black Developing Assembly and fit the

rail of the Black Developing Assembly to the rail slot to push in horizontally.

9-34

NOTE: While holding the Black Developing Assembly with both hands, insert about 2/3 of it, and then push the handle of the Black Developing Assembly with your finger as shown in the figure to insert all the way until it stops.

CAUTION: Do not touch the Developing Sleeve with your hand when inserting the Black Developing Assembly.

Developing Sleeve

F-9-96

11)

F-9-94

Rail

Rail

Secure the harness using the Harness Guide and the Reuse Band, and connect the

connector.

Rail Slot

x3

Connector

Black Developing Assembly F-9-95

Harness Guide

Reuse Band

Harness Guide

F-9-97

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Black Developing Assembly

9-34

9 12)

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Black Developing Assembly

Turn the Developing Assembly Pressure Lever in the direction of the arrow, and push

13)

9-35

Close the Process Unit Inner Cover.

it in to apply pressure. CAUTION: How to Close the Process Unit Inner Cover When closing the Process Unit Inner Cover, go through the following steps 1 through 3. 1. Hold the 2 levers and lift up the levers and Process Unit Inner Cover to the horizontal level. 2. While keeping the levers horizontally, push the Process Unit Inner Cover to the rear side. Then, push on the 2 Stopper Plates [A] of the right and left hooks of the Process Unit Inner Cover to the end faces [B] of the Hinge Shaft Holder at the right and left sides of the host machine.

F-9-98

[B]

[A]

F-9-99

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Black Developing Assembly

9-35

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Black Developing Assembly

• If the Process Unit Inner Cover is pushed to the rear side without keeping the levers horizontally, the 2 Stopper Plates [A] of the hooks run over the inside of the Hinge Shaft Holder at the right and left sides of the host machine. Furthermore, if the Process Unit Inner Cover is pushed to the rear side with this condition, or if the levers are raised at a 90-degree angle and the Process Unit Inner Cover is closed, the Release Arm inside the Process Unit Inner Cover may get damage.

14)

9-36

Install the Left Small Cover and the Right Small Cover of the Process Unit Inner

Cover. (Tighten the 2 screws.)

15)

Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to make it engaged,

and then install the ITB Inner Cover. • 2 Protrusions • 1 Screw (Binding; M4 x 8)

ITB Pressure Release Lever

[B]

[A]

[B]

ITB Inner Cover

[A]

Protrusion

F-9-100

3. Raise the levers at a 90-degree angle further and close the Process Unit Inner Cover. The 2 hooks (right and left) of the Process Unit Inner Cover are hooked to the Hinge Shaft at the right and left sides of the host machine to lock.

F-9-102

16)

Turn the 2 Hinge Shafts in the direction of the arrow to remove from the Front Upper

Cover.

Front Upper Cover

[B]

ITB Pressure Release Lever

Hinge Shaft

[A] F-9-103 F-9-101

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Black Developing Assembly

9-36

9 17)

Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)

Fit the Left and Right Hinge holes of the Front Upper Cover with the host machine

and put the Hinge Shaft in the direction of the arrow to turn, and then install the Front

9-37

Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)

Upper Cover. CAUTION: Front Upper Cover

Use the Card Reader prepared by each sales company.

Hinge Shaft

1) Open the Front Cover.

2) Remove the Front Upper Cover. • 2 Hinge Shafts Front Upper Cover Hinge Shaft F-9-104

18)

Close the Front Upper Cover.

19)

Close the Front Cover.

20)

Open the Multi-purpose Tray, and remove the papers. Paper F-9-106

Multi-Purpose Tray

F-9-105

9

Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)

9-37

9

Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)

3) Remove the Clear Cover.

9-38

5) Place the Cushions inside the Upper Left Cover.

• 3 Claws NOTE: Adjust the number of cushions to match the thickness of the Card Reader.

x3

Clow Clow F-9-107

4) After connecting the Card Reader to the DUH-V3 Board, place the cable inside the cover.

F-9-109

6) Place the Card Reader on the Cushion.

F-9-108

F-9-110

9

Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)

9-38

9

Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)

7) Remove the Device Port Sheet and replace with the Case Sheet. (The removed Device Port Sheet will not be used.)

9-39

8) Return the Clear Cover. • 3 Claws

x3

Clow Clow F-9-112

9) Install the Front Upper Cover. (2 Hinge Shafts) 10)

Close the Front Cover.

F-9-111

9

Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)

9-39

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Noise Reduction Cover

Installation of the Noise Reduction Cover

9-40

3) Open the 2 Filters included in the package.

1) Remove the Filter from the Filter Case.

CAUTION: Do not unpack the Filter until just before installing the Filter.

4) Install the 3 Filters to the Filter Case.

Filter Filter Filter Case F-9-113

2) Remove the Filter Case from the Noise Reduction Cover. Filter

• 2 Claws Noise Reduction Cover Claw

F-9-115

CAUTION: Be sure to install the Filters in the correct direction.

UPPER

x2

Noise Reduction Cover

Filter Case

Filter

Claw F-9-114

Noise Reduction Cover

Filter F-9-116

9

Installation > Installation > Installation of the Noise Reduction Cover

9-40

9

Installation > Installation > Securing the Host Machine

9-41

Securing the Host Machine

5) Install the Filter Case to the Noise Reduction Cover.

1) Confirm the position to install the host machine and turn the 2 adjusters with your hand until they closely contact the floor.

6) Install the Noise Reduction Cover. • 3 Protrusions

NOTE: If you failed to turn the adjusters with your hand, use a screwdriver so that they can be turned by your hand.

• 2 Screws (RS tightening Black; M4 x 12)

x2 2) Use a screwdriver to turn the adjusters in the direction of the arrow to make them secured. NOTE: Securing of the adjuster is not earthquake resistant.

Protrusion F-9-117

F-9-118

9

Installation > Installation > Securing the Host Machine

9-41

9

Installation > Installation > Preparation for the Main Power Connection

Other Installation Work

9-42

Preparation for the Main Power Connection

1) Open the cap of the Control Panel Right Cover, and store the Touch Pen. (Flat Control

1) Insert the power plug into the outlet.

Panel Model) NOTE: For the Upright Control Panel Model, the Touch Pen is stored in the lower right of the Upright Control Panel.

2) Check that the Leakage Breakers are turned ON.

2) Remove the release paper from the back side of the Service Book Holder, and affix the holder on the Base Plate of the host machine.

Leakage Breaker

F-9-120

3) Turn ON the Environment Heater Switch and the Cassette Heater Switch in accordance with the installation environment. Set the environment switches in accordance with the installation environment. In the case of high humidity environment, turn ON the Environment Switch. (The Drum Heater is turned ON regardless of the main switch status.) F-9-119

Environment Heater Switch

Cassette Heater Switch F-9-121

9

Installation > Installation > Preparation for the Main Power Connection

9-42

9

Installation > Installation > Settings at Installation

Turning ON the Main Power

9-43

8) Repeat the procedure from step 5) to 7) to install the Toner Containers in other colors as well.

NOTE: If the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover is installed, be sure to refer to "Operation Check" in the Installation Procedure for the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover.

CAUTION: Be sure to use the correct color to install. 9) Close the Front Upper Cover. 10)

1) Remove the Protection Sheet on the Control Panel.

After supplying the toner, execute the following Service Mode (level 1).

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > SPLY-H-4

2) Open the Switch Cover and turn ON the main power. 3) When the message appears to prompt a shutdown, turn OFF the main power switch. NOTE: Turning OFF the Main Power 1) Open the Switch Cover and turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Check that the control panel display and the main power lamp are OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

Settings at Installation CAUTION: Be sure to execute ITB neutral position adjustment.

1) Execute the ITB neutral position adjustment.

Installation of the Toner Container

Service Mode (level 1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INIT-ITB 2) Execute the color displacement correction.

Follow the instruction on the UI to install the Toner Container.

[Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment /Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto Correct Color Mismatch] > [Start]

1) Confirm the instruction for toner replacement and press the button.

3) Set the value of the following Service Mode (level 2) to "1". (only for the models in which

2) Open the Front Upper Cover. 3) Select all colors from the “Replacement Required List” and press “Remove Toner Container” button.

the Upright Control Panel is equipped as standard) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > STND-PNL NOTE: By executing the above service mode, the animation of machine on the Control Panel screen can be switched from Flat Control Panel to Upright Control Panel.

NOTE: The Toner Container is not installed when installing the Host Machine. 4) The Replacement Cover is automatically open. NOTE: Although a message telling “Remove Toner Container” is displayed on the UI, ignore the message because the Toner Container is not installed when installing the Host Machine. 5) Hold the Toner Container as shown in the figure and shake it for about 10 times. 6) Turn the safety cap of the Toner Container to remove. 7) Set a new Toner Container and close the Replacement Cover.

9

Installation > Installation > Settings at Installation

9-43

9

Installation > Installation > Setting the Deck

Setting the Deck

9-44

5) Put the Size Plate L for the paper size in the Right Deck and the Left Deck through the opening at the handle area.

1) Open the Front Cover. 2) Push the Deck Release Button to pull out the Left and the Right Decks to the front. 3) Remove the 3 screws fixing the Trailing Edge Guide Plate, Left Guide Plate, and Right Guide Plate in place, and fix each of the guide plates at user’s desired size. NOTE: Setting at the time of shipment: A4 size Left Guide Plate

x3 Trail Edge Guide Plate

Screw F-9-123

Right Guide Plate

6) Close the Front Cover. 7) Push the Left/Right Deck in. 8) When the size is switched, register paper size for the Front Deck in Service Mode (level 1). Right Deck : COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C1 Left Deck : COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C2 F-9-122

A4 = 0 B5 = 1 LTR = 2 9) Exit from the Service Mode.

4) Put the specified size of papers in the Left/Right Deck.

9

Installation > Installation > Setting the Deck

9-44

9

Installation > Installation > Setting the Paper Cassette

Setting the Paper Cassette

9-45

5) Cut the 2 points of the Size Plate R with nippers. Cut

1) Push the Cassette Release Button to pull out the Cassette to the front.

2) Hold the Lever of the Side Guide Plate to set the Side Guide Plate to the specified size. 3) Hold the Lever of the Trail Edge Guide Plate to set the Trail Edge Guide Plate to the specified size. Side Guide Plate

F-9-126

6) Following the paper size, set the Size Plate R (unused size plates should be put together).

Trail Edge Guide Plate Lever Trail Edge Guide Plate

Side Guide Plate Lever Side Guide Plate

F-9-124

4) Set paper and open the cover at the insertion area of the Size Plate.

Paper

F-9-127

7) Close the cover at the insertion area of the Size Plate and push in the Cassette. 8) Set another cassette as well. Cover

NOTE: Paper size is set to be automatically recognized.

F-9-125

9

Installation > Installation > Setting the Paper Cassette

9-45

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)

Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-46

Image Position Adjustment

■■In the Case of the Machine with the Reader

■■Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)

Execute the Auto Gradation Adjustment to the following 3 modes: [Plain], [Heavy 1/Heavy 2], and [Heavy 3/Heavy 4].

CAUTION:

However, when using 2 or more types of paper, it is necessary to execute all the modes

When performing adjustment of cassettes/decks, do not perform adjustment in service mode.

corresponding to the types of paper. CAUTION: When using paper type to which Auto Gradation Adjustment is not executed, image failure or damage on the host machine may occur.

●● Adjustment of Cassette/Deck Print from each cassette/deck, and check that the left edge margin of the image (L1) is within 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm.

●● In the Case of Plain

If it is not within the range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below.

1) Clean the Copyboard Glass surface of the host machine. Feeding direction of paper

2) Set A3, A4, 11x17, or LTR size papers in a cassette. (Refer to the cassette settings.) 3) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto

image

L1

Adjust Gradation] > [Plain] > [Full Adjustment]. 4) Select the source of paper for test print, and press [OK]. 5) From this point on, follow the instruction on UI.

●● In the Case of Heavy 1/Heavy 2

F-9-128

< In the Case of Right Deck >

1) Clean the Copyboard Glass surface of the host machine. 2) Set heavy papers in a cassette, and select the heavy paper Settings screen. 3) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto Adjust Gradation] > [Heavy 1/Heavy 2] > [Full Adjustment].

1) Remove the Handle Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Protrusion

4) Select the source of paper for test print, and press [OK]. 5) From this point on, follow the instruction on UI.

Claw

●● In the Case of Heavy 3/Heavy 4 1) Set heavy papers in a Multi Tray , and select the heavy paper Settings screen. 2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto Adjust Gradation] > [Heavy 3/Heavy 4] > [Full Adjustment]. 3) Select the source of paper for test print, and press [OK]. 4) From this point on, follow the instruction on UI.

Protrusion

■■In the Case of the Machine without the Reader

F-9-129

Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto Adjust Gradation], and execute the item.

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)

9-46

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)

9-47

NOTE: If you are concerned with alignment of the Right Deck Cover, adjust the position of the Right Deck Cover as necessary.

2) Raise the handle, and check the position of the scale marked above the screws. 3) Loosen the 2 screws of the Hook Support Plate.

8) Loosen the 4 screws and adjust the position of the Right Deck Cover by referring to the

Scale

scale. 9) Tighten the 4 screws that were loosened. Screw

Screw

Screw

F-9-130

4) According to the scale in which the position was checked in step 2, adjust the position of

Screw

the Hook Support Plate. F-9-132

• If the left edge margin is large, move the Hook Support Plate to the rear. • If the left edge margin is small, move the Hook Support Plate to the front. Hook Support Plate

F-9-131

5) Tighten the 2 screws loosened in step 3. 6) Print from the Right Deck, and check that the left edge margin is within 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm. 7) Install the Handle Cover.

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)

9-47

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)

9-48

< In the Case of Left Deck > 2) Remove the Handle Cover.

NOTE: Only when the Buffer Path Unit is installed, perform steps 1-1) and 1-2).

• 1 Claw • 1 Protrusion Claw

1-1) Free the Buffer Cable from the Wire Saddle.

Buffer Cable Protrusion F-9-135

3) Raise the handle, and check the position of the scale marked above the screw. Wire Saddle

F-9-133

4) Loosen the 2 screws of the Hook Support Plate.

Scale

1-2) Remove the Buffer Left Lower Cover. • 4 Screws • 2 Protrusions Protrusion Screw

x4

F-9-136

F-9-134

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)

9-48

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)

9-49

< In the Case of Cassette 3, 4 > 5) According to the scale in which the position was checked in step 3, adjust the position of the Hook Support Plate.

1) Pull out the Cassette.

• If the left edge margin is large, move the Hook Support Plate to the rear.

2) Check the position by the scale of the Cassette Button Link Unit.

• If the left edge margin is small, move the Hook Support Plate to the front. Hook Support Plate

Cassette Button Link Unit

Scale

F-9-137

6) Tighten the 2 screws loosened in step 4.

F-9-139

7) Print from the Left Deck, and check that the left edge margin is within 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm. 8) Install the Handle Cover. NOTE: If you are concerned with alignment of the Left Deck Cover, adjust the position of the Left Deck Cover as necessary.

3) Loosen the 4 screws of the Cassette Button Link Unit.

Cassette Button Link Unit

9) Loosen the 4 screws and adjust the position of the Left Deck Cover by referring to the scale. 10)

Tighten the 4 screws that were loosened. Screw Screw

Cassette Button Link Unit F-9-140

Screw

F-9-138

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)

9-49

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)

4) According to the scale in which the position was checked in step 2, adjust the position of the Cassette Button Link Unit. • If the left edge margin is large, move the Cassette Button Link Unit to the front. • If the left edge margin is small, move the Cassette Button Link Unit to the rear.

9-50

NOTE: If you are concerned with alignment of the Cassette Cover, adjust the right and left sides of the cover as necessary.

7) Loosen the 4 screws and adjust the position of the Cassette Cover by referring to the scale. 8) When moving the Cassette Button Link Unit, adjust the left side of the Cassette Cover by shifting it with the same shifting amount of the unit.

Cassette Button Link Unit

9) Tighten the 4 screws that were loosened. Scale

Cassette Cover

Cassette Cover

Scale

Scale

F-9-141

5) Tighten the 4 screws loosened in step 3. 6) Print from the Cassette 3 and 4, and check that the left edge margin of the picked up paper is within 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm.

Cassette Cover F-9-142

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)

9-50

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)

■■Adjusting margin of Multi-purpose Pickup Tray

9-51

■■Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)

Print from the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray, and check that the left edge margin of the image (L1) is within 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm. If it is not within the range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below. Feeding direction of paper

NOTE: By executing the margin adjustment (2nd side) for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is applied to all source of paper.

Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the left edge margin (L1) is within

image

2.5 +/- 2.0 mm.

L1

If it is not within the range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below. Feeding direction of paper image

L1

F-9-143

1) Open the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray. 2) Loosen the screw and adjust the position of the Slide Guide by referring to the scale.

F-9-145

Scale

1) Change the left edge margin adjustment value for the 2nd side in service mode (level 1). COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFE As the value is incremented by "1", the left edge margin is increased by 0.1 mm. 2) Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the left edge margin is within 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm. 3) Write the new adjustment value in the service label. ADJ-REFE 4) Get out from service mode. Slide Guide F-9-144

3) Tighten the screw loosened in step 2. 4) Print from the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray, and check that the left edge margin of the image is within 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm.

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)

9-51

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)

■■Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)

9-52

■■Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)

NOTE: By executing the leading edge margin adjustment for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is applied to all source of paper.

NOTE: By executing the leading edge margin adjustment for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is applied to all source of paper.

Execute printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin (L1) is within 4.0

Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin (L1) on

+1.5/-1.0 mm.

the 2nd side is within 4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm.

If it is not within the range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below.

If it is not within the range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below.

L1

L1

Feeding direction of paper

Feeding direction of paper image

image

F-9-146

F-9-147

1) Change the leading edge margin adjustment value in service mode (level 1). COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST

1) Change the leading edge margin adjustment value for the 2nd side in service mode (level 1). COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-DUP1

As the value is incremented by "1", the leading edge margin is decreased by 0.1 mm. 2) Print from the Cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin is within 4.0 + 1.5/ -1.0 mm.

As the value is incremented by "1", the leading edge margin is decreased by 0.1 mm. 2) Perform 2-sided printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin is within 4.0 + 1.5/ -1.0 mm.

3) Write the new adjustment value in the service label.

3) Write the new adjustment value in the service label.

REGIST

REG-DUP1

4) Get out from service mode.

4) Get out from service mode.

9

Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)

9-52

9

Installation > Installation > Checking the Network Connection > Checking by the Remote Host Address

Checking the Network Connection

9-53

■■Operation Procedure Using Ping

■■Overview

CAUTION:

If the user’s network environment is TCP/IP, use the Ping function to check that the network setting is properly performed. If the user’s network environment is IPX/SPX or Apple Talk, there is no need to check the network environment.

To execute Ping command with the Windows Vista-installed PC, set OFF the firewall, or execute Ping command from the Windows Vista-installed PC to the Host Machine. 1) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP setting] > [IPv4 setting] > [PING command] 2) Enter the IP address with the numeric keypad on the Control Panel and press “Execute”

■■Checking the Network Connection

key. “Response from the host” is displayed if Ping command is succeeded while “no response from the host” is displayed if failed.

CAUTION: Be sure to use the network cable with Category 5e or higher. In addition, a sealed type (STP cable) is recommended. Using the non-shield type can affect the peripheral electrical equipment through the network cable.

■■Checking by the Remote Host Address Using the remote host address to execute Ping can check whether connection to the network is enabled or not. Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal connected/running on TCP/IP network

1) Turn OFF the main power switch

environment that connects to this equipment.

2) Connect the network cable to the host machine and turn ON the main power switch.

1) Inform the system administrator about checking of the network connection using Ping.

3) Inform the system administrator at the installation site that installation of the host machine

2) Confirm the remote host address with the system administrator.

is complete, and then, ask for the network setting.

3) Enter the remote host address to Ping.

NOTE: Network setting cannot be executed unless logging in as an administrator. Factory default password is as follows.

• The network is properly connected if the message say “Response from the host”. • The network is not properly connected if the message say “No response from the host”, therefore, execute the following troubleshooting.

• System administration division ID: 7654321 • System administration password: 7654321

CAUTION: To perform the network setting, the following Additional Functions items must be set “ON”. • [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [Change network settings/ check connection] • [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] > [Use IPv4] 4) Turn OFF and then ON the main power.

9

Installation > Installation > Checking the Network Connection > Checking by the Remote Host Address

9-53

9

Installation > Installation > Network Troubleshooting > Checking Network Function on the Main Controller

Network Troubleshooting

9-54

■■Checking Network Function on the Main Controller Perform checking by the loopback address.

■■Checking Connection of the Network Cable To check whether the network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet Port.

1) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address, “127.0.0.1” with the numeric keypad and enter Execute key.

■■Operation Procedure Using Ping

• The network function of the Main Controller is working properly if the message say

1) Ask the network administrator at the user’s site to write down the IP address of the PC that is connected to the network. 2) [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address of the PC with the numeric keypad and press

“Response from the host”. • If the message say “No response from the host”, the network function of the Main Controller is faulty. 2) Replace with a Main Controller that works properly, and then check connection.

Execute key. • The network is properly connected if the message say “Response from the host”. • If the message say “No response from the host”, check the following. NOTE: The IP address of the PC can be checked by the following procedure: Select the following on a Windows PC: Start > Program > Accessory > Command Prompt; and enter “ipconfig” and press Enter key to display information of the IP address.

■■Checking the Network Setting of the Host Machine Check if the IP address specified in the host machine is correct. 1) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] > [IP address setting]; and write down the address in the IP address field. 2) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address. • The IP address specified in the host machine is correct if the message say “Response from the host”. • If the message say “No response from the host”, check the following. MEMO: When setting the address by manually input, set the Subnet Mask by following the instruction of the administrator.

9

Installation > Installation > Network Troubleshooting > Checking Network Function on the Main Controller

9-54

9

Installation > When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below. > When moving the machine

9-55

When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below.

5) Open the DADF, and remove the Left Upper Small Cover. • 1 Protrusion • 1 Claw

NOTE: If packing materials such as fixing material which were removed on the installation are not available, it is recommended to use cushioning materials that matches to them.

When moving the machine to another floor If you need to relocate the machine (move to another floor, etc) after installation, be sure to perform the following work in advance.

1) Move the Scanner Unit to the position where it is going to be secured.

Protrusion

• Service Mode (Level 2) > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > RD-SHPOS

2) With all the covers of the host machine closed, execute the service mode for putting the Fixing Roller into a semi-engaged state. • Service Mode (Level 2) > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > FX-HPRS CAUTION:

Claw F-9-148

6) Secure the Scanner Unit with the Scanner Fixation Tool that have been kept in a safe place since image Reader Unit installation. NOTE: Be sure to push it in until it clicks.

After execution of this service mode, do not open the covers until the Main Power Switch is turned OFF.

3) Turn OFF the main power switch. 4) Check that the control panel display and the main power lamp are OFF, and then

disconnect the power plug.

F-9-149

9

9-55

Installation > When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below. > When moving the machine

9

Installation > When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below. > When moving the machine

9-56

7) Install the Packing Materials that were removed during installation.

11)

12)

Close the Front Cover.

Lower lifters inside the Pickup Decks and cassettes. 12-1) Pull out all Pickup Decks and cassettes. 12-1) Confirm that lifters are lowered and close all Pickup Decks and cassettes.

CAUTION: • Make sure to turn the Main Power OFF and then perform these procedures. If the Main Power is ON, lifters may rise again after closing Pickup Decks and cassettes. • If the machine is moved with lifters raised, the Lifter Drive Gear may be damaged due to the shaking.

F-9-150

8) Open the Front Cover.

13)

Lift the host machine off the floor by turning the 2 adjusters with a screwdriver.

14)

When moving the machine, grasp the Handles and move the host machine.

NOTE: When moving the machine, be careful not to bump into the arm of the Upright Control Panel.

9) Remove the ITB Inner Cover. • 1 Screw • 2 Protrusions 10)

Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to release the

pressure. ITB Pressure Release Lever

ITB Pressure Release Lever

15)

At reinstallation after moving the machine, remove the installed packaging material.

16)

Remove the Scanner Fixation Tool, and install the Left Upper Small Cover.

17)

Put the ITB Pressure Release Lever back to the original position to apply pressure

and install the ITB Inner Cover. (1 Screw) ITB Inner Cover

18)

After turning ON the power, execute ITB neutral position adjustment.

• Service Mode (Level1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INIT-ITB 19)

The paper feed direction may tilt because of the change in floor surface condition;

thus, be sure to execute the image position adjustment. Refer to the Service Manual > Installation > Image Position Adjustment

Protrusion

F-9-151

9

9-56

Installation > When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below. > When moving the machine

9

Installation > When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below. > When moving the machine

9-57

When moving the machine by truck If you need to relocate the machine after installation by truck or other means of transportation, be sure to perform the following work in advance.

5) Secure the Scanner Unit with the Scanner Fixation Tool that have been kept in a safe place since image Reader Unit installation. NOTE: Be sure to push it in until it clicks.

1) Move the Scanner Unit to the position where it is going to be secured. • Service Mode (Level 2) > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > RD-SHPOS

2) Turn OFF the main power switch. 3) Check that the control panel display and the main power lamp are OFF, and then

disconnect the power plug.

4) Open the DADF, and remove the Left Upper Small Cover. • 1 Protrusion • 1 Claw F-9-153

6) Install the Packing Materials that were removed during installation.

Protrusion

Claw F-9-152

F-9-154

9

9-57

Installation > When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below. > When moving the machine

9

Installation > When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below. > When moving the machine

9-58

CAUTION:

7) Open the Front Cover.

If this equipment will be moved in simplified packaging using a truck, it is desirable to perform the following steps 10 to 20. It is recommended to attach the Fixation Members that were removed during installation.

8) Remove the ITB Inner Cover. • 1 Screw • 2 Protrusions 9) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to release the pressure. ITB Pressure Release Lever

ITB Pressure Release Lever

ITB Inner Cover

10)

Push the 2 Lock Springs of the Rails (both sides) to release the lock and further pull

out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops. CAUTION: Do not release the Lock Springs at the rear side of the Rails (both sides); otherwise the Frame of the Fixing Feed Unit can be off.

Protrusion F-9-155

Lock Spring

Lock Spring F-9-156

9

9-58

Installation > When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below. > When moving the machine

9 11)

Installation > When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below. > When moving the machine

9-59

Open the Inner Delivery Unit.

13)

Install the 6 Fixing Members that were removed during installation.

Fixation Member

Fixation Member

F-9-157

12)

F-9-159

Remove the Fixing Upper Cover.

14)

Install the Stepped Screw (M3x18.5) that was removed during installation.

• 1 Stepped Screw • 1 Screw (W Sems) W Sems

x2

Stepped Screw

F-9-160

F-9-158

9

9-59

Installation > When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below. > When moving the machine

9 15)

Hold the handle to pull out the ITB Unit.

16)

Install the Fixing Members that were removed during installation.

Installation > When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below. > When moving the machine

9-60

22)

Lower lifters inside the Pickup Decks and cassettes. 22-1) Pull out all Pickup Decks and cassettes. 22-1) Confirm that lifters are lowered and close all Pickup Decks and cassettes.

CAUTION: • Make sure to turn the Main Power OFF and then perform these procedures. If the Main Power is ON, lifters may rise again after closing Pickup Decks and cassettes. • If the machine is moved with lifters raised, the Lifter Drive Gear may be damaged due to the shaking.

Close the ITB Unit

18)

Install the Fixing Upper Cover. (2 Screws)

19)

Close the Inner Delivery Unit.

When moving the machine, grasp the Handles and move the host machine.

• When moving the machine, be careful not to bump into the arm of the Upright Control Panel. • The Upright Control Panel should be removed and packed when being transported.

NOTE: If any tag is attached to the Fixation Member, move it to outside the cover and secure by tape. 20)

Lift the host machine off the floor by turning the 2 adjusters with a screwdriver.

24)

CAUTION:

F-9-161

17)

23)

Close the Fixing Feed Unit

• When moving by a truck, it is recommended to tape and secure all movable locations (all doors and Upright Control Panel Arm).

25)

At reinstallation after moving the machine, remove the installed Fixing Members and

Stepped Screw. 21)

Close the Front Cover.

26)

Remove the Scanner Fixation Tool, and install the Left Upper Small Cover.

27)

Put the ITB Pressure Release Lever back to the original position to apply pressure

and install the ITB Inner Cover. (1 Screw)

28)

After turning ON the power, execute ITB neutral position adjustment.

• Service Mode (Level1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INIT-ITB 29)

The paper feed direction may tilt because of the change in floor surface condition;

thus, be sure to execute the image position adjustment. Refer to the Service Manual > Installation > Image Position Adjustment

9

9-60

Installation > When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below. > When moving the machine

9

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing

Printer Cover-B1

9-61

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

Checking the Contents

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off, then disconnect the power plug.

NOTE: For parts not included in the package of this equipment, use parts included in the package of the host machine. [1] Printer Cover X 1

[2] Reader Fixing Plate L X1

[3] Reader Fixing Plate R X1

[4] Reader Mount X 1

[5] Screw (P Tightening; M4x10) X8

[6] Screw (RS Tightening; M4x8) X2

Installation Outline Drawing

F-9-163

[7] Screw (TP; M4x8) X 1

F-9-162

9

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing

9-61

9 Installation Procedure

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Procedure

9-62

2) Free the Control Panel Cable and the Power Supply Cable. (only for the models with the Flat Control Panel)

1) Remove the Reader Positioning Shaft.

• 3 Wire Saddles

• 1 screw (the removed screw is used in step 6.)

NOTE: Allow flexibility with the cable so that the Printer Cover can be easily installed.

Control Panel Cable

x3 Power Supply Cable

Wire Saddle

F-9-164

F-9-165

9

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Procedure

9-62

9

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Procedure

3) Cut the [A] part of the Printer Cover with nippers using the edge [B] as a reference.

9-63

4) Place the Printer Cover, and install the Reader Fixation Plate R and the Rear Fixation Plate L to the installation position at the rear side.

CAUTION:

• 2 Bosses each

Be sure to check that there is no burr.

• 2 Screws (P tightening; M4x10) each • 1 Screw (RS tightening; M4x8) each CAUTION: [B]

• When placing the Printer Cover, be careful not to trap cables at rear side of the host machine. • Be sure not to get the cables at the right side of the host machine caught. (only for the models with the Flat Control Panel)

[A]

Boss F-9-166

Screw (RS tightening)

Screw (P tightening)

x6

Reader Fixing Plate L

Reader Fixing Plate R F-9-167

9

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Procedure

9-63

9

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Procedure

5) Install the Reader Fixation Plate R (included with the host machine) and the Reader Fixation Plate L (included with the host machine) to the installation position at the front side. • 2 Bosses each

9-64

6) Install the Reader Positioning Shaft (removed in step 1) and the Reader Mount. • 1 screw (the screw removed in step 1) • 1 screw (TP; M4x8)

• 2 Screws (P tightening; M4x10) each CAUTION:

• 1 Screw (RS tightening;: M4x8) each (included with the host machine)

Install the cables on rear side of the host machine while paying attention not to trap them.

CAUTION: Be careful not to get the cables at the right side of the host machine caught. (only for the models with the Flat Control Panel)

NOTE: To use the Reader Positioning Shaft, install it to the position where it is removed in step 1 when installing the Reader Unit.

Boss

x2

Screw (RS tightening)

Screw (P tightening) Reader Mount

x6

Reader Positioning Shaft

F-9-169

7) Secure the cables (removed in step 2) with the 3 wire saddles again. (only for the models with the Flat Control Panel.)

Reader Fixing Plate L

Reader Fixing Plate R F-9-168

9

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Procedure

9-64

9

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Procedure

9-65

8) Install the Left Upper Cover (included with the host machine).

10)

• 4 Protrusions

• 1 Protrusion (for the models with the Upright Control Panel)

Install Right Rear Cover (included with the host machine).

• 3 Screws (RS tightening; M4x8) (included with the host machine)

• 2 Protrusions (for the models with the Flat Control Panel) • 1 Screw (RS tightening; M4x8) (included with the host machine)

Protrusion

Upright Control Panel Model

Protrusion

x3

F-9-170

9) Cut [A] part of Right Rear Cover (included with the host machine) with nippers.

Flat Control Panel Model

(only for the models with the Upright Control Panel.) [A]

Protrusion

Protrusion F-9-172 F-9-171

11)

9

Open the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Procedure

9-65

9 12)

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Procedure

Install Right Upper Cover 1 (included with the host machine).

15)

• 4 Protrusions

9-66

Pull the Main Controller Right Cover Unit in the direction of the arrow to install the

Box Upper Cover (included with the host machine).

• 2 Screws (RS tightening; M4x8) (included with the host machine)

• 1 Protrusion

• 1 Rubber Cap (included with the host machine)

• 2 Screws (TP; M4x8) (included with the host machine)

Protrusion

NOTE: Be sure to put the projection and the rib of the Box Upper Cover inside the Main Controller Right Cover Unit.

x2

Protrusion

Rib F-9-173

Main Controller Right Cover Unit

13)

Close the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.

14)

Remove the screw of the Main Controller Right Cover Unit.

x2

F-9-175

16)

Install the screw, which has been removed in step 14.

F-9-174

9

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Procedure

9-66

9 17)

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Operation Check

9-67

Operation Check

Install the Box Left Cover.

• 2 Screws (TP; M4x8) (included with the host machine)

1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet.

CAUTION:

2) Turn ON the main power switch.

When installing the Box Left Cover, be careful not to trap the cables.

3) A message is displayed prompting to check that the Reader Unit Cable is connected properly. 4) Select "0" for the following service mode (level 1). COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/SCNR 5) Get out from service mode. 6) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.

x2

NOTE: When installing the host machine and this equipment at the same time, be sure to perform the procedure from "Installing the Toner Container" in the installation chapter in the Service Manual.

F-9-176

NOTE: After completing step 17, execute from "Installation" procedure in the Service Manual.

9

Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Operation Check

9-67

9

Installation > Copy Tray-P1 > Installation procedure

Copy Tray-P1

9-68

Installation Outline Drawing

Checking the Contents [1] Fan Unit X 1

[2] Fan Cover X 1

[3] Copy Tray X 1

[4] Screw (RS Tightening ; M3X8.5) X3 F-9-178

Installation procedure F-9-177

< CD/Guides >

1) Remove the (Small) Reverse Cover(The removed (Small) Reverse Cover is not used). • 2 Claws

• FCC/IC Sheet

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

x2

Claw

Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off, then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-179

9

Installation > Copy Tray-P1 > Installation procedure

9-68

9

Installation > Copy Tray-P1 > Installation procedure

2) Free the Harness from the Wire Saddle so that the Connector is free.

9-69

4) Connect the Connector and secure the Harness with the Wire Saddle.

Connector Wire Saddle

Wire Saddle

Connector

F-9-180

F-9-182

3) Install the Fan Unit.

5) Install the Fan Cover.

• 2 Bosses

• 1 Claw

• 2 Screws (RS tightening; M3 x 8.5)

• 1 Screw (RS tightening; M3 x 8.5) Claw

x2

Bosse

F-9-183

F-9-181

9

Installation > Copy Tray-P1 > Installation procedure

9-69

9

Installation > Copy Tray-P1 > Setting after installation

9-70

6) Fit the 3 projections into the holes of the Host Machine to install the Copy Tray. Projection

F-9-184

7) Insert the power plug to the outlet. 8) Turn ON the main power switch.

Setting after installation 1) Enter Service Mode (level 1). 2) Select: [COPIER] > [OPTION] > [ACC] > [OUT-TRAY] and register ”1”. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 4) Select: [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Common] > [Paper Output Settings] and check that [Delivery Tray Settings] menu is added. 5) Select either tray B or C to copy, and perform test copy. 6) Check that the paper is output in the Copy Tray. 7) Reset the tray in accordance with the user’s request.

9

Installation > Copy Tray-P1 > Setting after installation

9-70

9

Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Installation Procedure

Utility Tray-A2

9-71

Installation Outline Drawing

Checking the Contents [1] Utility Tray Unit X 1

[2] Wire Saddle X 5

[3] Screw (TP; M4x8 ) X 10

Use when insatalling the USB Keyboard

[4] Keyborad Table Plate X1

[5] Screw (TP ; M4x14) X 4

[6] Screw (TP ; M4x10) X 2

Use 3 of them

F-9-186

Installation Procedure 1) Remove the packing tape. F-9-185

2) Loosen the 2 screws, and move the Utility Tray Mounting Plate in the direction of the arrow until it stops.

Utillity Tray Mounting Plate F-9-187

9

Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Installation Procedure

9-71

9

Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Installation Procedure

3) While pulling the [A] part of the Utility Tray, remove the Utility Tray Mounting Plate.

9-72

5) Install the Utility Tray Mounting Plate removed in step 2). • 3 Screws (TP; M4 x 14)

CAUTION: Be sure not to pull the [A] part of the Utility Tray too much. [A]

Pull

x3 F-9-188

4) Remove the 3 rubber caps and 1 screw from the Right Upper Cover 1.

F-9-190

6) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.

F-9-189

9

Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Installation Procedure

9-72

9

Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > When installing the USB Keyboard

9-73

When installing the USB Keyboard

7) Install the Utility Tray. • 2 Screws (Use the screws loosened in step 2).

1) Remove the 2 s and install the 5 wire saddles.

• 2 Screws (tighten) (TP; M4 x 10)

Cap Cover

x2 Hook Wire Saddle

F-9-192 F-9-191

8) Close the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.

9

Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > When installing the USB Keyboard

9-73

9

Installation > Key Switch Unit-B1 > Installation Procedure

Key Switch Unit-B1

Installation Procedure

Checking the Contents [1] Key

Switch Unit X 1

9-74

1) Push [A] area to open the HDD Cover. [2] Management Key X 1set

[A] F-9-193

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

F-9-195

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off, then disconnect the power plug.

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. • 2 Screws

Installation Outline Drawing

x2

F-9-196

F-9-194

9

Installation > Key Switch Unit-B1 > Installation Procedure

9-74

9 3) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate is not used.)

Installation > Key Switch Unit-B1 > Installation Procedure

9-75

5) Connect the connector of the Key Switch Unit.

• 2 Screws (Rmoved screws is step 4) to used).

x2

Connector F-9-199

F-9-197

6) Cut the face cover area of the Main Controller Right Cover Unit with nippers.

4) Install the Kew Switch Unit. (Use the screw removed in step 3).)

x2

F-9-200 F-9-198

7) Install the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. 8) Insert the power plug to the outlet. 9) Turn ON the main power switch.

9

Installation > Key Switch Unit-B1 > Installation Procedure

9-75

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2

Copy Card Reader-F1

9-76

■■Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2

Points to Note Before Installation

[1] Card Reader Mounting Plate x 1

[2] Card Reader Relay Unit x 1

[3] Connector Cover1 x 1

[4] Connector Cover2 X 1

[5] Card Reader External Relay Harness X 1

[6] Connector Case X 2

[7] Cord Guide X 1

[8] PCB Spacer X 1

[9] Screw (TP; M4x12) X 1

[10] Screw (RS tight; M4x8) X 1

[12] Screw (Bindeing; M4x20) X 1

[13] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 1

The Copy Card Reader Attachment is required for the installation of the equipment.

Checking the Contents ■■Copy Card Reader-F1 [1] Card Reader x 1

[2] Screw (RS tight; M4X10) X 1

[3] Toothed washer x 1

F-9-201

[2] : Not used with the Upright Control Panel.

[11] Screw (Bindeing; M3x6) X 1

F-9-202

[1], [9], [10] : Not used with the Flat Control Panel.

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2

9-76

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-77

Installation Procedure

Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.

CAUTION:

2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned

• To install this equipment, refer to the “Table of options combination”

off, then disconnect the power plug.

• After Card Reader is installed, get in Service Mode(Level 1) with this equipment: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD; and then enter the card number to use. If the card number fails to be entered, the card will not be recognized even if the card is inserted.

Installation Outline Drawing

1) Push the [A] part, and open the HDD Cover.

[A]

F-9-203

F-9-204

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-77

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit.

9-78

4) Remove 2 Screws. (Removed screws will be reused at, step 10).)

• 2 Screws (Removed screws will be reused at step 16).)

x2

x2

F-9-207 F-9-205

5) Hold the handle, and remove the Main Controller 1. 3) Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable.

Handle

x2 USB Cable Control Panel Cable

F-9-208

F-9-206

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-78

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

CAUTION:

9-79

7) Remove 1 screw, and install the PCB Spacer. (Never reuse the removed screw.)

Place the removed Main Controller 1 so that the protruding fan. Reason: Because the fan is protruded, it might be damaged when placing it diagonally.

PCB Spacer F-9-209

6) Remove the Blindfold Cover. (Never reuse the removed Blindfold Cover.) • 2 Screws (Removed screws will be reused at step 8).) F-9-211

Face Cover

x2

F-9-210

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-79

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-80

8) Install the Card Reader Relay Unit.

10) Press 2 Lock Levers down to push the Main Controller 1 and secure.

• 2 Screws (Install the screws, which were removed at step 6) in order of 1.)

• 2 Screws (Removed screws at step 4): Install in order of bottom and top.)

• 1 Screw (Binding; M3x6) CAUTION:

• 1 Connector

Keep the order of steps 1 thru 4 shown in the figure since there is the case that a connector of the Main Controller 1 is not connected.

Card Reader Relay Unit

x3 x2

Lock Lever F-9-212

9) Release 2 Lock Levers in the arrow direction, and push the Main Controller 1 all the way in F-9-214

evenly with both hands. 11) Install the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable.

CAUTION:

12) Remove 1 Screw. (Removed screw will be used at step 15).)

Install the Main Controller 1 without pinching cables.

Lock Lever

F-9-213

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-80

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

13) Install the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness.

9-81

15) Install the Connector Cover. • 1 Screw (reuse the screw removed at step 12).)

F-9-215 F-9-217

14) Install the Connector Cover into the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness. 16) Put the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness into the Main Controller Right Cover CAUTION:

Unit, and install.

Install it so that the Tie-wrap of the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness can be inside of the Connector Cover.

• 2 Screws (reuse the screws removed at step 2).)

x2 Main Controller Right Cover Unit Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness

Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness

Connector Cover

F-9-218 F-9-216

9

17) Close the HDD Cover.

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-81

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

18) Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit, and change the position of the cable.

9-82

21) Install the Card Reader.

• 1 screw 19) Install the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit.

< In the case of the Upright Control Panel model >

• 1 Screw 21-1) Install the Card Reader Mounting Plate to the Card Reader. • 1 Toothed washer • 1 Screw (RS tightening; M4 x 8)

Lower Cover

F-9-219

20) Remove the short connector in the Card Reader. (Never reuse the removed short

F-9-221

connector.)

21-2) Install the Card Reader Unit assembled at step 21-1). • 1 Screw (TP; M4 x 12)

F-9-220

F-9-222

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-82

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

< In the case of the Multi-drawer Paper Deck installed > CAUTION: Install it without pinching the Interface Cable of the Multi-drawer Paper Deck.

9-83

NOTE: Illustrations for steps 22) and 23) use illustrations of the Upright Control Panel model but procedures are same.

22) Connect the connectors of the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness and the Card Reader Unit.

Card Reader

Card Reader Unit.

Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness

Interface Cable

F-9-223

< In the case of the Flat Control Panel Model >

F-9-225

< In the case of the Multi-drawer Paper Deck installed >

21-1) Install the Card Reader. • 1 Toothed washer

CAUTION:

• 1 Screw (RS tightening; M4 x 10)

IInstall it Like a figure the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness of the Interface Cable of the Multi-drawer Paper Deck.

Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness

Interface Cable

F-9-224

F-9-226

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-83

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

23) Install the Connector Case.

9-84

25) Remove the Cord Guide, and put on a host machine.

CAUTION: Install so that the Tie-wrap and the Loop of the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness can be inside of the Co.

Tie-wrap

Tie-wrap

F-9-229

26) Put the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness into the Cord Guide, and install the

輪

cover of the Cord Guide.

輪

< In the case of the Upright Control Panel > F-9-227

24) Remove the Cord Guide Cover. Cord Guide

HDD Cover Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness F-9-230

F-9-228

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-84

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Setting After Installation

9-85

Setting After Installation

< In the case of the Flat Control Panel >

1) Check that Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > OPTION > ACC > CR-TYPE is "0". NOTE: The number of card (number of department) can be changed if a request arises from a user. Make this setting before the step 3).

Cord Guide

• Change the setting value in Service Mode (Level2) > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CARD-RNG. • To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the main power switch. • After that, go through the procedure from step 2).

F-9-231

2) Use Service Mode to enter the minimum card number to be used by a user (1 to 2001). • Service Mode (Level 1) : COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD

CAUTION: Install carefully so that the Ferrite Core of the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness does not interfere when opening/closing the HDD Cover.

NOTE: 1000 cards from the inputted number can be used.

3) To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Ferrite Core

4) Insert the card with the registered card No. and make sure that it is in standby.

Ferrite Core

NOTE: After setting, if a request arises from a user and changing the number of card (number of department), make a following setting. In that case, the current counter information by department will be reset.

Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness

Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness F-9-232

• Execute in Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CARD. • Specify the value in Service Mode (level 2) > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CARDRNG. • To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the main power switch. • After that, go through the procedure from step 2).

27) Connect the Power Plug into the outlet. 28) Turn ON the main power switch.

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Setting After Installation

9-85

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Checking the Contents

Voice Opearion Kit-C2

9-86

[10] Cable Face Seal X 1

[11] Screw (Binding; M4x14) X 2

[13] Screw (Binding; M3x14) X 1

[14] Support Plate X 1

[12] Card Spacer X 1

Points to Note Before Installation • To use the equipment, the Color Image Reader is required. • Refer to "Table of options combination" when installing this equipment before operation.

Checking the Contents [1] Speaker Unit X 1

[4] Ring Core X 2

[2] Voice Guidance Board Unit X 1

[5] Ring Core X 1

[3] DVI Cable X 1

DO not use if included

[15] Screw (Binding; M4x6) X 1

DO not use if included

[16] Screw (Binding; M3x20) X 1

[6] Cord Guide X 7

Use 5 of them

DO not use if included

F-9-234

[7] Wire Saddle X 3

[8] Screw (Binding; M4x20) X2

[9] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

< CD/Guides > • Voice Guidance Kit User Guide • Voice Operation Kit User Guide • Voice Operation Quick Reference Guide • Voice Guidance Guide CD • Voice Operation Kit Manual CD • FCC/IC Sheet

F-9-233

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Checking the Contents

9-86

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-87

Installation Procedure

Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off, then disconnect the power plug.

NOTE: Explained is the installation method for Upright Control Panel; however, procedure is the same for Flat Control Panel.

1) Press the [A] area and open the HDD Cover.

Installation Outline Drawing

[A]

F-9-236

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit.

F-9-235

x2

F-9-237

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-87

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-88

CAUTION:

3) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable.

Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB on flat surface. Reason: Since the fan protrudes, if it is placed at a tilt, it may be damaged.

x2 USB Cable Control Panel Cable

F-9-240

F-9-238

4) Remove the 2 Screws. (Removed screw will be used in step 9).) 5) Hold the handle and remove the Main Controller PCB 1.

x2 Handle

F-9-241 F-9-239

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-88

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-89

CAUTION:

6) Remove the Voice Operation Board Support Plate from the Main Controller PCB 1.

Be careful not to make the cables stuck and install the Main Controller PCB 1.

• 2 Screws (The removed 2 screws will be used in step 7).)

x2

8) Release the 2 Lock Levers in the direction of the arrow and push Main Controller PCB 1 evenly until it stops with both hands.

Lock Lever F-9-242

7) Install the Voice Operation Board Unit to the Main Controller PCB 1. • 1 Connector • 4 Screws (2 screws removed in step 6) • 2 Screws (TP; M3x6)

F-9-244

NOTE: Check that the connector is firmly connected.

x4

Connector F-9-243

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-89

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-90

9) Tilt the 2 Lock Levers and push the Main Controller PCB 1 further to secure it.

11) Remove the Connector Cover from the Main Controller Right Cover Unit.

• 2 Screws (screw removed in step 4): install the bottom one first and the upper one.)

• Claw in 1 place • Protrusions in 2 places

CAUTION: Keep the order of steps 1 thru 4 shown in the figure since there is the case that a connector of the Main Controller 1 is not connected.

Protrusion

x2

Claw Protrusion Connector Cover

F-9-246

Lock Lever

12) Install the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. (2 screws)

F-9-245

13) Remove the 2 rubber caps from the Right Upper Cover 1.

10) Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable.

F-9-247

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-90

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-91

14) Remove the Speaker Unit (Lower) from the Speaker Unit.

16) Align the cut-off with the stay and install the Speaker Unit (upper).

• 2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 16).)

• 2 Screws (The screw removed in step 14).)

x2

Speaker Unit (Lower)

x2 Stay

F-9-248

Cut-off

15) Install the Speaker Unit (Lower).

F-9-250

• 2 Screws (Binding; M4x20) 17) Remove the cover of the 5 Cord Guides.

x2

F-9-251

F-9-249

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-91

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

18) Remove the backing paper and install the cord guides in the indicated 5 positions.

9-92

20) Connect the DVI Cable to the Voice Operation Board Unit and the Speaker Unit.

F-9-252 F-9-254

19) Attach the Ring Cores to the both ends of the DVI Cable, and remove the cap.

21) Put the DVI Cable through the Cord Guides, and attach the Cord Guide Covers.

Ring Cores

DVI Cable Cap

F-9-253

F-9-255

22) Connect the Power Plug into the outlet. 23) Turn ON the Main Power Switch.

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-92

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Operation Check

9-93

Checking After Installation 1) Make the following selection: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Use Voice Navigation], and check that [ON] is set. 2) Make the following selection; [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Voice Navigation at Startup], and check that [Select Mode at Startup] is set. 3) Check that [Tune Microphone] is displayed by making the following selection; [Settings/ Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Tune Microphone].

Operation Check < When Starting to Use > 1) Hold down the Reset Key or Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds. 2) With [Voice Navigation] on the Control Panel Screen, select one of [Manual + Vocal Mode / Vocal Mode / Manual Mode], and press the OK key. 3) When the display on the Panel Screen is framed in red, the Voice Operation Kit becomes available. NOTE: In case [Manual Mode] is selected in , nothing will happen by pressing the Voice Recognition button.

In case the Voice Operation Kit fails to operate, check the following. • Make the following selection; Service Mode(Level 1) > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION, and check that TTS-JA/TTS-EN and ASR-JA/ASR-EN are installed correctly. < When Disusing > 1) Hold down the Reset Key or Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds.

9

Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Operation Check

9-93

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

Voice Guidance Kit-F2

[10] Screw (Binding; M4x16) X 2

[11] Screw (Binding; M3x16) X 1

[13] Support Plate X 1

[14] Cable Face Seal X 1

9-94 [12] Card Spacer X 1

Points to Note Before Installation • Color Image Reader is necessary to operate this equipment. • Refer to "Table of options combination" when installing this equipment before operation.

Checking the Contents [1] Speaker Unit (Upper) X1

[2] Speaker Unit (Lower) X1

[3] Voice Guidance Board Unit X 1

F-9-257

[4] Speaker Cable X 1

[5] Cord Guide X 7

< CD/Guides >

[6] Ring Core X 2

• Voice Guidance Kit User’s Guide

Use 4 of them

• Voice Guidance User’s Guid CD • FCC/IC sheet

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. [7] Screw (Binding; M4x6) X 1

[8] Screw (Binding; M4x20) X 2

[9] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 4

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned

Use 2 of them

off, then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-256

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-94

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

Installation Outline Drawing

9-95

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit.

x2

F-9-260 F-9-258

3) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable.

Installation Procedure NOTE: Explained is the installation method for Upright Control Panel; however, procedure is the same for Flat Control Panel.

x2 USB Cable Control Panel Cable

1) Push [A] area to open the HDD Cover.

F-9-261

[A]

F-9-259

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-95

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

4) Remove the 2 screws (Removed screws will be reused at, step 12).)

9-96

5) Hold the handle and remove the Main Controller PCB 1.

x2

Handle

F-9-264

6) Remove the Voice Operation Board Support Plate from Main Controller PCB 1.

F-9-262

• 2 Screws (the removed screws are used in step 7).)

CAUTION: Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB on flat surface.

x2

Reason: Since the fan protrudes, if it is placed at a tilt, it may be damaged.

F-9-265 .

F-9-263

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-96

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-97

7) Install the Voice Guidance Board. • 1 Connector • 4 Screws (the 2 screws removed in step 6) and the 2 screws (TP; M3x6) included in the package.) Lock Lever

NOTE: Check that the connector is in contact with the base.

x4 F-9-267

9) Press 2 Lock Levers down to push the Main Controller 1 and secure. • 2 Screws (Removed screws at step 4): Install in order of bottom and top.) CAUTION: Keep the order of steps 1 thru 4 shown in the figure since there is the case that a connector of the Main Controller 1 is not connected.

Connector F-9-266

CAUTION: Be careful not to make the cables stuck and install the Main Controller PCB 1.

x2

8) Release 2 Lock Levers in the arrow direction, and push the Main Controller 1 all the way in evenly with both hands.

Lock Lever

F-9-268

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-97

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

10) Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable.

9-98

14) Install the (Lower) Speaker Unit. • 2 Screws (Binding; M4x20)

11) Remove the Connector Cover from the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. • 1 Claw

x2

• 2 Protrusions Protrusions

Claw Protrusions

F-9-271

Connector Cover

15) Install the (Upper) Speaker Unit. • 1 Screw (Binding; M4x6) F-9-269

12) Install the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. (2 screws)

13) Remove the 2 Rubber Caps from Right Upper Cover 1.

F-9-272

F-9-270

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-98

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

16) Remove the Cord Guide Cover.

9-99

18) Install the 2 Ferrite Cores to both edges of the Speaker Cable. CAUTION: Be sure to install the Ferrite Core within 50mm from the edge of the Speaker Cable.

F-9-273

17) Remove the Peel-Off Sheet to attach the Cord Guide to the position as shown in the figure.

50mm F-9-275

F-9-274 F-9-276

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-99

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

19) Insert the Speaker Cable to the Voice Guidance Board Unit and the (Upper) Speaker Unit.

9-100

NOTE: If the Upright control Panel is not installed, be sure to take up slack of the Speaker Cabel at [B] area by adjusting its lenght at [A] area.

[A]

[A] [B]

F-9-277

20) Put the Speaker Cable through the Cord Guide and install the Cord Guide Cover.

21) Connect the Power Plug into the outlet. 22) Turn ON the Main Power Switch.

Cord Guide Cover

F-9-278

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-100

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Operation Check

9-101

Checking After Installation 1) [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > and make sure that [Use Voice Navigation] is [ON]. 2) [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > and make sure that [Voice Guide from Speakers] is displayed.

Operation Check < When Starting to Use > 1) Press reset key 3 secs or more. 2) Press [Main Menu] in Control Panel. 3) If the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame, “Voice Guidance Kit” is available. If “Voice Guidance Kit” doesn’t properly operate, check the below. • Make the following selection; Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION, and check that TTS-JA/TTS-EN and ASR-JA/ASR-EN are installed correctly. < When Disusing > 1) Hold down the Reset Key or Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Operation Check

9-101

9

Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Installation Procedure

Additional Memory Type D (512MB)

9-102

Installation Outline Drawing

Checking the Contents [1] Expansion RAM x 1

F-9-280

Installation Procedure

F-9-279

Points to Note Before Installation

1) Remove the Box Left Cover. • 2 Screws (Rmoved screws is step 8) to used.)

1) Check the memory capacity. • Service Mode(Level 1) > COPIER > DISAPLAY > ACC-STS > RAM 2) Exit the Service Mode.

x2

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off, then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-281

9

Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Installation Procedure

9-102

9

Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Installation Procedure

2) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable, and release the 2 Lock Levers.

9-103

4) Install the Expansion RAM on Main Controller PCB 2. CAUTION: When installing the Expansion RAM, be careful not to touch the plate..

Reader Communication Cable

Lock Lever

F-9-282

3) Remove the Main Controller PCB 2 while holding the grip. • 2 Screws (Removed screws will be reused at step 6).) F-9-284

5) Turn over the 2 Lock Levers, and push in and secure the Main Controller PCB 2.

x2

• 2 Screws (Install them in the order from (3) to (4).) CAUTION: Install it without pinching the Cables of the Main Controller PCB 2. Grip

F-9-283

Lock Lever

F-9-285

9

Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Installation Procedure

9-103

9

Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Checking After Installation

9-104

6) Turn over the 2 Lock Levers, push the Main Controller 2 in and fix it. • 2 Screws (Removed screws at step 4): Install in order of bottom and top.) CAUTION: Reliable work in order from Figure 1 to 4 should be done in case of no connection regarding Main Controller PCB 2.

x2

Lock Lever

F-9-286

7) Connect the Reader Communication Cable. 8) Install the Box Left Cover(2 screws). 9) Connect the Power Plug into the outlet. 10) Turn ON the main power switch.

Checking After Installation 1) After the Expansion RAM is installed, check that the memory capacity is added. • Service Mode(Level 1) > COPIER > DISAPLAY > ACC-STS > RAM 2) Exit the Service Mode.

9

Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Checking After Installation

9-104

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

Reader Heater Unit

9-105

Installation Outline Drawing

Checking the Contents (Asia only) ■■Reader Heater Unit-G1 [1] Reader Heater X 1

[2] Flat Screw (M4x4) X 4

[3] Heater Sheet X 1sheet

Use 3 of them

Binding screw can also be used.

F-9-288

F-9-287

Checking the Parts to be Installed (Except for Asia)

Installation Procedule 1) Open the DADF.

Each parts of the Reader Heater Unit are provided as service parts, order as necessary to prepare parts below. NO.

Parts name

Parts Number.

Q'ty

[1]

Reader Heater (200V)

FK2-7164-000

1 pc

[2]

Flat Screw (M4 x4)

XA9-1956-000

4 pc

[3]

Heater Sheet

FC8-6060-000

1 sheet T-9-4

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned

F-9-289

off, then disconnect the power plug.

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-105

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

2) Remove the right retainer cover.

9-106

4) Remove the copy board glass.

• 2 Screws CAUTION: When removing the copyboard glass, be sure not to get your fingers touched with the glass surface or the backside of the white plate.

x2

In case the glass is soiled, clean it with lint-free paper.

F-9-290

3) Remove the DF cable cover. • 2 Screws F-9-292

x2

F-9-291

F-9-293

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-106

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

5) Align the 5 heater sheets in the marking line and put them on.

9-107

7) Pass the connector under the scanner rail. CAUTION:

Marking Line

Do not scratch surface of the wire and the Scanner Rail.

Wire

Scanner Rail F-9-294

6) Install the reader heater. • 4 Screws (Flat-head; M4 x 4)

F-9-296

(*Binding screw can also be used.) 8) Loosen the screw and shift the harness guide in the direction of the arrow to make a space CAUTION:

[A] to pass the harness.

Do not scratch the surface of the Guide Shaft.

Hole

[A]

x4

Guide Shaft F-9-295

Screw F-9-297

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-107

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9) Put the harness along the claws of FFC guide in the 4 places.

9-108

11) Fix the harness with 2 edge saddles.

NOTE: Make sure to keep the harness tightly put. Claw of the FFC Guide

Claw of the FFC Guide

x4

Sheet F-9-300

NOTE: Check the sheet position. F-9-298

10) Release the wire saddle and connect the connector. Wire Saddle

Sheet

F-9-299

Sheet F-9-301

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-108

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-109

12) Aligning with the boss, tighten the screw that has been loosened in step 8). (2 Screws)

13) Install the removed cover. • Copy board glass • DF cable cover (2 Screws) • Right retainer cover (2 Screws)

14) Clouse the DADF. 15) Turn ON the environment switch. 16) Insert the power plug to the outlet. 17) Turn ON the main power switch.

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-109

9

Installation > Cassette Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

Cassette Heater Unit

9-110

Installation Outline Drawing

Checking the Contents (EUR only) ■■Cassette Heater Unit-38 [1] Cassette Heater Unit X1

[2] Screw (RS tightening: M4x8) X2

F-9-302

Checking the Parts to be Installed (AUS only) Prepare the following parts because each part of the Cassette Heater Unit is assigned as

F-9-303

Installation Procedule

service part. NO [1] [2]

Parts name Cassette Heater Unit Screw (RS tightening; M4x8)

Parts Nanumber FM3-4855-000 FG3-4325-000

1) Open the Front Cover.

Q'ty 1pc 2pc T-9-5

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

2) Pull out the Left Deck to remove. • 2 Screws

Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned

x2

off, then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-304

9

Installation > Cassette Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-110

9

Installation > Cassette Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

3) Put the 2 Rails in.

9-111

7) Put the 2 Rails in.

F-9-305

F-9-307

4) Pull out the Right Deck to remove the Left Deck in the same way.

8) Remove the Connector Cover.

5) Put the 2 Rails in.

• 1 Claw • 2 Projections

6) Pull out Cassette 3 to remove. • 4 Screws

Claw

x4 Projection

F-9-308

F-9-306

9

Installation > Cassette Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-111

9

Installation > Cassette Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9) Remove tapes on the Cassette Heater Unit.

9-112

12) Install the Cassette Heater Unit. • 2 Screws (RS tightening; M4x8)

10) Fit the projections of the Cassette Heater Unit into the holes of the Host Machine.

x2

Hole

Projection

Projection

F-9-311

F-9-309

13) Installt the Connector.

11) Fit the holes of the Cassette Heater Unit with the bosses of the Host Machine. CAUTION: When fitting the Cassette Heater Unit with the bosses, be sure to support the bottom side with your hand; otherwise, the Unit can fall because the Unit goes off from the projections. Connector

F-9-312

Projection

Hole

Projection

14) Install the Connector Cover.

Hole F-9-310

9

Installation > Cassette Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-112

9

Installation > Cassette Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

15) Pull out the Rails at the installation area of Cassette 3.

20) After having installed Right Deck with 2 screws,close the Right Deck.

16) Fit the 4 pins on the Rails with the grooves of Cassette 3 to place Cassette 3 over the

21) After having installed Left Deck with 2 screws,close the Left Deck.

Rails.

9-113

22) Close the Front Cover. 23) Turn on the environment switch. 24) Insert the power plug to the outlet. 25) Turn ON the main power switch.

Pins F-9-313

17) After having installed Cassette 3 with 4 screws,close Cassette 3.

18) Pull out the Rails at the installation area of the Right Deck. 19) Fit the 4 pins on the Rails with the grooves of the Right Deck to place the Right Deck over the Rails.

Pin

F-9-314

9

Installation > Cassette Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-113

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 Checking Bundled Components NOTE: Every components of the paper deck heater unit (paper deck heater unit-A1) are supplied as service parts, so have the following parts on hand. [3]

[4]

[6] [5] [1]

[12] [8]

[9]

[11]

[2]

9-114

NO. [1]

Parts name Heater Unit (100V)

Parts Number. FG6-9650-000

Q'ty 1pc.

[2]

Heater Unit (230V) AC input connector (100V)

FG6-9651-000 FG6-1116-000

1pc. 1pc.

[3]

AC input connector (230V) Relay harness unit

FG6-1117-000 FG6-2957-000

1pc. 1pc.

[4]

AC cord (100V)

FK3-0630-000

1pc.

[5]

AC cord (230V) Screw with toothed washer

FK3-0631-000 XB2-7400-607

1pc. 3pcs.

[6]

Cable protection bushing

WT2-5098-000

1pc.

[7]

Power supply label (100V)

FS6-8478-000

1pc.

[8]

Power supply label (230V) RS-tight screw (M4x8)

FS6-8725-000 XB1-2400-409

1pc. 2pcs.

[9]

Binding screw (M4x4)

XB1-2400-409

1pc.

[10]

Wire saddle

WT2-5730-000

3pcs.

[11]

Cord mount

FC7-5473-000

1pc.

[12]

Screw with flat spring

XB2-8401-007

1pc.

[5]

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power [5]

Check that the main power switch is OFF.

[7]

1) Open the Switch Cover and turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Check that both the Control Panel display and the main power lamp are turned off, and then disconnect the power plug.

[10]

CAUTION: F-9-315

When installing the heater to the paper deck, take the following precautions. a. The AC power plug of the host machine must have been removed from the outlet. b. Install the heater after installing the host machine and paper deck. c. Use correct screws (length and diameters) at correct positions.

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-114

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

Installation Procedure

9-115

3) Remove three screws, and then detach the right cover of the paper deck to the direction of the arrow shown.

1) Disconnect the connector of the paper deck from the host machine.

x3

F-9-318

4) Remove six screws(M3x8: 2pcs, M4x8: 4pcs.), and then detech the rear cover of the paper

F-9-316

2) Release the paper deck from the host machine, and then press down the latch plate of the

deck.

paper deck housing with your finger to open the housing.

x6

F-9-319 F-9-317

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

9-115

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

5) Remove three screws and a connector, and then detach the front-upper cover.

9-116

7) Atach the supplied cable protection bushing into the hole on the top panel of the paper deck.

x3 x1

F-9-320 F-9-322

6) Remove two screws, and then detach the top cover.

8) Place the heater unit under the top panel of the paper deck, and then take the connector out from the hole on the top plate.

x2

F-9-321

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

9-116

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

9) Insert two hooks of the heater unit into the holes on the top plate of the paper deck, and then secure the heater unit to the main body of the paper deck using a screw with toothed

11)

9-117

Remove screw to remove the blind plate from the power core mount of the papar

deck. (Removed blindfold plate and screw are no longer reused.)

washer.

x1 x1

F-9-323

10)

Attach the heater connector to the panel mount.

F-9-325

12)

Install the supplied AC input connector in two steps ([A] > [B]).

[B] [A]

x1

F-9-324

F-9-326

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

9-117

9 13)

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

Secure the ground cable using the screw with toothed washer.

15)

9-118

Insert the bind locks of the cable ties in the holes (at [A] shown below) in the rear

side panel to secure the relay harness.

16)

Connect the connector at both ends of the relay harness unit to the heater connector

and AC power connector respectively.

x1 17)

Connect the connector at one end of the AC cord to the power cord mount of the

heater.

18)

Remove four screws, and then detach the rear-lower cover of the host machine.

F-9-327

14)

Using two RS-tight screws (M4X8), install the relay hareness unit to the rear side

x4

panel of the paper deck.

x2 x2

F-9-329

[A]

F-9-328

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

9-118

9 19)

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

Remove two screws at the lower right of the back of the host machine to remove the

blind plate. *Removed blindfold plate and screw are no longer reused.

20)

9-119

Insert the AC cord into the hole of the cord mount, and then secure the ground cable

to the cord mount using a screw with toothed washer. Secure the AC cord to the cord mount using a screw with flat spring.

x2

x2 F-9-330

F-9-331

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

9-119

9 21)

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

Connect the connector of the AC cord to the connector on the host machine.

24)

9-120

Reatach the exterior covers of the paper deck in the following sequence;

[1] Top cover (take care not to have the cables caught) [M4x8: 2pcs.] [2] Front-upper cover (insert the connector) [M4x8: 3pcs] [3] Rear cover [M3x8: 2pcs, M4x8: 4pcs.]

x2

[4] Right cover [M4x8: 3pcs.]

x1

25)

Close the deck compartment. Manually slide the paper deck to the left place in aside

of the host machine.

26)

Stick the power supply label on the rear panel of the paper deck.

F-9-332

22)

Hang the left-hand hook, and then secure the cord mount to the host machine using

two binding screws (M4X4).

23)

Install the rear-cover of the host machine using four screws.

x4

F-9-334

F-9-333

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

9-120

9 27)

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

Fix the paper deck cable in the wire saddle and joint the connector to the host

29)

machine.

9-121

Peel off the 3 blindfold seal at the rear side and right side of the host machine, then

fit the 3 wire saddles as shown. Wire the AC cable as shown in the figure and joint the AC connector to the power cord mount of the heater.

x2

F-9-335

28)

Peel off the blindfold seal at the rear side of the host machine and fit the reuse band

of the AC cable as shown.

x1

F-9-337

F-9-336

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

9-121

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

9-122

CAUTION: To ensure smooth connection of the heater power connectors, explain to the user that any obstacle that can prevent the paper deck from opening should not be placed in the hatched area. • [1]: Host machine • [2]: Paper deck • [A]: Front

[1]

[A]

[2] F-9-338

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure

9-122

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

Paper Deck Heater Unit

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

Checking the Parts to be Installed

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.

Each part of the Paper Deck Heater Unit for the Paper Deck is supplied as a service part, so prepare the following parts. Also, use the appropriate Paper Deck Heater Unit for each country. [1] Heater Unit x 1

9-123

[2] Middle Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness (750mm) x 1

[3] Lower Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness (405mm) x 1

2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off, then disconnect the power plug.

Installation Procedule NOTE: Following explains installation of the Cassette Heater Unit to the Middle Deck. Same procedure applies to installation of the Cassette Heater Unit to the Lower Deck.

1) Remove the Deck Rear Right Cover. [4] Screw (W SEMS ; M4 x 8) x 1

[5] Wire Saddle (Small) x 6

• 8 Screws [6] Wire Saddle (Large) x 6

F-9-339

NO. [1]

Parts name

Parts Number.

Q'ty

Heater Unit (100V)

FM3-3770-000

1 pc

Heater Unit (120V)

FM3-3771-000

1 pc

Heater Unit (230V)

FM3-3772-000

1 pc

[2]

Middle Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness

FG3-4325-000

1 pc

[3]

Lower Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness

FG3-4326-000

1 pc

[4]

Wire Saddle (Large)

WT2-5974-000

6 pc

[5]

Wire Saddle (Small)

WT2-5973-000

3 pc

[6]

Screw (W Sems; M4 x8)

FC7-7646-000

1 pc.

x8 F-9-340

T-9-6

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-123

9 2) Remove the Deck Upper Rear Cover.

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-124

4) Open the Middle Deck manually and remove the screw securing the Foreign Matter Sensor Bracket.

F-9-341

3) Remove the Deck Right Cover.

F-9-343

• 6 Screws • 2 Protrusions

5) While the Sensor Harness is connected, remove the Foreign Matter Sensor Bracket and the Foreign Matter Sensor Flag. Bracket Flag

x6

Protrusion F-9-344 F-9-342

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-124

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

6) Fit the 3 claws of the Cassette Heater Unit to the 3 installation holes to install.

9-125

8) Put the Foreign Matter Sensor Flag and the Foreign Matter Sensor Bracket back to the original position to install. • 1 Screw CAUTION: Check that the sensor and the connector are securely connected and attached to the base (check that they are not free).

F-9-345

7) Secure the Cassette Heater Unit with the screw (W SEMS; M4x8).

F-9-347

9) Put the Cassette Heater Harness through the Square Bush at the lower side.

F-9-346

F-9-348

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-125

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

10) Secure the Cassette Heater Harness to the Wire Saddle and close the Middle Deck.

9-126

NOTE: When installing the Paper Deck Heater Unit to the Lower Deck, install the 3 (large) Wire Saddles. Do not install the (large) Wire Saddles when installing an Option Warm Breeze Heater Unit at the same time or in the case that the Heater Unit has been already installed.

F-9-349

11) Install the 3 (small) Wire Saddles and the 6 (large) Wire Saddles. NOTE: When installing an Option Warm Breeze Heater Unit at the same time or in the case that the Warm Breeze Heater Unit has been already installed, replace the upper 3 Wire Saddles with the (large) Wire Saddles.

F-9-351

12) Open the Wire Saddle to take the AC Distribution PCB Harness out.

F-9-352

F-9-350

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-126

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-127

NOTE: When installing the Paper Deck Heater Unit to the Lower Deck, open the 8 Wire Saddles.

13) Remove the AC Distribution PCB Cover. • 2 Screws

x2

F-9-353 F-9-355

14) Open the 11 Wire Saddles. 15) Connect the 2-pin connector side of the Middle Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness to the Cassette Heater Harness.

F-9-354

F-9-356

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-127

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

16) Secure the Middle Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness with the 20 Clamps.

9-128

18) Install the AC Distribution PCB Cover(2 Screws). 19) Secure the AC Distribution PCB Harness with the Wire Saddle.

NOTE: When installing the Paper Deck Heater Unit to the Lower Deck, secure the Lower Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness with the 11 Wire Saddles.

20) Install the Deck Right Cover(6 Screws, 2 Protrusions). 21) Install the Deck Upper Rear Cover. 22) Install the Deck Rear Right Cover(8 Screws). 23) Turn on the Environment switch. 24) Insert the power plug to the outlet. 25) Turn ON the main power switch.

F-9-357

17) Install the 5-pin connector side of the Middle Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness to CN4 on the AC Distribution PCB. NOTE: When installing the Paper Deck Heater Unit to the Lower Deck, install the 4-pin connector side of the Lower Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness to CN3 on the SC Distribution PCB.

F-9-358

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit > Installation Procedule

9-128

9

Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit

NO.

Checking the Parts to be Installed Each part of the Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit for the Paper Deck is supplied as a service part, so prepare the following parts. Also, use the appropriate Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit for each country.

[1] Warm Breeze Heater Unit x 1

[2] Air Heater PCB x 1

[3] Upper Deck Air Heater Harness (1110mm) x 1

Parts name

Parts Number (100/120V)

9-129 Parts Number (200/230V)

Q'ty

[1]

Warm Breeze Heater Unit

FM4-1832-000

FM4-1850-000

1 pc.

[2]

Air Heater PCB

FC3-4279-000

FC3-4279-000

1 pc.

[3]

Upper Deck Air Heater Harness (110mm)

FC3-4327-000

FC3-4327-000

1 pc.

[4]

Middle Deck Air Heater Harness (790mm) FC3-4328-000

FC3-4328-000

1 pc.

[5]

Lower Deck Air Heater Harness (435mm)

FC3-4329-000

1 pc.

FC3-4329-000

[6]

PCB Support

VT2-0006-006

VT2-0006-006

2 pc.

[7]

Wire Saddle

WT2-5974-000

WT2-5974-000

6 pc.

[8]

Wire Saddle

WT2-5973-000

WT2-5973-000

6 pc.

[9]

Screw (RS tightening; M4x8)

4A3-3259-000

4A3-3259-000

2 pc.

XB2-4300-605

XB2-4300-605

2 pc.

[10] Screw (W SEMS; M3x6)

T-9-7

[4] Middle Deck Air Heater Harness (790mm) x 1

[5] Lower Deck Air Heater Harness (435mm) x 1

[6] PCB Support x 2

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off, then disconnect the power plug.

[7] Wire Saddle (Small) x6

[8] Wire Saddle (Large) x6

[9] Screw (RS tightening; M4x8) x 2

[10] Screw (W SEM; M3 x 6) x 2

F-9-359

9

Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-129

9

Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit

Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit

9-130

3) Open the Wire Saddle and take the Air Heater AC Harness out, and then close the Wire

NOTE: Following explains installation of the Heater Unit to the Upper Deck. Same procedure applies to installation of the Heater Unit to the Middle Deck and the Lower Deck except some steps.

Saddle. (Air Heater AC Harness is used in step 5).)

1) Remove the Deck Rear Right Cover of the Paper Deck. • 8 Screws • 2 Protrusions

F-9-362

4) Install the Air Heater PCB. • 2 Screws (W SEMS; M3x6)

x8

x2

Protrusion F-9-360

2) Install the 2 PCB Supports.

F-9-363

F-9-361

9

Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit

9-130

9

Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit

5) Install the Air Heater AC Harness (removed in step 3)) to CN4 on the Air Heater PCB.

9-131

7) Take the AC Distribution PCB out. • 1 Wire saddle

F-9-364 F-9-366

6) Install the 6 (small) Wire Saddles and the 6 (large) Wire Saddles. 8) Remove the AC Distribution PCB Cover.

NOTE:

• When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Middle Deck, use the 6 (large) Wire Saddles only. The 6 (small) Wire Saddles are not used. • When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Lowe Deck, use the 6 (small) Wire Saddles and the 6 (large) Wire Saddles.

• 2 Screws

x2

F-9-367

F-9-365

9

Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit

9-131

9

Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit

9) Open the 16 Wire Saddles.

9-132

11) Secure the Upper Deck Air Heater Harness with the 28 Wire Saddles.

NOTE:

• When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Middle Deck, open the 13 Wire Saddles. • When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Lower Deck, open the 9 Wire Saddles.

NOTE:

• When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Middle Deck, secure the Middle Deck Air Heater Harness with the19 Wire Saddles. • When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Lowe Deck, secure the Lower Deck Air Heater Harness with the 9 Wire Saddles.

F-9-368

F-9-370

10) Install the 4-pin connector side of the Upper Deck Air Heater Harness to CN3 on the Air Heater PCB.

F-9-369

9

Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit

9-132

9

Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit

12) Install the 6-pin connector side of the Upper Deck Air Heater Harness to CN8 on the AC Distribution PCB.

9-133

15) Open the Wire Saddle and take Harness 1 (4-pin connector) and Harness 2 (8-pin connector) out, and then close the Wire Saddle.

NOTE:

• When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Middle Deck, install the 5-pin connector side of the Middle Deck Air Heater Harness to CN7 on the AC Distribution PCB. • When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Lowe Deck, install the 4-pin connector side of the Lower Deck Air Heater Harness to CN6 on the AC Distribution PCB.

x2

Harness 2

Wire Saddle Wire Saddle

Harness 1 CN6 CN7

F-9-372 CN8

16) Install Harness 1 (4-pin connector) to CN1 and Harness 2 (8-pin connector) to CN2 on the Air Heater PCB. F-9-371

x2

13) Install the AC Distribution PCB Cover. 14) Secure the AC Distribution PCB Harness with the Wire Saddle.

CN2

CN1

F-9-373

9

Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit

9-133

9

Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit

17) Bring down the Lock Lever of the Air Heater Cover to remove the Air Heater Cover.

9-134

19) Connect the Connector of the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Connector of the Upper Deck. • 2 Connectors • 8 Claws

F-9-374

18) Install the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Upper Deck. • 2 Screws (RS tightening; M4x8) F-9-376

20) Install the Air Heater Cover.

x2

21) Install the Deck Rear Right Cover(8 Screws, 2 Protrusions). 22) Turn on the environment switch. 23) Insert the power plug to the outlet. 24) Turn ON the main power switch.

F-9-375

9

Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit

9-134

9

Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing

Document Scan Lock Kit-B1

9-135

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

Checking the Parts to be Installed

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.

• To enable the function of "Image Data Analyzer Board", it is necessary to install the license which comes with the product. • Be sure to ask users to install the license after the installation.

2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off, then disconnect the power plug.

Installation Outline Drawing

CAUTION: Be sure to install the license after installing the Image Data Analyzer Board because installing the license before installing the Image Data Analyzer Board causes an error.

Checking the Contents [1] Image Data Analyzer Board x 1

[[2] PCB Spacer x 4

[4] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 4

[5] Screw (Binding; M3x4) x1

Use 2 of them

[3] Image Data Analyzer Board Support Plate x 1

F-9-378

F-9-377

9

Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing

9-135

9

Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedule

Installation Procedule

9-136

3) Remove the Main Controller PCB 2 while holding the grip. • 2 Screws

1) Remove the Box Left Cover. • 2 Screws

x2 x2

Grip

F-9-381

4) Remove the 4 screws.

F-9-379

• 3 Screws (TP; M3) (The 2 of the removed screws will be used in step 6, while the remaining 2) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable, and release the 2 Lock Levers.

screw will not be used.) • 1 Screw (with Washer) (The removed screw will not be used.)

x4

With washer Screw

Reader Communication Cable

Lock Lever

F-9-380 F-9-382

9

Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedule

9-136

9

Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedule

5) Install the 2 PCB Spacers.

9-137

7) Install the Image Analysis Board. • 4 Screws (TP; M3x6) • 1 Connector Connector

x4

F-9-383

6) Install the Image Analysis Board Support Plate.

F-9-385

• 2 Screws (TP; M3) (The screws removed in step 4).) • 1 Screw (Binding; M3x4)

8) Release the 2 Lock Levers in the direction of the arrows, and uniformly push in the Main Controller PCB 2 with both hands until it stops. CAUTION:

x3

Install the Main Controller PCB 2 while paying attention not to trap cables.

Binding

F-9-384

Lock Lever

F-9-386

9

Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedule

9-137

9

Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Checking after Installation

9-138

9) Turn over the 2 Lock Levers, and push in and secure the Main Controller PCB 2. • 2 Screws (Install them in the order from (3) to (4).) CAUTION: Be sure to perform the work in the order from (1) to (4) in the figure because the connector of the Main Controller 2 may not be connected.

x2

Lock Lever

F-9-387

10) Connect the Reader Communication Cable. 11) Install the Box Left Cover. (2 screws)

Checking after Installation 1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet. 2)Turn ON the main power switch. 3) Ask users to install license. 4) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. 5) Press the counter check key on the Control Panel. 6) Press [Check Device Configuration] key. 7) Check that [Image Data Analyzer Board] is displayed in the options column.

9

Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Checking after Installation

9-138

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1

■■Copy Control Interface KIT-A1 [1] CC-VI Cable X 1

Checking the Parts to be Installed

9-139

[2] D-SUB Support Plate

X1

[3] Washer (large) X 2

Serial Interface Kit-K1 and Control Interface Kit-A1 cannot be used concurrently.

Checking the Contents ■■Serial Intreface KIT-K1 [1] Serial RS Conversion Board X 1

[2] IA Harness Protection Sheet X 1

[3] RS Conversion Cable X 1

[4] Hexagonal Screw X 2

[5] Washer X 2

[6] PCB Spacer X 1

[4] Hexagonal Screw (Washer (Small) ,Nut) X 2

Do not use a Nut

[5] IA Harness Protection

Sheet X 1

F-9-389

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off, then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-388

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-139

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1

9-140

Installation Outline Drawing

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. • 2 Screws

x2

F-9-392 F-9-390

3) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable.

Installation Procedule ■■Removing the Main Controller PCB 1

x2

1) Push [A] area to open the HDD Cover.

USB Cable Control Panel Cable

[A]

F-9-393

F-9-391

9

9-140

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Installing the Serial Interface KIT

9-141

CAUTION:

4) Remove the 2 screws. (The removed screw will be used in step 2 of .)

Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB on flat surface. Reason: Since the fan protrudes, if it is placed at a tilt, it may be damaged.

x2

F-9-396 F-9-394

5) Hold the handle and remove the Main Controller PCB 1.

■■Installing the Serial Interface KIT 1) Remove the Face Cover from the Main Controller PCB 1. (Removed Face Cover is not

Handle

used.) • 2 Screws (Removed screws are not used.) Face Cover

x2 F-9-395

F-9-397

9

9-141

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Installing the Serial Interface KIT

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Installing the Serial Interface KIT

9-142

2) Clean the affixing side (Controller Box Frame) of the IA Harness Protection Sheet with lint-

5) Connect the RS Conversion Cable to the Serial RS Conversion Board.

free paper moistened with alcohol. 3) Affix the IA Harness Protection Sheet to the Main Controller PCB 1. NOTE:

• Because the working space is limited, use scale, etc. for cleaning. • After affixing the IA Harness Protection Sheet, be sure to press it with scale, etc. to prevent coming off.

Screw

Affixing Side

F-9-400

6) Install the Serial RS Conversion Board. • 1 Screw (which was removed in the procedure 4).) • 2 Washers • 2 Hexagonal Screws • 1 Connector F-9-398

4) Remove the 1 screw and install the PCB Spacer. (Removed screw is used in the procedure 6).)

F-9-401

F-9-399

9

9-142

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Installing the Serial Interface KIT

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Installing the Copy Control Interface KIT

9-143

■■Installing the Copy Control Interface KIT

4) Put the CC-VI cable through the D-SUB Support Plate.

1) Remove the Face Cover from the Main Controller PCB 1. (Removed Face Cover is not used.)

CAUTION: Be sure to install the extruded side of the D-SUB Support Plate to be inside.

• 2 Screws (Removed screws are not used.)

Inside

Face Cover

x2

D-SUB Support Plate CC-VI Cable F-9-404

5) Secure the CC-VI cable to the Main Controller PCB 1.

F-9-402

• 2 Hexagonal Screws

2) Clean the affixing side (Controller Box Frame) of the IA Harness Protection Sheet with lint-

• 2 Washers (small) • 2 Washers (large)

free paper moistened with alcohol.

• 1 Connector

3) Affix the IA Harness Protection Sheet to the Main Controller PCB 1.

CC-VI Cable

NOTE:

• Because the working space is limited, use scale, etc. for cleaning. • After affixing the IA Harness Protection Sheet, be sure to press it with scale, etc. to prevent coming off.

x2 Screw

Washers (large)

Affixing Side

Washers (small) Hexagonal Screw F-9-405

F-9-403

9

9-143

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Installing the Copy Control Interface KIT

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Installing the Main Controller PCB 1

9-144

■■Installing the Main Controller PCB 1

2) Press 2 Lock Levers down to push the Main Controller 1 and secure. • 2 Screws (The screws removed in step 4 of Removing Main Controller PCB 1 : install in

CAUTION:

order from bottom to top.)

Install the Main Controller 1 without pinching cables.

CAUTION: 1) Release 2 Lock Levers in the arrow direction, and push the Main Controller 1 all the way in evenly with both hands.

Keep the order of steps 1 thru 4 shown in the figure since there is the case that a connector of the Main Controller 1 is not connected.

x2 Lock Lever

Lock Lever

F-9-406 F-9-407

3) Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable. 4) Main Controller Right Cover Unit (2 Screw). 5) Close the HDD Cover. 6) Connect the power plug to the outlet. 7) Turn ON the main power switch.

9

9-144

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Installing the Main Controller PCB 1

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-A2

USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2

9-145

Checking the Contents ■■USB Device Port-A2

Points to Note at Installation

[1] Case Plate X 1

[[2] DUH-V3 Board X 1

[[3] Cusion X 4

[4] Case Sheet X 1

[5] Case Sheet X 1

[6] DP USB Cable X 1

[7] USB Cable X 1

[8] Wire Saddle X 4

[9] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 3

CAUTION: • When installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer, the USB Device Port must be installed beforehand.” • The Multimedia Reader/Writer cannot be used in combination with the Card Reader .

Use 3 of them

[10] Screw (Binding; M4x6) X 2

F-9-408

[3], [5]: Use these when installing the Card Reader (sales company's option) < CD/Guides > • FCC/IC Instruction Sheet • China RoHS Instruction Sheet

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-A2

9-145

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installation Outline Drawing

Check Items when Turning OFF the Power

■■Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 [1] Multimedia Card Slot X 1

[2] Card Slot X 1

9-146

Check that the main power is OFF.

[3] Card Slot X 1

1) Turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Check that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.

Installation Outline Drawing [4] USB Cable X 1

[5] Slot Holder X 1

[6] Multimedia Label X1

[7] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 4

F-9-410 F-9-409

< CD/Guides > • FCC/IC Instruction Sheet

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installation Outline Drawing

9-146

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > Removing the Covers

Installing the USB Device Port

9-147

4) Remove the Upper Left Cover.

■■Removing the Covers

• 2 Screws

1) Open the Front Cover.

x2

2) Remove the Front Upper Cover. • 2 Hinge Shafts Front Upper Cover Hinge Shaft

F-9-413

5) Remove the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover. • 4 Screws • 2 Claws F-9-411

x4

3) Remove the Upper Right Cover. • 1 Screw

x2

Ciow

F-9-414

F-9-412

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > Removing the Covers

9-147

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Upright Control Panel model

9-148

■■In case of Upright Control Panel model

3) Install the Case Plate. • 2 Screws (Binding; M4x6)

1) Remove the Upper Middle Cover. • 4 Screws

x4 x2

F-9-417 F-9-415

4) Install the DUH-V3 Board.

2) Remove the screw of the Control Panel Plate, and pull out the Control Panel Plate in the direction of the arrow. (The removed screw will be used in step 11.)

• 3 Screws (TP; M3x6) • 1 Connector

CAUTION: Be sure not to pull out the Control Panel Plate toward the front too much. Wire Saddles may fall.

x3

F-9-418

F-9-416

9

9-148

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Upright Control Panel model

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Upright Control Panel model

9-149

5) Remove the Wire Saddle installed to the rear side of the Control Panel Plate, and install it

6) Install the 3 Wire Saddles to the Control Panel Plate.

to the front side of the plate. NOTE: If it is difficult to remove the Wire Saddle, use a pair of needlenose pliers.

Removing the Wire Saddle

Install the Wire Saddle

F-9-420

7) Disconnect the USB Cable. • 2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 10.) • 3 Wire Saddles • 1 Edge Saddle

x4

F-9-419

F-9-421

8) Close the Edge Saddle opened in step 7.

9

9-149

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Upright Control Panel model

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Upright Control Panel model

9-150

9) Put the disconnected USB Cable through the Wire Saddle on the rear side, and connect it to the DUH-V3 Board.

10) Connect the USB Cable included in the package, and connect it to the DUH-V3 Board. • 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 7.)

• 2 Wire Saddles

• 7 Wire Saddles

x2

x2

F-9-422

x7

F-9-423

9

9-150

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Upright Control Panel model

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Flat Control Panel model

9-151

■■In case of Flat Control Panel model

11) Return the Control Panel Plate to its original position. • 1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step 2.)

1) Install the Case Plate. • 2 Screws (Binding; M4x6)

x2

F-9-424 F-9-425

12) Install the Upper Middle Cover. (4 screws) 2) Install the DUH-V3 Board. • 3 Screws (TP; M3x6) • 1 Connector

x3

F-9-426

9

9-151

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Flat Control Panel model

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Flat Control Panel model

9-152

3) Move the Control Panel Plate in the direction of the arrow.

5) Remove the Wire Saddle installed to the rear side of the Control Panel Plate, and install it

• 1 Screw

to the front side of the plate. NOTE: If it is difficult to remove the Wire Saddle, use a pair of needlenose pliers..

Removing the Wire Saddle

Install the Wire Saddle

F-9-427

4) Remove the Flat Control Panel. • 4 Screws

x4

F-9-429

F-9-428

9

9-152

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Flat Control Panel model

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Flat Control Panel model

9-153

6) Install the Wire Saddles to the Control Panel Plate.

8) Free the USB Cable from the Edge Saddle, and close the Edge Saddle.

• 3 Wire Saddles

F-9-432 F-9-430

9) Connect the USB Cable to the DUH-V3 Board. 7) Place the Flat Control Panel as shown in the figure, and disconnect the USB Cable.

• 2 Wire Saddles

• 2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 11.) • 2 Guides

x2

x2 Guid

USB Cable

F-9-431

F-9-433

9

9-153

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Flat Control Panel model

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > Installing the Covers

10) Connect the USB Cable included in the package, and connect it to the DUH-V3 Board. • 4 Wire Saddles

9-154

■■Installing the Covers 1) Install the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover. (4 screws)

x4

F-9-434

11) Turn the Flat Control Panel in the direction of the arrow, and connect the USB Cable. • 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 7.) • 2 Guides

x2

Guid

USB Cable

F-9-435

12) Install the Flat Control Panel. (4 screws)

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > Installing the Covers

9-154

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > Installing the Covers

CAUTION:

9-155

NOTE: When installing the Card Reader or Multimedia Reader/Writer simultaneously, it is efficient to install it before performing the following procedure.

• When installing, be sure to install the Toner Replacement Inner Cover while the 4 Parallel Pins of the Inner Door Link Shaft are tilted at an angle of approx. 45 degrees.

3) Install the Upper Left Cover (2 screws). 4) Front Upper Cover (2 Hinge Shafts). Parallel Pin

5) Close the Front Cover. 45 deg

F-9-436

• When installing, be careful not to damage the 4 groundings on the upper side of the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Open/Close Sensor. Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Open/Close Sensor and Grounding

Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Open/Close Sensor and Grounding

Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover F-9-437

2) Install the Upper Middle Cover (1 screw).

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > Installing the Covers

9-155

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the Card Reader

Installing the Card Reader

9-156

4) After connecting the Card Reader to the DUH-V3 Board, place the cable inside the cover.

1) Open the Front Cover.

2) Remove the Front Upper Cover. • 2 Hinge Shafts Front Upper Cover Hinge Shaft

F-9-440

5) Place the Cushions inside the Upper Left Cover. NOTE: Adjust the number of cushions to match the thickness of the Card Reader. F-9-438

3) Remove the clear cover. • 3 Claws

x3

Clow

F-9-441

Clow F-9-439

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the Card Reader

9-156

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the Card Reader

6) Place the Card Reader on the Cushion.

9-157

8) Return the clear cover. • 3 Claws

x3

Clow Clow

F-9-442

7) Remove the Device Port Sheet and replace with the Case Sheet.

F-9-444

(The removed Device Port Sheet will not be used.) 9) Install the Front Upper Cover. (2 Hinge Shafts)

F-9-443

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the Card Reader

9-157

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer

Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-158

4) Install the Multimedia Card Slot and the Slot Holder. • 4 Screws (TP; M3x6)

1) Open the Front Cover.

2) Remove the Front Upper Cover. • 2 Hinge Shafts

x4

Front Upper Cover Hinge Shaft

Multimedia Card Slot

Slot Holder F-9-447

5) Connect the USB Cable.

F-9-445

3) Remove the Upper Left Cover. • 2 Screws

x2 x2

F-9-448

F-9-446

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-158

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer

6) Turn over the Upper Left Cover, remove the Card Slot from [A], and then attach the Card Insertion Slot included in the package. (The removed Card Slot will not be used.)

9-159

7) Remove the Clear Cover and the Device Port Sheet of the Upper Left Cover. • 3 Claws

• 2 Screws

x3

x2

[A] Clow

Device Port Sheet

Card Slot

[A]

Clow

x2

F-9-450

8) Affix the Multimedia Label to the Device Port Sheet as shown in the figure.

F-9-449

Multimedia Label

F-9-451

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-159

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check > Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-160

Operation Check

9) Install the Device Port Sheet and the Clear Cover.

■■Multimedia Reader/Writer

• 3 Claws

NOTE:

• To the Multimedia Reader/Writer, Memory Media of the SD Card, Memory Stick, and CF Card can be connected. With one of the 3 types of Memory Media, perform the oepration check 1 through 3. • When changing the settings upon user’s request, it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions from the user administrator.

x3

●● 1.Writing Check Device Port Sheet

Clow

1) Select "1" for the following Service Mode (Level 2)(Default value "0"). • COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > UI-MEM 2) To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the main power of the Host Machine.

3) Mount the Memory Media to the Multimedia Card Reader/Writer(Check that the Mount Mark is indicated in the bottom right.).

Clow

F-9-452

10) Return the Upper Left Cover to its original position. (2 Screws) CAUTION: F-9-453

Be careful not to trap the USB Cable.

11) Install the Front Upper Cover and close it (2 Hinge Shafts). 12) Connect the power plug to the outlet. 13) Turn ON the main power switch.

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check > Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-160

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check > Multimedia Reader/Writer

4) Make the following selection:[Scan and Store] > [Memory Media] > [Memory Media (A:)]

9-161

6) After the completion of original reading, check that the data is stored in the media. After that, press the [Main Menu] button on the Control Panel.

F-9-456 F-9-454

5) Set originals to DADF (or Copyboard), and press the [Scan] button. Then, press the Start button on the Control Panel.

F-9-455

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check > Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-161

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check > Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-162

●● 2. Reading Check 7) Make the following selection from Main Menu: [Access Stored Files] > [Memory Media] > [Memory Media(A:)]

F-9-458

9) Press the [Start Printing] button, and print the file. Then check that the file is printed F-9-457

correctly.

8) Select the files stored in step 4) and 5), and then press the [Print] button.

F-9-459

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check > Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-162

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check > Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-163

●● 3.Memory Media Removal

10) Press the [Main Menu] button on the Control Panel.

11) Press the [Mount Mark ] in the bottom right.Then, select the memory media to be removed, and press the [Remove] button.

F-9-460

F-9-461

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check > Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-163

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check > Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-164

12) Press the [OK] button. Then, check that the Mount Mark is not indicated in the bottom right on the Main Menu screen.

F-9-462

9

Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check > Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-164

9

Installation > Combination of HDD Options

9-165

Combination of HDD Options When installing the HDD options (5 products indicated below), refer to the pages indicated in the following table. • 2.5inch/160GB HDD-G1 • 2.5inch/1TB HDD-L1 • Removable HDD Kit-AH1 • HDD Mirroring Kit-D2 • HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C7 CAUTION: • When using the mirroring function, be sure to install 2 HDDs of the same capacity. • The system software needs to be installed after replacing the HDD or after installing the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit.

Reference Pages in the Manual According to Product Combination: Title

Combination of Product

Reference Pages

TYPE-1

Option HDD (1TB)

p. 9-170 to p. 9-173

TYPE-2

Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit

p. 9-174 to p. 9-186

TYPE-3

Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit

p. 9-187 to p. 9-201

TYPE-4

Standard HDD + Option HDD + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-202 to p. 9-215

TYPE-5

2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-216 to p. 9-229

TYPE-6

Standard HDD + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-230 to p. 9-241

TYPE-7

Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-242 to p. 9-255

TYPE-8

Standard HDD + Option HDD + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-256 to p. 9-278

TYPE-9

2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-279 to p. 9-298

TYPE-10

Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-299 to p. 9-318

TYPE-11

Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-319 to p. 9-339

Remarks

These types correspond to "CASE8" described in Installation Procedure included in the package of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C7.

T-9-8

9

Installation > Combination of HDD Options

9-165

9

Installation > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export

Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export

*3 Only the following items are backed up.

(When the HDD has been replaced or when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been

• Files in Mail Box

9-166

• Mail Box Settings (mail box names, passwords, and auto erase times) • Files in Advanced Box

installed) Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items. considerations.

[List of Data that can be backed up]

In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for

Data that can be backed up

reference. [List of Data to be Deleted] Data to be Deleted

Availability of Backup

Information registered in the Address Book Settings made from the Settings/Registration screen Forwarding Settings License files for MEAP applications MEAP applications Data saved using MEAP applications Favorite Settings registered in the Copy and Mail Box functions Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Scan modes registered in the Send Function Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode) Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image MEAP SMS (Service Management Service) password (the password will return to its default password if it was changed) Job logs User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) Registration information for the Network Place Key Pair and Server Certificate Log information for the IP address/MAC address restriction settings Password that is protected by TPM Encryption key that is protected by TPM Information for Web browser settings Quick Menu Information User Information of the Advanced Box

Yes Yes *1 Yes Yes No Yes *2 No Yes *3 No No

9

Address Book Settings/Registration settings Device Settings (Forwarding Settings, Address List, Favorite Settings) Printer Settings Paper Information Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Quick Menu Information User Information of the Advanced Box Favorite Settings for Web browser

License files for MEAP applications Data saved by MEAP applications

Yes No Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box

No Yes

SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) user authentication information

No No No Yes *4 No Yes *5 Yes Yes

Reference See the "e-Manual > Remote UI".

See the e-Manual > Web Access. (You can select this if web browser (Option) is installed.) For information on downloading license files, see the "e-Manual > MEAP". Data saved by MEAP applications may be able to be backed up, depending on the MEAP application. See the documentation included with the MEAP application. See the e-Manual > Remote UI "Setting the Backup Location for Stored Data ". see the "e-Manual > MEAPI". T-9-10

CAUTION: Work to Perform After Installing the Kit • When you start using this product, passwords set for Mail Boxes, Confidential Fax Inboxes, and the Memory RX Inbox are erased. Set these passwords again.

T-9-9

*2 Depending on the MEAP application.

*4 You may not be able to back up, depending on the type of the password. *5 Only the stored Favorite Settings can be backed up.

Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security

*1 Can only be backed up using the Remote UI.

• Forms registered for the Superimpose Image

• If you have logged on to the machine using a login service, such as SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) before using this product, you must select the login service again using SMS (Service Management Service) after restarting the machine. For more information on using SMS, see the e-Manual > MEAP.

Installation > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export

9-166

9

Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and Unin

9-167

Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) The data items that have been backed up may be restored when the this product has been installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator. The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up) in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.

Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings Following data can be batch exported. • Address Book

Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup. If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download the invalid license file. The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the MEAPSMS Administrator Guide

Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and Uninstallation

• Settings/Registration settings • Device Settings (Forwarding Settings, Address List, Favorite Settings) • Printer Settings • Paper Information

1) Select the URL given below and access SMS.

• Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image

http://[IP address of the device]:8000/sms/

• Quick Menu Information

The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user

• User Information of the Advanced Box

to change the password again after the use of this product is started. CAUTION:

1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI. http://[IP address of the device]/ If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password, and then click [Administrator Login]. 2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/ Export ALL] > [Export].

The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user to change the password again after the use of this product is started. 2) Click [MEAP Application Management]. 3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application Management page. 4) Check the status of MEAP Application is [Stop],

3) Select items to export.

5) Click on the name of applications to disable.

CAUTION:

6) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable].

When exporting only specific items, this may cause setting information relating to multiple items to lose its relations and cause setting details to be switched. In this case, export all related items simultaneously.

8) Return to the MEAP Application Management page and click on the appropriate application

4) Enter the password into [Encryption Password] and click on [Start Exporting]. 5) Click [Check Status].

7) Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for disabling the license. names. 9) Click [License Management] on the Application/License Information page. 10) Click [Download].

6) Check the batch export result.

9

9-167

Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and Unin

9

Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data

11) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete].

9-168

Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data

Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for license deletion. 12) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If there are several applications, repeat the procedures 1) to 7). 13) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).

User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H) In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to

CAUTION: Backup of "Advanced Box" When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD. Depending on the system version of the machine, both backup and restoration might not be performed. The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below. Specify the backup destination of a document data: • Backup to SMB server Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password, and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up. • Backup to USB HDD

make a backup of the user authentication information.

Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to

1) Access the URL given below.

which saved data is backed up.

http://[IP address of the device]:8000/sso/ 2) Login with the user name and password registered as an administrator in SSO-H. The default administrator user name and password are as follows:

CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up

User Name: Administrator

If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see Points to Note for Installation.

Password: password 3) Click [User Control]. 4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export]. 5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export]. 6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].

CAUTION: If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot be referred.

9

Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data

9-168

9

Installation > Installation Outline Drawing

9-169

[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]

CAUTION: • Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the e-Manual. • A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input' modes. • A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes). • A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input' modes. • A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and 'mark (1 byte)' modes.

1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore]. 2) Click [Display Backup Data]. 3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute]. CAUTION: • If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when backing up the data. • Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely restored, or some documents may be automatically printed. • Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.

• The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1 byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.

Installation Outline Drawing

[Backup method of User inbox and Advanced Box document data] 1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup]. 2) Select 'All' or 'Changes' for the backup method. 3) Click [Execute]. CAUTION: • If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not correctly entered, a backup cannot be made. • If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.

Mirroring Board or Encryption Board HDD

F-9-463

9

Installation > Installation Outline Drawing

9-169

9

Installation > [TYPE-1] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

[TYPE-1]

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

Option HDD (1TB)

1) Turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF, and then

Checking the Contents [1] HDD Support Pate X 1

9-170

[2] HDD X 1

disconnect the power plug. [3] Vibration-prevention Dumper X 4

Installation Procedure ■■Assembling the Option HDD CAUTION:

[4] Spacer X 4

[5] Screw (W sems; M3x14) X 4

• Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.

[6] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

• Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector.

[7] Gasket X 1

[A] Connecter Label F-9-464

F-9-465

< CD/Guides > • FCC/IC Sheet

9

Installation > [TYPE-1] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

9-170

9

Installation > [TYPE-1] > Installation Procedure > Procedure to Replace with the HDD

9-171

■■Procedure to Replace with the HDD

1) Assemble the Option HDD (1TB). • 1 HDD Support Plate

1) Push section [A] to open the HDD Cover.

• 4 Vibration-prevention Dumpers • 4 Spacers • 1 Option HDD • 4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14) NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate [A]

Vibration-prevention Dumper

F-9-468

F-9-466

Connector

x4

2) Open the HDD Lid. Option HDD

• 1 Screw (The removed screws will be used in step 8.)

HDD Support Plate

Spacer

Vibration-prevention Dumper F-9-467

9

Installation > [TYPE-1] > Installation Procedure > Procedure to Replace with the HDD

F-9-469

9-171

9

Installation > [TYPE-1] > Installation Procedure > Procedure to Replace with the HDD

3) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front.

9-172

5) Insert the assembled Option HDD into the Slot.1 (on the left side).

• 1 Screw (The removed screws will be used in step 7.)

F-9-470

6) Connect 2 connecters to the Option HDD. 4) Remove the HDD. (The removed HDD will not be used.) • 2 Connecters

x2 x2

F-9-472

F-9-471

7) Return the HDD Fixed Plate to its original position. (1 Screw) 8) Close the HDD Lid. (1 Screw) 9) Close the HDD Cover. 10)

9

Connect the power plug to the outlet.

Installation > [TYPE-1] > Installation Procedure > Procedure to Replace with the HDD

9-172

9

Installation > [TYPE-1] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

Installing the System Software Using the SST The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when

9-173

Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system

When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment.

software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after

Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

installation of this product. Details follow. 1. Requirements 1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable 2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. 3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode). 3. Selecting the System Software 1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST. 3) Click ‘Register Firmware’. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click ‘SEARCH’. 5) Click ‘REGISTER’. 6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click "Start". 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

9

Installation > [TYPE-1] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-173

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

[TYPE-2]

[10] Conversion Connector X2

Removable HDD Kit

9-174

[11] Gasket Cover Plate X1

[12] Handle Label X 1

[14] R-HDD Label X 1

[15] Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) X 7

Use 1 of them

Checking the Contents [1] HDD Drawer Unit X 1

[2] IV Cable (A:HDD-Pow1/A:HDD-Sig1) X1

[3] HDD Lock Pin X 2 [13] Shutdown Caution Label X 1

Use 5 of them

[4] HDD Lock Spring X 2

[5] HDD Face Plate X 1

[6] HDD Handle X 2 [16] Screw (P Tightening; M3x8) X 4

Use 1 of them

[17] Wire Saddle X 2

Use 2 of them

[7] HDD Connector Plate X2

Use 1 of them

[8] HDD Cover X 2

Use 1 of them

[9] Connector Fixing Block X 2

Use 1 of them

F-9-474

< CD/ Guides > • FCC/IC Sheet

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power F-9-473

Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-174

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

Installation Procedure

9-175

3) Remove the Box Left Cover.

■■Removing the HDD Unit

• 2 Screws

1) Push section [A] to open the HDD Cover.

x2

[A]

F-9-477

4) Remove the Box Upper Cover.

F-9-475

• 2 Screws

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. • 2 Screws

x2

x2

F-9-478

F-9-476

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-175

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-176

5) Remove the Rear Upper Cover.

7) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD.

• 9 Screws

• 2 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors 8) Remove 1 screw of the HDD Unit. (The removed screws will be used in “Installing the HDD Unit” step 5.)

x9

x2 Wire Saddle

x2 Connector F-9-479

6) Open the HDD Lid. • 1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)

F-9-481

F-9-480

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-176

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9) Pull the HDD Unit a little from the host machine, and pull the cable out through the hole [A].

10)

9-177

Remove the HDD Unit from the host machine.

[A]

F-9-482

CAUTION:

F-9-484

11)

Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine. (The removed

cables will not be used.)

Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.

• 2 Connectors • 1 Edge Saddle • 5 Wire Saddles

Grounding Plate

Connector

x2 x6 Edge Saddle

F-9-483

Wire Saddle F-9-485

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-177

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

■■Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-178

3) Remove the HDD.

1) Remove the 2 wire saddles. (The removed wire saddles will not be used.)

F-9-488 F-9-486

4) Remove the E ring and the shaft from the HDD Unit, and remove the HDD Fixation Plate. (The removed E ring, shaft and HDD Fixation Plate will not be used.)

2) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front. • 1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)

F-9-489 F-9-487

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-178

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-179

5) Remove the Upper Rail from the HDD Unit.

7) Put the 2 HDD Lock Pins and 2 HDD Lock Springs into the holes of the Upper Rail.

• • Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 8.)

8) Install the Upper Rail to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap. 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 5.)

x2 x2 Boss

F-9-490

Boss

6) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed Upper Rail in the order of the arrows in the

F-9-492

figure below. (The removed Leaf Spring will not be used.) • 2 Bosses

NOTE: The position where the Upper Rail is to be installed is different from the position where it was originally installed. Be careful not to install it to the original position.

• 2 Arms Boss

Arm

Boss

Boss

Boss

Turn over

Screw F-9-491

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

Upper Rail

F-9-493

9-179

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9) Remove the Lower Rail, and then install it to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap. • 2 Bosses

10)

9-180

Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up,

remove the Lower Drawer Cable (The Signal Cable Blue side).

• 2 Screws

• 2 Screws • 2 Springs

NOTE: Perform this work with the HDD Unit placed on its side in order to prevent the Grounding Plate from being deformed.

• 2 Washers (The removed springs and washers will be used in step 13.)

x2

Lower Rail

Drawer Cable Edge Saddle

Washer Spring Screw F-9-495

x2

Boss

Boss

11)

Remove the Drawer Cable. (The removed Drawer Cable will not be used.)

• 2 Screws (Removed screw will be used in step 12.)

x2

x2

F-9-496

Boss

Boss F-9-494

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-180

9 12)

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

Install the IV Cable.

14)

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 11.)

9-181

Install the HDD Drawer Unit.

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

x2

F-9-497

13)

Install the IV Cable of HDD Drawer Unit.

F-9-499

15)

• 2 Screws

Install the HDD Face Plate.

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

• 2 Springs • 2 Washers (Use the parts removed in step 10.)

x2

IV Cable

Washer Spring F-9-500

Screw F-9-498

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-181

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9-182

■■Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine 1) Disassemble the removed HDD.

NOTE: Use the parts disassembled in step 1 and parts included in the Removable HDD Kit.

2) Assemble the HDD disassembled in step 1.

• 4 Screws (W Sems)

• 1 HDD Support Plate

• 1 HDD Support Plate

• 1 HDD Connector Plate (Included in the Removable HDD Kit) • 1 HDD • 4 Screws (W Sems)

x4

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate

HDD HDD Support Plate F-9-501

Vibration-prevention Dumper

HDD Connector Plate F-9-503

CAUTION:

HDD

• Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction. • Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate.

Connector Screw hole

Label

x4

HDD Connector Plate

Connector

Screw hole F-9-502

HDD Support Plate F-9-504

9

9-182

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9-183

3) Install the Conversion Connector.

x2

CAUTION:

Boss

Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector.

Hole

F-9-507

5) Install the HDD Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) F-9-505

CAUTION: 4) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixing Block into the holes of the Conversion Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

• 2 Screws (P tightening; M3x8) CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixing Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

Claw F-9-508

F-9-506

9

9-183

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-184

■■Installing the HDD Unit

6) Install the HDD Handle. • 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

1) Close the 4 wire saddles [A]. 2) Install the 2 wire saddles.

CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

[A]

x2

F-9-511

3) Insert the HDD Unit until it stops. F-9-509

7) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD. 8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

NOTE: The [A] part should be fitted in the cut-off. 4) Install the Gasket Cover Plate on the Gasket. 5) Secure the HDD Unit. • 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 8 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

[A]

HDD No.

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX

F-9-510

9

Gasket Cover Plate

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

F-9-512

9-184

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

6) Secure the cable (Short) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) in place using the Wire

9-185

8) Insert the Removable HDD into the Slot.2 (on the rear side).

Saddle. 7) Connect the 2 connectors of the cable (Long) of Slot.2 (on the rear side), and secure the cable as shown in the figure. • 1 Edge Saddle • 2 Wire Saddles NOTE: Secure the cable (Long) of the Slot.2 (on the rear side) using the Wire Saddle [A] with the cable wound 1 time.

F-9-514

9) Affix the Shutdown Caution Label for applicable language to align with the ruled line on the HDD Lid.

Edge Saddle

x2

Connector

Wire Saddle [A]

x3

Shutdown Caution Label F-9-515

Wire Saddle

F-9-513

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-185

9 10)

Close the HDD Lid.

11)

Affix the Handle Label on the Handle part of the HDD Lid.

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-186

Handle Label

F-9-516

12)

Install the removed covers.

• Rear Upper Cover (9 Screws) CAUTION: When installing the Rear Upper Cover, tighten the screws while the Main Controller PCB is secured to the host machine. • Box Upper Cover (2 Screws) • Box Left Cover (2 Screws) CAUTION: When installing the Box Left Cover, be careful not to trap the cables. • Main Controller Right Cover Unit (2 Screws) • HDD Cover (Close)

13)

Insert the power plug to the outlet.

14)

Turn ON the main power switch.

9

Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-186

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit

[TYPE-3]

9-187

■■Removable HDD Kit

Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit

[1] HDD Drawer Unit X 1

[2] IV Cable (A:HDD-Pow1/A:HDD-Sig1) X1

[4] HDD Lock Spring X 2

[5] HDD Face Plate X 1

Checking the Contents

[3] HDD Lock Pin X 2

■■Option HDD (1TB) [1] HDD Support Pate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[3] Vibration-prevention Dumper X 4 [6] HDD Handle X 2

Use 1 of them

[4] Spacer X 4

[5] Screw (W sems; M3x14) X 4

[6] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2 [7] HDD Connector Plate X2

[8] HDD Cover X 2

Use 1 of them

Use 1 of them

[9] Connector Fixing Block X 2

Use 1 of them

[7] Gasket X 1

F-9-518

F-9-517

< CD/Guides > • FCC/IC Sheet

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit

9-187

9 [10] Conversion Connector X2

[11] Gasket Cover Plate X1

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-188

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

[12] Handle Label X 1

Check that the main power switch is OFF.

Use 1 of them

1) Turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

[13] Shutdown Caution Label X 1

[14] R-HDD Label X 1

[15] Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) X 7

Use 5 of them

Installation Procedure ■■Removing the HDD Unit 1) Push section [A] to open the HDD Cover.

[16] Screw (P Tightening; M3x8) X 4

[17] Wire Saddle X 2

Use 2 of them [A]

F-9-519

< CD/Guides >

F-9-520

• FCC/IC Sheet

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-188

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit.

4) Remove the Box Upper Cover.

• 2 Screws

• 2 Screws

9-189

x2

x2

F-9-523

F-9-521

3) Remove the Box Left Cover.

5) Remove the Rear Upper Cover.

• 2 Screws

• 9 Screws

x9

x2

F-9-522

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

F-9-524

9-189

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

6) Open the HDD Lid.

9-190

9) Pull the HDD Unit a little from the host machine, and pull the cable out through the hole [A].

• 1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.) [A]

F-9-527 F-9-525

CAUTION: Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.

7) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD. • 2 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors 8) Remove 1 screw of the HDD Unit. (The removed screws will be used in “Installing the HDD Unit” step 5.)

Grounding Plate

x2 Wire Saddle

x2 Connector

F-9-528

F-9-526

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-190

9 10)

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-191

■■Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

Remove the HDD Unit from the host machine.

1) Remove the 2 wire saddles. (The removed wire saddles will not be used.)

F-9-529

11)

F-9-531

Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine. (The removed

cables will not be used.)

2) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front.

• 2 Connectors

• 1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)

• 1 Edge Saddle • 5 Wire Saddles Connector

x2 x6 Edge Saddle

Wire Saddle

F-9-532 F-9-530

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-191

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

3) Remove the HDD. (The removed HDD will not be used.)

9-192

5) Remove the Upper Rail from the HDD Unit. • • Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 8.)

x2

F-9-533 F-9-535

4) Remove the E ring and the shaft from the HDD Unit, and remove the HDD Fixation Plate. (The removed E ring, shaft and HDD Fixation Plate will not be used.)

6) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed Upper Rail in the order of the arrows in the figure below. (The removed Leaf Spring will not be used.) • 2 Bosses • 2 Arms Boss

Arm

Boss

Turn over

F-9-534

F-9-536

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-192

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-193

7) Put the 2 HDD Lock Pins and 2 HDD Lock Springs into the holes of the Upper Rail.

9) Remove the Lower Rail, and then install it to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap.

8) Install the Upper Rail to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap.

• 2 Bosses

• 2 Bosses

• 2 Screws

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 5.) NOTE: Perform this work with the HDD Unit placed on its side in order to prevent the Grounding Plate from being deformed.

x2

Lower Rail Boss

Boss F-9-537

NOTE: The position where the Upper Rail is to be installed is different from the position where it was originally installed. Be careful not to install it to the original position.

x2

Boss

Boss

Boss

Boss

x2 Screw

Upper Rail

F-9-538

Boss

Boss F-9-539

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-193

9 10)

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up,

remove the Lower Drawer Cable (The Signal Cable Blue side).

12)

9-194

Install the IV Cable.

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 11.)

• 2 Screws • 2 Springs • 2 Washers (The removed springs and washers will be used in step 13.)

x2

x2

Drawer Cable Edge Saddle

Washer Spring

F-9-542

Screw

13)

F-9-540

11)

Install the IV Cable of HDD Drawer Unit.

• 2 Screws

Remove the Drawer Cable. (The removed Drawer Cable will not be used.)

• 2 Screws (Removed screw will be used in step 12.)

• 2 Springs • 2 Washers (Use the parts removed in step 10.)

x2

x2

IV Cable

Washer Spring Screw F-9-541

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

F-9-543

9-194

9 14)

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

9-195

■■Assembling the Option HDD

Install the HDD Drawer Unit.

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction. • Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate.

Screw hole

Label

Connector

F-9-544

15)

Screw hole

Install the HDD Face Plate.

F-9-546

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

F-9-545

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

9-195

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

NOTE: Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit.

9-196

2) Install the Conversion Connector. CAUTION: Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector.

1) Assemble the Option HDD (1TB). • 1 HDD Support Plate • 4 Vibration-prevention Dumpers • 4 Spacers • 1 HDD Connector Plate (Included in the Removable HDD Kit) • 1 Option HDD • 4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14) NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate F-9-549

Vibration-prevention Dumper

HDD Connector Plate F-9-547

Option HDD

Connector HDD Connector Plate

x4

(Included in Removable HDD Kit)

HDD Support Plate Spacer

Vibration-prevention Damper

9

F-9-548

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

9-196

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

3) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixing Block into the holes of the Conversion Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.

9-197

4) Install the HDD Cover. • 1 Claw

• 2 Screws (P tightening; M3x8)

• 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6)

CAUTION:

CAUTION:

• Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixing Block when tightening the screws.

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

• Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

F-9-550

Claw F-9-552

x2

Boss

Hole

F-9-551

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

9-197

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-198

■■Installing the HDD Unit

5) Install the HDD Handle. • 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

1) Close the 4 wire saddles [A]. 2) Install the 2 wire saddles.

CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

[A]

x2

F-9-555

3) Insert the HDD Unit until it stops. F-9-553

6) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD. 7) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

NOTE: The [A] part should be fitted in the cut-off. 4) Install the Gasket Cover Plate on the Gasket. 5) Secure the HDD Unit. • 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 8 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

[A]

HDD No.

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX

F-9-554

9

Gasket Cover Plate

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

F-9-556

9-198

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

6) Secure the cable (Short) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) in place using the Wire

9-199

8) Insert the Removable HDD into the Slot.2 (on the rear side).

Saddle. 7) Connect the 2 connectors of the cable (Long) of Slot.2 (on the rear side), and secure the cable as shown in the figure. • 1 Edge Saddle • 2 Wire Saddles NOTE: Secure the cable (Long) of the Slot.2 (on the rear side) using the Wire Saddle [A] with the cable wound 1 time.

F-9-558

9) Affix the Shutdown Caution Label for applicable language to align with the ruled line on the HDD Lid.

Edge Saddle

x2

Connector

Wire Saddle [A]

x3

Shutdown Caution Label F-9-559

Wire Saddle

F-9-557

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-199

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-200

Installing the System Software Using the SST

10)

Close the HDD Lid.

11)

Affix the Handle Label on the Handle part of the HDD Lid.

The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system

Handle Label

software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after installation of this product. Details follow. 1. Requirements 1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable 2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. F-9-560

12)

Install the removed covers.

3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode). 3. Selecting the System Software

• Rear Upper Cover (9 Screws)

1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST.

CAUTION: When installing the Rear Upper Cover, tighten the screws while the Main Controller PCB is secured to the host machine.

3) Click ‘Register Firmware’. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click ‘SEARCH’. 5) Click ‘REGISTER’. 6) Click OK.

• Box Upper Cover (2 Screws) • Box Left Cover (2 Screws)

4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen.

CAUTION: When installing the Box Left Cover, be careful not to trap the cables.

2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode.

• Main Controller Right Cover Unit (2 Screws)

3) Select the version to be downloaded and click "Start".

• HDD Cover (Close)

4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is

13)

Insert the power plug to the outlet.

automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-200

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-201

Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

9

Installation > [TYPE-3] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-201

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (160GB)

[TYPE-4]

9-202

Checking the Contents ■■Option HDD (160GB)

Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

[1] HDD Support Pate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[3] Vibration-prevention Dumper X 4

[4] Spacer X 4

[5] Screw (W sems; M3x14) X 4

[6] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn. If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.

Use 1 of them

[7] Gasket X 1

F-9-561

< CD/Guides > • FCC/IC Sheet

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (160GB)

9-202

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

■■HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit [1] Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) x 1

[4] Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) x 1

[7] LED Board (Large) x 1

[10] STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843) x 1

[2] Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) x 1

[5] Power Cable (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) x 1

[8] Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x 1

[11] Wire Saddle (Small) x5

[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10

[15] LED Label (Large) x 1

[16] Signal Cable (80mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8436) x 1

[17] Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8438) x 1

[18] Power Cable (80mm; A:HDD-Pow1/2 or FK2-8461) x 2

[19] LED Board (小) x 1

[20] LED Cable (1200mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0839) x 1

[21] STS Cable (550mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0842) x 1

[22] Edge Saddle x 1

[23] LED Label (Small) x 1

[24] HDD Connection Plate x 1

[25] Ring Core x 1

Use 5 of them

[3] Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) x 1

[6] Power Cable (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) x 1

[9] LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) x 1

9-203

[12] Wire Saddle (Middle) x1

Use 4 of them [13] Wire Saddle (Large) x1 F-9-563 F-9-562

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

9-203

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-204

Installation Procedure

< CD/Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit > • HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation CD • FCC/IC Sheet

■■Removing the HDD Unit

< CD/Guides of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > • HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation

1) Push section [A] to open the HDD Cover.

• HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice • FCC/IC Sheet • Installation Procedure

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power (HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit only) [A]

CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting. Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board. When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

F-9-564

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. • 2 Screws

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1). COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

x2

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-565

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-204

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

3) Remove the Box Left Cover.

5) Remove the Rear Upper Cover.

• 2 Screws

• 9 Screws

9-205

x9

x2

F-9-568

F-9-566

6) Open the HDD Lid.

4) Remove the Box Upper Cover.

• 1 Screw (The removed screw is reused at step 4 of “Installing the HDD Unit”)

• 2 Screws

x2

F-9-567

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

F-9-569

9-205

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-206

CAUTION:

7) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD.

Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.

• 2 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors 8) Remove 1 screw of the HDD Unit. (The removed screws will be used in “Installing the HDD Unit” step 2.)

Grounding Plate

x2 Wire Saddle

x2 Connector F-9-572

F-9-570

10)

Remove the HDD Unit from the host machine.

9) Pull the HDD Unit a little from the host machine, and pull the cable out through the hole [A]. [A]

F-9-573

F-9-571

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-206

9 11)

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine. (The removed

cables will not be used.)

9-207

1) Assemble the Option HDD (160GB). • 1 HDD Support Plate

• 2 Connectors

• 4 Vibration-prevention Dumpers

• 1 Edge Saddle

• 4 Spacers

• 5 Wire Saddles

• 1 Option HDD • 4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14)

Connector

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD.

x2

HDD

HDD Support Plate

x6 Edge Saddle

Vibration-prevention Dumper

Wire Saddle

F-9-576 F-9-574

Connector

■■Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

Option HDD

CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.

x4

• Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector.

HDD Support Plate

Spacer

Vibration-prevention Dumper F-9-577

[A] Connecter Label F-9-575

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-207

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

2) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front.

4) Install the HDD Fixed Plate.

• 1 Screw (The removed screws will be used in step 4.)

• 1 Screw (Use the screws removed in step 2.)

9-208

• 1 Screw (TP; M3x6) (Use the contents included in the Option HDD.)

x2

F-9-578 F-9-579

3) Insert the assembled Option HDD into the Slot.2 (on the right side).

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-208

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

■■Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

9-209

3) Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

1) Install 1 wire saddle (Large), 1 wire saddle (Middle), and 4 wire saddles (Small).

• 4 screws (TP; M3x6) CAUTION: The marks "CHA" and "CHB" on the PCB should be facing the engraved marks "A" and "B".

Wire Saddle (Small)

Wire Aaddle (Large) CHB

Wire Saddle (Middle)

CHA

Wire Saddle (Small)

F-9-580

2) Connect the Signal Cable and Power Cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board. • Power Cable (Long) (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) • Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) • Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) • Power Cable (Short) (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) Power Cable (430mm) CHB

Signal Cable (370mm(Blue))

CHA

Signal Cable (340mm(Red))

x4

B A

Power Cable (320mm)

x4 F-9-582

F-9-581

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

9-209

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

4) Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435), the Power Cable (430mm;

9-210

5) Install the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the LED Board (Large).

A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) and STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843). CAUTION: • Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) so that the label faces up. • Push the tag of the Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) inward not to interfere other operations.

LED Cable

• Route cables equally to eliminate unnecessary slack.

LED Board

• Since it can be operated without the STS Cable connection, check the connection at the installation. Connector Wire Saddle

F-9-584

Connector Wire Saddle

x6 x8

6) Insert the LED Board (Large) to the hook part [A] of the host machine to install. • 1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

Edge Saddle

Power Cable

[A]

Connector

Wire Saddle

Signal Cable STS Cable F-9-583

F-9-585

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

9-210

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

7) Connect the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

9-211

■■Installing the HDD Unit NOTE: The following shows the combination of the HDD and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

• 1 Connector • 7 Wire Saddles

• Connect Slot.1 to “CH A” (The HDD which originally mounted) • Connect Slot.2 to “CH B” (New HDD)

CAUTION: Since it can be operated without the LED Cable connection, check the connection at the installation.

Signal Cable (Red) Signal Cable (Blue) LED Cable

Wire Saddle

Slo

Slo

t.1 (

t.2 (

Power Cable

HD

HD

D2)

D1)

CH

B

CH

A

Power Cable

x7 Connector Wire Saddle

F-9-588

Wire Saddle F-9-586

1) Insert the HDD Unit approx. 2/3 along the rails of the host machine, and pass the Signal Cable and the Power Cable through the hole [A].

8) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Cable with the 5 wire saddles. [A] Wire Saddle

x4 x5

Power Cable Signal Cable (Blue) Signal Cable (Red)

Power Cable

F-9-589 F-9-587

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-211

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

2) Install the HDD Unit by inserting it until it stops. • 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 8 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

Power Cable (320mm)

x4 x2

Signal Cable (340mm(Red)) Signal Cable (370mm(Blue))

NOTE:

• The [A] part should be fitted in the cut-off. • Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.

9-212

Wire Saddle

Power Cable (430mm)

Grounding Plate

[A] F-9-591

4) Close the HDD Lid. • 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 6 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

F-9-590

3) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable to the HDD. • Connect the Power Cable (320 mm; A: HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) and the Signal Cable (340 mm (Red); A: HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) to the Slot.1 (on the host machine side). • Connect the Signal Cable (370 mm (Blue); A: HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) and the Power Cable (430 mm; A: HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) to the Slot.2 (on the rear side), and secure the 4 cables using the 2 Wire Saddles. F-9-592

5) Affix the LED Label according to align with the ruled line on the HDD Lid.

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-212

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-213

6) Install the removed covers. • Rear Upper Cover (9 Screws) CAUTION: When installing the Rear Upper Cover, tighten the screws while the Main Controller PCB is secured to the host machine. • Box Upper Cover (2 Screws) • Box Left Cover (2 Screws) LED Label

CAUTION: F-9-593

When installing the Box Left Cover, be careful not to trap the cables. • Main Controller Right Cover Unit (2 Screws) • HDD Cover (Close)

7) Insert the power plug to the outlet. 8) Turn ON the main power switch.

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-213

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark

After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

9-214

■■Checking the Security Version 1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.

■■Installing the System Software Using the SST The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after installation of this product. Details follow.

2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel. 3) Make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version information of the security chip. When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed. CAUTION:

1. Requirements 1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.

The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.

2) Cross Ethernet Cable

■■Checking the Security Mark

2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.

The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host

2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable.

machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark

3) Turn on the PC.

appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating

4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

3. Selecting the System Software 1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST. 3) Click ‘Register Firmware’. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click ‘SEARCH’.

< Confirming the Security Mark > When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark ( displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

) is

5) Click ‘REGISTER’. 6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click "Start". 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark

9-214

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

Setting for Mirroring

9-215

After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit ■■Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work

1) Specify the setting for Mirroring. • Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID; select “1” for W/RAID.

When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable the setting value.

following:

3) Check that the UI screen is started normally.

At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that

4) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.

the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function

• The green LED of HDD1 (Slot.1) is flashing.

becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and

• The green and red LEDs of HDD2 (Slot.2) are flashing.

request .

CAUTION:

Completion of the Installation Work:

Re-building process starts after setting W/RAID to “1”. When the error indicating the message of “Need to replace Hard Disk (Contact with Service Technician)” on the UI occurs, re-execute the re-building process as follows; 1) Check the lighted Red LED is for the HDD2. 2) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to “0”.

Ask the system administrator to make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version. Maintenance of the Security Functions:

3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting value.

Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security

4) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to “1”.

functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description

5) Turn OFF/ON e the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting value.

of Checking the Security Mark.

The abovementioned procedure is limited only for the re-building process at the initial installation. The error occurred at re-building process during operation is not targeted.

HDD1(Slot1)

■■Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

HDD2(Slot2)

F-9-594

9

Installation > [TYPE-4] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-215

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Checking the Contents > 2 Option HDDs (1TB)

[TYPE-5]

9-216

Checking the Contents

2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

■■2 Option HDDs (1TB) [1] HDD Support Pate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[3] Vibration-prevention Dumper X 4

[4] Spacer X 4

[5] Screw (W sems; M3x14) X 4

[6] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn. If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.

Use 1 of them

[7] Gasket X 1

F-9-595

< CD/Guides > • FCC/IC Sheet

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Checking the Contents > 2 Option HDDs (1TB)

9-216

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

■■HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit [1] Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) x 1

[4] Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) x 1

[7] LED Board (Large) x 1

[10] STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843) x 1

[2] Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) x 1

[5] Power Cable (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) x 1

[8] Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x 1

[11] Wire Saddle (Small) x5

[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10

[3] Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) x 1

[15] LED Label (Large) x 1

[16] Signal Cable (80mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8436) x 1

[17] Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8438) x 1

[18] Power Cable (80mm; A:HDD-Pow1/2 or FK2-8461) x 2

[19] LED Board (小) x 1

[20] LED Cable (1200mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0839) x 1

[21] STS Cable (550mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0842) x 1

[22] Edge Saddle x 1

[23] LED Label (Small) x 1

[24] HDD Connection Plate x 1

[25] Ring Core x 1

Use 5 of them

[6] Power Cable (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) x 1

[9] LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) x 1

[12] Wire Saddle (Middle) x1

9-217

Use 4 of them [13] Wire Saddle (Large) x1 F-9-597 F-9-596

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

9-217

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-218

Installation Procedure

< CD/Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit > • HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation CD • FCC/IC Sheet

■■Removing the HDD Unit

< CD/Guides of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > • HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation

1) Push section [A] to open the HDD Cover.

• HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice • FCC/IC Sheet • Installation Procedure

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power (HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit only) [A]

CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting. Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board. When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

F-9-598

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. • 2 Screws

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1). COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

x2

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-599

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-218

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

3) Remove the Box Left Cover.

5) Remove the Rear Upper Cover.

• 2 Screws

• 9 Screws

9-219

x9

x2

F-9-602

F-9-600

6) Open the HDD Lid.

4) Remove the Box Upper Cover.

• 1 Screw (The removed screw is reused at step 4 of “Installing the HDD Unit”)

• 2 Screws

x2

F-9-601

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

F-9-603

9-219

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-220

CAUTION:

7) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD.

Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.

• 2 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors 8) Remove 1 screw of the HDD Unit. (The removed screws will be used in “Installing the HDD Unit” step 2.)

Grounding Plate

x2 Wire Saddle

x2 Connector F-9-606

F-9-604

10)

Remove the HDD Unit from the host machine.

9) Pull the HDD Unit a little from the host machine, and pull the cable out through the hole [A]. [A]

F-9-607

F-9-605

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-220

9 11)

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine. (The removed

cables will not be used.)

9-221

1) Assemble the Option HDD (1TB). • 1 HDD Support Plate

• 2 Connectors

• 4 Vibration-prevention Dumpers

• 1 Edge Saddle

• 4 Spacers

• 5 Wire Saddles

• 1 Option HDD • 4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14)

Connector

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD.

x2

HDD

HDD Support Plate

x6 Edge Saddle

Vibration-prevention Dumper

Wire Saddle

F-9-610 F-9-608

Connector

■■Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

Option HDD

CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.

x4

• Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector.

HDD Support Plate

Spacer

Vibration-prevention Dumper F-9-611

[A]

2) Assemble the other Option HDD (1TB) in the same way.

Connecter Label F-9-609

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-221

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

3) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front, and remove the HDD. (The removed HDD will not be used.)

9-222

5) Install the HDD Fixed Plate. • 1 Screw (Use the screws removed in step 3.)

• 1 Screw (The removed screws will be used in step 5.)

• 1 Screw (TP; M3x6) (Use the contents included in the Option HDD.)

NOTE: If the Wire Saddles [A] interfere with removal of the HDD, remove the 2 Wire Saddles [A].

x2

[A]

F-9-614

F-9-612

4) Insert the 2 assembled Option HDDs into the slots 1 and 2. NOTE: If you have removed the Wire Saddles [A] in the previous step, install the 2 Wire Saddles [A] after inserting the 2 Option HDDs.

[A]

F-9-613

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-222

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

■■Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

9-223

3) Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

1) Install 1 wire saddle (Large), 1 wire saddle (Middle), and 4 wire saddles (Small).

• 4 screws (TP; M3x6) CAUTION: The marks "CHA" and "CHB" on the PCB should be facing the engraved marks "A" and "B".

Wire Saddle (Small)

Wire Aaddle (Large) CHB

Wire Saddle (Middle)

CHA

Wire Saddle (Small)

F-9-615

2) Connect the Signal Cable and Power Cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board. • Power Cable (Long) (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) • Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) • Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) • Power Cable (Short) (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) Power Cable (430mm) CHB

Signal Cable (370mm(Blue))

CHA

Signal Cable (340mm(Red))

x4

B A

Power Cable (320mm)

x4 F-9-617

F-9-616

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

9-223

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

4) Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435), the Power Cable (430mm;

9-224

5) Install the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the LED Board (Large).

A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) and STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843). CAUTION: • Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) so that the label faces up. • Push the tag of the Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) inward not to interfere other operations.

LED Cable

• Route cables equally to eliminate unnecessary slack.

LED Board

• Since it can be operated without the STS Cable connection, check the connection at the installation. Connector Wire Saddle

F-9-619

Connector Wire Saddle

x6 x8

6) Insert the LED Board (Large) to the hook part [A] of the host machine to install. • 1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

Edge Saddle

Power Cable

[A]

Connector

Wire Saddle

Signal Cable STS Cable F-9-618

F-9-620

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

9-224

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

7) Connect the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

9-225

■■Installing the HDD Unit NOTE: The following shows the combination of the HDD and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

• 1 Connector • 7 Wire Saddles

• Connect Slot.1 to “CH A” (New HDD) • Connect Slot.2 to “CH B” (New HDD)

CAUTION: Since it can be operated without the LED Cable connection, check the connection at the installation.

Signal Cable (Red) Signal Cable (Blue) LED Cable

Wire Saddle

Slo

Slo

t.1 (

t.2 (

Power Cable

HD

HD

D2)

D1)

CH

B

CH

A

Power Cable

x7 Connector Wire Saddle

F-9-623

Wire Saddle F-9-621

1) Insert the HDD Unit approx. 2/3 along the rails of the host machine, and pass the Signal Cable and the Power Cable through the hole [A].

8) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Cable with the 5 wire saddles. [A] Wire Saddle

x4 x5

Power Cable Signal Cable (Blue) Signal Cable (Red)

Power Cable

F-9-624 F-9-622

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-225

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-226

2) Install the HDD Unit by inserting it until it stops.

4) Close the HDD Lid.

• 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 8 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

• 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 6 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

NOTE:

• The [A] part should be fitted in the cut-off. • Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate. Grounding Plate

[A]

F-9-627

5) Affix the LED Label according to align with the ruled line on the HDD Lid.

F-9-625

3) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable to the HDD. • Connect the Power Cable (320 mm; A: HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) and the Signal Cable (340 mm (Red); A: HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) to the Slot.1 (on the host machine side). • Connect the Signal Cable (370 mm (Blue); A: HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) and the Power Cable (430 mm; A: HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) to the Slot.2 (on the rear side), and secure the 4 cables using the 2 Wire Saddles. Power Cable (320mm)

x4 x2

Signal Cable (340mm(Red))

LED Label

Signal Cable (370mm(Blue)) Wire Saddle

F-9-628

Power Cable (430mm)

F-9-626

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-226

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-227

Installing the System Software Using the SST

6) Install the removed covers.

The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when

• Rear Upper Cover (9 Screws)

the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system

CAUTION:

software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after

When installing the Rear Upper Cover, tighten the screws while the Main Controller PCB is secured to the host machine.

installation of this product. Details follow.

• Box Upper Cover (2 Screws)

1. Requirements 1) PC

• Box Left Cover (2 Screws)

Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable

CAUTION: When installing the Box Left Cover, be careful not to trap the cables.

2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.

• Main Controller Right Cover Unit (2 Screws)

2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable.

• HDD Cover (Close)

3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

7) Insert the power plug to the outlet.

3. Selecting the System Software

8) Turn ON the main power switch.

1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST. 3) Click ‘Register Firmware’. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click ‘SEARCH’. 5) Click ‘REGISTER’. 6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click "Start". 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8)

9

Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-227

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Setting for Mirroring

After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

9-228

Setting for Mirroring

■■Checking the Security Version

1) Specify the setting for Mirroring. • Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID; select “1” for W/RAID.

1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable the setting value.

2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.

3) Check that the UI screen is started normally.

3) Make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version

4) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.

information of the security chip.

• The green LED of HDD1 (Slot.1) is flashing.

When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.

• The green and red LEDs of HDD2 (Slot.2) are flashing.

CAUTION:

CAUTION:

The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information (2.00) indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.

Re-building process starts after setting W/RAID to “1”. When the error indicating the message of “Need to replace Hard Disk (Contact with Service Technician)” on the UI occurs, re-execute the re-building process as follows; 1) Check the lighted Red LED is for the HDD2.

■■Checking the Security Mark

2) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to “0”.

The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host

3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting value.

machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark

4) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to “1”.

appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating

5) Turn OFF/ON e the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting value.

correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

The abovementioned procedure is limited only for the re-building process at the initial installation. The error occurred at re-building process during operation is not targeted.

< Confirming the Security Mark > When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark ( displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

) is HDD1(Slot1)

HDD2(Slot2)

F-9-629

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Setting for Mirroring

9-228

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-229

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (only when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been installed) When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the following: At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request . Completion of the Installation Work: Ask the system administrator to make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version. Maintenance of the Security Functions: Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description of Checking the Security Mark.

Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

9

Installation > [TYPE-5] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-229

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Checking the Contents

[TYPE-6]

9-230

Checking the Contents

Standard HDD + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

[1] Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) x 1

[2] Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) x 1

[3] Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) x 1

[4] Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) x 1

[5] Power Cable (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) x 1

[6] Power Cable (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) x 1

[7] LED Board (Large) x 1

[8] Mirroring Board x 1

[9] LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) x 1

[10] STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843) x 1

[11] Wire Saddle (Small) x5

[12] Wire Saddle (Middle) x1

A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn. If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.

Use 4 of them [13] Wire Saddle (Large) x1

F-9-630

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Checking the Contents

9-230

9 [14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10

[15] LED Label (Large) x 1

Use 5 of them

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

[16] Signal Cable (80mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8436) x 1

9-231

< CD/Guides > • HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation • HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice • FCC/IC Sheet • Installation Procedure

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power [17] Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8438) x 1

[18] Power Cable (80mm; A:HDD-Pow1/2 or FK2-8461) x 2

[19] LED Board (小) x 1

CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting. Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board. When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

[20] LED Cable (1200mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0839) x 1

[21] STS Cable (550mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0842) x 1

[22] Edge Saddle x 1

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1). COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. [23] LED Label (Small) x 1

[24] HDD Connection Plate x 1

1) Turn OFF the main power switch.

[25] Ring Core x 1

2) Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-631

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-231

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

Installation Procedure

9-232

3) Remove the Box Left Cover. • 2 Screws

■■Removing the HDD Unit 1) Push section [A] to open the HDD Cover.

x2

[A]

F-9-634

4) Remove the Box Upper Cover. • 2 Screws

F-9-632

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. • 2 Screws

x2

x2

F-9-635

F-9-633

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-232

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-233

5) Remove the Rear Upper Cover.

7) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD.

• 9 Screws

• 2 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors 8) Remove 1 screw of the HDD Unit. (The removed screws will be used in “Installing the HDD Unit” step 2.)

x9

x2 Wire Saddle

x2 Connector F-9-636

6) Open the HDD Lid. • 1 Screw (The removed screw is reused at step 4 of “Installing the HDD Unit”)

F-9-638

9) Pull the HDD Unit a little from the host machine, and pull the cable out through the hole [A]. [A]

F-9-637

F-9-639

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-233

9 CAUTION:

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

11)

Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.

9-234

Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine. (The removed

cables will not be used.) • 2 Connectors • 1 Edge Saddle • 5 Wire Saddles

Grounding Plate

Connector

x2 x6 Edge Saddle

F-9-640

Wire Saddle

10)

F-9-642

Remove the HDD Unit from the host machine.

F-9-641

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-234

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

■■Installing the Encryption Board

9-235

3) Install the Encryption Board.

1) Install 1 wire saddle (Large), 1 wire saddle (Middle), and 4 wire saddles (Small).

• 4 screws (TP; M3x6) CAUTION: The marks "CHA" and "CHB" on the PCB should be facing the engraved marks "A" and "B".

Wire Saddle (Small)

Wire Aaddle (Large) CHB

Wire Saddle (Middle)

CHA

Wire Saddle (Small)

F-9-643

2) Connect the Signal Cable and Power Cable to the Encryption Board. • Power Cable (Long) (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) • Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) • Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) • Power Cable (Short) (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) Power Cable (430mm) CHB

Signal Cable (370mm(Blue))

CHA

Signal Cable (340mm(Red))

x4

B A

Power Cable (320mm)

x4 F-9-645

F-9-644

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

9-235

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

4) Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435), the Power Cable (430mm;

9-236

5) Install the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the LED Board (Large).

A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) and STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843). CAUTION: • Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) so that the label faces up. • Push the tag of the Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) inward not to interfere other operations.

LED Cable

• Route cables equally to eliminate unnecessary slack.

LED Board

• Since it can be operated without the STS Cable connection, check the connection at the installation. Connector Wire Saddle

F-9-647

Connector Wire Saddle

x6 x8

6) Insert the LED Board (Large) to the hook part [A] of the host machine to install. • 1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

Edge Saddle

Power Cable

[A]

Connector

Wire Saddle

Signal Cable STS Cable F-9-646

F-9-648

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

9-236

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

7) Connect the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the Encryption Board. • 1 Connector

9-237

■■Installing the HDD Unit NOTE: The following shows the combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board.

• 7 Wire Saddles

• Connect Slot.1 to “CH A” (The HDD which originally mounted) • No HDD to Slot.2

CAUTION: Since it can be operated without the LED Cable connection, check the connection at the installation.

LED Cable

Signal Cable (Blue)

Wire Saddle

t.1 (

t.2 (

Power Cable

x7

Slo

Slo

HD

Bla

nk)

D1)

CH

B

CH

A

Signal Cable (Red)

Power Cable

Connector Wire Saddle

F-9-651

Wire Saddle F-9-649

1) Insert the HDD Unit approx. 2/3 along the rails of the host machine, and pass the Signal Cable and the Power Cable through the hole [A].

8) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Cable with the 5 wire saddles. [A]

Wire Saddle

x4 x5

Power Cable Signal Cable (Blue) Signal Cable (Red)

Power Cable

F-9-652 F-9-650

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-237

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

2) Install the HDD Unit by inserting it until it stops.

9-238

3-2) Fold the Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A: HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) and the Power

• 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 8 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

Cable (430mm; A: HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463), and secure the 4 cables using the 2 Wire Saddles as shown in the figure.

NOTE:

• The [A] part should be fitted in the cut-off. • Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.

NOTE: Secure the cables with the ends of the connectors facing the HDD.

Grounding Plate Signal Cable (370mm(Blue))

x2

[A]

Wire Saddle

Power Cable (430mm)

F-9-653

3) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable to the HDD.

F-9-655

4) Close the HDD Lid.

3-1) Connect the Power Cable (320 mm; A: HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) and the Signal

• 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 6 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

Cable (340 mm (Red); A: HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) to the Slot.1 (on the host machine side).

x2

Signal Cable (340mm(Red))

Power Cable (320mm)

F-9-656 F-9-654

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-238

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installing the System Software Using the SST

5) Affix the LED Label according to align with the ruled line on the HDD Lid.

9-239

Installing the System Software Using the SST The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after installation of this product. Details follow. 1. Requirements 1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable 2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine

LED Label

1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. F-9-657

2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. 3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

6) Install the removed covers. • Rear Upper Cover (9 Screws)

3. Selecting the System Software 1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used.

CAUTION: When installing the Rear Upper Cover, tighten the screws while the Main Controller PCB is secured to the host machine.

2) Start up the SST. 3) Click ‘Register Firmware’. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click ‘SEARCH’. 5) Click ‘REGISTER’.

• Box Upper Cover (2 Screws)

6) Click OK.

• Box Left Cover (2 Screws)

4. Downloading the System Software

CAUTION: When installing the Box Left Cover, be careful not to trap the cables. • Main Controller Right Cover Unit (2 Screws)

1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode.

• HDD Cover (Close)

3) Select the version to be downloaded and click "Start". 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted.

7) Insert the power plug to the outlet.

6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-239

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Checking after Installation

Checking the Security Version

9-240

Checking after Installation

1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.

1) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.

2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.

• The green LED of HDD1 (Slot.1) is flashing.

3) Make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version information of the security chip.

HDD1(Slot1)

When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed. CAUTION: The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.

Checking the Security Mark The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host

F-9-658

machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark: < Confirming the Security Mark > When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark ( displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

9

) is

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Checking after Installation

9-240

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-241

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the following: At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request . Completion of the Installation Work: Ask the system administrator to make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version. Maintenance of the Security Functions: Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description of Checking the Security Mark.

Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

9

Installation > [TYPE-6] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-241

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (1TB)

[TYPE-7]

9-242

Checking the Contents ■■Option HDD (1TB)

Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

[1] HDD Support Pate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[3] Vibration-prevention Dumper X 4

[4] Spacer X 4

[5] Screw (W sems; M3x14) X 4

[6] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn. If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.

[7] Gasket X 1

F-9-659

< CD/Guides > • FCC/IC Sheet

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (1TB)

9-242

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

■■HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit [1] Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) x 1

[4] Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) x 1

[7] LED Board (Large) x 1

[10] STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843) x 1

[2] Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) x 1

[5] Power Cable (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) x 1

[8] Mirroring Board x 1

[11] Wire Saddle (Small) x5

[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10 [3] Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) x 1

[15] LED Label (Large) x 1

[16] Signal Cable (80mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8436) x 1

[17] Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8438) x 1

[18] Power Cable (80mm; A:HDD-Pow1/2 or FK2-8461) x 2

[19] LED Board (小) x 1

[20] LED Cable (1200mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0839) x 1

[21] STS Cable (550mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0842) x 1

[22] Edge Saddle x 1

[23] LED Label (Small) x 1

[24] HDD Connection Plate x 1

[25] Ring Core x 1

Use 5 of them

[6] Power Cable (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) x 1

[9] LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) x 1

[12] Wire Saddle (Middle) x1

9-243

Use 4 of them [13] Wire Saddle (Large) x1 F-9-661 F-9-660

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

9-243

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-244

Installation Procedure

< CD/Guides > • HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation • HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice

■■Removing the HDD Unit

• FCC/IC Sheet • Installation Procedure

1) Push section [A] to open the HDD Cover.

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting. Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board.

[A]

When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1).

F-9-662

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. • 2 Screws

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

x2

1) Turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-663

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-244

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

3) Remove the Box Left Cover.

5) Remove the Rear Upper Cover.

• 2 Screws

• 9 Screws

9-245

x9

x2

F-9-666

F-9-664

6) Open the HDD Lid.

4) Remove the Box Upper Cover.

• 1 Screw (The removed screw is reused at step 4 of “Installing the HDD Unit”)

• 2 Screws

x2

F-9-665

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

F-9-667

9-245

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-246

CAUTION:

7) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD.

Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.

• 2 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors 8) Remove 1 screw of the HDD Unit. (The removed screws will be used in “Installing the HDD Unit” step 2.)

Grounding Plate

x2 Wire Saddle

x2 Connector F-9-670

F-9-668

10)

Remove the HDD Unit from the host machine.

9) Pull the HDD Unit a little from the host machine, and pull the cable out through the hole [A]. [A]

F-9-671

F-9-669

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-246

9 11)

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine. (The removed

cables will not be used.)

9-247

1) Assemble the Option HDD (1TB). • 1 HDD Support Plate

• 2 Connectors

• 4 Vibration-prevention Dumpers

• 1 Edge Saddle

• 4 Spacers

• 5 Wire Saddles

• 1 Option HDD • 4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14)

Connector

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD.

x2

HDD

HDD Support Plate

x6 Edge Saddle

Vibration-prevention Dumper

Wire Saddle

F-9-674 F-9-672

Connector

■■Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

Option HDD

CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.

x4

• Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector.

HDD Support Plate

Spacer

Vibration-prevention Dumper F-9-675

[A] Connecter Label F-9-673

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-247

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

2) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front, and remove the HDD. (The removed HDD will not be used.)

9-248

4) Install the HDD Fixed Plate. • 1 Screw (Use the screws removed in step 2.)

• 1 Screw (The removed screws will be used in step 4.) NOTE: If the Wire Saddles [A] interfere with removal of the HDD, remove the 2 Wire Saddles [A].

[A]

F-9-678

F-9-676

3) Insert the 2 assembled Option HDDs into the slots 1 and 2. NOTE: If you have removed the Wire Saddles [A] in the previous step, install the 2 Wire Saddles [A] after inserting the 2 Option HDDs.

[A]

F-9-677

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-248

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

■■Installing the Encryption Board

9-249

3) Install the Encryption Board.

1) Install 1 wire saddle (Large), 1 wire saddle (Middle), and 4 wire saddles (Small).

• 4 screws (TP; M3x6) CAUTION: The marks "CHA" and "CHB" on the PCB should be facing the engraved marks "A" and "B".

Wire Saddle (Small)

Wire Aaddle (Large) CHB

Wire Saddle (Middle)

CHA

Wire Saddle (Small)

F-9-679

2) Connect the Signal Cable and Power Cable to the Encryption Board. • Power Cable (Long) (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) • Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) • Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) • Power Cable (Short) (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) Power Cable (430mm) CHB

Signal Cable (370mm(Blue))

CHA

Signal Cable (340mm(Red))

x4

B A

Power Cable (320mm)

x4 F-9-681

F-9-680

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

9-249

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

4) Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435), the Power Cable (430mm;

9-250

5) Install the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the LED Board (Large).

A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) and STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843). CAUTION: • Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) so that the label faces up. • Push the tag of the Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) inward not to interfere other operations.

LED Cable

• Route cables equally to eliminate unnecessary slack.

LED Board

• Since it can be operated without the STS Cable connection, check the connection at the installation.

Connector Wire Saddle

F-9-683

6) Insert the LED Board (Large) to the hook part [A] of the host machine to install.

Connector

• 1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

Wire Saddle

x6 x8

Edge Saddle

Power Cable

[A]

Connector

Wire Saddle

Signal Cable STS Cable F-9-682

F-9-684

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

9-250

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

7) Connect the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the Encryption Board. • 1 Connector

9-251

■■Installing the HDD Unit NOTE: The following shows the combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board.

• 7 Wire Saddles

• Connect Slot.1 to “CH A” (New HDD) • No HDD to Slot.2

CAUTION: Since it can be operated without the LED Cable connection, check the connection at the installation.

LED Cable

Signal Cable (Blue)

Wire Saddle

t.1 (

t.2 (

Power Cable

x7

Slo

Slo

HD

Bla

nk)

D1)

CH

B

CH

A

Signal Cable (Red)

Power Cable

Connector Wire Saddle

F-9-687

Wire Saddle F-9-685

1) Insert the HDD Unit approx. 2/3 along the rails of the host machine, and pass the Signal Cable and the Power Cable through the hole [A].

8) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Cable with the 5 wire saddles. [A]

Wire Saddle

x4 x5

Power Cable Signal Cable (Blue) Signal Cable (Red)

Power Cable

F-9-688 F-9-686

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-251

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

2) Install the HDD Unit by inserting it until it stops.

9-252

3-2) Fold the Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A: HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) and the Power

• 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 8 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

Cable (430mm; A: HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463), and secure the 4 cables using the 2 Wire Saddles as shown in the figure.

NOTE:

• The [A] part should be fitted in the cut-off. • Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.

NOTE: Secure the cables with the ends of the connectors facing the HDD.

Grounding Plate Signal Cable (370mm(Blue))

x2

[A]

Wire Saddle

Power Cable (430mm)

F-9-689

3) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable to the HDD.

F-9-691

4) Close the HDD Lid.

3-1) Connect the Power Cable (320 mm; A: HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) and the Signal

• 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 6 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

Cable (340 mm (Red); A: HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) to the Slot.1 (on the host machine side).

x2

Signal Cable (340mm(Red))

Power Cable (320mm)

F-9-692 F-9-690

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-252

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installing the System Software Using the SST

5) Affix the LED Label according to align with the ruled line on the HDD Lid.

9-253

Installing the System Software Using the SST The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after installation of this product. Details follow. 1. Requirements 1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable 2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine

LED Label

1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. F-9-693

2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. 3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

6) Install the removed covers. • Rear Upper Cover (9 Screws)

3. Selecting the System Software 1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used.

CAUTION: When installing the Rear Upper Cover, tighten the screws while the Main Controller PCB is secured to the host machine.

2) Start up the SST. 3) Click ‘Register Firmware’. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click ‘SEARCH’. 5) Click ‘REGISTER’.

• Box Upper Cover (2 Screws)

6) Click OK.

• Box Left Cover (2 Screws)

4. Downloading the System Software

CAUTION: When installing the Box Left Cover, be careful not to trap the cables. • Main Controller Right Cover Unit (2 Screws)

1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode.

• HDD Cover (Close)

3) Select the version to be downloaded and click "Start". 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted.

7) Insert the power plug to the outlet.

6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-253

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Checking after Installation

Checking the Security Version

9-254

Checking after Installation

1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.

1) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.

2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.

• The green LED of HDD1 (Slot.1) is flashing.

3) Make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version information of the security chip.

HDD1(Slot1)

When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed. CAUTION: The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.

Checking the Security Mark The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host

F-9-694

machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark: < Confirming the Security Mark > When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark ( displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

9

) is

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Checking after Installation

9-254

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-255

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the following: At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request . Completion of the Installation Work: Ask the system administrator to make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version. Maintenance of the Security Functions: Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description of Checking the Security Mark.

Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

9

Installation > [TYPE-7] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-255

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (160GB)

[TYPE-8]

9-256

Checking the Contents ■■Option HDD (160GB)

Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

[1] HDD Support Pate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[3] Vibration-prevention Dumper X 4

[4] Spacer X 4

[5] Screw (W sems; M3x14) X 4

[6] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn. If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.

[7] Gasket X 1

F-9-695

< CD/Guides > • FCC/IC Sheet

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (160GB)

9-256

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit

■■Removable HDD Kit [1] HDD Drawer Unit X 1

[4] HDD Lock Spring X 2

[7] HDD Connector Plate X2

[2] IV Cable (A:HDD-Pow1/A:HDD-Sig1) X1

[5] HDD Face Plate X 1

[8] HDD Cover X 2

9-257

[10] Conversion Connector X2

[11] Gasket Cover Plate X1

[12] Handle Label X 1

[13] Shutdown Caution Label X 1

[14] R-HDD Label X 1

[15] Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) X 7

[16] Screw (P Tightening; M3x8) X 4

[17] Wire Saddle X 2

[3] HDD Lock Pin X 2

[6] HDD Handle X 2

[9] Connector Fixing Block X 2

F-9-697

< CD/ Guides > F-9-696

9

• FCC/IC Sheet

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit

9-257

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

■■HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit [1] Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) x 1

[4] Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) x 1

[7] LED Board (Large) x 1

[10] STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843) x 1

[2] Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) x 1

[5] Power Cable (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) x 1

[8] Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x 1

[11] Wire Saddle (Small) x5

[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10

[15] LED Label (Large) x 1

[16] Signal Cable (80mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8436) x 1

[17] Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8438) x 1

[18] Power Cable (80mm; A:HDD-Pow1/2 or FK2-8461) x 2

[19] LED Board (小) x 1

[20] LED Cable (1200mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0839) x 1

[21] STS Cable (550mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0842) x 1

[22] Edge Saddle x 1

[23] LED Label (Small) x 1

[24] HDD Connection Plate x 1

[25] Ring Core x 1

Use 5 of them

[3] Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) x 1

[6] Power Cable (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) x 1

[9] LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) x 1

9-258

[12] Wire Saddle (Middle) x1

Use 4 of them [13] Wire Saddle (Large) x1 F-9-699 F-9-698

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

9-258

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-259

Installation Procedure

< CD/Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit > • HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation CD

■■Removing the HDD Unit

• FCC/IC Sheet < CD/Guides of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit >

1) Push section [A] to open the HDD Cover.

• HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation • HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice • FCC/IC Sheet • Installation Procedure

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power (HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit only) [A]

CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting. Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board. When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

F-9-700

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. • 2 Screws

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1). COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

x2

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-701

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-259

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

3) Remove the Box Left Cover.

5) Remove the Rear Upper Cover.

• 2 Screws

• 9 Screws

9-260

x9

x2

F-9-704

F-9-702

6) Open the HDD Lid.

4) Remove the Box Upper Cover.

• 1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)

• 2 Screws

x2

F-9-703

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

F-9-705

9-260

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-261

CAUTION:

7) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD.

Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.

• 2 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors 8) Remove 1 screw of the HDD Unit. (The removed screws will be used in “Installing the HDD Unit” step 5.)

Grounding Plate

x2 Wire Saddle

x2 Connector F-9-708

F-9-706

10)

Remove the HDD Unit from the host machine.

9) Pull the HDD Unit a little from the host machine, and pull the cable out through the hole [A]. [A]

F-9-709

F-9-707

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-261

9 11)

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine. (The removed

cables will not be used.)

9-262

■■Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit 1) Remove the 2 wire saddles. (The removed wire saddles will not be used.)

• 2 Connectors • 1 Edge Saddle • 5 Wire Saddles Connector

x2 x6 Edge Saddle

F-9-711

Wire Saddle F-9-710

2) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front. • 1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)

F-9-712

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-262

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

3) Remove the HDD.

9-263

5) Remove the Upper Rail from the HDD Unit. • • Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 8.)

x2

F-9-713 F-9-715

4) Remove the E ring and the shaft from the HDD Unit, and remove the HDD Fixation Plate. (The removed E ring, shaft and HDD Fixation Plate will not be used.)

6) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed Upper Rail in the order of the arrows in the figure below. (The removed Leaf Spring will not be used.) • 2 Bosses • 2 Arms Boss

Arm

Boss

Turn over

F-9-714

F-9-716

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-263

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-264

7) Put the 2 HDD Lock Pins and 2 HDD Lock Springs into the holes of the Upper Rail.

9) Remove the Lower Rail, and then install it to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap.

8) Install the Upper Rail to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap.

• 2 Bosses

• 2 Bosses

• 2 Screws

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 5.) NOTE: Perform this work with the HDD Unit placed on its side in order to prevent the Grounding Plate from being deformed.

x2

Lower Rail Boss

Boss F-9-717

NOTE: The position where the Upper Rail is to be installed is different from the position where it was originally installed. Be careful not to install it to the original position.

x2

Boss

Boss

Boss

Boss

x2 Screw

Upper Rail

F-9-718

Boss

Boss F-9-719

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-264

9 10)

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up,

remove the Upper Drawer Cable (The Signal Cable Red side).

12)

9-265

Install the IV Cable.

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 11.)

• 2 Screws • 2 Springs • 2 Washers (The removed springs and washers will be used in step 13.)

x2

Drawer Cable

x2

Edge Saddle

Washer Spring F-9-722

Screw

13)

F-9-720

11)

Install the IV Cable of HDD Drawer Unit.

• 2 Screws

Remove the Drawer Cable. (The removed Drawer Cable will not be used.)

• 2 Screws (Removed screw will be used in step 12.)

• 2 Springs • 2 Washers (Use the parts removed in step 10.) IV Cable

x2

x2

Washer Spring Screw

F-9-723 F-9-721

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-265

9 14)

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD)

9-266

Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD)

Install the HDD Drawer Unit.

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

1) Disassemble the removed HDD. • 4 Screws (W Sems) • 1 HDD Support Plate

x4

F-9-724

HDD HDD Support Plate F-9-725

CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction. • Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate.

Screw hole

Label

Connector

Screw hole F-9-726

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD)

9-266

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD)

NOTE: Use the parts disassembled in step 1 and parts included in the Removable HDD Kit.

9-267

3) Install the Conversion Connector. CAUTION: Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector.

2) Assemble the HDD disassembled in step 1. • 1 HDD Support Plate • 1 HDD Connector Plate (Included in the Removable HDD Kit) • 1 HDD • 4 Screws (W Sems) NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate

F-9-729

Vibration-prevention Dumper

HDD Connector Plate F-9-727

HDD

Connector

x4

HDD Connector Plate

HDD Support Plate F-9-728

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD)

9-267

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD)

4) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixing Block into the holes of the Conversion Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.

9-268

5) Install the HDD Cover. • 1 Claw

• 2 Screws (P tightening; M3x8)

• 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6)

CAUTION:

CAUTION:

• Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixing Block when tightening the screws.

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

• Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

F-9-730

Claw F-9-732

6) Install the HDD Handle.

x2

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

Boss

CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

Hole

x2 F-9-731

F-9-733

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD)

9-268

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Assembling the Option H

9-269

7) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD. 8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,

NOTE: Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit.

and affix it to the area indicated in the figure. 1) Assemble the Option HDD (160GB). • 1 HDD Support Plate • 4 Vibration-prevention Dumpers • 4 Spacers • 1 HDD Connector Plate (Included in the Removable HDD Kit)

HDD No.

• 1 Option HDD • 4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14)

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate

F-9-734

■■Assembling the Option HDD (the Second HDD) CAUTION:

Vibration-prevention Dumper

• Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.

HDD Connector Plate F-9-736

• Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. Option HDD

• Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate.

Connector

Screw hole

HDD Connector Plate

Label

Connector

x4

(Included in Removable HDD Kit)

HDD Support Plate Spacer Screw hole F-9-735

9

Vibration-prevention Damper

F-9-737

9-269

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Assembling the Option H

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Assembling the Option H

9-270

2) Install the Conversion Connector.

x2

CAUTION:

Boss

Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector.

Hole

F-9-740

4) Install the HDD Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) F-9-738

CAUTION: 3) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixing Block into the holes of the Conversion Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

• 2 Screws (P tightening; M3x8) CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixing Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

Claw F-9-741

F-9-739

9

9-270

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Assembling the Option H

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Installing the Mirroring Bo

9-271

■■Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

5) Install the HDD Handle. • 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

1) Install the 3 wire saddles (Large) (one of them is included in the HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit, and two of them are included in the Removable HDD Kit),

CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

1 wire saddle (Medium), and 4 wire saddles (Small).

Wire Saddle (Small)

x2

Wire Saddle (Large)

Wire Saddle (Large)

Wire Saddle (Middle) Wire Saddle (Small)

F-9-744

F-9-742

6) Affix the HDD No.2 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD. 7) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

HDD No.

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX F-9-743

9

9-271

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Installing the Mirroring Bo

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Installing the Mirroring Bo

9-272

2) Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

3) Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435), the Power Cable (430mm;

• 4 screws (TP; M3x6)

A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) and STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843).

CAUTION:

CAUTION:

The marks "CHA" and "CHB" on the PCB should be facing the engraved marks "A" and "B".

• Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) so that the label faces up. • Push the tag of the Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) inward not to interfere other operations. • Route cables equally to eliminate unnecessary slack.

CHB

B

CHA

A

• Since it can be operated without the STS Cable connection, check the connection at the installation. Connector Wire Saddle Connector Wire Saddle

x6 x8

Edge Saddle

Power Cable Connector

Wire Saddle

Signal Cable

x4

STS Cable F-9-746

F-9-745

9

9-272

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Installing the Mirroring Bo

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Installing the Mirroring Bo

9-273

4) Install the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the LED Board (Large).

6) Connect the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board. • 1 Connector • 7 Wire Saddles CAUTION: Since it can be operated without the LED Cable connection, check the connection at the installation.

LED Cable LED Board

LED Cable

F-9-747

Wire Saddle

x7

5) Insert the LED Board (Large) to the hook part [A] of the host machine to install. • 1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

Wire Saddle [A]

Connector

Wire Saddle F-9-749

F-9-748

9

9-273

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Installing the Mirroring Bo

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Installing the HDD Unit

9-274

■■Installing the HDD Unit

2) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

NOTE: The following shows the combination of the HDD and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

• Connect Slot.1 to “CH A” (The HDD which originally mounted) • Connect Slot.2 to “CH B” (New HDD)

Slo

Slo t.2 (

t.1 (

HD

HD

D2)

D1)

CH

B

CH

A

• Connect the Power Cable (Long) and the Signal Cable (Red)(Long) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) to CH A. • Connect the Power Cable (Short) and the Signal Cable (Blue)(Short) of the Slot.2 (on the rear side) to CH B.

Power Cable (Long) Power Cable (Short) Signal Cable (Red)(Short) Signal Cable (Blue)(Long)

Power Cable (Short)

Signal Cable (Blue)(Long)

F-9-750

Signal Cable (Red)(Long)

1) Insert 2/3 of the HDD Unit along with the rail on the host machine.

Power Cable (Short)

F-9-752

F-9-751

9

9-274

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Installing the HDD Unit

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Installing the HDD Unit

9-275

3) Insert the HDD Unit until it stops.

6) Secure the cables (Long) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) as shown in the figure. • 2 Wire Saddles

NOTE: The [A] part should be fitted in the cut-off.

NOTE: Secure the cables (Long) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) using the Wire Saddles [A] with the cables wound 1 time.

4) Install the Gasket Cover Plate on the Gasket. 5) Secure the HDD Unit. • 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 8 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

Wire Saddle [A]

x2 [A]

Gasket Cover Plate

F-9-754 F-9-753

7) Insert the removable HDD. CAUTION: Be sure to insert the HDD No. 1 to the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) and insert the HDD No. 2 to the Slot.2 (on the rear side).

F-9-755

9

9-275

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Installing the HDD Unit

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Installing the HDD Unit

9-276

8) Affix the Shutdown Caution Label for applicable language to align with the ruled line on the HDD Lid.

11)

Install the removed covers.

• Rear Upper Cover (9 Screws) CAUTION: When installing the Rear Upper Cover, tighten the screws while the Main Controller PCB is secured to the host machine. • Box Upper Cover (2 Screws) • Box Left Cover (2 Screws) CAUTION: When installing the Box Left Cover, be careful not to trap the cables. • Main Controller Right Cover Unit (2 Screws) • HDD Cover (Close)

Shutdown Caution Label F-9-756

9) Close the HDD Lid. 10)

Affix the Handle Label on the Handle part of the HDD Lid.

12)

Insert the power plug to the outlet.

13)

Turn ON the main power switch.

Handle Label

F-9-757

9

9-276

Installation > [TYPE-8] > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD) > Installing the HDD Unit

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark

After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

9-277

■■Checking the Security Version 1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.

■■Installing the System Software Using the SST The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after installation of this product. Details follow.

2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel. 3) Make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version information of the security chip. When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed. CAUTION:

1. Requirements 1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.

The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.

2) Cross Ethernet Cable

■■Checking the Security Mark

2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.

The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host

2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable.

machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark

3) Turn on the PC.

appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating

4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

3. Selecting the System Software 1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST. 3) Click ‘Register Firmware’. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click ‘SEARCH’.

< Confirming the Security Mark > When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark ( displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

) is

5) Click ‘REGISTER’. 6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click "Start". 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark

9-277

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

Setting for Mirroring

9-278

After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit ■■Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work

1) Specify the setting for Mirroring. • Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID; select “1” for W/RAID.

When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable the setting value.

following:

3) Check that the UI screen is started normally.

At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that

4) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.

the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function

• The green LED of HDD1 (Slot.1) is flashing.

becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and

• The green and red LEDs of HDD2 (Slot.2) are flashing.

request .

CAUTION:

Completion of the Installation Work:

Re-building process starts after setting W/RAID to “1”. When the error indicating the message of “Need to replace Hard Disk (Contact with Service Technician)” on the UI occurs, re-execute the re-building process as follows; 1) Check the lighted Red LED is for the HDD2. 2) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to “0”.

Ask the system administrator to make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version. Maintenance of the Security Functions:

3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting value.

Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security

4) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to “1”.

functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description

5) Turn OFF/ON e the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting value.

of Checking the Security Mark.

The abovementioned procedure is limited only for the re-building process at the initial installation. The error occurred at re-building process during operation is not targeted.

HDD1(Slot1)

■■Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

HDD2(Slot2)

F-9-758

9

Installation > [TYPE-8] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-278

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Checking the Contents > 2 Option HDDs (1TB)

[TYPE-9]

9-279

Checking the Contents ■■2 Option HDDs (1TB)

2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

[1] HDD Support Pate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[3] Vibration-prevention Dumper X 4

[4] Spacer X 4

[5] Screw (W sems; M3x14) X 4

[6] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn. If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.

[7] Gasket X 1

F-9-759

< CD/Guides > • FCC/IC Sheet

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Checking the Contents > 2 Option HDDs (1TB)

9-279

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit

■■Removable HDD Kit [1] HDD Drawer Unit X 1

[4] HDD Lock Spring X 2

[7] HDD Connector Plate X2

[2] IV Cable (A:HDD-Pow1/A:HDD-Sig1) X1

[5] HDD Face Plate X 1

[8] HDD Cover X 2

9-280

[10] Conversion Connector X2

[11] Gasket Cover Plate X1

[12] Handle Label X 1

[13] Shutdown Caution Label X 1

[14] R-HDD Label X 1

[15] Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) X 7

[16] Screw (P Tightening; M3x8) X 4

[17] Wire Saddle X 2

[3] HDD Lock Pin X 2

[6] HDD Handle X 2

[9] Connector Fixing Block X 2

F-9-761

< CD/ Guides > F-9-760

9

• FCC/IC Sheet

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit

9-280

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

■■HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit [1] Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) x 1

[4] Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) x 1

[7] LED Board (Large) x 1

[10] STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843) x 1

[2] Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) x 1

[5] Power Cable (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) x 1

[8] Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x 1

[11] Wire Saddle (Small) x5

[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10

[15] LED Label (Large) x 1

[16] Signal Cable (80mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8436) x 1

[17] Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8438) x 1

[18] Power Cable (80mm; A:HDD-Pow1/2 or FK2-8461) x 2

[19] LED Board (小) x 1

[20] LED Cable (1200mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0839) x 1

[21] STS Cable (550mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0842) x 1

[22] Edge Saddle x 1

[23] LED Label (Small) x 1

[24] HDD Connection Plate x 1

[25] Ring Core x 1

Use 5 of them

[3] Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) x 1

[6] Power Cable (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) x 1

[9] LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) x 1

9-281

[12] Wire Saddle (Middle) x1

Use 4 of them [13] Wire Saddle (Large) x1 F-9-763 F-9-762

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

9-281

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-282

Installation Procedure

< CD/Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit > • HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation CD

■■Removing the HDD Unit

• FCC/IC Sheet < CD/Guides of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit >

1) Push section [A] to open the HDD Cover.

• HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation • HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice • FCC/IC Sheet • Installation Procedure

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power (HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit only) [A]

CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting. Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board. When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

F-9-764

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. • 2 Screws

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1). COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

x2

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-765

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-282

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

3) Remove the Box Left Cover.

5) Remove the Rear Upper Cover.

• 2 Screws

• 9 Screws

9-283

x9

x2

F-9-768

F-9-766

6) Open the HDD Lid.

4) Remove the Box Upper Cover.

• 1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)

• 2 Screws

x2

F-9-767

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

F-9-769

9-283

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-284

CAUTION:

7) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD.

Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.

• 2 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors 8) Remove 1 screw of the HDD Unit. (The removed screws will be used in “Installing the HDD Unit” step 5.)

Grounding Plate

x2 Wire Saddle

x2 Connector F-9-772

F-9-770

10)

Remove the HDD Unit from the host machine.

9) Pull the HDD Unit a little from the host machine, and pull the cable out through the hole [A]. [A]

F-9-773

F-9-771

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-284

9 11)

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine. (The removed

cables will not be used.)

9-285

■■Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit 1) Remove the 2 wire saddles. (The removed wire saddles will not be used.)

• 2 Connectors • 1 Edge Saddle • 5 Wire Saddles Connector

x2 x6 Edge Saddle

F-9-775

Wire Saddle F-9-774

2) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front. • 1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)

F-9-776

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-285

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

3) Remove the HDD. (The removed HDD will not be used.)

9-286

5) Remove the Upper Rail from the HDD Unit. • • Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 8.)

x2

F-9-777 F-9-779

4) Remove the E ring and the shaft from the HDD Unit, and remove the HDD Fixation Plate. (The removed E ring, shaft and HDD Fixation Plate will not be used.)

6) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed Upper Rail in the order of the arrows in the figure below. (The removed Leaf Spring will not be used.) • 2 Bosses • 2 Arms Boss

Arm

Boss

Turn over

F-9-778

F-9-780

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-286

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-287

7) Put the 2 HDD Lock Pins and 2 HDD Lock Springs into the holes of the Upper Rail.

9) Remove the Lower Rail, and then install it to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap.

8) Install the Upper Rail to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap.

• 2 Bosses

• 2 Bosses

• 2 Screws

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 5.) NOTE: Perform this work with the HDD Unit placed on its side in order to prevent the Grounding Plate from being deformed.

x2

Lower Rail Boss

Boss F-9-781

NOTE: The position where the Upper Rail is to be installed is different from the position where it was originally installed. Be careful not to install it to the original position.

x2

Boss

Boss

Boss

Boss

x2 Screw

Upper Rail

F-9-782

Boss

Boss F-9-783

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-287

9 10)

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up,

remove the Upper Drawer Cable (The Signal Cable Red side).

12)

9-288

Install the IV Cable.

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 11.)

• 2 Screws • 2 Springs • 2 Washers (The removed springs and washers will be used in step 13.)

x2

Drawer Cable

x2

Edge Saddle

Washer Spring F-9-786

Screw

13)

F-9-784

11)

Install the IV Cable of HDD Drawer Unit.

• 2 Screws

Remove the Drawer Cable. (The removed Drawer Cable will not be used.)

• 2 Screws (Removed screw will be used in step 12.)

• 2 Springs • 2 Washers (Use the parts removed in step 10.) IV Cable

x2

x2

Washer Spring Screw

F-9-787 F-9-785

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-288

9 14)

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

9-289

NOTE: Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit.

Install the HDD Drawer Unit.

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

1) Assemble the Option HDD (1TB). • 1 HDD Support Plate • 4 Vibration-prevention Dumpers • 4 Spacers • 1 HDD Connector Plate (Included in the Removable HDD Kit) • 1 Option HDD • 4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14) NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate

F-9-788

■■Assembling the Option HDD CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.

Vibration-prevention Dumper

• Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.

HDD Connector Plate F-9-790

• Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate.

Option HDD

Screw hole

Connector HDD Connector Plate

Label

Connector

x4

(Included in Removable HDD Kit)

HDD Support Plate Screw hole

Spacer

F-9-789

Vibration-prevention Damper

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

F-9-791

9-289

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

2) Install the Conversion Connector.

x2

CAUTION:

9-290

Boss

Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector.

Hole

F-9-794

4) Install the HDD Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) F-9-792

CAUTION: 3) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixing Block into the holes of the Conversion Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

• 2 Screws (P tightening; M3x8) CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixing Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

Claw F-9-795

F-9-793

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

9-290

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

5) Install the HDD Handle.

9-291

8) Assemble the other Option HDD (1TB) in the same way according to steps 1 to 5.

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6) CAUTION:

9) Affix the HDD No.2 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

10)

Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the

number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

x2

HDD No.

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX F-9-798

■■Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

F-9-796

6) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD. 7) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

1) Install the 3 wire saddles (Large) (one of them is included in the HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit, and two of them are included in the Removable HDD Kit), 1 wire saddle (Medium), and 4 wire saddles (Small).

Wire Saddle (Small)

HDD No.

Wire Saddle (Large)

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX

Wire Saddle (Large)

Wire Saddle (Middle) Wire Saddle (Small)

F-9-797

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

F-9-799

9-291

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

2) Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

9-292

3) Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435), the Power Cable (430mm;

• 4 screws (TP; M3x6)

A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) and STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843).

CAUTION:

CAUTION:

The marks "CHA" and "CHB" on the PCB should be facing the engraved marks "A" and "B".

• Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) so that the label faces up. • Push the tag of the Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) inward not to interfere other operations. • Route cables equally to eliminate unnecessary slack.

CHB

B

CHA

A

• Since it can be operated without the STS Cable connection, check the connection at the installation. Connector Wire Saddle Connector Wire Saddle

x6 x8

Edge Saddle

Power Cable Connector

Wire Saddle

Signal Cable

x4

STS Cable F-9-801

F-9-800

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

9-292

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

4) Install the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the LED Board (Large).

9-293

6) Connect the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board. • 1 Connector • 7 Wire Saddles CAUTION: Since it can be operated without the LED Cable connection, check the connection at the installation.

LED Cable LED Board

LED Cable

F-9-802

Wire Saddle

x7

5) Insert the LED Board (Large) to the hook part [A] of the host machine to install. • 1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

Wire Saddle [A]

Connector

Wire Saddle F-9-804

F-9-803

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

9-293

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Removable HDD Unit

■■Installing the Removable HDD Unit

2) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

NOTE: The following shows the combination of the HDD and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board. • Connect Slot.1 to “CH A” (New HDD) • Connect Slot.2 to “CH B” (New HDD)

Slo

Slo t.2 (

t.1 (

HD

HD

D2)

D1)

9-294

• Connect the Power Cable (Long) and the Signal Cable (Red)(Long) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) to CH A. • Connect the Power Cable (Short) and the Signal Cable (Blue)(Short) of the Slot.2 (on the rear side) to CH B.

CH

B

CH

A

Power Cable (Long) Power Cable (Short) Signal Cable (Red)(Short) Signal Cable (Blue)(Long)

Power Cable (Short)

Signal Cable (Blue)(Long)

F-9-805

Signal Cable (Red)(Long)

1) Insert 2/3 of the HDD Unit along with the rail on the host machine.

Power Cable (Short)

F-9-807

F-9-806

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Removable HDD Unit

9-294

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Removable HDD Unit

3) Insert the HDD Unit until it stops.

9-295

6) Secure the cables (Long) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) as shown in the figure. • 2 Wire Saddles

NOTE: The [A] part should be fitted in the cut-off.

NOTE: Secure the cables (Long) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) using the Wire Saddles [A] with the cables wound 1 time.

4) Install the Gasket Cover Plate on the Gasket. 5) Secure the HDD Unit. • 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 8 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

Wire Saddle [A]

x2 [A]

Gasket Cover Plate

F-9-809 F-9-808

7) Insert the removable HDD. CAUTION: Be sure to insert the HDD No. 1 to the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) and insert the HDD No. 2 to the Slot.2 (on the rear side).

F-9-810

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Removable HDD Unit

9-295

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Removable HDD Unit

8) Affix the Shutdown Caution Label for applicable language to align with the ruled line on the HDD Lid.

11)

9-296

Install the removed covers.

• Rear Upper Cover (9 Screws) CAUTION: When installing the Rear Upper Cover, tighten the screws while the Main Controller PCB is secured to the host machine. • Box Upper Cover (2 Screws) • Box Left Cover (2 Screws) CAUTION: When installing the Box Left Cover, be careful not to trap the cables. • Main Controller Right Cover Unit (2 Screws) • HDD Cover (Close)

Shutdown Caution Label F-9-811

9) Close the HDD Lid. 10)

Affix the Handle Label on the Handle part of the HDD Lid.

12)

Insert the power plug to the outlet.

13)

Turn ON the main power switch.

Handle Label

F-9-812

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Removable HDD Unit

9-296

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark

Installing the System Software Using the SST The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after installation of this product. Details follow.

9-297

After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit ■■Checking the Security Version 1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel. 2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel. 3) Make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version information of the security chip.

1. Requirements

When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.

1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable

CAUTION: The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.

2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. 3) Turn on the PC.

■■Checking the Security Mark

4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark

3. Selecting the System Software 1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST.

appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

3) Click ‘Register Firmware’. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click ‘SEARCH’. 5) Click ‘REGISTER’.

< Confirming the Security Mark >

6) Click OK.

When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark ( displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

) is

4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click "Start". 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark

9-297

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

Setting for Mirroring

9-298

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (only when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been installed)

1) Specify the setting for Mirroring. • Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID; select “1” for W/RAID. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable the setting value.

When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the

3) Check that the UI screen is started normally.

following:

4) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.

At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that

• The green LED of HDD1 (Slot.1) is flashing.

the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function

• The green and red LEDs of HDD2 (Slot.2) are flashing.

becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request .

CAUTION: Re-building process starts after setting W/RAID to “1”. When the error indicating the message of “Need to replace Hard Disk (Contact with Service Technician)” on the UI occurs, re-execute the re-building process as follows; 1) Check the lighted Red LED is for the HDD2.

Completion of the Installation Work: Ask the system administrator to make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version.

2) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to “0”. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting value.

Maintenance of the Security Functions:

4) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to “1”.

Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security

5) Turn OFF/ON e the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting value.

functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description of Checking the Security Mark.

The abovementioned procedure is limited only for the re-building process at the initial installation. The error occurred at re-building process during operation is not targeted.

HDD1(Slot1)

Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment.

HDD2(Slot2)

Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

F-9-813

9

Installation > [TYPE-9] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-298

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit

[TYPE-10]

9-299

Checking the Contents

Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

■■Removable HDD Kit [1] HDD Drawer Unit X 1

[2] IV Cable (A:HDD-Pow1/A:HDD-Sig1) X1

[4] HDD Lock Spring X 2

[5] HDD Face Plate X 1

[3] HDD Lock Pin X 2

A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn. If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.

[6] HDD Handle X 2

Use 1 of them

[7] HDD Connector Plate X2

[8] HDD Cover X 2

Use 1 of them

Use 1 of them

[9] Connector Fixing Block X 2

Use 1 of them

F-9-814

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit

9-299

9 [10] Conversion Connector X2

[11] Gasket Cover Plate X1

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

■■HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

[12] Handle Label X 1

Use 1 of them

[13] Shutdown Caution Label X 1

[14] R-HDD Label X 1

[1] Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) x 1

[2] Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) x 1

[3] Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) x 1

[4] Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) x 1

[5] Power Cable (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) x 1

[6] Power Cable (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) x 1

[7] LED Board (Large) x 1

[8] Mirroring Board x 1

[9] LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) x 1

[10] STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843) x 1

[11] Wire Saddle (Small) x5

[12] Wire Saddle (Middle) x1

[15] Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) X 7

Use 5 of them

[16] Screw (P Tightening; M3x8) X 4

9-300

[17] Wire Saddle X 2

Use 2 of them

F-9-815

< CD/ Guides > • FCC/IC Sheet

Use 4 of them [13] Wire Saddle (Large) x1

F-9-816

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

9-300

9 [14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10

[15] LED Label (Large) x 1

Use 5 of them

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

[16] Signal Cable (80mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8436) x 1

9-301

< CD/Guides > • HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation • HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice • FCC/IC Sheet • Installation Procedure

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power [17] Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8438) x 1

[18] Power Cable (80mm; A:HDD-Pow1/2 or FK2-8461) x 2

[19] LED Board (小) x 1

CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting. Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board. When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

[20] LED Cable (1200mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0839) x 1

[21] STS Cable (550mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0842) x 1

[22] Edge Saddle x 1

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1). COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. [23] LED Label (Small) x 1

[24] HDD Connection Plate x 1

1) Turn OFF the main power switch.

[25] Ring Core x 1

2) Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-817

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-301

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

Installation Procedure

9-302

3) Remove the Box Left Cover.

■■Removing the HDD Unit

• 2 Screws

1) Push section [A] to open the HDD Cover.

x2

[A]

F-9-820

4) Remove the Box Upper Cover.

F-9-818

• 2 Screws

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. • 2 Screws

x2

x2

F-9-821

F-9-819

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-302

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-303

5) Remove the Rear Upper Cover.

7) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD.

• 9 Screws

• 2 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors 8) Remove 1 screw of the HDD Unit. (The removed screws will be used in “Installing the HDD Unit” step 5.)

x9

x2 Wire Saddle

x2 Connector F-9-822

6) Open the HDD Lid. • 1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)

F-9-824

9) Pull the HDD Unit a little from the host machine, and pull the cable out through the hole [A]. [A]

F-9-823

F-9-825

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-303

9 CAUTION:

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

11)

Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.

9-304

Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine. (The removed

cables will not be used.) • 2 Connectors • 1 Edge Saddle • 5 Wire Saddles

Grounding Plate

Connector

x2 x6 Edge Saddle

F-9-826

Wire Saddle

10)

F-9-828

Remove the HDD Unit from the host machine.

F-9-827

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-304

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

■■Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-305

3) Remove the HDD.

1) Remove the 2 wire saddles. (The removed wire saddles will not be used.)

F-9-831 F-9-829

4) Remove the E ring and the shaft from the HDD Unit, and remove the HDD Fixation Plate. (The removed E ring, shaft and HDD Fixation Plate will not be used.)

2) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front. • 1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)

F-9-832 F-9-830

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-305

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-306

5) Remove the Upper Rail from the HDD Unit.

7) Put the 2 HDD Lock Pins and 2 HDD Lock Springs into the holes of the Upper Rail.

• • Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 8.)

8) Install the Upper Rail to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap. 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 5.)

x2 x2 Boss

F-9-833

Boss

6) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed Upper Rail in the order of the arrows in the

F-9-835

figure below. (The removed Leaf Spring will not be used.) • 2 Bosses

NOTE: The position where the Upper Rail is to be installed is different from the position where it was originally installed. Be careful not to install it to the original position.

• 2 Arms Boss

Arm

Boss

Boss

Boss

Turn over

Screw F-9-834

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

Upper Rail

F-9-836

9-306

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9) Remove the Lower Rail, and then install it to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap. • 2 Bosses

10)

9-307

Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up,

remove the Lower Drawer Cable (The Signal Cable Blue side).

• 2 Screws

• 2 Screws • 2 Springs

NOTE: Perform this work with the HDD Unit placed on its side in order to prevent the Grounding Plate from being deformed.

• 2 Washers (The removed springs and washers will be used in step 13.)

x2

Lower Rail

Drawer Cable Edge Saddle

Washer Spring Screw F-9-838

x2

Boss

Boss

11)

Remove the Drawer Cable. (The removed Drawer Cable will not be used.)

• 2 Screws (Removed screw will be used in step 12.)

x2

x2

F-9-839

Boss

Boss F-9-837

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-307

9 12)

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

Install the IV Cable.

14)

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 11.)

9-308

Install the HDD Drawer Unit.

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

x2

F-9-840

13)

Install the IV Cable of HDD Drawer Unit.

F-9-842

15)

• 2 Screws

Install the HDD Face Plate.

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

• 2 Springs • 2 Washers (Use the parts removed in step 10.)

x2

IV Cable

Washer Spring F-9-843

Screw F-9-841

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-308

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9-309

■■Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine 1) Disassemble the removed HDD.

NOTE: Use the parts disassembled in step 1 and parts included in the Removable HDD Kit.

2) Assemble the HDD disassembled in step 1.

• 4 Screws (W Sems)

• 1 HDD Support Plate

• 1 HDD Support Plate

• 1 HDD Connector Plate (Included in the Removable HDD Kit) • 1 HDD • 4 Screws (W Sems)

x4

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate

HDD HDD Support Plate F-9-844

Vibration-prevention Dumper

HDD Connector Plate F-9-846

CAUTION:

HDD

• Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction. • Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate.

Connector Screw hole

Label

x4

HDD Connector Plate

Connector

Screw hole F-9-845

HDD Support Plate F-9-847

9

9-309

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9-310

3) Install the Conversion Connector.

x2

CAUTION:

Boss

Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector.

Hole

F-9-850

5) Install the HDD Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) F-9-848

CAUTION: 4) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixing Block into the holes of the Conversion Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

• 2 Screws (P tightening; M3x8) CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixing Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

Claw F-9-851

F-9-849

9

9-310

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

9-311

■■Installing the Encryption Board

6) Install the HDD Handle. • 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

1) Install the 3 wire saddles (Large) (one of them is included in the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit, and two of them are included in the Removable HDD Kit), 1 wire saddle

CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

(Medium), and 4 wire saddles (Small).

Wire Saddle (Small)

x2

Wire Saddle (Large)

Wire Saddle (Large)

Wire Saddle (Middle) Wire Saddle (Small)

F-9-854

F-9-852

7) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD. 8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

HDD No.

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX

F-9-853

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

9-311

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

2) Install the Encryption Board.

9-312

3) Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435), the Power Cable (430mm;

• 4 screws (TP; M3x6)

A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) and STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843).

CAUTION:

CAUTION:

The marks "CHA" and "CHB" on the PCB should be facing the engraved marks "A" and "B".

• Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) so that the label faces up. • Push the tag of the Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) inward not to interfere other operations. • Route cables equally to eliminate unnecessary slack.

CHB

B

CHA

A

• Since it can be operated without the STS Cable connection, check the connection at the installation. Connector Wire Saddle Connector Wire Saddle

x6 x8

Edge Saddle

Power Cable Connector

Wire Saddle

Signal Cable

x4

STS Cable F-9-856

F-9-855

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

9-312

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

4) Install the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the LED Board (Large).

9-313

6) Connect the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the Encryption Board. • 1 Connector • 7 Wire Saddles CAUTION: Since it can be operated without the LED Cable connection, check the connection at the installation.

LED Cable LED Board

LED Cable F-9-857

Wire Saddle

x7

5) Insert the LED Board (Large) to the hook part [A] of the host machine to install. • 1 Screw (TP; M3x6) Wire Saddle

Connector

Wire Saddle

[A]

F-9-859

F-9-858

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

9-313

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

■■Installing the HDD Unit

9-314

2) Connect the Power Cable (Long) and the Signal Cable (Long) of the Slot.2 (on the rear side) to CH A on the Encryption Board.

NOTE: The following shows the combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board. • Connect Slot.1 to “CH A” (The HDD which originally mounted) • No HDD to Slot.2

Slo

Slo t.1 (

t.2 (

HD

Bla

D1)

nk)

CH

B

CH

A

Power Cable (Short)

Power Cable (Long)

Signal Cable (Short)

Signal Cable (Long) F-9-860

1) Insert 2/3 of the HDD Unit along with the rail on the host machine. Power Cable (Long) Signal Cable (Long) F-9-862

F-9-861

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-314

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

3) Insert the HDD Unit until it stops.

9-315

6) Secure the cable (Short) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) in place using the Wire Saddle.

NOTE: The [A] part should be fitted in the cut-off.

7) Secure the cable (Long) of the Slot.2 (on the rear side) as shown in the figure. • 2 Wire Saddles

4) Install the Gasket Cover Plate on the Gasket.

NOTE: Secure the cable (Long) of the Slot.2 (on the rear side) using the Wire Saddle [A] with the cable wound 1 time.

5) Secure the HDD Unit. • 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 8 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

Wire Saddle

x2

[A]

[A]

Gasket Cover Plate F-9-863 F-9-864

8) Insert the Removable HDD into the Slot.2 (on the rear side).

F-9-865

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-315

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9) Affix the Shutdown Caution Label for applicable language to align with the ruled line on the HDD Lid.

12)

9-316

Install the removed covers.

• Rear Upper Cover (9 Screws) CAUTION: When installing the Rear Upper Cover, tighten the screws while the Main Controller PCB is secured to the host machine. • Box Upper Cover (2 Screws) • Box Left Cover (2 Screws) CAUTION: When installing the Box Left Cover, be careful not to trap the cables. • Main Controller Right Cover Unit (2 Screws)

Shutdown Caution Label

• HDD Cover (Close) F-9-866

10)

Close the HDD Lid.

11)

Affix the Handle Label on the Handle part of the HDD Lid.

13)

Insert the power plug to the outlet.

Handle Label

F-9-867

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-316

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Checking the Security Mark

Installing the System Software Using the SST

Checking the Security Version

The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when

1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.

the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system

2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.

software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after

3) Make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version

installation of this product. Details follow.

9-317

information of the security chip. When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.

1. Requirements CAUTION:

1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable

The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.

2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable.

Checking the Security Mark

3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark

3. Selecting the System Software 1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST.

appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

3) Click ‘Register Firmware’. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click ‘SEARCH’. 5) Click ‘REGISTER’.

< Confirming the Security Mark > When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark ( displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

6) Click OK.

) is

4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click "Start". 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Checking the Security Mark

9-317

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

Checking after Installation

9-318

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work

1) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing. • The green LED of HDD1 (Slot.1) is flashing.

When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the following:

HDD1(Slot1)

At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request . Completion of the Installation Work: Ask the system administrator to make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version. Maintenance of the Security Functions: F-9-868

Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description of Checking the Security Mark.

Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

9

Installation > [TYPE-10] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-318

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (1TB)

[TYPE-11]

9-319

Checking the Contents

Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

■■Option HDD (1TB) [1] HDD Support Pate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[3] Vibration-prevention Dumper X 4

[4] Spacer X 4

[5] Screw (W sems; M3x14) X 4

[6] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn. If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.

[7] Gasket X 1

F-9-869

< CD/Guides > • FCC/IC Sheet

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (1TB)

9-319

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit

■■Removable HDD Kit [1] HDD Drawer Unit X 1

[10] Conversion Connector X2 [2] IV Cable (A:HDD-Pow1/A:HDD-Sig1) X1

[3] HDD Lock Pin X 2

[5] HDD Face Plate X 1

[11] Gasket Cover Plate X1

[12] Handle Label X 1

[14] R-HDD Label X 1

[15] Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) X 7

Use 1 of them

[13] Shutdown Caution Label X 1 [4] HDD Lock Spring X 2

9-320

Use 5 of them

[6] HDD Handle X 2

Use 1 of them

[16] Screw (P Tightening; M3x8) X 4 [7] HDD Connector Plate X2

Use 1 of them

[8] HDD Cover X 2

Use 1 of them

[9] Connector Fixing Block X 2

[17] Wire Saddle X 2

Use 2 of them

Use 1 of them

F-9-871

< CD/ Guides > F-9-870

9

• FCC/IC Sheet

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit

9-320

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

■■HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit [1] Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) x 1

[4] Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) x 1

[7] LED Board (Large) x 1

[10] STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843) x 1

[2] Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) x 1

[5] Power Cable (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) x 1

[8] Mirroring Board x 1

[11] Wire Saddle (Small) x5

[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10

[15] LED Label (Large) x 1

[16] Signal Cable (80mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8436) x 1

[17] Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8438) x 1

[18] Power Cable (80mm; A:HDD-Pow1/2 or FK2-8461) x 2

[19] LED Board (小) x 1

[20] LED Cable (1200mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0839) x 1

[21] STS Cable (550mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0842) x 1

[22] Edge Saddle x 1

[23] LED Label (Small) x 1

[24] HDD Connection Plate x 1

[25] Ring Core x 1

Use 5 of them

[3] Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) x 1

[6] Power Cable (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) x 1

[9] LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) x 1

9-321

[12] Wire Saddle (Middle) x1

Use 4 of them [13] Wire Saddle (Large) x1 F-9-873 F-9-872

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

9-321

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-322

Installation Procedure

< CD/Guides > • HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation

■■Removing the HDD Unit

• HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice • FCC/IC Sheet • Installation Procedure

1) Push section [A] to open the HDD Cover.

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting. Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board.

[A]

When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

F-9-874

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1). COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

2) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. • 2 Screws

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

x2

1) Turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-875

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-322

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

3) Remove the Box Left Cover.

5) Remove the Rear Upper Cover.

• 2 Screws

• 9 Screws

9-323

x9

x2

F-9-878

F-9-876

6) Open the HDD Lid.

4) Remove the Box Upper Cover.

• 1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)

• 2 Screws

x2

F-9-877

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

F-9-879

9-323

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-324

CAUTION:

7) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD.

Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.

• 2 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors 8) Remove 1 screw of the HDD Unit. (The removed screws will be used in “Installing the HDD Unit” step 5.)

Grounding Plate

x2 Wire Saddle

x2 Connector F-9-882

F-9-880

10)

Remove the HDD Unit from the host machine.

9) Pull the HDD Unit a little from the host machine, and pull the cable out through the hole [A]. [A]

F-9-883

F-9-881

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit

9-324

9 11)

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine. (The removed

cables will not be used.)

9-325

■■Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit 1) Remove the 2 wire saddles. (The removed wire saddles will not be used.)

• 2 Connectors • 1 Edge Saddle • 5 Wire Saddles Connector

x2 x6 Edge Saddle

F-9-885

Wire Saddle F-9-884

2) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front. • 1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)

F-9-886

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-325

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

3) Remove the HDD. (The removed HDD will not be used.)

9-326

5) Remove the Upper Rail from the HDD Unit. • • Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 8.)

x2

F-9-887 F-9-889

4) Remove the E ring and the shaft from the HDD Unit, and remove the HDD Fixation Plate. (The removed E ring, shaft and HDD Fixation Plate will not be used.)

6) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed Upper Rail in the order of the arrows in the figure below. (The removed Leaf Spring will not be used.) • 2 Bosses • 2 Arms Boss

Arm

Boss

Turn over

F-9-888

F-9-890

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-326

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-327

7) Put the 2 HDD Lock Pins and 2 HDD Lock Springs into the holes of the Upper Rail.

9) Remove the Lower Rail, and then install it to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap.

8) Install the Upper Rail to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap.

• 2 Bosses

2 Bosses

• 2 Screws

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 5.) NOTE: Perform this work with the HDD Unit placed on its side in order to prevent the Grounding Plate from being deformed.

x2

Lower Rail Boss

Boss F-9-891

NOTE: The position where the Upper Rail is to be installed is different from the position where it was originally installed. Be careful not to install it to the original position.

x2

Boss

Boss

Boss

Boss

x2 Screw

Upper Rail

F-9-892

Boss

Boss F-9-893

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

9-327

9 10)

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up,

remove the Lower Drawer Cable (The Signal Cable Blue side).

12)

9-328

Install the IV Cable.

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 11.)

• 2 Screws • 2 Springs • 2 Washers (The removed springs and washers will be used in step 13.)

x2

x2

Drawer Cable Edge Saddle

Washer Spring

F-9-896

Screw

13)

F-9-894

11)

Install the IV Cable of HDD Drawer Unit.

• 2 Screws

Remove the Drawer Cable. (The removed Drawer Cable will not be used.)

• 2 Screws (Removed screw will be used in step 12.)

• 2 Springs • 2 Washers (Use the parts removed in step 10.)

x2

x2

IV Cable

Washer Spring Screw F-9-895

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit

F-9-897

9-328

9 14)

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

9-329

■■Assembling the Option HDD

Install the HDD Drawer Unit.

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction. • Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate.

Screw hole

Label

Connector

F-9-898

15)

Screw hole

Install the HDD Face Plate.

F-9-900

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

F-9-899

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

9-329

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

NOTE: Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit.

9-330

2) Install the Conversion Connector. CAUTION: Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector.

1) Assemble the Option HDD (1TB). • 1 HDD Support Plate • 4 Vibration-prevention Dumpers • 4 Spacers • 1 HDD Connector Plate (Included in the Removable HDD Kit) • 1 Option HDD • 4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14) NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate F-9-903

Vibration-prevention Dumper

HDD Connector Plate F-9-901

Option HDD

Connector HDD Connector Plate

x4

(Included in Removable HDD Kit)

HDD Support Plate Spacer

Vibration-prevention Damper

9

F-9-902

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

9-330

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

3) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixing Block into the holes of the Conversion Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.

9-331

4) Install the HDD Cover. • 1 Claw

• 2 Screws (P tightening; M3x8)

• 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6)

CAUTION:

CAUTION:

• Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixing Block when tightening the screws.

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

• Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

F-9-904

Claw F-9-906

5) Install the HDD Handle.

x2

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

Boss

CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

Hole

x2 F-9-905

F-9-907

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD

9-331

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

6) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.

2) Install the Encryption Board.

7) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,

• 4 screws (TP; M3x6)

9-332

and affix it to the area indicated in the figure. CAUTION: The marks "CHA" and "CHB" on the PCB should be facing the engraved marks "A" and "B".

HDD No.

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX

CHB

B

CHA

A

F-9-908

■■Installing the Encryption Board 1) Install the 3 wire saddles (Large) (one of them is included in the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit, and two of them are included in the Removable HDD Kit), 1 wire saddle (Medium), and 4 wire saddles (Small).

x4 Wire Saddle (Small)

Wire Saddle (Large)

Wire Saddle (Large)

Wire Saddle (Middle)

F-9-910

Wire Saddle (Small)

F-9-909

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

9-332

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

3) Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435), the Power Cable (430mm;

9-333

4) Install the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the LED Board (Large).

A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) and STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843). CAUTION: • Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) so that the label faces up. • Push the tag of the Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) inward not to interfere other operations.

LED Cable

• Route cables equally to eliminate unnecessary slack.

LED Board

• Since it can be operated without the STS Cable connection, check the connection at the installation. Connector Wire Saddle

F-9-912

Connector Wire Saddle

x6 x8

5) Insert the LED Board (Large) to the hook part [A] of the host machine to install. • 1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

Edge Saddle

Power Cable

[A]

Connector

Wire Saddle

Signal Cable STS Cable F-9-911

F-9-913

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board

9-333

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

6) Connect the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the Encryption Board. • 1 Connector

9-334

■■Installing the HDD Unit NOTE: The following shows the combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board.

• 7 Wire Saddles

• Connect Slot.1 to “CH A” (New HDD) • No HDD to Slot.2

CAUTION: Since it can be operated without the LED Cable connection, check the connection at the installation.

Slo

Slo t.1 (

t.2 (

LED Cable

HD

Bla

D1)

nk)

CH

B

CH

A

Wire Saddle

x7 Power Cable (Long)

Signal Cable (Long) F-9-915

Connector

Wire Saddle

1) Insert 2/3 of the HDD Unit along with the rail on the host machine.

Wire Saddle F-9-914

F-9-916

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-334

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

2) Connect the Power Cable (Long) and the Signal Cable (Long) of the Slot.2 (on the rear

9-335

3) Insert the HDD Unit until it stops.

side) to CH A on the Encryption Board. NOTE: The [A] part should be fitted in the cut-off. 4) Install the Gasket Cover Plate on the Gasket. 5) Secure the HDD Unit. • 1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 8 of the “Removing the HDD Unit”)

Power Cable (Short)

Signal Cable (Short)

[A]

Gasket Cover Plate F-9-918

Power Cable (Long) Signal Cable (Long) F-9-917

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-335

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

6) Secure the cable (Short) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) in place using the Wire Saddle.

9-336

9) Affix the Shutdown Caution Label for applicable language to align with the ruled line on the HDD Lid.

7) Secure the cable (Long) of the Slot.2 (on the rear side) as shown in the figure. • 2 Wire Saddles NOTE: Secure the cable (Long) of the Slot.2 (on the rear side) using the Wire Saddle [A] with the cable wound 1 time. Wire Saddle [A]

x2

Shutdown Caution Label F-9-921

10)

Close the HDD Lid.

11)

Affix the Handle Label on the Handle part of the HDD Lid. Handle Label

F-9-919

8) Insert the Removable HDD into the Slot.2 (on the rear side).

F-9-922

F-9-920

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit

9-336

9 12)

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-337

Installing the System Software Using the SST

Install the removed covers.

The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when

• Rear Upper Cover (9 Screws)

the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system

CAUTION:

software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after

When installing the Rear Upper Cover, tighten the screws while the Main Controller PCB is secured to the host machine.

installation of this product. Details follow.

• Box Upper Cover (2 Screws)

1. Requirements 1) PC

• Box Left Cover (2 Screws)

Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable

CAUTION: When installing the Box Left Cover, be careful not to trap the cables.

2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.

• Main Controller Right Cover Unit (2 Screws)

2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable.

• HDD Cover (Close)

3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

13)

Insert the power plug to the outlet.

3. Selecting the System Software 1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST. 3) Click ‘Register Firmware’. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click ‘SEARCH’. 5) Click ‘REGISTER’. 6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click "Start". 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-337

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Checking after Installation

Checking the Security Version

9-338

Checking after Installation

1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.

1) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.

2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.

• The green LED of HDD1 (Slot.1) is flashing.

3) Make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version information of the security chip.

HDD1(Slot1)

When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed. CAUTION: The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.

Checking the Security Mark The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host

F-9-923

machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark: < Confirming the Security Mark > When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark ( displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

9

) is

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Checking after Installation

9-338

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-339

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the following: At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request . Completion of the Installation Work: Ask the system administrator to make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version. Maintenance of the Security Functions: Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description of Checking the Security Mark.

Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

9

Installation > [TYPE-11] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-339

Appendix Tools ■ ■Service ■ Timing Chart ■General ■ Circuit Diagram ■General of User Mode ■ ■List ■ Data ■Backup ■ of HDD partition ■Detail ■ Counter List ■Soft ■ ■Removal

Appendix > Service Tools > Special Tools

10-2

Service Tools Special Tools In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine: Tool No.

Ctgr

Digital multimeter

Tool name

FY9-2002

A

Door Switch

TKN-0093

A

Tester extension pin

FY9-3038

A

Tester extension pin (L-shaped)

FY9-3039

A

Appearance

Remarks Used as a probe extension when making electrical checks.

Use for electrical checks.

Appendix > Service Tools > Special Tools

10-2

Appendix > Service Tools > Special Tools

Tool No.

Ctgr

CA-7 test Sheet

Tool name

FY9-9323

A

Used for adjusting/checking images.

Loupe

CK-0056

B

Used for checking images.

Cleaning tool

-

A

To clean the feed guide- This is not a service tool.- 1 of this are enclosed at shipment of the host machine.

Tospearl 240

FY9-6007-000

B

ITB Cleaning Blade Lubricant.

Reference: Category

Appearance

10-3

Remarks

T-10-1

A: Must be kept by each service engineer. B: Must be kept by each group of about five engineers. C: Must be kept by each warkshop

Appendix > Service Tools > Special Tools

10-3

Appendix > Service Tools > Solvents and Oils

10-4

Solvents and Oils Item

Uses

Composition

Remarks

Alcohol

Cleaning; e.g., glass, plastic, rubber; external covers.

• • • •

Fluoride-family hydrocarbon Alcohol Surface activating Water

• Do not bring near fire. • Procure locally. • Substitute: IPA(isopropy alcohol)

Solvent

Cleaning; e.g., metal; oil or toner stain.

• Fluoride-family hydrocarbon • Chlorine-family hydrocarbon • Alcohol

• Do not bring near fire. • Procure locally. • Substitute:MEK

Heat-resisting grease

Lubrication; e.g., fixing drive areas.

• Mineral oil-family lithium soap • Molybdenum disulfide

• MO-138S • Tool No: CK-0427 (500 g/can)

Mineral oil (paraffin-family)

• Tool No: CK-0524 (100 cc)

Lubricating oil Lubricating oil

Lubrication; e.g., drive areas, friction areas.

• Silicone oil

• Tool No: CK-0551 (20 g)

Lubricating oil (EM-50L)

Lubrication; e.g., gears.

• Special oil • Special solid lubricating agent • Lithium soap

• Tool No: HY9-0007

Lubricating oil

Lubrication; e.g., scanner rail.

• SHC oil

• Tool No: FY9-6029

Conducting grease

Lubrication; e.g., edge of secondary transfer outer roller, drum heater sliding area.

• Fluorine poly wthyl • Polytetra fluorune ethylene

• Tool No: FY9-6008

Conducting grease

Lubrication; e.g., edge of secondary transfer inner roller

• poly-α-olefin

• Tool No: FY9-6006 T-10-2

Appendix > Service Tools > Solvents and Oils

10-4

10-5

Basic sequence at power ON

Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at power ON

Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at power ON

General Timing Chart

Main power ON WMUP(approx. 30 sec)

Purint Unit Laser system

WMUPR *Estimated time differs depending on models

STBY

Laser scanner motor(M80～83) Drum motor(M19/M21/M23/M25) ITB drive motor(M3) Cleaning Pre-exposure LED(LED1～4) Primary charging AC bias(Color) Primary charging DC bias(Color) Primary charging DC bias (Constant current)(Bk)

Image formation system

Grid DC bias(Bk) Developing AC bias(Color) Developing DC bias(Color) Developing stirring motor(M26～M29) Developing sleeve drive motor (M18/M20/M22/M24) Pre-primary transfer charging AC bias(Bk) Pre-primary transfer charging DC bias(Bk) Primary transfer bias

Fixing system Pickup/ feed system

Fixing motor(M48) IH heater/Halogen heater(H5) Pre-registration multi-purpose tray drive motor :Standby speed F-10-1

10-5

10-6

Laser exposure system

Printer unit

PSTBY

Flying start PINTR

PRINT

LSTR *1

Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing

Start key ON

PSTBY

Laser scanner motor (M80～83) PTOP signal Laser Y ON Laser M ON Laser C ON Laser Bk ON Secondary transfer roller detachment motor(M31) Drum motor (M19/M21/M23/M25)

Detachment

Engagement

Detachment

ITB drive motor(M3) Cleaning pre-exposure LED(Y)(LED2) Cleaning pre-exposure LED(M)(LED3) Cleaning pre-exposure LED(C)(LED4) Cleaning pre-exposure LED(Bk)(LED1) Primary charging AC bias(Y) Primary charging AC bias(M) Primary charging AC bias(C) Primary charging DC bias(Y) Primary charging DC bias(M) Primary charging DC bias(C) Primary charging DC bias (Constant current)(Bk) Grid DC bias(Bk) Developing AC bias(Y) Developing AC bias(M)

Image formation system

Developing AC bias(C) Developing AC bias(Bk) Developing DC bias(Y) Developing DC bias(M) Developing DC bias(C) Developing DC bias(Bk) Developing stirring motor(Y)(M26) Developing stirring motor(M)(M28) Developing stirring motor(C)(M27) Developing stirring motor(Bk)(M29) Developing sleeve drive motor(Y)(M20) Developing sleeve drive motor(M)(M22) Developing sleeve drive motor(C)(M24) Developing sleeve drive motor(Bk)(M18) Pre-primary transfer charging DC bias(Bk) Pre-primary transfer charging AC bias(Bk) Primary transfer bias(Y) Primary transfer bias(M) Primary transfer bias(C) Primary transfer bias(Bk) Secondary transfer bias Secondary transfer bias ATVC Secondary transfer cleaning bias

Positive bias

Negative bias

Positive bias

Negative bias

Positive bias

Negative bias

Fixing system

Static eliminator bias

Pickup/feed system

Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing

Basic sequence at printing

Fixing motor(M48) IH heater /Halogen heater(H5) Cassette 3 pickup motor (M44) Right deck vertical path motor (M40) Cassette vertical path motor (M39) Pre-registration multi-purpose tray drive motor(M36) Registration motor(M34) Pre-fixing feed motor(M35) Reverse motor(M38) Reverse upper wheel detachment solenoid(SL3) Delivery motor(M37)

*1:Auto adjustment may be executed depending on the conditions

:Standby speed

F-10-2

10-6

10-7

Laser exposure system

Printer unit

PSTBY

Flying start PINTR

PRINT

LSTR *1

Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing

Start key ON

PSTBY

Laser scanner motor (M80～83) PTOP signal Laser Bk ON Secondary transfer roller detachment motor(M31)

Detachment

Engagement

Detachment

Drum motor(M19) ITB drive motor(M3)

Image formation system

Cleaning pre-exposure LED(Bk)(LED1) Primary charging DC bias (Constant current)(Bk) Grid DC bias(Bk) Developing AC bias(Bk) Developing DC bias(Bk) Developing stirring motor(M29) Developing sleeve drive motor(M18) Pre-primary transfer charging AC bias(Bk) Pre-primary transfer charging DC bias(Bk) Primary transfer bias(Bk) Secondary transfer bias Secondary transfer bias ATVC Secondary transfer cleaning bias

Negative bias

Positive bias

Negative bias

Positive bias

Negative bias

Fixing system

Static eliminator bias

Pickup/feed system

Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing

Basic sequence at printing

Fixing motor(M48) IH heater /Halogen heater(H5) Cassette 3 pickup motor (M44) Right deck vertical path motor (M40) Cassette vertical path motor (M39) Pre-registration multi-purpose tray drive motor(M36) Registration motor(M34) Pre-fixing feed motor(M35) Reverse motor(M38) Reverse upper wheel detachment solenoid(SL3)

*1:Auto adjustment may be executed depending on the conditions

:Standby speed F-10-3

10-7

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

General Circuit Diagram

Jack No. J1212

Signal Input/Output List Jack No. J1210

Abbreviated Signal Name E1_HOB_SERIAL_TX1E1_HOB_SERIAL_TX1+ E1_HOB_SERIAL_CLK1+ E1_HOB_SERIAL_CLK1E1_HOB_SERIAL_RX1E1_HOB_SERIAL_RX1+

J1211

DRUM_ITB_RESET E2_EX_SERIAL_TX1 E2_EX_SERIAL_RX1 E2_EX_SERIAL_CLK1 E2_STM_CLK1_BUF E2_STM_CLK2_BUF E2_STM_CLK3_BUF E2_STM_CLK4_BUF BUF_CNCT BUF_RESET FIN_RMT

Abbreviated Signal Name E2_EX_SERIAL_TX2E2_EX_SERIAL_TX2+

Signal Name Drum ITB High Speed Serial Communication Transmission Signal (Differential -) Drum ITB High Speed Serial Communication Transmission Signal (Differential +) Drum ITB High Speed Serial Communication Clock Signal (Differential +) Drum ITB High Speed Serial Communication Clock Signal (Differential -) Drum ITB High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal (Differential -) Drum ITB High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal (Differential +) Drum ITB Reset Buffer Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal Buffer Driver High Speed Serial Reception Signal Buffer Driver Restraint Serial Clock Signal Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 1 Clock Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 2 Clock Decurler Feed 1 Motor Clock Decurler Feed 2 Motor Clock Buffer Driver Connection Detection Signal Buffer Driver Reset Signal Finisher Remote

E2_EX_SERIAL_CLK2+ E2_EX_SERIAL_CLK2E2_EX_SERIAL_RX2E2_EX_SERIAL_RX2+ E2_EX_SERIAL_TX3E2_EX_SERIAL_TX3+ E2_EX_SERIAL_CLK3+ E2_EX_SERIAL_CLK3E2_EX_SERIAL_RX3E2_EX_SERIAL_RX3+ E2_EX_SERIAL_TX4E2_EX_SERIAL_TX4+ E2_EX_SERIAL_CLK4+ E2_EX_SERIAL_CLK4E2_EX_SERIAL_RX4E2_EX_SERIAL_RX4+ MDECK_RESET MDECK_REMOTE MDECK_AD_CS MDECK_EEP_ES MDECK_ADEEP_CLK MDECK_ADEEP_DOUT MDECK_ADEEP_DIN MDECK_CNCT_IN

10-8

Signal Name Multi Deck High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 2 (Differential -) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 2 (Differential +) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Clock Signal 2 (Differential +) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Clock Signal 2 (Differential -) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Reception Signal 2 (Differential -) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Reception Signal 2 (Differential +) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 3 (Differential -) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 3 (Differential +) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Clock Signal 3 (Differential +) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Clock Signal 3 (Differential -) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Reception Signal 3 (Differential -) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Reception Signal 3 (Differential +) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 4 (Differential -) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 4 (Differential +) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Clock Signal 4 (Differential +) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Clock Signal 4 (Differential -) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Reception Signal 4 (Differential -) Multi Deck High Speed Serial Reception Signal 4 (Differential +) Multi Deck Reset Multi Deck Remote (Power Supply Remote) Multi Deck A/D Chip Selection Multi Deck EEPROM Chip Selection Multi Deck A/D, EEPROM Clock Multi Deck A/D, EEPROM Data Output (Multi Deck => DCON) Multi Deck A/D, EEPROM Data Input (DCON => Multi Deck) Multi Deck Connection Detection

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

10-8

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

Jack No. J1213

Abbreviated Signal Name DIFF_EX_SERIAL_TX DIFF_EX_SERIAL_RX DIFF_EX_SERIAL_CLK

J1214

HOPPER_RESET E1_EX_SERIAL_RX0E1_EX_SERIAL_RX0+ E1_EX_SERIAL_TX0E1_EX_SERIAL_TX0+ E1_EX_SERIAL_CLK0+ E1_EX_SERIAL_CLK0UNDER_BLT_COOL_FAN_STS 3.3v_CONNECT_A_IN E1_PWM0 E1_EX_SERIAL_TX1 E1_EX_SERIAL_RX1 E1_EX_SERIAL_CLK1 OHP_SNS TEIHAN_RESET FUSER_BELT_YORI_ERR

Signal Name

Jack No.

Hopper Driver High Speed Serial Communication Transmission Signal Hopper Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal Hopper Driver High Speed Serial Communication Clock Signal Hopper Driver Reset Signal Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Reception Signal 0 (Differential -) Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Reception Signal 0 (Differential +) Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 0 (Differential -) Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 0 (Differential +) Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 0 (Differential -) Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 0 (Differential +) Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Front)/(Rear) Lower Belt Cooling Fan Status Signal Drawer A Connection Detection Signal Fixing Motor Clock Signal Fixing Feed Driver PCB/Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 1 Fixing Feed Driver PCB/Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Reception Signal 1 Fixing Feed Driver PCB/Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 1 OHP Sensor Detection Signal Fixing Feed Driver PCB/Fixing Feed Driver Reset Signal Fixing Belt Displacement Error Signal

J1215

Abbreviated Signal Name E1_EX_SERIAL_TX2 E1_EX_SERIAL_RX2 E1_EX_SERIAL_CLK2 E1_EX_SERIAL_TX3 E1_EX_SERIAL_RX3 E1_EX_SERIAL_CLK3 E1_STM_CLK0 E1_STM_CLK1 E1_STM_CLK2 E1_STM_CLK3 E1_STM_CLK4 E1_STM_CLK5 E1_STM_CLK6 E1_STM_CLK7 E1_STM_CLK8 E1_STM_CLK9 E1_STM_CLK10 WIDTH_OF_PAPER_DTC MULTI_LAST_PAPER_DTC_SNS FEED_RESET E1_PWM1

10-9

Signal Name Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 2 Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Reception Signal 2 Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 2 Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 3 Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Reception Signal 3 Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 3 Delivery Motor Clock Reverse Motor Clock Left Deck Pickup Motor Clock Right Deck Pickup Motor Clock Cassette 3 Pickup Motor Clock Cassette 4 Pickup Motor Clock Secondary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor Clock Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor Clock Cassette Vertical Path Motor Clock Right Deck Vertical Path Motor Clock Left Deck Vertical Path Motor Clock Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection Signal Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor Detection Pickup Driver Reset Signal Delivery Flapper Solenoid PWM Signal

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

10-9

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

Jack No. J1220

Abbreviated Signal Name MOTOR_ID Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC

J1223

J1225

C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG 12V-MONI IH-ERROR PWM1_OUT PWM2_OUT IH_RELAY_ON_2 IH_RELAY_ON_1 IH_VOLTAGE IH_CURRENT IH-ENB 2ND_HEAT_CASE_THERM1 2ND_HEAT_CASE_THERM2 2ND_HEAT_FILM_THERM1 2ND_HEAT_FILM_THERM2 IH_MAIN_THERM IH_SUB1_THERM IH_SUB2_THERM IH_THERM_CNCT UNDER_BELT_YORI_2 UNDER_BELT_YORI_1 2ND_HEAT_SUB2_THERM 2ND_HEAT_SUB1_THERM 2ND_HEAT_THERM_CNCT

Signal Name Motor ID Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y) Rotation Direction Signal Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y) Acceleration Signal Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y) Deceleration Signal Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y) FG Signal Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (M) Rotation Direction Signal Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (M) Acceleration Signal Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (M) Deceleration Signal Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (M) FG Signal Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (C) Rotation Direction Signal Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (C) Acceleration Signal Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (C) Deceleration Signal Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (C) FG Signal IH Power Supply 12V Monitor IH Power Supply Error Signal IH Power Supply PWM Output 1 IH Power Supply PWM Output 2 IH Power Supply Relay ON 2 IH Power Supply Relay ON 1 IH Power Supply Voltage Monitor IH Power Supply Current Monitor IH Power Supply Enable Pressure Main Thermistor Case 1 Signal Pressure Main Thermistor Case 2 Signal Pressure Main Thermistor Film 1 Signal Pressure Main Thermistor Film 2 Signal Fixing Main Thermistor Signal Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 Signal (Rear) Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 Signal (Front) Fixing Thermistor Connection Detection Signal Pressure Belt Displacement 2 Detection Signal Pressure Belt Displacement 1Detection Signal Pressure Sub Thermistor 2 Signal (Front) Pressure Sub Thermistor 1 Signal (Rear) Pressure Sub Thermistor Connection Detection

Jack No. J1226

J1227

J1230

Abbreviated Signal Name

10-10

Signal Name

DRUM_SURF_TEMP_LIMIT Drum Surface Temperature Limit Detection DRUM_SURF_THP Drum Surface Temperature DRUM_HEATER_THM_S_50_LMT Drum Heater (Bk) Thermistor 50 DegC Limit Detection DRUM_HEATER_THM_P_42_5_ Drum Heater (Bk) Thermopile 42.5 DegC Detection DTC DRUM_HEATER_THM_S_CNCT Drum Heater (Bk) Thermistor Connection Detection BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Bk) Rotation Direction Signal BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Bk) Acceleration Signal BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Bk) Deceleration Signal BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Bk) FG Signal CLN_DRIVE_MTR_CW Drum Cleaning/Waste Toner Feed Drive Motor Rotation Direction Signal CLN_DRIVE_MTR_ACC Drum Cleaning/Waste Toner Feed Drive Motor Acceleration Signal CLN_DRIVE_MTR_DEC Drum Cleaning/Waste Toner Feed Drive Motor Deceleration Signal CLN_DRIVE_MTR_FG Drum Cleaning/Waste Toner Feed Drive Motor FG Signal GRID_CONT Grid High Voltage Control BK_PRIM_CONT Primary Charging Control (Bk) HV_PRIM_GRID_ON Grid High Voltage ON HV_RMT_PRIM Primary Charging High Voltage Remote

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

10-10

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

Jack No. J1231

J1232

J1233

Abbreviated Signal Name CMN_CK_25 PR_AC_CLK AC_VSNS_C AC_ISNS_C PR_AC_CONT_C PR_AC_CC_ON_C PR_AC_CV_ON_C PR_DC_CONT_C PR_DC_ON_C AC_VSNS_M AC_ISNS_M PR_AC_CONT_M PR_AC_CC_ON_M PR_AC_CV_ON_M PR_DC_CONT_M PR_DC_ON_M AC_VSNS_Y AC_ISNS_Y PR_AC_CONT_Y PR_AC_CC_ON_Y PR_AC_CV_ON_Y PR_DC_CONT_Y PR_DC_ON_Y HV_RMT_PRIM BK_DEV_AC_CONT BK_DEV_AC_ON BK_DEV_DC_CONT BK_DEV_DC_ON DEV_CLK_B_TO_HV DEV_CLK_A_TO_HV Y_DEV_AC_CONT Y_DEV_AC_ON Y_DEV_DC_CONT Y_DEV_DC_ON HV_RMT_DEV M_DEV_AC_CONT M_DEV_AC_ON M_DEV_DC_CONT M_DEV_DC_ON C_DEV_AC_CONT C_DEV_AC_ON C_DEV_DC_CONT C_DEV_DC_ON

Signal Name

Jack No.

Common Clock 25kHz Primary Charging AC Clock Primary Charging Voltage Monitor (C) Primary Charging Current Monitor (C) Primary Charging AC Control (C) Primary Charging Current Control ON (C) Primary Charging Constant Voltage Control ON (C) Primary Charging DC Control (C) Primary Charging DC ON (C) Primary Charging Voltage Monitor (M) Primary Charging Current Monitor (M) Primary Charging AC Control (M) Primary Charging Current Control ON (M) Primary Charging Constant Voltage Control ON (M) Primary Charging DC Control (M) Primary Charging DC ON (M) Primary Charging Voltage Monitor (Y) Primary Charging Current Monitor (Y) Primary Charging AC Control (Y) Primary Charging Current Control ON (Y) Primary Charging Constant Voltage Control ON (Y) Primary Charging DC Control (Y) Primary Charging DC ON (Y) Primary Charging High Voltage Remote Developing High Voltage AC Control (Bk) Developing High Voltage AC ON (Bk) Developing High Voltage DC Control (Bk) Developing High Voltage DC ON (Bk) Developing High Voltage Clock B Developing High Voltage Clock A Developing High Voltage AC Control (Y) Developing High Voltage AC ON (Y) Developing High Voltage DC Control (Y) Developing High Voltage DC ON (Y) Developing High Voltage Remote Developing High Voltage AC Control (M) Developing High Voltage AC ON (M) Developing High Voltage DC Control (M) Developing High Voltage DC ON (M) Developing High Voltage AC Control (C) Developing High Voltage AC ON (C) Developing High Voltage DC Control (C) Developing High Voltage DC ON (C)

J1234

J1235

J1236

Abbreviated Signal Name M_TR1_VOLTAGE M_TR1_CURRENT M_P_CC_CONT M_P_CV_CONT M_P_CC_ON M_P_CV_ON Y_TR1_VOLTAGE CMN_CK_70_TO_HV Y_TR1_CURRENT Y_P_CC_CONT Y_P_CV_CONT Y_P_CC_ON Y_P_CV_ON HV_RMT_TR1 BK_TR1_VOLTAGE BK_TR1_CURRENT BK_TR1_CONT_N BK_TR1_CURRENT_CONT BK_TR1_CONT_P BK_TR1_CURRENT_SET BK_TR1_MINUS_SET BK_TR1_ON C_TR1_VOLTAGE C_TR1_CURRENT C_P_CC_CONT C_P_CV_CONT C_P_CC_ON C_P_CV_ON HV_RMT_TR1 POST_AC_CLK_B_TO_HV POST_AC_CLK_A_TO_HV CMN_CK_25_1TO_HV HV_DPOST_AC_ON DPOST_DC_CONT HV_DPOST_DC_ON HV_RMT_POST

10-11

Signal Name Primary Transfer Voltage Monitor (M) Primary Transfer Current Monitor (M) Primary Transfer Constant Current Control (M) Primary Transfer Constant Voltage Control (M) Primary Transfer Constant Current ON (M) Primary Transfer Constant Voltage ON (M) Primary Transfer Voltage Monitor (Y) Common Clock 70kHz Primary Transfer Current Monitor (Y) Primary Transfer Constant Current Control (Y) Primary Transfer Constant Voltage Control (Y) Primary Transfer Constant Current ON (Y) Primary Transfer Constant Voltage ON (Y) Primary Transfer High Voltage Remote Primary Transfer Voltage Monitor (Bk) Primary Transfer Current Monitor (Bk) Primary Transfer Minus Control (Bk) Primary Transfer Current Control (Bk) Primary Transfer Plus Control (Bk) Primary Transfer Current Set (Bk) Primary Transfer Minus Set (Bk) Primary Transfer ON (Bk) Primary Transfer Voltage Monitor (C) Primary Transfer Current Monitor (C) Primary Transfer Constant Current Control (C) Primary Transfer Constant Voltage Control (C) Primary Transfer Constant Current ON (C) Primary Transfer Constant Voltage ON (C) Primary Transfer High Voltage Remote Pre-primary Transfer High Voltage Clock B Pre-primary Transfer High Voltage Clock A Common Clock 25kHz Drum Post High Voltage AC ON Drum Post DC Control Drum Post DC ON Drum Post High Voltage Remote

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

10-11

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

Jack No. J1240

Abbreviated Signal Name Y_PRE_EXP_LED_ON Y_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL Y_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG M_PRE_EXP_LED_ON M_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL M_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG C_PRE_EXP_LED_ON C_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL C_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG BK_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL BK_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG

J1241

J1242

TR2_CONT_P TR2_CRNT_CONT TR2_CONT_N TR2_REMOVE_DC_CONT 3.3v_CONNECT_B_IN TR2_CURRENT TR2_VOLTAGE CMN_CK_25_1TO_HV R_LED_ON FR_DETECT R_RESET BR_DETECT PATCH_LED_ON PATCH_P PATCH_S PATCH_REF PATCH_SL_ON BK_PRE_CLN_LED_ON

Signal Name

Jack No.

Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y) LED ON Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (Y) Control Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (Y) Detection Signal Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M) LED ON Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (M) Control Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (M) Detection Signal Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C) LED ON Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (C) Control Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (C) Detection Signal Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (Bk) Control Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (Bk) Detection Signal Secondary Transfer Plus Control Secondary Transfer Current ON Secondary Transfer Minus Control Secondary Transfer Static Elimination DC ON Secondary Transfer Static Elimination Connection Detection Secondary Transfer Current Monitor Secondary Transfer Voltage Monitor Secondary Transfer Static Elimination Clock 25kHz Registration Patch Sensor Detection Signal (Front) Encoder LED ON Registration Patch Sensor Detection Signal (Front) Encoder Detection Signal (Front) Registration Patch Sensor Detection Signal (Front) Encoder Reset Registration Patch Sensor Detection Signal (Front) Encoder Detection Signal (Front) Patch Sensor Detection Signal LED ON Patch Sensor Detection Signal P Wave Patch Sensor Detection Signal S Wave Patch Sensor Detection Signal Reference Registration Patch Shutter Open/Close Solenoid ON Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk)/Bk Pre-exposure LED ON

J1243

J1244 J1246

J1247

Abbreviated Signal Name

10-12

Signal Name

HV_ON +3.3V_ANALOG BK_POTENTOAL_SNS_ON BK_POTENTIAL_DETECT PRIM_IN_FAN_FULL/HALF

Potential Sensor Remote 3.3V Power Supply Potential Sensor ON Potential Sensor Detection Signal Primary Charging Suction Fan Full Speed/Half Speed PRIM_IN_FAN_LOCK Full Speed/Half Speed Lock Signal HAND_PAPER_FEED_GATE_SNS Multi-purpose Tray Cover Open/Close Sensor Detection Signal PRIM_WIRE_CLN_MTR_CW Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Clockwise PRIM_WIRE_CLN_MTR_CCW Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Counter Clockwise POST_WIRE_CLN_MTR_CW Pre-primary Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Clockwise POST_WIRE_CLN_MTR_CCW Pre-primary Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Counter Clockwise TEIHAN_NOBU_SW Fixing Feed Unit Open/Close Switch Signal BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC Developing Stirring Motor (Bk) Deceleration Signal BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC Developing Stirring Motor (Bk) Acceleration Signal BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG Developing Stirring Motor (Bk) FG Signal BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CCW Developing Stirring Motor (Bk) Rotation Direction Signal Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC Developing Stirring Motor (Y) Deceleration Signal Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC Developing Stirring Motor (Y) Acceleration Signal Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG Developing Stirring Motor (Y) FG Signal Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CCW Developing Stirring Motor (Y) Rotation Direction Signal M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC Developing Stirring Motor (M) Deceleration Signal M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC Developing Stirring Motor (M) Acceleration Signal M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG Developing Stirring Motor (M) FG Signal M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CCW Developing Stirring Motor (M) Rotation Direction Signal C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC Developing Stirring Motor (C) Deceleration Signal C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC Developing Stirring Motor (C) Acceleration Signal C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG Developing Stirring Motor (C) FG Signal C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CCW Developing Stirring Motor (C) Rotation Direction Signal 1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_HP_ Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor SNS Detection Signal ITB_EDGE_ADC_DOUT2 ITB Displacement Sensor Detection Signal ITB_EDGE_ADC_DOUT1 ITB Displacement Sensor Detection Signal ITB_EDGE_SNS_ON ITB Displacement Sensor Detection Signal ITB_STEERTNG_HP_SNS ITB HP Sensor Detection Signal ITB_HP_SNS ITB HP Sensor Detection Signal ITB_ROLLER_TEMP ITB Roller Temperature (Not used)

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

10-12

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

Jack No.

Abbreviated Signal Name

J1248

ECO_DOUT ECO_DIN ECO_SCK ECO_CS ECO_POW ENV_TEMP ENV_HUM 1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_ OUT_A 1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_ OUT_A* 1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_ OUT_B 1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_ OUT_B* STEERING_MTR_OUT_A STEERING_MTR_OUT_A* STEERING_MTR_OUT_B STEERING_MTR_OUT_B* IPC_RXD IPC_TXD FIN_MODE FIN_RESET FIN_DOWNLOAD CHOUHI_CLK E1_STM_CLK11 CHOUHI_TXEND

J1249

J1250

J1251

Signal Name ECO ID Data Out ECO ID Data In ECO ID Serial Clock ECO ID Chip Selection ECO ID Power Supply Environment Sensor Temperature Environment Sensor Humidity Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor A

Jack No. J1260

Abbreviated Signal Name DDI_DOWNLOAD DDI_RESET DDI_PPRDY DDI_CPRDY DDI_LIVEWAKE DDI_RXD DDI_TXD

Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor B

PVREQ REJI_ON_IRQ E2_HOB_SERIAL_CLK1

Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor B*

E2_HOB_SERIAL_TX1

Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor A*

Steering Drive Motor Steering Drive Motor * Steering Drive Motor B Steering Drive Motor B* Finisher Communication Reception Signal Finisher Communication Transmission Signal Finisher Mode Signal Finisher Reset Signal Finisher Download Signal Clock (Option Deck Communication IF) Deck Pickup Motor Clock Transmission Completion (Option Deck Communication IF) CHOUHI_TXD Reception Request Signal (Option Deck Communication IF) CHOUHI_RXLOAD Reception Completion (Option Deck Communication IF) CHOUHI_RXD Reception Signal (Option Deck Communication IF) CHOUHI_TXOUTEN Output Enable (Option Deck Communication IF) HOPPER_COOL_ EX_FAN_FULL/ Hopper Cooling Fan Full Speed/Half Speed HALF HOPPER_COOL_ EX_FAN_LOCK Hopper Cooling Fan Lock Signal

E2_HOB_SERIAL_RX1 E2_HOB_SERIAL_CLK0 E2_HOB_SERIAL_TX0 E2_HOB_SERIAL_RX0 J1261 J1262

W_TNR_FULL_DTC DEV_AIR_TEMP1 DEV_AIR_TEMP2 FRONT_DOOR_SNS

10-13

Signal Name DDI Download Signal DDI Reset Signal DDI Printer Power Ready Signal DDI Controller Power Ready Signal DDI Live Wake Mode Signal DDI Communication Reception Signal (Main Controller => DC Controller) DDI Communication Transmission Signal (DC Controller => Main Controller) PV Request Registration ON Interruption Laser Interface PCB High Speed Serial Communication Clock Signal 1 Laser Interface PCB High Speed Serial Communication Transmission Signal 1 Laser Interface PCB High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 1 Laser Interface PCB High Speed Serial Communication Clock Signal 2 Laser Interface PCB High Speed Serial Communication Transmission Signal 2 Laser Interface PCB High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 2 Waste Toner Full Sensor Detection Signal Detection Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y/M) Detection Signal Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (C/Bk) Detection Signal Front Cover Open/Close Sensor Detection Signal

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

10-13

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

Jack No. J1264

J1320

J1330

Abbreviated Signal Name AC_RL_ON SEESAW R_PW_MONI RMT_RCON RMT_DCON RMT_CONT RMT_SYS ECO_DOUT ECO_DIN ECO_SCK ECO_CS ECO_POW KEY POWER_FAN_OFF POWER_FAN_LOCK INT_DCON PRST DCON_LIVE PCTS C_THM M_THM Y_THM BK_THM VIDEO_REDAY VIDEO_RESET ITOP BK_DEV_POST_FAN_ON BK_DEV_POST_FAN_ERR CL_CLEANER_FAN_ON CL_CLEANER_FAN_ERR PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_FAN_ ON PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_FAN_ ERR FIX_EXHAUST_FAN_PWM FIX_EXHAUST_FAN_ERR

Signal Name AC Relay ON Signal Seesaw Signal Reader Power Monitor RCON Remote DCON Remote Controller Remote System Remote ECO ID Data Out ECO ID Data In ECO ID Serial Clock ECO ID Chip Selection ECO ID Power Supply Key Switch Signal Power Supply Fan OFF Signal Power Supply Fan Lock Signal DC Controller Initialization signal Controller Receivable Signal DC Controller Live signal Printer Receivable Signal Scanner Unit (C) Thermistor Detection Scanner Unit (M) Thermistor Detection Scanner Unit (Y) Thermistor Detection Scanner Unit (Bk) Thermistor Detection Laser Interface PCB Ready Signal Laser Interface PCB Reset Signal ITOP Signal Developing/Pre-transfer Charging Fan Full Speed/ Half Speed Developing/Pre-transfer Charging Fan Lock Signal Color Cleaning Fan Full Speed/Half Speed Color Cleaning Fan Lock Signal Pre-fixing Feed Attraction Fan ON Pre-fixing Feed Attraction Fan Lock Signal Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan PWM Signal Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan Lock Signal

10-14

Jack No.

Abbreviated Signal Name

Signal Name

J1340

PRIM_EXHAUST_FAN_ON PRIM_EXHAUST_FAN_ERR BK_HOPPER_SCREW_M_DRIVE BK_HOPPER_TONER_SNS BK_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_ SNS BK_SCREW_ROLL_DTC_SNS WAIPER_VCC BK_WAIPER_M_ON Y_HOPPER_TONER_SNS Y_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS

Primary Exhaust Fan Full Speed/Half Speed Primary Exhaust Fan Lock Signal Hopper/Stirring Supply Motor (Bk) Drive Hopper Toner Level Sensor Detection Signal (Bk) Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor Detection Signal (Bk) Toner Feed Screw Rotation Detection Wiper Rotation Motor Power Supply Wiper Rotation Motor (Bk) ON Hopper Toner Level Sensor Detection Signal (Y) Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor Detection Signal (Y) Toner Feed Screw Rotation Detection (Y) Hopper/Stirring Supply Motor (Y) Drive Wiper Rotation Motor (Y) ON Hopper Toner Level Sensor Detection Signal (M) Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor Detection Signal (M) Toner Feed Screw Rotation Detection Hopper/Stirring Supply Motor (M) Drive Wiper Rotation Motor (M) ON Hopper Toner Level Sensor Detection Signal (C) Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor Detection Signal (C) Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor Detection Signal (C)/C Screw Rotation Detection Hopper/Stirring Supply Motor (M) Drive Wiper Rotation Motor (C) ON Toner Supply Cover Open/Close Sensor Detection Signal Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Open/Close Sensor Detection Signal (Bk) Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Open/Close Sensor Detection Signal (Y) Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Open/Close Sensor Detection Signal (M) Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Open/Close Sensor Detection Signal (C)

J1350

Y_SCREW_ROLL_DTC_SNS Y_HOPPER_SCREW_M_DRIVE Y_WAIPER_M_ON M_HOPPER_TONER_SNS M_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS M_SCREW_ROLL_DTC_SNS M_HOPPER_SCREW_M_DRIVE M_WAIPER_M_ON C_HOPPER_TONER_SNS C_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS C_SCREW_ROLL_DTC_SNS

J1360

C_HOPPER_SCREW_M_DRIVE C_WAIPER_M_ON TONER_CRG_DOOR_SNS BK_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS Y_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS M_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS C_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

10-14

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

Jack No. J1370

Abbreviated Signal Name Y_TONER_CRG_MTR_CW Y_TONER_CRG_MTR_CCW M_TONER_CRG_MTR_CW M_TONER_CRG_MTR_CCW C_TONER_CRG_MTR_CW C_TONER_CRG_MTR_CCW BK_TONER_CRG_MTR_CW BK_TONER_CRG_MTR_CCW BK_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS

J1390

HOPPER_COOL_IN_FAN_FULL/ HALF HOPPER_COOL_IN_FAN_LOCK C_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS M_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS Y_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS

J1402

J1403

HANTEN_SNS HANTEN_TATE_PASS1_SNS HANTEN_TATE_PASS2_SNS LEFTDOWN_DOOR_OPEN_SNS SOTO_HAISHI_SNS HAISHI_SL HAISHI_SETTYAKU_FAN1_ON HAISHI_SETTYAKU_FAN1_ERR HAISHI_SETTYAKU_FAN2_ON HAISHI_SETTYAKU_FAN2_ERR UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW4 UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW3 UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW2 UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW1 DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW4 DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW3 DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW2 DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW1

Signal Name

Jack No.

Abbreviated Signal Name

Toner Container Drive Motor (Y) Clockwise Toner Container Drive Motor (Y) Counter Clockwise Toner Container Drive Motor (M) Clockwise Toner Container Drive Motor (M) Counter Clockwise Toner Container Drive Motor (C) Clockwise Toner Container Drive Motor (C) Counter Clockwise Toner Container Drive Motor (Bk) Clockwise Toner Container Drive Motor (Bk) Counter Clockwise Release Holder Shift Cam Phase Sensor Detection Signal (Bk) Hopper Cooling Fan Full Speed/Half Speed

J1404

UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW4 UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW3 UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW2 UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW1 CASET3_ZANKEN_1_SNS CASET3_ZANKEN_2_SNS DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW4 DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW3 DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW2 DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW1 CASET4_ZANKEN_1_SNS CASET4_ZANKEN_2_SNS HANTEN_TATE_PASS3_SNS TATE_PASS2_SNS RIGHTDOWN_DOOR_OPEN_SNS

Hopper Cooling Fan Lock Signal Release Holder Shift Cam Phase Sensor Detection Signal (C) Release Holder Shift Cam Phase Sensor Detection Signal (M) Release Holder Shift Cam Phase Sensor Detection Signal (Y) Reverse Sensor Detection Signal Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1 Detection Signal Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2 Detection Signal Left Lower Cover Open/Close Sensor Detection Signal Outer Delivery Sensor Detection Signal Delivery Flapper Solenoid Delivery Heat Exhaust Fan 1 Drive Delivery Heat Exhaust Fan 1 Lock Signal Delivery Heat Exhaust Fan 2 Drive Delivery Heat Exhaust Fan 2 Lock Signal Cassette 3 Size Detection 2 Switch 4 Cassette 3 Size Detection 2 Switch 3 Cassette 3 Size Detection 2 Switch 2 Cassette 3 Size Detection 2 Switch 1 Cassette 4 Size Detection 2 Switch 4 Cassette 4 Size Detection 2 Switch 3 Cassette 4 Size Detection 2 Switch 2 Cassette 4 Size Detection 2 Switch 1

J1405

J1406

J1407

J1408

RIGHT_DECK_ZANKEN_1_SNS RIGHT_DECK_ZANKEN_2_SNS LEFT_DECK_ZANKEN_1_SNS LEFT_DECK_ZANKEN_2_SNS LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_ON LEFT_DECK_KYUSHI_SNS LEFT_LIMIT_SNS LEFT_DECK_PAPER_SNS LEFT_DECK_H_PAPER_SNS LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_SNS CST3_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B CST3_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B* CST3_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A* CST3_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A CST4_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B CST4_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B* CST4_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A* CST4_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A

10-15

Signal Name Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 4 Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 3 Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 2 Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 1 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 Detection Signal Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 Detection Signal Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 4 Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 3 Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 2 Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 1 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1 Detection Signal Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2 Detection Signal Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3 Detection Signal Vertical Path Sensor 2 Detection Signal Right Lower Cover Open/Close Sensor Detection Signal Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 Detection Signal Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 Detection Signal Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 Detection Signal Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 Detection Signal Left Deck Pickup Solenoid ON Left Deck Pickup Sensor Detection Signal Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor Detection Signal Left Deck Paper Sensor Detection Signal Left Deck Paper Surface Height Sensor Detection Signal Left Deck Pullout Sensor Detection Signal Cassette 3 Pickup Motor B Cassette 3 Pickup Motor B* Cassette 3 Pickup Motor A* Cassette 3 Pickup Motor A Cassette 4 Pickup Motor B Cassette 4 Pickup Motor B* Cassette 4 Pickup Motor A* Cassette 4 Pickup Motor A

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

10-15

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

Jack No.

Abbreviated Signal Name

Signal Name

Jack No.

J1409

2ND_TRANS_DESPRTION_MTR_ B 2ND_TRANS_DESPRTION_MTR_ B* 2ND_TRANS_DESPRTION_MTR_ A* 2ND_TRANS_DESPRTION_MTR_ A RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B* RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A* RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B* LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A* LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A RIGHT_TATEPASS_MTR_A RIGHT_TATEPASS_MTR_ACOM RIGHT_TATEPASS_MTR_A* RIGHT_TATEPASS_MTR_B RIGHT_TATEPASS_MTR_BCOM RIGHT_TATEPASS_MTR_B* LEFT_TATEPASS_MTR_A LEFT_TATEPASS_MTR_ACOM LEFT_TATEPASS_MTR_A* LEFT_TATEPASS_MTR_B LEFT_TATEPASS_MTR_BCOM LEFT_TATEPASS_MTR_B* CST_TATEPASS_MTR_A CST_TATEPASS_MTR_ACOM CST_TATEPASS_MTR_A* CST_TATEPASS_MTR_B CST_TATEPASS_MTR_BCOM CST_TATEPASS_MTR_B*

Secondary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor B

J1412

J1410

J1411

Secondary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor B* Secondary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor A* Secondary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor A Right Deck Pickup Motor B Right Deck Pickup Motor B* Right Deck Pickup Motor A* Right Deck Pickup Motor A Left Deck Pickup Motor B Left Deck Pickup Motor B* Left Deck Pickup Motor A* Left Deck Pickup Motor A Right Deck Vertical Path Motor A Right Deck Vertical Path Motor ACOM Right Deck Vertical Path Motor A* Right Deck Vertical Path Motor B Right Deck Vertical Path Motor BCOM Right Deck Vertical Path Motor B* Left Deck Vertical Path Motor A Left Deck Vertical Path Motor ACOM Left Deck Vertical Path Motor A* Left Deck Vertical Path Motor B Left Deck Vertical Path Motor BCOM Left Deck Vertical Path Motor B* Cassette Vertical Path Motor A Cassette Vertical Path Motor ACOM Cassette Vertical Path Motor A* Cassette Vertical Path Motor B Cassette Vertical Path Motor BCOM Cassette Vertical Path Motor B*

J1413

Abbreviated Signal Name HANTEN_ROLLER_RIKAN_SL HANTEN_MTR_A HANTEN_MTR_ACOM HANTEN_MTR_A* HANTEN_MTR_B HANTEN_MTR_BCOM HANTEN_MTR_B* HAISHI_MTR_A HAISHI_MTR_ACOM HAISHI_MTR_A* HAISHI_MTR_B HAISHI_MTR_BCOM HAISHI_MTR_B* REJIMAE_MULTI_MTR_A REJIMAE_MULTI_MTR_ACOM REJIMAE_MULTI_MTR_A* REJIMAE_MULTI_MTR_B REJIMAE_MULTI_MTR_BCOM

J1414

J1415

REJIMAE_MULTI_MTR_B* RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_ON RIGHT_DECK_KYUSHI_SNS RIGHT_LIMIT_SNS RIGHT_DECK_PAPER_SNS RIGHT_DECK_H_PAPER_SNS TATE_PASS1_SNS MULTI_PAPER_SNS MULTI_NAKAITA_SL MULTI_LAST_PAPER_SNS WIDTH_OF_PAPER_DTC

J1416

HAI_TRN_ROCK_SW

J1417

CST3_PICK_UP_ON CST3_KYUSHI_SNS CST3_LIMIT_SNS CST3_PAPER_SNS CST3_H_PAPER_SNS CST3_TATE_PASS_SNS

10-16

Signal Name Reverse Upper Roller Disengagement Solenoid ON Reverse Motor A Reverse Motor ACOM Reverse Motor A* Reverse Motor B Reverse Motor BCOM Reverse Motor B* Delivery Motor A Delivery Motor ACOM Delivery Motor A* Delivery Motor B Delivery Motor BCOM Delivery Motor B* Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor A Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor ACOM Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor A* Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor B Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor BCOM Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor B* Right Deck Pickup Solenoid ON Right Deck Pickup Sensor Detection Signal Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor Detection Signal Right Deck Paper Sensor Detection Signal Right Deck Paper Surface Height Sensor Detection Signal Vertical Path Sensor 1 Detection Signal Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor Detection Signal/ Multi-purpose Tray Paper Detection Sensor Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid ON Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor Detection Signal/Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB Detection Signal Waste Toner Screw Lock Detection Switch/Waste Toner Lock Switch Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid ON Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor Detection Signal Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor Detection Signal Cassette 3 Paper Sensor Detection Signal Cassette 3 Paper Surface Height Sensor Detection Signal Vertical Path Sensor 3 Detection Signal

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

10-16

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

Jack No. J1418

J1419

J1503

Abbreviated Signal Name CST4_PICK_UP_ON CST4_KYUSHI_SNS CST4_LIMIT_SNS CST4_PAPER_SNS CST4_H_PAPER_SNS TATE_PASS_SNS HAISHI_SETTYAKU_FAN3_ON HAISHI_SETTYAKU_FAN3_ERR HAISHI_SETTYAKU_FAN4_ON HAISHI_SETTYAKU_FAN4_ERR OPTION_COOL_FAN1_ON OPTION_COOL_FAN1_ERR OPTION_COOL_FAN2_ON OPTION_COOL_FAN2_ERR OPTION_FAN_CNCT REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_B REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_B* REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_A* REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_A FUSER_BELT_DESPORTION_ MTR_OUT_B* FUSER_BELT_DESPORTION_ MTR_OUT_B FUSER_BELT_DESPORTION_ MTR_OUT_A* FUSER_BELT_DESPORTION_ MTR_OUT_A PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_MTR_ OUT_B PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_MTR_ OUT_B* PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_MTR_ OUT_A* PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_MTR_ OUT_A UNDER_BELT_COOL_FAN1_ FULL/HALF UNDER_BELT_COOL_FAN1_ LOCK UNDER_BELT_COOL_FAN2_ FULL/HALF UNDER_BELT_COOL_FAN2_ LOCK

Signal Name

Jack No.

Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid ON Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor Detection Signal Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor Detection Signal Cassette 4 Paper Sensor Detection Signal Cassette 4 Paper Surface Height Sensor Detection Signal Vertical Path Sensor 4 Detection Signal Delivery Heat Exhaust Fan 3 Drive Delivery Heat Exhaust Fan 3 Lock Signal Delivery Heat Exhaust Fan 4 Drive Delivery Heat Exhaust Fan 4 Lock Signal Anti-adhesion Fan 1 Drive Anti-adhesion Fan 1 Signal Anti-adhesion Fan 2 Drive Anti-adhesion Fan 2 Lock Signal Anti-adhesion Fan 1 Connection Detection Signal Duplex Left Motor B Duplex Left Motor B* Duplex Left Motor A* Duplex Left Motor A Fixing Pressure Release Motor B*

J1504

Fixing Pressure Release Motor B Fixing Pressure Release Motor A* Fixing Pressure Release Motor A* Pre-fixing Feed Motor B Pre-fixing Feed Motor B* Pre-fixing Feed Motor A* Pre-fixing Feed Motor A

J1505

J1507

Abbreviated Signal Name REVERSE_RIGHT_MTR_A REVERSE_RIGHT_MTR_ACOM REVERSE_RIGHT_MTR_A* REVERSE_RIGHT_MTR_B REVERSE_RIGHT_MTR_BCOM REVERSE_RIGHT_MTR_B* REGIST_MTR_A REGIST_MTR_ACOM REGIST_MTR_A* REGIST_MTR_B REGIST_MTR_BCOM REGIST_MTR_B* FUSER_MTR_GAIN_YOBI FUSER_MTR_FG FUSER_MTR_CLK FUSER_MTR_GAIN FUSER_MTR_LOCK FUSER_MTR_ON FUSER_MTR_BRAKE UNDER_FUSER_BELT_ ALIGHNMENT_MTR_B* UNDER_FUSER_BELT_ ALIGHNMENT_MTR_B UNDER_FUSER_BELT_ ALIGHNMENT_MTR_A* UNDER_FUSER_BELT_ ALIGHNMENT_MTR_A UNDER_FUSER_BELT_ ALIGHNMENT_MTR_HP_SNS FUSER_ENTRANCE_SNS FUSER_BELT_DESPORTION_ SNS FUSER_EXIT_SNS INNER_EXIT_SNS

10-17

Signal Name Duplex Right Motor A Duplex Right Motor ACOM Duplex Right Motor A* Duplex Right Motor B Duplex Right Motor BCOM Duplex Right Motor/Duplex Right Motor B* Registration Motor A Registration Motor ACOM Registration Motor A* Registration Motor B Registration Motor BCOM Registration Motor B* Fixing Motor Gain Signal (Spare) Fixing Motor FG Signal Fixing Motor Clock Signal Fixing Motor Gain Signal Fixing Motor Lock Signal Fixing Motor ON Signal Fixing Motor Brake Signal Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor B* Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor B Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor A* Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor A Fixing Belt HP Sensor Detection Signal Fixing Inlet Sensor Detection Signal Fixing Pressure Release Sensor Detection Signal Fixing Wrap Sensor Detection Signal Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor Detection Signal

Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Front) Full Speed/Half Speed Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Front) Lock Signal Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Rear) Full Speed/Half Speed Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Rear) Lock Signal

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

10-17

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

Jack No.

Abbreviated Signal Name

J1508

UPPER_FUSER_BELT_ ALIGHNMENT_MTR_B* UPPER_FUSER_BELT_ ALIGHNMENT_MTR_B UPPER_FUSER_BELT_ ALIGHNMENT_MTR_A* UPPER_FUSER_BELT_ ALIGHNMENT_MTR_A UPPER_FUSER_BELT_ ALIGHNMENT_MTR_HP_SNS UPPER_FUSER_BELT_ ALIGHNMENT_SNS1 UPPER_FUSER_BELT_ ALIGHNMENT_SNS2 2ND_TRANS_DESPORTION_HP_ SNS 2ND_TRANS_END_SNS OHP_SNS_LED_ON OHP_SNS REGI_SNS VPASS_JOINT_SNS J3062_CNCT_RTN

J1509

J1511

J1512

TR2_VOLT_DETECT TR2_CURRENT_DETECT DA_TR2_CONT_N DA_TR2_CONT_CURRENT DA_TR2_CONT_P TR2_CRNT_ON TR2_MINUS_ON TR2_CV_ON HV_RMT TR2_24V_RDY J3540_CNCT_RTN

J1514

TR2_REMOVE_CK_25 DA_TR2_REMOVE_CONT TR2_REMOVE_DC_ON HV_RMT TR2_REMOVE_24V_RDY REVERSE_LEFT_SNS REVERSE_CENTER_SNS REVERSE_RIGHT_SNS REVERSE_VPASS_SNS

Signal Name Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor B*

Jack No. J1805

Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor B Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor A* Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor A Fixing Belt HP Sensor Detection Signal Fixing Belt Position Sensor 1 Detection Signal Fixing Belt Position Sensor 2 Detection Signal Secondary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor Detection Signal Post-secondary Transfer Sensor Detection Signal OHP LED ON OHP Sensor Detection Signal Registration Sensor Detection Signal Vertical Path Merging Sensor Detection Signal Secondary Transfer High Voltage Connection Detection Secondary Transfer Voltage Monitor Secondary Transfer Current Monitor Secondary Transfer Minus Control Secondary Transfer Current Control Secondary Transfer Plus Controller Secondary Transfer Current ON Secondary Transfer Minus ON Secondary Transfer Constant Voltage ON High Voltage Remote Secondary Transfer 24V Ready Secondary Transfer Static Elimination Connection Detection Secondary Transfer Static Elimination Clock 25kHz Secondary Transfer Static Elimination Control Secondary Transfer Static Elimination DC ON High Voltage Remote Secondary Transfer Static Elimination 24V Ready Duplex Sensor 1 Detection Signal Duplex Sensor 2 Detection Signal Duplex Sensor 3 Detection Signal Duplex Sensor 4 Detection Signal

J1806

Abbreviated Signal Name IL_LOOP_DTC IL_ERR_DTC TEIHAN_POWER_RMT IH_POWER_RMT FUSER_M_I_MONITOR AC_RL_ON SEESAW R_PW_MONI RMT_RCON RMT_DCON RMT_CONT RMT_SYS IH_POWER_FAN_LOCK 38V_P_COOL_FAN_LOCK POWER12V_FAN_LOCK POWER24V_FAN_LOCK 38V_P_COOL_FAN_HALF 38V_P_COOL_FAN_FULL IH_POWER_FAN_HALF IH_POWER_FAN_FULL POWER12V_FAN_HALF POWER12V_FAN_FULL POWER24V_FAN_HALF POWER24V_FAN_FULL AC_DR_ID_BIT1 AC_DR_ID_BIT0 DRUM_HEAT_TR_ON CST_HEAT_TR_ON SUB_TR_ERR_ASIC SUB_TR_ON HEATER_ZERO_CROSS RMT_D0 24VB_RMT 24VA_RMT

10-18

Signal Name Interlock Arch Detection Signal Interlock Error Detection Signal (Not used) Fixing Feed 24V Power Supply Remote IH Power Supply Power Supply Remote Fixing Motor Current Monitor Signal AC Relay ON Signal Seesaw Signal Reader Controller Power Supply Monitor Signal Reader Controller Power Supply Remote DC Controller Power Supply Remote (Printer Power Supply Remote) Controller Power Supply Remote System Remote (12V Power Supply Remote) IH Power Supply Cooling Fan Lock Signal Power Supply Cooling Fan (38V) Lock Signal Power Supply Fan 1 Lock Signal Power Supply Fan 2 Lock Signal Power Supply Cooling Fan (38V) Half Speed Signal Power Supply Cooling Fan (38V) Full Speed Signal IH Power Supply Fan Half Speed Signal IH Power Supply Cooling Fan Full Speed Signal Power Supply Fan 1 Half Speed Signal Power Supply Fan 1 Full Speed Signal Power Supply Fan 2 Half Speed Signal Power Supply Fan 2 Full Speed Signal AC Driver PCB ID Bit 1 AC Driver PCB ID Bit 0 Drum Heater Triac ON Signal Cassette Heater Triac ON Signal Pressure Heater Triac Error Signal Pressure Heater Triac ON Signal Zero Cross Signal Option Power Supply Remote 24VB Power Supply Remote 24VA Power Supply Remote

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

10-18

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

Jack No. J1807

J1812

J1830

J1910

J1911

Abbreviated Signal Name DRUM_HEAT_TR_ON CST_HEAT_TR_ON SUB_TR_ERR SUB_TR_ON SUB_HEAT_RL_ON ZERO_CROSS +3.3V_HIJYOYA AC_DR_ID_BIT0 AC_DR_ID_BIT1 RMT_SYS 12V_SEESAW SHUT_OFF 3.3VR_JYOYA IH_POWER_FAN_LOCK IH_POWER_FAN_FULL/HALF 12V_TEIHAN 12V_SW_IH POWER12V_FAN_FULL/OFF POWER12V_FAN_LOCK POWER24V_FAN_FULL/HALF POWER24V_FAN_LOCK 38V_P_COOL_FAN_FULL/HALF 38V_P_COOL_FAN_LOCK DRM_ENC1_Y DRM_ENC2_Y DRM_ENC1_M DRM_ENC2_M DRM_ENC1_C DRM_ENC2_C DRM_ENC1_K DRM_ENC2_K

Signal Name Drum Heater ON Signal Cassette Heater Triac ON Signal Pressure Heater Triac Error Signal Pressure Heater Triac ON Signal Pressure Heater Relay ON Signal Zero Cross Signal 3.3V Non-all-night Power Supply AC Driver PCB ID Bit 0 AC Driver PCB ID Bit 1 12V Power Supply AC OFF Signal 12V Seesaw Signal Shut OFF Signal 3.3V All-night Power Supply IH Power Supply Fan Lock Signal IH Power Supply Fan Full Speed/Half Speed 12V Power Supply 12V Power Supply (via Fuse PCB) Power Supply Fan 1 Drive Signal Power Supply Fan 1 Lock Signal Power Supply Fan 2 Drive Signal Power Supply Fan 2 Lock Signal Power Supply Cooling Fan (38V) Drive Signal Power Supply Cooling Fan (38V) Lock Signal Y Drum Encoder Signal 1 Y Drum Encoder Signal 2 M Drum Encoder Signal 1 M Drum Encoder Signal 2 C Drum Encoder Signal 1 C Drum Encoder Signal 2 Bk Drum Encoder Signal 1 Bk Drum Encoder Signal 2

Jack No. J1920

J1921

J1922

J2202

Abbreviated Signal Name DRM_DIR_Y_BUF DRM_ON_Y_BUF DRM_BREAK_Y_BUF DRM_FG_Y DRM_PWM_Y_BUF DRM_DIR_M_BUF DRM_ON_M_BUF DRM_BREAK_M_BUF DRM_FG_M DRM_PWM_M_BUF DRM_DIR_C_BUF DRM_ON_C_BUF DRM_BREAK_C_BUF DRM_FG_C DRM_PWM_C_BUF DRM_DIR_K_BUF DRM_ON_K_BUF DRM_BREAK_K_BUF DRM_FG_K DRM_PWM_K_BUF ITB_DIR_BUF ITB_ON_BUF ITB_BREAK_BUF ITB_FG_IN ITB_PWM_BUF ITB_ENC1 ITB_ENC2 THM_S_CNT THM_P_42_5_DTC THM_S_50_LMT TH_P TH_S THM_P_42_5_DTC

10-19

Signal Name Drum Motor (Y) Rotation Direction Signal Drum Motor (Y) ON Signal Drum Motor (Y) Brake Signal Drum Motor (Y) FG Signal Drum Motor (Y) PWM Signal Drum Motor (M) Rotation Direction Signal Drum Motor (M) ON Signal Drum Motor (M) Brake Signal Drum Motor (M) FG Signal Drum Motor (M) PWM Signal Drum Motor (C) Rotation Direction Signal Drum Motor (C) ON Signal Drum Motor (C) Brake Signal Drum Motor (C) FG Signal Drum Motor (C) PWM Signal Drum Motor (Bk) Rotation Direction Signal Drum Motor (Bk) ON Signal Drum Motor (Bk) Brake Signal Drum Motor (Bk) FG Signal Drum Motor (Bk) PWM Signal ITB Drive Motor Rotation Direction Signal ITB Drive Motor ON Signal ITB Drive Motor Brake Signal ITB Drive Motor FG Signal ITB Drive Motor PWM Signal ITB Encoder Signal 1 ITB Encoder Signal 2 Drum Heater (Bk) Thermistor Connection Detection Drum Heater (Bk) Thermopile 42.5 DegC Detection Drum Heater (Bk) Thermistor 50 DegC Limit Detection Drum Surface Temperature Limit Detection Drum Surface Temperature Drum Heater (Bk) Thermopile 42.5 DegC Detection T-10-3

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List

10-19

10-20

8

7

6

120V

100V

5

IL1

Inlet

F

SOLD6

2

3

4

1

UN30

N

J503

Environment Switch FT13 1

3

R

T

Cassette Heater Switch

2

4

2

4

100V All-night Power Supply PCB

J8123F

UN32

J8123M

SW13

FT18

FT18

1

2

1

2

1

2

J500 1

2

UN31

FT15

FT14

F

IH Power Supply PCB

SW12

(W)

SOLD13

SOLD6

SOLD5 (BK)

Leakage Breaker 3

(W)

SOLD5

U

(BK)

1

W

ELB3

MT53

FT33 FT33

L

FT1

1 2 3

FT2

R

T

2

4

2

4

FT7

N

3

U

W

R

T

R

FT8 FT3

1

1 2 3

1

3

ELB2

Leakage Breaker 2

1 2 3

L

FT1

2

J8228M

Inlet

1 2 3

U

W

ELB1

Leakage Breaker 1

FT2

1

3

U

T

FT4

MT53

FT5

1

W

Leakage Breaker 1

FT6

FT30 3

ELB1

1

2

1

FT31

3

200V_2

200V

IL2

4

2

9

SOLD13

10

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (1/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (1/31)

2

1

3

FT17

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

J8120M

J8120F

200V All-night Power Supply PCB

MT4

5

6

1

UN8 UN9 UN10

100V Drum Heater Driver PCB

6

7

J1801

8

3

4

5

5

6

7

6

8

7

8

9

AC_N1

AC_H1

AC_N(W)

5

J8126F

1

2 2

3 3

UN35

7

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

AC_N(W)

AC_H(BK) 1

4

5 5

6 6

J8079M

7

J8079F

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

1 1

2

AC_N(W)_200V

AC_H(BK)

AC_N(W) 4

1

2

3

4

5

3

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

J8130M

DC Power Supply PCB (24V)

2

3

4

5

1

J8189M 1

J8111F

2

1

6

2

3

4

J8081M

To P.10

Deck Heater 2

B-2 2

C

J8109M

4 4

1

2

1

2

J8083M

J8083F

J8109F 6

J8130F

J102B

6

AC_H(BK)

5

1

2

GND

4

GND 1

J8111M

4

1

2

To P.2

To P.31

C-2

F-6

J8084M

B

J202B 10

1

9

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MT25

2

J1802

4

3

J8126M

J8192M

N.C

1

3

GND

2

GND

1

2

UN12

AC_H2

3

J8192F

4

1

J809

J803 3

J2204 3

AC_H1

2

AC_H(BK)

AC_N(W)

(J101)

24VA

9

1

1

J202A

24VA

8

GND

GND

12V 5

7

4

UN34

GND

4

6

3

DC Power Supply PCB (24VA)

RMT_TO_24VA_POWER

3

12V

2

5

GND

1

12V

GND

A

4

2

J102A

UN33

3

3

GND

1

J201

2

GND

4

24VA

3

AC_H(BK)

AC_N(W)

AC_H(BK) 2

DC Power Supply PCB (12V) 2

3

1

J8191M

NM

J101A (J101)

1

2

J8190M

1

B

1

J8191F

GND

4

3

24VB

3

2

GND

2

1

24VB

1

J8190F

24VB

4

RMT_TO_24VB_POWER

3

N.C

2

GND

1

2

5

200V Drum Heater Driver PCB

J2201 1

4

2

AC_N(W)_100V

3

1

6

AC_H(BK)

2

J2200

5

AC_H(BK)

1

UN11

AC_H(BK)

J8129F

4

AC_N(W)

AC_N(W)

C

J8129M

3

AC_N(W)

7

2

AC_H(BK)

7

6

1

4

1

6

5

6

J808

J806 3

AC_H2

5

4

2

AC_N2

4

3

1

AC_N2

3

2

5

200V AC Driver PCB

3

AC_N(W)

2

1

4

D

J814

2

AC_N(W)

1

1

AC_H(BK)

7

AC_N(W)

6

AC_N(W)

5

AC_H(BK)

4

AC_H(BK)

3

AC_H(BK)

2

3

120V AC Driver PCB

J815

1

2

J812

100V AC Driver PCB

AC_H(BK)

J813

1

3

J820

AC_N(W)

D

2

IV_TEST(3.3V)

4

IV_TEST(GND)

3

IV_TEST(GND)

2

IV_TEST(GND)

1

J805

IV_TEST(12V)

UN10

200V AC Driver PCB

IV_TEST(12V)

4

READER_HEATER_N2

UN9

120V AC Driver PCB

E

FT45

FT44

3

READER_HEATER_N1

2

J801

READER_HEATER_H

UN8

100V AC Driver PCB

AC_N(W)

AC_H(BK)

FT55

1

5

AC_N(W)_200V

4

MT5

FT54

3

COR9

AC_N(W)_100V

2

3

AC_N(W)

1

J801

2

AC_H(BK)

4

AC_N(W)

AC_H(BK)

3

AC_H(BK)

2

AC_N(W)

1

J801

AC_N(W)

3

N.C AC_H(BK)

2

J816

1

FT16

AC_N(W)

1

AC_N(W)

AC_H(BK)

AC_N(W)

AC_H(BK)

2

J681

E

RMT_TO_12VPOWER

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (1/31)

General Circuit Diagram

FT21

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

MT26

MT47

FT22

FT32

A

9

J1803

UN7

H6

Cassette Heater

1

Relay PCB

2

H1

Drum Heater (Bk)

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.1 F-10-4

10-20

10-21

9

8

7

6

SW7

SW18

Main Switch

SOLD7 1

F

SOLD15

2

SL 1

1

SW2

Front Door Switch 2

Front Door Switch 1

SOLD16

1

2

3

SW1

Remote Shutdown Solenoid

Delivery Door Switch

SOLD8

4

SL9

SW5

Fixing Feed Unit Switch

5

1

2

1

SOLD20

SW3

2

1

SOLD1

2

F

SOLD17

SOLD18

2

1

Multi-purpose Tray Unit Switch SOLD2

2

SOLD19

2

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (2/31)

10

J18230L 1

2

3

J1012 1

2

1

2

J8057M

1

2

1

2

1

J8237M

2

J8057F

J18230DH

2

J8236M J8056F

J18230D

1

J8237F

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

1

2

J8056M J8236F

J8024L

E-5

9

2

3

4

5

6

7

1

1

2

J8024D

10

1

J1813

J8234M

J8235M

2

J8235F

2

1

2

1

2

E

J8234F

12V_IL

+24VB

8

1

2

J8238M

1

12V_IL

2

2

12V_IL

1

TEIHAN_NOBU_SW

J8165F

12V_IL

4

1

2

12V_IL

3

+12V_ENG1

2

3.3VR_SEESAW

1

1

4

3.3VR

2

3

12V_SW_FROM_FUS

1

E

2

12V_SW_TO_FUS

1

J8122M

J8024LH

J8238F

12V_IL

J8165M

REMOTE_SL_OFF

To P.6

3

4

J1850

D

D

UN7 Relay PCB

3

8

7

6

4

3

2

1

1

5

POWER12V_FAN_FULL/OFF

GND

GND

3.3R

3.3R

N.C.

N.C.

GND

12V_ENG2

3.3VR

AC_RELAY_ON

12V_SEESAW

GND

CST_HEAT_TR_ON

AC_DR_ID_BIT0

AC_DR_ID_BIT1

REG+3.3V

GND

REG+3.3V

GND

DRUM_HEAT_RL_RESET

DRUM_HEAT_RL_SET

N.C

GND

IH_CURRENT

5

*IH-ON

GND

*IH_RELAY1_ON

IH_VOLTAGE

*IH_RELAY2_ON

GND

*IH_PWM1

*IH_PWM2

GND

GND

+12V_SW_FROM_FUS

IH_POWER_ERR

IH_12V_ERR

GND

+12V_ENG2

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

J1819

J1830 4

2

3

4

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

B-3

To P.1

J8005D

READER_HEATER_N2

2

READER_HEATER_N1

1

READER_HEATER_H

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

AC_N(W)

8

AC_N(W)

7

AC_H(BK)

6

GND

5

24VB_RCON

4

GND

J1804 3

24VB_RCON

2

GND

1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

12V_RCON

8

*POWER24V_FAN_LOCK

7

GND

6

POWER24V_FAN_FULL/HALF

5

N.C

IH_POWER_FAN_FULL/HALF

4

*POWER12V_FAN_LOCK

J1807 3

GND

*IH_POWER_FAN_LOCK

N.C

C

2

GND

1

GND

J1812

1

2

3

C

J8005LH 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

J8005L

J7401D

N.C

1

N.C

J7401DH

J7400D 3

2

1

2

1

B

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

J811

J501

IH_FAN_LOCK

GND

3

2

1

1

3

4

5

3

2

1

2

1 3

J8239M

J7400L

1

2

3

4

5

6

J8233F

6 123

100V All-night Power Supply PCB

B

123

READER

UN31

FM8

FM9

Power Supply Fan 1

Power Supply Fan 2

UN32

200V All-night Power Supply PCB

200V AC Driver PCB

J7403D

2

J691

UN10

J7403DH

3

2

1

2

3

2

4

120V AC Driver PCB

3

1 1

5

UN9

J521

A

6

100V AC Driver PCB

IH Power Supply PCB 2

7

UN8

UN30

1

8

J7400DH

3

J7401L

IH_FAN_FULL/HALF

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (2/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (2/31)

J7403L

A

3

FM7

IH Power Supply Fan

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.2 F-10-5

10-21

10-22

E

2

4

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

4

5

1

GND

3

1

2

GND

2

2

24V_IL

1

GND

24V_IL

1

12V_ENG2

2

GND

J8205F

24V_IL

J8205M 1

2

1

F

J3041

1

COR6

2

3

UN40

J3021 3

4

6

7

8

3

24V_IL

1

5

Developing High Voltage PCB (CL)

GND

4

12V

J3011

3

GND

GND

UN38

Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color)

GND

2

GND

1

24V_IL

J3545

UN37

Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk)

24V_IL

Pre-primary Transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk)

6

GND

UN50

F

7

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (3/31)

8

24V_IL

9

24V_IL

10

E

J8207M J8207F

9

J1814

D

D

UN7

Relay PCB J1805

+5V

GND

GND

GND

3.3VR_FUSE

GND

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

L2_KSB_RX_1

8

L2_KSB_TX_1BUF

7

GND

6

POWER12V_FAN_OFF

5

R_PW_MON

4

*POWER_FAN_LOCK

3

3.3VR_SEESAW

2

GND

1

RMT_TRIP

8

RMT_SYS

7

RMT_RCON

6

RMT_CONT

5

GND

4

RMT_DCON

3

RMT_QUICK

2

GND

GND

1

GND

8

12V_IL (VIDEO)

7

GND

6

12V_ENG1

5

GND

4

24VA_IL

3

24VA_DCON_VIDEO

2

24VB_IL_KYUSHI

GND

J1817

1

GND

GND

24VB_KYUSHI_BUFF

7

24VB_KYUSHI_BUFF

6

GND

5

GND

4

24VB_FIN

3

24VB_KYUSHI_BUFF

2

GND

J1821

1

24VA_DRUM

J1815

24VA_DRUM

C

C J8184M

2

12V

3

5

5

6

GND

2

3

4

5

6

J1200

7

8

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

J1224

UN2

DC Controller Interface PCB

4

4

GND 12V_IL

6

1

GND

3

UN99

Laser Power Supply Relay PCB

MT41

24V

J1201

1

J8184F

2

2

1

2

1

J5600

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

B

GND

2

1.25V

1

10 11 12

GND

9

1.25V

8

GND

7

1.5V

6

GND

5

3.3V

4

GND

3

5V

3

2

GND

2

1

24V

B

24VB_3.5KD

J5601

GND

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (3/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (3/31)

J8229M 1

2

3

4

J1900

UN6

Drum ITB Driver PCB

1

4

J7515

To Paper Deck

1

2

3

4

5

6

Decurler pass driver、 Finisher side（Lattice） To Buffer Pass

1

2

3

4

J1450

10 11 12

J5500

UN4

UN100

Pickup Feed Driver PCB

Laser Interface PCB

A

A

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.3 F-10-6

10-22

2

4 3

2 1

F F

J3040 2 1

E

J30300L

D

J1227

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

DC Controller Interface PCB

UN2

B19 A19

J1230A

A

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (4/31)

DEV_POR

UN39

Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk)

DEV_DC_VSNS_K

5

DEV_AC_VSNS_K

6

DEV_DC_PWM_K

7

DEV_AC_PWM_K

8

DEV_CK_B_K

13 12 11 10 9

DEV_CK_A_K

DEV_DC_CLK_K

3.3V_VREF

GND

24V

GND

3

20

N.C

19

L2_M2S_0GND

18

J3046

1

17

24V

UN40

2

16

L2_EXCK_0+ GND L2_M2S_0+

4 3

5

15

L2_S2M_0GND L2_EXCK_0-

7 14

1

6

8 13

L2_M2S_1GND L2_S2M_0+

10 9

11 12

L2_EXCK_1+ GND L2_M2S_1-

13 12

14

L2_EXCK_1-

L2_S2M_1GND

15

16 11

2

10

24V

GND

3

9

+3.3V

17

3

4

8

5

24V

Developing High Voltage PCB (CL)

7

19

L2_M2S_2GND L2_S2M_1+

1 18

2

B20 A20

GND

J3045

6

3.3V_VREF

6

5

DEV_DC_CLK_K

7

4

DEV_CK_A_K

DEV_CK_B_K

DEV_AC_PWM_K

4

3

J1230B

8

2

J1230WH

DEV_DC_PWM_K

DEV_AC_VSNS_K

DEV_DC_VSNS_K

DEV_POR

13 12 11 10 9

1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

20

L2_EXCK_2+ GND L2_M2S_2+

4 3

5

J8240B

19

COR7

18

1

17

J1228

16

L2_S2M_2GND L2_EXCK_2-

7 6

8

L2_S2M_2+

MDECK_RESET GND

9

10

MDECK_REMOTE GND

11

12 15

2

14

*MDECK_EEP_CS

13

N.C

MDECK_ADEEP_CLK *MDECK_AD_CS

MDECK_ADEEP_DOUT

4

3

13

4

12

UN38

11

5

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

6

9

N.C.

GND

DEV_DC_CLK

DEV_AC_CLKA

7

14

15

MDECK_ADEEP_DIN

5 16

Primary Transfer PCB

UN43

MDECK_CNCT_IN

1

17

6

5

8

2

DEV_AC_CLKB

J30300D 8

7

3

UART_DEV_HV_RX

UART_DEV_HV_TX_BUF

GND

9

6

4

24V

3.3V_ANALOG

Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color)

5

5

GND

3.3V

1

4

6

1TR_DC-CLK

DEV_AC_CLKB

DEV_AC_CLKA

DEV_DC_CLK

GND

UART_PRIM_HV_RX

J3051

3

7

J30300DH

2

8

8

GND

7

2

1

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

3

1TR_DC-PWM-Y

8

4

1TR_DC-V-SNS-Y

7

6

1TR_DC-I-SNS-Y

6

5

1TR_DC-PWM-M

5

4

5

18

J3570

4

UART_PRIM_HV_TX_BUF

6

19

7

3

3

1TR_DC-V-SNS-M

2

2

6

9

1

GND

13

7

8

1

8

1TR_DC-I-SNS-M

UN50

3.3V_ANALOG

11 10 9

GND

Pre-primary Transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk) 3.3V

J3544

1TR_DC-PWM-C

1

7

13

2

1TR_DC-V-SNS-C

11

3

1TR_DC-I-SNS-C

10

4

1TR_DC-PWM-K

GND

9

5

1TR_DC-V-SNS-K

POST_AC_CLK_B_TO_HV

8

6

GND(J_CNCT_RTN)

POST_AC_CLK_A_TO_HV

7

7

12

DPOST_DC_CONT HV_DPOST_AC_ON CMN_CK_25_1TO_HV

6

8

1TR_DC-I-SNS-K

GND HV_DPOST_DC_ON

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6

8

5

J3050

5

B GND(24V_RDY)

UN37

4

C HV_RMT_POST

Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk)

GND

D 4

1

3

2

S_GND

3

7

3

9

8

2

3.3V_ANALOG

E 4

2

1

5

GRID_CONT

6

J_CNCT_RTN

7

PRIM_CONT

9

1

10 8

S_GND

9

HVRMT

J3010

PRIM_GRID_ON

10

24V_RDY

J_CNCT

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (4/31)

10-23

■■General Circuit Diagram (4/31)

C

B

J8240DWH

J8240A

To Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1

A

1

P.4 F-10-7

10-23

B

10 9 2

J9006L 2

1

J9006

J9006H 1

1

Key Switch

SW9 J7520L J7520D 1

C

4

1 2 3

3

2 4

2

3

8 5

J7520LH 1

4 1 2

5 4

7

3

3

4

2

5 1

J9007 1 7

ECO-ID PCB

UN80

6 2 3

6 5

4

4

5

3

6

2

7

1

1 2

9

3 4 5

8 7 6

6 7 8

J1400

5

5

4 3 2

J1221

4 3 2

J1231 10 1

J1401

1

UN4

Pickup Feed Driver PCB

4 2 3 4 5

13 12 11 10 9

6

8

7

7

8

6 5 4 3

1

2

1 2 3 4 5

3

6 7 8

FIN_DOWNLOAD

N.C.

12 11 10 9 8

GND

N.C.

To Buffer Driver

FIN_RESET

FIN_MODE

GND

Laser Interface PCB

UN100

FIN_BIT

1

GND

IPC_TXD

IPC_RXD

2

*FIN_RMT

3

BUFFER_CNCT_S2M

4

GND

5

L2_KSB_RX_3

6

L2_KSB_TX_3_BUF

7

5V_A

8

GND

9

12V

J8223DH

GND

BUFFER_CNCT_M2S

ITOP

*VIDEO_RESET

VIDEO_REDAY

GND

BK_THM

Y_THM

M_THM

C_THM

GND

PCTS

DCON_LIVE

PRTS

INT_DCON

*POWER_FAN_LOCK

POWER12V_FAN_OFF

KEY

GND

ECO_POW

ECO_SCL

ECO_SCK

ECO_SDA

ECO_DET

RMT_TRIP

RMT_SYS

RMT_CONT

RMT_DCON

4 3 2

7 6 5 4 3

2

1

F F

To RS232C I/F To Finisher

J8223D

2 1

J8227DH J8227D

J5502 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

E

J1226

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

D

DC Controller Interface PCB

UN2 J1225 9 10 11 12 13

J1901

UN6

A

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (5/31)

V_PASS_JOINT_SNS

5

REJI_SNS

9

6

L1_KSB_RX_5

7

L1_KSB_TX_5_BUF

J1223

8

GND

J1212

RMT_RCON

R_PW_MON

SEESAW

RMT_QUICK

GND

GND

L1_BUSCOM_RX_0

L1_BUSCOM_TX_0_BUF

L1_BUSCOM_CLK_0_BUF

J9005

L1_KSB_RX_4

L1_BUSCOM_RX_1 GND

J9005H

L1_KSB_TX_4_BUF

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

GND

1

8

5V_A

2

7

GND

3

6

12V

4

5

GND

5

5

3V_ANALOG

6

4

N.C.

7

3

GND

8

2

L1_KSB_RX3-

J1220

1

L1_KSB_RX3+

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

L1_BUSCOM_TX_1_BUF

L1_BUSCOM_CLK_1_BUF

6

GND

*REJI_ON_IRQ

*IMG2_PVREQ_IRQ

GND

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

L1_KSB_TX3-

DDI_CMD_TX

8

GND

7

DDI_CMD_RX

GND

DDI_LIVEWAKE

DDI_CPRDY

DDI_PPRDY

*DDI_RESET

*DDI_DOWNLOAD

GND

FUNCTION_MODE0

6

L1_KSB_TX3+

J1251

5

L1_KSB_TX2_BUF

5

4

GND

4

3

L1_KSB_RX2

J1211

2

REJI_ON_IRQ_BUF

3 3

1

V_PASS_JOINT_SNS

J1214

FUNCTION_MODE1

FUNCTION_MODE2

FUNCTION_MODE3

J5501

REJI_SNS

2

1

GND

2 1

2

5V_A

8

3

GND

J1210

4

7

12V

1

5

ECO_POW

7

1

GND

6 GND

2

ECO_SCL

5

CP9

CP10

3

BOOT

8

GND

4

4

ECO_SDA

3

5

N.C.

2

6

PC_RXD

7

PC_TXD

9

FIX_EXHAUST_FAN_ERR

1

+3.3V_CPU

8

GND

D GND

J9002H J9002

FIX_EXHAUST_FAN_PWM

24V

E DOWNLOAD_PC

10

KEY

GND

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (5/31)

10-24

■■General Circuit Diagram (5/31)

C

1

B

123

Drum ITB Driver PCB

2

Fixing Heat Fan

FM6

A

1

P.5 F-10-8

10-24

10-25

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (6/31)

10

■Host Machine■ UN7

F

F

Relay PCB

TH_CNCT2

To P.2

UN30

IH Power Supply PCB

E-9 7

6

5

4

3

2

J8170D

1

1

J8122F

2

J510 B1

J8170LH

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

(BK)

1

A1

TH_CNCT2

GND

TH_REAR

GND

TH_SUB2

GND

TH_SUB1

+3.3V

TH_CNCT1

GND

GND

TH_MAIN

TH_FRONT

+3.3V

+5V

GND

WEB_REMAIN_DTC_SNS

J8170L

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

D

MT9

J8026D

FT37 1

J8001DA

A10 B10

E

B2 A2

(W)

8

(W)

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

E

(BK)

GND

TH_REAR

GND

TH_SUB2

GND

GND

J1810

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

TH_SUB1

8

+3.3V

7

TH_CNCT1

6

GND

+5V

5

TH_MAIN

4

TH_FRONT

GND

3

+3.3V

2

WEB_REMAIN_DTC_SNS

1

10

2

3

4

J8001D

J8001DB

D

J8027D 1

2

1

2

J8001DWH J8001LWH

■Fixing Unit■

A10 B10

J8001LA

FT38

J8001LB

1

2

3

4

J8001L

1

MT10

2

1

4

3

2

1

1

2

3

4

J7499DH

9

8 TH_CNCT2

GND

TH_REAR

GND

TH_SUB2

GND

TH_SUB1

+3.3V

TH_CNCT1

GND

TH_MAIN

GND

TH_FRONT 5

4

3

2

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

J7404L

2

3

3

2

1

R

W

T

C

2

4

H4

J8025DH

IH Coil J8025L

J8003D

1

J7404DH

J8003DH 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

J8003L

MT7

TP

1

J7499L

10

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

10

9

8

7

6

4

5 6

1

U

3

J8025D

J7404D

J7499D

2

J8027L

1

+3.3V

GND

C

+5V

2

1

J8026L

WEB_REMAIN_DTC_SNS 3

B

2

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (6/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (6/31)

TP2

Fixing Thermal Switch

B

MT8

J180330

3

2

1

3

2

1 1

PS102

Web Level Sensor

2

THM12

Front Thermistor

A

1

THM11

Main Thermistor

Thermistor Unit 1

10

9

8

2

1

2

THM13

Sub Thermistor 1

1

2

THM14

Sub Thermistor 2

1

2

THM15

Rear Thermistor

A

Thermistor Unit 2

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.6 F-10-9

10-25

10-26

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

F

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (7/31)

10

F UN5

Fixing Feed Driver PCB

3

2 2

J1509

GND

1

13 12 11 10 9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

J3062

6

5

4

3

2

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13

J18138L

12 11 10 9

1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

PIN9

8

2

3

4

5

6

GND

*HV_RMT

E GND

*TR2_REMOVE_DC_ON

GND

DA_TR2_REMOVE_CONT

TR2_REMOVE_CLK

GND

*HV_RMT

GND

*TR2_CV_ON

*TR2_MINUS_ON

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

9

8

UN48

6

5

4

3

2

1

UN49

Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB

FT23

J35420 1

J18006L

9 10 11 12

7

J3540

Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB

J18006DH 1

8

*TR2_CRNT_ON

DA_TR2_CONT_P

DA_TR2_CONT_CURRENT

7

D

PIN28

2

GND

GND

J18004L

7

J18006D

J18138DH 1

6

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

J18138D

1

5

J8101D

Duplex Sensor 1

J18004DH

4

1

PS24

J18004D

D

3

DA_TR2_CONT_N

GND

PRESS_ROLLER_THM_FILM

+5V

2

TR2_CURRENT_DETECT

1

9 10 11 12 13

PRESS_ROLLER_THM_CASE

8

RECIPRO_HP_SNS

7

GND

6

+5V

5

FUSER_ENTRANCE_SNS

4

GND

3

+5V

GND

+5V

REVERSE_1_SNS

GND

+5V

INNER_EXIT_SNS

GND

CORE_MOVE_MTR_A

CORE_MOVE_MTR_B

CORE_MOVE_MTR_A*

CORE_MOVE_MTR_B*

+5V

HALF_PRESS_SNS

GND

3

2

UNIFORMALY_HEAT_ROLLER_HP_SNS

1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

+5V

8

PRESS_ROLLER_HP_SNS

+5V

GND

7

GND

6

CORE_MOVE_HP_SNS

5

-(GND)

J1513 4

UNIFORM_HEAT_ROLLER_DESORPTION_MTR_A

3

UNIFORM_HEAT_ROLLER_DESORPTION_MTR_A*

E

2

UNIFORM_HEAT_ROLLER_DESORPTION_MTR_B*

UNIFORM_HEAT_ROLLER_DESORPTION_MTR_B

1

TR2_VOLT_DETECT

J1508

MT28

MT27

2

1

2

1

J17220

3 3

2 2

J18033

1 1

3 3

2 2

1 1

J17206

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

J17229

3 3

2 2

J17219

1 1

3 3

2 2

1

J17223

1

3 3

2 2

1 1

J10011

3 3

2 2

J8039D

1 1

M

PS98

Core Shutter Motor

PS99

PS75

PS70

Fixing Heat Soaking Roller Fixing Inlet Sensor HP Sensor

Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor

PS100 Reciprocation HP Sensor

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PRESS_ROLLER_THM_FILM

2

1

1

2

3

Rh

MT14

UN67

UN66

1

Half Pressure Position Sensor

M56

3

2

Core HP Sensor

Fixing Pressure Release Sensor

PS110

8

MT13

J8039L

3

Web Motor

PS73

7

C

J8039DH

M

M55

PRESS_ROLLER_THM_CASE

GND +5V

GND

RECIPRO_HP_SNS

+5V

FUSER_ENTRANCE_SNS

GND

GND

+5V

INNER_EXIT_SNS

GND

MTR_A

MTR_A*

MTR_B*

MTR_B

+5V

HALF_PRESS_SNS

GND

+5V

PRESS_ROLLER_HP_SNS

GND

+5V

CORE_MOVE_HP_SNS

3 3

6

Secondary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance

B

Secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage Contact Resistance

2

1

5

R2

J17218

1

4

1

2

GND

MTR_A 2

3

3

2

B

MTR_A* 3

4

2

R1

4

J8042F

1

1

J18007

MTR_B*

C

+5V

UNIFORMALY_HEAT_ROLLER_HP_SNS

J8042M

MTR_B

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (7/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (7/31)

Rt

THM16

MT23

MT24

Pressure Rolｌer Thermistor Thermistor Unit 3

■Secondary Transfer Unit■ A

A

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.7 F-10-10

10-26

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 2

3

4

1

J1510

7 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2

J1500

6

N.C

GND

24V

GND

24V

J3541

24V

Fixing Feed Driver PCB

UN5

5 4

1 2 3

3 2 1

3 2 1

J8099M

J7612 1

1

Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB

9 8

2

UN49 3

7 6

4

5

5

4

6

3

7

2

FUSER_MTR_FG

GND 1

FUSER_MTR_CLK

J8023D

2

FUSER_MTR_GAIN

3

FUSER_MTR_CW

Relay PCB

*FUSER_MTR_LOCK

5

2

GND

DC Controller Interface PCB

UN2

J1222 10 11 12

4

4 5 6

3

6

J899D

J899L

J899LH

J8980

PS112

Waste Toner Battele Set Sensor

3

2

J898D 4

1

J8981 4

3 2

J898L 2 3 4

3 2 1

2

1

UN4 J1470 7

F

UN7 J898LH

1

E

TS9

Waste Toner Full Sensor

J8023DA

D

M48

Fixing Motor M

J8099F

2

J7217 8

J3061

A

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (8/31)

+5V

3

LED

2

VOUT

1

GND

9 10 11

+5V

Pickup Feed Driver PCB

W_TONER_CAPACITANCE_SNS

J1415

1

4

GND

24VA_12V_FUS_MTR

3

GND

24V_IL

■Host Machine■

*FUSER_MTR_ON

24V

5

GND

24V_IL

2

4

J8023LA

GND

24VA_TEIHAN

GND

*PVREQ_TO_TRASPORT_DR

INVERSION_VPASS3_SNS

INVERSION_VPASS2_SNS

GND

REVERSE_1_SNS

2ND_DESPORTION_HP_SNS

VPASS_JOINT_SNS

REGI_SNS

1

3

GND

J1816

2

GND 4

GND

3

24V 2

GND

1

GND

GND

GND

3.3V

L1_KSB_RX1+

6

5V

1

J8023LB

1

J8098M

GND

J8098F

24V

9

11

10

6

GND

8

7

6

5

PV_REQ

HANTEN_TATE_PASS3_SNS

HANTEN_TATE_PASS2_SNS

GND

REVERSE_1_SNS

4

N.C.

4

3

2

1

12

2ND_TRANS_DESPORTION_HP_SNS 5

VPASS_JOINT_SNS

REGI_SNS

GND

DRAWER_DTC_LOOP

GND

11

3

1

GND

2

2

8 11 10 9 1

3

J1511

7

4

1 6

1

2 5

8

2

3 4

7

3

4 3

6

4

A12 B11 2

5

5

J8023L 1

4

6

J8023DB

A12 B11

3

7

5 10

8

8

6

GND

L1_KSB_RX1-

9

2

9

7 9

8

L1_KSB_RX1+

GND

1

10

8 8

9

11

9

7

L1_KSB_RX1-

L1_KSB_TX1+

2

■Fixing Feed Side■

7

6

GND

L1_KSB_TX1-

3

D

6

5

L1_KSB_TX1+

5V

4

12 11 10 5

4

L1_KSB_TX1-

GND

5

4

6

5V

12V

7

3

3

GND

8

DRAWER_CNCT

F

1

9

9 10

10 2

2

E

11

C 1

1

12V

10

12

B DRAWER_CNCT

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (8/31)

10-27

■■General Circuit Diagram (8/31)

C

Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB

UN48

1

B

J1507

A

■Fixing Feed /Fixing Motor■

1

P.8 F-10-11

10-27

10-28

8

7

6

■Secondary Transfer Unit■

1

2

1

J17225

3

2

1

3

2

1

J7211

3

2

1

3

2

1

Original Size Sensor 1

J7213

3

D

6

5

1

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13

5

3

4

3

2

1

J8092D

3

2

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

GND

N.C

7

1

J19

1

3

1

2 2

3

2

M34

Registration Motor

1

2

M

1

J21

1

1 1

1

2

3

2 4

3 5

4 6

5 7

6 8

9

10 11

J7203

J20

1

2

3

4

E

D

J1506

9

1

J1505

J1502

3

3

+5V

8

4

2

J8092LH 4

J8091D

VPASS_JOINT_SNS

13 12 11 10 9

3

1

GND

9 10 11 12 13

2

2

REGI_SNS

8

GND

7

4

1

3

+5V

6

J8102DH J8102D

2

J8092L

PAPER_WIDTH_DTC1_SNS

PAPER_LOOP_DTC2_SNS

+5V

GND

+5V

+5V

PAPER_LOOP_DTC1_SNS

3

5

2

Original Size Sensor 3

1

J18

J8091LH

OHP_SNS

4

1

GND

3

GND

GND

+5V

2

2ND_TRANS_END_SNS

J8091L

OHP_SNS_LED_ON

1

2 2

N.C

2ND_TRANS_DESPORTION_HP_SNS

GND

J8102L

3

2

J7212 3

E

3

REGIST_MTR_B

2

3

Original Size Sensor 4

REGIST_MTR_B*

3

1

PS96

REGIST_MTR_A*

1

J17224

2

1

REGIST_MTR_A

3

2

Original Size Sensor 2

PS94

PAPER_WIDTH_DTC4_SNS

2

1

3

Vertical Path Merging Sensor

PS97

+5V

3

1

2

Registration Sensor

OHP Sensor

PS95

GND

2

J7215

J7214

1

F

PS30

PAPER_WIDTH_DTC3_SNS

3

1

3

Loop Sensor 2

PS28

+5V

2

1

PS29

GND

3

2

Post-secondary Transfer Sensor

PS91

PAPER_WIDTH_DTC2_SNS

3

Loop Sensor 1

PS23

2

■Registration Unit■

PS90

Secondary Transfer Roller Detachment HP Sensor

3

+5V

PS22

4

GND

F

5

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (9/31)

9

+5V

10

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13

J1512

UN5

Fixing Feed Driver PCB

7

J1504

6

5

4

3

7

1

UNIFIFORM_ROL_COOL_FAN2

6

2

J8033D

1

J8037LH

4

3

1

2

2

J7202D

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

3

4

J7202L

3

1

2

3

2

1

3

2

1

4

3

4

2

3

1

2

M

M

M32

M57

Duplex Left Motor

A

2

3

4

9

1

J17205

4 4

1

3

2

3

2

1 1

J7201D

Reciprocation Motor

3 3

2 2

1

J7208

3

1

PS25

Pre-fixing Feed Motor

8

7

1

CT

3

2 2

1

J7209

1

3 3

2 2

1

J7236D

1

2

Duplex Sensor 2

PS26

Duplex Sensor 3

3

2

1

2

B 3

J7236L CT

123

Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Front)

1

3

1

3

FM15

J7210

M

M35

2

J7230L

J8142LH

2

J7236DH

J7230DH

J8142L

■Pre-Fixing Paper Feed Unit■

10

C

CT

J7230D

1

J7200 4

2

1

J7235L

3

J8142D 4

J7202LH

4

3

3

J8033LH

J8037L

B

2

GND

5

*LOCK

4

GND

3

TRANSPORT_FR_COOL_FAN

GND

UNIFIFORM_ROL_COOL_FAN1

+5V

REVERSE_4_SNS

GND

+5V

REVERSE_3_SNS

GND

+5V

REVERSE_2_SNS

GND

PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_MTR_OUT_B

PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_MTR_OUT_B*

J8037D

2

*LOCK1

1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_MTR_OUT_A*

8

PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_MTR_OUT_A

7

RECIPRO_MTR_A

6

RECIPRO_MTR_A*

5

RECIPRO_MTR_B*

4

RECIPRO_MTR_B

3

REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_B

REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_A*

C

2

REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_B*

1

*LOCK2

J1503

J1501

REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_A

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (9/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (9/31)

123

123

FM27

Pre-fixing Feed Cooling Fan

FM16

Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Rear)

■Pre-Fixing Paper Feed Unit■

PS27

Duplex Sensor 4

A

■Fixing Feed■

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.9 F-10-12

10-28

4 5 6 7

6 5 4 3 2

J8010LH

J8010D 1

J8011D

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 4 5 6

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7

7

8

24V 6 5 4 3 2

ITB_1 AC_H(BK)

ITB_2 AC_H(BK)

ITB_2 AC_N(W)

ITB_1 AC_N(W)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

4

3

1

1 2 3

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

3

2

To P.1

2

1

F F

■Host Machine ITB Drawer■ DC Controller Interface PCB

UN2 J1242 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

E

D D

To P.14

D-2

J8011LH J80110LH

J80110L

J8189F

A Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (10/31)

+3.3V

K1_ENC2_IN_0

GND

+3.3V

K1_ENC1_IN_0

8

GND

7

13

B GND

5V

GND

ITB_PWM_BUF

6

14

3 3

5

15

5

2 2

4

16

To P.11

1

1

3

17

J8050DA

A20 B20

2

18

J8050DWH

J8011L

19

FT81

20

1

2

3

MT29

1

ITB_FG_IN

9

ITB_BREAK_BUF

8

ITB_ON_BUF

7

ITB_DIR_BUF

N.C

6

STEERING_MTR_OUT_A

STEERING_MTR_OUT_A*

STEERING_MTR_OUT_B*

5

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

6

8

7

4

1

3

8

3

STEERING_MTR_OUT_B

J1241

2

2

14 3

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

2

1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_A

1

1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_A*

9 10 11

1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_B*

J1240

4

4

1

5

5

J8010L

15 6

N.C

E 1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_B

GND

8

*ITB_UNIT_DET

6

N.C

ITB_STEERTNG_HP_SNS

ITB_EDGE_SNS_ON

7

16

7

6

*ITB_HP_IRQ

7

N.C

C 5

N.C

N.C

GND

4

ITB_EDGE_ADC_DIN1

3

17

8 2

+5V

1

18

9

8

19

20

10

9

ITB_EDGE_ADC_DIN2

10

1ST_DESPORION_HP_SNS

GND

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (10/31)

10-29

■■General Circuit Diagram (10/31)

C

B

B-5

4

F-4

J8050D

J8050DB

A

1

P.10 F-10-13

10-29

10-30

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (11/31)

10

■ITB Unit■ A-5

■Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact■ MT11

3

4

16

N_(W)

N_(W)

H_(BK)

J8050LB

20

15

1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_A

19

14

1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_A*

18

13

1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_B*

17

12

GND

1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_B

9

8

10

7

6

5

4

11

N_(W)

H_(BK)

H_(BK)

STEERING_MTR_OUT_B*

J8052M 1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

J8052F

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

E

1

J8051F

1

H3

H2

Drum Heater (M) 2

Drum Heater (Y) 2

STEERING_MTR_OUT_B

STEERING_MTR_OUT_A

J8051M STEERING_MTR_OUT_A*

ITB_ROLLER_TEMP

Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance (Bk)

ITB_HP_SNS

MT60

ITB_STEERTNG_HP_SNS

MT59 1

ITB_EDGE_SNS_ON

R6

ITB_EDGE_ADC_DOUT1

Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance (C)

ITB_EDGE_ADC_DOUT2

MT22

1

2

UN65

3

UN64

MT21

ITB Unit Varistor

GND

R5

MT61

VR1

Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance (M)

2

E

MT18

2

1

MT20 1

+5V

MT58

2

J8050LA

R4

UN63

1

Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance (Y)

2

F

J8050LWH

A20 B20

MT15

N.C

UN62 MT17

MT16 1

H_(BK)

2

J8050L

FT80

N_(W)

R3

GND

MT19

To P.10

1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_HP_SNS

F

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

ITB Relay PCB

J2704 3

GND

ITB_HP_SNS

3

2

1

7

1

1

2

3

J8045LH J8045L

B

4

3

2

1

J7114L

2

3

4

3

2

2

3

1

J8044L

4

2

3

1

1

J7518 J7528

4

J8047D

J8052D

2

3

4

5

6

7

2

1

1

2

J8052DH

J8047L

J8052L

3

2

8

7

ITB_PWM_BUF

6

5

4

3

24V

GND

5V

1

GND

ITB_FG

ITB_ON_BUF

9

ITB_BREAK_BUF

C

J8044LH 1

1

2

1

J7318

1 1

+3.3V

J8044D

1

J7114LH

2

ITB_ENC2

J7114D

3

+3.3V

2

4

J8046L

ITB_ENC1

3

5

J8047LH

GND

J8045D

6

GND

J8046D J8046LH

ITB_DIR_BUF

STEERING_MTR_OUT_B

STEERING_MTR_OUT_B*

STEERING_MTR_OUT_A

STEERING_MTR_OUT_A*

5V

1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_A

1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_A*

+5V

1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_B*

1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_B

GND

5V

ITB_STEERTNG_HP_SNS

GND

C

1ST_TRANS_DESPORTION_HP_SNS

ITB_EDGE_SNS_ON

5V

ITB_EDGE_ADC_DOUT1

ITB_EDGE_ADC_DOUT2

N.C

1

D

20

2

19

1

D

18

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

17

8

16

7

15

6

14

5

13

4

12

3

11

2

9

1

8

5

1

10

4

2

7

J2701

3

3

6

2

4

5

1

5

4

J2702

2

6

3

1

7

2

J2703

8

J2700

UN28

GND

3

2

1

J7319

3

2

2

THM

ITB Heater control thermistor

1

B

2

M

PS5

M3

ITB Drive Motor

5

4

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

J7416

J7114 3

2

1

4

3

2

1

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

J7414

M

A

PS2

ITB Displacement Sensor

10

9

PS4

Primary Transfer Roller Detachment HP Sensor

8

PS3

B*

B

A

6

5

4

3

2

1

6

5

4

3

2

1

A

M4

Primary Transfer Roller Detachment Motor

7

UN17 ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2

M

M5

Steering Drive HP Sensor

UN16 ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1

A

J7113

A*

J7415

B*

A*

ITB HP Sensor

B

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (11/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (11/31)

Steering Drive Motor

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.11 F-10-14

10-30

10-31

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

F

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (12/31)

10

F

■Drum Drive Unit (Bk)■

■Drum Drive Unit(Color)■ UN6

Drum ITB Driver PCB J1905 2

J1903 3

4

5

6

7

1

2

J1904

J1902

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DRM_PWM_M_BUF

24V

GND

5V

GND

DRM_PWM_C_BUF

DRM_FG_C

DRM_BREAK_C_BUF

DRM_ON_C_BUF

DRM_DIR_C_BUF

+3.3V

DRM_ENC2_C

+3.3V

DRM_ENC1_C

GND

24V

GND

5V

GND

GND

24V

GND

5V

DRM_FG_M

E

GND

DRM_BREAK_M_BUF

DRM_ON_M_BUF

DRM_DIR_M_BUF

DRM_ENC2_M

+3.3V

DRM_ENC1_M

GND

+3.3V

GND

24V

GND

DRM_PWM_Y_BUF

5V

DRM_FG_Y

GND

DRM_BREAK_Y_BUF

DRM_ON_Y_BUF

DRM_ENC2_Y

+3.3V

DRM_ENC1_Y

GND

+3.3V

GND

DRM_PWM_K_BUF

DRM_FG_K

DRM_BREAK_K_BUF

DRM_ON_K_BUF

DRM_DIR_K_BUF

+3.3V

DRM_ENC2_K

GND

+3.3V

DRM_ENC1_K

E

DRM_DIR_Y_BUF

N.C

1

GND

D

D

9

3

2

J7311

1

2

Drum Motor (Bk)

1

UN18

UN19

Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1

Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2

GND

M19

3

7

6

5

4

1

B J7310

8

2

M

J7316

3

2

1

UN20 Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1

6

5

J7317

3

2

1

UN21

4

3

2

J8021D

1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

J7315

1

UN22

Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1

3

2

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

2

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

C

24V

4

GND

3

5V

2

+3.3V

1

J7304 9

1

8

7

6

2

5

4

1

M

3

2

1

2

M

B M23

Drum Motor (M) 3

DRM_ENC1_C

GND

24V

GND

J8021L

J7302 9

1

J7314

5V

GND

DRM_PWM_M_BUF

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DRM_FG_M

8

DRM_BREAK_M_BUF

7

DRM_ON_M_BUF

6

DRM_DIR_M_BUF

5

2

M21

Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2

4

J7300

M

1

3

24V

2

Drum Motor (Y) 3

2

+3.3V

J7306

1

DRM_ENC2_M

1

7

J8021DH

+3.3V

2

J8020L

DRM_ENC1_M

3

+3.3V

1

4

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

GND

5

DRM_ENC2_Y

6

GND

7

DRM_ENC1_Y

8

8

GND

DRM_DIR_Y_BUF N.C

7

5V

6

GND

5

DRM_PWM_Y_BUF

4

DRM_FG_Y

3

DRM_BREAK_Y_BUF

2

C

9

8

J8020DH 1

DRM_ON_Y_BUF

J8019L

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

GND

J8020D

1

DRM_PWM_C_BUF

2

DRM_FG_C

3

DRM_BREAK_C_BUF

4

DRM_ON_C_BUF

5

DRM_DIR_C_BUF

6

+3.3V

7

DRM_ENC2_C

8

GND

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

GND

J8019D J8019DH

+3.3V

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (12/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (12/31)

1

UN23

Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 2

M25

J7312

3

2

J7313

1

Drum Motor (C) 3

2

1

UN24

UN25

Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1

Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2

A

A

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.12 F-10-15

10-31

B

10 9 7 6 5

7 6 5

M20

J7535

Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y) M

8

4 3 2 1 7 6 5

4 3 2 1 7 6 5

J7536

Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (M)

M22 4 3 2 1 7 6 5

M 4 3 2 1 7 6 5

7

C

4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1

6

J7538

M

5

CLN_DRIVE_MTR_FG*

CLN_DRIVE_MTR_DEC*

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

M18 M30

Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Bk) Drum Cleaning and Waste Toner Feed Drive Motor

J8034D 1

J8034LH

J7539

7

M

4 3

J7515A

14 13 12 11 10 9

J8176L

C

1 2 3 4 5 6

6 5 4 3 2 1

8

7

7

8

6 5

8 7

CHOUHI_RXLOAD

4 3

6

2

5

3 2

4 3 2

2

1

F F

■3.5K Deck■

Drum ITB Driver PCB

UN6 J1909 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

E

J8176D 1

J8176DH

D

9 10 11 12 13 14

J7537

A Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (13/31)

CHOUHI_TXOUTEN

8

CHOUHI_RXD

7

CHOUHI_TXEND

6

E1_STM_CLK11

5

CHOUHI_TXD

4

GND

3

GND

2

CHOUHI_CLK

1

GND

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

GND

J1914

GND

4

GND

NC

5

GND

CLN_DRIVE_MTR_FG

CLN_DRIVE_MTR_DEC

CLN_DRIVE_MTR_ACC

GND

+24B

8

CLN_DRIVE_MTR_ACC*

CLN_DRIVE_MTR_CW

7

GND

GND

6

+24B

BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG

5

CLN_DRIVE_MTR_CW*

4

BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC

3

BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC

2

GND

1

+24B

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW

GND

J1906

ID_BIT

BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG*

C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG

C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC

C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC

6

N.C

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC*

2

BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC*

3

GND

4

+24B

5

GND

+24C

C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW

GND

M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG

M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC

M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC

7

BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW*

ID_BIT

6

C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG*

7

C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC*

8

C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC*

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

GND

8

GND

8

+24C

7

+24A

8

C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW*

6

M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW

7

ID_BIT

5

GND

6

M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG*

4

Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG

5

M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC*

3

Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC

4

M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC*

2

Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC

3

GND

1

GND

2

+24A

J8034L +24A

9

M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW*

E Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW

MOTOR_ID

1

ID_BIT

Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG*

Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC*

Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC*

GND

D

+24A

10

Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW*

ID_BIT

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (13/31)

10-32

■■General Circuit Diagram (13/31)

1

To Paper Deck

J7515B

B

M

Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (C)

M24

■Developing Drive■ A

1

P.13 F-10-16

10-32

10-33

5

4

3

2

5

4

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

F

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

+5V

GND

ITB_THERMISTOR

8

GND

7

GND

GND

6

END9

END8

END7

6

7

6

5

4

3

1

1

2

3

4

5

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

2

J8018L

J8017D

1

J8017LH 2

N.C

END10

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

D

9 10 11

END11

SNS_SIG

SNS_VCC

FLG1A

FLG1B

DRV_SIG

8

9

J8017L

N.C

5

N.C

4

N.C

3

END12

2

N.C

1

J8018D

J8058D 7

J8073

J8035LH 2

5

J8018DH

6

5

4

3

2

3

1

6

2

1

J80110D

To P.10

J8058LH

C-3 1

Potential Sensor(Bk) 1

4

GND

3

THM_S_50_LMT

THM_S_CNT

2

THM_P_42_5_DTC

1

7

DRUM_HEATER_THM_CNCT

GND

6

THM_P_42_5_DTC

GND

+5V

GND

PRIM_IN_FAN_LOCK

5

2

3

4

5

6

J8058L

7

N.C

6

4

1

Potential Control PCB

RTN_SIG 7

3

J3530

D

8

2

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (14/31)

6

11 10 9

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

1

UN12 200V Drum Heater Driver PCB

UN29

J3531

J8035D

9 10 11 12 13

HAND_PAPER_FEED_GATE_SNS

8

GND

7

PRIM_IN_FAN_FULL/HALF

6

GND

+3.3V_ANALOG

5

BK_POTENTIAL_DETECT

+24R

4

BK_POTENTOAL_SNS_ON

HV_ON

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

3

UN11

E 7

N.C

BK_PRE_CLN_LED_ON

+24R

PATCH_SL_ON

+24R

PATCH_REF

GND

+5V

PATCH_S

PATCH_P

15

PAD26

R_RESET

BR_DETECT

+5V

GND

+5V

GND

R_LED_ON

PAD25

R_RESET

+5V

GND

FR_DETECT

PATCH_LED_ON

14

13

12

9

11

8

10

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

R_LED_ON

+5V

GND

E

2

GND

1

J2202

J1809

J1908

27

1

100V Drum Heater Driver PCB

+5V

Relay PCB

Drum ITB Driver PCB

J1907

2

UN7

UN6 F

3

THM_P_42_5_DTC

4

GND

5

TH_S

6

TH_P

7

DRUM_HEATER_LMT

8

PILE_TEMP

9

THM_TEMP

10

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

J8035L

■Registration Patch■ 3

2

1

3

2

C

J8133D

1

3

J8133L

123

3

2

1

5

J7408

PS19

A

3

2

J7409

Registration Patch Sensor (Front)

10

1

9

1

3

2

1

5

J7410

4

2

PS20

Registration Patch Sensor (Rear)

8

1

6

GND

+5V

PATCH_REF

PATCH_S

PATCH_P

PATCH_LEDON

PAD26

R_RESET

+5V 3

J7411

4

3

2

3

2 2

1

1

J7032

J8032L

1

THM6

PS79

Drum Thermistor

Multi-purpose Tray Cover Sensor

2 4

3

2

1

B THM5

Drum Thermopile J7140D

J7142D 2

1

2

1

1

2

J7142DH

J7140DH

5

3

J7519

3

GND

2

BR_DETECT

1

+5V

PAD25

+5V

4

R_RESET

GND

J7410L

N.C

3

FR_DETECT

2

+5V

1

N.C

J7408L

2

1

2

3

J7410DH

Primary Charging Suction Fan

2

J8032DH

1

1

FM2

BK_PRE_CLN_LED_ON

2

+24R

3

J7408DH

R_LED_ON

B

J7410D

+24R

J7408D

PATCH_SL_ON

J8032D

GND

2

3

+5V

2

+5V

1 1

J7109L

GND

J8133DH

J7109DH

THM_P_42_5_DTC

J7109D

GND

C

R_LED_ON

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (14/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (14/31)

J7140L

1

1

2

J7142L

J7412

PS21

1

2

SL

Patch Sensor

SL1

Registration Patch Shutter Solenoid

7

2

1

A

LED1 Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk)

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.14 F-10-17

10-33

M

Primary Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor

M2

8 1

1

M 2 SOLD27

J7148DH

2

POST_WIRE_CLN_MTR_OUT2

J7148D 1

3

3 2

2

7 5

1 6

1 7

J10021 1

J80011D

J80011LH

J80011L

3

3 2

2

J80010DH

1

J10022 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 3

3

6 2

2 1

1

J7152

J10023 3

3

2 2

1

PS92 PS103 PS93 PS104

Primary Charging Wire HP Sensor Primary Charging Wire Rotary Position Sensor Pre-transfer Charging Wire HP Sensor Pre-transfer Charging Wire Rotary Position Sensor

5 4

6 5 4 3 2 1

6 5 4 3 2 1

M

J7158 6 5 4 3 2 1

6 5 4 3 2 1

J7156

3

6 5 4 3 2 1

6 5 4 3 2 1

M M

M29 M26 M28

Developing Stirring Motor (Bk) Developing Stirring Motor (Y) Developing Stirring Motor (M)

J7157

2

12

C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW

9

J8031LB

11

J8031DB

+24E

2

8

3

10

A13 B12

4

C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG

A13 B12

5

7

6

GND

6

7

*C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC

5

+24E

8

*C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC

4

M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW

J8031LA

3

J8031DA

*M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC

J80009L

8

2

7

*M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC

6

1

13

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

GND

12

+24D Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW

5

11

4

10

3

Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG

2

*Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC

7

1

9

6

J8038L

*Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC

5

BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

8

4

+24D

NC

J8002LH

GND

3

J80010L

BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG

J80010D 2

1

C *BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC

N.C

9 10 11 12 13

GND

J8009DH

*BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC

8

2

+5R

4 2

7

3

POST_SHUTTER_ROT_DET

3 3

6

4

GND

2 4

5

5

+5R

5

4

6

POST_SHUTTER_CLOSE_DET

1 6

3

7

GND

7 2

8

+5R

13 12 11 10 9

PRIM_SHUTTER_ROT_DET

1

GND

5

+5R

1

PRIM_SHUTTER_CLOSE_DET

GND

2

1

GND

GND

C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW

+24E

C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG

*C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC

*C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC

GND

M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW

+24E

M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG

*M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC

*M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC

GND

Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW

+24D

Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG

*Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC

*Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC

GND

BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW

+24D

BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG

*BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC

*BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC

N.C.

+5R

POST_SHUTTER_ROT_DET

GND

+5R

POST_SHUTTER_CLOSE_DET

GND

+5R

PRIM_SHUTTER_ROT_DET

GND

+5R

PRIM_SHUTTER_CLOSE_DET

GND

POST_WIRE_CLN_MTR_OUT2

2 1

DC Controller Interface PCB

UN2 J1243 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

F

E

J8038D

J8038LH 1

J8002L 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

D D

1

J80009D

J80009DH J8031D

J8031L

6 5 4 3 2 1

6 5 4 3 2 1

M

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (15/31)

1

J7148L

2

3

2

1

3

3

2

4

4

2

5

5

J7147D 6

6

J7147LH 7

7

Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor 8

8

8

POST_WIRE_CLN_MTR_OUT1

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

9

SOLD28

J8002D

8

10

1 4

7

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7

11

2 3

6

8

4

12

1 2 2

5

7 6

1

1 3

4

6 5

2

M1 4

3

5 4

3

J7147L 2

4 3

4

5

3 2

5

J8009L

2 1

6

N.C

1

POST_WIRE_CLN_MTR_OUT1

F 5

7

9 1

6

8

J8009D

PRIM_WIRE_CLN_MTR_OUT2

PRIM_WIRE_CLN_MTR_OUT1

E

PRIM_WIRE_CLN_MTR_OUT2

J1245

7

9

A

8

10

10

9

11

B PRIM_WIRE_CLN_MTR_OUT1

10

12

13

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (15/31)

10-34

■■General Circuit Diagram (15/31)

C

M27

B

Developing Stirring Motor (C)

J10024

■Front Inner Door■

1

A

■Process Unit■

1

P.15 F-10-18

10-34

10-35

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (16/31)

10

■Process Unit (Drum Cartridge/Developing Assembly)■ UN2

DC Controller Interface PCB

J1244

F

GND

NC

FRONT_DOOR_SNS

3.3V

GND

DEV_AIR_TEMP2

DEV_AIR_TEMP1 GND

+24R

BK_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG

BK_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL

GND

C_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG

+24R

C_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL

C_PRE_EXP_LED_REF

C_PRE_EXP_LED_ON

GND

M_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

+24R

8

M_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL

7

M_PRE_EXP_LED_REF

6

M_PRE_EXP_LED_ON

5

GND

4

Y_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG

3

+24R

2

Y_PRE_EXP_LED_REF

Y_PRE_EXP_LED_ON

1

Y_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL

F

E

E

J8085D

12 11 10 9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

6

5

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

J8080D

1

J8093D

J8086D J8085LH J8085L

J8080LH 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

J8086LH

9 10 11 12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

4

3

2

1

1

2

3

4

J8093LH J8093L

J8080L

J8086L

D

D

J8087D

7

6

5

4

3

2

J8088D

1

J8087DH 2

3

4

5

6

7

6

2

J8089D

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Y_PRE_EXP_LED_REF

4

3

2

J8117D

1

4

3

2

1

J7533

J8117DH 2

3

4

5

6

7

J7534 3

1

J8117L

2

3

2

1

J8094D 3

2

1

2

1

4 1

4

3

2

1

J8029DH

3

2

2

1

Toner Density Sensor (Y)

J7548L

2

Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y)

9

2

1

1

Toner Density Sensor (M)

2

1

1

2

3

4

4

3

2

1

TS4

J7549L

1

J7135

1

2

LED3

2

J8015D

1

Front Cover Sensor

2

3

4

4

3

2

J8015L

B

Toner Density Sensor (C)

2

1

J7146

TS1

Toner Density Sensor (Bk)

A

1

LED4

Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M)

8

1

J7132DH

TS3

2

1

LED2

3

Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (C/Bk)

PS80

J8015DH

C_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL

3

C_PRE_EXP_LED_REF

4

J7134

J7131DH

TS2

2

4

Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y/M)

UN15

J7132D 2

1

1

GND

4

2

BK_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG

1

3

+24R

J8030L

4

C_PRE_EXP_LED_ON

3

GND

GND

2

M_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG

1

M_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL

M_PRE_EXP_LED_REF

J8029L

+24R

4

M_PRE_EXP_LED_ON

3

Y_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG

2

+24R

Y_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL

1

4

J8030DH

BK_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL

1

GND

2

J8030D

C_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG

3

J7133

2

5

+24R

4

J8029D

J8028DH

J7130DH

1

6

J8089L

J7131D 2

7

1

J8088L

J8028D

J7130D

10

3

C

B

J7547L

4

UN14

J8028L

A

5

J8089DH 1

J8087L

C

7

J8088DH 1

Y_PRE_EXP_LED_ON

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (16/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (16/31)

Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C)

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.16 F-10-19

10-35

10-36

F

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

■Reciprocation Cam HP Sensor (Color)■

■Hopper Y M■

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (17/31)

10

F

■Primary Charging Exhaust Fan■ UN2 DC Controller Interface PCB

J1247

J1249

5

4

3

2

7

8

9 10 11 12 13

13 12 11 10 9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

J7199D

1

4

3

2

J7197D

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

■M■

9 10 11 12 13

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

J7199L

9 10 11 12 13

1

2

3

4

J7198D

J8107L

3

2

1

J7123D

3 3

2 2

1

3

2

1

1

J7124

2

3

2

Toner Container Phase Sensor (Y)

TS6

+5R

2

1

J7197L

1

2

3

4

3

2

1

3

2

1

1

Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Y)

3 3

2 2

1

M10

PS12 Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (Y)

A

2

M

1

M_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT2 1

Toner Container Drive Motor (Y)

J7104

2

J7126D

1

TS7

J7104DH J7100L

1

1

3

3

2

1

3

2

1

1

J7105L

2

J7105D

2 2

1 1

2

Hopper Toner Level Sensor (M)

PS11

Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (Y)

J71980 3

2

1

3

2

1

PS14

Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (M)

3 3

2 2

1 1

PS15

2

M13

Toner Container Drive Motor (M)

Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (M)

M

M9

PS17

3

2

1

J7111DH

Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (C)

1

2

3

J7111L

123

FM3

Primary Charging Exhaust Fan

B

1

1

2

1

M

J7419

Toner Container Phase Sensor (M)

C

J7105DH

2

PS82

2

4

J7111D

M_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW

M_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW

M_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT1 +5R

M_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS

GND

+5R

2

2

J71970 3 3

J10031L

1

J7418

M_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS

GND

+5R 1

J7104L

PS81

J7101D

J71990

1

J7101DH

J7100DH

1

M_HOPPER_TONER_SNS

GND

Y_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW

2

Y_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW

J7100D

Y_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT2

Y_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT1

+5R

GND

Y_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS

+5R

Y_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS

GND

+5R

Y_HOPPER_TONER_SNS

C

J7121

3

D

J7198DH

J7198L

B

4

+5R

2

J8106L

GND

J8107DH 1

■Y■

4

J7197DH

J7199DH J8106DH

C_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS

GND

M_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS

J8107D

1

PRIM_EXHAUST_FAN_ERR

6

6

GND

7

5

PRIM_EXHAUST_FAN_ON

8

4

+5R

Y_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS

GND 13 12 11 10 9

3

E

D

J8106D

2

NC

1

M_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW

M_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW

M_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT2

M_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT1

+5R

M_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS

GND

+5R

M_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS

GND

+5R

M_HOPPER_TONER_SNS

Y_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW

Y_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW

GND

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

Y_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT2

8

Y_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT1

7

+5R

6

Y_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS

5

GND

4

+5R

+5R

3

Y_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS

*Y_HOPPER_TONER_SNS

GND

E

2

GND

1

GND

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (17/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (17/31)

1

2

M

M12 Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (M)

A

Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (Y)

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.17 F-10-20

10-36

10-37

F

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (18/31)

10

F

■Hopper C BK■ UN2 DC Controller Interface PCB

BK_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT1

BK_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW

BK_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW

BK_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT1

+5R

BK_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS

GND

+5R

BK_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS

BK_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS

GND

+5R

GND

+5R

*BK_HOPPER_TONER_SNS

GND

C_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW

C_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW

C_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT2

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

+5R

8

C_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS

7

GND

6

+5R

5

C_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS

4

GND

GND

E

3

+5R

2

*C_HOPPER_TONER_SNS

1

C_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT1

J1248

E

D

D J8108D

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

J7129D

3 3

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

GND

+5R

2

J7135D

2

1

2

1

M

PS83

Hopper Toner Level Sensor (C)

Toner Container Phase Sensor (C)

J7420

3 3

2 2

1 1

M16

8

2

J10033L

1

3

2

1

J7417

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

TS5

2

J7139D

3 3

2 2

1 1

J71750

2

M15

1

2

J7103D

3

4

J10025L

2

1

J7107D

B

J7107DH

3 3

2 2

M7

1

Toner Container Drive Motor (Bk)

Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (Bk)

2

1

J10028L

2

M

1

PS8

Toner Container Phase Sensor (Bk)

M

1

1

Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (Bk)

PS84

2

2

C

J7103DH 1

PS9

1

Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Bk) 1

PS18

A

J7106D J7106DH

Toner Container Drive Motor (C)

Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (C)

9

J7136

1

TS8

4

J7135DH J7135L

J10026L

1

GND

BK_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS

1

GND

2

2

J8040L

BK_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS

J7102D

1

■BK■

2

10

J8040D

1

SOLD26

J7127

2

J8040LH

J8108L

+5R

9 10 11 12 13

GND

C_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS

GND

+5R

C_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS

GND

8

+5R

7

BK_HOPPER_TONER_SNS

6

C_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW

5

C_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW

4

C_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT2

3

C_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT1

2

J7102DH

B

3

BK_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW

1

BK_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW

2

BK_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT1

3

+5R

1

C

+5R

4

J8108DH

■C■

C_HOPPER_TONER_SNS

5

BK_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT1

6

SOLD25

7

+5R

8

BK_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS

13 12 11 10 9

GND

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (18/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (18/31)

1

2

M

M6

Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (Bk)

A

Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (C)

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.18 F-10-21

10-37

J7137

B

10 3

3

C

2

2 1

1

PS6

Toner Supply Cover Sensor

9 J7138 3 2 1

3 2 1

PS7

Color Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (Bk)

8 J7122 3

3 2

2

PS10 1

Color Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (Y) J7125

1

7 3

3 2

2 1

1

Color Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (M)

PS13 J7128

6

3 2 1

3 2 1

PS16

J7116D

J7116

Color Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (C)

5

3 2

1 2 3

123

J7231

FM18

3

1

2

2

J7116DH

123

Hopper Cooling Fan

4

1

J7231DH

Hopper Cooling Suction Fan

1

J7231D 3 2

J7149L 1 2

FM4

J7112D

123

Developing and Pre-transfer Charging Fan

FM22

3

J7149D

J7149DH 3

J7112DH

3 3 2 1

J7112L 1

123

2 3

1

J7160L

3

1

1

3 2

2

2

2

2

1

F F

■Host Machine Fan■ Drum ITB Driver PCB

UN6

J1910 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

E

D D

J7159DH 3

A Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (19/31)

PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_FAN_ERR

GND

PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_FAN_ON

CL_CLEANER_FAN_ERR

PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_FAN_ERR

GND

PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_FAN_ON

8

CL_CLEANER_FAN_ERR

7

GND

6

CL_CLEANER_FAN_ON

5

BK_DEV_POST_FAN_ERR

4

GND

HOPPER_COOL_IN_FAN_LOCK

4

GND

3

GND

2

BK_DEV_POST_FAN_ON

1

HOPPER_COOL_IN_FAN_FULL/HALF

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

HOPPER_COOL_ EX_FAN_LOCK

J1246

GND

UN2

CL_CLEANER_FAN_ON

E HOPPER_COOL_ EX_FAN_FULL/HALF

DC Controller Interface PCB

BK_DEV_POST_FAN_ERR

GND

5

GND

BK_DEV_POST_FAN_ON

HOPPER_COOL_IN_FAN_LOCK

GND

HOPPER_COOL_IN_FAN_FULL/HALF

HOPPER_COOL_ EX_FAN_LOCK

6

HOPPER_COOL_ EX_FAN_FULL/HALF

+5R

7

C_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS

GND

+5R

M_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS

8

GND

+5R

C_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS

GND

+5R

M_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS

8

GND

7

+5R

Y_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS

GND

6

+5R

5

+5R

4

Y_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS

3

BK_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS

2

GND

1

+5R

TONER_CRG_DOOR_SNS

GND

9

GND

+5R

BK_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS

10

GND

+5R

TONER_CRG_DOOR_SNS

GND

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (19/31)

10-38

■■General Circuit Diagram (19/31)

C

J7159D 1

3

B

Pre-fixing Feed Suction Fan

FM1

Color Cleaning Fan

FM5 A

1

P.19 F-10-22

10-38

C

5

10 4 3 2 1

Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 1

SW14

9 J7019

J7038 3

3 2

2 1

J7039

B 3

3 2

2 1

PS46

Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2

1

8 J7021 5 4 3 2

Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 1

SW16

Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1

PS45

7

9 10 11 1

1 1

J7040 3 2 1

3 2 1 3 2 1

3 2 1

PS48

Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2

Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1

PS47

6

J7020 2

5 4

8

3

3

7

4

2

GND

5

5

6

6

5

J8043L 7

1

4

8

3 2

J8043D

J8043LH 9 10 11

J7022 5 4 3 2

J7527

J7041

SW15 SW17

Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 2 Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 2

4

1 2 3 1

4 2

4

1

5 3

3

2

6 4

3

2

3

7 5

5

1

4

8 6

9

7 8

J8116D

J8055D J8116L

J8055L

SOLD10

J7527D

6

10 11

M

1

Cassette Vertical Path Motor

M39

3

4

J7527L

1 2 3 1

4 2

3

1

5 3

2

2

6 4

1

3 4

7 5

8 9 10 11

1

2

2 1

UN4 F

Pickup Feed Driver PCB J1406 9 10 11

E

J8116LH

2 1

1 1 2

Waste Toner Screw Lock Detection Switch

SW10

D

J8055LH 2

SOLD11

■Waste Toner■

J7001LH

J7001D

Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor

A Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (20/31)

WASTE_TONER_SW

4

+12V

3

PRE_REGI_MULTI_MTR_B*

2

PRE_REGI_MULTI_MTR_B

4

PRE_REGI_MULTI_MTR_A*

1

PRE_REGI_MULTI_MTR_A

9 10 11

CST_VPASS_MTR_B*

J1411

CST_VPASS_MTR_B

5

CST_VPASS_MTR_A*

CST_VPASS_MTR_A

GND

8

DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW1

7

DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW2

GND

DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW3

DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW4

UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW1

UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW2

6

GND

8 11 10 9

5

DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW1

7 4

DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW2

6

6

DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW3

5 1 3

DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW4

4 2

N.C

3 3 2

UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW1

2

4

UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW3

1

UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW2

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

GND

UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW4

N.C

J1404

UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW3

+5V

CST4_PAPER_VOL_DTC2_SNS

GND

+5V

CST4_PAPER_VOL_DTC1_SNS

GND

F

UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW4

GND DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW1

7

+5V

1

5

CASET4_ZANKEN_2_SNS

J8141L 6

GND

9 10 11 7

+5V

D

CASET4_ZANKEN_1_SNS

8

DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW2

8

GND

7

GND

6 8

DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW1

5 11 10 9

DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW2

4

J8141D

DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW3

1 1

DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW3

DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW4

9

DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW4

3

+5V

4

CASET3_ZANKEN_2_SNS

5

GND

6

+5V

7 2

+5V

8

CST3_PAPER_VOL_DTC2_SNS

7

GND

6

+5V

5

CST3_PAPER_VOL_DTC1_SNS

GND

UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW1

4

CASET3_ZANKEN_1_SNS

8

3

UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW2

GND

10

GND

J8141LH

11 10 9

2

3

UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW1

UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW3

2

UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW2

UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW4

1

GND

E

UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW3

UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW4

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (20/31)

10-39

■■General Circuit Diagram (20/31)

J7527DH

C

J7001L

6

M

J7001

M36 B

■Pickup Drive Unit■

■Pickup Sensor■ A

1

P.20 F-10-23

10-39

10-40

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

F

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (21/31)

10

F UN4

Pickup Feed Driver PCB

2

J1410 3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

1

2

J1460

3

4

+24V

GND

+5V

MULTI_PAPER_SNS

MT67

CST4_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B

CST4_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B*

CST4_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A*

CST4_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A

CST3_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B

CST3_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B*

LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B

CST3_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A*

LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B*

CST3_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A

LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A*

LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A

RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B

RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B*

RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A*

RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A

TR2_DESPRTION_MTR_B

TR2_DESPRTION_MTR_B*

TR2_DESPRTION_MTR_A*

TR2_DESPRTION_MTR_A

LEFT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_B*

LEFT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_B

LEFT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_A*

LEFT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_A

RIGHT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_B*

RIGHT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_B

RIGHT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_A*

E

5

6

7

8

1

9 10 11

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

J8000D

1

J8059DH

D

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11

6

5

4

3

2

1

J8000L

C

4

3

2

J7526D

1

J7525DH 1

2

3

1

2

3

J7005 4

1

2

3 1

4 2

5 3

6 4

7 5

8

9

10 11

J7525

6

J7526

1

2

3

1

M

4

2

5

3

6

4

7

5

8

9

10 11 4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

M40

M41

J7003

4

Secondary Transfer Rolle Detachment Motor

3 4

J7006

1

J7015

2 3

J7004

1 2

1

3

2

3

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

J7007

1

J7017D

2

1

3

J7017DH J7017L

2

3 1

1

2

2

SL

2

2

1

D

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

4

3

2

1

C

J7108

J8110L

ENV1

1

J7016

3

2

1

J7018D

1

B

PS38

Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor

Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid

■Pickup Drive Unit■

3

Environment Sensor

SL4

Cassette 4 Pickup Motor

Left Deck Pickup Motor

1

Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor

M45

M42

2

PS37

M

M

M

M31

1

M44

6

Left Deck Vertical Path Motor

2

Cassette 3 Pickup Motor

M

Right Deck Vertical Path Motor

2

3

M

Right Deck Pickup Motor

B

3

4

+24V

1

1

2

MULTI_NAKAITA_SL

2

2

M43

J7526L

4

3

3

M

J7526DH

J7525L

4

4

4

GND

J7525D

1

4

+5V

2

MULTI_PAPER_SNS

1

3

5

J8110D J8110DH

4

4

J8000LH

J8059L

MT68

3

E

J8059D 11 10 9

2

+3.3V

1

ENV_HUM

9

GND

8

ENV_TEMP

7

WIDTH_OF_PAPER_DTC

6

GND

5

+3.3V

4

+5V

J1407

3

MULTI_LAST_PAPER_SNS

2

GND

1

MULTI_INSIDE_SL_ON

J1499

RIGHT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_A

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (21/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (21/31)

UN26

Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB

■Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit■

A

A

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.21 F-10-24

10-40

10-41

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

UN4

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

J1405

J8060DH

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

J8104L

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

7

6

5

4

EJECT_MTR_B*

EJECT_MTR_B

EJECT_MTR_A*

EJECT_MTR_A

INVERSION_MTR_B*

INVERSION_MTR_B

INVERSION_MTR_A

INVERSION_ROLLER_RIKAN_MTR_A

INVERSION_MTR_A*

8

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

E J8062D

2

1

J8062DH 1

1

1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

INVERSION_ROLLER_RIKAN_MTR_A*

8

INVERSION_ROLLER_RIKAN_MTR_B

7

INVERSION_ROLLER_RIKAN_MTR_B*

6

5V

5V

5

1

J8104DH

J8060L

4

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 13 12 11 10 9

F

J1420

3

IVEERSION_ROLLER_RIKAN_HP_SNS

GND

J8104D

1

2

OUTSIDE_EJECT_OHP_SNS

*OPTION_FAN_CNCT

1

GND

9 10 11 12 13

*OPTION_COOL_FAN2_LOCK

8

GND

GND

7

OPTION_COOL_FAN2_ON

6

*OPTION_COOL_FAN1_LOCK

5

GND

4

*EJECT_ATTACHMENT_FAN4_LOCK

3

EJECT_ATTACHMENT_FAN4_ON

EJECT_ATTACHMENT_FAN3_ON

*EJECT_ATTACHMENT_FAN2_LOCK

GND

EJECT_ATTACHMENT_FAN2_ON

*EJECT_ATTACHMENT_FAN1_LOCK

GND

EJECT_ATTACHMENT_FAN1_ON

EJECT_SL_ON

+24V

+5V

OUTSIDE_EJECT_SNS

GND

+5V

LEFTDOWN_DOOR_OPEN_SNS

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

2

*EJECT_ATTACHMENT_FAN3_LOCK

1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

+5V

INVERSION_VPASS1_SNS

8

GND

7

GND

6

+5V

5

INVERSION_VPASS1_SNS

4

GND

3

+5V

GND

E

J8060D

2

INVERSION_SNS

1

Pickup Feed Driver PCB

J1414

OPTION_COOL_FAN1_ON

J1408

GND

F

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (22/31)

10

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

J8062L

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

9 10 11 12 13

D

D

1

J8244L 1

2

J7543L

3

1

123

6

5

4

3

2

1

J8105D

J8113D

J8105LH 1

2

3

4

5

6

11 10 9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

J8113L

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

3

4

5

6

7

3

2

1

J8036LH

3

J8036L

1

2

3

123

1

FM12

FM13

Delivery Heat Fan 3

Delivery Heat Fan 4

J8113LH

J8105L

2

2

9 10 11

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

M

C J7545D

3

2

J7546D

1

J7545DH

3

2

1

1

2

3

Reverse Detachment Motor

1

2

3

J7546L

123

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

J7025

3

2

1

3

2

1

J7026

3

2

1

3

2

1

J7028

J7029D

3

2

1

3

2

1

J7023

2

J7000D

3

2

1

3

2

1

1

2

2

PS33

PS34

PS36

PS31

SL2

Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1

Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2

Lower Left Cover Sensor

Outer Delivery Sensor

Delivery Flapper Solenoid

7

2

3

4

5

FM23

FM24

Anti-adhesion Fan 1

Anti-adhesion Fan 2

Outer Delivery OHP Sensor J7008

6

2

1

1

2

3

4

C

4

3

2

1

1

2

3

4

J7002 1

2

3 1

4 2

5 3

6 4

7 5

8

9

10 11

6

M

M37 J7000 3 3

3

2

1

2 2

1 1

1

2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6

Delivery Motor

10 11

B

M

M38 Reverse Motor

J7161L

J7541D

3

2

1

1

2

3

J7541DH

J7161DH

J7029L

PS32

8

1

3

1

Reverse Sensor

9

1

Reverse Rolｌer HP Sensor

SL

10

2

J7000L

PS101

J7161D

1

A

3

EJECT_SL_ON

+24V

+5V

OUTSIDE_EJECT_SNS

GND

J8114L

J7029DH J7024

4

J8114LH

+5V

LEFTDOWN_DOOR_OPEN_SNS

GND

+5V

INVERSION_VPASS1_SNS

GND

+5V

INVERSION_VPASS1_SNS

GND

+5V

INVERSION_SNS

B

5

J7002L

J7000LH

123

PS111 6

4

J7002LH

J7546DH J7540

J7545L

J7002D

M54

MT74

J8114D

J7030D

HAISHI_MTR_B*

J8036D

J8244LH

1

J7543DH

J7542L

1

HAISHI_MTR_B

2

2

HAISHI_MTR_A*

3

3

HAISHI_MTR_A

J7543D

1

4

HANTEN_MTR_B*

2

5

HANTEN_MTR_B

3

J7542DH

6

HANTEN_MTR_A*

J7542D

7

HANTEN_MTR_A

J8244D

GND

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (22/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (22/31)

1

2

3

123

J7541L

123

A FM10

FM11

Delivery Heat Fan 1

Delivery Heat Fan 2

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.22 F-10-25

10-41

10-42

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

F

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (23/31)

10

F UN4

Pickup Feed Driver PCB J1402 6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13

E

N.C.

5

+5V

4

+5V

3

GND

2

LEFT_DECK_PAPER_VOL_DTC2_SNS

1

+5V

9

GND

+5V

GND

+5V

GND

VPASS2_SNS

GND

E INVERSION_VPASS3_SNS

8

LEFT_DECK_PAPER_VOL_DTC1_SNS

7

+5V

6

GND

5

GND

4

RIGHT_DECK_PAPER_VOL_DTC1_SNS

3

+5V

2

RIGHTDOWN_DOOR_OPEN_SNS

1

RIGHT_DECK_PAPER_VOL_DTC2_SNS

J1417

D

3

2

J8090D

1

J8061D

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

N.C

N.C

D

J8090DH J8144D

J8061LH 1

2

3

J8090L

7

6

5

4

3

2

J8146D

1

J8144LH N.C

J8061L

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

J8146LH 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

J8146L

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

N.C

J8144L

C

J7027

A

J7037 3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

3

2

1

3

2

1

2 2

1 1

PS41

Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1

J7034

3 3

2 2

1 1

PS42

Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2

J7035

3

2

1

3

2

1

J7036

PS43

Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1

3

2

1

3

2

1

B

PS44

Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2

■Pickup Sensor■

Lower Right Cover Sensor

Vertical Path Sensor 2

■Vertical Path■

PS35

9

3

PS39

PS40

Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3

10

J7031

J7033

+5V

J8075L

3

GND

2

+5V

GND

1

GND

B

LEFT_DECK_PAPER_VOL_DTC2_SNS

J8075DH

+5V

J8075D

1

GND

2

LEFT_DECK_PAPER_VOL_DTC1_SNS

3

+5V

J8068L

GND

3

RIGHT_DECK_PAPER_VOL_DTC2_SNS

2

+5V

J8068LH 1

GND

+5V

GND

J8068D

RIGHT_DECK_PAPER_VOL_DTC1_SNS

1

+5V

2

RIGHTDOWN_DOOR_OPEN_SNS

3

VPASS2_SNS

C

INVERSION_VPASS3_SNS

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (23/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (23/31)

8

A

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.23 F-10-26

10-42

10-43

SL 1

2

1

3

2

1

1

3

2

1

F

2

J7053DH

J7048 2

1

J7053D +24V

GND

VPASS3_SNS

GND

J7046

+5V

J7045

+5V

GND

J7044

+5V

J7043

GND

GND

J7047D

1

PS68

Vertical Path Sensor 4

3

2

1

3

2

1

J7049

3

2

1

3

2

1

J7050

3

2

1

3

2

1

J7051

3

2

1

3

2

1

J7052

3

2

1

3

2

1

+5V

2 2

PS67

Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor

GND

3 3

PS66

Cassette 4 Paper Sensor

VPASS4_SNS

1 1

GND

2 2

+5V

3 3

GND

1 1

+5V

2 2

CST3_H_PAPER_SNS

3 3

CST3_PAPER_SNS

1 1

CST3_LIMIT_SNS

2 2

+5V

J7042 1

3 3

CST3_FEED_SNS

J7047DH

+24V

PS65

Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor

J7053L

2

2

PS64

Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor

+5V

Vertical Path Sensor 3

J7047L 1

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (24/31)

Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid

GND

2

2

SL8

PS63

Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor

Cassette 3 Paper Sensor

3

CST4_H_PAPER_SNS

Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor

PS62

CST4_FEED_SNS

1

PS61

4

+5V

Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor

SL

F

PS60

5

GND

PS59

Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid

6

CST4_PAPER_SNS

SL7

7

+5V

8

CST4_LIMIT_SNS

9

CST4_PICK_UP_SL_ON

10

CST3_PICK_UP_SL_ON

E N.C

N.C

E J2635LA

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

J2635LWH

J2635LB

J2636LA

J2635LH

9

J2635DA

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

J2636DA

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

J2636LB J2636LH

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

N.C

J2635DB N.C

■Cassette 3 Unit■

1

J2636LWH

J2635DWH

J2636DWH J2636DB

■Cassette 4 Unit■

D

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

J1412

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

J1416

UN4

Pickup Feed Driver PCB J1403

+5V

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

8

7

5

4

LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_SNS

3

C +5V

+5V

LEFT_DECK_H_PAPER_SNS

6

GND

LEFT_DECK_PAPER_SNS

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

GND

8

+5V

7

LEFT_DECK_LIMIT_SNS

6

GND

5

+5V

LEFT_DECK_FEED_SNS

4

GND

3

+5V

+24V

VPASS1_SNS

RIGHT_DECK_H_PAPER_SNS

+5V

GND

RIGHT_DECK_PAPER_SNS

2

LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_SL_ON

1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

GND

8

+5V

7

GND

6

+5V

5

RIGHT_LIMIT_SNS

RIGHT_DECK_FEED_SNS

4

GND

3

+5V

+24V

RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_SL_ON

■Right Deck Unit■

C

2

GND

1

GND

J1409

2

J8063D

1

J8063DH 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

J8063L

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

N.C

1

J2633DWH

MT66

9

J2633DA

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

J2633DB

1

J2633LH

B

J2633LWH

1

J2633LA

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

J2633LB

9

J7063

N.C

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (24/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (24/31)

3

J7065D

2

J7065L

1

2

J7059DH J7059L

A

1

2

SL

SL5

Right Deck Pickup Solenoid

10

9

J7054

3

2

1

3

2

1

PS49

Right Deck Pickup Sensor

J7055

3

2

1

3

2

1

PS50

Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor

8

J7056

3

2

1

3

2

1

PS51

J7057

Right Deck Paper Sensor

3

2

1

3

2

1

PS52

Right Deck Paper Height Sensor

7

J7058

3

2

1

3

2

1

1

J7064

1

3 3

2 2

1

J7061

2

3 3

2 2

1

1

PS55

SL6

Left Deck Pickup SolenoidJ7060

PS53

3 3

2 2

1 1

PS54

Left Deck Pickup Sensor

6

Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor

PS58

Left Deck Paper Height Sensor

1

2

Vertical Path Sensor 1

B

1

MT65

SL 1

2

PS57

1

2

2

1

J7065DH

J7059D

3

3

2

3

2

1

Left Deck Pullout Sensor

■Left Deck Unit■

J7062

1

A

PS56

Left Deck Paper Sensor

5

4

3

2

1

P.24 F-10-27

10-43

10-44

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

F

F

E

E

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (25/31)

10

■Primary Transfer PCB■

D

D

HV_TR1(Y) FT24

UN43

HV_TR1(M)

HV_TR1(C)

Primary Transfer PCB

FT25

HV_TR1(BK)

FT26

FT27

PIN1

GND

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (25/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (25/31)

C

MT30

MT54

MT32

MT31

C

MT33

B

B

A

A

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.25 F-10-28

10-44

10-45

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (26/31)

10

■Developing/Charging/Pre-transfer Charging/Developing Toner Collection High Voltage■ MT52

MT48

F

MT51

F

UN38 J3522 1

2

PIN27

UN39 Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk)

Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color)

J3012 1

PIN29

PIN24

Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk)

GND

GND

GND

PIN19

UN37

FT28

GND

MT12

J3322

2

1

J3022

2

1

1

J3044

2

2

UN42

UN41

UN40

Developing High Voltage PCB (C)

Developing High Voltage PCB (M)

Developing High Voltage PCB (Y)

1

J3542

2

1

J3342

2

1

J3042

2

E

E

J8137F

MT69

2

1

2

1

2

J35470 1

2

3

2 1

1

2

1

2

PIN17

PIN14

GND

Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (C)

3

4

5

2

3

4

5

J3547M

2

2

R13

UN56 1

2 1

R14

UN57 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage Contact Resistance (M)

Developing Toner Collection High Voltage Contact Resistance (Y)

PIN15

PIN12

Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (M)

PIN13

UN52 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (Y)

MT37 MT7805MC

2

2

1

MT38

UN53

UN54

1

1

C

PIN16

1

J8135F J8135M

MT39

Developing Toner Collection High Voltage Contact Resistance (C)

1

J8134F J8134M

5

B

2

UN58

PIN23 4

2

1

D

UN50 J35480

1

MT40

Pre-primary Transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk)

C

J8136F J8136M

MT70

2

2

R9 1

2

Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (Y)

Y

M

C

UN59

1

Developing Toner Collection High Voltage Contact Resistance (Bk)

R15

MT63

UN60

Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance MT34 (M)

1

2

R11

1

D

R10

2

R8 1

UN61

Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (C) MT62

J8137M

UN55

MT35

MT36

MT64

R12

SOLD4

R7 2

SOLD3

1

MT3212C

MT7805MM

MT3212M

MT7805MY

MT3212Y

B MT42

PIN10

PIN11

UN51

T_GND

T_DET

T_DRIVE_B

T_POWER

J3547

T_DRIVE_A

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (26/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (26/31)

Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (Bk)

FT129

FT29

10

9

8

MT7805MK

High Voltage Contact

Post Charging Transformer

A

7

MT3212K

A

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.26 F-10-29

10-45

10-46

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

4

■Laser Scanner Unit■ 2

3

F

8 7 5 4 3

GND Y_E2PROM_CS

J5507

GND

6

3 2

5 4 3 2 6

1

9 8 7 6 5 4

3 2 1

K_PO_DEC GND

UN108

BD PCB (Bk) J7530K

C

M83

Laser Scanner Motor (Bk) J7532K

J5101K 9

GND

8

K_AKM_1_CSN

7

K_AKM_2_CSN

6

GND

5

+5V_IL

4

GND

3

K_E2PROM_CS GND

2

40

3 2 1

K_PO_ACC

GND

1

1

N.C

40

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

+24V

40

7

1

8

2

J5508

K_PO_FG

9

9

3

GND GND

K_PO_THM

8

1

4

M_E2PROM_CS

GND

7

2

5

GND

K_BD

6

3

GND +5V_IL

5

4

M_AKM_2_CSN

4

5

M_AKM_1_CSN

3

6

GND

2

7

GND

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

M_PO_DEC

8

M_PO_ACC

7

+24V

6

M_PO_FG

J5510

J8066L

+5V_IL

J5505

J5512

4

J8066DH

5

M_PO_THM

J8076D

1

N.C

4

M_MMTR_ON

J8076DH

6

D

J5100C

GND

3

M_MMTR_B*

8

6

J8076L

5

Laser Scanner Unit (C)

+5V_IL

2

M_MMTR_B

J5101M

4 3 2 1

9 8

GND

1

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

1

J7532M

2

Laser Scanner Motor (M)

3

M81

4

B

5

J7531M

J7532C

7

Y_AKM_2_CSN

UN105

Laser Driver PCB (C)

1

40

1

M_MMTR_A M_MMTR_A*

Skew Correction Motor (M)

E

1

GND

M85

Laser Scanner Motor (C)

2

M_BD

N.C

M82

6

Y_AKM_1_CSN

40

6

+5V_IL

2

J7530M

J7531C

UN100

3

BD PCB (M)

Skew Correction Motor (C)

5 3

GND

Laser Interface PCB

4

UN104

C

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

J5101C

J8066D J5100Y

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GND

4

1 2 3 4 5 6

9

1

Laser Driver PCB (Y)

GND GND

C_PO_DEC

5

2

UN101

GND

C_PO_ACC

F

J7530C

M86

4

3

D

+5V_IL C_E2PROM_CS

+24V

2

1

4

J5101Y

J8070DH

GND

C_PO_FG

1

2

GND

C_AKM_2_CSN

C_PO_THM

40

3

Y_PO_ACC Y_PO_DEC

7

4

+24V

8

5

Y_PO_FG

C_AKM_1_CSN

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

5 6

4

3

2

1 7 8 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6

Y_PO_THM

C_MMTR_ON

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Y_MMTR_B* Y_MMTR_ON

GND

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Y_MMTR_B

J8070D

J8070L

8

7

5

J7532Y

6

Laser Scanner Motor (Y)

Y_MMTR_A*

C_MMTR_B*

8

7

8

1

M80

Y_MMTR_A

C_MMTR_B

7

6

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

2

4

J7531Y

GND

C_MMTR_A*

6

5

3

5

Skew Correction Motor (Y)

Y_BD

C_MMTR_A

5

4

1

M84

GND +5V_IL

GND

4

3

2

E

J5509

C_BD

3

2

3

J7530Y

N.C

+5V_IL

UN106

BD PCB (C)

2

1

J5511

BD PCB (Y)

J8064L 1

Laser Scanner Unit (Y)

UN102

1

J8064DH J8064D

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (27/31)

10

4

UN107

Laser Driver PCB (Bk)

B

Laser Scanner Unit (Bk)

J5100K

5 4

J5100M

9

8

7

40

10

1

Laser Scanner Unit (M)

2

A

3

UN103

Laser Driver PCB (M)

40

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (27/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (27/31)

6

A

J5506

5

4

3

2

1

P.27 F-10-30

10-46

10-47

5

4

3

UN83

■Operation Panel Unit■ J104

Relay PCB

J1811

10 11

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

F

10 11 12 13 14

N.C

9

GND

8

GND

GND

7

3.3VR

6

GND

5

GND

4

12V_CONTB

12V_CONTA

3

12V_CONTB

2

12V_CONTA

1

1

UN7

Riser PCB

F

2

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (28/31)

6

GND

7

12V_DEVPO_UI

8

GND

9

12V_DEVPO_UI

10

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

J8121M J8121F

UN110

KEY PCB

E J3002 8

Upright Control Panel

J3001 7

6

5

4

3

2

1

13 12 11 10 9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

1

2

3

1

2

3

E J8103M

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

J8103F

N.C

10 9

D

COR8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

1

J1008

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

J1002

9 10 11 12

1

2

3

J1009

UN111

1

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

J1006 4

5

6

7

2

USB DEVICE PORT

J1007 3

1

J9001

CPU PCB J1003

GND

D

12V

J8082F J8082M

8

9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

1

2

3

J1005 4

5

6

C

B

GND

GND

9

FFC H_LEVEL

8

HIGHIMPETANCE

7

GND

6

RXCLKIN+

5

RXCLKIN-

4

GND

3

RXIN2+

2

RXIN2-

1

GND

RXIN1+

GND

GND

1

RXIN1-

2

GND

3

RXIN0+

4

RXIN0-

5

GND

6

GND

7

+3.3V

8

J4001

+3.3V 9

VLCD

C +5V

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (28/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (28/31)

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

J1

UN112

5

J4002

5

5

4

3

2

1

LCD

2

4

3

3

J2

2

4

1

B

Transparent Touch Panel

6

Sub KEY PCB

1

A

A

J5001

UN113

Volume PCB

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.28 F-10-31

10-47

10-48

9

8

7

■Controller■

6

(OPTION C)

(OPTION B)

4

3

2

1

(OPTION A)

Dsub

(CMJ ONLY)

9P

COIN_VENDER

F

5

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (29/31)

10

CARD_READER

F

RS-CONV

CCM-10/3S

MMC (OPTION)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12

CARD_READER IF KIT

DEVICE PORT_HUB

(OPTION)

OR

OR

(OPTION)

CZ 5P 5

CC-VI I/FCABLE

4

3

2

1

E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

E

Controller Cooling Fan 1

11P

9 10 11

CPU

FM19

(OPTION)

SC KIT

VOICE OPERATION OR

(OPTION)

(OPTION A)

SATA FLASH USB(H) 20P

4P

PCI-EX I/F

3

4

5

6

7

8

HDD (Standard)

8P

1

J7

USB(D)

2

5P

3

J15

RJ-45

27P

J6

60P

J4

J115

3 2 1

1 2 3 4

7P

SATA

TOPAZ

1 2

J111 CSR

4

HDD_STS

SATA OP

J102 J101 10 11

117P

DEBUG SERIAL CZ 4P

J14

J23

UN116

Main Controller PCB 2

Removable HDD

J1010

J24

J1000

J18

140P

60P

75P

40P

GIOVANNI-A

DEBUSSY-A

MINERVA

(GU-SHORT)

(DEBUG SRAM)

SATA

7P J22

ICE

JTAG

13P

CZ 6P

J21

C

J20

J1020 MAESTRO-0

J13

200P

J3003

J107

(MDS)

FRAM COUNTER

(OPTION)

DDR2 DIMM

RCON

ORFEO-A

2

2

3

1

(OO)

1

3

J17

4P

DDI-S I/F

512MB(OPTION)

B EFI CONTROLLER

UN83

To P.31

To P.31

C-3

E-9

B

(OPTION)

Riser PCB

J110A

A

(EMBEDDED)

AC

7

A

(OPTION B)

(OPTION A)

EFI CONTROLLER

8

J16

USB(D)

OR

J3F

J15

MDR 36P

J105

IVDR

HDD1

DC Controller PCB

N.C

GND

9

3.3R

8

GND

7

GND

6

GND

5

GND

4

12V

3

12V

12V_CL

12V_CL

2

UN1

100P

GND

5

3

GND

1

9

(DEALER ONLY)

(TPM)

Controller Cooling Fan 2

UN83

J104

10

D

CSR7P

POSTPONE I/F

Riser PCB

HDD_SEC_ERR

HDD_PRI_ERR

J7544

J107

FM20

J22 30P

CPLD WR

SERIAL1 123

J7544DH

3

SATA POWER

2

J108

J105

10P

DEBUG

J7544D 1

5V

J103

J8

J19

CZ 4P

3

GND

J13

Main Controller PCB 1

2

GND

30P

J2

MINI_USB

DEBUG

HDD0

C

4P J3

J5

117P 12V

(OPTION B)

ETHERNET

4P

9 10 11

UN115 J12

D

2

J20

J40

J21

J11

1

MDR 40P

J1025

7P

MINI-USB 4P

37P

VOICE GUIDANCE

123

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (29/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (29/31)

EFI CONTROLLER

OR

(SERVER)

ETHERNET

AC

6

ETHERNET

5

4

3

2

1

P.29 F-10-32

10-48

10-49

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

F

F

E

E

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (30/31)

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (30/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (30/31)

■HDD (Option)■

Mirroring Kit(OPTION) +

Mirroring Kit(OPTION) + Removable Kit RISER

D

HDD1

RISER HDD1

J111

Mirroring PCB

Mirroring PCB

J107

HDD2

J107

HDD2

J105

D

J111

J105

C

C

J2 J2

LED BOARD

LED BOARD

B

B

A

A

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.30 F-10-33

10-49

10-50

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (31/31)

10

B-2

■FAX BOX■

To P.1 1

2

(2LINE)

(4LINE)

Modular PCB

Modular PCB

J8084F

F

F

J601 J7

2

6

1

5

4

2Line_L2

B-2

To P.29

2

6

1

5

4

3

2

1

E

FX15 40P

E

J504(J4)

3

2Line_L2

3

3Line_L1

4

2Line_L1

5

4Line_L2

6

2Line_L1

7

3Line_L2

J604(J4)

J4

4Line_L1

1 2

Modular PCB

2

Handset

(J2)

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

2

7

1

4

J204(J4)

J103(J3)

J8

6

3

5 4

4

1

2

1

J804(J4)

G3 FAX Control PCB

G3 FAX Control PCB

J208(J8)

D

2

6

1

7

G3 FAX PCB

3

12V CI

2

GND CI

2

4

GND L2

1

12V L2 3

G3 FAX Control PCB 5

J109(J9)

2

3

5

D

2

J106(J6)

3

J802(J2)

7

1

J205(J5)

1

MINI-USB 4P

J403

1

2

3

1

2

1

2

J8132DH J8132L

1

2

B

3

2

B-2

C

GND CI

2

1

To P.29

J104(J4)

GND

2

GND

J8132D

1

CICNT

C

J105(J5)

1

J301(J1)

3

J303(J3)

12V CI

J107(J7)

2

B

1

J302(J2)

Off-hook detect PCB J2121D

2

1

1

2

J2121DH

A

2

J2121

A

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (31/31)

■■General Circuit Diagram (31/31)

SP1 Speaker

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.31 F-10-34

10-50

Appendix > List of User Mode > Device Information Delivery Settings

10-51

List of User Mode Device Information Delivery Settings Registering device information in your machine enables you to set the machine to deliver the same device information to other machines that are connected to the same network. This enables you to easily manage multiple machines at the same time. Your machine is capable of both sending and receiving device information, which can be delivered manually and automatically.

Parent Machine

Child Machines

Child Machines

Child Machines F-10-35

Appendix > List of User Mode > Device Information Delivery Settings

10-51

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Paper Settings

10-52

Environment Settings ■■Paper Settings * Default Settings Item Paper Settings

A5R/STMTR Paper Selection B5/EXEC Paper Selection Paper Type Management Settings

Register Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults Register Custom Size

Setting Description Paper Source Set:Thin, Plain 1*, Plain 2, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Color, Recycled 1, Recycled 2, PrePunched, Transparency, Tab 1, Tab 2, Bond, Letterhead A5R, STMTR* B5, EXEC* Details/Edit Name, Category, Basis Weight, Finish, Type, Color, Adjust Creep Correction, Curl Correction Level, Adjust Image Position, Adj. Secondary Transfer Volt. Duplicate, Delete On, Off* Register(Paper Size/Paper Type) S1 to S5: Register/Edit, Rename Delete

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information DeliveryAvailable

Yes

No

No No Yes

No No No

Yes No

No No

No

Yes

No

No T-10-4

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Paper Settings

10-52

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings

10-53

■■Display Settings * Default Settings *1

Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use. Item

Default Screen after Startup/Restoration

Default Screen (Status Monitor/Cancel)

Copy Screen Display Settings*1 Display Fax Function*1 Store Location Display Settings

Language/Keyboard Switch On/Off Language/Keyboard Switch Use Keyboard Shift Lock Feature Display Remaining Paper Message No. of Copies/Job Duration Status Display Original Scanning Cleaning Area Select Paper Screen Priority mm/Inch Entry Switch ID/User Name Display On/Off Display Remaining Toner Error Message Delete Remaining Toner Error Edit Puncher Unit Die Name*1

Setting Description Main Menu*, Quick Menu, Copy*1, Scan and Send, Fax*1, Scan and Store*1, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox, Hold, Secure Print, Web Access*1, Workflow Composer*1, Scanner, Print Server*1, Scan Lock Analyzer*1, Tutorial, WSD Scan Open Status Monitor/Cancel: On, Off* Default Status Type: Copy*1/Print*, Send, Receive, Store, Consmbls./Others Status/Log: Job Status*, Log Details (Copy*1/Print, Job Status): Copy, Print Details (Send, Job Status): Send, Fax*1 Details (Receive, Job Status): Fax*1, Forward Details (Copy*1/Print, Log): Copy, Printer, Local Print, Received Job Print, Print Report Details (Send, Log): Send, Fax*1 Details (Receive, Log): Receive, Fax*1 Regular Copy*, Express Copy On*, Off Enable Fax in Scan and Send Function*1: On*, Off Mail Box: On*, Off Advanced Box/Network: On*, Off Memory Media: On, Off* On, Off* Language, Keyboard Layout On, Off* On*, Off On*, Off On*, Off Simple*, Detailed mm, Inch* On*, Off On, Off* Yes, No Edit

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information DeliveryAvailable

No

No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No Yes No No No No T-10-5

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings

10-53

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Timer/Energy Settings

10-54

■■Timer/Energy Settings * Default Settings *1

It is recommended that you use the default setting for this item. Item

Adjust Time Date/Time Settings

Time Format Quick Startup Settings for Main Power Auto Reset Time Restrict Auto Reset Time Function After Auto Reset Auto Sleep Time Sleep Mode Energy Use Auto Sleep Weekly Timer] Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings

Setting Description 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments Date and Time Setting (12 digit number) Time Zone: GMT-12:00 to GMT+12:00 (GMT -05:00*) Daylight Saving Time: On, Off* Start Date (Month/Day/Time (0 to 23)) (March, 2nd, Sunday, 2:00*) End Date (Month/Day/Time (0 to 23)) (November, 1st, Sunday, 2:00) 24 Hour, 12 Hour* On*, Off 0 min=Off, 10 to 50 seconds in 10 second increments, 1 to 9 minutes in one minute increments (2 mins*) On, Off* Initial Function*, Selected Function 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 mins, 1 hr, 90 mins, 2, 3, 4 hrs (5 mins*1) Low*, High Sun to Sat, 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

No Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No

Yes

No

Yes Yes Yes

No Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes T-10-6

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Timer/Energy Settings

10-54

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-55

■■Network If you are configuring the settings for the first time in "Interface Settings," "TCP/IPv4 Settings," "TCP/IPv6 Settings," or "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6," use the control panel of the machine. After configuring the TCP/IP settings, you can change them using the Remote UI. If you are using a NetWare or AppleTalk network, you must use the TCP/IP protocol if you want to specify settings using software other than the control panel of the machine. * Default Settings *1

Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use.

*2

Indicates items that appear only when the PS Printer Kit is activated. Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes, No On, Off*

Yes No

No Yes

On*, Off IP Address: 0.0.0.0* Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0* Gateway Address: 0.0.0.0* DHCP: On, Off* RARP: On, Off* BOOTP: On, Off* Acquire Host Name: On*, Off DNS Dynamic Update: On, Off* IP Adress: 0.0.0.0*

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No

On, Off* Use Stateless Address: On*, Off Use Manual Address: On, Off* Manual Address: IPv6 Address (39characters maximum) Prefix Length: 0 to 128 (64*) Default Router Address (39 characters maximum) On, Off* IPv6 Address: (39characters maximum) Host Name

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No Yes No No

Primary DNS Server: IP Address:0.0.0.0* Secondary DNS Server: IP Address:0.0.0.0* Primary DNS Server: IPv6 Address (39 characters maximum) Secondary DNS Server: IPv6 Address (39 characters maximum)

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

Yes

No

Item Output Report] Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes TCP/IP Settings       IPv4 Settings       Use IPv4 IP Address Settings

DHCP Option Settings PING Command IPv6 Settings       Use IPv6 Stateless Address Settings Manual Address Settings

Use DHCPv6 PING Command DNS Settings DNS Server Address Settings       IPv4 IPv6

Setting Description

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-55

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

Yes

No

DNS Dynamic Update: On, Off* DNS Dynamic Update: On, Off* Register Stateless Address: On, Off* Register Manual Address: On, Off* Register Stateless Address: On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No

On, Off* IP Address: 0.0.0.0* Auto (display only) (NULL*)

Yes Yes No Yes

No No No No

On*, Off On, Off*

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

On*, Off On, Off*

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

On, Off* Interval for performing time synchronization (1 to 48 hours) (24hours*) IP address or host name (NULL*) -

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

On, Off* guest* 7654321*

Yes Yes Yes

Yes No No

On, Off* On, Off* On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

On, Off*

Yes

Yes

On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* guest* 7654321*

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes No No No No

Item DNS Host/Domain Name Settings IPv4 IPv6

DNS Dynamic Update Settings IPv4 IPv6

WINS Settings WINS Resolution WINS Server Address Node Type Scope ID LPD Print Settings LPD Print Settings LPD Banner Page*1 RAW Print Settings RAW Print Settings Bidirectional Communication SNTP Settings Use SNTP Polling Interval NTP Server Address Check NTP Server FTP Print Settings Use FTP printing User Name Password WSD Print Settings Use WSD Use WSD Browsing Use Multicast Discovery Use FTP PASV Mode Use FTP PASV Mode IPP Print Settings IPP Print Settings Use SSL Use Authentication User Name Password

Setting Description Host Name: Canon****** ("******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address.) Domain Name: (NULL*) Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4:On, Off* Host Name: Canon****** ("******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address.) Domain Name:

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-56

10-56

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

On* Off default* On* Off On, Off* Settings that use SSL

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes No Yes Yes No

Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert. Key and Certificate

Yes Yes

No No

Yes

No

On, Off* IP address or FQDN (NULL*) 1to 65535 (80*) On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

On, Off* (NULL*) (NULL*) On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

On, Off* Allow*/Reject On*, Off

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

24 characters maximum (NULL*) Local Address: All IP Addresses*/IPv4 Address/IPv6 Address/IPv4 Manual Settings/IPv6 Manual Settings Remort Address: All IP Addresses*, All IPv4Address, All IPv6Address, IPv4Manual Settings, IPv6 Manual Settings Port: Specify by Port Number*/Specify by Service Name IKE mode : Main*/Aggressive Authentication Method : Pre-Shared Key Method*/Digital sig. Method Auth./Encryption Algorithm : Auto*/Manual Settings Validity : Time (1to65535minuites) (480minuites*) Validity : Size (1to65535 MB) (0 MB*) PFS : On, Off* Auth./Encryption Algorithm : Auto*/Manual Settings Connect. Mode : Transport, display only

Yes Yes

No No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No No

Item Multicast Discovery Settings Response Scope name Use HTTP Use WebDAV Server SSL Settings Key and Certificate Set as the Default Key Certificate Details Display Use Location Proxy Settings Use proxy Server Address Port Number Use Proxy within the Same Domain Set Authentication Use Proxy Auth. User Name Password Confirm Dept. ID PIN IPSec Settings Use IPSec Receive Non-policy Packets Policy On, Off Reg.       Policy Name Selector Settings

IKE Settings

IPSec Network Settings

Edit

Setting Description

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-57

10-57

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes, No

Yes Yes

No No

On, Off* Auto Detect*/Ethernet II/Ethernet 802.2/Ethernet 802.3/Ethernet SNAP Auto (display only) Auto (display only) Bindery PServer, R Printer, NDS Pserver*, NPrinter

Yes Yes No No Yes

Yes No No No No

(NULL*) (NULL*) (NULL*) 0 to 15 (0*) 1 to 15seconds (5seconds*) 0 to 255 (0*) 1 to 20 KB (20KB*) Minimize form changes within print queues*, Minimize form changes across print queues, Change forms as needed, Service only currently mounted form

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No

(NULL*) (NULL*) 0 to 15 (0*)

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

(NULL*) (NULL*) (NULL*) (NULL*) 0 to 254 (0*) 1 to 255seconds (5seconds*) 0 to 255 (0*) 3 to 20KB (20KB*) Minimize form changes within print queues*, Minimize form changes across print queues, Change forms as needed, Service only currently mounted form

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No No

(NULL*) (NULL*) (NULL*) 0 to 254 (0*) Auto (display only)

Yes Yes Yes Yes No

No No No No No

On, Off* Phase 2 (display only) Name (Device Name*) Zone

Yes No Yes Yes

Yes No No No

Item Delete Print List NetWare Settings Use NetWare Frame Type IPX External Network Number Node Number Print Service Bindery PServer Print Server Name File Server Name Print Server Password Printer Number Polling Interval Printer Form Buffer Size Service Mode RPrinter Print Server Name File Server Name Printer Number NDS PServer Print Server Name Tree Name Context Name Print Server Password Printer Number Polling Interval Printer Form Buffer Size Service Mode NPrinter Print Server Name Tree Name Context Name Printer Number Packet Signature Apple Talk Settings Use Apple Talk Phase Service Name Zone

Setting Description

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-58

10-58

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Both*, Spool, Direct

Yes

No

On, Off* Servwr Name : Canon****** ("******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address.) Workgroup Name : (WORKGROUP*) Comment : (NULL*) On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No

On, Off* (PRINTER*)

Yes Yes

No No

On, Off* • NTLMv1 : On, Off* • NTLMv2 : On, Off*

Yes Yes

No No

On*, Off

Yes

Yes

On*, Off Read/Write, Read Only*

Yes Yes

No No

On*, Off Read/Write, Read Only* (public*)

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

On, Off* Read/Write, Read Only* (public2*) On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

On*, Off User Name, MIB Access Permis. (Read/Write, Read Only), Security Settings (Auth. Yes/Encry. Yes, Auth. Yes/Encry. No, Auth. No/Encrypt. No), Authent. Algorithm (MD5, SHA1), Authent. Password, Encryption Algorithm (DES, AES), Encryption Password User Name, MIB Access Permis. (Read/Write, Read Only), Security Settings (Auth. Yes/Encry. Yes, Auth. Yes/Encry. No, Auth. No/Encrypt. No), Authent. Algorithm (MD5, SHA1), Authent. Password, Encryption Algorithm (DES, AES), Encryption Password -

Yes Yes

No No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Context Name Context Name On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No Yes

On*, Off

Yes

Yes

Item Print Mode*2 SMB Server Settings Use SMB Server Server Name Workgroup Name Comment LM Announce Set SMB Printer Use SMB Printer Name SMB Auth. Settings Use SMB Authentication Authentication Type SNMP Settings Use SNMP v. 1 Dedicated Comm. Settings Dedicated Community MIB Access Permission Set Community Name 1 Community Name 1 MIB Access Permission Community Name Set Community Name 2 Community Name 2 MIB Access Permission Community Name Use SNMP v. 3 User Settings User On, Off Register

Details/Edit

Delete Context Settings Register Edit Delete Get Printer Mgmt Info from Host Dedicated Port Settings Dedicated Port Settings

Setting Description

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-59

10-59

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

On, Off*

Yes

Yes

0 to 300seconds (30seconds*)

Yes

No

On*, Off Half Duplex*/Full Duplex 10 Base-T*, 100 Base-TX, 1000 Base-T Display only

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

On, Off* (NULL*) On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

Set as the Default Key Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert. Key and Certificate On, Off* MSCHAPv2*, PAP On, Off* (NULL*) (NULL*) On*, Off

Yes Yes

No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No

On, Off* Allow*, Reject Register (Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), Edit, Delete -

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

On, Off* Allow*, Reject Register (Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), Details/Edit, Delete -

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

On, Off* Allow*, Reject Register (Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), Edit, Delete -

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

Item Use Spool Function Use Spool Function Startup Settings Startup Settings Ethernet Driver Settings Auto Detect Communication Mode Ethernet Type MAC Address IEEE802.1X Settings Use IEEE802.1X Login Name Use TLS Key and Certificate Set as the Default Key Certificate Details Display Use Location Use TTLS TTLS Settings Use PEAP User Name Password Same User Name as Login Name Firewall Settings IPv4 Address Filter TX Filter Use Filter Default Policy IPv4 Address Prefix Length (0 to 32) RX Filter Use Filter Default Policy IPv4 Address Prefix Length (0 to 32) IPv6 Address Filter TX Filter Use Filter Default Policy IPv6Address Prefix Length (0 to 128)

Setting Description

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-60

10-60

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

Item RX Filter Use Filter Default Policy IPv6Address Prefix Length (0 to 128) MACAddressFilter TX Filter Use Filter Default Policy MACAddress RX Filter Use Filter Default Policy MACAddress IP Address Block Log

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

On, Off* Allow*, Reject Register (Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), Details/Edit, Delete -

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

On, Off* Allow*, Reject Register (Up to 100 Mac addresses), Edit, Delete

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

On, Off* Allow*, Reject Register (Up to 100 Mac addresses), Edit, Delete Time, Type, IP Address, Port Number, Result

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

Setting Description

10-61

T-10-7

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-61

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility

10-62

■■External Interface * Default Settings Item USB Settings Use as USB Device Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device Use MEAP Driver for External USB Device

Setting Description On*, Off On, Off* On, Off*

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes T-10-8

■■Accessibility * Default Settings Item Key Repetition Settings Reversed Display (Color)

Setting Description Standard*, Slightly Slow, Slow On, Off*

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

No No

No No T-10-9

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility

10-62

Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality

10-63

Adjustment/Maintenance ■■Adjust Image Quality * Default Settings Item Auto Adjust Gradation

Correct Density

Correct Shading Auto Correct Color Mismatch Full Color Printing Vividness Settings Fine Adjust Zoom Dither Pattern Settings

Setting Description Full Adjust (Automatic after the machine prints and scans three sets of test pages): Press [Start Printing] Quick Adjust: Press [Start] Black Scan for Copy/Scan and Store (Mail Box), Black Scan for Send/Scan and Store (Other Than Mail Box), Color Scan for Send/Scan and Store: 9 levels each (5 levels*) Densitometer Correction, Visual Correction Press [Start] Standard*, Level 1, Level 2 X:- 1.0 % to+ 1.0 % (0.1 % increments) (0%*) Y:- 1.0 % to+ 1.0 % (0.1 % increments) (0%*) Pattern 1*, Pattern 2

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

No

No

No

No

No No No No

No No No No

No

No T-10-10

Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality

10-63

Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance

10-64

■■Adjust Action * Default Settings *1

Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use. Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Press [Start] -2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in 0.25 mm increments (0.00 mm*) -2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in 0.25 mm increments (0.00 mm*) 4 3/4", 5 11/16"* Speed Priority, Precision Priority -2.0 mm to +20.0 mm, in 0.1 mm increments (2.0 mm*) Color Priority, Black Priority*

No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No

-2.0 mm to +1.5 mm, 0.5 increments (0.0 mm*) When the Paper Folding Unit-G1 is attached: -7.0 mm to +5.0 mm, in 0.5 mm increments (-1.0 mm*) When the Document Insertion/Folding Unit-G1 is attached: A: 0.0 mm to +6.0 mm, 0.5 mm increments (0.0 mm*) B: 0.0 mm to 3.0 mm, 0.5 mm increments (0.0 mm*) -7.0 mm to +5.0 mm, 0.5 increments (-1.0 mm*) A: -2.0 mm to +5.0 mm, 0.5 increments (-1.0 mm*) B: 0.0 mm to +5.0 mm, 0.5 mm increments (1.0 mm*) -2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, 0.5 increments (0.0 mm*) -2.00 mm to +2.00 mm, 0.25 increments (0.00 mm*) Press [Start] Face Up Output (Reverse): -10 to +10 (0*) Face Down Output (Normal): -10 to +10 (0*)

No No

No No

No

No

No No

No No

No No No No

No No No No

Item Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning*1 Change Fold/Stitch Position*1 Adjust Saddle Stitch Fold Position*1 Adjust Double Staple Width*1 Finisher Puncher Switch*1 Adjust Trim Width*1 Color/Black Priority for First Print Time Adjust Fold Position*1 Adjust Z-Fold Position Adjust C-Fold Position

Adjust Accordion Z-Fold Position Adjust Double Parallel Fold Position Adjust Half Fold Position Adjust Saddle Fold Position Adjust Paper Deck Plates*1 Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer*1

Setting Description

T-10-11

■■Maintenance * Default Settings *1

Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use. Item

Clean Feeder*1 Clean Wire Clean Roller Clean Drum Original Scanning Area Cleaning Method*1

Setting Description Press [Start] Press [Start] Press [Start] Press [Start] Displaying cleaning method

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

No No No No No

No No No No No T-10-12

Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance

10-64

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

10-65

Function Settings ■■Common * Default Settings *1

Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use.

*2

Indicates information that is delivered only if the number of output trays is the same for the machine that is sending device information and the device receiving the information.

*3

Indicates items with no serial number or ID/user name. Item

Paper Feed Settings Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off Optimal Productivity MP Tray Other Copy*1 Paper Drawer Auto Selection Based on Color Suspended Job Timeout On

Setting Description Copy*1, Printer, Access Stored File, Receive/Fax*1, Other On*, Off On, Off* On*, Off Consider Paper Type : On*, Off Consider Color: On, Off* Color*, Black On, Off* 0 to 999 min. (5mins*)

Paper Output Settings Output Tray Settings*1 If the Staple Finisher -K1/Booklet Finisher-K1 is attached       Tray A Copy*, Access Stored Files*, Printer*, Receive, Fax, Other Tray B Copy, Access Stored Files, Printer, Receive*, Fax*, Other* Tray C Copy*, Access Stored Files*, Printer*, Receive, Fax, Other If the Staple Finisher- L1/Booklet Finisher-L1 is attached Tray A Copy, Access Stored Files, Printer, Receive*, Fax*, Other* Tray B Copy*, Access Stored Files*, Printer*, Receive, Fax, Other Tray C Copy*, Access Stored Files*, Printer*, Receive, Fax, Other Tray Home Position Tray A*, Tray B, Tray C, Off Offset Jobs*1 On*, Off Job Separator Between Jobs On, Off* Change (Select Paper Source) Job Separator Between Copies On, Off* Copies (1 to 9999) (10*), Change (Select Paper Source) Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray*1 On*, Off Unfinished Tab Paper Forced Output On, Off* Print Settings Print Priority Copy*1 1*, 2, 3 Printer 1, 2*, 3 Access Stored File, Receive/Fax*1, Other 1, 2, 3* Coated Productivity/Image Quality Priority Productivity Priority, Quality Priority* Text/Photo Priority When ACS Is Set to Black Text Priority*, Photo Priority

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

No*2 No*2 No*2

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No*2 No*2 No*2 No*2 Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

10-65

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

Item Local Print Default Settings Select Paper No. of Prints Finishing*1 If no finisher is attached. If the Staple Finisher-K1 is attached.

If the Booklet Finisher-K1 is attached.

If the Staple Finisher-K1 and puncher unit are attached. If the Staple Finisher- K1/Booklet Finisher-K1 and Paper Folding Unit-G1 are attached. If the Staple Finisher- K1/Booklet Finisher-K1, puncher unit, and Paper Folding Unit-G1 are attached. If the Staple Finisher-L1 is attached.

If the Booklet Finisher-L1 is attached.

If the Staple Finisher-L1 and external puncher are attached. If the Staple Finisher- L1/Booklet Finisher-L1, and Document Insertion/Folding Unit-G1 are attached. If the Staple Finisher- L1/Booklet Finisher-L1, external puncher, and Document Insertion/ Folding Unit-G1 are attached. 2-Sided Printing Delete File After Printing Merge and Print Output Report Default Settings 2-Sided Printing Register Form Superimpose Image Quality Priority Register Characters for Page No./Watermark

Setting Description Auto*, Select Paper Source 1 to 9,999 sets (1set*) Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Group (Same Pages), Rotate 90 Degrees, Face Up/Face Down Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Offset*, Face Up/Face Down Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Offset*, Face Up/Face Down, Saddle Fold, Adjust Fold Position Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Offset*, Face Up/Face Down, Hole Punch Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Offset*, Face Up/Face Down, Fold, Adjust Fold Position Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Offset*, Face Up/Face Down, Hole Punch, Fold, Adjust Fold Position Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Offset*, Face Up/Face Down Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Offset*, Face Up/Face Down, Saddle Fold, Adjust Fold Position Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Offset*, Face Up/Face Down, Hole Punch Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Offset*, Face Up/Face Down, Fold, Adjust Fold Position Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Offset*, Face Up/Face Down, Hole Punch, Fold, Adjust Fold Position On, Off* On: Book Type*, Calendar Type On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* Register, Delete, Check Print, Details Auto*, Original Priority, Form Priority Register, Edit, Delete

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

10-66

10-66

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

On, Off*

Yes

Yes

On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* Date Settings (mm/dd/yyyy, yyyy/mm/dd, dd/mm/yyyy, yyyy.mm.dd, mm.dd.yyyy, dd.mm.yyyy*)

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Copy*1 : Do Not Set*, Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock Access Stored Files : Do Not Set*, Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock Printer : Do Not Set*, Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock Copy*1 : Do Not Set*, Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock, Sec. Water. + Scan Lock Access Stored Files : Do Not Set*, Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock, Sec. Water. + Scan Lock Printer : Do Not Set*, Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock, Sec. Water. + Scan Lock

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes*3 Yes*3 Yes*3 Yes*3

Yes

Yes*3

Yes

Yes*3

Do Not Set*, Driver Secure Watermark, Driver Doc. Scan Lock Do Not Set*, Driver Secure Watermark, Driver Doc. Scan Lock, Sec. Water. + Scan Lock Black, Cyan, Magenta -7 to +7 (imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO) Black : 0*, Cyan : 2*, Magenta : 0*

Yes Yes

Yes*3 Yes*3

No No No

No No No

No No No

No No No

Item Copy Set Numbering Option Settings Select Option ID/User Name Date Text Copy Set Numbering Option Settings Set Characters Alignment Settings Secure Watermark/Document Scan Lock*1 Forced Secure Watermark/Doc. Scan Lock When Using TL Code:

When Using QR Code:

Printer Driver Watermark/Doc. Scan Lock When Using TL Code: When Using QR Code: Adjust Background/Character Contrast Sample Print Relative Contrast

Print Settings Initialize Standard Value Set

Setting Description

Align Left*, Align Center, Align Right

-7 to +7 (imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270/C7260) Black : 1*, Cyan : -1*, Magenta : 1* 1 to 64 (imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO) Black : 16*, Cyan : 16*, Magenta : 16*

10-67

1 to 64 (imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270/C7260) Black : 12*, Cyan : 16*, Magenta : 12*

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

10-67

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

No

No

No No

Yes Yes

1 to 7 (imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270/C7260) Black : 4*, Magenta : 3* Standard*, Rough Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right*, Bottom Right

No No No

Yes No Yes

When Start Is Pressed*, When Panel Is Touched From 1st Page*, From Stopped Original Speed Priority*, Quiet On*, Off Speed Priority*, Quality Priority Select Manually, Use LTRR Format*, Use STMT Format Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2 On, Off* On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Data Size Priority, Normal*, Quality Priority On, Off* 100x100 dpi, 200x200 dpi, 300x300 dpi*

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

On*, Off 1 to 24 (24 Char*)

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

On*, Off Normal*, Moderate, High Data Size Priority, Normal*, Quality Priority

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Quality Priority, standarad*, Data Size Priority High, Standard*, Do Not Recognize On*, Off On*, Off Do Not Specify*, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Item Latent Area Density

Adjust TL Code Dot Size

Dot Density Initialize QR Code Print Position Scan Settings*1 Timing to Raise Feeder Tray*1 Feeder Jam Recovery Method*1 Scanner Noise Settings*1 Streak Prevention Black Scan Speed/Image Quality Priority*1 LTRR/STMT Original Detection Remote Scan Gamma Value Auto Online Auto Online Generate File High Compression Image Quality Level Compact PDF Settings for Text Original Resolution OCR (Text Searchable) Settings Smart Scan No. of OCR File Name Characters Trace & Smooth Settings*1 Outline Graphics Graphics Recognition Level Background Image Level OOXML Settings Background Image Level Color Image Recognition Level Color Image Line Width Recognition Include Background Images in Word File*1 Specify Minimum PDF Version

Setting Description 1 to 36 (imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO) Black : 8*, Cyan : 10*, Magenta : 11* 1 to 36 (imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270/C7260) Black : 7*, Cyan : 9*, Magenta : 10* Color: Magenta, Black* 1 to 7 (imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO) Black : 4*, Magenta : 4*

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

10-68

10-68

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

Item Format PDF to PDF/A Optimize PDF for Web 256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF*1 Rights Management Server Settings

Document Scan Lock Operational Settings*1 Use Document Scan Lock Document Scan Lock TL Code Settings

Document Scan Lock QR Code Settings Set Authentication Method Info. Used for LDAP Server Authentication Info. Used for Rights Mgmt. Server Auth. Info. Used for SMTP Server Authentication Info. Used for File TX/Browsing Auth.

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

On, Off* On, Off* Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent, Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent* Server URL : (NULL*) User Name : (NULL*) Password : (NULL*) Always Show Auth. Screen: On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes No No No No

Use TL Code*, Use QR Code, Do not use Scan Job Restriction : On*, Off Multiple Embedded Information Action : Continue Job, Cancel Job* Restrict Functions Affecting Doc. Scan Lock : On, Off* Scan Job Restriction : A Mode (Standard)*, B Mode (Secured), Off Restrict Functions Affecting Doc. Scan Lock : On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Device Settings*, Device Login Auth. Info., Regist. Info. for Each User Device Settings*, Regist. Info. for Each User Device Settings, Regist. Info. for Each User* Standard*, Device Login Auth. Info., Regist. Info. for Each User

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

Setting Description

10-69

T-10-13

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

10-69

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Copy

10-70

■■Copy * Default Settings Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

M1 to M9 : Register, Rename, Delete, Check Content Register, Initialize

No No

No No

Finishing*, Unassigned 2-Sided*, Unassigned Density* Unassigned Original Type*, Unassigned Unassigned*

No No No No No

No No No No No

No Settings*, Each mode No Settings*, Each mode No Settings*, Each mode No Settings*, Each mode No Settings*, Each mode No Settings*, Each mode On*, Off On, Off* On*, Off

No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes

On*, Off On*, Off

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Item Register/Edit Favorite Settings Change Default Settings Register Options Shortcuts Shortcut 1 Shortcut 2 Shortcut 3 Shortcut 4 Shortcut 5 Register Options Shortcuts (Express Copy) Shortcut 1 Shortcut 2 Shortcut 3 Shortcut 4 Shortcut 5 Shortcut 6 Auto Collate Image Orientation Priority Auto Orientation Select Color Settings for Copy Use Auto (Color/Black) Use Full Color

Setting Description

T-10-14

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Copy

10-70

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer

10-71

■■Printer * Default Settings *1

Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specified. Item

Print Report PCL*1 Configuration Page Font List PS Configuration Page Font List RGB Test Print CMY Test Print RGB Color Chart CMYK Color Chart Printer Settings Restrict Printer Jobs When On is selected PDL Selection (Plug-n-play)

Setting Description

Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer) On, Off* Select Jobs to Allow: Rsrvd Jobs*, Rsrvd Jobs + Secure Print UFR II*, PCL5c*1, PCL6*1, PS3*1, Fax*1, UFR II (XPS)

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No T-10-15

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer

10-71

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

10-72

■■Send * Default Settings *1

Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional products are available for use.

*2

Indicates item that is not delivered as device information.

Details/Edit, Delete *3

Indicates items with setting range and default setting that may differ, depending on the region.

*4

Indicates items that may not be displayed on the Settings/Registration screen or that may have different default setting, depending on the region.

*5

Displays according to the number of lines set in [No. of TX Lines]. Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes Yes

No No

Checking Settings, Location to Register Button : M1 to M18 On, Off* Name, Comment Delete, Check Content, Rename (Name, Comment) : M1 to M18 On, Off* On*, Off Standard*, One-Touch, Favorite Settings, Address Book Register, Initialize

No No No No No No No No

Yes No Yes Yes No No No No

2-Sided Original*, Unassigned Different Size Originals*, Unassigned For Error Only*, On, Off On*, Off On, Off*

No No Yes Yes Yes

No No Yes Yes Yes

On*, Off On, Off* 00 : 00 to 23 : 59 (00 : 00*) On, Off* Print*, Do Not Print TX Terminal ID: Print • Print Position: Inside, Outside* • Display Destination Unit Name: On*, Off • Telephone # Mark*1: Fax*, TEL On*, Off 0 to 5times (3times*) High Ratio, Normal*, Low Ratio Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2 On*, Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Item Output Report TX/RX User Data List Fax User Data List*1 Common Settings Register Favorite Settings Show Comment Button Name, Input Comment Edit Favorite Settings Show Comments Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings Default Screen Change Default Settings Register Options Shortcuts Shortcut 1 Shortcut 2 TX Report Report with TX Image Report with Color TX Image Communication Management Report Auto Print (100 Transmissions) Specify Print Time Timer Setting Send/Receive Separate TX Terminal ID

Delete Failed TX Jobs Retry Times Data Compression Ratio YCbCr TX Gamma Value Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX

Setting Description Yes, No Yes, No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

10-72

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

On, Off* CN: On, Off*

Yes Yes

No No

On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* Home Folder, Register for Each User*, Use Login Server Protocol, Host Name, Folder Path On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

(NULL*)

Yes

No

On, Off* On*, Off (NULL*) (NULL*)

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes No No

(NULL*) (NULL*) (NULL*) 0 min (Off), 1 to 99 mins (0 mins*)

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

Standard*, APOP, POP AUTH On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* (NULL*) (NULL*) Always SSL, On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* CN: On, Off* On, Off* CN: On, Off* 0 (Off), 1 to 99 MB (3MB*) (Attached Image*) On, Off* On*, Off On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No Yes

Item Confirm SSL Certificate for WebDAV TX Add Items to Verify Limit New Destination Fax E-mail I-Fax File Always Add Device Signature to Send*1 Restrict File Formats Limit E-Mail to Send to Myself Restrict File TX to Personal Folder Personal Folder Specification Method Home Folder Settings Use Auth. Info. of Each User E-Mail/I-Fax Settings Register Unit Name Communication Settings SMTP RX POP SMTP Server (Server name or IP address) E-mail Address POP Server (Server name or IP address) POP Login Name POP Password POP Interval Authent./Encryption POP AUTH Method POP Authentication Before Send Allow SSL (POP) SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH) User Name Password Allow SSL (SMTPReceive) Allow SSL (SMTP Send) Display Auth. Screen When Send Confirm SSL Certificate for SMTP TX Add Items to Verify Confirm SSL Certificate for POP RX Add Items to Verify Maximum Data Size for Sending Default Subject Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply Set Authentication User Dest. to Sender Allow Unregistered Users to Send E-Mail

Setting Description

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

10-73

10-73

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

1 to 99 hrs (24 hrs*) On, Off* On, Off* On*, Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

On, Off* Register, Details/Edit, Delete On*, Off

Yes Yes No

Yes Yes*2 Yes

Standard*, Address Book Register, Initialize

No No

No No

Density*, Unassigned Original Type*, Unassigned 2-Sided Original*, Unassigned Different Size Originals*, Unassigned 01 to 99 : Register/Edit, Delete On, Off* On*, Off 1 to 15sec (2sec*) On*, Off 1 to 10 times (2times*) 2 to 99 mins (2 mins*) Error and 1st Page*, All Pages, Off On*, Off For Error Only*, On, Off On*, Off

No No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

On*, Off On, Off* 00 : 00 to 23 : 59 (00 : 00*) On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

If only the Super G3 FAX Board is installed: • Line 1 If the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board are installed: • Line 1, Line 2 If the Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board, and Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board are installed: • Line 1, Line 2, Line 3, Line 4 (NULL*) (NULL*) Pulse, Tone*

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

Item Full Mode TX Timeout Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt Use Send via Server Allow MDN Not via Server Restrict TX Destination Domain Restrict Sending to Domains Permitted Domains Autocomplete for Entering E-Mail Addresses Fax Settings*1 Default Screen Change Default Settings Register Options Shortcuts Shortcut 1 Shortcut 2 Shortcut 3 Shortcut 4 Register Sender Name (TTI) Use Auth. User Name as Sender Name ECM TX Set Pause Time Auto Redial Set Details: Redial Times Set Details: Redial Interval Set Details: Redial When TX Error Check Dial Tone Before Sending Fax TX Report Report with TX Image Fax Activity Report Auto Print (40 Transmissions) Specify Print Time Timer Setting Send/Receive Separate Set Line Line 1 to Line 4

Register Unit Telephone Number Register Unit Name Select Line Type

Setting Description

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

10-74

10-74

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

Item Select TX Line

TX Start Speed PIN Code Access Confirm Entered Fax Number Allow Fax Driver TX Remote Fax TX Settings*1 Remote Fax Server Address TX Timeout No. of TX Lines Select Priority Line Remote Fax Settings Use Remote Fax

Setting Description

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes

No

If the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board are installed: • Line 1: Priority TX*, Prohibit TX • Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX If the Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board, and Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board are installed: • Line 1: Priority TX, Prohibit TX* • Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX • Line 3: Priority TX, Prohibit TX • Line 4: Priority TX, Prohibit TX 33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps On, Off* On, Off* On*, Off

Yes

No

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

IP address or host name (48 characters maximum): (NULL*) 1 to 99 hrs (one hour increments) (24hrs*) 1 to 4 Line (1*) Auto*, Line 1, Line 2*3, Line 3*3, Line 4*3

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No Yes No No

On, Off*

Yes

Yes

10-75

T-10-16

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

10-75

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward

10-76

■■Receive/Forward * Default Settings *1

Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional products are available for use.

*2

Indicates items that are not delivered as device information.

*3

Indicates items that are not delivered if a PIN is set.

Receive Method:, E-Mail Priority, Details/Edit, Delete, Print List Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes, No Yes, No

Yes Yes

No No

On, Off*

Yes

Yes

On*, Off On*, Off On*, Off On*, Off On*, Off On • Reduction Mode: Auto*, Fixed • Reduction %: 75% to 97% (90%*) • Reduction Direction: Vertical & Horizontal, Vertical Only* On, Off* Print, Do Not Print* Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2 Always Print*, Store/Print, Off Receive Method:, Validate/Invalidate, Register (Registered Forwarding Settings), Delete, Details/Edit, Print List, Forward w/o Conditions, E-Mail Priority

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes*2

00 to 49 (NULL*) (NULL*) (NULL*) Seven digits maximum: (NULL*) On, Off* On, Off* Everyday (1 to 5), Specify Days (Sun to Sat, 1 to 5), Off* Everyday (1 to 5), Specify Days (Sun to Sat, 1 to 5), Off* 0 to 99 hrs (24hrs*) On*, Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes*3 Yes Yes*3 No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Item Output Report TX/RX User Data List Fax User Data List*1 Common Settings Print on Both Sides Select Drawer SwitchA SwitchB SwitchC SwitchD Reduce Fax RX Size

2 On 1 Log Received Page Footer YCbCr RX Gamma Value Handle Files with Forwarding Errors Forwarding Settings Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox Set/Register Confidential Fax Inboxes Inbox No. Register Box Name PIN URL Send Settings Initialize Memory RX Inbox PIN Use Fax Memory Lock*1 Use I-Fax Memory Lock Memory Lock Start Time Memory Lock End Time Divided Data RX Timeout Always Send Notice for RX Errors

Setting Description

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward

10-76

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward

Item Fax Settings*1 ECM RX Fax RX Report Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report RX Start Speed RX Password

Setting Description On*, Off For Error Only, On, Off* On*, Off 33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps 20 digits maximum: (NULL*)

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes No

10-77

T-10-17

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward

10-77

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Store/Access Files

10-78

■■Store/Access Files * Default Settings *1

Indicates items that are not delivered if a PIN is set. Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Register, Rename, Delete, Check Content (M1 to M9) Register, Initialize

No No

No No

Register, Rename, Delete, Check Content (M1 to M9) Register, Initialize

No No

No No

00 to 99 (NULL*) (NULL*) 0=None, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hrs, 1, 2, 3, 7, 30 days (3 days*) (NULL*) On, Off* -

No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

No Yes*1 No No Yes*1 Yes*1 No

0=None, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hrs, 1, 2, 3, 7, 30 days (3 days*) On, Off*

No Yes

No No

On, Off* On*, Off

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Off*, By WebDAV, By SMB

Yes

Yes

Basic, Off* On, Off* On*, Off Yes, No Yes, No On*, Off On, Off* Dev. Supt. Formats*, Comm. Office Formats, All On*, Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Register (Name, Protocol, Location), Details, Delete

Yes

No

On*, Off On*, Off

Yes Yes

No No

Item Common Settings Scan and Store Settings Register/Edit Favorite Settings Change Default Settings Access Stored Files Settings Register/Edit Favorite Settings Change Default Settings Mail Box Settings Set/Register Mail Boxes Mail Box No. Register Box Name PIN Time Until File Auto Delete URL Send Settings Print upon Storing from Printer Driver Initialize Settings for All Mail Boxes Time Until File Auto Delete Print When Storing from Printer Driver Box Security Settings Limit Box PIN to 7 Digits/Restrict Access Disp. Print When Storing from Printer Driver Advanced Box Settings Open to Public WebDAV Server Settings Authentication Type Use SSL Allow to Create Personal Space Delete All Personal Spaces Initialize Shared Space Prohibit Writing from External Authentication Management File Formats Allowed for Storing Save Operation Log Network Settings Network Place Settings Protocol for External Reference SMB WebDAB

Setting Description

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Store/Access Files

10-78

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Store/Access Files

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

On, Off* CN: On, Off*

Yes Yes

No No

On*, Off On*, Off

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Item Confirm SSL Certificate for Network Access Add Items to Verify Memory Media Settings Use Scan/Print Function Use Scan Function Use Print Function

Setting Description

10-79

T-10-18

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Store/Access Files

10-79

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Hold

10-80

■■Secure Print * Default Settings *1

Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use. Item

Simple Authentication Settings Omit Password Require Domain Name to Determine My Job Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs*1

Setting Description On, Off* On*, Off On, Off*

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes T-10-19

■■Hold * Default Settings Item Use Hold Function Time Until Hold Job Auto Delete

Setting Description On*, Off 0=Off, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hrs, 1, 2, 3, 7, 30 days (3 days*)

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

No No

No No T-10-20

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Hold

10-80

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Web Access

10-81

■■Web Access * Default Settings Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

On*, Off On*, Off On*, Off On, Off* On*, Off On, Off* On, Off* Std CSS only, Std CSS + Style Attribute, Std CSS + Style Attribute + External Imported CSS* CSS1*, CSS2, CSS3 On*, Off Short, Medium*, Long URL Use Current Page as Home: (NULL*) On*, Off

No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No

No No No No No

No No No No No

Show Home Page*, Show Blank Page, Keep Last Page

No

No

On*, Off On*, Off On*, Off On*, Off On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* Use Cache: On, Off* Yes, No Cookie Handling: Accept*, Block, Prompt Yes, No

No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No

On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off*

No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No

Item Settings View Settings Show Images Show Animated GIF Images Enable Table Fit Web Page Into Screen Size Use JavaScript Use Word Wrap Use Japanese Hyphenation Format Standard CSS Show Flash Contents Flash Animation Frame Interval Home Page Settings Home Page during Startup Auto Clear Settings Display during Auto Clear Security Use SSL 2.0 Use SSL 3.0 Use TLS 1.0 Certificates Enable/Disable Details Display Mixed HTTPS/HTTP Pg Display Server Certificate Auth. Warning Displ Warning when Entering Secured Page Displ. Warning when Leaving Secured Page Cache Clear Cache Cookie Delete Cookies Privacy Policy and Regulations Restrict URL Entry Restrict Add/Edit Favorites Restrict Editing Home Pages Restrict Add/Edit Page Memos Restrict Printing Restrict File Upload Restrict History Display Dept. ID/User Name with History Full Screen

Setting Description

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Web Access

10-81

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Web Access

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On*, Off -

No No No No No

No No No No No

(NULL*) On, Off* (Display Only)

No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No

Item Hide Buttons in Toolbar Hide Address in Toolbar Hide Web Access Button Restrict Share Device Information Share Device Information with Following Address Proxy Settings Use a proxy server (Display Only) Proxy Server Address (Display Only) Port Number (Display Only) Use proxy auth. (Display Only) Address Without Using Proxy Use HTTP1.1 for proxy connection: On, Off Version

Setting Description

10-82

T-10-21

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Web Access

10-82

Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination

10-83

Set Destination ■■Set Destination * Default Settings *1

Indicates items that are not delivered as device information: Details/Edit, Delete, Search by Name

*2

Indicates items that are not delivered as device information: Edit, Delete

*3

Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use. Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Address List 1 to Address List 10, One-Touch Print List: Yes, No Register New Dest., Details/Edit, Delete, Search by Name Address List 1 to Address List 10, Rename Register/Edit, Delete Local*, LDAP Server, Remote PIN: Seven digits maximum (NULL*) On, Off* On, Off* Register, Details/Edit, Delete, Print List On* Off Display Name, Attribute Name Register, Initialize

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No

No No Yes*1 Yes Yes*2 No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No

On, Off* IP Address or Host Name 15 to 120 sec (30sec*) On*, Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes No Yes Yes

On, Off*

Yes

Yes

Item Address Lists Register Destinations Rename Address List Register One-Touch Change Default Display of Address Book Address Book PIN Manage Address Book Access Numbers Include Pswd. When Exporting Address Book Register LDAP Server Auto Search When Using LDAP Server Register/Edit LDAP Search Conditions Change Default LDAP Search Conditions Acquire Remote Address Book*3 Acquire Address Book Remote Address Book Server Address Communication Timeout Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment Make Remote Add. Book Open Make Address Book Open

Setting Description

T-10-22

Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination

10-83

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > User Management

10-84

Management Settings ■■User Management * Default Settings Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

7654321* 7654321* (NULL*) (NULL*) (NULL*) (NULL*)

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

On, Off* Register, Edit, Delete, Limit Functions Clear, Print List, Clear All Totals, Large2 Count Management On*, Off On*, Off On, Off* On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Item System Manager Information Settings System Manager ID System PIN System Manager E-Mail Address Contact Information Comment Department ID Management Department ID Management Register PIN Page Totals Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs Allow Black Copy/Print Jobs Allow Black Printer Jobs

Setting Description

T-10-23

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > User Management

10-84

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management

10-85

■■Device Management * Default Settings *1

Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use. Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Model Name* (NULL*)

No No

No No

Auto Search/Register, Reg., Details, Delete, Print List Auto Search/Register • Search Depth (Router): 1 to 8 (1*) • Display Host Name: On, Off* • Start Auto Search Everyday (1 to 5), Specify Days (Sun to Sat, 1 to 5), Off* On, Off* • Network Settings: Include, Exclude On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off*

No No

No No

No No

No No

No No No No No No

No No No No No No

On, Off* • Network Settings: Include, Exclude On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On*, Off Settings/Reg. Value, Dept. ID, Address Book, Web Access Favorites*1, Printer Settings, Paper Information, Start

No

No

No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No

On*, Off On*, Off On*, Off On*, Off On*, Off On*, Off On, Off* All, Basic Only*

No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No

Item Device Information Settings Device Name Location Device Information Delivery Settings Register Destinations

Set Auto Delivery Settings/Registration Value Dept. ID Address Book Web Access Favorites*1 Printer Settings Paper Information Workflow Composer*1 Manual Delivery Settings/Registration Value Dept. ID Address Book Web Access Favorites*1 Printer Settings Paper Information Workflow Composer*1 Restrict Receiving Device Information Restore Data Restrict Receiving for Each Function Settings/Registration Value Dept. ID Address Book Web Access Favorites*1 Printer Settings Paper Information Workflow Composer*1 Set Paper Information

Setting Description

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management

10-85

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management

Item Communication Log

Limited Functions Mode*1 Finissher Tray A/B/C Finissher Saddle Stitch Unit Folding Unit Finissher Puncher Limit Functions When Security Key is Off*1 Confirm Device Signature Certificate*1 Confirm User Signature Certificate*1 Certificate Settings Generate Key Key Name Signature Algorithm Key Algorithm When RSA isselected When ECDSA is selected Validity Start Date Validity End Date Country/Region State City Organization Organization Unit Common Name Generate/Update Device Signature Key Key and Certificate List Key and Certificate List for Users*1 Certificate Details Delete Key and Certificate List for This Device*1 Certificate Details Delete Display Use Location CA Certificate List Certificate Details Delete

Setting Description

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Details, Print List, Report Settings Report Settings • Auto Print (100 transmissions): On*, Off • Specify Print Time: On, Off* • 00: 00 to 23:59 (00: 00*) • Separate Report Type: On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* On, Off* Limit Partial Functions*, Limit All Functions Certificate Details: Verify Cert. Certificate Details: Verify Cert.

No No

No No

No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No Yes No No

(NULL*) SHA1*, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512 RSA*, ECDSA Key Length (bit): 512*, 1024, 2048, 4096 Key Type: P256*, P384, P521 Month, Date, Year (01/01/2000 - 12/31/2037) : (NULL*) Month, Date, Year (01/01/2000 - 12/31/2037) : (NULL*) Country/Region name and code : United States (US)* (NULL*) (NULL*) (NULL*) (NULL*) IP address of the machine or FQDN (41 characters maximum) (NULL*) Yes, No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert. -

Yes

No

Yes

No

Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert. Key and Certificate

Yes

No

Yes Yes

No No

Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert. -

Yes

No

Yes

No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management

10-86

10-86

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Serial Number, Expires, Verify CRL -

Yes Yes

No No

-

Yes Yes

No No

On*, Off Off Obtain Job Log with Management Software: Allow, Do Not Allow* On, Off* On, Off*

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

Yes Yes

No No

Item Cert. Revocation List (CRL) CRL Details Delete Register Key and Certificate Register Delete Register CA Certificate Register Delete Display Job Status Before Authentication Display Log Save Audit Log Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2

Setting Description

10-87

T-10-24

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management

10-87

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management

10-88

■■License/Other * Default Settings *1

Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use. Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

(NULL*)

No

No

Yes, No On, Off* On*, Off On, Off* On, Off* Yes, No Install Applications/Options, Software Management Settings

No Yes No Yes Yes No Yes

No No Yes No Yes No No

Item Register License MEAP Settings Print System Information Use SSL Remote UI Use SSL Use Reference Print*1 Delete Message Board Contents Register/Update Software

Setting Description

T-10-25

■■Data Management * Default Settings Item HDD Data Complete Deletion Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion Timing of Deletion Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode Initialize All Data/Settings TPM Settings

Setting Description On, Off* During Job*, After Job Once with 0 (Null) Data*, Once with Random Data, 3 Times with Random Data, DoD Standard Once with 0 (Null) Data*, Once with Random Data, 3 Times with Random Data, 9 Times with Random Data, DoD Standard Use TPM: On, Off* Back Up TPM Key (12 characters maximum for password), Restore TPM Key

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

No

No

No

No T-10-26

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management

10-88

10-89

Data

Location

Replace

Delete

Backup by User

User function Replace Replace Replace DC Cont- Reader Replace Initialize the HDD / the Main the Main roller PCB Cont- the TPM All Data/ All format PCB 1 PCB 2 roller PCB Settings PCB

Copy > Change Default Settings > Initialize

Settings/Registration : Function Settings Send > Common Settings > Change Default Settings > Initialize

Send Printer > Fax Settings Settings > Custom > Change Settings > Default Initialize Settings > Initialize

Advanced Box Settings > Delete Personal/ Shared Space > Delete All

Function > Function > Function > Function > Function > Function > Yes/ Method CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR > CLEAR > CLEAR > CLEAR > No > MN> MMI DC-CON R-CON ADRS-BK JV-CASHE CONT

Address List

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

Yes

Forwarding Settings

HDD/ Clear SRAM (MCON2)

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

Yes

Preferences

SRAM (MCON2)

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

Clear *2

-

-

-

Yes *3

Adjustment/ Maintenance

SRAM (MCON2)

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

Yes

Function Settings

SRAM (MCON2/ DCON)

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

Clear

Clear

Clear

Clear

-

-

Clear

Clear

Clear *4

Clear *5

-

-

Yes *6

Set Destination

SRAM (MCON2)

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

Yes

Management Settings

SRAM (MCON2)

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

Yes *7

Printer Settings

SRAM (MCON2)

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

Yes

Set Paper Information

HDD

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Settings / Registration

Clear

Backup by Service

Service function Location to be stored

Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import) Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import)

Yes/No

Method

Location to be stored

Back- Reup store

No

Yes *1

USB memory

-

No

Yes *1

USB memory

-

Yes

Yes *1

Yes

Yes *1

SST, PC Download Menu (HDD/USB) PC

Yes

Yes *1

PC

Yes

Yes *1

PC

Yes

Yes *1

PC

Remote UI PC (Export/Import)

Yes

Yes *1

PC

Yes

Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import)

No

No

-

-

Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import) Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import) Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import) Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import) Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import)

Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox) Favorite Settings

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Yes *8

Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import)

Yes

Yes *9

SST (Meapback)

PC

Default Settings

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

No

-

-

Yes

Yes *10 *11

SST (Meapback)

PC

Shortcut settings for “Options”

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

No

-

-

Yes

Yes *10

SST (Meapback)

PC

Previous Settings

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

No

-

-

Yes

Yes *10

SST (Meapback)

PC

Button Size information HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Yes

Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import)

Yes

Yes *1 *12

SST (Meapback)

PC

Wallpaper Setting

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Yes

Yes

PC

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Yes

SST (Meapback)

PC

Restrict Quick Menu

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Yes

Yes *1 *12 Yes *1 *12 Yes *1 *12

SST (Meapback)

Button information in Quick Menu

Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import) Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import) Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import)

SST (Meapback)

PC

Setting items for Quick Menu

Yes Yes

Setting items for Main Menu

10-89

Appendix > Backup Data

Appendix > Backup Data

Backup Data

10-90 Location

Replace

Delete

Backup by User

Appendix > Backup Data

User function Replace Replace Replace DC Cont- Reader Replace Initialize the HDD / the Main the Main roller PCB Cont- the TPM All Data/ All format PCB 1 PCB 2 roller PCB Settings PCB

Backup by Service

Service function

Copy > Change Default Settings > Initialize

Settings/Registration : Function Settings Send > Common Settings > Change Default Settings > Initialize

Send Printer > Fax Settings Settings > Custom > Change Settings > Default Initialize Settings > Initialize

Advanced Box Settings > Delete Personal/ Shared Space > Delete All

Function > Function > Function > Function > Function > Function > Yes/ Method CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR > CLEAR > CLEAR > CLEAR > No > MN> MMI DC-CON R-CON ADRS-BK JV-CASHE CONT

Location to be stored

Back- Reup store

-

Yes

-

Remote UI (block of Export/Import) Remote UI (block of Export/Import) Remote UI (block of Export/Import) Remote UI (block of Export/Import)

Yes/No

Method

Location to be stored

Yes *1

USB memory

-

Yes

Yes *1

USB memory

-

-

Yes

Yes *1

USB memory

-

-

Yes

Yes *1

USB memory

-

Button settings in Main HDD Menu

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

Yes

Button settings on the top of the screen

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

Yes

Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

Yes

Other settings for Main HDD Menu

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

Yes

User Box specification HDD settings (Register Box Name, Password, Time until Document Auto Erase, Print uponstoring from the printer driver)

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Yes *13

Remote UI (Bacup /Restore)

PC/USB- No HDD

Yes *1

USB memory

-

Image data of User Box, HDD Confidential Fax Box, and System Box Image Data

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

*29

-

-

-

-

-

Yes *13

Remote UI (Bacup /Restore)

PC/USB- No HDD

Yes *1

USB memory

-

Data File of Advanced Box

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

Yes *14

Remote UI (Bacup /Restore)

PC/USB- No HDD *15

Yes

USB memory

-

Advanced box account HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Yes *16

Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import)

Yes

Yes *1 *17

SST (Meapback), USB memory

PC

Network place setting information

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Yes

Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import)

No

Yes *1

USB memory

-

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Yes *13

Remote UI (Bacup /Restore)

No

No

-

-

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Yes *18

Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import)

Yes

Yes *1

SST, PC Download Menu (HDD/USB)

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

No

-

-

Yes

Yes

SST (Meapback)

PC

License files for MEAP HDD applications

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Yes

SMS

PC

Yes

Yes

SST (Meapback)

PC

Box settings

Advanced box settings

Box settings Image forms stored in the Form Composition mode

PC

Web browser settings Web Access setting information

MEAP settings MEAP application

10-90

Appendix > Backup Data

Data

10-91 Location

Replace

Delete

Backup by User

Appendix > Backup Data

User function Replace Replace Replace DC Cont- Reader Replace Initialize the HDD / the Main the Main roller PCB Cont- the TPM All Data/ All format PCB 1 PCB 2 roller PCB Settings PCB

Backup by Service

Service function

Copy > Change Default Settings > Initialize

Settings/Registration : Function Settings Send > Common Settings > Change Default Settings > Initialize

Send Printer > Fax Settings Settings > Custom > Change Settings > Default Initialize Settings > Initialize

Advanced Box Settings > Delete Personal/ Shared Space > Delete All

Function > Function > Function > Function > Function > Function > Yes/ Method CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR > CLEAR > CLEAR > CLEAR > No > MN> MMI DC-CON R-CON ADRS-BK JV-CASHE CONT

Location to be stored

Back- Reup store

Yes/No

Method

Location to be stored

User authentication HDD information registered in the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Yes

SSO-H

PC

Yes

Yes

SST (Meapback)

PC

Data saved using MEAP HDD applications

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Yes *19

-

-

Yes

Yes

SST (Meapback)

PC

SMS (Service Management Service) password of MEAP

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear *20

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

No

-

-

Yes

Yes

SST (Meapback)

PC

Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode)

SRAM Clear (MCON2) HDD

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

No

-

-

No

No

-

-

Job logs

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

No

-

-

No

No

-

-

Key Pair and Server HDD Certificate in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen)

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

No

-

-

No

No

-

-

HDD (SRAM (MCON2)) HDD Clear

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

No

-

-

Yes

Yes

HDD

Universal data settings

Auto Adjust Gradation setting values

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

No

-

-

No

No

SST, PC Download Menu (HDD/USB) -

Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF

SRAM Clear (MCON2) *21

-

Clear *22

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear *22

-

-

Clear *22

-

-

No *23

-

-

No

No

-

-

Key and settings information to be used for encryption when TPM is ON

SRAM Clear (MCON2) *24 HDD TPM Board

-

Clear *25

-

-

Clear

Clear *26

-

-

-

-

-

Clear *25

-

-

Clear *25

-

-

Yes *27

Settings/ USB Registration memory Management Settings > Data Managemnet > TPM Settings

No

No

-

-

Service mode setting values (MN-CON)

SRAM (MCON2)

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

SST, HDD/ Download Menu USB (HDD/USB) *29

Service mode setting values (DC-CON)

SRAM (DC-CON)

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

Yes

Remote UI PC (block of Export/Import) COPIER> OPTION> USER> SMD-EXPT > ON Only *28 PC

Yes

Yes

COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP

PS font

Service Mode

HDD

10-91

Appendix > Backup Data

Data

10-92 Location

Replace

Delete

Backup by User

User function Appendix > Backup Data

Replace Replace Replace DC Cont- Reader Replace Initialize the HDD / the Main the Main roller PCB Cont- the TPM All Data/ All format PCB 1 PCB 2 roller PCB Settings PCB

Backup by Service

Service function

Copy > Change Default Settings > Initialize

Settings/Registration : Function Settings Send > Common Settings > Change Default Settings > Initialize

Send Printer > Fax Settings Settings > Custom > Change Settings > Default Initialize Settings > Initialize

Advanced Box Settings > Delete Personal/ Shared Space > Delete All

Function > Function > Function > Function > Function > Function > Yes/ Method CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR > CLEAR > CLEAR > CLEAR > No > MN> MMI DC-CON R-CON ADRS-BK JV-CASHE CONT

Location to be stored

Back- Reup store

Yes/No

Service mode setting values (R-CON)

EEPROM (R-CON)

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

Yes

-

PC

Yes

Yes

Audit Log

HDD

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

No

-

-

Yes

Yes

Clear

Method

Location to be stored

COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP SST (Meapback)

HDD

PC

T-10-27

*1

If there are the backup data which exported in USB memory, Restore is possible in Download Menu (USB).

*2

The following items are Deleted. Preferences > Paper Settings > Register Envelope Drawer Preferences > Paper Settings > B5/EXEC Paper Selection Preferences > Paper Settings > A5R/STMTR Paper Selection

*3

An exclusion item: Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > [Adjust Time]/[Date/Time Settings]

*4

The following items are Deleted. Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Feed Method Switch The following items are Deleted. Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Scanner Noise Settings Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Timing to Raise Feeder Tray Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Streak Prevention

*5

*6

The following data are impossible of backup Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Register Form Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Common Settings > Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox

*7

The following data are impossible of backup Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page Totals

*8

Backup is available only "Favorite Settings" in "Scan to Send"

*9

:If start-up in download mode in safe mode is available in the event of an HDD failure, it is assumed that MEAP applications can be backed up using SST in some cases. In that case, the data can be recovered with the information of the MEAP applications maintained by checking that the machine starts normally after installation of the system after replacement of the HDD, starting the machine in download mode in safe mode, and restoring the backup data.

*10

:If start-up in download mode in safe mode is available in the event of an HDD failure, it is assumed that MEAP applications can be backed up using SST in some cases. In that case, the data can be recovered with the information of the MEAP applications maintained by checking that the machine starts normally after installation of the system after replacement of the HDD, starting the machine in download mode in safe mode, and restoring the backup data.

*11

If there are the backup data which exported in USB memory except a history, Restore is possible in Download Menu (USB).

*12

:If start-up in download mode in safe mode is available in the event of an HDD failure, it is assumed that MEAP applications can be backed up using SST in some cases. In that case, the data can be recovered with the information of the MEAP applications maintained by checking that the machine starts normally after installation of the system after replacement of the HDD, starting the machine in download mode in safe mode, and restoring the backup data.

*13

Login System Administrator and do backup.

*14

IIt is possible only when logging in as an administrator user. When ON is selected for the authentication management of Advanced Box, Advanced Box account needs to be exported in advance and imported at restoration.

*15

When the optional high-capacity HDD is installed, backup can be done only to USB-HDD.

*16

When ON is selected for the authentication management of Advanced Box, Advanced Box account needs to be exported in advance and imported at restoration.

*17

:If start-up in download mode in safe mode is available in the event of an HDD failure, it is assumed that MEAP applications can be backed up using SST in some cases. In that case, the data can be recovered with the information of the MEAP applications maintained by checking that the machine starts normally after installation of the system after replacement of the HDD, starting the machine in download mode in safe mode, and restoring the backup data.

*18

Only "favorites of web browser" can be backed improves when You perform individual export of RUI.

*19

Only when MEAP applications have a backup function

10-92

Appendix > Backup Data

Data

*20

Since the password is TPM-encrypted and saved, password backed up after all data/settings have been initialized cannot be restored. When all data/settings have been initialized, initialize the password using a switch license for password initialization. [Reference] Since TPM encryption key is updated when all data/settings are initialized, the password which was backed up cannot be read.

*21

If the backup key information in the HDD is missing, it is automatically recovered from the key in the SRAM (MCON2).

*22

If the key information in the SRAM (MCON2) is missing, it is automatically recovered from the backup key in the HDD.

*21,22

When You change Main PCB 2 and HDD at the same time, the automatic restoration of the key information is not performed.

*23

No means is available to back up externally.

*24

An error code is displayed when the TPM setting is “ON”. After all data/settings are initialized after restart, select "ON" for the TPM setting to enable the TPM setting.

*25

If the TPM key information in the SRAM of the HDD or the Main Controller PCB 2 becomes missing, the key information in the SRAM is automatically recovered from the backup of the common key in the HDD. Then the internal state of TPM setting changes to "ON". Note that the TPM setting needs to be manually changed to "ON" since "OFF" is displayed for UI.

*26

TPM settings becomes "OFF" when all data/settings are initialized.

*27

Backup only against TPM PCB failure is possible. In addition, restoration cannot be done to other machines whose TPM setting is set to "ON".

*28

Backup is possible in SramImg, DSRAMBUP, RSRAMBUP. When You set it in COPIER>OPTION>USER>SMD-EXPT>ON, a backup/restore is possible in Service Mode Settings from the Remote UI. There is a backup button on the TOP page of the service mode. HDD and USB memory can back up Service Mode Settings by backup button. The contents of Settings/Registration become the object of the collective backup. The exclusion item refers to "a list of DCM backup exclusion items".

*29

Because clearing MN-CONT changes the memory reception setting to "OFF", the image data saved in the Memory RX Inbox is automatically printed after restart. After a print, it is deleted from a system box.

Appendix > Backup Data

Appendix > Backup Data

10-93

T-10-28

DCM backup exclusion items Preferences

Paper Settings Display Settings

Paper Type Management Settings Register Envelope Drawer Register Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults Erasing the Remaining Toner Error Message

Timer/Energy Settings

Current Time Adjustment

Network

Output Report TCP/IP Settings

IPSec settings IEEE802.1X Settings Accessibility Adjustment/ Maintenance

Adjust Image Quality Adjust Action

Function Settings

Maintenance Common

Printer Send Receive/Forward Store/Access Files Set Destination

Address Lists Register Destinations Register LDAP Server Auto Serarch when using LDAP Server

Firewall Settings Voice Navigation Settings

Custom Type > Details/Edit > Change

IP Address Settings (IPv4) > PING Command IP Address Settings (IPv6) > PING Command IPP Print Settings SSL Settings Confirm Dept. ID PIN

IP Address Block Log Tune Microphone

Auto Adjust Gradation Conect Shading Auto Correct Color Mismatch Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning Change Fold/Stitch Position Paper Feed Settings Print Settings

Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off Local Print Default Settings Form for Superimpose Image Secure Watermark Settings > Adust Background/Character Contrast

Output Report

TX/RX User Data List Fax User Data List Communication Settings

E-Mail/I-Fax Settings Output Report Common Settings Mail Box Settings Advanced Box Settings Network Settings

Forwarding Settings Settings for All Mail Boxes Delete All Personal Spaces

10-93

10-94 Management Settings

User Management

Department ID Management

Device Management

Device Information Delivery Settings

Restrict Receiving Device Information

License/Other

Data Management

Limit Function when Security key is off Certificate Settings Register License MEAP Settings Back Up Restore Back Up/Restore Log Initialize All Data/Settings TPM Settings

Page Totals Print List Manual Delivery Resor Data Communication Log Register Destination > Auto Serch/Registor

Appendix > Backup Data

Appendix > Backup Data

DCM backup exclusion items

Print System Information Remote UI On/Off Delete Massage Board Contents

T-10-29

10-94

10-95

CHK-TYPE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CHK-TYPE Group

Partition name

Four same time

FSTDEV IMG-MNG FSTCDEV THUMDEV APL_GEN TMP_GEN TMP_FAX TMP_PSS PDLDEV BOOTDEV APL_MEAP APL_SEND APL_KEEP APL_LOG CRBDEV APL_CDS

One Three same time

One One One One One One One One

Description

HDD Format Using SST or USB memory

HD-CLEAR Image data storage area (Box etc) Management data of image Image data storage area (for Job archive system) Thumbnail Storage area of universal data (Note: For details, see the following list.) Storage area of universal data (temporary file) FAX (temporary file) PSS (temporary file) PDL-related file storage area (font, registration form, color correction information file for ICCProfile-PDL function) Firmware storage area (Bootable/MEAP/key/certificate/PDF dictionary/RUI contents/voice dictionary (ICC profile. PS test data.)) MEAP Address book, Setting for Forwarding MEAP stored data System log storage area Advanced Box area Area for distribution server

enable

Entering SST menu or USB menu • Select "ALL" All partition format same time. • Select "BOOTDEV" Only BOOTDEV is erased.

enable enable

Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled T-10-30

Selecting "CHK-TYPE1" means selecting four partitions. APL_GEN Details of universal data Category Settings / Registration

Setting items for each menu in Main Menu

Data Preferences Adjustment/Maintenance Function Settings Set Destination Management Settings Printer Settings Paper Information Settings Favorite Settings Default Settings Shortcut settings for “Options” Previous Settings

Category Setting for Advance Box Setting for Web Access Setting for Universal Data

Data User information of Advanced Box Registration information of Network Place Web Access Setting information Unsent document (which is set timer transmission or reservation transmission) Job log information Key and server certificate which are registered in Management Settings>Device Settings>Certificate Setting Auto Adjust Gradation setting values PS font

T-10-31

10-95

Appendix > Detail of HDD partition

Appendix > Detail of HDD partition

Detail of HDD partition

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft counter specifications

Soft Counter List

No.

Soft counter specifications The numbers entered for software counters are classified as follows: No. 000 to 099 100 to 199 200 to 299 300 to 399 400 to 499 500 to 599 600 to 699 700 to 799 800 to 899 900 to 999

Counter Details Remote copy Total Copy Print Copy and print Scan Box Reception print Report print Transmission T-10-32

Meanings of symbols in tables • L: Large size (larger than B4 size) • S: Small size (smaller than B4 size) • S: Small size (smaller than B4 size) It can be changed by the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER > B4_L_CNT) so that the paper larger than B4 size can be counted as large size paper. • Copy: Local copy + remote copy • Copy A: Local copy + remote copy + box print • Print: PDL print + report print + box print • Print A: PDL print + report print • Scan: Black and white scan + color scan

002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 071 072 073 074 081 082 083 084 101 102 103 104 105 106 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116

10-96

Counter Details Remote copy (full color 1) Remote copy (full color 2) Remote copy (mono color 1) Remote copy (mono color 2) Remote copy (black and white 1) Remote copy (black and white 2) Remote copy (full color / large) Remote copy (full color / small) Remote copy (mono color / large) Remote copy (mono color / small) Remote copy (black and white / large) Remote copy(black and white / small) Remote copy (full color + mono color / large) Remote copy(full color + mono color / small) Remote copy (full color + mono color 2) Remote copy(full color + mono color 1) Remote copy (full color / large / double sided) Remote copy (full color / small / double sided) Remote copy (mono color / large / double sided) Remote copy (mono color / small / double sided) Remote copy (black and white / large / double sided) Remote copy (black and white / small / double sided) Toner bottle black Toner bottle yellow Toner bottle magenta Toner bottle cyan Toner bottle black + Remove the toner bottle black Toner bottle yellow + Remove the toner bottle yellow Toner bottle magenta + Remove the toner bottle magenta Toner bottle cyan + Remove the toner bottle cyan Total 1 Total 2 Total(large) Total (small) Total (full color2) Total (full color2) Total (black and white 1) Total (black and white 2) Total (mono color /large) Total (mono color /small) Total (black and white /large) Total (black and white /small) Total 1(double sided) Total 2(double sided) large (double sided)

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft counter specifications

10-96

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft counter specifications

No. 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161

Counter Details small (double sided) Total (mono color 1) Total (mono color 2) Total (full color /large ) Total (full color /small) Total (full color +mono color /large ) Total (full color +mono color /small) Total (full color +mono color 2) Total (full color +mono color 1) Total A1 Total A2 Total A (large) Total A (small) Total A (full color 1) Total A (full color 2) Total A (black and white 1) Total A (black and white 2) Total A (mono color /large) Total A (mono color /small) Total A (black and white /large) Total A (black and white /small) Total A 1(double sided) Total A 2(double sided) large A (double sided) small A (double sided) Total A  (mono color 1) Total A  (mono color 2) Total A  (full color /large ) Total A  (full color /small) Total A  (full color +mono color /large ) Total A  (full color +mono color /small) Total A  (full color +mono color 2) Total A  (full color +mono color 1) Total B1 Total B2 Total B (large) Total B (small) Total B (full color 1) Total B (full color 2) Total B (black and white 1) Total B (black and white 2) Total B (mono color /large) Total B (mono color /small) Total B (black and white /large) Total B (black and white /small)

No. 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237

10-97

Counter Details Total B1 (double sided) Total B2 (double sided) largeB (double sided) smallB (double sided) Total B (mono color 1) Total B (mono color 2) Total B (full color /large ) Total B (full color /small) Total B (full color +mono color /large ) Total B (full color +mono color /small) Total B (full color +mono color 2) Total B (full color +mono color 1) Copy (Total 1) Copy (Total 2) Copy (large) Copy (small) Copy A  (Total 1) Copy A  (Total 2) Copy A  (large) Copy A (small) Local copy (Total 1) Local copy (Total 2) Local copy (large) Local copy (small) Copy (full color 1) Copy (full color 2) Copy (mono color 1) Copy (mono color 2) Copy (black and white 1) Copy (black and white 2) Copy (full color /large) Copy (full color /small) Copy (mono color /large) Copy (mono color /small) Copy (black and white /large) Copy (black and white /small) Copy (full color +mono color /large) Copy (full color +mono color /small) Copy (full color +mono color /2) Copy (full color +mono color /1) Copy (full color /large/double sided ) Copy (full color /small/double sided ) Copy (mono color /large/double sided ) Copy (mono color /small/double sided ) Copy (black and white /large/double sided )

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft counter specifications

10-97

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft counter specifications

No. 238 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294

Counter Details Copy (black and white /small/double sided ) Copy A (full color 1) Copy A (full color 2) Copy A (mono color 1) Copy A (mono color 2) Copy A (black and white 1) Copy A (black and white 2) Copy A (full color /large) Copy A (full color /small) Copy A (mono color /large) Copy A (mono color /small) Copy A (black and white /large) Copy A (black and white /small) Copy A (full color +mono color /large) Copy A (full color +mono color /small) Copy A (full color +mono color 2) Copy A (full color +mono color 1) Copy A (full color /large/double sided ) Copy A (full color /small/double sided ) Copy A (mono color /large/double sided ) Copy A (mono color /small/double sided ) Copy A (black and white /large/double sided ) Copy A (black and white /small/double sided ) Local copy (full color 1) Local copy (full color 2) Local copy (mono color 1) Local copy (mono color 2) Local copy (black and white 1) Local copy (black and white 2) Local copy (full color /large) Local copy (full color /small) Local copy (mono color /large) Local copy (mono color /small) Local copy (black and white /large) Local copy (black and white /small) Local copy (full color +mono color /large) Local copy (full color +mono color /small) Local copy (full color +mono color 2) Local copy (full color +mono color 1) Local copy (full color /large/double sided ) Local copy (full color /small/double sided ) Local copy (mono color /large/double sided ) Local copy (mono color /small/double sided ) Local copy (black and white /large/double sided ) Local copy (black and white /small/double sided )

No. 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345

10-98

Counter Details Print (Total 1) Print (Total 2) Print (large ) Print (small) Print A(Total 1) Print A(Total 2) Print A(large ) Print A(small) Print (full color 1) Print (full color 2) Print (mono color 1) Print (mono color 2) Print (black and white 1) Print (black and white 2) Print (full color /large ) Print (full color /small) Print (mono color /large ) Print (mono color /small) Print (black and white /large ) Print (black and white /small) Print (full color +mono color /large ) Print (full color +mono color /small) Print (full color +mono color /2) Print (full color +mono color /1) Print (full color /large /double sided) Print (full color /small/double sided) Print (mono color /large /double sided) Print (mono color /small/double sided) Print (black and white /large /double sided) Print (black and white /small/double sided) PDLPrint (Total 1) PDLPrint (Total 2) PDLPrint (large ) PDLPrint (small) PDLPrint (full color 1) PDLPrint (full color 2) PDLPrint (mono color 1) PDLPrint (mono color 2) PDLPrint (black and white 1) PDLPrint (black and white 2) PDLPrint (full color /large ) PDLPrint (full color /small) PDLPrint (mono color /large ) PDLPrint (mono color /small) PDLPrint (black and white /large )

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft counter specifications

10-98

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft counter specifications

No. 346 351 352 353 354 355 356 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 601 602 603 604

Counter Details PDLPrint (black and white /small) PDLPrint (full color /large /double sided) PDLPrint (full color /small/double sided) PDLPrint (mono color /large /double sided) PDLPrint (mono color /small/double sided) PDLPrint (black and white /large /double sided) PDLPrint (black and white /small/double sided) Copy + print (full color /large) Copy + print (full color /small) Copy + print (black and white/large) Copy + print (black and white/small) Copy + print (black and white2) Copy + print (black and white1) Copy + print (full color +mono color /large) Copy + print (full color +mono color /small) Copy + print (full color +mono color /2) Copy + print (full color +mono color /1) Copy + print (large) Copy + print (small) Copy + print (2) Copy + print (1) Copy + print (mono color /large) Copy + print (mono color /small) Copy + print (full color /large/double sided) Copy + print (full color /small/double sided) Copy + print (mono color /large/double sided) Copy + print (mono color /small/double sided) Copy + print (black and white/large/double sided) Copy + print (black and white/small/double sided Scan (Total 1) Scan (Total 2) Scan (large) Scan (small ) Black and white Scan (Total 1) Black and white Scan (Total 2) Black and white Scan (large) Black and white Scan (small ) Color scan  (Total 1) Color scan  (Total 2) Color scan  (large) Color scan  (small ) Box print (Total 1) Box print (Total 2) Box print (large) Box print (small)

No. 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 631 632 633 634 635 636 639 640 641 642 645 646 651 652 655 656 701 702 703 704 705 706 709

10-99

Counter Details Box print (full color 1) Box print (full color 2) Box print (mono color 1) Box print (mono color 2) Box print (black and white 1) Box print (black and white 2) Box print (full color /large) Box print (full color /small) Box print (mono color /large) Box print (mono color /small) Box print (black and white /large) Box print (black and white /small) Box print (full color +mono color /large) Box print (full color +mono color /small) Box print (full color +mono color 2) Box print (full color +mono color 1) Box print (full color /large/double sided ) Box print (full color /small/double sided ) Box print (mono color /large/double sided ) Box print (mono color /small/double sided ) Box print (black and white /large/double sided ) Box print (black and white /small/double sided ) memory media print (Total 1) memory media print (Total 2) memory media print(large) memory media print(small) memory media print (full color 1) memory media print (full color 2) memory media print(black and white 1) memory media print(black and white 2) memory media print(full color/large) memory media print(full color/small) memory media print(mono color /large) memory media print(mono color /small) memory media print(full color /large/double sided) memory media print(full color /small/double sided) memory media print(black and white /large/double sided) memory media print(black and white /small/double sided) Reception print (Total 1) Reception print (Total 2) Reception print(large) Reception print(small) Reception print (full color 1) Reception print (full color 2) Reception print(black and white 1)

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft counter specifications

10-99

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft counter specifications

10-100

No. 710 711 712 715 716 721 722 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762

Counter Details Reception print(black and white 2) Reception print(full color/large) Reception print(full color/small) Reception print(mono color /large) Reception print(mono color /small) Reception print(full color /large/double sided) Reception print(full color /small/double sided) Reception print(black and white /large/double sided) Reception print(black and white /small/double sided) Advanced Box Print (Total 1) Advanced Box Print (Total 2) Advanced Box Print(large) Advanced Box Print(small) Advanced Box Print (full color 1) Advanced Box Print (full color 2) Advanced Box Print(black and white 1) Advanced Box Print(black and white 2) Advanced Box Print(full color/large) Advanced Box Print(full color/small) Advanced Box Print(mono color /large) Advanced Box Print(mono color /small) Advanced Box Print(full color /large/double sided) Advanced Box Print(full color /small/double sided) Advanced Box Print(black and white /large/double sided) Advanced Box Print(black and white /small/double sided) Network Print(Total 1) Network Print(Total 2) Network Print(large) Network Print(small) Network Print(full color 1) Network Print(full color 2) Network Print(black and white 1) Network Print(black and white 2) Network Print(full color/large) Network Print(full color/small) Network Print(mono color /large) Network Print(black and white/small) Network Print(full color /large/double sided) Network Print(full color /small/double sided) Network Print(black and white /large/double sided) Network Print(black and white /small/double sided) Mobile Print(Total 1) Mobile Print(Total 2) Mobile Print(large) Mobile Print(small)

No.

Counter Details

763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 801 802 803 804 805 806 809 810 811 812 815 816 821 822 825 826 915 916 917 918 921 922 929 930 937 938 939 940 945 946 959 960 961

Mobile Print(full color 1) Mobile Print(full color 2) Mobile Print(black and white 1) Mobile Print(black and white 2) Mobile Print(full color/large) Mobile Print(full color/small) Mobile Print(black and white /large) Mobile Print(black and white/small) Mobile Print(full color /large/double sided) Mobile Print(full color /small/double sided) Mobile Print(black and white /large/double sided) Mobile Print(black and white /small/double sided) Report print (Total 1) Report print (Total 2) Report print (large ) Report print (small ) Report print (full color 1) Report print (full color 2) Report print (black and white 1) Report print (black and white 2) Report print (full color /large ) Report print (full color /small ) Report print (black and white /large ) Report print (black and white /small ) Report print (full color /large /double sided ) Report print (full color /small /double sided ) Report print (black and white /large /double sided ) Report print (black and white /small /double sided ) Transmission scan total 2(color ) Transmission scan total 2(black and white) Transmission scan total 3(color ) Transmission scan total 3(black and white) Transmission scan total 5(color ) Transmission scan total 5(black and white) Transmission scan total 6(color ) Transmission scan total 6(black and white) Box scan (color ) Box scan (black and white) Remote scan (color ) Remote scan (black and white) Transmission scan / E-mail (color ) Transmission scan / E-mail (black and white) Media Scan (Color) Media Scan (black and white) Application Scan(Total 1)

10-100

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft counter specifications

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft counter specifications

10-101

No. 962 963 964 965

Counter Details Application Black and white Scan(Total 1) Application Color Scan(Total 1) SuperBoxLocal Scan (Color) SuperBoxLocal Scan(Black and white) T-10-33

10-101

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft counter specifications

Appendix > Removal > Removal > Work Procedure

10-102

Removal

■■Work Procedure If the user uses MEAP applications, ask the user to uninstall the MEAP applications if

Removal ■■Overview • User data kept by the machine contains address books and inbox documents that users can recognize. • By using the copy, print, or send function, there is also information left on the HDD of

necessary.

●● User data delete procedure Settings/Registration > System Management > Initialize Select a deletion mode If the user has not given any instruction on which item in the deletion mode should be used, select the default "Once with 0 (Null) Data".

MFPs that is generally not recognizable but can be recovered as documents. (Refer to the illustration on the next page.) • For security, the user mode is provided to delete data on SRAM and perform overwrite deletion to render user data on HDD unrecoverable.

●● User data delete • To delete user data, execute Settings/Registration > System Management > Initialize All Data/Settings in user mode. Performing Initialize All Data/Settings returns user mode setting values to their factory defaults. • Usually, one overwrite is enough. Note that increasing the number of overwrite increases the time required for the deletion operation.

Note: • When you perform Initialize All Data/Settings, license and data of MEAP application are initialized to the state same as when the HDD is replaced. If MEAP application may be used by other users after the machine is removed, disable the MEAP application and uninstall it in advance. • Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option. F-10-36

●●Deletion of Service Mode Settings The user mode setting values may have been changed at the user's request. In that case, the service mode setting values should be changed back to the default values before removing the machine.

Note: • When all the data are initialized, the user data on the HDD and the user data on the SRAM of the Main Controller PCB 2 are deleted. For the items to be deleted, refer to the backup list. • Performing "Initialize All Data" turns auto gradation adjustment values and TPM settings to OFF. Therefore, to enable normal operation the next time, the operation performed at installation is necessary. • Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.

10-102

Appendix > Removal > Removal > Work Procedure

Appendix > Removal > Removal > Work Procedure

10-103

●● Deletion of Service Mode Setting Values Service Mode Lev1 > Function> CLEAR > MN-CONT

F-10-37

Note: When MN-CON clear is executed, the address book on the HDD is not deleted. As for the user data, initialize all the data.

10-103

Appendix > Removal > Removal > Work Procedure